SIP5 7SA-SD-SL-VK-87 V07.00 Manual C011-7 en

Preface
Open Source Software
Table of Contents
SIPROTEC 5 Introduction 1
Distance Protection, Line Basic Structure of the Function 2
Differential Protection, and
Breaker Management for System Functions 3
1-Pole and 3-Pole Trip- Applications 4
ping
Function-Group Types 5
7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87,
7VK87 Protection and Automation Functions 6
Control Functions 7
V7.00 and higher
Supervision Functions 8
Manual
Measured Values, Energy Values, and
Supervision of the Primary System 9
Functional Tests 10
Technical Data 11
Appendix A
Glossary
Index
C53000-G5040-C011-7
NOTE
i For your own safety, observe the warnings and safety instructions contained in this document, if available.
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

This document has been subjected to rigorous technical Copyright Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved.
review before being published. It is revised at regular inter- The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
vals, and any modifications and amendments are included document, or utilization and communication of the content
in the subsequent issues. The content of this document are not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights,
has been compiled for information purposes only. Although including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document utility model or a design, are reserved.
as precise and up-to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall Registered Trademarks
not assume any liability for defects and damage which
SIPROTEC, DIGSI, SIGUARD, SIMEAS, and SICAM
result through use of the information contained herein.
are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthor-
This content does not form part of a contract or of business
ized use is illegal. All other designations in this document
relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
can be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agree-
purposes can infringe the rights of the owner.
ments.
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document
from time to time.
Document version: C53000-G5040-C011-7.01
Edition: 11.2015
Version of the product described: V7.00 and higher
Preface
Purpose of the ManualDocument

This manual describes the protection, automation, control, and supervision functions of the SIPROTEC 5
device functions for distance protection and line differential protection.
This document describes a single protection, automation, control, or supervision function of the SIPROTEC 5
device functions. The document shall thus be considered as part of the main device manual.
Target Audience
Protection system engineers, commissioning engineers, persons entrusted with the setting, testing and main-
tenance of automation, selective protection and control equipment, and operational crew in electrical installa-
tions and power plants.
Scope
This manual applies to the SIPROTEC 5 device family.
Further Documentation
[dwprefdm-221012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Device manuals
Each Device manual describes the functions and applications of a specific SIPROTEC 5 device. The
printed manual and the online help for the device have the same informational structure.
Hardware manual
The Hardware manual describes the hardware building blocks and device combinations of the
SIPROTEC 5 device family.
SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping, 3
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Preface
Operating manual
The Operating manual describes the basic principles and procedures for operating and assembling the
devices of the SIPROTEC 5 range.
Communication protocol manual

The Communication protocol manual contains a description of the protocols for communication within
the SIPROTEC 5 device family and to higher-level network control centers.
Product information
The Product information includes general information about device installation, technical data, limiting
values for input and output modules, and conditions when preparing for operation. This document is
provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device.
Engineering Guide
The Engineering Guide describes the essential steps when engineering with DIGSI 5. In addition, the
Engineering Guide shows you how to load a planned configuration to a SIPROTEC 5 device and update
the functionality of the SIPROTEC 5 device.
DIGSI 5 online help

The DIGSI 5 online help contains a help package for DIGSI 5 and CFC.
The help package for DIGSI 5 includes a description of the basic operation of software, the DIGSI princi-
ples and editors. The help package for CFC includes an introduction to CFC programming, basic exam-
ples of working with CFC, and a reference chapter with all the CFC blocks available for the SIPROTEC 5
range.
SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

The tutorial on the DVD contains brief information about important product features, more detailed infor-
mation about the individual technical areas, as well as operating sequences with tasks based on prac-
tical operation and a brief explanation.
SIPROTEC 5 catalog
The SIPROTEC 5 catalog describes the system features and the devices of SIPROTEC 5.
Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of the Siemens protection devices, and a
device selection table.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communi-
ties on harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC valid until April, 19th of 2016,
EMC Council Directive 2014/30/EU valid from April, 20th of 2016) and concerning
electrical equipment for use within specified voltage limits (Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EG valid until April, 19th of 2016, Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
valid from April, 20th of 2016).
This conformity has been proved by tests performed according to the Council Direc-
tive in accordance with the product standard EN 60255-26 (for EMC directive) and
with the product standard EN 60255-27 (for Low Voltage Directive) by Siemens AG.
The device is designed and manufactured for application in an industrial environ-
ment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the
German standard VDE 0435.
Other Standards
IEEE Std C 37.90
The technical data of the product is approved in accordance with UL.
For more information about the UL database, see www.ul.com
Select Online Certifications Directory and enter E194016 as UL File Number.
4 SIPROTEC 5, Distance Protection, Line Differential Protection, and Breaker Management for 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Preface
IND. CONT. EQ.

69CA
[ul_listed_c_us, 1, --_--]
Additional Support
For questions about the system, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Support
Our Customer Support Center provides a 24-hour service.
Phone: +49 (180) 524-7000
Fax: +49 (180) 524-2471
E-Mail: [email protected]
Training Courses
Inquiries regarding individual training courses should be addressed to our Training Center:
Siemens AG
Siemens Power Academy TD
Humboldtstrae 59
90459 Nrnberg
Germany
Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415

Fax: +49 (911) 433-7929
E-Mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.siemens.com/poweracademy
Notes on Safety
This document is not a complete index of all safety measures required for operation of the equipment
(module or device). However, it comprises important information that must be followed for personal safety, as
well as to avoid material damage. Information is highlighted and illustrated as follows according to the degree
of danger:
! DANGER
DANGER means that death or severe injury will result if the measures specified are not taken.
Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
! WARNING
WARNING means that death or severe injury may result if the measures specified are not taken.
Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid death or severe injuries.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Preface
! CAUTION
CAUTION means that medium-severe or slight injuries can occur if the specified measures are not taken.
Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid moderate or minor injuries.
NOTICE
NOTICE means that property damage can result if the measures specified are not taken.
Comply with all instructions, in order to avoid property damage.
NOTE
i Important information about the product, product handling or a certain section of the documentation which
must be given particular attention.
Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Only qualified electrical engineering personnel may commission and operate the equipment (module, device)
described in this document. Qualified electrical engineering personnel in the sense of this manual are people
who can demonstrate technical qualifications as electrical technicians. These persons may commission,
isolate, ground and label devices, systems and circuits according to the standards of safety engineering.
Proper Use
The equipment (device, module) may be used only for such applications as set out in the catalogs and the
technical description, and only in combination with third-party equipment recommended and approved by
Siemens.
Problem-free and safe operation of the product depends on the following:
Proper transport
Proper storage, setup and installation
Proper operation and maintenance

When electrical equipment is operated, hazardous voltages are inevitably present in certain parts. If proper
action is not taken, death, severe injury or property damage can result:
The equipment must be grounded at the grounding terminal before any connections are made.
All circuit components connected to the power supply may be subject to dangerous voltage.
Hazardous voltages may be present in equipment even after the supply voltage has been disconnected
(capacitors can still be charged).
Operation of equipment with exposed current-transformer circuits is prohibited. Before disconnecting the
equipment, ensure that the current-transformer circuits are short-circuited.
The limiting values stated in the document must not be exceeded. This must also be considered during
testing and commissioning.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Open Source Software
Among other things, this product contains Open Source Software that was developed by third parties. The
Open Source Software included with this product and the relevant Open Source Software license agreement
can be found in Readme_OSS. The Open Source Software program is protected by copyright. You are
permitted to use the Open Source Software according to the Open Source Software license agreement.
Should contradictions occur between the Open Source Software license conditions and the Siemens license
conditions applicable to the product, the Open Source Software license agreement with respect to the Open
Source Software shall prevail. The Open Source Software is provided free of charge. If stipulated by the
Open Source Software license agreement, the source text of the software is available until the end of the third
year after purchasing the product. Shipping charges will apply separately. We are liable for the product
including the Open Source Software according to the license agreement for the product. Any liability arising
from the use of the Open Source Software that exceeds the intended program flow of the product, as well as
liability for defects that were caused by changes made to the Open Source Software, is excluded. If the
product was modified, we cannot provide technical support.
When using DIGSI 5 in online mode, you are provided with the option to go to the main menu Show Open
source information and read and display the Readme_OSS file containing the original license text and copy-
right information.
To do this, the following steps are necessary:
Switch to online mode.
Select the device.
Select online in the menu bar.
Click Show Open source information.
NOTE
i To read the Readme_OSS file, a PDF viewer must be installed on the computer.
In order to operate SIPROTEC 5 devices, a valid DIGSI 5 license is required.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................................3
Open Source Software........................................................................................................................................7
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 37
1.1 General.................................................................................................................................38
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5................................................................................................... 40
2 Basic Structure of the Function.........................................................................................................................41

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ...................................................................................... 42
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope.......................................................49
2.3 Function Control................................................................................................................... 51
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications.................................... 55
3 System Functions............................................................................................................................................. 57
3.1 Indications.............................................................................................................................58
3.1.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 58
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel..................................................... 58
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5............................................................... 59
3.1.4 Displaying Indications .................................................................................................... 60
3.1.5 Log.................................................................................................................................. 63
3.1.5.1 General......................................................................................................................63
3.1.5.2 Operational Log ........................................................................................................64
3.1.5.3 Fault Log................................................................................................................... 66
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log...................................................................................................... 68
3.1.5.5 User Log....................................................................................................................70
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log....................................................................................................71
3.1.5.7 Communication Log.................................................................................................. 73
3.1.5.8 Security Log.............................................................................................................. 75
3.1.5.9 Device-Diagnosis Log............................................................................................... 76
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs......................................................................................... 78
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5.................................................................... 79
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel..........................................80
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device............................................................... 81
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group ...................................................... 84
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology ........... 84
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition ................................................................................................ 85
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes............................................................................................87
3.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................ 87
3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values......................... 89
3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts.................................................91
3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions........................... 95
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
3.4 Fault Recording.................................................................................................................... 99

3.4.1 Overview of Functions ................................................................................................... 99
3.4.2 Structure of the Function.................................................................................................99
3.4.3 Function Description....................................................................................................... 99
3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes.......................................................................................102
3.4.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 103
3.4.6 Information List............................................................................................................. 104
3.5 Protection Communication..................................................................................................105
3.5.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 105
3.5.2 Protection-Communication Structure ........................................................................... 105
3.5.3 Protection Interface and Protection Topology...............................................................106
3.5.3.1 Overview of Functions.............................................................................................106
3.5.3.2 Structure of the Function......................................................................................... 106
3.5.3.3 Function Description................................................................................................107
3.5.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5 ................... 117
3.5.3.5 Device-Combination Settings.................................................................................. 118
3.5.3.6 Selecting the Connection........................................................................................ 120
3.5.3.7 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface .............................................................. 120
3.5.3.8 Routing Information in DIGSI 5............................................................................... 123
3.5.3.9 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection Interface ....................................... 129
3.5.3.10 Diagnostic Data for the Protection Interface............................................................133
3.5.3.11 Settings .................................................................................................................. 138
3.5.3.12 Information List........................................................................................................139
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization..........................................................................................142
3.6.1 Overview of Functions.................................................................................................. 142
3.6.2 Structure of the Function...............................................................................................142
3.6.3 Function Description..................................................................................................... 142
3.6.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 148
3.7 User-Defined Objects......................................................................................................... 150
3.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 150
3.7.2 Basic Data Types..........................................................................................................151
3.7.3 Pulse- and Energy- Metered Values ............................................................................ 153
3.7.4 Additional Data Types...................................................................................................154
3.8 Other Functions.................................................................................................................. 155
3.8.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals.................................................155
3.8.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating...................................................................158
3.8.3 Persistent Commands...................................................................................................161
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions............................ 163
3.9.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 163
3.9.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5............................................................... 163
3.9.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device.......................170
3.10 Device Settings...................................................................................................................171
3.10.1 Settings-Group Switching............................................................................................. 171
3.10.1.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................171
3.10.1.4 Application and Setting Notes................................................................................. 172
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
3.10.1.5 Settings .................................................................................................................. 173

3.10.2 General Device Settings............................................................................................... 173
3.10.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 173
3.10.2.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 176
4 Applications.....................................................................................................................................................177
4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................178
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87....................................... 179
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87....................................... 184
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87........................................ 188
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87....................................... 191
5 Function-Group Types.................................................................................................................................... 193

5.1 Function-Group Type Line.................................................................................................. 194
5.1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 194
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group....................................................................................196
5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line)............................................................................................207
5.1.4.3 Current-Flow Criterion............................................................................................. 209
5.1.4.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion) ......................................... 209
5.1.4.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 210
5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object ................................................ 210
5.1.4.7 Closure Detection ...................................................................................................210
5.1.4.8 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection) ................................................ 212
5.1.4.9 Settings................................................................................................................... 212
5.1.4.10 1-Pole Open Detector .............................................................................................213
5.1.4.11 Application and Setting Notes (1-Pole Open Detector) .......................................... 215
5.1.4.12 Voltage Criterion (Optional) ....................................................................................216
5.1.4.13 Application and Setting Notes (Voltage Criterion) .................................................. 216
5.1.4.14 Settings................................................................................................................... 217
5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) .................................................................. 217
5.1.4.16 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) ................................ 218
5.1.4.17 Settings................................................................................................................... 219
5.1.4.19 Settings................................................................................................................... 219
5.1.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 220
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 3-Phase................................................................. 222
5.2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 222
5.2.2 Structure of the Function Group ...................................................................................222
5.2.3 Application and Setting Notes ......................................................................................226
5.2.4 Write-Protected Settings............................................................................................... 227
5.2.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 227
5.2.7 Process Monitor............................................................................................................ 228
5.2.7.1 Overview of Functions.............................................................................................228
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
5.2.7.3 Current-Flow Criterion............................................................................................. 230

5.2.7.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion) ......................................... 230
5.2.7.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object ................................................ 231
5.2.7.6 Closure Detection ...................................................................................................231
5.2.7.7 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection) ................................................ 232
5.2.7.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional) .................................................................. 233
5.2.7.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection) ................................ 234
5.2.7.10 Settings................................................................................................................... 235
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 1-Phase................................................................. 236
5.3.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 236
5.3.4 Write-Protected Settings .............................................................................................. 238
5.3.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 239
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase.............................................................................. 240
5.4.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 240
5.4.4 Settings......................................................................................................................... 242
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker................................................................................. 243
5.5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 243
5.5.2 Structure of the Function Group ...................................................................................243
5.5.4 Trip Logic...................................................................................................................... 246
5.5.4.1 Function Description ...............................................................................................246
5.5.4.2 Application and Setting Notes ................................................................................ 250
5.5.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 252
5.5.5 Circuit Breaker.............................................................................................................. 252
5.5.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 252
5.5.5.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker ............................................... 252
5.5.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information .............254
5.5.5.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression ........................... 255
5.5.5.5 Tripping and Opening Information ..........................................................................256
5.5.6 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions......... 260
5.5.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 260
5.5.7 Detection of Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor).................................... 261
5.5.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 263
5.5.8 Settings......................................................................................................................... 263
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units.................................................................................... 265
5.6.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 265
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................... 267

5.6.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 267
5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function ........................................................................................ 267
5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet ............................................................. 268
5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel....................................................................................................... 269
5.6.3.7 Settings .................................................................................................................. 273
5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial..........................................................................................................274
5.6.4.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 274
5.6.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 276
5.6.5 Communication with the 20-mA Unit.............................................................................277
5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit .......................................................................... 277
5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet ......................................................................280
5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs...........................................................282
5.6.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 282
5.6.6.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 288
5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet.........................................................................................................290
5.6.7.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 290
5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit .......................................................................... 291
5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor .............................................................................................. 293
5.6.7.7 Settings................................................................................................................... 294
5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial............................................................................................................ 295
5.6.8.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 295
5.6.8.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 296
5.6.9 Communication with the RTD Unit................................................................................296
5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200) .................................................... 296
5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD-Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP) .................................................. 299
5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors .............................................................. 301
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group..........................................................302
5.7.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................... 302
5.7.2 Basic Data Types..........................................................................................................303
5.7.3 Pulse- and Energy- Metered Values ............................................................................ 305
5.7.4 Additional Data Types...................................................................................................306
6 Protection and Automation Functions............................................................................................................. 307

6.1 Power-System Data............................................................................................................309
6.1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................... 309
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data............................................................................ 309
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes General Settings ....................................................... 309
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)..............310
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)................313
6.1.6 Application and Setting Instructions for Line Differential Protection Settings .............. 316
6.1.7 Settings......................................................................................................................... 320
6.2 Line Differential Protection..................................................................................................329
6.2.4 Application and Setting Instructions - General Settings................................................336
6.2.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 337
6.2.7 IDiff Stage..................................................................................................................... 338
6.2.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 338
6.2.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Idiff Stage ....................................................340
6.2.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 341
6.2.8 IDiff Fast Stage............................................................................................................. 343
6.2.8.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 343
6.2.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Idiff Fast Stage ............................................345
6.2.8.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 346
6.2.9 Pickup and Tripping...................................................................................................... 346
6.2.9.1 Pickup Logic ........................................................................................................... 346
6.2.9.2 Trip Logic ................................................................................................................347
6.2.9.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic ....................................... 348
6.2.10 Remote Tripping........................................................................................................... 348
6.2.10.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 348
6.2.11 Function Check of the Line Differential Protection .......................................................348
6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection ........................................................351
6.2.13 Transformer in the Protection Range............................................................................353
6.2.13.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 353
6.2.13.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 355
6.2.14 Charging-Current Compensation.................................................................................. 356
6.2.14.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 356
6.2.14.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 358
6.3 Stub Differential Protection.................................................................................................359
6.3.2 Structure of the Function ..............................................................................................359
6.3.4 Stubdif Stage Description ............................................................................................ 363
6.3.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stubdif Stage .................................................... 364
6.3.6 Stubdif Fast Stage Description .................................................................................... 365
6.3.7 Application and Setting Notes for the Stubdif Fast Stage ............................................ 367
6.3.8 Stage Description of the Output Logic ......................................................................... 367
6.3.9 Settings......................................................................................................................... 367
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection.................................................................................... 369

6.4.1 Overview of Functions ................................................................................................. 369
6.4.3 Function Description .................................................................................................... 370
6.4.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 385
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD).......................................................... 387
6.5.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings.........................................................389
6.5.4 Settings......................................................................................................................... 392
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection .............................................................................................. 393
6.5.7 Direction Determination................................................................................................ 394
6.5.8 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve............................................................... 400
6.5.8.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 400
6.5.8.2 Impedance Calculation............................................................................................402
6.5.8.4 Settings................................................................................................................... 413
6.5.9 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve........................................................................... 415
6.5.9.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 415
6.5.9.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 421
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection....................................................................... 422
6.5.11 Application Example..................................................................................................... 423
6.5.11.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 423
6.5.11.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data................................................................. 424
6.5.11.3 Setting Notes General Parameters in the Line Function Group........................... 424
6.5.11.4 Setting Notes General Parameters in the RMD Function.....................................425
6.5.11.5 Setting Instructions Zone Z1 to Z4.......................................................................... 429
6.5.12 Settings......................................................................................................................... 432
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method............................................................................442
6.6.2 Distance Protection for Grounded Systems..................................................................442
6.6.2.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings................................................... 446
6.6.2.4 Settings................................................................................................................... 450
6.6.3 Distance Protection for Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems....................................455
6.6.3.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings .................................................. 461
6.6.3.4 Settings................................................................................................................... 464
6.6.4 Direction Determination ............................................................................................... 469
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.6.5 Pickup Method: Impedance Pickup...............................................................................473

6.6.5.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 473
6.6.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 477
6.6.6 Pickup Method: Overcurrent Pickup............................................................................. 478
6.6.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 478
6.6.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 479
6.6.7 Pickup Method: V/I Pickup............................................................................................ 480
6.6.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 480
6.6.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 484
6.6.8 Pickup Method: V/I/ Pickup.........................................................................................484
6.6.8.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 484
6.6.8.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 489
6.6.9 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve............................................................... 491
6.6.9.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 491
6.6.9.2 Impedance Calculation ...........................................................................................493
6.6.9.4 Settings................................................................................................................... 500
6.6.10 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve........................................................................... 502
6.6.10.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 502
6.6.10.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 510
6.6.11 Release of Tripping through the AREC Zone............................................................... 511
6.6.11.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 511
6.6.11.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 514
6.6.12 Output Logic of the Distance Protection....................................................................... 514
6.6.13 Application Example: High-Voltage Overhead Line...................................................... 515
6.6.13.1 Overview................................................................................................................. 515
6.6.13.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ................................................................ 516
6.6.13.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line ................................................................... 520
6.6.13.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems General Settings..522
6.6.13.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ..............................................................................524
6.6.13.6 Setting Instructions for Zone Z1 ............................................................................. 526
6.6.13.7 Setting Notes for Zone Z1B.....................................................................................531
6.6.13.8 Setting Instructions for Zone Z3 ............................................................................. 533
6.6.13.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 ...................................................................................... 534
6.7 Impedance Protection.........................................................................................................537
6.7.3 Description.................................................................................................................... 537
6.7.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 552
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking........................................................................................................554

6.8.3 Function Description .................................................................................................... 554
6.8.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 558
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection............................................................................. 559
6.9.2 Structure of Function ....................................................................................................559
6.9.3 Receipt Blocks ............................................................................................................. 560
6.9.4 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip........................................................................... 563
6.9.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 563
6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Intertrip Process, General ........................... 565
6.9.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
via an Extended Measuring Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching
and Grading-Time Shortening) ...............................................................................566
6.9.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
via Pickup (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Remote Tripping
with Release) ..........................................................................................................566
6.9.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Intertrip Process ............................... 567
6.9.4.6 Settings................................................................................................................... 568
6.9.5 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip............................................................................. 569
6.9.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 569
6.9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Permissive Schemes, General ..........................572
6.9.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
Scheme (Distance Protection with Overreaching and Release) ............................ 573
6.9.5.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method ................. 574
6.9.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direction Unblocking Process
(Distance Protection with Overreaching and Unblocking) ...................................... 575
6.9.5.6 Settings................................................................................................................... 576
6.9.6 Blocking Method........................................................................................................... 578
6.9.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 578
6.9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Procedure .....................................580
6.9.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 581
6.9.7 Reverse Interlocking..................................................................................................... 583
6.9.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 583
6.9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Reverse Interlocking ......................................... 584
6.9.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 585
6.9.8 Transient Blocking........................................................................................................ 586
6.9.8.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 586
6.9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking ............................................ 587
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems......... 588
6.10.3 Stage Control................................................................................................................ 589
6.10.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve............................................................. 591
6.10.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 591
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.10.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 596

6.10.5 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection According to IEC and ANSI..............601
6.10.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 601
6.10.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 607
6.10.6 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse Char-
acteristic Curve............................................................................................................. 610
6.10.6.1 Beschreibung.......................................................................................................... 610
6.10.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 612
6.10.7 Stage with S0 Characteristic Curve.............................................................................. 615
6.10.7.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 615
6.10.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 617
6.10.8 Stage with U0 Characteristic Curve.............................................................................. 619
6.10.8.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 619
6.10.8.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 624
6.10.9.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 625
6.10.10 Phase Selection ........................................................................................................... 633
6.10.11 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection.......................... 634
6.10.11.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 634
6.10.12 Signal Transmission .....................................................................................................635
6.10.13 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings...................................................... 635
6.10.13.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 635
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection...................................................................... 640
6.11.3 Receipt Blocks ............................................................................................................. 641
6.11.4 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip............................................................................. 644
6.11.4.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 644
6.11.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Comparison Procedures .. 646
6.11.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method ................. 646
6.11.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Unblocking Method ................... 647
6.11.4.5 Settings................................................................................................................... 648
6.11.5 Blocking Method........................................................................................................... 650
6.11.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 650
6.11.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Method ......................................... 652
6.11.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 653
6.11.6 Transient Blocking........................................................................................................ 654
6.11.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 654
6.11.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking ............................................ 655
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.11.7 Sensitive Measuring Stage of Ground-Fault Protection................................................655

6.11.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 655
6.11.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault
Protection ............................................................................................................... 656
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed................................................................. 658
6.12.3 Echo Function .............................................................................................................. 659
6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function) ..................................................................... 662
6.12.6 Settings......................................................................................................................... 664
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification.......................... 666
6.13.1 Function Overview........................................................................................................ 666
6.13.3 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection................................................................................... 667
6.13.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 667
6.13.4 Instantaneous Stage..................................................................................................... 669
6.13.4.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 669
6.13.5 Delayed Stage.............................................................................................................. 671
6.13.5.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 671
6.13.6 Settings......................................................................................................................... 673
6.14 External Trip Initiation.........................................................................................................675
6.14.3 Stage Description .........................................................................................................676
6.14.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 677
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function............................................................................................ 678
6.15.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions .............. 680
6.15.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function............................................................................682
6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function ................................... 682
6.15.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function ............................................685
6.15.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping .......................................................687
6.15.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup .........................................................688
6.15.4.5 Start ........................................................................................................................688
6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time ................ 690
6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time ................... 691
6.15.4.8 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time ........... 693
6.15.4.9 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time ..............694
6.15.4.10 Stage Release ........................................................................................................695
6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping........................................................696
6.15.4.12 Dead time for operating modes with pickup ........................................................... 698
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time..................................................... 700
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command ................................................................ 702

6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time ......................................................................................................... 704
6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition ..................................... 705
6.15.4.17 Blockings................................................................................................................. 707
6.15.4.18 1-/3-pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker ................................................................ 710
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) ..................................... 711
6.15.4.20 Settings................................................................................................................... 713
6.15.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)...................................717
6.15.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 717
6.15.5.2 Settings .................................................................................................................. 718
6.15.6 Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function................................................ 720
6.15.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 720
6.15.7 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings .....................................................722
6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function ....................................................................................................................... 728
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases..........................................................................................732
6.16.3.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 733
6.16.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 737
6.16.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve..............................................................744
6.16.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 744
6.16.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 749
6.16.5 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve............................................................. 752
6.16.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 752
6.16.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 754
6.16.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 757
6.16.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 758
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground..........................................................................................763
6.17.3 General Functionality.................................................................................................... 764
6.17.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 764
6.17.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 766
6.17.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 767
6.17.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 772
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents

6.17.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 778
6.17.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 783
6.17.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 786
6.17.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 788
6.17.7.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 791
6.17.8.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 792
6.17.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage) .................................................. 796
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................................798
6.18.3 Stage Control................................................................................................................ 799
6.18.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 799
6.18.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 801
6.18.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 805
6.18.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 811
6.18.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 816
6.18.6.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 819
6.18.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 821
6.18.7.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 824
6.18.8 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings ..................................................... 828
6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends .......... 828
6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection ............................................ 829
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping..................................................................................831
6.19.3 Standard Release Procedure........................................................................................832
6.19.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface ................................................................ 834
6.19.7 Settings......................................................................................................................... 836
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions......................................................838

6.20.1 Description ................................................................................................................... 838
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase........................................................................................ 839
6.21.1 Function Overview ....................................................................................................... 839
6.21.3.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 841
6.21.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 843
6.21.4.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 845
6.21.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 847
6.21.5.1 Description ............................................................................................................. 848
6.21.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 850
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases..........................................................852
6.22.3 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent......................... 853
6.22.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 853
6.22.4 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released........................... 857
6.22.4.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 857
6.22.5 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-in ..................... 859
6.22.5.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 859
6.22.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 861
6.22.6 Stage with Voltage-Released Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Under-
voltage Seal-in ............................................................................................................. 863
6.22.6.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 863
6.22.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 866
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.......................................................................................868
6.23.3 General Functionality.................................................................................................... 870
6.23.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 870
6.23.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 873
6.23.4 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage.................................................. 874
6.23.4.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 874
6.23.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 878
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.23.5 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with cos or sin Measurement................879

6.23.5.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 879
6.23.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 887
6.23.6 Usage Information for Detection of Intermittent Ground Faults.................................... 888
6.23.7 Transient Ground-Fault Stage...................................................................................... 889
6.23.7.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 889
6.23.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 895
6.23.8 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with 3I0-(V,I) Measurement.......................896
6.23.8.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 896
6.23.8.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 900
6.23.9 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement....................... 902
6.23.9.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 902
6.23.9.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 910
6.23.10 Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with 3I0...............................................................911
6.23.10.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 911
6.23.10.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 914
6.23.11 Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with Y0............................................................... 915
6.23.11.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 915
6.23.11.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 918
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection.........................................................919
6.24.3 Stage Description..........................................................................................................920
6.24.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 926
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection................................................................ 928
6.25.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 937
6.26 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay............ 939
6.26.4 Application and Setting Notes for Direction Determination .......................................... 944
6.26.5 Application and Setting Notes for Stages .................................................................... 945
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.26.6 Settings......................................................................................................................... 947

6.27 Undercurrent Protection......................................................................................................949
6.27.3 Stage Description Undercurrent Protection ................................................................. 950
6.27.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 952
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................... 954
6.28.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 955
6.28.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 957
6.28.4.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 959
6.28.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 963
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage....................................................965
6.29.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 967
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage.................................................. 969
6.30.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 972
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding..................... 974
6.31.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 977
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage............................ 979
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.32.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 984

6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage........................................................................... 985
6.33.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 988
6.34 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................. 990
6.34.3.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 991
6.34.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 996
6.34.4.1 Description.............................................................................................................. 998
6.34.4.2 Application and Setting Notes............................................................................... 1002
6.34.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1005
6.34.4.4 Information List......................................................................................................1005
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage............................................... 1006
6.35.1 Overview of Functions ............................................................................................... 1006
6.35.2 Structure of the Function.............................................................................................1006
6.35.3 Stage Description........................................................................................................1007
6.35.4 Application and Setting Notes.....................................................................................1008
6.35.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1011
6.35.6 Information List........................................................................................................... 1011
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage....................................................................... 1013
6.36.1 Overview of Functions................................................................................................ 1013
6.36.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1017
6.37 Fault Locator.....................................................................................................................1019
6.37.2 Structure of the Function ............................................................................................1019
6.37.3 Function Description................................................................................................... 1019
6.37.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1022
6.38 Overfrequency Protection.................................................................................................1024
6.38.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage ................................................................................1025
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.38.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1027

6.39 Underfrequency Protection...............................................................................................1029
6.39.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage ..............................................................................1030
6.39.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1032
6.40 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................. 1035
6.40.3 Rate of Frequency Change Protection (Undervoltage Check, df/dt Calculation)........1035
6.40.3.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1035
6.40.4.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1037
6.40.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1039
6.41 Phase-Rotation Reversal..................................................................................................1041
6.41.4 Application and Setting Notes ....................................................................................1044
6.41.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1045
6.42 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault.....................................................................1046
6.42.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1048
6.43 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase............................................................................ 1049
6.43.3 Function Description .................................................................................................. 1050
6.43.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1058
6.44 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase............................................................................ 1060
6.44.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1068
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.44.6 Information.................................................................................................................. 1069

6.45 Temperature Supervision................................................................................................. 1070
6.45.3 Function Description .................................................................................................. 1071
6.45.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1072
6.46 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.....................................................................................1080
6.46.1 Overview of Function.................................................................................................. 1080
6.46.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1095
6.46.6 Information ................................................................................................................. 1096
6.47 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection.................................................................................. 1097
6.47.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1104
6.48 Out-of-Step Protection...................................................................................................... 1106
6.48.3 Description of a Zone..................................................................................................1106
6.48.4 Application and Setting Notes (System Protection).................................................... 1112
6.48.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1121
6.49 Inrush-Current Detection.................................................................................................. 1124
6.49.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1129
6.50 General Power Protection 3-Phase.................................................................................. 1131
6.50.3 Active Power Stage ....................................................................................................1132
6.50.4 Reactive Power Stage ............................................................................................... 1134
6.50.5 Application Example................................................................................................... 1135
6.50.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage...................................................................1136
6.50.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage...............................................................1137
6.50.8 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1138
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
6.51 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection....................................................... 1141

6.51.3 Description of the Protection Stage............................................................................ 1142
6.51.3.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1142
6.51.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1145
6.51.4 Description of the Reclosure Stage............................................................................ 1147
6.51.4.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1147
6.51.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1149
6.52 Current-Jump Detection....................................................................................................1150
6.52.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1152
6.53 Voltage-Jump Detection................................................................................................... 1153
6.53.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1155
6.54 Arc Protection................................................................................................................... 1157
6.54.4 Application and Setting Notes General Settings...................................................... 1160
6.54.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage............................................................... 1161
6.54.6 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1162
6.54.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Operating Mode: Light Only.................. 1164
6.54.8.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1164
6.54.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Operating Mode: Light and Current.......1167
6.54.9.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1167
6.54.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation........................... 1169
6.54.10.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1169
6.54.10.2 Application and Setting Notes for Variant 1 (without Feedback to Feeder
Protection Devices)............................................................................................... 1171
6.54.10.3 Application and Setting Notes for Variant 2 (with Feedback to Feeder
Protection Devices)............................................................................................... 1172
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection...................................................................................1176
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents

7 Control Functions..........................................................................................................................................1179
7.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................1180
7.1.1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 1180
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables ............................................................................................1180
7.2 Switching Devices.............................................................................................................1183
7.2.1 General Overview....................................................................................................... 1183
7.2.2 Switching Devices.......................................................................................................1183
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device................................................ 1183
7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker........................................................... 1189
7.2.2.4 Settings................................................................................................................. 1197
7.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device...................................................................................1200
7.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device................................................... 1200
7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector.....................................................................1205
7.2.3.4 Settings................................................................................................................. 1207
7.3 Switching Sequences....................................................................................................... 1209
7.3.4 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1214
7.4 Control Functionality......................................................................................................... 1216
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection........................................ 1216
7.4.2 Command Logging .....................................................................................................1232
7.4.3 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1236
7.5 Synchronization Function................................................................................................. 1238
7.5.3 Connection and Definition ..........................................................................................1238
7.5.4 General Functionality.................................................................................................. 1241
7.5.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching ......................................................................... 1245
7.5.6 Sequence of Functions............................................................................................... 1248
7.5.7 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Stage Type ...............................................1250
7.5.8 Closing Conditions for the Synchronous/Asynchronous Stage Type..........................1251
7.5.9 Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations)............................................1255
7.5.10 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar.........................................................................1256
7.5.11 Direct Close Command ..............................................................................................1258
7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering .......1258
7.5.13 Application and Setting Notes (General).....................................................................1260
7.5.14 Application and Setting Notes (Synchrocheck) ..........................................................1263
7.5.15 Application and Setting Notes (Synchronous/Asynchronous Closure) ...................... 1263
7.5.16 Application and Setting Notes (De-Energized Switching/Direct Close Command).....1265
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
7.5.17 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1266

7.5.19 External Synchronization............................................................................................ 1271
7.5.20 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)..........................................1273
7.5.21 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1273
7.5.22 Information.................................................................................................................. 1274
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]............................................................................. 1275
7.6.4 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1276
7.7 Transformer Tap Changers.............................................................................................. 1277
7.7.3 Settings (Properties Dialog)........................................................................................ 1285
7.7.4 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1286
7.8 Voltage Controller.............................................................................................................1288
7.8.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1314
7.8.6 Information.................................................................................................................. 1323
8 Supervision Functions...................................................................................................................................1329
8.1 Overview...........................................................................................................................1330
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision................................................................................ 1331
8.2.1 Load Model................................................................................................................. 1331
8.2.2 Function Points........................................................................................................... 1333
8.2.3 CFC Resources.......................................................................................................... 1333
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System..............................................................................1336
8.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 1336
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure..........................................................................................1336
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions...........................................................................................1336
8.3.2.2 Structure of the Function ...................................................................................... 1337
8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure ............................................................... 1338
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure .....................................................................1339
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load ........................1340
8.3.2.7 Settings................................................................................................................. 1343
8.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision.................................................................................... 1343
8.3.3.2 Structure of the Function....................................................................................... 1344
8.3.3.3 Function Description..............................................................................................1344
8.3.3.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1347
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker.......................................................................... 1348

8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions ..........................................................................................1348
8.3.4.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1350
8.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection................................................................................................1350
8.3.5.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1353
8.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision...................................................................................... 1354
8.3.6.4 Application and Setting Notes .............................................................................. 1356
8.3.6.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1356
8.3.7 Voltage-Balance Supervision......................................................................................1357
8.3.7.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1359
8.3.8 Current-Sum Supervision............................................................................................1359
8.3.8.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1362
8.3.9 Voltage-Sum Supervision........................................................................................... 1363
8.3.9.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1365
8.3.10 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision.......................................................................... 1365
8.3.10.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1367
8.3.11 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision.......................................................................... 1367
8.3.11.5 Settings................................................................................................................. 1369
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision...............................................................................................1369

8.3.12.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs.........................................................1369
8.3.12.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input.......................................................... 1371
8.3.12.6 Settings................................................................................................................. 1374
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware................................................................................ 1376
8.4.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 1376
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum................................................... 1377
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware....................................................................................... 1381
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration............................................................................ 1382
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections.................................................................... 1383
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures......................................................................1384
8.8.1 Overview..................................................................................................................... 1384
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 ........................................................................................................1385
8.8.3 Defect Severity 2.........................................................................................................1388
8.8.4 Defect Severity 3.........................................................................................................1389
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm).................................................................................1390
8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts................................................................ 1391
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System................................................ 1393
9.1 Overview of Functions...................................................................................................... 1394
9.2 Structure of the Function.................................................................................................. 1395
9.3 Operational Measured Values ......................................................................................... 1397
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components ...................................................................1399
9.5 Average Values................................................................................................................ 1400
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values.....................................................................1400
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values..................................................... 1400
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values...............................................................................................1403
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values................................................... 1403
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values................................... 1404
9.7 Energy Values.................................................................................................................. 1405
9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values ......................................................................1405
9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values....................................................... 1406
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values.......................................................................................... 1408
9.8.1 Pulse-Metered Values Function Description...............................................................1408
9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values........................................... 1409
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System.......................................................................... 1412
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU).....................................................................................1413
9.10.2 Structure of the Function Group..................................................................................1413
9.10.4 Transmitted Data ....................................................................................................... 1418
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
9.10.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)........................................................................1418

9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI...........................................................................1419
9.10.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device......................................................................1426
9.10.9 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1429
9.11 Measuring Transducers.................................................................................................... 1432
9.11.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1436
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring...................................................................................... 1439
9.12.3 General Functionality.................................................................................................. 1440
9.12.3.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1440
9.12.3.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1442
9.12.4 Stage Description Ix Method..................................................................................... 1443
9.12.4.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1443
9.12.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1445
9.12.5 Stage Description 2P Procedure.................................................................................1446
9.12.5.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1446
9.12.5.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1450
9.12.6 Stage Description I2t Method...................................................................................... 1451
9.12.6.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1451
9.12.6.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1452
9.12.7 Stage Description Supervision CB Make Time........................................................... 1453
9.12.7.1 Description............................................................................................................ 1453
9.12.7.3 Settings................................................................................................................. 1454
10 Functional Tests............................................................................................................................................1457
10.1 General Notes...................................................................................................................1458
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) ..................... 1459
10.3 Controlling the Protection-Data Communication...............................................................1460
10.4 Functional Test of Protection Communication.................................................................. 1462
10.4.1 Controlling the Protection-Data Communication.........................................................1462
10.4.2 Directional Test .......................................................................................................... 1463
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displace-
ment Voltage ....................................................................................................................1464
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection ......................... 1465
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test .........................................................................................................1468
10.8 Out-of-step Protection Function Test ...............................................................................1471
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection ..............................................................1472
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision ................................................................1473
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test ........................................................................... 1474
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal............................................................. 1475
10.13 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems.....................................1476
10.14 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function.................................... 1477
11 Technical Data.............................................................................................................................................. 1481

11.1 General Device Data........................................................................................................ 1484
11.1.1 Analog Inputs.............................................................................................................. 1484
11.1.2 Supply Voltage............................................................................................................1486
11.1.3 Binary Inputs............................................................................................................... 1487
11.1.4 Relay Outputs............................................................................................................. 1488
11.1.5 Design Data................................................................................................................ 1490
11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology...................................................................1493
11.3 Date and Time Synchronization........................................................................................1495
11.4 Line Differential Protection................................................................................................1496
11.5 Stub Differential Protection ..............................................................................................1498
11.6 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)........................................................ 1499
11.7 Distance Protection with the Classical Method ................................................................1501
11.8 Impedance Protection.......................................................................................................1504
11.9 Power-Swing Blocking .....................................................................................................1506
11.10 Teleprotection with Distance Protection .......................................................................... 1507
11.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection ................................................................... 1508
11.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed .............................................................. 1509
11.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification........................ 1510
11.14 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems....... 1511
11.15 External Trip Initiation ......................................................................................................1516
11.16 Automatic Reclosing ........................................................................................................1517
11.17 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases ................................................................ 1518
11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases .................................................................1519
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-defined Characteristic Curve ........................ 1526
11.20 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground ................................................................ 1528
11.21 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground .................................................................1530
11.22 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve ....................... 1538
11.23 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases ........................................................... 1540
11.24 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping................................................................................1543
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection) ..... 1544
11.26 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection) ............. 1546
11.27 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic Curve ...................... 1548
11.28 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases........................................................1550
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
11.29 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.....................................................................................1552

11.29.1 General....................................................................................................................... 1552
11.29.2 Overvoltage Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence System/Residual Voltage ..........1553
11.29.3 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with cos or sin Measurement..............1553
11.29.4 Transient Ground-Fault Stage.................................................................................... 1554
11.29.5 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with 3I0-(V,I) Measurement.....................1554
11.29.6 Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with 3I0.............................................................1555
11.30 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection.......................................................1557
11.31 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection.............................................................. 1559
11.32 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay............................... 1561
11.33 Undercurrent Protection....................................................................................................1562
11.34 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage.................................................................. 1564
11.35 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage .................................................1566
11.36 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage ............................................... 1567
11.37 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding .................. 1568
11.38 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage ......................... 1569
11.39 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage......................................................................... 1570
11.40 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage................................................................ 1572
11.41 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage............................................... 1574
11.42 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage ...................................................................... 1575
11.43 Fault Locator.....................................................................................................................1577
11.44 Overfrequency Protection.................................................................................................1578
11.45 Underfrequency Protection...............................................................................................1579
11.46 Rate of Frequency Change Protection............................................................................. 1580
11.47 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault ....................................................................1581
11.48 Thermal Overload Protection............................................................................................1582
11.49 Analog-Units Function Group........................................................................................... 1585
11.50 Temperature Supervision................................................................................................. 1586
11.51 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection.....................................................................................1587
11.52 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection.................................................................................. 1589
11.53 Out-of-Step Protection .....................................................................................................1590
11.54 Inrush-Current Detection.................................................................................................. 1591
11.55 3-Phase Power Protection (P,Q)...................................................................................... 1592
11.56 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection....................................................... 1593
11.57 Current-Jump Detection....................................................................................................1595
11.58 Voltage-Jump Detection .................................................................................................. 1596
11.59 Arc Protection................................................................................................................... 1597
11.60 Synchronization Function................................................................................................. 1598
11.61 Voltage Controller.............................................................................................................1600
11.62 Broken-Wire Detection .....................................................................................................1602
11.63 Current-Balance Supervision............................................................................................1603
11.64 Voltage-Balance Supervision ...........................................................................................1604
11.65 Current-Sum Supervision................................................................................................. 1605
11.66 Voltage-Sum Supervision ................................................................................................ 1606
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table of Contents
11.67 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision ............................................................................... 1607

11.68 Voltage Phase-Rotation Reversal ....................................................................................1608
11.69 Trip-Circuit Supervision.................................................................................................... 1609
11.70 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ........................................................ 1610
11.71 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection............................................................................... 1611
11.72 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker ............................................................................... 1612
11.73 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values.......................................................1613
11.74 Energy Values ................................................................................................................. 1617
11.75 Phasor Measurement Unit ............................................................................................... 1618
11.76 Measuring Transducers ................................................................................................... 1619
11.77 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring ..................................................................................... 1620
11.78 CFC.................................................................................................................................. 1621
A Appendix....................................................................................................................................................... 1625
A.1 Order Options and Accessories........................................................................................1626
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions............................................................................. 1628
A.3 Standard Variants for 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87 .....................................................1631
A.4 Phase Current-Transformer Requirements...................................................................... 1640
A.5 Connection Examples for Current Transformers ............................................................. 1649
A.6 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers.............................................................. 1656
A.7 Connection Examples for Special Applications ............................................................... 1662
A.8 Preroutings for 7SL87 (Basis) ..........................................................................................1663
A.9 Preroutings for 7SL87 (1 1/2 Circuit Breakers) ................................................................1665
Glossary........................................................................................................................................................1669
Index............................................................................................................................................................. 1685
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
1 Introduction
1.1 General 38
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5 40
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.1 General
1.1 General
The digital multifunctional protection and bay controllers of the SIPROTEC 5 device series are equipped with
a powerful microprocessor. As a result, all tasks, from acquiring measurands to entering commands in the
circuit breaker, are processed digitally.
Analog Inputs
The measuring inputs transform the currents and voltages sent by the instrument transformers and adapt
them to the internal processing level of the device. A SIPROTEC 5 device has a current transformer and,
depending on the device type, a voltage transformer. The current inputs are therefore intended for the detec-
tion of phase currents and ground current. The ground current can be detected sensitively using a core
balance current transformer. In addition, phase currents can be detected very sensitively for a particularly
precise measurement. The voltage inputs detect the measuring voltage of device functions requiring current
and voltage measured values.
The analog values are digitized in the internal microcomputer for data processing.
Microcomputer System
All device functions are processed in the microcomputer system.
This includes, for example:
Filtering and preparation of the measurands
Constant monitoring of the measurands
Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions
Querying of limiting values and time-outs
Controlling of signals for the logic functions
Decision about the trip and close commands
Storage of indications, fault data, and fault values for fault analysis
Administration of the operating system and its functions, such as data storage, real-time clock, communi-
cation, interfaces, etc.
External distribution of information
Binary Inputs and Outputs

Using the binary inputs and outputs, the device receives information from the system or from other devices
(such as locking commands). The most important outputs include the commands to the switching devices and
the indications for remote signaling of important events and states.
Front Elements
For devices with an integrated or offset operation panel, LEDs and an LC display on the front provide infor-
mation on the device function and report events, states, and measured values. In conjunction with the LC
display, the integrated keypad enables on-site operation of the device. All device information such as setting
parameters, operating and fault indications or measured values can be displayed, and setting parameters
changed. In addition, system equipment can be controlled via the user interface of the device.
Serial Interfaces
The serial interface in the front cover enables communication with a personal computer when using the DIGSI
operating program. As a result, the operation of all device functions is possible. Additional interfaces on the
back are used to realize various communication protocols.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.1 General
Power Supply
The individual functional units of the device are powered by an internal power supply. Brief interruptions in the
supply voltage, which can occur during short circuits in the system auxiliary voltage supply are generally
bridged by capacitor storage (see also the Technical Data).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Introduction
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5
1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

The SIPROTEC 5 devices at the bay level are compact and can be installed directly in medium and high-
voltage switchgear. They are characterized by comprehensive integration of protection and control functions.
General Properties
Powerful multiprocessor
Fully digital measured-value processing and control, from sampling and digitizing of measurands to
closing and tripping decisions for the circuit breaker
Complete galvanic and interference-free isolation of the internal processing switches from the system
measuring, control, and supply circuits through instrument transformers, binary input and output
modules, and DC and AC voltage converters
Easy operation using an integrated operator and display panel, or using a connected personal computer
with user interface
Continuous display of measured and metered values at the front
Storage of min/max measured values (slave pointer function) and storage of long-term average values
Storage of fault indications for system incidents (faults in system) with real-time assignment and instan-
taneous values for fault recording
Continuous monitoring of the measurands as well as the device hardware and software
Communication with central control and storage devices possible via the device interface
Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock
Modular Concept
The SIPROTEC 5 modular concept ensures the consistency and integrity of all functionalities across the
entire device series. Significant features here include:
Modular system design in hardware, software, and communication
Functional integration of various applications, such as protection, control, and fault recorder
The same expansion and communication modules for all devices in the family
Innovative terminal technology with easy assembly and interchangeability and the highest possible
degree of safety
The same functions can be configured individually across the entire family of devices
Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries
Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions
Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain
Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults
Automatic logging of access attempts and safety-critical operations on the devices and systems
Redundant Communication
SIPROTEC 5 devices maintain complete communication redundancy:
Multiple redundant communication interfaces
Redundant and independent protocols to control centers possible (such as IEC 60870-5-103 and
IEC 61850, either single or redundant)
Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B, SNTP, or IEEE 1588)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
2 Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device 42

2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope 49
2.3 Function Control 51
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications 55
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Basic Structure of the Function
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device

General
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer great flexibility in the handling of functions. Functions can be individually loaded
into the device. Additionally, it is possible to copy functions within a device or between devices. The neces-
sary integration of functions in the device is illustrated by the following example.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
EXAMPLE
A 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout of the 7SA86 distance protection device serves as an example. The following
protection functions are required for implementation (simplified and reduced):
Distance protection (21)
Overcurrent protection, phases (51)
Circuit-breaker failure protection (50BF), for circuit breakers 1 and 2
Basic functionality (handling of tripping, etc.)
Several predefined function packages that are tailored to specific applications exist for each device family. A
predefined functional scope is called an application template. The existing application templates are offered
for selection automatically when you create a new device in DIGSI 5.
EXAMPLE
When creating the device in DIGSI 5, you must select the appropriate application template. In the example,
select the application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout. This appli-
cation template covers the required functional scope. Selecting this application template determines the
preconfigured functional scope. This can be changed as necessary (see Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Applica-
tion Templates/Functional Scope).
Function Groups (FG)

Functions are arranged in function groups. This simplifies handling of functions (adding and copying). The
function groups are assigned to primary objects, such as a line, transformer, or circuit breaker.
The function groups bundle functions with regard to the following basic tasks:
Assignment of functions to current and/or voltage transformers (assignment of functions to the meas-
uring points and thus to the protected object)
Exchange of information between function groups

When a function is copied into a function group, it automatically works with the measuring points assigned to
the function group. Their output signals are also automatically included in the configured interfaces of the
function group.
EXAMPLE
The selected application template DIS overhead line, grounded systems, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
comprises 3 function groups:
Protection function group Line 1
Circuit-breaker function group QA 1
Circuit-breaker function group QA 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following figure shows the embedding of functions via function groups.
[dweifkfg-021012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-1 Embedding the Functions via Function Groups
Depending on the type of device, there are different types of function groups:
Protection function groups
Circuit-breaker function groups
Protection function groups bundle functions that are assigned to one protected object for example, to the
linethe transformer. Depending on the device type and nature of the protected object, there are different types
of protection function groups (line, voltage/current 3-phase, transformer, motor, generator, etc.).
Circuit-breaker function groups bundle functions assigned to the local switches for example, circuit breakers
and disconnectors (such as processing of tripping, circuit-breaker failure protection, automatic reclosing).
The number and type of function groups differ in the respective application templates, depending on the type
of the device and application. You can add, copy, or even delete function groups for a specific application.
You can also adapt the functional scope within a function group according to the use case. Detailed informa-
tion on this can be found under DIGSI 5 online help.
Interface Between Function Group and Measuring Point

The function groups receive the measurands of the current and voltage transformers from measuring points.
For this, the function groups are connected to one or more measuring points.
The number of measuring points and the assignment of function groups to the measuring points are preset by
the selected application template in accordance with the specific application. Therefore, this specifies which
measuring point(s) and the corresponding measurands have to be used by which function within the function
group.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE
The measuring points are assigned to the function groups in the application template in Figure 2-1 as follows:
The protection function group Line is assigned to the measuring points I-3ph 1, I-3ph 2 and V-3ph 1. The
function group therefore receives the measured values from current transformers 1 and 2 and from
voltage transformer 1. The currents of measuring points I-3ph 1 and I-3ph 2 are added geometrically for
feeder-related processing.
The circuit-breaker function group QA1 is assigned to the measuring point I-3ph 1 and receives the
measured values from current transformer 1.
The circuit-breaker function group QA2 is assigned to measuring point I-3ph 2 and receives the meas-
ured values from current transformer 2.
The user can change the assignment as needed, that is, function groups can be assigned to any available
measuring points of the device.
To check or change the assignment of measuring points to the function groups, double-click Function-group
connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-2 Project Tree in DIGSI 5 (Detail)
The window for routing of the measuring points opens in the working area (see the following Figure, does not
correspond to the example).
[scmscofg-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-3 Connecting Measuring Points and Function Groups
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Interface Between Protection and Circuit-Breaker Function Groups

The protection function group(s) is/are connected to one or several circuit-breaker function groups. This
connection generally determines:
Which circuit breaker(s) is/are started by the protection functions of the protection FG.
Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected protection function group
Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Further information on this is included later
in the section. Figure 2-6 shows how to reach the detail configuration. Figure 2-7 shows the possible assign-
ments in detail.
These definitions are also set appropriately for the specific application by the selected application template.
EXAMPLE
The linkage of the function group in the example shown in Figure 2-1 is as follows:
The protection function group Line is linked to both circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2.
This means that an operate indication in the Distance protection function generates a trip command in both
circuit-breaker function groups and thus controls both circuit breakers. The function Circuit-breaker failure
protection of both circuit-breaker function groups QA1 and QA2 is also started if these are configured.
The user can change this linkage as needed, that is, protection function groups can be freely assigned to any
circuit-breaker function groups.
To check or change the allocation of the protection function groups to the circuit-breaker function groups,
double-click Function group connections in the DIGSI 5 project tree Name of device (see following figure).
[scfgverb-190214-01, 1, en_US]
The window for general routing of the function groups opens in the working area (see following figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scfgcols-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-5 Connection of Protection Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Besides the general assignment of the protection function group(s) to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for specific functionalities in detail. Proceed as follows:
Open the SIPROTEC 5 device folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
Open the function settings folder in the DIGSI 5 project tree.
Open the respective protection function group in the DIGSI 5 project tree, for example, Line 1 (see the
following figure)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[sclsinta-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Double-click Circuit-breaker interaction (see Figure 2-6)
The window for detailed configuration of the interface between the protection function group and the
circuit-breaker function group(s) opens in the working area.
In this view, configure the interface via the context menu (right mouse button), see Figure 2-7.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scdetail-220211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-7 Detail Configuration of the Interface Between the Protection Function Group and the Circuit-
Breaker Function Group(s)
In the detail configuration of the interface, you define:

Which operate indications of the protection functions go into the generation of the trip command
Which protection functions start the automatic reclosing function
Which protection functions block the automatic reclosing function
Which protection functions start the circuit-breaker failure protection function
Functions (FN), Tripping Stages/Function Blocks (FB)

As already illustrated in Figure 2-1, functions are assigned to the protected objects or other primary objects
via function groups.
Functions can be further subdivided. For example, protection functions often consist of multiple protection
stages (for example, the overcurrent-protection function). Other functions can contain one or more function
blocks. Thus, the distance protection, for example, offers different zone types and power-swing blocking.
EXAMPLE
In Figure 2-1 you can see that the function Overcurrent protection, phases (51) has 3 stages. The number of
zones of the function Distance protection is not shown.
Each stage, each function block, and each function (without stages/function blocks) can be individually
switched into specific operating modes (for example, switch on/off). This is termed function control and is
explained in Chapter 2.3 Function Control.
To adjust the functionality to the specific application, functions, tripping stages, and function blocks can be
added, copied, and deleted (see Chapter 2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
2.2 Adjustment of Application Templates/Functional Scope

Application Template
The application template defines the preconfigured functional scope of the device for a specific use case. A
certain number of application templates is predefined for each device type. DIGSI 5 automatically offers the
application templates for selection when a new device is installed. The available application templates with
the respective functional scope are described in more detail in Chapter 4.
The selection of the application template first predefines which function groups and functions are present in
the device (see also Figure 2-1 in Chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).
You can adjust the functional scope to your specific application.
Adjusting the Functional Scope

Adjust the functional scope based on the selected application template. You can add, copy or delete func-
tions, tripping stages, function blocks, or complete function groups.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, this can be done via the following Editors:
Single-line configuration
Information routing
Function settings
Siemens recommends the Single-line configuration Editor to adjust the functional scope.
Complete missing functionalities from the Global DIGSI 5 Library. Then, the default settings of the added
functionality are active. You can copy within a device and between devices as well. Settings and routings are
also copied when you copy functionalities.
NOTE
i If you delete a parameterized function group, function, or level from the device, all settings and routings
will be lost. The function group, function, or tripping stage can be added again, but then the default
settings are active.
In most cases, the adjustment of the functional scope consists of adding and deleting functions, tripping
stages, and function blocks. As previously described, the functions, tripping stages, and function blocks auto-
matically connect themselves to the measuring points assigned to the function group.
In few cases, it may be necessary to add a protection or circuit-breaker function group. These newly added
function groups do not contain (protection) functions. You must individually load the (protection) functions for
your specific application. You must also connect the protection or circuit-breaker function group to one or
more measuring points (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ). You must connect newly added
protection function groups to a circuit-breaker function group (see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device ).
Functions, tripping stages, function blocks, and function groups can be added up to a certain maximum
number. The maximum number can be found in the respective function and function-group descriptions.
Function Points
Function points (FP) are assigned to specific functions, but not to other functions. Further information can be
found in the description of application templates, in the chapter 4 Applications.
The device is supplied with the acquired function-point credit. Functions with function points can be loaded
into the device only within the available function-point credit. The functional scope cannot be loaded into the
device if the required number of points of the functional scope is higher than the function-point credit. You
must either delete functions or upgrade the function-point credit of the device.
No function points are required to add additional stages in functions.
Extending the Function-Point Credit

You can reorder function points if the function-point credit for the device is not enough.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Proceed as follows:
Determine the function point requirement of certain functions, for example, with DIGSI 5 or the
SIPROTEC 5 Configurator.
Order the additional function points from your local distributor or at http://www.energy.siemens.com.
Siemens will provide you with a signed license file for your device, either via e-mail or for downloading.
Use DIGSI 5 to load the signed license file into your device. The procedure is described in the Online
Help of DIGSI 5.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
2.3 Function Control

Function control is used for:
Functions that do not contain stages or function blocks
Stages within functions
Function blocks within functions
NOTE
i Simplifying Functions and Function control will be discussed in the following. The description also applies
to tripping stage control and function block control.
Functions can be switched to different operating modes. You use the parameter Mode to define whether you
want a function to run (On) or not (Off). In addition, you can temporarily block a function or switch it into test
mode for the purpose of commissioning (parameter Mode = Test).
The function shows the current status such as an Alarm via the Health signal.
The following explains the different operating modes and mechanisms and how you set the functions into
these modes. The function control is shown in Figure 2-8. It is standardized for all functions. Therefore, this
control is not discussed further in the individual function descriptions.
[losteurg-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-8 General Control of a Function
State Control
You can control the state of a function via the parameter Mode and the input Superordinate state.
You set the specified operating state of the function via the parameter Mode. The function mode can be set to
On, Off, and Test. The operating principle is described in Table 2-2. You can set the parameter Mode via:
DIGSI 5
On-site operation at the device
Certain systems control protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103)

The possibility to adjust the superordinate state is limited. For test purposes, the complete device can set into
test mode.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The state of the function resulting from the parameter Mode and the superordinate state is shown in the
following table.
Table 2-1 Resulting State of the Function (from Linkage of Parameter Mode and Superordinate State)
Inputs Function State

Mode Parameter (of the function) Superordinate State
Off (any) Off
(any) Off Off
On On On
On Test Test
Test On Test
Test Test Test
The following table shows the possible function states:
Table 2-2 Possible Function States
Function State Explanation

On The function is activated and operating as defined. The prerequisite is that the health of the
function is OK.
Off The function is turned off. It does not create any information. The health of a disabled func-
tion always has the value OK.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Function State Explanation

Test The function is set to test mode. This state supports the commissioning. All outgoing infor-
mation from the function (indications and, if present, measured values) is provided with a
test bit. This test bit significantly influences the further processing of the information,
depending on the target.
For instance, among other things, it is possible to implement the functionality Blocking of the
command relay known from SIPROTEC 4.
Target of the Information Processing
Log The indications are provided with the identification Test in the
log.
Contact An indication routed to contact is not triggering the contact.
Light-emitting diode (LED) An indication routed to the LED triggers the LED (normal
processing)
CFC Here, the behavior depends on the state of the CFC chart.
CFC chart itself is not in test state:
The CFC chart is not triggered by a status change of infor-
mation with a set test bit. The initial state of the information
(state before test bit was set) is not processed during
execution of the CFC chart.
CFC chart itself is in test state:
The CFC chart continues to process the information (indi-
cation or measured value) normally. The CFC outgoing
information is provided with a test bit. The definitions in this
table apply to its continued processing.
A CFC chart can be set to the test state only by switching the
entire device to test mode.
Protocol Indication and measured value are transmitted with set test bit,
provided that the protocol supports this functionality.
If an object is transmitted as a GOOSE message, the test bit is
set spontaneously and the GOOSE message is transmitted
immediately. The receiver of the GOOSE message is automati-
cally notified of transmitter test mode.
If an object is transmitted via the protection interface, the test bit
is not transmitted. The Test state must also be transmitted as
information for this state to be taken into account in the applica-
tion on the receiver end. You must route the Test signal in the
DIGSI 5 project tree Device Communication routing.
The test mode of the differential protection will be dealt with
separately in the application.
Health
Health signals if a selected function can perform its designated functionality. If so, the health is OK. In case
the functionality is only possible in a limited way or not at all, due to state or problems within the device, the
health will signal Warning (limited functionality) or Alarm (no functionality).
Internal self-supervision can cause the functions to assume the health Alarm (see chapter 8 Supervision
Functions). If a function assumes the health state Alarm, it is no longer active (indication not active is
generated).
Only a few functions can signal the health state Warning. The health state Warning results from function-
specific supervision and - where it occurs - it is explained in the function description. If a function assumes the
Warning status, it will remain active, that is, the function can continue to work in a conditional manner and
trip in the case of a protection function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Not Active
The indication Not active signals that a function is currently not working. The indication Not active is
active in the following cases:
Function is switched off
The function is in the health state Alarm
Function is blocked by an input signal (see Figure 2-8)
Blocking of the Operate Indication, No Fault Recording at Pickup

You use the parameter Blk. Op. Ind. & Fault Rec. to define whether a function works as a protec-
tion or supervision function. Further, you use this to determine the type and scope of the logging (see
following table)
Parameter Value Description
No The function works as a protection function. It generates an operate indication
and starts fault recording with pickup. During fault recording, a fault is created
and logged as a fault record in the fault log.
Yes The function works as a supervision function. The logic runs normally, but
without creating the operate indication. The time-out indication is still generated
and can be processed further if necessary. No fault recording starts with
pickup.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
2.4 Text Structure and Reference Number for Settings and Indications
Each parameter and each indication has a unique reference number within every SIPROTEC 5 device. The
reference number gives you a clear reference, for example, between an indication entry in the buffer of the
device and the corresponding description in the manual. You can find the reference numbers in this docu-
ment, for example, in the application and setting notes, in the logic diagrams, and in the parameter and infor-
mation lists.
In order to form explicit texts and reference numbers, each function group, function, function block/stage, and
indication or parameter has a text and a number. This means that structured overall texts and numbers are
created.
The structure of the texts and the reference numbers follow the hierarchy already shown in Figure 2-1
Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Indication
Function group:Function:Stage/Function Block:Parameter
The colon serves as a structure element to separate the hierarchy levels. Depending on the functionality, not
all hierarchy levels are always available. Function Group and Stage/Function block are optional. Since the
function groups, functions as well as tripping stages/function blocks of the same type can be created multiple
times, a so-called instance number is added to these elements.
EXAMPLE
The structure of the text and reference number is shown in the protection-function group Line as an of
example of the parameter Threshold value and the indication Pickup of the 2nd definite time-overcur-
rent protection stage of the function Overcurrent protection, phases (see Figure 2-9). Only one function and
one function group exist in the device. The representation of the stage is simplified.
[lostuumz-180311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 2-9 Stage of the Overcurrent Protection Function, Phases (without Representation of Stage
Control)
The following table shows the texts and numbers of the hierarchy elements concerned:
Name Number of the Type Instance Number
Protection function group Line 2 1
Function Overcurrent 3ph 20 1
Stage Definite time-overcurrent 66 2
protection
Settings Threshold value 3
Indication Pickup 55
The instance numbers result from the following:

Function group: Line 1
1 Instance, because only one Line function group exists in the device
Function: Overcurrent 3ph 1

1 instance, because only one Overcurrent 3ph function exists in the Line function group
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Stage: Definite time-overcurrent protection 2

2 instances, because 2 definite time-overcurrent protection stages exist in the Overcurrent 3ph function
(here the 2nd instance as an example)
This results in the following texts and numbers (including the instance numbers):
Parameter: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite time-overcurrent protec- 21:201:662:3
tion 2:Threshold value
Indication: Number
Line 1:Overcurrent 3-ph 1:Definite time-overcurrent protec- 21:201:662:55
tion 2:Pickup
The structure is simplified accordingly for parameters and indications with fewer hierarchy levels.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
3 System Functions
3.1 Indications 58
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition 85
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes 87
3.4 Fault Recording 99
3.5 Protection Communication 105
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization 142
3.7 User-Defined Objects 150
3.8 Other Functions 155
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions 163
3.10 Device Settings 171
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1 Indications
3.1.1 General
During operation, indications deliver information about operational states. These include:
Measured data
Power-system data
Device supervisions
Device functions
Function procedures during testing and commissioning of the device

In addition, indications give an overview of important fault events after a failure in the system. All indications
are furnished with a time stamp at the time of of their occurrence.
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. The following number of
indications are saved at least in the respective buffer (depending on the scope of the indications):
Ground-fault log 100 indications
Fault log 1000 indications
User-defined log 200 indications
Operational log 2000 indications

If the maximum capacity of the user-defined log or of the operational is exhausted, the oldest entries disap-
pear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault log or of the ground-fault log is reached,
the number of the last fault is issued via the signal Fault log is full. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded
data are securely held by means of battery buffering or storage in the flash memory. You can read and
analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device display and navigation using keys allow you to read
and analyze the logs on site.
Indications can be output spontaneously via the communication interfaces of the device and through external
demand via general interrogation. In DIGSI 5 indications can be tracked spontaneously in online operation in
a special indication window. Indications can be made accessible to higher-level control systems through
mapping on various communication protocols.
NOTE
i All indications are assigned to certain device functions. The text of each indication contains the corre-
sponding function designation. You will find explanations of the meaning of indications in the corre-
sponding device functions. However, you can also define indications yourself and group them into your
own function blocks. These can be set by binary inputs or CFC logic.
Reading Indications
To read the indications of your SIPROTEC 5 device you can use the on-site operation panel of the device or
a PC on which you have installed DIGSI 5. The subsequent section describes the general procedure.
3.1.2 Reading Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel
Procedure
The menus of the logs begin with a header and 2 numbers at the top right corner of the display. The number
after the slash signifies the number of indications that are available. The number before the slash indicates
how many indications have just been selected or shown. The end of the indication list is closed with the entry
***END***.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-1
On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indica-
tions)
Menu Path Log

Main menu Indications Operational log
Fault log
Ground-fault log
Setting changes
User indications 1
User indications 2
Main menu Test & Diagnosis Indications Security indications
Device diagnosis
Communication indications
To reach the desired log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Navigate inside the log using the navigation keys (top/bottom). You will find the most current indication
at the top of the list. The selected indication is shown with a dark background.
Which indications can be shown in the selected log depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 informa-
tion routing matrix or is pre-defined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
Every indication contains date, time and its state as additional information.
In some logs you are given the option of deleting the entire indication list by softkey in the footer of the
display. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
NOTE
i No password entry is necessary to read indications from the device.
3.1.3 Reading Indications from the PC with DIGSI 5
Procedure
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project Device Process data Log Operational log
Fault log
Ground-fault log
Setting changes
User indications 1
User indications 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Menu Path (Project) Log

Project Device Device information Log Security indication
Device diagnosis
Communication indications
To read the indications with DIGSI 5 your PC must be connected via the USB user interface of the on-
site operation panel or via an Ethernet interface of the device. A direct connection to your PC can be
established via the Ethernet interfaces. It is also possible to access all connected SIPROTEC 5 devices
via a data network from your DIGSI 5 PC.
To reach the desired logs of the SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. If you have not set
up the device within a project, you can also attain this via Online access.
After selecting the desired log, you are shown the last state of the log loaded from the device. To
update, it is necessary to synchronize with the log in the device.
To execute a synchronization with the logs, click the respective button in the headline of the log (see
example of ground-fault log in Figure 3-2 a)).
[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-2 DIGSI 5 Display of an Indication List (Example of Ground-Fault Log)
You will find additional information about the deletion and saving of logs in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and
Deleting the Logs.
To determine a relative time for all other indications, you can reference the display of log entries, if
needed, to the real time of a certain entry. The real-time stamps of events remain unaffected.
For this purpose click the respective button in the headline of the log (see example of ground-fault log in
Figure 3-2 a)).
Setting Relative Time Reference

Which indications in the selected log can be displayed depends on the assignments in the DIGSI 5 infor-
mation routing matrix or is predefined. You will find information about this in chapter 3.1.5.1 General.
3.1.4 Displaying Indications
Displayed indications in DIGSI 5 and on the on-site operation panel are supplemented with the following infor-
mation:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Table 3-1 Overview of Additional Information
Indications in DIGSI 5 Information Device Display Information

Log for operational indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
and log for user-defined indica- Relative time, Value
tions Increasing entry number,
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause
log for fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Error number,
Error number, Value
Increasing entry number,
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause
Log for ground-fault indications Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
Relative time, Error number,
Error number, Value
Increasing entry number,
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause
Spontaneous indication window Time stamp (date and time), Time stamp (date and time),
(DIGSI 5) Error number, Error number,
Increasing entry number, Value
Value,
Indication number,
Quality,
Cause
DIGSI 5: Quality Indication Column
Quality Meaning
Good Indication is valid
Invalid Indication is invalid
DIGSI 5: Additional Information Indication Column

The entries in the column for additional information are in the format Cause/Originator/Additional Cause:
Cause What was the cause?
Originator Who was the originator?
Additional cause Supplementary notes
Cause Meaning
Data change Value change in an indication
Data update Update of notification value
General interrogation General interrogation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Cause Meaning
Cyclic Cyclical general inquiry
Quality change Change of the notification quality
Initiator Meaning
Bay Control local
Substation Control via the substation
Remote control Control via the network control center
Field (auto) Control local via automatic function
Station (auto) Control via the station via automatic function
Distance (auto) Control via the network control center via automatic
function
Maintenance Maintenance
Process Device operation (normal)
Additional Cause Meaning

Switching authority test failed Switching authority check failed
Selection failed Selection failed
invalid position invalid position
Position attained Position attained
Settings change running Settings change running
Final position attained Final position attained
Impermissible mode Impermissible mode
Blocking through process Blocking by the process
Interlocked Interlocked
Synchrocheck failed Synchrocheck failed
Command already running Command already running
Not ready Not ready
1 out of N control failed 1 out of N control failed
Command cancellation Command cancellation
Monitoring time expired Monitoring time expired
Cancellation due to trip command Cancellation due to trip command
Object not selected Object not selected
No access right. No access right
Final position exceeded Final position exceeded
Target value not attained Target value not attained
Loss of connection Loss of connection
Unknown Unknown
Blocking through command Blocking through command
Object already selected Object already selected
Inconsistent parameter(s) Inconsistent parameter(s)
Blocked by foreign access Blocked by foreign access
Select time-out Select time-out
CB not open Circuit breaker not open
Communication is interrupted Communication is interrupted
Topology not stable Topology not stable
FLO in process Fault locator in processing
Testing line diff prot Testing line differential protection
Trigger command active Trigger command active
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Additional Cause Meaning

Close command active Close command active
Blocked through protection Blocked through protection
Fault occurred Fault occurred
CB not closed Circuit breaker not closed
CB not ready Circuit breaker not ready
CB not open Circuit breaker not open
Close command active Close command active
CB check running Circuit breaker check running
3.1.5 Log
3.1.5.1 General
Indications are saved in logs inside the device and are available for later analyses. Different logs allow cate-
gorization of indication logging based on operating states (for example, operational and fault logs) and based
on fields of application.
Table 3-2 Log Overview
Log Logging
Operational log Operational indications
Fault log Fault indications
Ground-fault log Ground-fault indications
Setting-history log Setting changes
User-defined log User-defined indication scope
Security log Access with safety relevance
Device-diagnosis log Error of the device (software, hardware) and the connection circuits
Communication log Status of communication interfaces
Motor-startup log Information on the motor startup
Managing Logs
Logs have a ring structure and are automatically managed. If the maximum capacity of a log is exhausted,
the oldest entries disappear before the newest entries. If the maximum capacity of the fault or ground-fault log
is reached, the number of the last fault is generated via the signal Fault log is full. You can route this signal in
the information routing. If indications in the information routing of DIGSI 5 are routed to a log, then they are
also saved. During a supply-voltage failure, recorded data are securely held by means of battery buffering or
storage in the flash memory. You can read and analyze the log from the device with DIGSI 5. The device
display and the navigation allow you to read and evaluate the logs on site using keys.
Configurability of Logs
The indication capacity to be recorded in configurable logs (for example, ground-fault log) is laid down in
columns of the information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5 specifically defined for this purpose.
Procedure
To reach the information routing of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window. Access is
only through the project:
Project Device Information routing
Select the associated routing column in the matrix from:

Target Log Column ground-fault log
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
The routing of the selected indication is done via right click. Select one of the options in the list box
shown:
Routed (X)
Unrouted
[scinfpuf-191012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-3 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: Ground-Fault Log)
For non-configurable logs (for example, setting-history logs) scope and type of logged indications are
described separately (see following chapter about logs).
3.1.5.2 Operational Log

Operational indications are information that the device generates during operation. This includes information
about:
State of device functions
Measured data
Power-system data
Exceeding or dropping below limiting values is output as an operational indication. Short circuits in the
network are indicated as an operational indication Fault with sequential fault number. For detailed information
about the recording of system incidents, please refer to the description of the fault log (chapter 3.1.5.3 Fault
Log ). Up to 2000 indications can be stored in the log.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5
To reach the operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Process Data Log Operational log
The status of the operational log last loaded from the device is shown to you. To update (synchroniza-
tion with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indication list ( Figure 3-4 a)).
[scbetrmd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-4 Reading the Operational Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device Through the On-Site Operation Panel
To reach the operational log via the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu Indications Operational log
You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site
operation panel.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-5
On-Site Display of an Indication List (Example: Operational Indica-
tions)
Deletability
The operational log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. This is done usually after testing or commis-
sioning the device. To know more about this, read chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs .
Configurability
The indication scope of the operational log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target Log Operational log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library bring with them a predefined set of operational
indications which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.3 Fault Log

Fault indications are events which arise during a fault. They are logged in the fault log with real-time stamp
and relative-time stamp (reference point: fault occurrence) . Faults are numbered consecutively in rising
order. With fault recording engaged, a corresponding fault record with the same number exists for every fault
logged in the fault log. A maximum of 128 fault logs can be stored. A maximum of 1000 indications can be
recorded in each fault log.
Fault Definition
In general, a fault is started by the raising pickup of a protection function and ends with the cleared pickup
after the trip command.
When using an automatic reclosing function, the complete reclosing cycle (successful or unsuccessful) is
preferably integrated into the fault. If evolving faults appear within reclosing cycles, the entire clearing process
is logged under one fault number even in multiple pickup cycles. Without automatic reclosing function every
pickup is also recorded as its own fault.
User-defined configuration of a fault is also possible.
NOTE
i The definition of the fault is done through settings of the fault recording (see Device manual). Events are
logged in the fault log even when fault recording is switched off.
Apart from the recording of fault indications in the fault log, spontaneous display of fault indications of the last
fault on the device display is also done. You will find details about this in chapter 3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault
Display on the On-Site Operation Panel.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
To reach the fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Process Data Log Fault logs
The status of the fault log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Read log entries in the headline of the indi-
cation list.
[scstflmd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-6 Reading the Fault Log with DIGSI 5
Deletability
The fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read about it in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and Deleting
the Logs.
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel
To reach the fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu Indications Fault logs
operation panel.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-7
Reading the Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the Device
Configurability
The indication scope of the fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information routing
(matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target Log Fault log column
Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Equipment Manual) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is every 180 ms).
However, this can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the analog channels.
The recording of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing processes.
3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log

Ground-fault indications are events which arise during a ground fault. They are logged in the ground-fault log
with real-time stamp and relative-time stamp (reference point: ground-fault occurrence) . Ground faults are
numbered consecutively in rising order. A maximum of 10 ground-fault logs are stored and for each ground-
fault log, it is guaranteed that at least 100 indications are recorded.
The following functions can start the logging of a ground fault with the raising ground-fault indication:
Directional sensitive ground-fault protection for deleted and isolated systems (67Ns)
Sensitive ground current protection with I0 (50Ns/51Ns)
Intermittent ground-fault protection

The logging ends with the going ground-fault indication.
To reach the ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Process data Logs Ground-fault log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the ground-fault log is shown to you.
cation list (Figure 3-8 a)).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scgrflmd-191012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-8 Reading the Ground-Fault Log with DIGSI 5
To reach the ground-fault log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu Indications Ground-fault indication
operation panel.
Figure 3-9
Reading the Ground-Fault Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device
Deletability
The ground-fault log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read about it in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and
Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The indication scope of the ground-fault log is configured in a specifically defined column of the information
routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Target Log Column Ground-fault log

Selected application templates and functions from the library already bring a predefined set of operational
indications with them which you can adjust individually at any time.
3.1.5.5 User Log

With the user-defined log (up to 2), you have the possibility of individual indication logging parallel to the
operational log. This is helpful, for example, in special monitoring tasks but also in the classification into
different areas of responsibility of the logs. Up to 200 indications can be stored in the user-defined log.
To reach the user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Process Data Log User log 1/2
The status of the user-defined log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
cation list (Figure 3-10 a)).
[scanwnmd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-10 Reading the User-Defined Log with DIGSI 5
To reach user-specific logs from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu Indications User-defined log 1/2
You can navigate within the displayed indication list using the navigation keys (up/down) on the on-site opera-
tion panel.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-11
Reading the User-Defined Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device
Deletability
The user-defined log of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read about it in chapter 3.1.6 Saving and
Deleting the Logs.
Configuration of a User-Defined Log

The indication capacity of a created user-defined log can be configured freely in the associated column of the
information routing (matrix) of DIGSI 5:
Target Log U1 or U2
[scdiu1u2-280415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-12 Indication Configuration in DIGSI 5 (Example: User-Defined Log U1/2)
3.1.5.6 Setting-History Log

All individual setting changes and the downloaded files of entire parameter sets are recorded in the log for
setting changes. This enables you to determine setting changes made are associated with events logged (for
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
example, faults). On the other hand, it is possible to prove with fault analyses, for example, that the current
status of all settings truly corresponds to their status at the time of the fault. Up to 200 indications can be
stored in the setting-history log.
To reach the log for setting changes of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Process Data Log Setting changes
The status of the setting-history log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
To update (synchronization with the device), click the Read log entries button in the headline of the indi-
cation list (Figure 3-13).
[scparamd-030211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-13 Reading the Setting-History Log with DIGSI 5
To reach the setting-history log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation
panel.
Menu Indications Setting changes
operation panel.
Figure 3-14
Reading the Setting-History Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device
Indication Categories in the Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Table 3-3 Overview of Indication Types
Displayed Information Explanation

Selection editing+ Selection of settings group to be edited
Reject+ Rejection of all changes successful
PG activation+ PG activation via command successful
PG activation- PG activation via command failed
set+ Parameter value was changed
Acceptance+ Acceptance of change successful
Acceptance- Acceptance of change failed
DCF loaded DCF loaded into device
SG 1 Settings group 1
Example of Logging in Setting-History Log

For this log, there is selected information that is stored in case of successful as well as unsuccessful setting
changes. The following list gives you an overview of this information.
From top downward:
In the example at the left, a device has started
with the active settings group 1.
Then the settings group 1 is selected for changes.
The individual parameter for phase-rotation
reversal was changed.
The changes were successfully accepted.
NOTE
i The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.
You cannot route additional indication objects to the setting-history log.
3.1.5.7 Communication Log

The logging of the respective status such as ensuing faults, test and diagnosis operation, and communication
capacity utilizations is done for all hardware-based configured communication interfaces. Up to 500 indica-
tions can be stored in the communication log. Logging occurs separately for each communication port of the
configured communication modules.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Use the project-tree window to reach the communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device.
Online access USB Project Test suite Communication module
Then select:
J:Onboard Ethernet Communication log
The status of the communication log last loaded from the device is shown to you under the Time stamp item.
To update (synchronization with the device) click the button Update in the headline of the indication list.
[sccompuf-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-15 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
To reach the communication log from the main menu, use the navigation keys on the on-site operation
panel.
Main Menu Test & Diagnosis Indications Communication log
operation panel.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-16
Reading the Communication Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device
Deletability
The communication logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. Read details about this in chapter
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs.
Configurability
The communication logs are not freely configurable. The entries are preconfigured.
3.1.5.8 Security Log

Access to areas of the device with restricted access right is recorded in the security log. Unsuccessful and
unauthorized access attempts are also recorded. Up to 500 indications can be stored in the security log.
To reach the security log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Device Information Log Security log
The status of the security log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
[scsecmld-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-17 Reading the Communication Log with DIGSI 5
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
To reach the security log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu Test & Diagnosis Indications Security log
operation panel.
Figure 3-18
Reading the Security Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of the
Device
NOTE
i The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
This log, which is organized as a ring buffer. cannot be deleted by the user!
If you want to archive security-relevant information without loss of information, you must regularly
read this log.
3.1.5.9 Device-Diagnosis Log

The logging and the display of concrete instructions are done in the device-diagnosis log during
Required maintenance (for example, battery supervision)
Identified hardware defects
Compatibility problems
Up to 500 indications can be stored in the device-diagnosis log. In normal operation of the device, it is suffi-
cient for diagnostic purposes to follow the entries of the operational log. This specific significance is assumed
by the device-diagnosis log when the device is no longer ready for operation due to hardware defect or
compatibility problems and the fallback system is active.
Reading from the PC with DIGSI 5 in Normal Operation
To reach the device-diagnosis log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Device Information Log Device-diagnosis log
The status of the device-diagnosis log last loaded from the device is shown to you.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scdevdia-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-19 Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log with DIGSI 5
Reading on the Device through the On-Site Operation Panel in Normal Operation
To reach the diagnosis log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel.
Main Menu Test & Diagnosis Indications Device diagnosis
operation panel.
Figure 3-20
Reading the Device-Diagnosis Log on the On-Site Operation Panel of
the Device
NOTE
i The device-diagnosis log cannot be deleted!
The logged indications are preconfigured and cannot be changed!
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
3.1.6 Saving and Deleting the Logs
Deleting the logs of the device in the operating state is unnecessary. If storage capacity is no longer sufficient
for new indications, the oldest indications are automatically overwritten with new incoming events. In order for
the memory to contain information about the new faults in the future, for example, after an inspection of the
system, a deletion of the log makes sense. Resetting the logs is done separately for the various logs.
NOTE
i Before you delete the content of a log on your SIPROTEC 5 device, save the log with DIGSI 5 on the hard
disk drive of your PC.
NOTE
i Not all logs of your SIPROTEC 5 device can be deleted. These limitations apply especially to logs with
relevance for security and after-sales (security log, device-diagnosis log, setting-history log).
NOTE
i Upon deletion of the fault log, the associated fault records are also deleted. In addition, the meters for fault
number and fault-record number are reset to 0. In contrast, if you delete fault records, the content of the
fault log, including the allocated fault numbers, remains.
NOTE
i If the device executes an initial start, for example, after an update of the device software, the following logs
are automatically deleted:
Operational log
Fault log
Ground-fault log
Setting-history log
User log
Motor-startup log
Back up the deletable logs using DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i If a ground fault is currently active, the ground-fault log cannot be deleted.
Deleting Logs on the On-Site Operation Panel
To reach the selected log from the main menu, use the navigation keys of the on-site operation panel
(example operational log):
Main Menu Indications Operational log
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-21
Deleting the Operational Log on the On-Site Operation Panel
operation panel.
The option to delete the entire log is offered to you in the footer of the display at the bottom left. Use the
softkeys below under the display to activate the command prompts. Confirm the request to Delete.
After being prompted, enter the password and confirm with Enter.
After being prompted, confirm the Deletion of all entries with Ok.
Deleting Logs from the PC with DIGSI 5
To reach the selected log of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window (for example, opera-
tional log).
Project Device Process data Logs Operational log
3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5
With DIGSI 5 you have the possibility of displaying all currently transmitted indications of the selected device
in a special indication window.
Procedure
Call up the spontaneous indications of your selected device in the navigation window under Online
access.
Click Indications in the path:

Online access Interface Device Indications
The raising indications appear immediately without you having to wait for a cyclical update or initiate the
manual update.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scspnmld-230211-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-22 Displaying Spontaneous Device Indications in DIGSI 5
3.1.8 Spontaneous Fault Display on the On-Site Operation Panel
After a fault, the most important data of the last fault can be displayed automatically on the device display
without further operational measures. In SIPROTEC 5 devices, protected objects (for example, lines) and
even circuit breakers can be freely created and configured depending on the application (even several
instances). In DIGSI 5, several spontaneous fault displays can be configured, depending on the application,
with each individual one being assigned a particular circuit breaker. These displays remain stored in the
device until they are manually confirmed or reset by LED reset.
Configuration of a Spontaneous Fault Display with DIGSI 5
To reach the Fault-display configuration of your SIPROTEC 5 device, use the project-tree window.
Project Device Display pages Fault-display configuration
In the main window, all configured circuit breakers are displayed. A list of a maximum of 6 configurable
display lines is offered for each circuit breaker. The activation of a spontaneous fault display occurs for
each circuit breaker by selection via checkmark in the column Display.
With the parameter (_:139) Fault-display (under Device Parameter Device settings) you
determine whether spontaneous fault displays should be displayed for each pickup or only pickups with
the off command.
Figure 3-23 Configuration of the Spontaneous Fault Display

on the Device
For every display line the following display options can be selected:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Table 3-4 Overview of Display Options
Displayed Information Explanation

Pickup indication Display of the first function stage picked up in a fault, as
needed with additional information (phases, ground, direction).
T pickup Display of the entire pickup duration of the fault.
Operate indication Display of the first function stage triggered in a fault, as
needed with additional information (phases).
T operate Display of the operate time related to the beginning of the fault
(pickup start).
Fault distance Display of the measured fault-location distance.
Acknowledgement of the Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device

After faults, the last occurred fault is always displayed to you. In cases where more than one circuit breaker is
configured, several stored fault displays can be present after faults, with the latest being displayed. These
displays remain stored in the device until they are manually acknowledged or reset by LED reset.
Figure 3-24
Spontaneous Fault Display on the Device
Method 1: Manual acknowledgement

Press the softkey button Quit in the base bar of the display. The display is irretrievably closed. Repeat
this step until no spontaneous fault display appears anymore.
After completion of all confirmations the last display view is showed before the faults.
Method 2: Acknowledgement via LED reset
An LED reset (device) causes the reset of all stored LEDs and binary output contacts of the device and
also to the confirmation of all fault displays stored in the display.
You can find more details on the topic of LED reset in chapter 3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5
Device.
3.1.9 Stored Indications in the SIPROTEC 5 Device
In your SIPROTEC 5 device, you can also configure indications as stored. This type of configuration can be
used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until it is
acknowledged. Acknowledgment occurs via:
On-site operation panel
DIGSI 5
Binary input
Protocol of substation automation technology
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Configuration of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5
In the Information Routing of each device set up in DIGSI 5, you can route binary signals, among others,
to LEDs and output contacts. For this, go to the project tree.
Project Device Information routing
Right-click the routing field of your binary indication in the desired LED or binary output column in the
routing range of the targets.
You are offered the following options:
Table 3-5 Overview of Routing Options
Routing Options LEDs BOs BIs Description

H (active) X The signal is routed as active with voltage.
L (active) X The signal is routed as active without voltage.
V (unlatched) X X The signal is routed as unlatched. Activation and reset
of the output (LED, BA) occurs automatically via the
binary-signal value.
L (latched) X X The binary signal is latched when the output (LED) is
activated. To reset, a targeted confirmation must occur.
NT (stored only with tripping) X Fault indications are stored when the output (LED) is
activated. If the fault is ended via a trip command from
the device, the stored state is maintained. In case of
dropout of the pickup without trip command from the
device (e.g. external fault), the state displayed before
the fault is restored.
Note: For this purpose, observe the parameter
(_:91:139) fault display with the setting
options with trip command or with pickup.
TL (stored only with tripping) X Routing option TL (tripping stored) is only possible for
the switching object circuit breaker.
The output is saved with protection tripping. The
contact remains activated until acknowledged.
Control commands are not affected. A control
command is pending above the parameterized
command period until feedback has been successfully
received.
Note:
You can realize the functionality of the Lockout (ANSI
86) by storing the output relay with the routing option
TL.
Acknowledgment of Stored Indications on the On-Site Operation Panel

Acknowledgment via LED Reset
Operating the button first causes the activation of all LEDs (LED test) when pressed, and when released the
resetting of all stored indications. Stored LEDs, output contacts, and spontaneous fault displays are reset.
Acknowledgment via the operating menu
Use the navigation buttons of the on-site operation panel, in order to reach the reset functions from the main
menu.
Select: Main menu Device functions Reset functions
You are offered different reset options.
Open the corresponding submenu.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
Figure 3-25 Reset Functions on the On-Site Operation Panel
Use Res. binary outputs to reset stored output contacts.
Actuate the softkey Start in the base bar.
As needed, enter the confirmation ID when requested and then confirm with the softkey Enter.
Use Reset LEDs not in FG to reset stored LEDs that are not assigned to a special function group.
Depending on device configuration, the protection function group(s) are displayed to you as submenus for
which separately corresponding, stored LEDs can be reset.
Go to the submenu of the selected function group (example Line 1).
Use Reset LEDs to reset stored LEDs in the selected function group.
Figure 3-26 Reset Functions on the On-Site Operation Panel (for Example, Line FG)
Acknowledgment of Stored Indications via Binary Inputs

Acknowledgment via entry >LED Reset
Acknowledgment via binary input >LED-Reset brings about the activation of all LEDs (LED test) and, in case
of dropout of signal, the resetting of all stored indications. Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous
fault displays are reset.
Acknowledgment of Stored Indications with DIGSI 5

You can acknowledge stored indications via DIGSI 5 in online mode. For this, go to the project tree.
Select Online access Interface Device Device information
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.1 Indications
[scquiled-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-27 LED Reset via DIGSI 5
Click the LED reset button.
Enter the confirmation ID.
Confirm the process with OK.

Stored LEDs, output contacts and spontaneous fault displays are reset on the assigned device.
Acknowledgment of Stored Indications via Log

Initiation of acknowledgment of stored indications can also occur through communication via a connected
substation automation technology. This can occur in conformance to standards (IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-103) or via configuration (mapping) of the LED reset input signal for any protocol. Stored LEDs,
output contacts, and spontaneous fault displays are reset.
NOTE
i The acknowledgment of stored indications then leads to the resetting of configured LEDs and output
contacts, as long as active unstored indications are not present in parallel. That is, indications configured
as unstored are not affected by the acknowledgment process.
3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group
You can configure indications of individual functions as "stored" in a function group. This type of configuration
can be used for LEDs as well as for output contacts. The configured output (LED or contact) is activated until
it is acknowledged.
The protection and the circuit-breaker function groups contain the block Reset LED FG. The block
Reset LED FG is visible only in the Information routing under the corresponding function group in DIGSI 5.
You use the binary input signal >Reset LED to reset the stored LEDs in the respective function group. The
configured outputs (contacts) are not reset.
3.1.11 Test Mode and Influence of Indications on Substation Automation Technology
If the test mode of the device or of individual functions is switched on, the SIPROTEC 5 device marks indica-
tions sent to substation automation technology station control system with an additional test bit. This test bit
makes it possible to determine that an indication was set during a test. Necessary reactions in normal opera-
tion on the basis of an indication can thus be suppressed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.2 Measured-Value Acquisition

Basic Principle
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with a powerful measured-value acquisition function. In addition to a high
sampling frequency, they have a high measurand resolution. This ensures a high degree of measuring accu-
racy across a wide dynamic range. The 24-bit sigma/delta analog-digital converter represents the core of
measured-value acquisition. In addition, the oversampling function supports the high measurand resolution.
Depending on the requirements of the individual method of measurement, the sampling frequency is reduced
(Downsampling).
In digital systems, deviations from the rated frequency lead to additional errors. In order to avoid this, 2 algo-
rithm-dependent processes are used in all SIPROTEC 5 devices:
Sampling-frequency tracking:
The analog input channels are scanned for valid signals in cycles. The current power frequency is deter-
mined and the required sampling frequency is defined by using a resampling algorithm. The tracking is
effective in the frequency range between 10 Hz and 80 Hz.
Fixed sampling frequency correction of the filter coefficients:

This method operates in a limited frequency range (frated +/- 5 Hz). The power frequency is determined
and, depending on the degree of the frequency deviation, the filter coefficients are corrected. The meth-
odology is used for the Distance protection and Line differential protection functions.
The following figure shows the basics of dealing with sampled values (SAV) in the measured-value acquisi-
tion chain. Figure 3-28 shows to whom the various sampling frequencies are made available. In order to limit
the bandwidth of the input signals, a low-pass filter (anti-aliasing filter to maintain the sampling theorem) is
installed downstream. After sampling, the current input channels are adjusted. This means the magnitude,
phase, as well as the transformer time constant are corrected. The compensation is designed to ensure that
the current transformer terminal blocks can be exchanged randomly between the devices.
[dwmeserf-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-28 Measured-Value Acquisition Chain
The internal sampling frequency of the SIPROTEC 5 devices is fixed at 16 kHz (sampling rate: 320 samplings
per 50-Hz cycle). All current and voltage inputs are sampled. If the magnitude, phase, and transformer time
constant are corrected, the sampling frequency is reduced to 8 kHz (160 samplings per 50-Hz cycle). This is
the basic sampling frequency to which various processes, such as fault recording, RMS measured values,
refer. For the RMS measurement, the measured-value window is adjusted on the basis of the power
frequency. For numerous measurement and protection applications , 20 samplings per cycle are sufficient (if
frated = 50 Hz: sampling every 1 ms, at frated = 60 Hz: sampling every 0.833 ms). This sampling rate is an
adequate compromise between accuracy and the parallel processing of the functions (multi-functionality).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The 20 samplings per cycle will be made available to the algorithms processed in the function groups, in 2
variants:
Fixed (not resampled)
Resampled (frequency range from 10 Hz to 80 Hz)
Depending on the algorithms (see function descriptions), the respective data flow is considered. A higher
sampling frequency is used for selected methods of measurement. Detailed information can be found in the
corresponding function description.
NOTE
i The measuring points for current and voltage are in the Power-system data (starting in chapter 6.1 Power-
System Data). Each measuring point has its own parameters.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.3 Processing of Quality Attributes
3.3.1 Overview
The IEC 61850 standard defines certain quality attributes for data objects (DO), the so-called Quality. The
SIPROTEC 5 system automatically processes some of these quality attributes. In order to satisfy different
applications, you can influence certain quality attributes and also the values of the data objects depending on
these quality attributes. This is how you can ensure the necessary functionality.
The following figure describes roughly the general data flow within a SIPROTEC 5 device. The following
figure also shows at which points the quality can be influenced. The building blocks presented in the figure
are described in more detail in the following.
[loquali1-090212-02.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-29 Data Flow within a SIPROTEC 5 Device
Supported Quality Attributes

The following quality attributes are automatically processed within the SIPROTEC 5 system.
Validity using the values good or invalid
The Validity quality attribute shows if an object transferred via a GOOSE message is received (valid,
invalid) or not received (invalid). The invalid state can be suppressed in the receiver device by setting
a substitute value also for the object that is not received (see Figure 3-30). The substitute value is
forwarded to the functions.
If the device receives one of these values, it is replaced by the invalid value and thus processed
further as invalid.
If one of the detailed quality attributes (detailQual) has the value TRUE, then Validity is set to the
invalid value, unless this was already done at the sender end.
Test using the values TRUE, FALSE
The Test quality attribute indicates to the receiving device that the object received via a GOOSE
message was created under test conditions and not operating conditions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
OperatorBlocked using the values TRUE, FALSE

The OperatorBlocked quality attribute indicates whether an object transferred via GOOSE message orig-
inates from a device that is in a functional logoff state. If the sending device is switched off, the
object is no longer being received and assumes the invalid state. However, since the Operator-
Blocked quality was previously identified on the receiving device, the object can be treated differently at
the receiving end (see chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE
Values). At the receiving end, the object may be treated like a dropped signal.
Source, using the values process, substituted
The Source quality attribute indicates whether the object is resampled in the sending device.
For more information, refer to chapter 3.8.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating.
Influencing Quality by the Operating Modes

In addition to the normal operation, the equipment also supports further operating modes that influence
quality:
Test mode of the device
You can switch the entire device to test mode. In this case, all data objects generated in the device
(state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
The CFC charts are also in test mode and all output data receive the quality attribute Test = TRUE.
Test mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks

You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into test mode. In this case, all data
objects generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive
the quality attribute Test = True.
Functional logoff of the device

If you take the device out of service and want to isolate it from the supply voltage, you can functionally
log off the device ahead of time. Once you functionally log off the device, all data objects generated in
the device (state values and measured values) receive the quality attribute OperatorBlocked = TRUE.
This also applies to the output from CFC charts.
If objects are transferred via a GOOSE message, the receiver devices can assess the quality. The
receiver device detects a functional logoff of the sending device. After shutting down the sending device,
the receiver device identifies that the sending device has been logged off operationally and did not fail.
Now the receiving objects can automatically be set to defined states (see chapter 3.3.2 Quality
Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values).
Off mode for individual functions, stages, or function blocks
You can switch individual functions, stages, or function blocks into off mode. In this case, all data objects
generated by the function, stage, or function block (state values and measured values) receive the
quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality through Hardware Supervision

Supervision functions monitor the device hardware (see chapter 8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware). If
the supervision functions identify failures in the data acquisition of the device, then all recorded data will
receive the quality attribute Validity = invalid.
Influencing the Quality by the User

You can influence the processing of data and their quality differently. In DIGSI 5, this possible at the following
3 locations:
In the Information routing Editor for external signals for GOOSE connections
In the CFC chart
In the Information routing Editor for binary input signals of device-internal functions
The following chapters describe in more detail the options of this influence as well as the automatic quality
processing.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
If a GOOSE connection is the data source of a binary input signal of a device-internal function, you can influ-
ence the quality processing at 2 locations: at the GOOSE connection and at the function input signal. This is
based on the following: A GOOSE date can be distributed within the receiving device to several functions.
The GOOSE connection setting (influence) affects all functions. However, if different functions require
customized settings, these are then set directly at the binary input signal of the function.
3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for Received GOOSE Values
In the Information Routing editor, you can influence the data value and quality of all data types. The following
figure shows the possible influence using the example of an DPC data type.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information Routing.
Select the desired signal in the External Signals group.
Open the Properties window and select the Processing Quality Attributes sheet.
[sc_GOOSE values, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-30 Influence Option When Linking an DPC Type Data Object
The setting options work for the device receiving the data.
Quality Attribute: Validity
The validity values reserved and questionable are replaced at the receiving end by the invalid
value.
Check box is not set. The validity attribute and data value are forwarded
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = good without change.
Check box is set and receipt of Validity = invalid is The validity attribute is set to good and
set (also applies to values reserved and ques- processed further using this value.
tionable). The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

Check box is not set. The OperatorBlocked attribute and data value are
Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked forwarded without change.
= FALSE
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked (opBlk)

Check box is set and received OperatorBlocked = The OperatorBlocked attribute is set to FALSE
TRUE and processed further using this value.
The data value is set to the defined substitute
value and processed further using this substitute
value.
Interaction of the Quality Attribute Validity and OperatorBlocked

OperatorBlocked check box is set and receipt of Regardless of whether the validity check box is set or
OperatorBlocked = TRUE not, and regardless of the current validity, the validity
attribute is set to good and the substitute value of the
OperatorBlocked data object is set. That is, the Oper-
atorBlocked settings overwrite the Validity settings.
OperatorBlocked check box is not set and receipt of The OperatorBlocked attribute remains set and is
OperatorBlocked = TRUE forwarded.
If the Validity check box is set and the receipt of
validity = invalid is set, the respective data object
substitute value is used.
For continued signal processing and influence, it
must be taken into account that in this configuration
the data object substitute value for validity =
invalid is set, but the quality attribute Operator-
Blocked is not yet set.
Data Substitute Values

Depending on the data type, different data substitute values must be used.
Data Type Possible Data Substitute Values
ACD, ACT general, phsA, phsB, 0 (False), 1 (True)
pshC, neut
only ACD dirGen 0, 1, 2, 3 (Unknown, Forward, Backward, Both)
dirPhsA, dirPhsB, 0, 1, 2 (Forward, Backward, Both)
dirPhsC, dirNeut
BAC, APC mxVal 1.401298 10-45 to 7.922 1028
stSeld 0 (False), 1 (True)
ctlNum 1 to 255
BCR actVal, frVal, frTm 0 to 1 073 741 824
CMV mag, ang 1.401298 10-45 to 7.922 1028
DPC, DPS stVal 0, 1, 2, 3 (intermediate-state, off, on, bad-state)
ENUM types (for SPS output 0 (False), 1 (True)
example, ENS, EN, ENC) INS output The qualities of the object of the sending device are
taken on.
INC stVal 0 to 1 073 741 824
stSeld 0 (False), 1 (True)
ING setVal 0 to 1 073 741 824
INS stVal 0 to 1 073 741 824
ISC, BSC vWTpos -64 to 64
vWTInd 0 (False), 1 (True)
SEC cnt 0 to 1 073 741 824
SPC, SPS stVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
SPG setVal 0 (False), 1 (True)
MV mag 1.401298 10-45 to 7.922 1028
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
In DIGSI 5, you can control quality processing of CFC charts. In the project tree, you can find the CFC block
(see the following figure) under Device name Settings Device settings in the editor:
[sc quali cfc, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-31 Influencing CFC Quality Processing in DIGSI 5
With the CFC quality handling parameter, you control whether you want to influence the quality of CFC
charts in a Manual or Automatic (default setting) manner.
If you select Manual, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is always valid regardless of the quality of indi-
vidual signals (Validity = good)!
Only the Test quality attribute of the CFC chart is processed. If the device is in test mode or the input TEST of
the CHART_STATE CFC block is set, the quality attribute of the CFC chart is set to Test.
If you select Automatic, the quality processing of the CFC charts is influenced as follows:
In the case of CFC charts, a distinction has to be made between the general quality processing and certain
CFC blocks that are specifically designed for quality processing.
General Processing
Most of the CFC blocks do not have an explicit quality processing. For these blocks, the following general
mechanisms shall apply.
If one invalid signal is received in the case of CFC input data, then all CFC output data will also be set to
invalid if they originate from building blocks without explicit quality processing. In other words, the quality
is not processed sequentially from building block to building block but the output data are set globally.
This does not apply to CFC output data that originate from building blocks with explicit quality processing
(see next section).
Quality Attribute: Test

CFC chart is in normal state. CFC input data with the Test = TRUE attribute are ignored.
When the CFC chart is executed, then the data value that was
used before the Test = TRUE attribute is used. The quality of this
old value is also processed.
This means that on the output side, the attribute Test = FALSE.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

CFC chart is in Test1) state. If the CFC chart is executed, then the attribute Test = TRUE is
set for all data leaving the CFC chart. This does not depend on
whether the data are formed via CFC blocks with or without
quality processing.
1)A CFC chart can be switched to the test state by switching the entire device to test mode or the input TEST
of the CHART_STATE CFC chart is set.

Quality Attribute: OperatorBlocked
CFC chart is in normal state. In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
is ignored.
CFC chart is in functionally logged off1) In CFC charts for incoming data, the OperatorBlocked attribute
state . is ignored. All CFC output data are labeled as functionally
logged off.
1)This state only occurs if the device is functionally logged off. In this case, the quality attributes of all CFC
outputs are labeled as functionally logged off.
Quality Processing Building Blocks (Condition Processing)

The first 3 blocks (x_SPS) process the quality automatically according to the stated logic. The other blocks
are used to isolate the quality from a data object and add them back after separate logical processing.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

OR_SPS The blocks also process the supported quality attributes according to their logic. The
AND_SPS following tables describe the logic using the input values in connection with the quality
NEG_SPS attribute Validity. The input values are 0 or 1, the quality attribute Validity can have the
value good (=g) or invalid (=i).
x = placeholder for the input value and the quality attribute Validity
OR_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 0, x 0, i
0, g 0, g 0, g
1, g x, x 1, g
1, i 0, x 1, i
1, i 1, i 1, i
The output thus has the logical value 1 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 1 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
OR operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
AND_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) B (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, g x, x 0, g
0, i 1, x 0, i
1, i 1, x 1, i
1, g 1, g 1, g
The output thus has the logical value 0 with Validity = good as soon as at least 1 input has
the logical value 0 with Validity = good. Otherwise, the inputs are treated according to the
AND operation and the INVALID bit is OR-gated for the quality.
NEG_SPS
A (Value, Attribute) Q (Value, Attribute)
0, i 1, i
0, g 1, g
1, i 0, i
1, g 0, g
SPLIT_SPS The blocks isolate the data value and quality of a data object.
SPLIT_DPS The requirement is that the quality is available from the input end. This is the case if the
SPLI_XMV block is interconnected with CFC input data, or is connected downstream with a quality
processing building block (x_SPS). In other cases, the CFC editor does not allow a
connection.
SPLIT_Q The block performs binary separation of the quality into good, bad (= invalid), test,
off and OperatorBlocked.
These 5 attributes can then be processed individually in a binary operation. The block
must be connected downstream to a SPLIT_(DO) block.
BUILD_Q The building block enters a binary value for good and bad (= invalid) in each quality
structure. Thus, with this building block the quality attributes good and bad (=invalid)
can be set explicitly, for example, as the result of a monitoring logic.
All other quality attributes are set to the default state, for instance, Test = FALSE. If, for
example, the entire CFC chart is in the test state (see Quality Attribute: Test Under
General Processing), this default status can again be overwritten on the CFC output side.
The building block is normally connected downstream to a BUILD_(DO) building block.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Building Blocks Description

BUILD_ACD These blocks merge data value and quality. The block output is generally used as a CFC
BUILD_ACT output.
BUILD_BSC Generally, the BUILD_Q block is connected upstream from these building blocks.
BUILD_DPS
BUILD_ENS
BUILD_SPS
BUILD_XMV
CFC charts have a standard behavior in the processing of signals. If an input signal of the CFC chart has the
quality invalid, all output signals of the CFC chart also get the quality invalid. This standard behavior is
not desirable in some applications. If you use the building blocks for quality processing, the quality attributes
of the input signals in the CFC chart are processed.
EXAMPLE: Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE

The following conditions apply to the example:
The interlocking condition for switchgear interlocking protection is stored in the device as a CFC chart.
The removed device sends the release signal for the interlocking condition via a GOOSE telegram.
If the communication connection has been interrupted, the release signal (GOOSEStr) incoming via the
GOOSE telegram gets the quality invalid. If the CFC chart obtains an invalid input signal, there are the
following possibilities: The last signal valid before the communication interruption is used (quality = good) or
a substitute data value with the quality good is used (True, False).
To do this, you have to create a separate CFC chart in addition to the interlocking plan of the switchgear
interlocking. Use the building blocks for quality processing in a separate CFC chart. With the SPLIT_SPS
building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information. You can then
continue to process these signals separately in the CFC chart. Use the quality information as an input signal
for a BUILD_SPS building block and assign the quality good to the signal. You obtain an SPS signal as a
result, with the quality good. You can use this to process release messages correctly. You can process the
release messages with the quality good in the CFC chart of the actual interlocking. Therefore, the release
signal for a switch illustrated in the interlocking logic is available as a valid result with the quality good. The
following figure shows an example of the CFC chart with the building blocks for quality processing:
[sccfcran-220415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-32 CFC Chart with Building Blocks for Quality Processing (Switchgear Interlocking via GOOSE)
If you do not want to convert the invalid release signal to a valid signal, as described, during the communica-
tion interruption, you can also assign a defined data value to the release signal. Proceed as follows: With the
SPLIT_SPS building block, split the input signal (data type = SPS) into data value and quality information.
Link the VALID output of the SPLIT_SPS building block with the data value of the input signal (AND gate).
This way, you can set the value to a non-risk state with the valid input signals. In the example, the output of
the CFC chart is set to the value FALSE when the input signal is invalid.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.3.4 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in Internal Device Functions
Figure 3-33 provides an overview for processing the quality of data objects within a device-internal function.
A function can receive internal data or input data that is routable by the user (binary input signal or double
commands). The respective quality attributes supported are evaluated by the function on the input side. The
attributes are not passed through the specific algorithm/the specific logic of the function. The output data are
supplied with a quality that is specified by the function state and device-operating mode.
NOTE
i Take into account that pickup of chatter blocking (see chapter 3.8.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking
for Input Signals ) sets the corresponding Validity attribute to invalid.
Figure 3-33 Overview for Processing Quality within an Internal Function
Internal Input Data

The quality processing is automatic for internal input data.
Supported Quality Attributes Description
Validity At the receiving end, internal values can only be invalid
or good.
If invalid, the function health is set to Alarm and the
function is reset.
Causes for invalid internal data are, for example:
The frequency operating range of the device was left.
The device is not calibrated.
The A/D converter monitoring identified an error.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Routable Binary Input Signals (SPS Data Type)

Figure 3-34 shows the possible sources for connecting a binary input signal. Depending on the source,
different quality attributes can be set:
CFC chart: See description in chapter 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts
GOOSE connection: See description in chapter 3.3.2 Quality Processing/Affected by the User for
Received GOOSE Values
Device hardware: No quality attributes are set and supported.
Figure 3-34 Sources for Connecting a Binary Input Signal
For this signal type (SPS), you can influence the processing of the quality, see overview in Figure 3-33 .
The following figure shows the possible influence on a binary input signal of a protection stage.
In the DIGSI 5 project tree, double-click Information routing.
In the operating range, select the desired binary input signal.
In the Properties window, select the Details entry. There, you will find the item Processing quality attrib-
utes.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sceinflu de, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-35 Influence Options for a Binary Input Signal (SPS Input Signal)

The Validity attribute can have the values good or invalid (reserved and questionable were already
replaced at the input end of the device by the value invalid).
The input signal source is invalid. The current data value of the source signal is ignored. You can
select between the following options:
Further process last valid data value of the source signal
(this is the default setting with only a few exceptions)
Set the binary value to be processed further to 0.
Set the binary value to be processed further to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different
applications.
The function health switches to Warning.
The input signal source is good. The source signal data value is processed further.

The input signal source and The source signal data value is processed further.
processed function are in test state.
The input signal source is not in test
state and the function to be
processed is in test state.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

The input signal source is in a test state The data value of the source signal is ignored. You can select
and the function to be processed is in between the following options:
normal state. Further processing of the last valid source signal data
value, before the source switches to the test state (that is
the default setting)
The binary value to be processed further is set to 0.
The binary value to be processed further is set to 1.
This configuration option is necessary to satisfy different appli-
cations.
Quality Attribute OperatorBlocked

The quality cannot be influenced at this position and does not lead to a response within the logic
Output Data
The quality is not processed through the actual algorithm/logic of the function. The following table displays the
conditions required to set the quality of output signals of a function.
Cause D0 Value Quality Attribute
After internal (to the To the IEC 61850
SIPROTEC 5 interface, in buffer
system, for
example, in the
direction of a CFC
chart)
Functional state = Test Unchanged Test = TRUE Test = TRUE
(thus, result of device operating
mode = Test or function mode
= Test)
Functional state = Off Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(thus, result of device operating sponding to the definition for
mode = Off) switched off
Function health = Alarm Function-specific, corre- Validity = good Validity = invalid
(for example, result of invalid sponding to the definition for
receive data) reset
Device operating mode = func- Unchanged Validity = good Validity = good
tionally logged off OperatorBlocked = detailQual =
TRUE oldData
OperatorBlocked =
TRUE
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
3.4 Fault Recording
3.4.1 Overview of Functions
All SIPROTEC 5 devices have a fault memory in which fault recordings are kept securely. Fault recording
documents operations within the power system and the way in which protection devices respond to them.
You can read out fault recordings from the device and analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such
as SIGRA.
A fault record contains the following information:
Sample values of the analog input channels
Measured values calculated internally
Any binary signals (for example, pickup signals and trip signals of protection functions)
You can individually configure the signals to be recorded. Furthermore, you can define the starting condition,
the record duration, and the saving criterion of a recording. Fault records saved in the device are also avail-
able after a loss of auxiliary voltage.
3.4.2 Structure of the Function
The Fault recorder function is a central device function. Both the recording criterion and the measured-value
and binary channels to be recorded are functionally preconfigured through the application templates. You are
able to individually adapt the configuration in DIGSI 5. The fault recording and the fault log are subject to the
same control. This ensures that real time, relative time, and numbering of the fault data are synchronized.
In devices with line differential protection (7SD, 7SL), the time management feature synchronizes the fault
records of all line ends via the protection interfaces. This means that all fault recordings function on the same
real-time and relative-time basis.
The data read out via the DIGSI-PC are saved in COMTRADE format. Fault recording data can be trans-
ferred to the substation automation technology by request in accordance with the standards via existing
communication connections (such as IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103). The central device analyzes the data
using appropriate programs.
3.4.3 Function Description
The Fault recorder function records the sampled values, specific to each device, of all analog inputs, the
internally calculated measured values and the binary signals. The configuration, which is predefined for each
device via an application template, can be adapted individually. Detailed information about selecting and
deleting fault recordings can be found in the Operating manual.
The fault memory of the device is automatically updated with every recording. When the fault memory is filled
completely, the oldest records are overwritten automatically. Thus, the most recent recordings are always
stored safely. The maximum number of recordings is 128.
Sampling Frequency
The analog measuring channels are sampled at a different sampling rate for fault recording. The Sampling
frequency parameter is used to set the desired sampling frequency. Possible setting values are 1 kHz,
2 kHz, 4 kHz and 8 kHz. This setting value applies only to fault recording and does not affect protection func-
tions or calculated measured values.
Record Duration
The overall duration of a single fault recording comprises the duration of the configurable recording criterion
of the Pre-trigger time and the Post-trigger time. You can set the parameters for these compo-
nents individually.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
[dwsigrar-070813-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-36 Example of a Fault Recording
The Fault recording parameter is used to define the start criterion of the recording.
You can set the following values:
with pickup:
The fault recording records the complete fault until dropout. The resulting pickup signals of all function
groups are taken into account.
with pickup & AR cyc.:

In connection with an active automatic reclosing (internal/external), the fault recordings record the fault
including the short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles).
user-defined:
With this setting value, you can individually specify the recording criterion for the fault recording in
DIGSI 5. Function-specific recording criteria can be realized in this way.
If a recording criterion reoccurs during the pickup time and post-trigger time, the recording which is currently
active is extended to include a new post-trigger time.
For a sampling frequency of 8 kHz and 24 analog channels to be recorded, the duration of one individual fault
recording can be up to 20 s.
The maximum record duration can be limited by the Maximum record time parameter.
In addition to starting the fault recording via the pickup, the following alternatives are possible:
From an external source via binary input signal >External start (for example, from an external
protection device without fault recording by an object transferred via a GOOSE message)
From DIGSI 5 or via a configurable input signal >Manual start (for example, function key), you can
start the test fault record using a configurable length (parameter Manual record time)
With a command from a central device via an existing communication connection (IEC 61850, IEC
60870-5-103)
Saving the Recording

Not every fault recording that is started actually needs to be saved. With the Storage parameter, you specify
whether you want to save the fault recording that has started or not. You can also save only fault data for
which the pickup of a protection function also caused a tripping. With this setting, faults beyond the self-
protection range will not lead to replacing fault recordings that have already been saved.
Configuration of Signals to Be Recorded

All analog inputs of the device that have been configured (currents and voltages) are recorded as sampled
channels. Function-specific binary signals (for example, pickup and trip signals) and measured value chan-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
nels can be configured individually for recording in the DIGSI information-routing matrix. For this purpose, a
separate Content column is available.
The operational measured values and the measured values of the fundamental components and symmetrical
components (see Equipment Manual, Chapters 9.3 and 9.4) are calculated every 9 cycles (at 50 Hz, this is
every 180 ms). However, this can mean that the data are not synchronized with the sampled values of the
analog channels. The recording of these measured values can be used to analyze the slowly changing
processes.
Numbering and Time Stamping

All fault recordings saved are automatically numbered in ascending order and assigned a real-time stamp for
the start time. The fault recording logs the fault with a relative time. The reference-time point is the start of the
recording. Every fault record has a corresponding fault log with the same number. This ensures that the fault
recording can be uniquely assigned to the event log.
Fault Memory
The device manages its available fault memory dynamically, so that the maximum recording capacity is
always available. When exceeding the limits of the fault memory, the oldest recordings are automatically
overwritten. This means that the most recent records are always available. The sampling rate, type, and
number of measured value trends to be recorded are the crucial variables when it comes to restricting the
length and number of records possible. Parallel to the sampled tracks, up to 50 tracks with function-specific
measured values and up to 100 binary tracks can be recorded. The following table provides an overview of
the maximum storage capacities, in seconds, for different connection variations of the protection devices.
Table 3-6 Maximum Length of all Stored Recordings
Connection Examples Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling

1 kHz 2 kHz 4 kHz 8 kHz
Feeder: 1365 s 819 s 455 s 241 s
4I, 6 measured values, 20 binary tracks
Feeder: 1125 s 566 s 284 s 142 s
4l, 4V, 20 binary tracks
Feeder: 890 s 500 s 266 s 137 s
4I, 4V, 6 measured values, 20 binary
tracks
Feeder 1.5 CB: 525 s 281 s 145 s 74 s
8I, 8V, 6 measured values, 20 binary
tracks
Input and Output Signals

The Fault recorder function provides several input signals that allow the precise starting of recordings and
deleting. The output signals provide information about the function status.
In the following table, you can find input signals of the Fault recorder function:
Name Type Description
Control: Start recording SPC Start recording via the function key
Control: Reset memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers are reset.
Control: Delete memory SPC Delete all recording via the function key. The
error numbers remain as is.
Control: >External start SPS Start recording by an external binary signal, for
example, by the trip command of an external
protection device without separate recording.
The set pre and post-trigger time are taken into
account.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording

Control: >Manual start SPS Start a recording with a fixed duration (param-
eter Manual record time) through an
external binary signal, for example, manually
via the function key or by an external binary
signal.
In the following table, you can find output signals of the Fault recorder function:
General: Mode ENC Status feedback of the fault recording according
General: State ENS to chapter 2.3 Function Control.
General: Standby ENS
Control: Error number INS The indication of the current error number
allows a unique allocation of entries in the
message buffers for the recorded fault records.
Control: Recording started SPS Fault recording running
3.4.4 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Fault recording
Recommended setting value (_:2761:130) Fault recording = with pickup

With the Fault recording parameter, you define the time interval at which faults are recorded. The total
record duration is defined as the duration of the fault plus the total of the parameters, Pre-trigger time ,
Post-trigger time and is limited by the maximum record duration.
with pickup The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
pickups. The resulting pickup signals of all function groups are taken into
account.
Note: When the post-trigger time has expired, the indications of an automatic
recloser are not recorded. Secondary faults after expiry of the post-trigger time
can result in the opening of a new fault with its own recording.
with pickup & AR The fault recording time is determined by the total number of all protection
cyc. pickups including short and long interruptions (automatic reclosing cycles). It
includes the resulting pickup signals of all function groups and the runtimes of
initiated automatic reclosing cycles for all active automatic reclosing functions.
user-defined The fault recording time is defined user-specific.
Note: You must specify all signals for individual definition of the fault recording
time in the DIGSI 5 information ranking matrix. In the information routing matrix
in the Fault Record, the fault recording has for this purpose a separate column
Start. The recording time is calculated from the logical OR operation of all initi-
ated, configured signals.
Parameter: Storage
Recommended setting value (_:2761:131) Storage = always

With the Storage parameter, you define the storage criterion for a fault recording that has already started.
always Each fault recording that has been started is saved.
with trip If at least one protection function issues an operate indication during the record
duration, any fault recording that has been started will be saved.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording
Parameter: Maximum record time
Default setting (_:2761:111) Maximum record time = 5.00 s

With the Maximum record time parameter, you configure the maximum record duration for an individual
fault recording. When the time configured expires, an ongoing fault recording is canceled. This parameter
merely limits the duration of the fault recording. It does not affect the logging of faults in the fault log.
Parameter: Pre-trigger time
Recommended setting value (_:2761:112) Pre-trigger time = 0.50 s

With the Pre-trigger time parameter, you configure the pre-trigger time for an individual fault recording.
The pre-trigger time configured is appended to the actual recording criterion for the fault recording.
Parameter: Post-trigger time
Recommended setting value (_:2761:113) Post-trigger time = 0.50 s

With the Post-trigger time parameter, you configure the post-trigger time for an individual fault
recording. The post-trigger time that has been configured is added to the actual recording criterion for the
fault recording after it has been cleared.
Parameter: Sampling frequency
Recommended setting value (_:2761:140) Sampling frequency = 8 kHz

With the Sampling frequency parameter, you define the sampling frequency of the fault recording.
Possible setting values are 8 kHz, 4 kHz, 2 kHz and 1 kHz.
Parameter: Manual record time
Recommended setting value (_:2761:116) Manual record time = 0.50 s

The Manual record time parameter determines the duration of recording in the following cases:
If the fault record is dynamically activated (edge-controlled) via a separately configurable input signal
>Manual start
When a test fault record with DIGSI 5 is triggered manually
In this case, pre and post-trigger times are ignored.
3.4.5 Settings
Addr. Parameter C Setting Options Default Setting

General
_:2731:1 General:Mode on on
test
Control
_:2761:130 Control:Fault recording with pickup with pickup
with pickup & AR cyc.
user-defined
_:2761:131 Control:Storage always always
with trip
_:2761:111 Control:Maximum record 0.20 s to 20.00 s 5.00 s
time
_:2761:112 Control:Pre-trigger time 0.05 sto 4.00 s 0.50 s
_:2761:113 Control:Post-trigger time 0.05 sto 0.50 s 0.50 s
_:2761:116 Control:Manual record time 0.20 s to 20.00 s 0.50 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.4 Fault Recording

_:2761:140 Control:Sampling 8 kHz 2 kHz
frequency 4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
3.4.6 Information List
No. Information Data Class Type

(Type)
Binary IO
_:2731:51 General:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:2731:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:2731:53 General:Health ENS O
Binary IO
_:2761:300 Control:Start record SPC C
_:2761:305 Control:Reset memory SPC C
_:2761:306 Control:Clear memory SPC C
_:2761:502 Control:>External start SPS I
_:2761:503 Control:>Manual start SPS I
_:2761:310 Control:Fault number INS O
_:2761:311 Control:Recording started SPS O
_:2761:314 Control:Record made SPS O
_:2761:327 Control:Tmax reduced SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.5 Protection Communication
3.5.1 Overview
Protection communication includes all functionalities required to exchange data via the protection interface
(PI). It manages one or a maximum of 2 protection interfaces. The Protection communication is generated
with the configuration of the channels as a protocol.
You can find detailed information in the section Protection interface in chapter 3.5.3.1 Overview of Functions.
3.5.2 Protection-Communication Structure
The following Protection communication functions are visible:

Topology recognition
Remote data
The following figure shows the structure of Protection communication:
[dwstrufg-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-37 Protection-Data Communication Structure
Interface to the Line Function Group

Binary signals, measured values, and other data are automatically exchanged between the Protection-data
communication and the Line protection function group. Some protection functions exchange information with
other protection devices via the protection interface. This information is predefined and cannot be changed.
NOTE
i If the teleprotection scheme is to work via a protection interface, the receive block Rec. PI# must be
instantiated. Proceed as follows:
Open the Global DIGSI 5 library and instantiate, for example, the 85-21Perm.overr. function. You can
find the function under FG Line Teleprotection scheme 85-21Perm.overr..
Open Information routing via Project tree Device name.
Use drag and drop to add the receive block Rec. PI# from the Global DIGSI 5 library in Information
routing under Line 85-21Perm.overr.. If a receive block Rec. bin.sig.# is already available
besides Rec. PI# delete the receive block Rec. bin.sig.# from the Information routing.
It's not necessary to route the send and receive signals separately.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Interface to Motor Function Group

Binary signals, measured values, and other data are automatically exchanged between the Protection-data
communication and the Motor protection function group.
Remote Data
The Remote data functionality is applied if you route a specific signal or a measured value to the protection
interfaces. The protection interface then attends to the transmitting and receiving of such signals. The
maximum amount of remote data is defined by the available bandwidth.
3.5.3 Protection Interface and Protection Topology
3.5.3.1 Overview of Functions

The Protection topology and protection interfacefunction enables data exchange between the devices via
synchronous serial point-to-point connections from 64 Kbits/s to 2 Mbits/s. These connections can be estab-
lished directly via optical fibers or via other communication media, for example, via dedicated lines or via
communication networks.
A protection topology consists of 2 to 6 devices which communicate via protection interfaces. It can be set up
either as a redundant ring or as a chain structure. Within a topology, the protection interfaces can have a
different bandwidth. Depending on the bandwidth, a certain amount of binary information and measured
values can be transmitted bi-directionally between the devices. The connection with the lowest bandwidth
defines this amount (of binary information and measured values).
The following information that is significant for the function of the protection interface is also transferred. You
cannot change this information:
Topology data and values are exchanged for monitoring and testing the connection.
The results are displayed on the device or with DIGSI 5.
Protection data, for example, differential protection data or teleprotection scheme binary data, are trans-
ferred for distance protection and ground-fault protection.
The devices can be synchronized in time via the connection, whereby a device of the protection topology
assumes the role of the timing master.
The connection is continuously monitored for data faults and outage, and the time delay of the data is meas-
ured.
The protection interfaces are typically used for differential protection and with the teleprotection scheme for
distance protection and ground-fault protection. In SIPROTEC 5, you can configure protection interfaces in all
devices and then use them for further protection applications. At the same time, any binary information and
measured values can be transferred between the devices.
3.5.3.2 Structure of the Function

The protection interfaces of a device are located in the Protection communication function group. A device
has 1 or 2 specifically parameterizable protection interfaces.
The protection topology is used for administration of that topology data relevant to the respective interfaces
and containing data from other devices in the protection topology.
[dwstruct-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-38 Structure of the Protection Interface in a Device
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The protection communication runs physically via a serial optical communication module. This module can
have 1 or 2 channels. The protection communication can take place via various modules. This depends on
the type of interface and the application. DIGSI 5 is used to configure 1 or 2 channels of a serial optical
module as a protection interface. This enables communication with the values set at the protection interface
via this channel.
3.5.3.3 Function Description
Topology and Type of Protection Communication

The protection interfaces (PI) establish a direct point-to-point connection between devices via different
communication media. Data can be transferred within the switchgear or between switchgears.
Devices connected to one another with protection communication form a protection topology. Refer to
Figure 3-39.
The protection communication in a device can be either type 1 or type 2. In the case of devices with differen-
tial protection function (7SD and 7SL), a protection communication of type 1 is automatically created. Type 2
is created for other devices, and is used for other data transmission. A device can contain only the same
types of protection communication. Type 1 and type 2 protection communication do not work together in pairs
via a protection function.
Types Description
Type 1 With type 1, the differential protection function is the primary application.
Application using differential This application requires the greatest portion of the bandwidth, so that
protection with type 1 the number of signals additionally available is lower. This
becomes noticeable with a 64-kBit/s protection connection via a G703.1
or X21 interface. If a multiple-end differential-protection application is
realized, all protection communications must be of type 1.
A maximum of 6 line ends is possible.
Type 2 Type 2 has a significantly higher amount of information that can be
Application without using differen- transferred, as the differential-protection application is not used here..
tial protection The transmission of protection data and other data, for example, meas-
ured values, is predominant here. Using type 2 protection communica-
tion, a maximum of 6 devices can be connected to one another and
different device types (for example, 6MD, 7VK, 7SA, and 7SJ) can
exchange data.
[dwintert-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-39 Data Exchange between 4 Devices with Protection Communications of Type 1 or Type 2 in a
Protection Topology
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
2-Device Topology: Simple or Redundant Transfer

In the case of a simple two-device topology, one protection communication per device is required (see next
figure).
The most frequent application is the two-line-end differential protection (the protection communication is of
type 1) or the point-to-point exchange of data between 2 devices (the protection communication is of type 2),
as performed by protection transmission devices.
[dwinterf-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-40 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having Protection Communication
NOTE
i The index describes the consecutive numbering of the devices in a protection topology (see parameter
Local device is device).
A maximum of 2 protection communications can be integrated in one device (see next figure). If 2 protection
communications of the same type are connected to one another, this results in 100 % redundancy regarding
the transmission route. The devices then search for the communication connection with the highest band-
width (for example, optical fiber). If this connection fails, the system switches over automatically to the 2nd
connection until the 1st connection is available again. As the connection with lower bandwidth defines the
maximum amount of transferable information, the same information is exchanged via both connections. An
application for this is differential protection realized via a redundant communication connection. Both protec-
tion communications in the device are then of type 1.
[dwintera-030211-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-41 Data Exchange for 2 Devices, Each Having 2 Protection Communications/Redundant Trans-
mission Route
Multi-Device Topology: Multi-Device Topology: Ring or Chain Topology

When there are more than 2 devices, a communication chain or a communication ring can be established. An
arrangement with a maximum of 6 devices is possible.
To enable the devices in a topology to communicate with one another, the devices automatically detect the
type of topology and their position within this topology. All devices in the topology must contain protection
communications of the same type. In the case of devices with differential protection function 7SD and 7SL, a
protection communication of type 1 is automatically created. Multiple-end configurations are an order option.
In the case of other devices, a protection communication of type 2 is created, which can be present one or 2
times.
A distinction is made between the following types of topology:
Chain topology
Ring topology
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The chain topology is shown in the following figure.

The protection communications must be of the same type to belong to a topology. All protection communica-
tions are of type 1 in a multiple-end differential-protection configuration.
The configuration shows that the indexing of the devices does not have to correspond to the order of the
communication chain.
[dwchaint-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-42 4 SIPROTEC Devices in a Chain Topology
The ring topology is shown in the following figure.

The communication ring has the advantage over the communication chain that the entire communications
system and, for example, the differential protection function also work if one of the communication connec-
tions fails or if a device in the topology is taken out of operation.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.5.3.5 Device-Combination Settings.
The devices detect failure or logging off, and switch over automatically to the remaining communication
paths.
The following figure shows, for example, a four-line-end differential-protection application if all protection
communications are of type 1. A typical application with protection communications of type 2 is the exchange
of indications and measured values between 4 devices (for example, between substations), whereby the
connection can occur via different communication paths. This is the application for a protection-data transmis-
sion device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[dwringto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-43 4 SIPROTEC Devices in a Ring Topology
NOTE
i If a connection fails in the ring topology, this configuration continues to function as a chain topology. In
addition, a device in the constellation can be logged off from the topology.
Protection-Interface Information Transfer

With the protection-interface information transfer, customer-specific indications and measured values can be
communicated via the protection interface with settable update cycles (priorities).
There are 3 different priorities when transferring protection-interface information:
Priority 1: Use Priority 1 for the transmission of fast protection signals that are transferred and updated
at a maximum of every 20 ms in a telegram.
Priority 2: Use Priority 2 for the transmission of fast single-point or double-point indications that are
transferred and updated at a maximum of every 40 ms.
Priority 3: Use Priority 3 for all indications, measured, and metered values that are transferred and
updated a maximum of every 100 ms.
The number of customer-specific signals, indications, and measured values conform with the remaining band-
width. The remaining bandwidth is lower than with all other protection functions (type 2) when using a differ-
ential protection (type 1). Customer-specific measured values consume more bandwidth than single-point
indications.
Communication Media
The communication takes place via direct fiber-optic connections, or via communication networks, or via 2-
wire copper conductors. Siemens recommends a direct fiber-optic connection, as this offers the highest trans-
mission rate of 2 MBit/s and is immune to failures in the communication path while offering the shortest trans-
mission time. This also enables the transmission of a large amount of additional information on differential
protection routes and the remote control of devices at the remote end with DIGSI 5.
The distance to be bridged and the transmission paths available determine the settings of the protection inter-
face. External communication converters are used for the connection to communication networks via
G703.1-, X21-, or G703.6 interfaces. The connection to 2-wire copper cores also takes place via a communi-
cation converter. The C37.94 interface, for example, with 2 MBit/s, offers a direct fiber-optic connection to a
multiplexer with the corresponding interface.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Table 3-7 to Table 3-8 show examples of communication connections.

In the case of a direct connection, the distance bridged depends on the fiber type of the optical fiber. This
distance can also be extended via external repeaters.
The modules in the device can be replaced from outside, so that adaptation to a transmission route is
possible. In the case of the 820-nm double module USART-AE-2FO with 2 channels, 2 protection interfaces
can be operated on one module.
The modules can be located at slots E and F in the base device, and at slots N and P in the plug-in module
assembly with integrated power supply.
When using communication converters, the connection from the device to the communication converter by a
module is established via optical fibers.
Table 3-7 Plug-In Modules for Applications with the Protection Interface
Plug-In Modules
Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO1
Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO2
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO3
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO4

Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via
9/125 m singlemode optical, 4 km via 62.5/125 m
multimode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 24 km via
9/125 m singlemode optical, 4 km via 62.5/125 m
multimode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, 1300 nm, duplex LC plug, 60 km
over 9/125 m singlemode optical fibers
1 x optical serial, bi-directional via 1 optical fiber,
1300/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), LC simplex plug, 40 km via
9/125 m singlemode optical fiber
1550 nm/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), simplex plug LC, 40 km
via 9/125 m singlemode optical fiber
1300 nm/1550 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug,
40 km via 9/125 m singlemode optical fiber
1 USART-AH-1LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side

2 USART-AJ-1LDFOonly in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
3 USART-AX-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side
4 USART-AY-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Plug-In Modules
Module Type: USART-AF-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AW-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AG-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AU-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AK-1LDFO
Module Type: USART-AV-2LDFO
Module Type: USART-AH-1LDFO1
Module Type: USART-AJ-1LDFO2
Module Type: USART-AX-2LDFO3
Module Type: USART-AY-2LDFO4

Physical Connection
1550 nm/1300 nm (Tx/Rx), 2 x simplex LC plug, 40
km via 9/125 m singlemode optical fiber
Table 3-8 Plug-In Modules USART-AD-1FO and USART-AE-2FO
Plug-In Module
USART-AD-1FO
USART-AE-2FO
Plug-In Module
Physical Connection
1 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5 m/125 m multimode optical fibers
2 x optical serial, 820 nm, ST connector, 1.5 km via 62.5 m/125 m multimode optical fibers
Application
Protection interface (Sync. HDLC, IEEE C37.94) X X
NOTE
i The USART plug-in module types can be used in slots E and F in the base module as well as in slots N
and P in the CB202 expansion module. They are not suitable for use in port M in the CB202 expansion
module.
[dwmultim-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-44 Connection over Short Distances, 1.5 km to 2 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
1 USART-AH-1LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side

2 USART-AJ-1LDFOonly in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
3 USART-AX-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AJ-1LDFO or USART-AY-2LDFO on the opposite side
4 USART-AY-2LDFO only in connection with USART-AH-1LDFO or USART-AX-2LDFO on the opposite side
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Figure 3-45 Connection over Maximum 4 km via Multimode Optical Fiber
[dwsingle-070611-03.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-46 Connection via Different Distances via Singlemode Optical Fiber
NOTE
i In order to prevent optical overload of the receiver, a 7XV5107-0AA00 attenuator must be used on one
side in the optical-fiber modules USART-AF, USART-AG, USART-AU, USART-AK, and USART-AV for
distances of less than 25 km/50 km.
[dwsingle-020513-04.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-47 Connection via Singlemode Optical Fiber
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Figure 3-48 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.1 Interface
The connection to the multiplexer is established via a communication converter with a G703.1 interface (64
Kbps) or X21 interface (64 Kbps to 512 Kbps). You can make the setting for the bit rate KU-XG-512 (for X21),
KU-XG-256 (for X21), KU-XG-128 (for X21), and KU-XG-64 (for X21 or G703.1) with the parameter Connec-
tion via.
You can find more information in Table 3-9.
Figure 3-49 Connection via Communication Network with a G703.6 Interface
The connection to the multiplexer is established with 512 kBit/s via a communication converter with a G703.6
interface (E1 with 2 MBit/s or T1 with 1.44 MBit/s). The communication converter offers a 2nd interface for
connecting a further protection interface.
Make the setting for the bit rate with KU-2M-512 with 512 Kbps in accordance with Table 3-9 with the param-
eter Connection via. .
[dwmulti7-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-50 Connection via 2-Wire Copper Cables
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The connection to a communication converter with an integrated 5-kV isolating voltage is established with
128 Kbps (KU-KU-128 setting in accordance with Table 3-9). A 20-kV isolation of the 2-wire connection is
possible via an external 7XR9516 isolating transformer.
[dwrepeat-070611-10.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-51 Direct Fiber-Optic Connection via an External Repeater
The repeater offers an interface for connecting an additional protection interface. The connection to a
repeater is established with 512 kBit/s (repeater 512 setting in accordance with Table 3-9).
[dwmutip8-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-52 Direct Optical Connection to a Multiplexer with a C37.94 N * 64-kBit/s Interface (Time Slot N =
1; 2 or 8)
NOTE
i The redundancy of different communication connections (for the ring topology) requires rigorous separa-
tion of all devices involved in the communication. Therefore, avoid different communication paths via the
same multiplexer board, as no more substitute paths are possible if the board fails.
Supervision of the Communication

The communication is continuously monitored by the devices.
If a number of defective data telegrams, or no data telegrams at all, are received, this is regarded as a failure
in the communication as soon as a failure time of 100 ms (default setting can be changed) is exceeded. A list
of the measured values is shown in a window in DIGSI 5 (defective telegrams per minute/hour; transmitted
and received telegrams per minute/hour, percentage fault rate per minute/hour). A corresponding failure indi-
cation is always available. If no alternative communication path exists (as in the ring topology), the protection
function operating with the protection interface is not operating and the remote signals are not updated on the
receiver side.
If the communication is interrupted for longer than an adjustable time Data-connection failure, this is regarded
as failure of the communication. A corresponding failure indication is always available.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Time Synchronization via the Protection Interface

All devices of a topology can be time-synchronized with one another. Synchronization is carried out with
microsecond accuracy. The synchronization works independently of the protection function and is exclusively
for simultaneous time keeping in the devices of a protection topology.
The device you set in the parameter Address of device 1 is the device with index 1. This device has the
function of the timing master in a protection topology. If the timing master is logged off and switched off, the
device with the next highest device index takes on the function of the timing master. The timing master
synchronizes the clocks of the other devices of this topology via the protection interfaces. The time of the
timing master is typically synchronized via a substation control protocol (for example, via Ethernet or via
SNTP) or via IRIG-B. For this, these time sources must be set as the 1st time source and optionally as the
2nd time source in the timing master. If available, the system switches over to the 2nd source upon outage of
the 1st source in the timing master. This time is communicated with microsecond accuracy to the other
devices of the topology.
Set the protection interface as the 1st time source in the other devices of the topology. In this way, all events
in the devices of the protection topology are recorded with the same time and are time-synchronized even
across different substations. This simplifies fault analysis and the fault records are recorded with the same
time in all devices.
[dwtimesy-130212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-53 Time Synchronization in a Protection Topology
Figure 3-53 shows how device 1 with index 1 is synchronized with the devices 2, 3, and 4 via the protection
interface. Device 1 is synchronized externally from 2 sources (IRIG-B and SNTP via Ethernet).
Time Synchronization of the Line Differential Protection Measured Values with Microsecond Accuracy
The measured values of the line differential protection for the various line ends are synchronized with each
other with microsecond accuracy via the mechanisms of the protection interface. The protection interface
displays this state with the COMING indication Protection interface synchronized.
If communication problems occur, it is possible that the measured values may not be properly synchronized.
In this case, the protection interface generates the GOING indication Protection interface
synchronized. The line differential protection is blocked. This state can be corrected only by manual inter-
vention.
NOTE
i You can reset the synchronization of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset synchron..
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Synchronization via GPS second pulse

Microsecond-accurate synchronization of the devices (1*10E-06 s), connected via protection interfaces, can
take place via a high-precision GPS second pulse at the time-synchronous port G for special differential
protection applications or synchrophasor measuring devices. As a result, the time delay of the communication
path can be measured and displayed separately in the forward and reverse directions. This ensures that the
maximum responsivity can be obtained during differential protection, even if transmission times are unbal-
anced in the communication networks. Different transmission times are insignificant for the transmission of
protection data with a protection communication of type 2.
Log off the Device

A device can be logged off for protection-function tests, system inspections, or disconnection of a feeder for
operational reasons. The device that is logged off no longer participates in the distributed functionality and is
therefore no longer a component of the topology. The protection functions are still in operation for the other
end or ends.
The following conditions are necessary for a successful logoff of the device from the point of view of protec-
tion communication:
The protection topology is not in a transient state and is stable in operation without switchovers.
The local device is one of the 2 token masters if there is a chain topology. The token masters are the
devices at the ends of the chain.
The circuit breaker must be open and current must not be flowing.
NOTE
i If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the device cannot be logged off.
3.5.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection Interface in DIGSI 5

If the device is provided with modules, proceed as follows:
Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface. A text box entitled Protec-
tion interface will then appear.
[scconfcp-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-54 Selection of the Communication Protocol
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Then select the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (see next figure).
Depending on the device, the selection of constellations can be restricted to 2 or 3 devices.
The number of devices is an order option with regard to differential protection.
[scconfws-241110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-55 Selecting the Constellation
NOTE
i You have the option of changing the number of devices (for example 2 protection communication devices)
depending on the product code any way you like via the Select constellation text box.
If you change the number of devices via the Select constellation text box, all activated constellation
settings are lost.
If the module slot is not yet provided with modules, proceed as follows:
Select the desired communication module in the rear view of the device.
Select the module from the catalog and drag it to a channel. Thus is the channel configured with a
module. DIGSI 5 indicates whether the module can be used for protection communication under Device
Information.
Use the Communication protocols text box to select the protection interface. A text box entitled Protec-
tion interface will then appear (see Figure 3-54 ).
Then use the Select constellation text box to select the number of devices (for example 2 devices
protection com.) (see Figure 3-55 ).
3.5.3.5 Device-Combination Settings

Make the device-combination settings and the settings for protection communication (see next figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scconfig-181013-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-56 Protection Interface Initialization and Configuration
Changes in a channel are always visible on the other channel as well. All further parameters can be set sepa-
rately for individual channels.
Setting Device-Combination Settings
Default setting (_:5131:102) Address of device 1 = 101

The parameters Address of device 1 to Address of device 6 can be used to give an address to
each device. Set a unique and unambiguous address for each device.
Default setting (_:5131:101) Local device is device = 1
With the Local device is device parameter, you set the index (number) of your device in the topology.
A maximum of 6 devices can be present in one topology.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE
You have a topology with 2 devices.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
For example, in DIGSI 5, select the parameter setting Address of device 1 with the parameter value
101 for device 1 and the parameter setting Address of device 2 with the parameter value 102 for
device 2.
Then, use the Local device is device parameter to set the index of the local device.
The addresses must be configured identically for all devices involved in the constellation. A functional protec-
tion communication requires that you also assign the same index in all devices of a constellation for a device
with a unique address.
Default setting (_:5131:122) Lowest appearing bit rate = 64 kBit/s
The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter is used to set the smallest occurring bit rate in the device
group. Set the smallest value in each device with a three-end constellation with 2 optical fiber connections (2
MBit/s) and a 64-Kbps connection. This value determines the maximum signals and measured values within
a constellation.
Apart from the default value, you can also set the following bit rates:
128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s
NOTE
i If you use fiber-optic cables for the connection between the devices, set the value to 2048 kBit/s.
3.5.3.6 Selecting the Connection
Default setting (_:105) Connection via = fiber optic

The Connection via parameter is used to set the bit rate required for the protection interface. Different
discrete values can be entered depending on the means of communication (see following table).
Table 3-9 Means of Communication
Means of Communication See Setting Value Bit Rate

Fiber-optic direct connection Figure 3-44 to fiber optic 2 Mbit/s
Figure 3-47
CC-XG-512 communication converter Figure 3-48 CCXG 512 kBit/s 512 kbit/s
Repeater 512 communication converter Figure 3-51 repeater 512 kBit/s 512 kbit/s
CC-CC-128 communication converter Figure 3-50 CCPW 128 kBit/s 128 kbit/s
CC-2M-512 communication converter Figure 3-49 CC2M 512 kBit/s 512 kbit/s
Multiplexer with C37.94 interface Figure 3-52 C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s 64 kbit/s
C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s 128 kbit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s 512 kbit/s
Other (freely adjustable bit rates for a 64 kBit/s 64 kbit/s
direct connection for special applications) 128 kBit/s 128 kbit/s
512 kBit/s 512 kbit/s
2048 kBit/s 2048
kbit/s
3.5.3.7 Setting Notes for the Protection Interface
Parameter: Max. Error Rate/h
Default setting (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour = 1.0 %
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The Max. error rate per hour parameter allows you to receive an error message on the number of
faults per hour. An indication is then generated.
Parameter: Max. Error Rate/min
Default setting (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min = 1.0 %

The Max. error rate per min parameter allows you to receive an error message on the number of
faults per minute. An indication is then generated.
Parameter: Disturbance Alarm After
Default setting (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after = 100 ms

The Disturbance alarm after parameter determines the time delay after which defective or missing
telegrams are signaled as faulty.
Parameter: Transm. Fail. Alarm After
Default setting (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after = 6.0 s

The Transm. fail. alarm after parameter is used to set the time after which a failure of the commu-
nication is signaled.
NOTE
i If the setting values of the parameters Disturbance alarm after and Transm. fail. alarm
after are exceeded, then an indication is generated.
Parameter: Delay time threshold
Default setting (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold = 30.0 ms

For the Delay time threshold , the default setting is selected such that it is not exceeded by normal
communication networks. If this time delay is exceeded during operation (for example, upon switchover to
another transmission route), the indication Time delay exceeded is issued.
Parameter: Difference Tx and Rx time
Default setting (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx time = 0.1 ms

The Difference Tx and Rx time parameter can be used to set a maximum time-delay difference
between the send and receive paths.
Set this value to 0 for a direct fiber-optic connection. A higher value is necessary for transmission via commu-
nication networks. Reference value: 0.1 ms (recommended setting value).
NOTE
i If the user employs a multiplexer with a C37.94 interface as a communication medium, Siemens recom-
mends a setting value of 0.25 ms to 0.6 ms.
Parameter: PPS Synchronization
Default setting (_:5161:113) PPS synchronization = PPS sync. off

If the SIPROTEC device operates with PPS synchronization (PPS: pulse per second), use the PPS
synchronization parameter to define how the protection is activated after restoration of the communica-
tion connection (basic state or after transmission fault).
For this, see Figure 3-57 .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
NOTE
i The PPS measurement is used to consider the time delay in the send and receive directions. If PPS fails
due to a reception fault or due to a short-term unfavorable satellite position, synchronization via conven-
tional communication media remains active.
The PPS synchronization parameter offers 3 different setting options:

telegr. and PPS With this setting, the differential protection is only enabled upon renewed
establishment of the connection, if the communication section is synchronized
via PPS or if symmetrical time delays are signaled by an external operation
(binary input).
This results in synchronization with the telegram measurement supported by
the PPS measurement.
telegr. or PPS In this setting, the differential protection is enabled immediately upon renewed
establishment of connection (data telegrams are received). The conventional
method is used up to synchronization.
This results in synchronization with the telegram measurement supported by
the PPS measurement.
PPS sync. off This setting means that no synchronization is performed via PPS at the protec-
tion interface. This is typically the case if no time-delay differences are
expected.
The synchronization only takes place with the telegram measurement.
NOTE
i The synchronization mode can be set separately for both protection interfaces.
If no further PPS pulse is received within 2.1 s, the time-out monitoring responds. If no new 2nd pulse occurs
after the expiry of the supervision time, the indication PPS pulse loss is issued.
[loppssyn-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-57 Setting the PPS Synchronization
The binary input >PPS pulse loss can be used to signal an externally detected fault in the PPS signal (for
example, error message from the receiver). Setting this binary input also leads to the indication PPS pulse
loss .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
If you are using a second pulse from a GPS receiver, you must ensure that a loss of reception or reception
disturbances do not generate a second pulse. The GPS receivers recommended by Siemens are set by
default so that a loss of reception or reception disturbances do not generate a second pulse. In the event of
problems, check the setting value for the second pulse.
Siemens recommends the Meinberg 164 GPS receiver. Check the default setting for the second pulse using
the GPSMON32 program. The program is available in the SIPROTEC Download area . You can find the
setting value under Outputs Enable Flags. The second pulse must be set to the value if Sync.
[scGPS_1, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-58 Checking the Setting Value for the Second Pulse with the GPSMON32 Program, Step 1
[scGPS_2, 2, --_--]
Figure 3-59 Checking the Setting Value for the Second Pulse with the GPSMON32 Program, Step 2
3.5.3.8 Routing Information in DIGSI 5

Protection-data communications of the same type form a topology.
For more information on this, see chapter 3.5.3.3 Function Description.
A data bar is exchanged between the devices of a topology connected via protection communication. This
can be written into or read from by the devices. This can be used for exchanging various signals between the
devices. In this case, each signal demands a certain number of data fields.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[dwdatenl-100113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-60 Data Bar Exchanged Between Devices
The data bar is divided into 3 priorities, which also have different transmission rates and data volumes.
The following basic principle applies for all messages: Only pure data contents are transmitted. The quality
(for example, Valid) is not automatically transmitted as well. If you want to transmit the quality as well (for
example, for further processing of GOOSE messages), the quality must be transmitted separately (for
example, by using CFC). If a signal that has a test flag is transmitted (because its function is in test mode, for
example), all signals are provided with a test flag on the receiving side. If the connection is broken, all
received signals are flagged with the quality Invalid. If desired, the value can also be set to a secure state
after a selectable dropout time, or the last value received can be retained (Hold setting). This can be config-
ured separately for each received signal (see Table 3-13).
NOTE
i For ACT type signals, only the phase information is transmitted.
Indications that are transferred data fields of priority 1 are sent with every telegram. They are preferably used
for the transmission of rapid signals, for example release for circuit-breaker intertripping. A strictly determin-
istic, rapid transmission is required there.
Signals of priority 2 are transmitted with at least every 2nd telegram. For bit rates >256 kbits/s, there are no
differences between priority 1 and priority 2.
Priority 3 information is transmitted at least every 100 ms. This priority is used for transmission of measured
and metered values. Complex values must be routed separately as the real and the imaginary part for trans-
mission. Measured-value thresholds that lead to an updating of a measured value are set centrally as a prop-
erty of the measured value. These measured-value thresholds apply with the corresponding reporting, for
example, also for the transfer via IEC 61850 to a substation automation technology.
Indications which are written to a data area x under a priority on the data bar must be routed to an indication
of the same type in the device reading this information. Otherwise, they are processed incorrectly on the
receiving side. The data bar is organized in terms of bits. For information on the bit requirement by each
signal type, refer to Table 3-12.
Table 3-10 and Table 3-11 show the number of data areas in the data bar in relation to the available baud
rate.
NOTE
i The Lowest appearing bit rate parameter, which has to be set in each device for the protection
interfaces of a topology, defines the number of data areas as well as the topology type.
If, for example, in a three-end constellation with a type 2 chain topology two devices are connected via direct
optical fibers and 2 devices via the 64 Kbps weakest line, the 64-Kbps section is the limiting factor for the
entire constellation.
Table 3-10 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 64/128 kbits/s
Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

Type 1 8 Bits 24 Bits 128 Bits
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Table 3-11 Available Bits - Minimum Constellation Baud Rate 512/2048 kbits/s
Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3

Table 3-12 Requirement in Bits
Signal Type Size in Bits

SP (single-point indication) 1 Bit
DP (double-point indication) 2 Bits
IN (metered values) 32 Bits
MW (measured values)5 32 Bits
ACT 4 Bits
Table 3-13 Possible Dropout Values
Signal Type Dropout Values

SP (single-point indication) Outgoing, Incoming, Hold
DP (double-point indication) On, Off, Intermediate Position, Disturbed Position,
Hold
IN (metered values) 0, Hold
MW (measured values) 0, Hold
ACT Hold
NOTE
i If the protection link fails, these values can be set on the receiver side.
EXAMPLE
2 devices are connected with differential protection via a 64-Kbits channel. This is a type 1 topology; 8 bits
are freely available for priority 1. Now, for example, 4 SPS and 2 DPS can be routed:
4 x 1 Bit + 2 x 2 Bits = 8 Bits
NOTE
i Measured values are transmitted as primary values.
EXAMPLE
For the rated current display in the receiving device
When Irated = 1000 A in the transmitting device and ILoad = 200 A, the number 200 is displayed in the receiving
device. Remote Data Transmission:
Remote Data Transmission: Routing of the Indications and Measured Values to the Protection Interface
The transmission is organized in the form of a data bar which is continuously exchanged between the
devices.
For this, see Figure 3-60.
A device indication or measured value is allocated to a definite data area of the bar.
5 The complex vectors of a measuring point are pre-routed
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Figure 3-61 to Figure 3-64 show the routing for a communication topology of protection interface type 1.
To transmit signals to other devices, these signals must be routed in the communication matrix under
Transmit. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are single-point indications (SPS) and are routed to position 1 and position 2
of the transmission with the highest priority (priority 1). For 64 Kbps, for example, only 8 of these data areas
are available for type 1; they are exchanged between the transmission routes with each telegram. Signals 3
and 4 are double-point indications (DPS), for example a switch position that is transmitted by a device 1. A
double-point indication occupies 2 positions on the data bar. In addition, a measured and metered value are
communicated via priority 3.
As a measured or metered value uses 32 bits, value 2 starts at position 33. DIGSI 5 indicated the next avail-
able position.
[scransps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-61 Assignment of Single Indications to the Protection Interface in Device 1
[scrangmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-62 Assignment of Measured Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scrangzw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-63 Assignment of Counting Values to the Protection Interface in Device 1
This device also receives information (in the matrix under Receive). This must have been routed as a target
for other devices (see next figure). The binary outputs 1 and 2 in device 1 receive their information via the
protection interface. This is priority 1 information, which has been routed in another device to position 3 and 4
of the data bar. The secure state is defined in the Fallback Value column. If the data connection fails, the
single-point indication is reset to coming or going or its value is retained (hold). For data of the various
priorities, you can also set a dropout time after which the resetting (see Figure 3-63) to the fallback value
occurs, in order to retain the original state for a short time in the event of brief interruptions. These 3 dropout
times apply for all data of one transmission priority and are set as parameters.
[scspsemp-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-64 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 1
The following figure shows the routing in the 2nd device. Binary inputs 1 and 2 are routed with priority 1 to
positions 3 and 4 there. In device 1, positions 1 and 2 are already occupied (see Figure 3-61). If you also
route the signals to positions 1 and 2, the signals of the devices are then connected to the corresponding
position with a logical OR operation. If measured and metered values are routed in the same data areas, this
results in implausible values for the receivers that read the data. As a user, you are therefore responsible for
the correct routing.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scbaspsr-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-65 Routing of Single Indications to be Sent to the Protection Interface in Device 2
The binary outputs 1 and 2 (Receive) in the 2nd device are connected to priority 1 signals 1 and 2 from the
1st device. This takes place via the data areas at positions 1 and 2 of the data bar, which transfer the state of
the indications. Other devices can also read this information and link it to their internal signals. Here, too, the
secure state, which is assumed when the protection connection is interrupted, is entered. This state depends
on the information. In the case of single-point indications, the state is 0 or 1. In the case of double-point indi-
cations, the bit combinations 00, 01, 10, or 11 are possible, in order to directly signal a disturbed position
upon failure of the data connection, for example.
Hold is used to retain the state.
[scbausps-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-66 Routing of Single-Point Indications (Receive) to the Protection Interface in Device 2
[scbausmw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-67 Routing of Received Indications to the Protection Interface in Device 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scbauszw-021210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-68 Assignment of Counting Values to the Protection Interface in Device 2
3.5.3.9 Diagnostic Measured Values of the Protection Interface

The following diagnostic data is provided via the protection interfaces by the devices in the constellation:
Address of the device in the constellation
Circuit-breaker switch position (open/closed/undefined) (only for protection interfaces of type 1)
Availability of protection-interface communication within the last minute, as percentage

Availability of protection-interface communication within the last hour, as percentage
Time delay in the send and receive direction of the telegrams between local and neighboring device
You can find this diagnostic data in DIGSI under the following menu structure (see Figure 3-69 ):
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[sc_diagnose_wskanle_gerteadresse, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-69 Protection-Interface Channel Diagnostic Data - Device Address
NOTE
i You can use the following procedure to reset the measured values for the protection interface directly in
the device:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
Output Signals of the Protection Interface

Each individual protection interface provides the following indications for commissioning and diagnosing
communication:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Indication Description
(_:5161:301) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 1 and 2 1 and 2 (1: Physical Layer, 2: Data Link Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
Initialized:
The protection interface is not connected and is in the Initial state.
Protection interface connected:
The protection interface is connected to the protection interface of a device.
Protection interface failure:
The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after .
Protection interface failure:
The protection interface has not received any valid telegrams for the time
set in parameter (_:5161:108) Transm. fail. alarm after .
not present:
The protection interface has not been assigned to a communication
channel.
(_:5161:302) Status The output signal gives you information about the state of communication layers
of lay. 3 and 4 3 and 4 (3: Network Layer, 4: Transport Layer). The following indications values
are possible:
no error:
The protection interface is operating correctly.
Software versions incomp.:
The firmware versions of the connected devices are incompatible. Update
the firmware.
System mirroring:
The protection interface is receiving its own data. Check the wiring.
Dev. add. incorrect:
The device address of the partner device is incorrect. Check the settings for
parameters Address of device 1 to address of device n
( _:5131:102 and following).
Constell. incorrect:
The constellation settings of the devices are different. Check that the setting
for the parameter Select constellation is identical in all devices.
Const. param. incorrect:
Check that the same setting has been made for parameter (_:5131:122)
Lowest appearing bit rate in all devices.
Diff. Param. Error:
The line differential protection settings for the connected devices are incom-
patible. Check whether both devices are set to operate with or without line
differential protection.
The rated value of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated current
and (_:9001:102) Rated voltage ) must have the identical setting at
both ends of the line. If a transformer is installed in the line, both parame-
ters must be set such that the rated apparent power is the same at both
ends of the line (parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power ).
In order to clarify faults, each individual protection interface provides the following binary signals:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Binary Output Signal Description

(_:5161:303) Signal Connection broken indicates that during a parameterized time
Connection broken (parameter (_:5161:107) Disturbance alarm after ) faulty or missing
telegrams were continuously received. If the 'Connection interrupted' indication
occurs, the affected protection interface link will be terminated. This may cause
the blocking of an active differential protection or a ring topology may change to
a chain topology.
(_:5161:316) Error Signal Error rate / min exc. indicates that the set maximum error rate
rate / min exc. per minute (Parameter (_:5161:106) Max. error rate per min ) has
been exceeded.
(_:5161:317) Error Signal Error rate / hour exc. indicates that the set maximum error rate
rate / hour exc. per hour (Parameter (_:5161:105) Max. error rate per hour ) has
been exceeded.
(_:5161:318) Time Signal Time delay exceeded indicates that the threshold value for the set
delay exceeded signal-transit time (Parameter (_:5161:109) Delay time threshold )
has been exceeded.
(_:5161:319) Time Signal Time delay different indicates that the threshold value for asym-
delay different metrical transit times has been exceeded. The setting value results from the
setting value of the parameter (_:5161:110) Difference Tx and Rx
time .
(_:5161:320) Time Signal Time delay jump indicates that the data transit times changed
delay jump abruptly. This is caused by switching the communication path in the communica-
tion network.
(_:5161:321) PI Signal PI synchronized indicates that the protection-interface connection is
synchronized synchronized with the opposite end.
(_:5161:340) Tele- Signal Telegram lost indicates that an expected telegram has failed to arrive
gram lost or a faulty telegram has been received.
If you would like to allocate the communication failures or faults to other events,
move the signal Telegram lost temporarily into the operational log. Such
events may be switching operations in the primary system or operations on the
components of the communication network.
Note: If the signal is constantly routed, the operational log may overflow.
Siemens recommends routing the signal only for clarification of faults.
Measured Values of the Protection Interface

The protection interface provides the following measured value to diagnose the protection interface communi-
cation:
Measured Value Description
(_:5161:308) Tx Telegrams sent during the last hour
tel/h
(_:5161:309) Rx Telegrams received during the last hour
tel/h
(_:5161:310) Tx Telegrams sent during the last minute
tel/min
(_:5161:311) Rx Telegrams received during the last minute
tel/min
(_:5161:312) Tx Transmission failure rate during the last hour
err/h
(_:5161:313) Rx Reception failure rate during the last hour
err/h
(_:5161:314) Tx Transmission failure rate during the last minute
err/min
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

(_:5161:315) Rx Reception failure rate during the last minute
err/min
(_:5161:325) Aver. Mean signal-transit time (average value of the transit time in transmission and
t reception direction divided by 2, without GPS synchronization)
(_:5161:326) Rec. Signal-transit time in reception direction (with GPS synchronization)
t
(_:5161:327) Sen. Signal-transit time in transmission direction (with GPS synchronization)
t
(_:5161:334) Number of telegram failures within the last minute
Miss.tel/min
(_:5161:335) Number of telegram failures within the last hour
Miss.tel/h
(_:5161:336) Number of telegram failures within the last day
Miss.tel/d
(_:5161:337) Number of telegram failures within the last week
Miss.tel/w
(_:5161:338) M. Longest lasting telegram failure within the last day
loss/d
(_:5161:339) M. Longest lasting telegram failures within the last week
loss/w
NOTE
i You can reset the measured values of the protection interface directly in the device. Proceed as follows:
Device functions > x Device protection comm. > Protection interface y > Reset measured values.
3.5.3.10 Diagnostic Data for the Protection Interface
Diagnostic Data of the Channel in DIGSI 5

Different diagnostic data can be read with DIGSI 5.
For this, connect with the device via DIGSI 5 and query the device information. Diagnostic data for a module
whose channel is configured with the protection interface can be received by selecting the module slots (for
example, F) and the corresponding channel (1 or 2). The following figures show the extensive diagnostic data
for the protection interface. It is particularly helpful if data failures occur or other irregularities in a communica-
tion connection (for example, transmission time fluctuations).
NOTE
i The diagnostic data can also be read via the device control on the display of the device. The overview of
DIGSI 5 does not offer this option, however.
The following table describes the displays.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scdiapin-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-70 Diagnostic Data of a Channel Configured with the Protection Interface
Table 3-14 Description of the Diagnostic Data under Protection Interface
Channel Type Name Values Description - Diagnostic

Information for Log PI
Protection interfaces - log Status Initial, Running, Error Runtime status of the log
Protection interfaces - log Build Date/time Date and time of the log
version
Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log in DIGSI 5

The following figures and tables describe the displays of the protection-interface log.
[scdiamed-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-71 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - Media Status
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Table 3-15 Description of Diagnostic Data under Media Status
Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - Media Status

Type Interface (in Direction of
Outside Interface)
Media Status Baud rate 64 kBit/s; 128 kBit/s; 512 HDLC baud rate:
kBit/s; 2048 kBit/s; 30 FO: 64 kBit/s to 2048 kBit/s
MBit/s; <unknown> for 820-Nm USART modules
LDFO: 30 MBit/s for
1300/1500-Nm long-distance
modules
Error case: <unknown>
Media Status LinkState N/A, UP, DOWN FO: N/A (always display
N/A)
Media Status TransceiverDetection N/A, NO Transceiver FO: N/A (always N/A)
detected, Transceiver (NO Transceiver detected,
detected Transceiver detected),
Error case: N/A
[scdiacom-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-72 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Table 3-16 Description of Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - HDLC (Log - Layer)
Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - HDLC Link

Type Layer Diagnostic Information
(in Direction of Outside Inter-
face)
HDLC RXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, OK
HDLC RXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
HDLC RXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
frames (16 bit counter) priority, faulty
HDLC RXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
HDLC TXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
HDLC TXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
HDLC TXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
HDLC TXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
HDLC Bridge Details Sub-nodes Sub-nodes Siemens-internal special
diagnostic for fault search
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scdiahdl-140912-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-73 Diagnostic Data of the Protection-Interface Log - COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface
Between Module and Mainboard)
Table 3-17 Description of Diagnostic Data of the COM Interface (Internal COM Link Interface Between
Module and Mainboard)
Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - COM Interface

(Internal COM Link Interface
in Mainboard Direction)
COM interface RXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
COM interface RXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
COM interface RXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, high
COM interface RXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Incoming telegrams, low
COM interface TXHPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - COM Interface

(Internal COM Link Interface
in Mainboard Direction)
COM interface TXLPFramesOK Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
COM interface TXHPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, high
COM interface TXLPFramesERR Number of corresponding Sending telegrams, low
COM interface Bridge Details Sub-nodes Sub-nodes Siemens-internal special
diagnostic for fault search
Table 3-18 Description of Diagnostic Data of some Setting Values of the Protection Interface
Protection Interfaces - Log Name Values Description - Protection

Type Interface Setting Values
Settings Connection via Integer number - display of Protection interface is
the internal coding of the Connection via
settings variant
Settings PDI bandwidth Bit-rate display Bit rate (bit/s) for protection
telegrams based on the
parameter Connection
via
Settings PDI Telegram.Overhead Display of bits Overhead for every protec-
tion telegram in bit.
3.5.3.11 Settings

Device combin.
_:5131:102 Device combin.:Address of 1 to 65534 101
device 1
device 2
device 3
device 4
device 5
device 6
_:5131:101 Device combin.:Local 1 to 6 1
device is device
_:5131:122 Device combin.:Lowest 64 kBit/s 64 kBit/s
appearing bit rate 128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

Prot.interface
_:105 Prot.interface:Connection fiber optic fiber optic
via CCXG 512 kBit/s
CCXG 128 kBit/s
CCXG 64 kBit/s
repeater 512 kBit/s
CCPW 128 kBit/s
CC2M 512 kBit/s
C37.94 1 * 64 kBit/s
C37.94 2 * 64 kBit/s
C37.94 8 * 64 kBit/s
64 kBit/s
128 kBit/s
512 kBit/s
2048 kBit/s
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:1 Prot. interf.1:Mode off on
on
_:5161:105 Prot. interf.1:Max. error 0.000 % to 100.000 % 1.000 %
rate per hour
_:5161:106 Prot. interf.1:Max. error 0.000 % to 100.000 % 1.000 %
rate per min
_:5161:107 Prot. interf.1:Disturbance 0.05 s to 2.00 s 0.10 s
alarm after
_:5161:108 Prot. interf.1:Transm. fail. 0.0 s to 6.0 s 6.0 s
alarm after
_:5161:109 Prot. interf.1:Delay time 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms 30.0 ms
threshold
_:5161:110 Prot. interf.1:Difference Tx 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms 0.100 ms
and Rx time
_:5161:113 Prot. interf.1:PPS synchro- telegr. and PPS PPS sync. off
nization telegr. or PPS
PPS sync. off
3.5.3.12 Information List

(Type)
Channel 1
_:307 Prot.interface:Health ENS O
_:304 Prot.interface:Channel Live SPS O
Device combin.
_:5131:52 Device combin.:Behavior ENS O
_:5131:53 Device combin.:Health ENS O
_:5131:301 Device combin.:Status of topo. recog. ENS O
_:5131:302 Device combin.:Topology is ENS O
_:5131:303 Device combin.:Devices form ENS O
_:5131:304 Device combin.:Number of detect. dev. INS O
_:5131:305 Device combin.:Fct. logoff device 1 SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

(Type)
_:5131:312 Device combin.:Device 1 available SPS O
Prot. interf.1
_:5161:81 Prot. interf.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5161:500 Prot. interf.1:>Sync reset SPS I
_:5161:341 Prot. interf.1:Reset synchronization SPC C
_:5161:342 Prot. interf.1:Reset measurements SPC C
_:5161:52 Prot. interf.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5161:53 Prot. interf.1:Health ENS O
_:5161:301 Prot. interf.1:Status of lay. 1 and 2 ENS O
_:5161:302 Prot. interf.1:Status of lay. 3 and 4 ENS O
_:5161:303 Prot. interf.1:Connection broken SPS O
_:5161:316 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / min exc. SPS O
_:5161:317 Prot. interf.1:Error rate / hour exc. SPS O
_:5161:318 Prot. interf.1:Time delay exceeded SPS O
_:5161:319 Prot. interf.1:Time delay different SPS O
_:5161:320 Prot. interf.1:Time delay jump SPS O
_:5161:321 Prot. interf.1:PI synchronized SPS O
_:5161:340 Prot. interf.1:Telegram lost SPS O
_:5161:308 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/h MV O
_:5161:309 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/h MV O
_:5161:310 Prot. interf.1:Tx tel/min MV O
_:5161:311 Prot. interf.1:Rx tel/min MV O
_:5161:312 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/h MV O
_:5161:313 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/h MV O
_:5161:314 Prot. interf.1:Tx err/min MV O
_:5161:315 Prot. interf.1:Rx err/min MV O
_:5161:334 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/min MV O
_:5161:335 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/h MV O
_:5161:336 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/d MV O
_:5161:337 Prot. interf.1:Miss.tel/w MV O
_:5161:338 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/d MV O
_:5161:339 Prot. interf.1:M. loss/w MV O
_:5161:331 Prot. interf.1:Recept. MV O
_:5161:323 Prot. interf.1:PPS: time del. unsym. SPS O
_:5161:324 Prot. interf.1:PI with PPS synchron. SPS O
_:5161:325 Prot. interf.1:Aver. t MV O
_:5161:326 Prot. interf.1:Rec. t MV O
_:5161:327 Prot. interf.1:Sen. t MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

(Type)
Ext. Synchron.
_:9181:500 Ext. Synchron.:>Block stage SPS I
_:9181:501 Ext. Synchron.:>PPS pulse loss SPS I
_:9181:301 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse loss SPS O
_:9181:302 Ext. Synchron.:PPS pulse SPS O
Meas.val.dev.1
_:1351:6811:300 Meas.val.dev.1:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6811:301 Meas.val.dev.1:Line ENS O
_:1351:6811:302 Meas.val.dev.1:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6811:303 Meas.val.dev.1:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.2
Meas.val.dev.3
Meas.val.dev.4
Meas.val.dev.5
_:1351:6931:300 Meas val.dev.5:Dev.adr. INS O
_:1351:6931:301 Meas val.dev.5:Line ENS O
_:1351:6931:302 Meas val.dev.5:Vph WYE O
_:1351:6931:303 Meas val.dev.5:Iph WYE O
Meas.val.dev.6
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.6 Date and Time Synchronization
Timely recording of process data requires precise time synchronization of the devices. The integrated date/
time synchronization allows the exact chronological assignment of events to an internally managed device
time that is used to time stamp events in logs, which are then transmitted to a substation automation tech-
nology or transferred via the protection interface. A clock module internal to the device and having battery
backup is synchronized cyclically with the current device time so that the right device time is available and
used even in case of auxiliary-voltage failure. At the same time, this permits hardware-supported monitoring
of the device time.
The integrated date/time synchronization is a supervisory device function. Setting parameters and indications
can be found in the following menus for the DIGSI and the device:
Set date and time:
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
Device: Main menu Device functions Date & Time
Parameter:
DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Parameter -> Time Settings
Indications:
DIGSI: Project -> Device -> Information routing ->Time keeping or Time Sync.
Every SIPROTEC 5 device maintains an internal device time with date. The date and time can also be set on
the device via the on-site operation panel or via DIGSI 5. Within a system, or even beyond, it is usually
necessary to record the time of process data accurately and to have exact time synchronization of all devices.
For SIPROTEC 5 devices, the sources of time and synchronization options can be configured.
Configurable Synchronization Options:
None (default setting)

The device functions without any external time synchronization. The internal time synchronization
continues to work with the help of the back-up battery even when the auxiliary voltage is shut down
temporarily. The time can be adjusted manually.
Telegram
The time is synchronized via a telegram with an appropriately configured communication interface in
accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol.
Connection to a radio clock

The time synchronization takes place with the set time telegram from an external IRIG-B or DCF77
receiver via the time synchronization interface of the device.
Ethernet
The time synchronization is done via Ethernet-based SNTP protocol (Simple Network Time Protocol), for
example with IEC 61850 stations or via IEEE 1588. If you enable both services during configuration of
Ethernet interfaces, these protocols are available as an option for the time synchronization.
Protection interface
The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured for your SIPROTEC 5
device. Here, the timing master takes over the time management.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Configurable Time Sources:
2 time sources can be taken into consideration with the SIPROTEC 5 devices. For each time source, the
synchronization type may be selected based on the options provided.
Time source 1 takes precedence over Time source 2, that is, Time source 2 will be effective
for the synchronization of the device time only if Time source 1 fails. If only one time source is avail-
able and it fails, then only the internal clock continues unsynchronized. The status of the time sources is
indicated.
For every time source it is possible to define via the Time zone time source 1 parameter (or Time
zone time source 2) if this source transmits its time by UTC (universal time) or if the settings corre-
spond to the local time zone of the device.
NOTE
i Make sure that the settings for the time sources coincide with the actual hardware configuration of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In any event, incorrect settings cause the status indications of time sources to pick
up.
Configurable Date Format

Regardless of a feed time-synchronization source, a uniform format is maintained internally within the device.
The following options are available for the customary local representation of the date format:
Day.Month.Year: 24.12.2009
Month/Day/Year: 12/24/2009
Year-Month-Day: 2009-12-24
Taking Local Time Zones into Account

The internal device time is maintained in universal time (UTC). To display time stamps in DIGSI and on the
device display, you can define the local time zone of the device (parameter Offset time zone for GMT),
including the applicable daylight saving times (start, end, and offset of daylight saving time) using parameters.
This allows the display of the local time.
NOTE
i For time sources that transmit the status of the switch to daylight saving time, this will be taken into
account automatically when creating the internal device time in the UTC format. The differential time
of the daylight saving time set in the device (parameter Offset daylight saving time) is taken into
consideration. However, in contrast, the settings of the start of daylight saving time and end of the
daylight saving times are ignored when converting into the device internal UTC format.
For active time sources, it is not possible to set the time via the device display or DIGSI 5. An excep-
tion is setting the calendar year for active time protocol IRIG-B.
Status, Supervision, and Indications of Time Management

Your SIPROTEC 5 device generates status and monitoring indications that provide important information
regarding the correct configuration of the time source and the status of the internal time management during
start-up and device operation.
Internal time synchronization is monitored cyclically. Important synchronization processes, the status of the
time sources and errors detected are reported. A device time that has become invalid will be marked accord-
ingly so that affected functions can go to a safe state.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Indication Description
Device: This indication signals a high difference between the
Clock fail internally managed time and the time of the clock
module that is not permissible. The triggering of the
indication can point to a defect in the clock module or
to an unacceptable high drift of the system quartz
crystal. The time maintained internally is marked as
invalid.
Time management: This indication signals whether daylight saving time
Daylight saving time has been enabled.
Time management: This indication signals that the device time has been
Clock set manually set manually via the on-site operation panel or via
DIGSI 5.
Time synchronization: These 2 indications signal whether the active time
Status time source 1 sources are recognized as valid and active from the
Status time source 2 device point of view. When the indications get trig-
gered, it can also be an indication that an incorrect
configuration of the port or channel numbers was
done at the on-site operation panel.
Time synchronization: This indication signals after the parameterized time
Time sync. error Fault indication after that synchronization
using an external time source has failed.
Time synchronization: This indication signals that the device is synchronized
High accuracy with an accuracy better than 1 s. The indication is
only of significance when the PMU function is used.
NOTE
i In case of a missing or discharged battery, the device starts without active external time synchronization
with the device time 2011-01-01 00:00:00 (UTC).
For the device, DIGSI 5 provides a compact overview of the status of the time synchronization of your
SIPROTEC 5 device in online mode. All displays are updated continuously. You can access the overview in
the project-tree window via Online access.
DIGSI: Online access -> Interface -> Device -> Device Information -> Time Information
[sctimedg-220415, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-74 Time Information in DIGSI
For every time source, you see the following:

Last received time (with date)
Receipt time of the last received time telegram
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Configured type of timer
Indication of timer outage or failure
Whether the device time is currently synchronized from the time source
The lower section displays the device time, which is continuously updated. If the internal device time and the
infeed time source were synchronous at the time of telegram receipt, both displayed times are identical.
NOTE
i All times displayed (also the time source) take into consideration the local time settings (zone and daylight
saving time of the device) in the form of a numerical offset for UTC (universal time).
Parameter: Date Format
Default setting Date format = YYYY-MM-DD

With the Date format parameter, you define the local customary format of the date display.
YYYY-MM-DD Day.Month.Year: Typical European display
Example: 24.12.2010
YYYY-MM-DD Month/Day/Year: Typical US representation
Example: 12/24/2010
YYYY-MM-DD Year-Month-Day: Typical Chinese display
Example: 2010-12-24
Parameter: Time zone time source 1,Time zone time source 2
Default setting Time zone time source 1 = local, Time zone time source 2 = local
With the Time zone time source 1 and Time zone time source 2 parameters, you define the
handling of time zones of the external timer.
local Local time zone and daylight saving time are considered as time zone offsets
to GMT.
UTC Time format according to UTC (universal time)
Parameter: Time source 1,Time source 2
Default setting Time source 1 = none, Time source 2 = none

With the Time source 1 and Time source 2 parameters, you can configure an external timer. The
prerequisite is to have the corresponding hardware configuration of the communication interfaces of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. This is listed as a prefix when making a selection in DIGSI 5.
none The time source is not configured.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

IRIG-B Time synchronization by an external GPS receiver:
SIPROTEC 5 devices support several protocol variants of the IRIG-B stand-
ards:
IRIG-B 002(003)
The control function bits of the signal are not occupied. The missing year
is formed from the current device time. In this case, it is possible to set the
year via the online access in DIGSI 5.
IRIG-B 006(007)
The bits for the calendar year are not equal to 00. The calendar year is set
automatically by the time protocol.
IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to IEEE C37.118-2005
If, in the time signal, other control function bits are occupied in addition to
the calendar year, then the device takes the additional information into
consideration for leap seconds, daylight saving time, time offset (zone,
daylight saving time) and time accuracy.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2: The
value of this setting is not evaluated by the device, since this protocol
either transmits or in the case of local time, specifies the appropriate
offset to UTC in each set time telegram.
DCF77 Time synchronization by an external DCF 77 receiver
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
Please note: There are also clocks that generate a DCF 77 signal representing
UTC. In this case, UTC must be set.
PI The time synchronization takes place via the protection interfaces configured
for your SIPROTEC 5 device. Here, the timing master takes over the time
management. Signal-transit times of the protection interface communication
are calculated automatically.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC
A slave that receives a time or a SIPROTEC 5 master, receives its system time
kept in UTC.
SNTP The time synchronization is done via the Ethernet service SNTP (SNTP server
or via IEC 61850).
SIPROTEC 5 devices support both Edition1 and Edition2 in accordance with
IEC 61850-7-2. In Edition2, the logical attributes LeapSecondsKnown, Clock-
Failure, ClockNotSynchronized, and the value TimeAccuracy are maintained in
each time stamp. For Edition1, these signals contain default settings. Thus, the
interoperability for substation automation technology is ensured for both
editions!
The SNTP service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet interfaces
so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
IEC 60870-5-103 The time is synchronized via telegram with an appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = local
However, there are also T103 systems that send the UTC.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

DNP3 The time is synchronized via telegram with the appropriately configured
communication interface in accordance with the DNP3 protocol.
Two characteristics are supported in the process:
Time synchronization via UTC
Time synchronization with local time
The daylight saving time status is not transmitted. The device assumes
that the DNP3 master follows the same rules for the start and end of the
daylight saving time as those that were set for the device.
is the current implementation local concerns older implementations.
IEEE 1588 Time is synchronized via an IEEE 1588 timing master. In this case, SIPROTEC
5 devices operate as slave-only clocks. IEEE 1588 v2 is supported with P2P
and Ethernet Transport.
The IEEE 1588 service must be enabled during configuration of Ethernet inter-
faces so that it is available as an option for the time synchronization.
Time zone time source 1 or Time zone time source 2 = UTC.
Parameter: Fault indication after
Default setting Fault indication after = 600 s

With the Fault indication after parameter you set the time delay after which the unsuccessful
attempts of time synchronization with external time sources configured are indicated.
Parameter: Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time

This parameter block contains all the settings for the local time zone and daylight saving time of your
SIPROTEC 5 device. In addition to the individual parameters, configure the basic settings by preselecting via
the radio buttons or check box.
[sctimezo-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-75 Settings for Time Zone and Daylight Saving Time in DIGSI
Selection Button Description

Manual settings (local time zone and daylight saving This setting must be selected if you want to select the
time regulation) local time zone and daylight saving time zone regula-
tions of your SIPROTEC 5 device regardless of the
PC settings.
Input: Offset time zone for GMT [min]
Selection: Switchover to daylight saving time [yes/no]
via check box
Input: Start of daylight saving time [Day and

time]
Input: End of daylight saving time [Day and time]
Input: Offset daylight saving time [min]
Default settings as in the picture above
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.6.5 Settings

Time sync.
_:102 Time sync.:Time source none none
1 PPM
IRIG-B
DCF77
Syncbox
PI
SNTP
IEC 60870-5-103
PROFIBUS DP
Modbus
DNP3
IEEE 1588
IEC 60870-5-104
_:103 Time sync.:Time source port J
1 port port F
port E
port P
port N
port G
_:104 Time sync.:Time source Ch1
1 channel Ch2
_:105 Time sync.:Time source none none
2 PPM
IRIG-B
DCF77
Syncbox
PI
SNTP
IEC 60870-5-103
PROFIBUS DP
Modbus
DNP3
IEEE 1588
IEC 60870-5-104
_:106 Time sync.:Time source port J
2 port port F
port E
port P
port N
port G
_:107 Time sync.:Time source Ch1
2 channel Ch2
_:108 Time sync.:Time zone UTC local
time source 1 local
_:109 Time sync.:Time zone UTC local
time source 2 local
_:101 Time sync.:Fault indica- 0 s to 3600 s 600 s
tion after
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

(Type)
Time managem.
_:300 Time managem.:Daylight saving time SPS O
_:301 Time managem.:Clock set manually SPS O

(Type)
Time sync.
_:303 Time sync.:Status time source 1 SPS O
_:304 Time sync.:Status time source 2 SPS O
_:305 Time sync.:Time sync. error SPS O
_:306 Time sync.:Leap second SPS O
_:307 Time sync.:High accuracy SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.7 User-Defined Objects
3.7.1 Overview
Within a User-defined function group, you can use the User-defined function block and the User-defined func-
tion block [Control] to group user-defined objects that you find in the DIGSI 5 library under User-defined func-
tions.
With user-defined function groups and user-defined functions, a grouping of user-defined objects, for
example, user-defined function blocks, can be performed. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see
following figure).
[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-76 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library
You can insert single-point indications, pickup and operate indications (ACD, ACT), single or double
commands, commands with a controllable whole number as well as measured values in the User-defined
function block (see following figure). You can assign a superordinate name to the grouping (for example,
Process indications, for a group of single-point indications that are read in via binary inputs). This function can
be deactivated via the mode. Readiness is also evaluated and represented.
The user-defined function can be instantiated both at the highest level (in parallel to other function groups)
and within the function groups and functions.
A User-defined function block [control] is also available. In addition to the mentioned option of a general User-
defined function block, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals, for example, SPC or
DP.
You can find more information in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-77 Information Routing Through Use of Added User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications
and Single-Point Indications
3.7.2 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-78 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
State of a Whole Number (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can
be shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or several relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double Point Controllable)

monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
Transformer taps
Metered values
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT
can be generated and processed by CFC charts.
3.7.3 Pulse- and Energy- Metered Values
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line
as well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Pulse-Metered
Values Function Description .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values .
3.7.4 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
WYE (phase-to-ground related measured values of a 3-phase system)
DEL (phase-to-phase related measured values of a 3-phase system)
SEQ (Sequence)
CMV (Complex Measured Value)
BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position)

The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up,
down can be given.
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching element
is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC (binary
controlled tap changer with tap-position information).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
3.8 Other Functions
3.8.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals
Input signals can be filtered to suppress brief changes at the binary input. Chatter blocking can be used to
prevent continuously changing indications from clogging the event list. After an adjustable number of
changes, the indication is blocked for a certain period.
The settings for indication filtering can be found at the individual signals. The next figure shows the settings
using the example of a controllable (circuit-breaker switch position).
NOTE
i These settings are available only in the Control function block of the circuit breaker or disconnector and
not in the Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block since these function blocks contain the actual
unfiltered position of the switch in the bay.
The settings of the software filter for handling spontaneous position changes are available only for
commands with feedback in the Control function block of the circuit breaker or the disconnector.
[sclposi-310315, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-79 Settings for Circuit-Breaker Switch Position
The setting range for the Software filtering time parameter ranges from 0 ms to 86 400 000 ms (1
day) in ms increments. The Retrigger filter check box can be used to select whether the software filter
should be restarted by a change from 1 to 0 and back. When activated, the Indication timestamp
before filtering check box back dates the time stamp by the set software filtering time and the fixed
hardware filtering time. In this case, the time stamp corresponds to the actual status change of the signal. If
you activate the Suppress intermediate position check box, the intermediate position is suppressed
for the duration of this software filter time.
You set how such position changes are to be filtered using the Treatment of spontaneous position
changes parameter. Spontaneous position changes are caused by external switching commands, for
example. If the General software filter setting is selected, the general settings for software filtering of
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
spontaneous position changes and for position changes caused by a switching command apply. The settings
for spontaneous position changes can then not be edited. A separate filtering for spontaneous position
changes is activated with the Spontaneous software filter setting and you can edit the settings for
this.
Chatter blocking can be activated or deactivated as a parameter of the position in the circuit breaker or
disconnector function block.
[scflatte-180315, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-80 Setting Chatter Blocking
The settings for the chatter blocking function are set centrally for the entire device in DIGSI. They are acces-
sible as settings in the General function group (see the following figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scparafl-291110-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 3-81 Chatter-Blocking Settings
The chatter-blocking settings have the following meaning (see Figure 3-82):
Number of permissible status changes
This number specifies how often the state of a signal may toggle within the chatter-test time and the
chatter-checking time. If this number is exceeded, the signal will be or remains blocked.
Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field. If the entry is 0, chatter blocking is essentially inactive.
Chatter test time

During this time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked. This time is started if
chatter blocking is configured for at least one signal and this signal changes its status. When the set
time has expired, the timer restarts automatically (cycle time).
Enter a number between 1 and 65535 in this field. The number entered corresponds to the time in
seconds.
Number of chatter tests

This number specifies the maximum number of test cycles to be run before the signal is finally blocked.
In this case, the indications Group Warning (Alarm handling group) and Chatter blocking (Device
group) are set. Restarting the devices removes this block again.
Enter a number from 0 to 32767 in this field. The value Infinite () is also permissible here.
Enter this value as character string oo.
Chatter idle time

If the number of permissible status changes for a signal is exceeded during the first chatter-test or the
second chatter-test time, the chatter idle time starts. This signal is blocked within this time.
minutes. An entry is possible here only if the number of chatter checks does not equal 0.
Example: If, for instance, you enter 1 min. here and chatter blocking starts for a signal, the actual dead
time may lie between 1 min., and 1 min. and 59 s.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
Chatter test time

During this second test time, the number of times a signal changes its status is checked once again. The
time begins when the chatter idle time expires. If the number of status changes is within the
permissible limits, the signal is released. Otherwise, an additional dead time begins, unless the
maximum number of chatter tests has been reached.
seconds. An entry is possible here only if the number of chatter checks does not equal 0.
As soon as chatter blocking is set, the corresponding signal is assigned the oscillatory quality, and a corre-
sponding indication is entered in the operational log.
The following image shows an example of the usage of chatter blocking on a single-point indication (type
SPS). The number of permitted status changes is set to 5. After 5 status changes occur, the signal is set to
the original state and it is given the quality oscillatory.
[dwflatsp-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-82 Signal Change During Chatter Blocking
3.8.2 Acquisition Blocking and Manual Updating
During commissioning, maintenance, or testing, a brief interruption of the connection between the logical
signals and binary inputs may be useful. It allows you to manually update the status of a switching device that
is not providing feedback correctly. Before this can take place, you must first set acquisition blocking.
Set the Acquisition blocking function in the menu of the device display Commands > Equipment >Aq.blk man.
update. If several switching devices are available, select the appropriate switching device. When pressing the
Change key, the confirmation ID will be queried. After entering the confirmation ID, the acquisition blocking
function is switched on when OK is pressed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scerfass-280513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-83 Activating the Acquisition Blocking
Manual updating of the switching device is possible from within the same menu. Use the menu item Change
to select the Manual updating function. Subsequently, select the updating setting of the switching device
manually and acknowledge the selection by pressing OK. The manually updated position of the switching
device will be displayed.
[scstatus-280513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-84 Activate Manual Updating
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scstatu2-280513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-85 Selecting Position
NOTE
i For safety reasons, manual updating is possible only directly through the on-site operation panel of the
device and not through DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i Setting acquisition blocking and the subsequent manual updating are also possible via the IEC 61850
system interface.
Acquisition blocking can also be set via a binary input. This way, acquisition blocking can be set for an indi-
vidual or several switching devices in a feeder simultaneously with an external toggle switch in order to
disable the feeder. For this purpose, every switching device in the Switch functionality (circuit breaker or
disconnector switch) has the input signal >Acquisition blocking. This signal can also be set from the
CFC.
[scbeerfa-190215, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-86 Input signals >Acquisition Block and >Release Acquisition Block & Manual
Updating on the Switching Device
NOTE
i Interlockings are carried out with the status changes of the switching device. Remove acquisition blocking
again manually. Otherwise, position changes of the switching device are not detected and interlockings
are ineffective.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
If the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are set using the operation panel of the device
or the system interface IEC 61850, these are retained until the acquisition blocking is manually deactivated.
When you initially start the device, the acquisition blocking is deactivated.
Except for a restart, the acquisition blocking and the manually updated position are retained.
If the acquisition blocking is activated via the input signal >Acquisition blocking, it is retained as long
as the binary input is active.
To set the acquisition blocking of a switching device, the following sources are possible:
Operation panel of the device
System interface IEC 61850
Input signal >Acquisition blocking

All sources undergo OR operations, that is, the acquisition blocking remains set until all the sources are deac-
tivated.
After deactivation of the acquisition blocking, the actual position of the switching device is adopted and
displayed in the operation panel of the device.
NOTE
i When the acquisition blocking is activated or the switching device updated manually while the entire
device or the switching device is in test mode, these states are not saved. The acquisition blocking and the
manual updating are not retained after a restart.
Acquisition blocking and manual update for the circuit breaker, the disconnector and the tap changer are
reset by the >Reset AcqBlk&Subst binary input. If the input is activated, setting of the acquisition blocking
and of the manual update is blocked.
3.8.3 Persistent Commands
In addition to the switching commands, which are issued as pulse commands, and stored for the standard
switching devices (circuit breaker, disconnector switch), persistent commands are also possible. In this case,
a distinction must be drawn between controllables with the Continuous output operating mode and a stored
signal output that is immune to reset.
You can change a controllable from pulse to persistent command with the Command output parameter.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.8 Other Functions
[scbefehl-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-87 Setting the Command Type in DIGSI 5
Select Pulse output or Continuous output for the command output type. If a persistent command is
selected, the Pulse parameter is irrelevant.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.9 General Notes for Setting the Threshold Value of Protection Functions
3.9.1 Overview
You can set the threshold values of protection functions directly on the device or by using DIGSI 5.
An innovative design was implemented for the protection settings.
You can switchover the edit mode between the following setting views:
Primary
Secondary
Percent
If you change settings in a setting view, DIGSI 5 calculates the settings of the 2 inactive views in the back-
ground. If you wish to save, for example, conversion to secondary values, then select the primary view.
Configure all the settings and switchover to the secondary view.
Edit Mode: Primary

The parameters are set as primary values and thus refer directly to the primary system. The manual conver-
sion on the secondary circuit omitted.
Edit Mode: Secondary

The settings refer to the secondary circuit of the transformer. This means that the settings must be converted.
The secondary setting is the customary setting view. For secondary tests, the pickup values can be read
directly.
Edit Mode: Percent

This setting type is beneficial for electric machines (generators, transformers, motors, and busbars). The
setting values can be standardized regardless of the machine size. The reference values for the percentage
settings are the rated values of the function groups, for example, rated voltage and rated current or rated
apparent power . The setting values are, thus, related exclusively to the primary settings. If other reference
values are used, then this is documented for the respective protection function in the application and setting
notes.
If parameters are selected it may happen that they are set only in percent in all 3 setting views.
Recommendation for Setting Sequence

When setting the protection function, Siemens recommends the following procedure:
First set the transformation ratios of the transformers. You can find these under Power-system data.
In addition, set the reference parameters for the percent setting. You will find these parameters in func-
tion group , for example, function group Line under line data .
Next, set the parameter of the protection functions.

If the transformer data have changed after completing the protection setting, remain in the setting sheet
(for example, primary setting) and change the transformer data. In the background, DIGSI 5 obtains the
new settings in the inactive setting views (for example, new secondary values).
The following section explains, by way of an example, how to modify the transformer ratios in DIGSI 5 using
the corresponding alternatives.
3.9.2 Modifying the Transformer Ratios in DIGSI 5
In the delivery setting, DIGSI 5 is set to the Secondary edit mode.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
The following setting example shows how you can change the transformer ratio in DIGSI 5, and what impact
this has on the settings in the setting views Primary and Secondary. The protection setting is observed in the
example of the Overcurrent protection function.
The following output data are assumed:
Current transformer: 1000 A/1 A
Protection pickup value: 1.5 A
The following figure shows the protection setting of the Overcurrent protection function in the secondary view.
The threshold value of the stage is set to 1.5 A.
[scmodsek_1, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-88 Protection Setting, Display of the Active Setting Sheet
When you click the green arrow in the setting sheet at the upper left, you get to the window for switching over
to the setting view (see the following figure). Select the setting view you prefer.
[scmodums_2, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-89 Switchover to the Desired Setting View
The following figures show the setting sequence in the Primary edit mode. Set the transformer data. In the
example, the current transformer has a transformation ratio of 1000 A/1 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scpwandl_3, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-90 Setting Sheet:Transformer Data
In the Line function group, you set the line data (see the following figure). Rated current, rated voltage are the
reference variables for the percent setting.
[scproref_4, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-91 Reference Data for Percentage Settings
The following figure shows the threshold value of the Overcurrent protection function in the primary view at
1500 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scumzpri_5, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-92 Example of the Threshold Value of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Edit Mode:
Primary)
When switching over to the percent view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/1000 A 100 % = 150 %
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scumzpro_6, 1, en_US]
Percent)
When switching over to the secondary view, the result should be the following value:
1500 A/(1000 A/1 A) = 1.5 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scumzsek_7, 1, en_US]
Secondary)
If you only want to work in the secondary view, DIGSI 5 supports you if the transformer ratio changes during
the project phase.
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. Change the secondary
rated current of the current transformer in the setting sheet of the transformer data from 1 A to 5 A (Edit
mode: Secondary). If you change the transformer data, a window will appear (see the following figure) that
will ask you for the action desired.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scfragew_8, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-95 Query after Changing the Transformer Data (Setting View: Secondary)
If you answer the question with Yes, then DIGSI 5 will recalculate the pickup values (threshold values) in the
active secondary view. For the new secondary transformer current 5 A, the new secondary threshold value
obtained is 7.5 A (1.5 A * 5 = 7.5 A). The primary and percent values remain unchanged.
The following figure shows the newly calculated threshold value in the secondary view.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scsekneu_9, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-96 Automatically Recalculated Secondary Values After Changes in the Transformer Data
If you have already set the settings in the secondary view by including the new transformation ratio of the
transformer in the calculation, then you answer the question with No. In this case, the protection settings in
the secondary view remain unchanged. DIGSI 5 recalculates the settings (threshold values) of the primary
view. In the example, the primary threshold value is then 300 A (1.5 A * 1000 A/5 A = 300 A).
In the example, the current-transformer ratio changes from 1000 A/1 A to 1000 A/5 A. The following table
summarizes the pickup values that DIGSI 5 will recalculate in the setting view. The new values (in bold)
depend on the answer of your inquiry (see Figure 3-95 ).
Reply to the Question
Yes No
Threshold value secondary (active setting view) 7.5 A 1.5 A
Threshold value primary (covered setting view) 1500 A 300 A
3.9.3 Changing the Transformation Ratios of the Transformer on the Device
The device is preset to the secondary value at the time of delivery. Only secondary values can be set directly
on the device.
If you change transformer data directly on the device, it is not followed by a query, like in DIGSI 5 (see
Figure 3-95 ). Instead, the device assumes that all settings remain unchanged in the secondary view.
NOTE
i If the device works with IEC 61850 protocol, you change the transformer data only via DIGSI 5 and not
directly on the device. If you change the transformer data directly on the device, the IEC 61850 configura-
tion of the measurement and metered values can be faulty.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
3.10 Device Settings
3.10.1 Settings-Group Switching

For different applications you can save the respective function settings in so-called Settings groups, and if
necessary enable them quickly.
You can save up to 8 different settings groups in the device. In the process, only one settings group is active
at any given time. During operation, you can switch between settings groups. The source of the switchover
can be selected via a parameter.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
Via binary inputs
Via a communication connection to the substation automation technology.

The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can
be used for switching the settings groups.
A settings group includes all switchable settings of the device. Except for a few exceptions (for example,
general device settings such as rated frequency), all device settings can be switched.
Detailed information about the settings groups can be found in the Operating Manual and DIGSI 5 Online
Help.

The function of the Settings group switching is a supervisory device function. Accordingly, the settings and
indications of the settings group switching can be found in DIGSI 5 and at the on-site operation panel of the
device, below the general device settings respectively.
If you want to switchover a settings group, navigate to DIGSI 5 or proceed on the on-site operation panel of
the device, as follows:
Via the project tree in DIGSI 5:
Project -> Device -> Settings -> Device settings
Via the on-site operation panel of the device:

Main menu Settings General Group switchover
The indications for the settings group switching can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under:
Project Device Information routing General
Activation
If you want to use the Settings group switching function, you must first set at least 2 settings groups in DIGSI
5 (parameter Number of settings groups > 1). You can set up a maximum of 8 settings groups. The settings
groups set in DIGSI 5 are subsequently loaded into the device.
Mechanism of the Switchover

When switching over from one settings group to another, the device operation is not interrupted. With the
Active settings group parameter, you are either specifying a certain settings group or you allow
switching via control (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850) or via binary input.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
Switching via Control

When using the Control function for switching, the settings groups can be switched via a communication
connection from the substation automation technology or via a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be
used for switching the settings groups via a communication connection.
In order to use a CFC chart for switching, you must create a new CFC chart in DIGSI 5. Create the CFC chart
in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Charts Add new chart. Link the signals that control
settings group switching in the CFC chart.
Switching via Binary Input

There are 3 appropriate input signals available for switching via binary inputs. These input signals allow
selection of the settings group via a binary code. If one of the 3 signals changes, the signal image present
will, after 100 ms (stabilization time), result in switching over to the appropriate settings group. If only 2
settings groups must be switched over, only 1 binary input is required. The following table shows the possible
binary codes (BCD) and applicable settings groups (PG).
Table 3-19 Binary Codes of the Input Signals and Applicable Settings Groups
BCD Code via Binary Inputs PG 1 PG 2 PG 3 PG 4 PG 5 PG 6 PG 7 PG 8

>PG selection bit 3 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Copying and Comparing Settings Groups

In DIGSI 5, you can copy or compare settings groups with each other.
If you want to copy settings groups, select a source and target parameter group in DIGSI 5 in the device
settings, and then start the copy process. The device settings can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under
Project Device Settings Device settings.
If you want to compare settings groups, it is possible to do so in all setting sheets for settings. You will then
select in addition to the active settings group, a 2nd settings group for comparison. Active setting values and
the comparable values are displayed next to each other. For settings that cannot be switched over, no
comparable values are displayed.
Indication of Settings Group Switchings

Every settings group shows an applicable binary indication as well as its activation and deactivation. The
process of settings group switching is also logged in the log for settings changes.
3.10.1.4 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Number settings groups
Default setting (_:113) Number settings groups = 1

With the Number settings groups parameter, you can set the number of available settings groups; you
can switch between these.
Parameter: Activat. of settings group
Default setting (_:114) Activat. of settings group = settings group 1

With the Activat. of settings group parameter, you specify the settings groups that you want to acti-
vate, or the mechanisms via which the switchover is allowed. You can switchover only between the settings
groups specified with the Number settings groups parameter. Parameter Value
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions

over control The switchover between the settings groups can only be initiated via a
communication connection from a substation automation technology or via
a CFC chart.
The communication protocols IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC
61850, DNP or Modbus TCP can be used for switching the settings groups
via a communication connection.
over binary input The switchover between the settings groups functions exclusively via the
binary input signals routed to the settings group switching.
settings group 1 They define the active settings groups. You can define the active settings
... groups in DIGSI 5, or directly on the device via the on-site operation.
settings group 8
3.10.1.5 Settings

Change group
_:113 General:Number 1 to 8 1
settings groups
_:114 General:Activat. of over control settings group 1
settings group over binary input
settings group 1
settings group 2
settings group 3
settings group 4
settings group 5
settings group 6
settings group 7
settings group 8

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>SG choice bit 1 SPS I
_:300 General:Act. settings group 1 SPC C
3.10.2 General Device Settings
3.10.2.1 Overview
In Device settings in DIGSI 5, you find the following general settings.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
[scDeSeDe2-310715-01, 1, en_US]
[scDeSeAl-310715-01, 1, en_US]
[scDeSeall-260815-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 3-97 General Device Settings
The following list shows you the chapters containing the desired information.
You can find more about:
Chatter blocking in chapter 3.8.1 Signal Filtering and Chatter Blocking for Input Signals .
Control in chapter 7.4 Control Functionality .
Spontaneous indications in chapter 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 .
CFC Quality Processing in Chapter 3.3.3 Quality Processing/Affected by the User in CFC Charts .
Under Device, you set the parameters for the device that are valid across functions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
With the Test support, indications issued via communication interfaces are labeled with an additional test bit,
if this is supported by the protocol. With this test bit, you can determine that an indication is generated as a
test and that all or individual functions of the device are in test mode. In this way, the reactions that are
necessary in normal operation due to an indication can be suppressed in other devices that receive these
indications. You can also permit, for example, a trip command to close an energized binary output for test
purposes. Siemens recommends deactivating the Test support again after the test phase.

The major part of the settings is described in the chapters cited above. In the following sections, you can find
a description of the parameters of the sections Device, Spontaneous indication, and Test support.
Parameter: Rated frequency
Default setting (_:101) Rated frequency = 50 Hz

With the Rated frequency parameter, you set the rated frequency of the electrical power system.
Parameter: Minimum operate time
Default setting (_:102) Minimum operate time =

With the Minimum operate time parameter, you set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
functions. The trip command is maintained for the set duration.
Parameter: Set. format residu. comp.
Default setting _:115 = Kr, Kx

With the parameter Set. format residu. comp. , you specify the setting format for the residual
compensation factors that applies across functions. You can set the residual compensation using the scalar
factors Kr, Kx or as complex factors using K0 .
The setting format controls the visibility of the residual compensation factors in the Distance protection.
Parameter: Block monitoring dir.
Default setting (_:138) Block monitoring dir. = off

With the Block monitoring dir. parameter, you set whether indications are issued via the system inter-
face(s) of the SIPROTEC 5 device or not.
If transmission blocking is switched on, no indications are issued via the system interface(s) of a
SIPROTEC 5 device.
Parameter: Fault-display
Default setting (_:139) Fault-display = with pickup

With the Fault-display parameter, you set whether spontaneous indications are issued for a pickup or for
a tripping. Keep the DIGSI 5 routing options in chapters 3.1.7 Spontaneous Indication Display in DIGSI 5 and
Table 3-5 in mind.
Parameter: Activate device test mode
Default setting (_:150) Activate device test mode = inactive

With the Activate device test mode parameter, you activate the test mode that adds a test bit to the
issued indications.
Parameter: Oper. bin.outputs under test
Default setting (_:151) Oper. bin.outputs under test = inactive

If you activate the parameter Oper. bin.outputs under test , you can allow the closing of a binary
output for test purposes.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
System Functions
NOTE
i The device remains in test mode during every startup until you set the device back into process mode
intentionally. You switch to the process mode by switching the parameter Activate device test mode to
inactive again (removing the check mark).
3.10.2.3 Settings

Device
_:101 General:Rated 50 Hz 50 Hz
frequency 60 Hz
_:102 General:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
operate time
_:115 General:Set. format Kr, Kx Kr, Kx
residu. comp. K0
_:138 General:Block moni- off off
toring dir. on
Spontan.indic.
_:139 General:Fault-display with pickup with pickup
with trip
Test support
_:150 General:Activate device 0 false
test mode 1
_:151 General:Oper. 0 false
bin.outputs under test 1

(Type)
General
_:510 General:>Test mode on SPS I
_:511 General:>Test mode off SPS I
_:507 General:>Device funct.logoff on SPS I
_:508 General:>Device funct.logoff off SPS I
_:512 General:>LED reset SPS I
_:52 General:Behavior ENS O
_:53 General:Health ENS O
_:51 General:Test mode ENC C
_:321 General:Protection on SPC C
_:54 General:Protection inactive SPS O
_:323 General:LED reset SPC C
_:320 General:LED have been reset SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
4 Applications
4.1 Overview 178

4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87 179
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87 184
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87 188
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87 191
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.1 Overview
4.1 Overview
The Global DIGSI 5 library provides application templates for the applications of the devices. The application
template
Supports the fast realization of complete protection solutions for applications
Contains the basic configuration for the use case
Contains functions and default settings for the use case

Figure 2-12.1 Function Embedding in the Device provides an example for the structure of an application
template.
When using an application template, please note the following:
Adapt the application template to your specific use (check/adapt default settings, delete/add functions).
You can find more detailed information in the 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
Check the routing of binary outputs with respect to fast and normal relays.
Check the CFC charts for the group-warning indications and group-fault indications.
The following describes the application templates and maximum functional scope for the devices shown in
this manual.
NOTE
i The availability of certain settings and setting options depends on the device type and the functions avail-
able on the device!
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.2 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SA87

Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SA87. The application
templates contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SA87 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
Basis
Distance protection, isolated/resonant-grounded systems with AREC
Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems
Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout
To load the application templates to the device, the following minimum hardware configuration requirements
must be met:
Application Template Hardware Configuration Minimum
Requirement
Template 1 Basis 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
Template 2 DIS Res./Isol. Systems, with AREC
Template 3 DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
Template 4 DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems, 1 1/2 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
Circuit-Breaker Layout
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the application
templates:
Table 4-1 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SA87
ANSI Function Abbr.

7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x x
21/21N Distance protection Z< x x x x
Impedance protection x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x 2
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive- V1< x
sequence system
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx< x
universal, Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive power P<>, Q<> x
38 Temperature supervision > x
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, (V2/I2) x
tion with direction
49 Thermal overload protection , I2t x x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x x
protection
50 Overcurrent protection, 1-phase I1ph> x
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-current protection for INs> x
systems with resonant or isolated
neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x x
59 Overvoltage protection, positive- V1> x
sequence system
59 Overvoltage protection, compounding V1comp> x
59 Overvoltage protection, negative- V2> x
sequence system
59 Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence V0> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, Vx> x
universal, Vx
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, I>, (V,I) x
phases
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for x x
neutral, incl. a) V0>, b) cos/sinj, c)
fleeting contact, d) j(V,I), e) admittance
68 Power-swing blocking Z/t x x x
74TC Trip-circuit supervision x
78 Out-of-step protection Z/t x
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x x
81R Rate-of-frequency change protection df/dt x
85/21 Teleprotection for distance protection x x x x
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x x x x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed x
according to French specification
85/67N Teleprotection for directional ground- x x x x
fault protection
86 Lockout x
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for 1 x x
1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low impedance restricted ground-fault IN x
protection
90V Two-winding transformer voltage x
controller
90V Three-winding transformer voltage x
controller
90V Grid coupling transformer voltage x
controller
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x x
PMU Synchrophasor measurement PMU x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto SOTF x
fault
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SA87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
ARC Arc protection ARC x
Measured values, standard x x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
Switching sequences function x
Inrush-current detection x
External trip initiation x x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x x x x x
Circuit-breaker status x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor x
status
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (27/Q)
37 Undercurrent I< x
67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for x
neutral according to the admittance
method
51V Overcurrent protection, voltage t = f(I,V) x
dependent
Intermittent ground-fault protection IIE> x
Circuit-breaker supervision Ix, I2t, 2P x
50RS Circuit-breaker restrike monitoring CBRM x
Function-point class: 0 150 225 400
Application Template: Basis (7SA87)

The Basis application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
Line protection for overhead lines with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping and 3-pole tripping for cables
For systems with all types of neutral-point treatment
Distance protection is the main protection
Non-directional overcurrent protection as emergency and backup function
Teleprotection scheme
Fault Locator
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
Application Template: Distance Protection, Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems with 3-pole AREC (7SA87)
The Distance protection, isolated/resonant-grounded systems with 3-pole AREC application template is
preconfigured for the following applications:
Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines and cables
For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point
Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
(7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems application
template is preconfigured for the following applications:
Line protection with 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
For systems with grounded neutral point
The main protection is distance protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection MHO for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line, grounded systems application template is preconfigured for
the following applications:
Line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping for overhead lines
For systems with grounded neutral point
The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic
curves)
Fault Locator
Application Template: Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems with
1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded systems with 1 1/2 circuit-
breaker layout application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
Prepared for applications with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
Fault Locator
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
Application Template: MHO Distance Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout (7SA87)
The Distance protection MHO for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is
Prepared for applications with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
The main protection is distance protection (distance zones preconfigured with MHO characteristic
curves)
Fault Locator
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.3 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SD87

Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SD87. The application
templates contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SD87 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
Basis
Differential protection for overhead line
Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range
Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout

must be met:
Requirement
Template 2 DIFF Overhead Line
Template 3 DIFF Overhead Line with Transformer
Template 4 DIS overhead line, 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
templates described below:
Table 4-2 Functional Scope of the Application Template for Device 7SD87
ANSI Function Abbr.

7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
Hardware quantity structure expand- I/O x x x x x
able
87L Line differential protection for 2 line I x x x x
ends
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 I x x x x
line ends (dependent on significant
properties)
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x x 2
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x x
sequence system
universal, Vx
32, 37 Power protection active/reactive P<>, Q<> x
power
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent I2>, (V2/I2) x
protection with direction
49 Thermal overload protection , I2t x x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x x
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x x
protection
neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x x
sequence system
sequence system
59 Overvoltage protection, zero- V0> x
sequence system
universal, Vx
67 Directional time-overcurrent protec- I>, (V,I) x
tion, phases
neutral, incl. a) V0>, b) cos/sinj, c)
fleeting contact, d) j(V,I), e) admit-
tance
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for differential protection: I x x
Transformer in protection range
Option for differential protection: I x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for 1 x x
1/2 circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low-impedance restricted ground-fault IN x
protection
controller
controller
controller
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x x
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SD87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Template 4
fault
Measured values, standard x x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, x
Max, Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
External trip initiation x x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x x
Circuit breaker x x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x
status
27Q Directional reactive power under- Q>/V< x
voltage protection (27/Q)
neutral according to the admittance
method
dependent
Function-point class: 0 175 275 350
Application Template: Basis (7SD87)

The Basis application template is preconfigured for the following applications:
Line protection (for example, cable) with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
Protection of overhead lines and cables
The main protection is phase-selective differential protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line (7SD87)

The Differential protection for overhead line application template is preconfigured for the following applica-
tions:
Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping

Important additional functions for overhead-line protection:
Automatic reclosing function
Synchronization function
Circuit-breaker failure protection
Voltage and frequency protection
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with Transformer in the Protection Range (7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with transformer in the protection range application template is
Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping with transformer in the protection range
The main protection is phase-selective differential protection with transformer option

Important additional functions for overhead-line protection:
Automatic reclosing function
Synchronization function
Circuit-breaker failure protection
Voltage and frequency protection
Application Template: Differential Protection for Overhead Line with 1 1/2 Circuit-breaker Layout ( 7SD87)
The Differential protection for overhead line with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout application template is preconfig-
ured for the following applications:
Overhead-line protection with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping

Important additional functions specifically for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
Double automatic reclosing function
Double synchronization function
Double circuit-breaker failure protection
Stub-fault protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.4 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7SL87

Application templates are available in DIGSI 5 for the applications of device 7SL87. The application templates
contain the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
The following application templates are available for device 7SL87 in the DIGSI 5 function library:
Basis
Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems
Differential protection/distance protection with reactance method (RMD) for overhead line, grounded
systems with 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout
must be met:
Requirement
Template 2 DIFF/DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems
Template 3 DIFF/DIS RMD for Overhead Line, Grounded Systems 1 15 BI, 12 BO, 8 I, 8 V
1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
templates described below:
Table 4-3 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7SL87
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x x x
87L Line differential protection for 2 line ends I x x x
87L Line differential protection for 3 to 6 line I x x x
ends (dependent on significant proper-
ties)
85/27 Weak or no infeed: echo and tripping x
Tripping with missing or weak infeed x
according to French specification
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x 2
Impedance protection x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x x x
sequence system
universal, Vx
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protec- I2>, (V2/I2) x
tion with direction
49 Thermal overload protection , I2t x x x
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x x x x
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x x x x
50 HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent I>>> x x x
protection
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x 2
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x x x
sequence system
sequence system
system
universal, Vx
phases
67Ns Ground-fault detection for systems with x
resonant or isolated neutral, incl. a) V0>,
b) cos/sinj, c) fleeting contact, d) j(V,I),
e) admittance
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x 2
81O Overfrequency protection f> x x x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x x x
86 Lockout x
87L/87T Option for differential protection: Trans- I x
former in protection range
Option for differential protection: I x
charging-current compensation
87STUB Stub fault differential protection (for 1 1/2 x x
circuit-breaker applications)
87N T Low impedance restricted ground-fault IN x
protection
controller
controller
controller
Broken-wire detection for differential x
protection
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x x x x
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7SL87
Template 1
Template 2
Template 3
fault
Measured values, standard x x x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, x
Avg (function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x x x
CFC arithmetic x
External trip initiation x x x
Fault recording of analog and binary x x x x
signals
Monitoring and supervision x x x x
Protection interface, serial x x x
Circuit breaker x x x 2
Circuit-breaker control x
Disconnector/grounding conductor status x
27Q Directional reactive power undervoltage Q>/V< x
protection (27/Q)
systems with resonant or isolated neutral
according to the admittance method
dependent
Function-point class: 0 225 400
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
4.5 Application Templates and Functional Scope for Device 7VK87

The application template Basis is available in DIGSI 5 for the application of device 7VK87. The application
template contains the basic configurations, required functions, and default settings.
must be met:
Requirement
Template 1 Basis (AREC, Sync., Circuit -breaker failure protection) 7 BI, 8 BO, 4 I, 4 V
The following table shows the functional scope and the function-point requirements of the Basis application
template:
Table 4-4 Functional Scope of the Application Templates for Device 7VK87
ANSI Function Abbr.
7VK87
Template 1
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole x x
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole x x
Hardware quantity structure expandable I/O x x
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync x x
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase V< x
27 Undervoltage protection, positive-sequence V1< x
system
27 Undervoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx< x
Vx
46 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection I2>, (V2/I2) x
with direction
50/51 TD Overcurrent protection, phases I> x
50N/51N TD Overcurrent protection, ground IN> x
50HS High speed instantaneous overcurrent protec- I>>> x
tion
50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection x x
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase V> x
59 Overvoltage protection, positive-sequence V1> x
system
59 Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence V2> x
system
system
59 Overvoltage protection, 3-phase, universal, Vx> x
Vx
phases
79 Automatic reclosing AREC x x
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Applications
ANSI Function Abbr.
7VK87
Template 1
81O Overfrequency protection f> x
81U Underfrequency protection f< x
86 Lockout x
FL Fault locator, single-ended FL-one x
90V Two-winding transformer voltage controller x
90V Three-winding transformer voltage controller x
90V Grid coupling transformer voltage controller x
SOTF Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault SOTF x
Measured values, standard x x
Measured values, extended: Min, Max, Avg x
(function points per type)
Switching-statistic counters x x
CFC (Standard, Control) x x
CFC arithmetic x
External trip initiation x x
Fault recording of analog and binary signals x x
Monitoring and supervision x x
Protection interface, serial x
Circuit breaker x x
Circuit-breaker control x x
Disconnector/grounding conductor status x
Function-point class: 0
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5 Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line 194

5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 3-Phase 222
5.3 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 1-Phase 236
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase 240
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker 243
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units 265
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group 302
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Function-Group Types
5.1 Function-Group Type Line
5.1.1 Overview
In the Line function group, all of the functions that are necessary for protecting and monitoring a line can be
used. The Line function group also contains the measuring functions (for more information, see chapter 9).
You will find the Line function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The Line func-
tion group contains all of the protection and supervision functions that you can use for this device type..
These functions are described in the chapter Protection and automation functions. The following diagram
shows the functional scope of the Line function group using the example of the 7SL87 device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scbibofg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-1 Line Function Group - Functional Scope for Device Type 7SL87
For more information about the embedding of the functions in the device, refer to Chapter 2. For information
about the overall functional scope of the application templates for the various device types, refer to Chapter 4.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group
The Line function group always contains the following blocks:

Line data
Operational measurement
Process Monitor
Output logic of the function group

These blocks are essential for the Line function group, so they cannot be loaded or deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the Line function group.
The functions are available in the function library in DIGSI 5. Functions that are not needed can be deleted
from the function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the Line function group:
[dwfgline-160812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-2 Structure of the Line Function Group
The Line function group has interfaces with

Measuring points
Circuit-breaker function group
Protection communication
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The Line function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points.
If you are using an application template, the Line function group is already connected to the necessary meas-
uring points.
If you add functions to the Line function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function group connections editor.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 2.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Line function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
3-phase voltage:
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. Various transformer
connection types are possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are also provided
via this interface. The Line function group must always be linked to the V-3ph measuring point.
If you want to use the Distance-protection function in the Line function group for your use case, you must
connect the 3 phase-to-ground voltages to the V-3ph measuring point. If you want to test or change the
connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point, double-click Name of the device on
Measuring point routing (connection type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage) in the DIGSI 5 project tree. For
more information, please refer to the description of the Power-system data starting from Chapter
6.1.1 Overview.
3-phase phase current:
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are for example IA, IB, IC, IN, or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The Line function group must
always be linked to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase phase-current interface to a maximum of two 3-phase current meas-
uring points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been
connected to the 3-phase phase-current interface, the total current is also determined from measured
values from both measuring points in the Line function group. All functions in the Line function group
have access to these values.
Ground current parallel line:

If the device measures the ground current in the parallel line, this 1-phase measurand of the Line func-
tion group is provided via this interface.
You only have to connect the Ground current parallel line interface to the I-1ph measuring
point if functions in the Line function group are working with this measurand.
Transformer neutral-point current:

If the device measures the ground current in the transformer neutral point, this 1-phase measurand of
the Line function group is provided via this interface.
You only have to connect the Transformer neutral-point current interface to the I-1ph meas-
uring point if functions in the Line function group are working with this measurand.
NOTE
i You can connect the 3-phase phase current interface to at most two 3-phase current measuring
points (for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts).
The other interfaces can only be connected to one measuring point each!
Interface to the Circuit-Breaker Function Group

All required data is exchanged between the protection and circuit-breaker function groups via the interface
with the Circuit-breaker function group. This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of
the protection functions sent in the direction of the circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-
breaker condition information in the direction of the protection function groups.
The Line function group is connected to one or more circuit-breaker function groups. This connection gener-
ally determines:
Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the Line protection function group
Start of the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
through the protection functions of the connected Line protection function group
Start of the Automatic reclosing function (AREC if available in the circuit-breaker function group) through
the protection functions of the connected Line protection function group
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Besides the general allocation of the Line protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups, you
can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction editor in the Line function group.
Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function

If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5
via the Function-group connections Editor. You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Function
Embedding in the Device . If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Interface with Protection Communication

All required data is exchanged between the protection function group and the protection communication via
the interface with Protection communication. These are, for example, binary signals, measured values and
complex data. Functions such as differential protection or teleprotection scheme exchange information with
other protection devices via the protection interface.
If an application template is used, the protection function group and protection communication are already
connected to each other because this link is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3 under Protection communication.
If this link is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Line Data
The line data characterizes the line that is to be protected. The line data applies for all of the functions in the
Line function group.
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Line function group and cannot be removed. The process
monitor provides the following information in the Line function group:
Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/closed line based on the flow of minimum current
Voltage criterion (optional):

Detection of an open/closed line based on the minimum voltage present
Closure detection:
Detection of closure of the line
Cold-load pickup detection (optional):

Detection of a transient state of the network after a long period of disconnection (such as a blackout)
followed by automatic reclosing
This information is in the Line function group and all is available to all the functions in the function group. The
description of the process monitor begins in chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
Operational Measured Values

The operational measured values are always present in the Line function group and cannot be deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Line function group:
Table 5-1 Operational Measured Values of the Function Group Line
Measured Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
IA; IB; IC; Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

dary
3I0 Calculated residual current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
system
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary
system
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating current of the primary
system/3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
system
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating current of the primary
system/3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Rated operating current of the primary
voltage system/3
f Frequency Hz Hz Rated frequency
P Active power MW Rated operating voltage and rated oper-
(total power) ating current of the primary system
3 Vrated Irated
Q Reactive power MVAr Rated operating voltage and rated oper-
3 Vrated Irated
S Apparent power MVA Rated operating voltage and rated oper-
3 Vrated Irated
Power factor (abs) (abs) 100 % corresponds to = 1
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW Apparent power of the phase
Vrated phsx Irated phsx
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power MVAr Apparent power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent MVA Apparent power of the phase
power Vrated phsx Irated phsx
Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)

The following directional values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direc-
tion of the protected object.
Power
Power factor
Energy
Minimum, maximum values
Average values
With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a power
flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions.
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pick up and operate indications of the protection and supervision functions in the
function group separately, in either a pickup logic or an output logic. The pickup and output logic generate the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
overarching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are transferred via
the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed further there.
The pickup indications of the protection and supervision functions in the Line function group are combined
according to phase and output as a group indication (see the following figure).
[loanrlin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-3 Generation of the Pickup Indication of the Line Function Group
The operate indications of the protection functions are combined on a phase-selective basis (see the
following figure).
[loauspha-100511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-4 Generation of the Operate Indication of the Line Function Group
If the device is capable of an 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set in
a function (for example, distance protection), 1-phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication.
If at least the following conditions have been met, the connected Circuit breaker function group generates a
1-pole trip command:
The automatic reclosing function (AREC) is present.
The circuit breaker can switch in 1-pole.
The circuit breaker is ready.

With the Trip at 2ph short circuit parameter in the Circuit breaker function group, you control the
tripping behavior of the device in the event of 2-pole short circuits (see chapter 5.5.4.1 Function Description ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The Line protection function group is linked to 2 circuit breakers (2 circuit-breaker function groups) for
1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts.
You can find more information in chapter 2.
Line Data
The following application and setting instructions apply for the line data. The line data are configured in the
Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.
NOTE
i Specify the line data for your specific application!
Parameter: Rated current
Default setting (_:9001:101) Rated current = 1000 A

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current for the line to be protected. The
Rated current parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection function. The Rated current speci-
fied here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change only the setting value of the parameter via
DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
IEC 61850 configuration of the metered values can be faulty.
Parameter: Rated voltage
Default setting (_:9001:102) Rated voltage = 400 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage for the line to be protected. The
Rated voltage parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection, Distance-protection, and Voltage-
protection functions. The Rated voltage set here is the reference value for the percentage-measured
values and setting values made in percentages.
Parameter: Neutral point
Default setting (_:9001:149) Neutral point = grounded

With the Neutral point parameter, you specify whether the system-neutral point is grounded, isolated
or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil).
Parameter: C1 per length unit
Default setting (_:9001:112) C1 per length unit = 0.010 F/km

With the C1 per length unit parameter, you specify the capacitance per unit length in the positive-
sequence system for the line to be protected. You set the C1 per length unit parameter as a relative
value in F/km or F/miles. The capacitance per unit length in the positive-sequence system is identical to the
operating capacitance cb. The C1 per length unit parameter is relevant for the Differential protection
and Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence system and compounding functions.
Parameter: C0 per length unit
Default setting (_:9001:148) C0 per length unit = 0.010 F/km
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the C0 per length unit parameter, you specify the capacitance per unit length in the zero-
sequence system for the line to be protected. You set the C0 per length unit parameter as a relative
value in F/km or F/miles. The capacitance per unit length in the zero-sequence system is identical to the
ground capacitance cgnd. The C0 per length unit parameter is relevant for the Differential-protection
function.
EXAMPLE:
110-kV single-conductor liquid-filled cable 3 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
cb = cgnd = 0.27 F/km
The setting value for the parameters C1 per length unit and C0 per length unit is 0.27 F/km.
Parameter: X per length unit
Default setting (_:9001:113) X per length unit = 0.0525 /km

With the X per length unit parameter you set the reactance per unit length for the line to be protected.
You set the X per length unit parameter as a relative value in /km or /miles. The X per length
unit parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection, Differential-protection, and Overvoltage protection
with positive-sequence system and compounding functions.
Parameter: Line length
Default setting (_:9001:114) Line length = 60 km

With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected as a unit of length in km
or miles. The Line length parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection, Differential-protection, and
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence system and compounding functions.
Parameter: Line angle
Default setting (_:9001:108) Line angle = 85

The Line angle parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection, Differential-protection, and Overvoltage
protection with positive-sequence system and compounding functions. Calculate the setting value for the
parameter Line angle from the line constants for the line to be protected as follows:
[folwinkl-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
RL Resistance of the line to be protected
XL Reactance of the line to be protected
EXAMPLE:
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the data:
R1 = 0.19 /km
X1 = 0.42 /km
You calculate the setting value for the line angle as follows:
[folwibsp-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Kr and Kx
Default setting (_:9001:104) Kr = 1.0
Default setting (_:9001:105) Kx = 1.0
NOTE
i The visibility of the Kr and Kx parameters depends on the selected setting format of the residual compen-
sation factors. The parameters Kr and Kx only become visible after you have set the parameter Set.
format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for the device.
The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation factors as scalar values. The Kr and
Kx parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.
NOTE
i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
specific parameters for each zone.
Calculate the setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx from the line data as follows:
Reactance ratio where:
where:
R0 Zero-sequence system resistance of the line
X0 Zero-sequence system reactance of the line
R1 Positive-sequence system resistance of the line
X1 Positive-sequence system reactance of the line
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-
independent. You can calculate the data both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
EXAMPLE:
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the data:
R1/s 0.19 /km positive-sequence system resistance
X1/s 0.42 /km positive-sequence system reactance
R0/s 0.53 /km zero-sequence system resistance
X0/s 1.19 /km zero-sequence system reactance
s Line length
You receive the following setting values for the parameters Kr and Kx:
[forerlx1-050912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: K0 and Angle (K0)
Default setting (_:9001:118) K0 = 1000
Default setting (_:9001:150) Angle (K0) = 0.00
NOTE
i The visibility of the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters depends on the selected setting format of the
residual compensation factors. The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) only become visible after you have
set the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for the device.
The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the complex residual compensation factor. The K0 and
Angle (K0) parameters are relevant for the Distance-protection and Fault-location functions.
NOTE
i You can overwrite the residual compensation factors specified here in the distance-protection zones with
local parameters for each zone.
Make sure that the line angle is set correctly because the device needs the line angle for calculation of the
compensation components from the K0 factor. The complex residual compensation factor is defined by the
value and the angle. You can calculate the complex residual compensation factor from the line data as
follows:
[foforlk0-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
Z0 (complex) zero-sequence impedance
Z1 (complex) positive-sequence impedance
This data can either be used for the entire line or as length-related values, since the quotients are length-
independent. The data can be calculated both from the primary values and from the secondary values.
For overhead lines, you can use the values for the calculation because the angles of the zero-sequence
system and the positive-sequence system differ only slightly. For cables, however, significant angular differ-
ences can occur, as the following example illustrates.
EXAMPLE:
110-kV single-conductor liquid-filled cable 3 185 mm2 Cu with the data:
Z1/s 0.408 ej73 /km positive-sequence impedance
Z0/s 0.632 ej18.4 /km zero-sequence impedance
s Line length
The values for calculation of the residual compensation factor K0 are:
[fofork02-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fofork03-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value of the parameter K0 is calculated from:
[fofork04-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When determining the angle, take note of the quadrant of the result. The following table lists the quadrants
and the angle range obtained from the operational signs of the real and imaginary parts of K0.
Real Part Imaginary tan Phi (K0) Quadrant/Range Calculation Method
Part
+ + + I 0 to 90 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
+ - - IV -90 to 0 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|)
- - + III -90 to -180 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) 180
- + - II +90 to +180 arc tan (|Im| / |Re|) +180
In this example, the following setting value for the Angle (K0) parameter is obtained:
[fofork05-050509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: KmR and KmX
Default setting (_:9001:106) KmR = 0.00
Default setting (_:9001:107) KmX = 0.00

The KmR and KmX parameters are used to set the coupling impedance for parallel-line compensation. The
KmR parameter (= R0m/3RL) is used to set the coupling resistance. The KmX parameter (= X0m/3XL) is used
to set the coupling reactance. The KmR and KmX parameters are only relevant for the Distance-protection
function.
Parameter: Km0 and Angle (Km0)
Default setting (_:9001:124) Km0 = 0.00
Default setting (_:9001:125) Angle (Km0) = 0.00

Use the parameters Km0 (= Z0m/3ZL) and Angle (Km0) to set the coupling impedance for parallel-line
compensation as a complex value in quantity and angle. The Km0 parameter allows you to set the value for
the coupling-impedance factor. The Angle (Km0) parameter allows you to set the angle of the coupling-
impedance factor. The Km0 and Angle (Km0) parameters are only relevant for the Distance-protection func-
tion.
Parameter: Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp)
Recommended setting value (_:9001:109) Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) = 85 %

The Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) parameter is only relevant for the Distance-protection function. With the
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) parameter, you define the ground-current balance for parallel-line compensa-
tion. This parameter is important for parallel-line compensation in the event of ground faults outside of the line
to be protected.
For the ground-current balance of the distance protection, the setting value returns the current ratio Ignd/IgndP
for the protection device at installation site II (see Figure 5-5).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwparkomrw-161013, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-5 Range of Parallel-Line Compensation at II
Parallel-line compensation is only carried out if the ground current of the line to be protected (Ignd) is greater
than the ground current of the parallel line (IgndP) evaluated with the parameter
Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp).
Siemens recommends retaining the default setting Gnd.curr.ratio(MutComp) = 85 %. In highly unbal-
anced system conditions and if the coupling factor is very small (XM/XL less than 0.4), a smaller value may
be advisable.
Parameter: CT saturation detection
Default setting (_:9001:119) CT saturation detection = no

With the parameter CT saturation detection, you specify whether the device is to work with saturation
detection or not. Saturation detection detects measuring errors due to saturation of the current transformers
and switchovers the method of measurement for distance measurement. The CT saturation detection
parameter is only relevant for the Distance-protection function.
Parameter: CT saturation threshold
Default setting (_:9001:120) CT saturation threshold = 10 A

The CT saturation threshold parameter allows you to set the current threshold for the saturation
detection. If the value that is set is exceeded, the device switchovers the method of measurement for
distance measurement. Calculate the setting value for the parameter CT saturation threshold
according to the following rule of thumb:
[fo1isaet-041210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
where:
Effective overcurrent factor
Sr Rated burden of the current transformers [VA]

Si Inherent burden of the current transformers [VA]
S' Actually connected burden (protection device + secondary lines)
NOTE
i The parameter CT saturation threshold only becomes visible when you have set the parameter CT
saturation detection = yes.
Parameter: Series compensation
Default setting (_:9001:111) Series compensation = no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Use the parameter Series compensation to specify whether the line to be protected is to work with or
without series compensation. The Series compensation parameter is relevant for the Distance-protection
and Directional ground-fault protection functions. To ensure that the direction determination functions
correctly in applications for or in the vicinity of series-compensated lines, set the parameter Series
compensation = yes.
Parameter: Series capacit. reactance
Default setting (_:9001:110) Series capacit. reactance = 10
NOTE
i The parameter Series capacit. reactance only becomes visible when you have set the parameter
Series compensation = yes.
The Series capacit. reactance parameter is used to define the positive-sequence system reactance
of the series capacitor. The reactance of the series capacitor is calculated as follows from the capacitance of
the capacitor (cs):
[foforcse-060509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Series capacit. reactance parameter is only relevant for the Directional ground-fault protection
function.
Parameter: P, Q sign
Default setting (_:9001:158) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power and energy values are designed by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also positively define the power output through the protected
object (for example, as seen by the consumer). With the P, Q sign setting, you can reverse the sign for
these components. This reversal does not influence any protection function.
5.1.4 Process Monitor (FG Line)

All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.

The Process monitor function is used in the Line protection function group with voltage and current measure-
ment.
The Process monitor function is provided by the manufacturer with the function blocks Current-flow criterion,
Circuit-breaker position recognition protected object, Closure detection, and 1-pole-open detector. The
Voltage criterion and Cold-load pickup detection function blocks are optional.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwpro1p1-050612-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-6 Structure/Embedding of the Function
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lopro1p1-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-7 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.1.4.3 Current-Flow Criterion
Logic
[loproire-181111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-8 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
Protection-function group.
5.1.4.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)
Parameter: Current thresh. CB open
Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A

The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line. The parameter itself lies in the Circuit-breaker function group, in the General
function block.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents (for example, due to induction) are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.10 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.1.4.5 Settings

Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
CB open 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:136 General:Op. mode BFP unbalancing unbalancing
I> query
5.1.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-9 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The Circuit-breaker position recognition function block in the Switch function group provides the circuit-
breaker condition (CB condition indication). If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs),
for example 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, then the switch position of the protected object must be determined
with the aid of both circuit breakers. In this case, the circuit-breaker condition for the Protected object function
block performs linking of the individual CB conditions. The connection provides the CB-pos. protected
object indication to the other function blocks of the process monitor and other functions, for example, Trip in
the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method) within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object indication assumes the
Open state:
All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
The >Disconnector open input is active.

If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB status protected object indication assumes the Closed
state:
At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state.
The >Disconnector open input is not active.
5.1.4.7 Closure Detection
Logic
The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines whether
the protected object is switched on.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loproein-121012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-10 Logic Diagram of the Closure-Detection Function Block
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from Manual close function block), the indication Closure is
always active. The indication Closure can also be activated via the measurand. In addition the protected
object must be switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
This time is started as follows depending on the Operating mode parameter:
For parameter Operating mode = I open and V open
If the current-flow criterion and the voltage criterion are detected open-circuited.
For parameter Operating mode = CB and I open

If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact(s) or the current-flow criterion are detected as open-circuited.
For parameter Operating mode = I open

If the current-flow criterion is detected as open-circuited.
If the protected object is detected as switched off, the phase-segregated internal output signal is formed. The
Instantaneous high-current tripping function can trip immediately, for example with the signal in the event of
connection to a short circuit.
If all the following conditions are active the Closure indication is activated via the measurands.
The protected object is switched off for at least the time Min. time feeder open.
The time Action time after closure is running.
The current-flow criterion no longer detects the state open-circuited.

The time Action time after closure is started depending on the Operating mode parameter:
For parameter Operating mode = I open and V open
If the current-flow criterion or the voltage criterion are no longer detected open-circuited.
For parameter Operating mode = CB and I open

If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact(s) or the current-flow criterion are not detected as open-circuited.
For parameter Operating mode = I open

If the current-flow criterion is no longer detected as open-circuited.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.1.4.8 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)
Parameter: Operating mode
Default setting (_:4681:101) Operating mode = Manual close only

With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criteria with which the Closure-detection function block
operates.
Manual close only The detection of feeder closure is exclusively decided using the binary
input signal Detected (from Manual close function block.
Siemens recommends this setting, if both of the following conditions are
met:
The binary input signal Manual On is available on the side of the
system.
A closure detection must not happen due to an additional current and
voltage measurement, for example, after an automatic reclosing.
I open and V open The closure detection is done additionally with the current and voltage
measurement.
If the voltage transformers are installed at the busbar side or if there is no
voltage connected, you must not use this setting.
CB and I open The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement
and with the evaluation of connected circuit breaker position contacts.
I open The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement.
For this setting, make sure that the Current thresh. CB open param-
eter is set lower than the lowest possible load current. If this is not
ensured, open-circuit is detected continuously and each current value that
exceeds the Current thresh. CB open parameter is interpreted as
closure.
Parameter: Min. Feeder Open Time
Recommended setting value (_:4681:103) Min. time feeder open = 0.25 s

To avoid incorrect closure detection, the Feeder open state must exist for a minimum time (Min. time
feeder open parameter) before the Closure indication can become active. You define the duration of the
release delay with the Min. time feeder open parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.25 s.
Parameter: Action Time After Activation
Recommended setting value (_:4681:102) Action time after closure = 0.05 s

The Closure indication signals detected closure. With the Action time after closure parameter, you
set the Closure indication to a defined length.
5.1.4.9 Settings

Closure detec.
_:4681:101 Closure detec.:Operating Manual close only Manual close
mode I open and V open only
CB and I open
I open
_:4681:102 Closure detec.:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
after closure
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:4681:103 Closure detec.:Min. time 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
feeder open
5.1.4.10 1-Pole Open Detector

1-pole automatic reclosing often remedies arc short-circuits in electrical power systems with a grounded
neutral point. This can lead to undesirable pickup in the case of diverse protection and monitoring functions.
If the 1-pole open detector function block detects a 1-pole pause, the corresponding protection and supervi-
sion functions are blocked. To this end, you must set parameters for a grounded electrical power system
neutral point and 1-/3-pole tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[loproopd-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-11 Logic Diagram of the 1-Pole Open Detector Function Block
The 1-pole open indication is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
Internal Off
The source protection device has issued a 1-phase tripping command (after 30 ms).
After issuing a 1-phase tripping command, only the corresponding phase current drops below the setting
value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. At the same time, the ground current exceeds
this value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
External Off
During 1-pole pickup (Pickup (function group) indication), only the corresponding phase current
drops below the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. At the same time, the
ground current exceeds this value.
V and I
The 1-pole open detector function block unambiguously detects a 1-pole open circuit breaker. Current
and voltage of the other phases must be present.
The corresponding 1-pole open indication disappears if one of the following conditions is met:
The value in both activated phases falls below the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter 300 ms.
The current in the deactivated phase exceeds the setting value of the Current thresh. CB open
parameter again after 150 ms.
Additionally, the 1-pole open indication is also generated in the following application cases:
The following applies to applications on an unloaded line: The 1-pole open indication is generated if
current and voltage are missing in one phase and a voltage is applied in the other phases. The 1-pole
open indication disappears immediately if these criteria are no longer fulfilled. As a result, a 1-phase
automatic reclosing function on an unloaded line can be detected.
The following applies to applications with voltage transformers at the busbar end: If a phase-selective
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals a 1-pole open circuit-breaker and the current of this phase falls
below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter, the 1-pole open indication is gener-
ated.
Detection of a 1-pole open circuit-breaker is stabilized by 10 ms. This avoids incorrect response in the
transition states of 3-phase switching operations.
5.1.4.11 Application and Setting Notes (1-Pole Open Detector)
Default setting (_:4711:101) Operating mode = with measurement

With the Operating mode parameter, you set the criterion with which the 1-pole open detector function
block detects 1-pole open.
with measurement All available information that refers to a 1-pole open state is evaluated.
CB and I open Recognition of the 1-pole open position operates with circuit-breaker
auxiliary contacts and the I open parameter from the current-flow crite-
rion function block.
off Detection of a 1-pole open state is not active.
Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.1.4.12 Voltage Criterion (Optional)
Logic
[loproure-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-12 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Criterion Function Block
If you want to test closure detection or an open-pole detector via a voltage, you need a voltage transformer
installed on the line side and electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point. In this case, add the
Voltage criterion function block to the process monitor.
If the voltage transformers are installed on the busbar side or if there is no voltage connected, you must not
use the voltage criterion to detect a deactivated phase.
With the (_:101) Threshold U open parameter, you define the leakage voltage as the criterion for a
deactivated line. If the phase-to-ground voltage falls below the value of the Threshold U open parameter,
the V open signal is generated. The function stabilizes the signal with a hysteresis and a delay of the rising
edge of the signal. The falling edge of the signal is forwarded without delay.
5.1.4.13 Application and Setting Notes (Voltage Criterion)
Parameter: Threshold U open
NOTE
i The Threshold U open parameter is available only when the optional Voltage criterion function block is
used. Use this parameter only with a voltage transformer installed on the line side and in electrical power
systems with a grounded neutral point.
Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold U open = 30.000 V

With the Threshold U open parameter, you define the threshold for the leakage voltage as the criterion for
a deactivated feeder.
Set the Threshold U open parameter so that the voltage measured when the feeder is deactivated falls
below the value of the Threshold U open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is additionally active if
the threshold is exceeded. The value of the Threshold U open parameter must lie below the minimum
expected phase-to-ground voltage. The voltage transformers must be connected on the line side.
Due to possible parasitic voltages (for example, due to capacitive coupling in), do not set the value of the
Threshold U open too sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 30.000 V.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.1.4.14 Settings

Volt.criterion
_:101 Volt.criterion:Threshold U 0.300 V to 170.000 V 51.960 V
open
5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-13 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-
load indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
5.1.4.16 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open

operates.
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure that
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing
open condition in at least one phase.
The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current
Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A

With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal Cold-
load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.
Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion
Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s

With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.
Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed
Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s

With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Min. CB open time
Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s

With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is acti-
vated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.
5.1.4.17 Settings

Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating I open I open
mode CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:103 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1sto600 s 600s
delay curr.crit.
_:104 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 s to 21600 s 3600 s
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O
5.1.4.19 Settings

Closure detec.
_:4681:101 Closure detec.:Oper- Manual close only Manual close
ating mode I open and V open only
CB and I open
I open
_:4681:102 Closure detec.:Action 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
time after closure
_:4681:103 Closure detec.:Min. time 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
feeder open
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

1pol.open det.
_:4711:101 1pol.open det.:Operating off with measure-
mode with measurement ment
CB and I open

(Type)
Closure detec.
_:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
1pol.open det.
_:4711:300 1pol.open det.:1-pole open ACT O
5.1.5 Settings

Rated values
_:9001:101 General:Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A
_:9001:102 General:Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Line data
_:9001:149 General:Neutral point grounded grounded
suppress. coil grounded
isolated
_:9001:112 General:C1 per length unit 1A 0.000 F/km to 100000.000 0.010 F/km
F/km
5A 0.000 F/km to 500000.000 0.050 F/km
F/km
_:9001:148 General:C0 per length unit 1A 0.000 F/km to 100000.000 0.010 F/km
F/km
5A 0.000 F/km to 500000.000 0.050 F/km
F/km
_:9001:113 General:X per length unit 1A 0.0010 /km to 9.5000 /km 0.0525 /km
5A 0.0002 /km to 1.9000 /km 0.0105 /km
_:9001:114 General:Line length 0.10 km to 1000.00 km 60.00 km
_:9001:108 General:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
_:9001:104 General:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:9001:105 General:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:9001:118 General:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:9001:150 General:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
_:9001:106 General:KmR 0.00 to 8.00 1.00
_:9001:107 General:KmX 0.00 to 8.00 1.00
_:9001:124 General:Km0 0.000 to 8.000 1.000
_:9001:125 General:Angle (Km0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
_:9001:109 General:Gnd.curr.ratio(Mut 50 % to 95 % 85 %
Comp)
_:9001:119 General:CT saturation no no
detection yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:9001:120 General:CT saturation 1A 0.030 A to 125.000 A 10.000 A
threshold 5A 0.150 A to 625.000 A 50.000 A
_:9001:111 General:Series compensa- no no
tion yes
_:9001:110 General:Series capacit. 1A 0.000 to 600.000 10.000
reactance 5A 0.000 to 120.000 2.000
Closure detec.
_: Closure detec.:Operating Manual close only Manual close
1131:4681:101 mode I open and V open only
CB and I open
I open
_: Closure detec.:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
1131:4681:102 after closure
_: Closure detec.:Min. time 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
1131:4681:103 feeder open
1pol.open det.
_: 1pol.open det.:Operating off with measure-
1131:4711:101 mode with measurement ment
CB and I open

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
_:4501:55 Group indicat.:Pickup ACD O
_:4501:57 Group indicat.:Operate ACT O
RDT
_:7381:500 Reset LED Group:>LED reset SPS I
_:7381:320 Reset LED Group:LED have been reset SPS O
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
1pol.open det.
_:1131:4711:300 1pol.open det.:1-pole open ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.2 Function-Group Type Voltage-Current 3-Phase
5.2.1 Overview
All functions for the protection and supervision of a protected object or equipment allowing 3-phase current
and voltage measurement can be used in the function group Voltage-current 3-phase. The function group
also contains the operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System ).
You will find the Voltage-current 3-phase function group under each device type in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
You will find all protection and supervision functions that you can use for this function-group type in the func-
tion group Voltage-current 3-phase. These functions are described in the chapter 6 Protection and Automa-
tion Functions .
You can find additional information on the embedding of the functions in the device in the chapter 2 Basic
Structure of the Function . You can find the function scope of the application templates for the various device
types in the chapter 4 Applications .
The function group always contains the following blocks:

Protected object/equipment data (FB General)
Operational measured values
Process monitor
Output logic of the function group
Reset LED group

These blocks are essential for the function group under all circumstances, so they cannot be loaded or
deleted.
You can load the protection and supervision functions required for your application in the function group. The
functions are available in the Global DIGSI 5 library. Functions that are not needed can be deleted from the
function group.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group Voltage-current 3-phase:
[dwfgui3p-301112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-14 Structure of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The function group has interfaces with

Measuring points
Circuit-breaker function group
Interface with Measuring Points

The function group receives the required measured values via its interfaces with the measuring points. If you
are using an application template, the function group is already connected to the necessary measuring points.
If you add functions to the function group, they will automatically receive the measured values from the
correct measuring points. If you add protection functions to the function group but the necessary measuring
point is not connected, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. Configure the measuring points in DIGSI 5 via the
Function group connections editor. You can find more detailed information in the chapter 2 Basic Structure of
the Function .
The function group has the following interfaces with the measuring points:
3-phase current
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. Depending on the
connection type of the transformers, these are, for example, IA, IB, IC, IN or 3I0. All values that can be
calculated from the measurands are also provided via this interface. The function group must always be
connected to the I-3ph measuring point.
You can connect the 3-phase current interface to a maximum of four 3-phase current measuring points
(for example, for 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts). If 2 current measuring points have been connected with
the 3-phase current interface, the total current is also determined from measured values from both
measuring points in the function group. All functions in the function group have access to these values.
3-phase voltage (optional)

The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via this interface. There are various
types of transformer connections possible. All values that can be calculated from the measurands are
also provided via this interface. Connecting the function group to the V 3ph measuring point is optional.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. You can find more information in chapter
6.55.1 Overview of Functions .
If you want to test or change the connection between the voltages and the V-3ph measuring point,
double-click in the DIGSI 5 project tree (Name of the device) on Measuring point routing (Connection
type = 3 phase-to-ground voltage. For more information, refer to the description of the power-system
data starting from chapter 6.1.1 Overview .

with the Circuit-breaker function group. This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of
the protection functions sent in the direction of the circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-
The Voltage-current 3-phase function group is connected to one or more circuit-breaker function groups. This
connection generally determines:
Which circuit breaker(s) is/are activated by the protection functions of the protection function group
Starting the Circuit-breaker failure protection function (if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
Starting the Automatic reclosing function (AREC, if available in the circuit-breaker function group)
Besides the general allocation of the protection function group to the circuit-breaker function groups, you can
also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail. Configure the details in DIGSI 5 using the
Circuit-breaker interaction editor in the protection function group.
Which protection functions start the Circuit-breaker failure protection function
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If you are using an application template, the function groups are already connected to each other, because
this connection is absolutely essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection in DIGSI 5
via the Function-group connections Editor.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
If the connection is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the protected object or the equip-
ment are defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
Equipment Data
The rated voltage and rated current as well as the neutral-point treatment of the object or the equipment are
defined here. These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
Resetting the LED Group

Using the Reset the LED group function, you can reset the stored LEDs of the functions in one specific func-
tion group while the activated, stored LEDs of other functions in other function groups remain activated.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 3.1.10 Resetting Stored Indications of the Function Group .
Process Monitor
The process monitor is always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and cannot be removed.
The process monitor provides the following information in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Current-flow criterion:
Detection of an open/activated protected object/equipment based on the flow of leakage current
Closure detection:
Detection of the switching on of the protected object/equipment
Cold-load pickup detection (optional, only for protection devices):

These data apply to all functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group.
The description of the process monitor begins in chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group and
cannot be removed.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group:
Table 5-2 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
INS Sensitive ground current A mA Rated operating current of the primary values
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
voltage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

dary
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary values
(total power) 3 Vrated Irated
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary values
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary values
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW W Active power of the phase
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the phase
The operational measured values are explained in more detail in chapter 9.3 Operational Measured Values .
Inversion of Power-Related Measured and Statistical Values (FB General)

The following directional values calculated in operational measured values are defined positively in the direc-
tion of the protected object.
Power
Power factor
Energy
Minimum, maximum values
Average values
With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the sign of these operational measured values such that a
power flow from the line to the busbar is displayed positively.
More information can be found in Chapter 9.1 Overview of Functions .
Output Logic
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the protection and supervision functions that are avail-
able in the function group separately, in a pickup logic and a trip logic, respectively. The pickup and trip logic
generate the overreaching indications (group indications) of the function group. These group indications are
transferred via the Protection information interface to the Circuit-breaker function group and are processed
further there.
The pickup signals of the protection and supervision functions in the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
are combined in a phase-selective manner and output as a group indication.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loanrlin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-15 Creation of the Pickup Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group
The trip signals from the protection and supervision functions of the Voltage-current 3-phase function group
always result in 3-pole tripping of the device.
[loauslin-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-16 Creation of the Operate Indication of the Voltage-Current 3-Phase Function Group

With this, you define which circuit-breaker(s) is/are affected by the protection functions of the Protection func-
tion group. A feasible default setting has already been provided in the application templates. You can find
more information in chapter 2.
Protected Object/Equipment Data (FB General)

The set data applies to all functions in the function group.
Set the protected object/equipment data for your specific application.

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated current parameter is significant for protection functions, as long as the current values
are set in percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the meas-
ured values in percent.
Default setting (_:9451:102) Rated voltage = 400.00 kV

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage of the protected object or equip-
ment. The Rated voltage parameter is significant for protection functions, as long as the current values
are set in percentages. In this case it is the reference value. In addition it is the reference value for the meas-
ured values in percent.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Power-sys. neutral point
Default setting (_:9451:149) Power-sys. neutral point = grounded

With the Power-sys. neutral point setting, you specify whether the system neutral is grounded ,
isolated , or suppress. coil grounded (grounded via arc-suppression coil). Currently, the param-
eter does not affect any protection function; only if the Automatic reclosing function uses the voltage meas-
urement.
You can find more information in Chapter 6.15.1 Overview of Functions .
Parameter: P, Q sign
Default setting (_:9451:158) P, Q sign = not reversed

The power and energy values are defined by the manufacturer such that power in the direction of the
protected object is considered positive. You can also define the power output by the protected object (for
example, as seen by the consumer) as positive. With the P, Q sign setting, you can invert the sign for
these components. This inversion does not influence any protection function.
5.2.4 Write-Protected Settings
Parameter: Rated apparent power
Default setting (_:91:103) Rated apparent power = 692.82 MVA

With the Rated apparent power parameter, you can set the primary rated apparent power for the auto
transformer to be protected. The Rated apparent power parameter is relevant for the main protection
function of the device. The Rated apparent power set here is the reference value for the percentage-
measured values and setting values made in percentages.
NOTE
i If the device works with the IEC 61850 protocol, then you change the setting value of the parameter only
via DIGSI 5 and not directly on the device. If you change the setting value directly on the device, then the
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameters C Range of Values Default Setting
Network data
_:91:103 General:rated apparent 0.20 MVA to 5 000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power
NOTE
i You can find more detailed information on the Process monitor in chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
5.2.5 Settings

Rated values
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Power-system data
_:9451:149 General:Power-sys. neutral grounded grounded
point suppress. coil grounded
isolated
_:9451:210 General:MI3ph1 uses- 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
MeasP with ID
MeasP with ID
MeasP with ID
_:9451:214 General:M I-1ph uses 0 to 100 0
MeasP with ID
_:9451:126 General:Number of 0 to 11 0
Meas.point. 3ph
Meas.point. 1ph
Measurements
_:9451:158 General:P, Q sign not reversed not reversed
reversed

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Reset LED Group
Closure detec.
_:1131:4681:500 Closure detec.:>Disconnector open SPS I
_:1131:4681:300 Closure detec.:Closure SPS O
5.2.7 Process Monitor

All function groups that have functions with dependencies on the state of the protected object contain a
process monitor. The process monitor detects the current state of the protected object.

The Process monitor function is used in the Standard V/I 3-phase protection function group.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Process monitor function is provided by the manufacture with the following function blocks:
Current-flow criterion
Circuit-breaker condition
Closure detection
Cold-load pickup detection (optional)
[dwpro3pt-061212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following figure shows the relationships of the individual function blocks.
[lopro3pt-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-18 Logic Diagram of the Overall Function Process Monitor
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.2.7.3 Current-Flow Criterion
Logic
[loproire-181111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-19 Logic Diagram of the Current-Flow Criterion Function Block
The I open signal of one phase is generated if one of the following conditions is met:
A phase current falls below the set threshold of the Current thresh. CB open parameter. The
hysteresis stabilizes the signal.
The corresponding phase current, for example, I A, falls below 10 % of the phase current when the trip
command arrives. If the current does not drop until after a delay due to current transformer influences,
an open pole can therefore be detected quickly even after a high-current fault on the line.
With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you define the minimum current as the criterion for a
deactivated line. The parameter lies in the Circuit-breaker function group. It acts both in the Circuit-breaker
function group, for example circuit-breaker position recognition, and also for the process monitor in the
Protection-function group.
5.2.7.4 Application and Setting Notes (Current-Flow Criterion)
Parameter: Current thresh. CB open
Recommended setting value (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.100 A

The Current thresh. CB open parameter is used to define the threshold for the leakage current as the
criterion for a deactivated line.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the feeder is deacti-
vated falls below the value of the Current thresh. CB open parameter with certainty. The hysteresis is
additionally active if the threshold is exceeded.
If parasitic currents, for example, due to induction, are ruled out when the feeder is deactivated, set the
Current thresh. CB open parameter sensitively.
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.100 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.2.7.5 Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected Object
Logic
[loprolsz-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-20 Logic Diagram of the Circuit-Breaker Condition for the Protected-Object Function Block
The Circuit-breaker position recognition function block in the Switch function group provides the circuit-
breaker condition (CB condition indication). If a protected object is supplied via 2 circuit breakers (CBs),
for example 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout, then the switch position of the protected object must be determined
with the aid of both circuit breakers. In this case, the circuit-breaker condition for the Protected object function
block performs linking of the individual CB conditions. The connection provides the CB-pos. protected
object indication to the other function blocks of the process monitor and other functions, for example, Trip in
the event of weak infeed and Echo function for teleprotection method) within the same function group.
If one of the following 2 conditions is met, the CB status protected object indication assumes the
Open state:
All connected circuit breakers signal the Open state.
The >Disconnector open input is active.

If the following 2 conditions are met, the CB status protected object indication assumes the Closed
state:
At least one of the connected circuit breakers signals the Closed state.
The >Disconnector open input is not active.
5.2.7.6 Closure Detection

The closure detection enables the immediate tripping of selected protection functions or protection stages
when switching to a short circuit or the reduction of the responsivity. The closure detection determines
whether the protected object is switched on.
Logic
[loein6md-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-21 Logic Diagram of Closure Detection
For an applied binary input signal Detected (from Manual close function block), the indication Closure is
active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.2.7.7 Application and Setting Notes (Closure Detection)
Default setting (_:4681:101) Operating mode = Manual close only

operates.
Manual close only The detection of feeder closure is exclusively decided using the binary
input signal Detected (from Manual close function block.
Siemens recommends this setting, if both of the following conditions are
met:
The binary input signal Manual On is available on the side of the
system.
A closure detection must not happen due to an additional current and
voltage measurement, for example, after an automatic reclosing.
I open and V open The closure detection is done additionally with the current and voltage
measurement.
If the voltage transformers are installed at the busbar side or if there is no
voltage connected, you must not use this setting.
CB and I open The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement
and with the evaluation of connected circuit breaker position contacts.
I open The closure detection is done additionally with the current measurement.
For this setting, make sure that the Current thresh. CB open param-
eter is set lower than the lowest possible load current. If this is not
ensured, open-circuit is detected continuously and each current value that
exceeds the Current thresh. CB open parameter is interpreted as
closure.
Parameter: Min. Feeder Open Time
Recommended setting value (_:4681:103) Min. time feeder open = 0.25 s

To avoid incorrect closure detection, the protected object must be switched off for the minimum time of Min.
time feeder openbefore the Closure indication can become active. You define the duration of the
release delay with the Min. time feeder open parameter.
Parameter: Action Time After Activation
Recommended setting value (_:4681:102) Action time after closure = 0.05 s

The Closure indication signals detected closure. With the Action time after closure parameter, you
set the Closure indication to a defined length.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.2.7.8 Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Optional)
Logic
[loprocls-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-22 Logic Diagram of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection Function Block
The Cold-load pickup detection function block detects that a specific time has been exceeded after deactiva-
tion of the line or protected object. If you want to connect the protected object again, you must note that an
increased load-current requirement exists for a limited time after connection. This results from the nature of
the load.
The Cold-load pickup detection function block ensures that different parameters are used for an adjustable
time after connection. For example, for the time of the Min. CB-open time parameter, you can increase
the threshold value of a protection function or you can select a special characteristic curve.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects an open feeder and the set time of the Min. CB-
open time parameter has expired, the indication >Activate cold-load is generated.
With the >Activate cold-load indication, you can activate a parameter set of the Cold-load pickup func-
tion. Via the binary input signal >Activate cold-load, you can also activate the >Activate cold-
load indication directly.
If the Cold-load pickup detection function block detects closure and the corresponding load current, it starts
the time set in the Dropout delay CB closed parameter. The >Activate cold-load indication and
the activated parameter set are deactivated after this time has elapsed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If, for the time set in the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, the maximum phase current falls below
the threshold value Dropout threshold current, the parameter set for the Cold-load pickup detection
function block is also deactivated. As a result, if the load current is very low, the action time Dropout delay
curr.crit. of the >Activate cold-load indication can be shortened.
5.2.7.9 Application and Setting Notes (Cold-Load Pickup Detection)
NOTE
i The settings and indications described in this chapter are only available when using the optional Cold-load
pickup detection function block.
Default setting (_:101) Operating mode = I open

operates.
I open When the Current-flow criterion function block detects a clearing open
condition, the decision is made for pickup. For this setting, make sure that
the Current thresh. CB open parameter is set lower than the
possible load current. If this is not the case, open is detected continuously
and each fault current that exceeds the Current thresh. CB open
parameter is interpreted as closure.
CB and I open Closure is detected if one of the following conditions is met:
Analysis of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact detects a clearing
open condition in at least one phase.
The current-flow criterion detects a clearing open condition.
Parameter: Dropout threshold current
Default setting (_:102) Dropout threshold current = 1.00 A

With the Dropout threshold current parameter, you set the threshold at which the output signal Cold-
load pickup is deactivated when the current in at least one phase falls below this threshold.
Parameter: Dropout delay current criterion
Default setting (_:103) Dropout delay curr.crit. = 600 s

With the Dropout delay curr.crit. parameter, you set the time for which the actual value must be
below the Dropout threshold current threshold so that the output signal Cold-load pickup can be
deactivated prematurely.
Parameter: Dropout delay CB closed
Default setting (_:104) Dropout delay CB closed = 3600 s

With the Dropout delay CB closed parameter, you set the action time for the dynamic parameter set
switching in the event of cold-load pickup detection.
Parameter: Min. CB open time
Default setting (_:105) Min. CB-open time = 3600 s

With the Min. CB-open time parameter, you set the time after which the dynamic parameter set is acti-
vated in the event of cold-load pickup when the line is opened.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.2.7.10 Settings

Cold-load PU
_:1 Cold-load PU:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Cold-load PU:Operating I open I open
mode CB and I open
_:102 Cold-load PU:Dropout 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
threshold current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
delay curr.crit.
delay CB closed
_:105 Cold-load PU:Min. CB- 0 s to 21600 s 3600 s
open time

(Type)
Cold-load PU
_:81 Cold-load PU:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Cold-load PU:>Block fast dropout SPS I
_:501 Cold-load PU:>Activate cold-load SPS I
_:54 Cold-load PU:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Cold-load PU:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Cold-load PU:Health ENS O
_:300 Cold-load PU:Cold-load pickup SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.3.1 Overview
In the Voltage-current 1-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a
protected object or equipment which allow a 1-phase current and voltage measurement or a zero-sequence
voltage measurement via a 3-phase voltage measuring point. The function group also contains the opera-
tional measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter 9 Measured Values,
Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System ).
The Voltage-current 1-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker
function group.
[dw1spstr-301112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 5-23 Structure of the Voltage-current 1-Phase Function Group

You connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group to the current and voltage measuring points via the
interfaces to the measuring points. At least one measuring point has to be connected. The other is optional.
This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree Function group connections. To connect the
interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
The function group has the following interfaces to the measuring points:
1-phase current
The 1-phase current measured values are supplied via this interface.
You can connect multiple measuring points with the 1-phase current interface.
1-phase voltage or 3-phase voltage

You can connect the voltage interface of the function group with a 1-phase or a 3-phase measuring
point. The calculated zero-sequence voltage or the measured residual voltage are available for connec-
tion with a 3-phase measuring point. The phase-to-ground voltages are not available in the function
group Voltage-current 1-phase. You can use both connection types at the same time.
You configure the 1-phase voltage measuring points via the voltage interface (see the following figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scVI1ph_V1ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-24 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage-current 1-Phase Function Group
The converted, calculated zero-sequence voltage or measured residual voltage from the 3-phase voltage
system is available via the voltage interface (see following figure).
[scVI1ph_V3ph, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-25 Connecting Measuring Points 3-Phase Voltage and 1-Phase Current to the 1-Phase Voltage-
Current Function Group
You can connect the voltage interface with precisely one 3-phase voltage measuring point. 3 types of 3-
phase voltage measuring-point connections are supported. With the differenct connection types, the type of
voltage input also changes in line with the functions. The following table shows the characteristics of the
voltage input depending on the types of connection.
Connection Type of the 3-Phase Voltage Measuring Voltage Input
Point
3 ph-to-gnd voltages The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from the
phase-to-ground voltages and used as a voltage
input for all funtions.
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN The residual voltage VN is converted to the voltage
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN equivalent of the zero-sequence voltage. The
converted voltage is used as a voltage input for func-
tions.

with the Circuit-breaker function group. In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection
functions are exchanged in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage-current 1-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This
assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree Function group connections. To connect the inter-
faces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc1stspc-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-26 Connecting Voltage-current 1-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Fundamental Components
The fundamental components are always present in the Voltage-current 1-phase function group and cannot
be deleted.
The following table shows the fundamental components of the Voltage-current 1-phase function group:
Table 5-3 Fundamental Components of the Voltage-current 1-Phase Function Group
Measured Values Primary Secondary % Referring to

I 1-phase current A A Rated operating current
V6 1-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage
V0 7 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Rated operating voltage/3
VN 8 Residual voltage kV V Rated operating voltage/3
NOTE
i Prior to creation of the protection functions in the function group, these functions should first be connected
to the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.

The Rated current parameter is used to set the primary rated current. The Rated current specified
here is the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary voltage, which serves as a reference for all
voltage-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group.
5.3.4 Write-Protected Settings
The settings listed here are used primarily for understanding during configuration of the function groups. They
are calculated on the basis of other settings and cannot be directly changed.
Addr. Parameter C Range of Values Default Setting
Rated values
_:9421:104 General: Rated current 1 A to 100000 A 1000 A
_:9421:105 General: Rated voltage 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
Network data
_:91:103 General:rated apparent 0.20 MVA to 5000.00 MVA 692.82 MVA
power
measuring point ID
6 The 1-phase voltage V is only visible if it is connected to a 1-phase voltage measuring point
7 The zero-sequence voltage V0 is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the 3-phase phase-to-ground
voltage connection type
8 The residual voltage VN is only visible if it is connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point with the 3-phase phase-to-ground
voltage connection type + VN or 3-phase phase-to-phase voltage + VN
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:91:223 General: Scale factor M 0.010 to 100.000 0.000
I-1ph
5.3.5 Settings

Rated values
Power-system data
MeasP with ID
Meas.point. 1ph

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
RDT
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.4 Function-Group Type Voltage 3-Phase
5.4.1 Overview
In the Voltage 3-phase function group, all functions can be used for protecting and for monitoring a protected
object or equipment which allows a 3-phase voltage measurement. The function group also contains the
operational measurement for the protected object or equipment (on this topic, see chapter 9 Measured
Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System). Applicable functions are, for example,
Voltage protection or Frequency protection.
The Voltage 3-phase function group has interfaces to the measuring points and the Circuit-breaker function
group.
[dw3spann-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-27 Structure of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

You connect the Voltage 3-phase function group to the voltage measuring points via the interface to the
measuring points. This assignment can only be made in DIGSI via Project tree Function group connections.
To connect the interfaces, set a cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc3span1-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-28 Connecting Measuring Points to the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group
If you add functions to the Voltage 3-phase function group, these are connected to the measuring point auto-
matically.
You can connect multiple measuring points with this interface. You can find more information in chapter
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection.
The measurands from the 3-phase voltage system are supplied via the V 3-ph interface. Depending on the
type of transformer connections, these are, for example, VA, VB, VC, Vgnd. All values that can be calculated
from the measurands are also provided via this interface.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

with the Circuit-breaker function group. In this example, the pickup and operate indications of the protection
functions are exchanged in the direction of the Circuit-breaker function group.
You must connect the Voltage 3-phase function group with the Circuit-breaker function group. This assign-
ment can be made in DIGSI only via Project tree Connect function group. To connect the interfaces, set a
cross at the intersection between the row and column in the matrix.
[sc3span2-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-29 Connecting Voltage 3-Phase Function Group with Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The operational measured values are always present in the Voltage 3-phase function group and cannot be
deleted.
The following table shows the operational measured values of the Voltage 3-phase function group:
Table 5-4 Operational Measured Values of the Voltage 3-Phase Function Group

dary
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
VNG Neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
voltage
NOTE
i Before creating the protection functions in the function group, you should first connect hese functions to
the appropriate Circuit-breaker function group.

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary rated voltage. The Rated voltage set here is
the reference value for the percentage-measured values and setting values made in percentages.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.4.4 Settings

Rated values

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
RDT
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.5 Function-Group Type Circuit Breaker
5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function group combines all the user functions that relate to a circuit breaker.
You will find the Circuit-breaker function group under each device type in the function library in DIGSI 5. The
Circuit-breaker function group contains all of the protection, control, and supervision functions that you can
use for this device type. The following figure shows the functional scope of the Circuit-breaker function group.
[scbicb1p-241013, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-30 Circuit-Breaker Function Group - Example of the Functional Scope
These functions are described in the chapters Protection and automation functions and Control functionali-
ties.
Besides the user functions, the Circuit-breaker function group contains certain functionalities that are essen-
tial for general purposes and therefore cannot be loaded or deleted:
Trip logic
Mapping the physical circuit breaker
Circuit-breaker position recognition for protection functions
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Detection of manual closing
General settings
The following figure shows the structure of the Circuit-Breaker function group. The individual function blocks
in the image are described in the following chapters.
[dwfgalle-080812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-31 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with:

Measuring points
Protection function groups, for example, the Line protection function group
Interfaces with Measuring Points

The function group contains the measured values needed from the measuring points associated with this
function group.
If an application template is used, the function group is connected to the measuring point of the 3-phase line
current because this link is essential. It may be necessary to connect additional measuring points to the func-
tion group, depending on the nature of the user functions used. Configuration is carried out using the Func-
tion-group connections editor in DIGSI 5. For more information about this, refer to chapter 2.1 Function
Embedding in the Device .
If a user function, for example, synchronization, is used in the function group but the required measuring point
has not linked to it, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency. This inconsistency provides an indication of the missing
measuring-point connection.
The Circuit-breaker function group has interfaces with the following measuring points:
3-phase line current
The measurands from the 3-phase power system are supplied via this interface. The function group
must always be connected to this measuring point.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Voltage
The measurands of the 3-phase voltage system or 1-phase voltage are supplied via this interface.
Depending on the connection type of the transformers, in the 3-phase voltage system these are for
example, VA, VB, VC of the line or feeder.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if a user function that needs the
measurand of the 3-phase voltage system is used, for example, to make use of the Synchronization or
Automatic reclosing function.
Sync voltage
A 1-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 1-phase connection) or a
3-phase synchronization voltage (for example, voltage of the busbar with a 3-phase connection) is
supplied via this interface.
The connection to the corresponding measuring point is necessary only if synchronization is used.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

All required data is exchanged between the Protection and Circuit-breaker function groups via the interface
with the Protection function group. This data includes, for example, the pickup and operate indications of the
protection functions sent in the direction of the circuit-breaker function group and, for example, the circuit-
If an application template is used, the function groups are connected to each other because this connection is
essential to ensure proper operation. You can modify the connection using the Function group connections
editor in DIGSI 5.
You can find more detailed information in the chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
If this link is missing, DIGSI 5 reports an inconsistency.
Besides the general assignments of the Protection-function group or groups to the Circuit-breaker function
groups, you can also configure the interface for certain functionalities in detail.
Which operate indications of the protection functions are included when the trip command is generated?
Which protection functions activate the Automatic reclosing function?
Which protection functions activate the Circuit-breaker failure protection function?

You can find more detailed information about this configuration in chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device .

The interface with the 3-phase power system must have been configured. Otherwise, DIGSI 5 reports an
inconsistency.
If the Synchronization function is used, the measuring points that represent voltages V1 and V2 of the parts of
the power system to be synchronized must be connected.
You can find more detailed information in the chapter Synchronization 7.5.1 Overview of Functions .
The Automatic reclosing function provides the auxiliary functions Dead-line check and Reduced dead time.
For these auxiliary functions, the 3-phase voltage system has to be measured. If you want to use these auxil-
iary functions, the measuring point of the 3-phase voltage system must be connected to the Voltage function
group interface. This link is also necessary if the Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time func-
tion type is used.
Interface with Protection-Function Groups

The Line protection-function group is linked to 2 circuit breakers (2 Circuit-breaker function groups) for 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layouts.
Parameter: Rated normal current for % values
Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated normal current = 1.000 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the Rated normal current parameter, you set the primary current which serves as a reference for
all current-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational meas-
ured values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated current of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
Parameter: Rated voltage for % values

With the Rated voltage parameter, you set the primary voltage, which serves as a reference for all
voltage-related % values within the Circuit-breaker function group. This applies both for operational measured
values and for setting values in %.
Enter the primary rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the line) here.
Parameter: Current threshold circuit breaker open
Default setting (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open = 0.10 A

With the Current thresh. CB open parameter, you specify the threshold value below which the circuit-
breaker pole or the circuit breaker is recognized as open.
Set the Current thresh. CB open parameter so that the current measured when the circuit-breaker
pole is open will certainly fall below the parameterized value. If parasitic currents (for example, due to induc-
tion) are excluded with the line deactivated, you can make a secondary setting of the value with a high
degree of sensitivity, to 0.05 A for example.
If no special requirements exist, Siemens recommends retaining the setting value of 0.10 A for secondary
purposes.
Parameter: 1-pole operate allowed
Default setting (_:2311:113) 1-pole operate allowed = yes

With the 1-pole operate allowed parameter, you specify whether 1-pole operate is permitted or
whether only 3-pole operate should be carried out.
yes The 3-pole coupling in the Trip logic function block (see 5.5.4.1 Function
Description ) decides whether the current phase-selective pickup results in a 1-
pole or a 3-pole operate command.
The basic prerequisite for 1-pole tripping is the existence of permission for 1-
pole operate by the Automatic reclosing function.
1-pole operate is therefore only practical on overhead lines. The circuit
breakers for these lines must be suitable for 1-pole operate at both ends.
no The function always causes 3-pole operate of the circuit breaker.
5.5.4 Trip Logic

The Trip logic function block receives the pickup and group operate indications from the Protection-function
group or Protection-function groups and forms the protection trip command that is transmitted to the Circuit-
breaker function block. A 3-pole operate indication can also come from automatic reclosing (AR) (if tripping
was initiated for 1-pole and AR cannot reclose).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Circuit-breaker function block activates the device contact and thus causes the circuit breaker to open
(see 5.5.5.1 Overview ). The command output time is also effective here. In the trip logic, the decision is
made whether to trigger 1-pole tripping or not (3-pole coupling) (see Figure 5-32).
The trip logic also decides when the protection trip command is terminated (see Figure 5-33).
[loausl1p-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-32 1-Pole or 3-Pole Operate and 3-Pole Coupling
1-Pole or 3-Pole Operate

Under certain circumstances, the device can cause 1-pole operate in the event of 1-phase or 2-phase faults.
The device always causes 3-pole operate in the event of 3-phase short circuits.
The preconditions for 1-pole operate are:
The device is designed for 1-pole operate (see Order reference).
The tripping protection function can generate 1-pole operate indications and is set accordingly (1-pole
operate allowed parameter set to yes).
The circuit-breaker function group allows 1-pole operate.

To do this, set the 1-pole operate allowed parameter in the circuit-breaker function group (see
General parameters of the function group) to yes.
The Automatic reclosing function is active and generates the 79 permits 1-pole trip signal. The
function thus indicates that it is healthy for 1-pole reclosing after 1-pole operate.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
All other cases result in 3-pole operate.
3-Pole Coupling
3-pole coupling describes the situation when the trip logic decides to execute 3-pole tripping despite the pres-
ence of a 1-pole operate indication.
This may be the case under the following circumstances:
The Automatic reclosing function cannot execute a 1-pole cycle. This is expressed by the cleared signal
79 permits 1-pole trip.
If an upstream device has caused 1-pole tripping and the device in question detects this pole as open
(via the process monitor in the Line protection function group) and the device in question detects a fault
in another conductor
If 1-pole tripping reoccurs within 50 ms after an instance of 1-pole tripping has been cleared
If the permission for 1-pole tripping is canceled by the AR (internal or external) after a cleared 1-pole trip
(during the 1-pole pause)
By default, 3-pole coupling is carried out based on the cumulative operate indication. Optionally, the group
pickup indication can also be taken into account (parameter 3-pole coupling). In this case, every multi-
phase pickup results in a 3-pole coupling, including pickups of different phases from different stages/func-
tions.
2-Phase Short-Circuits
For 2-pole faults, you set the behavior with the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit.
3-pole
Tripping is executed in the event of 2-pole faults.
1-pole, leading phase

1-pole tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole faults without grounding. The leading phase is tripped
(for more information, see Table 5-5). In the event of a BC fault, for example, pole B is tripped. 3-pole
tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole faults with grounding.
1-pole, lagging phase

1-pole tripping takes place in the event of 2-pole faults without grounding. The trailing phase is tripped.
In the event of a BC fault, for example, pole C is tripped. 3-pole tripping takes place in the event of 2-
pole faults with grounding.
Coupling Table
The following table shows the coupling table for Figure 5-32. This table also explains its impact on 2-phase
faults.
Table 5-5 Coupling
Input Output
Impact of the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit
3-pole 1-pole, leading phase 1-pole, trailing phase
A B C Groun A B C A B C A B C
d
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Input Output
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Reset of Trip Command
[loauslbe-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-33 Reset of Trip Command
Once a trip command is issued, it is stored (see Figure 5-32).

You determine the criteria for resetting a trip command that has been issued with the parameter Reset of
trip command.
with dropout
The trip command is reset if the function that initiated tripping terminates its operate indication. This
occurs typically with dropout. Resetting the trip command takes place regardless of verification of the
circuit-breaker condition.
with I<
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
with I< & aux.contact

With the criteria with I< and with I< & aux.contact, the condition of the circuit breaker is also
taken into account as a further criterion in addition to the dropout of the tripping function (operate indica-
tion is terminated by command). You can select whether the state is determined by means of the current
(with I<) or by means of the current in conjunction with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts (with
I< & aux.contact). The behavior of these setting options only differs in one situation of the circuit-
breaker condition. If the circuit breaker is in the opening condition, the trip command is reset in the case
of the option with I<, whereas it is not reset yet in the case of the option with with I< &
aux.contact. The opening condition is detected when the auxiliary contacts still detect the circuit
breaker as being closed and opening is detected via the decreasing current flow.
As long as the circuit breaker is detected unambiguously as closed (fully closed), the trip command will
not be reset with these setting options.
The information about the condition of the circuit breaker is supplied by the Circuit-breaker position
recognition function block (see 5.5.6.1 Overview ). The determination of the various conditions is also
described in this chapter.
Parameter: 1-pole tripping permitted

For this, see 5.5.3 Application and Setting Notes .
Parameter: 3-Pole Coupling
Default setting (_:5341:102) 3-pole coupling = with trip

with trip With this setting, every multipole trip command results in 3-pole tripping. If a 1-
phase short circuit is present within the tripping zone and any other fault is
present outside the zone, 1-pole tripping is possible.
Even an additional fault during 1-pole tripping also results in 3-pole coupling
only if it occurs within the tripping zone.
with pickup With this setting every multiphase pickup results in a 3-pole trip, even if only
one 1-phase ground fault is present in the tripping zone and one further fault is
detected, for example due to overcurrent.
Even if a 1-pole trip command is pending, any further pickup will result in a 3-
pole coupling.
EXAMPLE
If 2 1-phase ground faults occur on different lines - for example, including parallel lines - (see Figure 5-34),
the protection devices will detect fault types A-B-E at all 4 line ends, that is, with a pickup characteristic corre-
sponding to a 2-phase ground fault. However, since there is only one 1-phase short circuit on each of the 2
lines, it is desirable to have a short 1-pole interruption on each of these 2 lines. This is possible with a setting
with trip command. Each of the 4 devices detects an internal 1-phase short circuit and can therefore cause 1-
pole tripping.
[dwfehler-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-34 Multiphase Short Circuit on a Double Line
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In some cases, 3-pole disconnection works better for this fault type: If the double line is situated close to a
large generator block (see Figure 5-35). For the generator, both 1-phase ground faults are manifested as
double ground faults with a correspondingly high dynamic load of the turbine shaft. For a setting with pickup,
both lines are deactivated since each device detects A-B-E that is, a multiphase short circuit upon pickup.
[dwgenfeh-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-35 Multiphase Short Circuit on a Double Line Close to the Generator
Parameter: Tripping Behavior with 2-Phase Short Circuit
Default setting (_:5341:101) Trip at 2ph short circuit = 1-pole, leading phase
With the parameter Trip at 2ph short circuit, you determine whether the short-circuit protection
functions only result in 1-pole tripping in the event of an isolated 2-phase fault (without ground contact),
provided 1-pole tripping is possible and permitted. This enables a 1-phase interrupt cycle for this fault type. In
this case, you determine which of the 2 phases the leading (1-pole, leading phase) or the trailing
phase (1-pole, lagging phase) is tripped.
NOTE
i If you want to use this option, bear in mind that phase selection is the same throughout the power system
and at the ends of a line.
If 3-pole tripping is to be executed in the event of this fault type, select the 3-pole setting.
Parameter: Reset of trip command
Recommended setting value (_:5341:103) Reset of trip command = with I<

with I< With this setting, the trip command is reset as soon as the current is removed,
provided the tripping function has dropped out. The most important factor for
recognition of the open circuit breaker is the current falling short of the value
set in the parameter (_:2311:112) Current thresh. CB open.
with I< & For this setting not only the current has to be removed, but also the circuit-
aux.contact breaker auxiliary contact has to report that the circuit breaker is open. This
setting assumes that the setting of the auxiliary contact has been routed via a
binary input (for more information, see 5.5.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker
Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).
with dropout You can select the with dropout setting for special applications in which the
trip command does not result in complete interruption of the current in every
case. In this case, the trip command is reset if the pickup of the tripping protec-
tion function drops out.
The setting is useful if the load current in the system cannot be interrupted
during the protection device test and the test current is fed in parallel with the
load current.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.5.4.3 Settings

Trip logic
_:101 Trip logic:Trip at 2ph short 3-pole 3-pole
circuit 1-pole, leading phase
_:102 Trip logic:3-pole coupling with pickup with trip
with trip
_:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip with I< with I<
command with I< & aux.contact
with dropout

(Type)
Trip logic
_:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
5.5.5 Circuit Breaker
5.5.5.1 Overview
The Circuit-breaker function block represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device.
The basic tasks of this function block are the operation of the circuit breaker and the acquisition of the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts and other circuit-breaker information.
The Circuit-breaker function block also provides information about:
Number of switching cycles
Breaking current, breaking voltage, and breaking frequency
Summation breaking current
5.5.5.2 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker

The circuit breaker is operated in the following situations:
Tripping of the circuit breaker as a result of a protection trip command
Opening of the circuit breaker as a result of control operations
Closing of the circuit breaker as a result of automatic reclosing or control operations

Tripping is always the result of a protection function. The operate indications of the individual protection func-
tions are summarized in the Trip logic function block. The trip command that causes the tripping in the Circuit
breaker function block is generated there. 1-pole or 3-pole tripping is possible depending on the configuration,
parameterization or even the protection function (see also 5.5.4.1 Function Description ).
To operate the circuit breaker, the Circuit-breaker function block provides the output signals (see Table 5-6)
that must be routed to the corresponding binary outputs of the device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loaussch-180912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-36 Tripping, Opening, and Closing the Circuit Breaker
Table 5-6 Description of the Output Signals
Signal Description Routing Options

Trip/open cmd. 3- This signal executes all 3-pole tripping and opening oper- Unlatched
pole ations. Only saved in the
The Output time parameter affects the signal. event of protection
The signal is pending for the duration of this period, with tripping (not when
the following exceptions: opened)
Only when switched off by the control: The signal is

canceled before expiration of the period if the auxil-
iary contacts report that the circuit breaker is open
before expiration of the period.
Only in the event of protection tripping: The signal
remains active as long as the trip command is still
active after expiration of the period (see also
5.5.4.1 Function Description ).
Only in the event of protection tripping: With the
routing option Only saved in the event of tripping,
the signal remains pending until it is acknowledged
manually. This only applies for protection tripping.
Trip only pole A This signal only executes 1-pole tripping for phase A. If Normal routing
3-pole tripping occurs while a 1-pole trip signal is active,
the 1-pole signal is canceled.
The signal is active for as long as the trip command is
active, but at least for the duration of the output time.
Trip only pole B This signal only executes 1-pole tripping for phase B. If Normal routing
Trip only pole C This signal only executes 1-pole tripping for phase C. If Normal routing
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Signal Description Routing Options

Close command This signal executes all closing operations. Normal routing
The Output time parameter affects the signal.
The signal is pending for the duration of this period, with
the following exception: The signal is canceled before
expiration of the period if the auxiliary contacts report
that the circuit breaker is closed before expiration of the
period.
Closing operations are always 3-pole operations.
Command active This signal is active as long as one of the binary outputs Normal routing
assigned to the signals Trip/open cmd. 3-pole and
Close command is active because a switching
command is being executed by the control.
5.5.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information

To determine the circuit-breaker switch position, the Circuit-breaker function block provides position signals
(see next figure).
These signals are of the Double-point indication (DPC) type. A double-point indication can be routed to
2 binary inputs so that the open and closed circuit-breaker switch positions can be reliably acquired.
[loerfass-091210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-37 Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Information
Signal Type Description

Position 3-pole DPC Acquisition of the 3-pole circuit-breaker switch position.
The position 3-pole circuit breaker open and/or the position 3-pole
circuit breaker closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2 binary inputs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Position 1-pole DPC Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase A.
phsA The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase A open and/or the position 1-
pole circuit-breaker phase A closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2
binary inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase B.
phsB The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase B open and/or the position 1-
pole circuit-breaker phase B closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2
binary inputs.
Position 1-pole DPC Acquisition of the 1-pole circuit-breaker switch position for phase C.
phsC The position 1-pole circuit-breaker phase C open and/or the position 1-
pole circuit-breaker phase C closed can be acquired by routing to 1 or 2
binary inputs.
The signal or signals must be routed to the binary inputs that are connected to the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The open and closed signals do not necessarily have to be routed in parallel. The advantage of
parallel routing is that it can be used to determine an intermediate or disturbed position. On the other hand,
this is not possible if only one signal is routed.
In the monitoring direction, the position signals generate the following information when the open and closed
positions are acquired (see following table). This information is further processed by the Circuit-breaker posi-
tion recognition and Control function blocks.
Information Type Description
From SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is opened.
On SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is closed.
Intermediate position SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is in intermediate position.
Disturbed position SPS Circuit-breaker switch position is in disturbed position.
Not selected SPS The circuit breaker is not selected for a control operation.
Other input signals are:

>Acquisition SPS This is used to activate acquisition blocking of the circuit-breaker auxil-
blocking iary contacts (see chapter Other functions 3.8.3 Persistent Commands
for a description of acquisition blocking).
>Ready SPS The active signal indicates that the circuit breaker is ready for an OFF-
ON-OFF cycle.
The signal remains active as long as the circuit breaker is unable to trip.
The signal is used in the Automatic reclosing and Circuit-breaker test
functions.
Another output signal is:

External health SPS This can be used to indicate the health of the physical circuit breaker.
For this, you must acquire any failure information for the circuit breaker
via a binary input. This failure information can set the appropriate state
of the External health signal with a CFC chart (using the
BUILD_ENS block).
The signal has no effect on the health of the function block.
5.5.5.4 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
Definitive Tripping
Definitive tripping is always pending whenever the Automatic reclosing (AREC) function does not carry out
any reclosing after tripping. It follows that this is the case whenever an automatic reclosing is not present or
the AREC has been switched off.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression

In certain systems, the user may wish to actuate an alarm (for example, a horn) when tripping (circuit-breaker
tripping) occurs. This alarm should not to be issued if the circuit breaker is to be reclosed automatically after
tripping or if it is to be closed or opened via the control. The alarm is only to be issued in the event of final
tripping.
Depending on how the alarm is generated (for example, triggered by a fleeting contact of the circuit breaker),
the Alarm suppression signal can be used to suppress the alarm.
The signal is generated if:
A definitive protection tripping is not present
The automatic reclosing function executes a closure
The integrated control executes a closure or opening action
External closing is detected via the Manual on function

Further information about its use is included in the Application and Setting Notes.
[lounterd-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-38 Definitive Tripping, Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.5.5.5 Tripping and Opening Information

When a trip command is issued, the tripping information shown in the next figure is saved in the fault log.
[loausloe-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-39 Tripping Information
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following statistics information is saved for the circuit breaker:

Number of switching cycles:
All tripping, opening, and closing operations are counted.
Number of closings by the automatic reclosing function, broken down according to 1-pole and 3-pole as
well as 1st cycle and other cycles
Total of tripping and breaking currents, cumulative and pole-selective

The statistics information can be individually set and reset via the device control. It is also possible to reset all
values via the binary input signal >Reset switch statist..
[lostatis-140113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-40 Statistics Information about the Circuit Breaker
Routings for Activation of the Circuit Breaker

Figure 5-41 shows the necessary routings:
The device can execute 1-pole and 3-pole tripping (via the protection).
The device can execute 3-pole opening (via the control).
The device can execute 3-pole closing (via AREC or via the control).
[loansteu-071210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-41 Activation of the Circuit Breaker
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Note that you must route the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signal for 3-pole tripping/opening to all 3 binary
inputs.
By routing the Trip/open cmd. 3-pole signals to 1 or 2 binary outputs, you can carry out 1, 1.5, and 2-
pole activations of the circuit breaker. You will find a detailed description of this in 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants
of the Circuit Breaker.
NOTE
i Do not confuse these 1-pole, 1.5-pole, and 2-pole activations of the circuit breaker with 1-pole or 3-pole
tripping of the circuit breaker.
Routing for Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position

For certain functions of the device, it is useful to detect the circuit-breaker switch position via its auxiliary
contacts. These are for example:
Circuit-breaker position recognition function block
Circuit-breaker failure protection function
Control function block

The operating principle of the auxiliary contacts is described in the individual functions.
Depending on the application, Siemens recommends the following different interfaces for the auxiliary
contacts:
The device performs protection and automatic reclosing functions without any control functionality.
For optimal performance of the protection and automatic reclosing functions, the Pole closed information
should be acquired selectively via the auxiliary contacts.
[loauswer-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-42 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
Device
Make the routing to the binary input as G_ (closed). In the following figure, routing is executed as CH, in
which H stands for active with voltage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scpolges-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-43 Pole Closed: Routing for the Acquisition of Pole Closed Information
The device performs protection, automatic reclosing, and control functions

The information Circuit breaker is open in 3 poles must also be recorded via the auxiliary
contacts to ensure optimum operation of the control functionality. The device derives the information
Circuit breaker is closed in 3 poles (for the control functionality) automatically from the 1-
pole information.
[loausw3p-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-44 Recommended Analysis of the Circuit-Breaker Switch Position when Used as a Protection
and Control Device
Execute the routing of the Position 3-pole signal as O_ (open). In the following figure, routing is
executed as OH, in which H stands for active with voltage.
[scpoloff-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-45 Routing for the Acquisition of Information that Circuit Breaker Is Open in 3 Poles
Depending on the design of the circuit breaker, other auxiliary contacts can be available in the system. In this
case, the device allows all routing options and acquires the necessary information automatically. Since all
routing options are possible on the device, there is no need for auxiliary contacts to be connected in series.
The device can also function without the analysis from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, that is, routing of
the auxiliary contacts is not absolutely necessary.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Output time
Default setting (_:101) Output time = 0.10 s

TheOutput time parameter acts on the signals for tripping, opening, and closing of the circuit breaker.
! CAUTION
Do not set a time that is too short.
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit.
If this happens, the device contacts will burn out.
Set a time that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open or closed) after a control operation.
Output signal: Indication Suppression

Whereas in the case of feeders without an automatic reclosing function every trip command is final due to a
protection function, the use of an automatic reclosing function should only cause the motion detector of the
circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the circuit breaker) to trigger an alarm if tripping of the circuit breaker is
definitive (see next figure for more details). Likewise, a tripping alarm should not be triggered for switching
operations by the control.
For this, the alarm activation circuit should be looped via a suitably routed output contact of the device (output
signal Alarm suppression). In the idle state and when the device is switched off, this contact is perma-
nently closed. For this, an output contact with a break contact must be routed. The contact opens whenever
the output signal Alarm suppression becomes active, so that tripping or a switching operation does not
cause an alarm (see the logic in 5.5.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Informa-
tion for more details).
[loschalt-081210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-46 Circuit-Breaker Tripping Alarm Suppression
5.5.6 Circuit-Breaker Position Recognition for Protection-Related Auxiliary Functions
5.5.6.1 Overview
This function block calculates the position of the circuit breaker from the evaluation of the auxiliary contacts
and the current flow. The calculation is performed phase-segregated.
This information is needed in the following protection-related additional functions:
Trip logic (see 5.5.4.1 Function Description )
Detection of manual closing (see 5.5.7.1 Function Description)
Process monitor (see 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions )

Its use is described in the respective chapters.
The control does not use this information. The control evaluates the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lozust1p-170611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-47 Overview of the Circuit-Breaker Condition Position Function
Based on the connection between the information from the auxiliary contacts and the current flow, the circuit
breaker can assume the following conditions for each phase:
Circuit-Breaker Condition, Phase-Selective Description
Open The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously
as open according to both criteria.
Closed The circuit-breaker pole is detected unambiguously
as closed according to both criteria.
Possibly open, Possibly closed These conditions can occur if the information is
incomplete due to the routing of the auxiliary contacts
and the condition can no longer be determined reli-
ably. These uncertain conditions are evaluated differ-
ently by certain functions.
Opening This is a dynamically occurring condition that results
when, while a trip command is active and the auxil-
iary contact is still closed, the current is detected to
have fallen below the threshold value because the
current-flow criterion takes effect faster than the
auxiliary contact can open.
5.5.7 Detection of Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)
Detection of Manual Closure (for AREC and Process Monitor)

The Manual closure function block detects any closure carried out by hand. This information is used in the
Automatic reclosing (AREC) and Process monitor functions (with protection function groups).
You will find detailed information in the chapters AR and Process monitor.
The following figure shows the logic for manual closure detection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loghande-091210-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 5-48 Logic for Manual Closure Detection
External Manual Closure

An external manual closure is communicated to the device via the input signal >Input . The input signal can
also be connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing coil. For this reason, detection is
suppressed in the event of a close command by the AREC function. Detection via the input signal >Input is
also blocked if the circuit breaker is closed or if a protection trip is active.
Internal Manual Closure

Manual closure is detected in all cases if a close command is transmitted by the internal control function of
the device. This is possible because the control carries out plausibility checks itself and is also subject to
interlocking.
Input Signals: >Input, >Blocking of Manual Closure

In practice, the input signal >Input is connected directly to the control circuit of the circuit-breaker closing
coil (see following figure).
[losteuer-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-49 Connection of the Input Signal to the Control Circuit of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Coil
Every closure of the circuit breaker is recorded in the process. Therefore, detection is suppressed in the
event of a close command by the internal AREC function of the device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If external close commands are possible (actuation of the circuit breaker by other devices), which are not
intended to prompt detection of a manual closure (for example, with an external reclosing device), this can be
assured in 2 ways:
The input signal is connected in such a way that it is not activated in the event of external close
commands.
The external close command is connected to the blocking input >Block manual close for manual
closure detection.
Parameter: Action time
Recommended setting value (_:6541:101) Action time = 300 ms

In order to ensure independence from manual activation of the input signal, the detection function is extended
for a defined length of time using the parameter Action time.
Siemens recommends an action time of 300 ms.
5.5.7.3 Settings

Manual close
_:101 Manual close:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
Manual close
_:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O
5.5.8 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. CB 1 A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
open 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.500 A

(Type)
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA DPC C
_:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB DPC C
_:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:401 Circuit break.:Trip only pole A SPS O
_:4261:402 Circuit break.:Trip only pole B SPS O
_:4261:403 Circuit break.:Trip only pole C SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A INS O
_:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B INS O
_:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:I Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:IA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:IB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:IC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6 Function-Group Type Analog Units
5.6.1 Overview
The Analog units function group is used to map analog units and communicate with them. Analog units are
external devices, such as RTD units, or analog plug-in modules, such as measuring-transducer modules.
You will find the Analog units function group for many device types in the Global DIGSI 5 library.
[sc20maee-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-50 Analog Unit Function Group in DIGSI
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the device has a measuring transducer, it is automatically mapped in the Analog units function group. If one
or more RTD units are connected to the device, you have to load one or more RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit
serial functions from the Global DIGSI library in order to map the RTD units.
The following figure shows the structure of the function group.
[dwstrthe-030615-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-51 Structure of the Analog Unit Function Group
The Analog units function group has interfaces to protection function groups. The Analog units function group
provides measured temperature values that come from an external RTD unit. These measured temperature
values are available for all protection function groups in which a temperature monitoring function works.
The RTD unit Ether. function is not preconfigured by the manufacturer. A maximum of 20 function instances
can work simultaneously.
The RTD unit serial function is set up structurally exactly in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet
5.6.3.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Ether.:
Communicates in series with a 20-mA unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process tags such as temperature or gas
pressure
Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Ether. can work only in the function group Analog units. A maximum of 4 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured channel function blocks.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. contains input and output channels which can be configured independently of
one another.
[dwstrfn2-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.3.3 Communication with 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Logic
[lo20mtcp-150113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-53 Logic of the Function 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Communication with 20-mA Unit

The function is used to communicate with a 20-mA unit connected via an Ethernet connection. When a
connection of the function to an external 20-mA unit via an Ethernet interface has successfully been estab-
lished, the 20-mA unit sends the measured values of all connected channels to the function 20-mA unit.
Ether.. For the connection to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be specified.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 5.6.3.4 Application and Setting Notes.
The 20-mA measurement unit 7XV5674 is supported.
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.
Table 5-7 Error Responses
Error Description Status Health

The function 20-mA unit Ether. cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The function 20-mA unit Ether. sends TCP settings to Alarm
the communication module, which evidently would
like to connect to the 20-mA unit via a serial protocol.
This communication module does not establish a
connection to the 20-mA unit.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the 20-mA unit causes a time-out indication.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the 20-mA unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the channel function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port setting to define the port connecting the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device.
Parameter: IP address
Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the 20-mA unit connected to the communication
module via the TCP protocol. You must assign each 20-mA unit an unambiguous IP address. The IP address
to be set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause
conflicts with other IP addresses in the network. First set an IP address for the 7XV5674 20-mA unit . Then
specify the IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the 20-mA Unit

The 7XV5674 20-mA unit is set with a web browser on the laptop computer via the latter's Ethernet interface.
Detailed notes on the settings can be found in the 7XV5674 manual that accompanies the 20-mA unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de).
5.6.3.5 20-mA Channel
Logic
[lo20mcha-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-54 Logic Diagram of the Function 20-mA Channel
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
(1) If the setting Range active is set to test , the setting Transformation ratio is not
displayed.
(2) If the setting Range active is set to false, the settings Upper limit, Transformation
ratio upper limit, Lower limit and Transformation ratio are not displayed.
Measured-Value Calculation
The function 20-mA channel processes a single 20-mA current signal supplied by the 20-mA unit of the corre-
sponding channel. The 20-mA current measured value is converted into the correct physical quantities such
as temperature or pressure. In each 20-mA functional unit (Ether. and serial) there are always 12 of the 20-
mA channel function blocks, even if fewer channels are connected with the 20-mA unit. The calculated values
are available for further processing via CFC, GOOSE, protocols, and the display image.
Measured-Value Processing
The 20-mA unit typically transmits a value which represents a physical quantity, such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that maps the physical quantity to the 20-
mA value. If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range 0 mA to 20 mA. If a value smaller than 0 mA or greater than 20 mA is active at the input of the
20-mA unit, the measured value is identified as invalid. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes
from a usable range of 0 mA to 20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
[sckanumw-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-55 Settings for Example 1
In this example, the measured value 0 mA means a temperature of 0 C and the measured value 20 mA
means a temperature of 100 C. So enter as Unit = C andConversion factor = 100. The resolution
(decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select Resolution = 0.1.
[dwknges3-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-56 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Input (Example 1)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Lower limit,
Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The parameters Upper limit and
Lower limit indicate the range of the input current in mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value in the Upper limit setting. The
setting Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the
value in the Lower limit setting. The setting of the range for the scaled value corresponds to the useable
range between Lower limit and Upper limit (see following figure).
[sckanumf-190214-01, 1, en_US]
[dwknges2-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-58 Characteristic Curve of a 20-mA Unit (Example 2)
In this example, the Range active setting is selected. The setting Upper limit is at 20 mA, the setting
Lower limit is at 4 mA. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is at 55 and the setting Lower limit -
Sensor is at -33. If the input current is smaller than 4 mA or greater than 20 mA, the quality of the scaled
measured value in this example is invalid.
Each 20-mA channel makes available the scaled measured value in the information routing (these are the
temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further processing.
The 20-mA values can be displayed in the display page and processed with CFC charts.
Error Responses
If the current input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output value is set to
invalid That status for Health and the defect status assume the states displayed in the table.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Error Description Status Health Error Status

The input value lies outside the OK Yes
given limits
Channel not connected OK No
Parameter: Unit
Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = C

You use the setting Unit to specify which physical unit of measurement the measured values represent. The
possible setting values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Conversion factor
Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

The Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Resolution
Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

The Resolution setting is used to specify the measured value resolution.
Parameter: Range active
Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active setting (no x in the check box), the function operates over the
range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA.
If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Upper limit -
Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Parameter: Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor
Default setting(_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20000 mA
Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
Default setting(_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4000 mA
Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

If you activate the Range active setting, then 4 additional settings Upper limit, Lower limit, Upper
limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
value in the Lower limit setting.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of the
12 channels do not differ.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.3.7 Settings

General
_:2311:103 General:Port port E port J
port F
port J
port N
port P
Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit % m

C
F

/km
/mi
1/s
A
As
cos
cycles
dB
F/km
F/mi
h
Hz
Hz/s
in
J
J/Wh
K
l/s
m
mi
min
p.u.
Pa
periods
rad
rad/s
s
V
V/Hz
VA
VAh
var
varh
Vs
W
W/s
Wh
_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution 1 0.1
0.1
0.01
0.001
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active 0 false
1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
_:2311:56 General:Failure SPS O
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
5.6.4 20-mA Unit Serial
5.6.4.1 Overview
The function 20-mA unit Serial:
Provides serial communications with a 20-mA unit via the Modbus protocol and records the values
measured by the 20-mA unit
Transforms the measured 20-mA values into slowly changing process variables such as temperature or
gas pressure
Makes the recorded process tags available to CFC, GOOSE, protocols and the device display
Monitors communication with the 20-mA unit

The function 20-mA unit Serial is structured in the same way as the function 20-mA Unit Ether.. The mode of
operation is also identical. The only difference is that the measured values are transferred to the communica-
tion module via a serial connection instead of an Ethernet connection.
You can find more information in Chapter 5.6.3.2 Structure of the Function .
Parameter: Port
Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = Port J

With the Port setting, you specify the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external 20-mA unit.
Parameter: Channel number
Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number setting, you specify
the channel number (1 or 2) used to connect the 20-mA unit to the device. The communication module inputs
are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

Use theSlave address setting to define the device address of the 20-mA unit. If only one 20-mA unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. Set the same device address as used with the
20-mA unit. The device address is important for distinguishing several 20-mA units that are connected to a
serial bus. Set an unambiguous device address on every 20-mA unit, for example, 1, 2 and 3 when
connecting 3 of the 20-mA units. On every 20-mA unit, set for the Slave address setting in the 3 functions
20-mA Unit Serial the same device address for each.
Parameter: Unit
Default setting (_:13111:103) Unit = C

Default setting (_:13111:104) Conversion factor = 100

The Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Default setting (_:13111:108) Resolution = 0.1

Default setting (_:13111:107) Range active = false

range 0 mA to 20 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of 0 mA to 20
mA.
Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Default setting (_:13111:105) Upper limit = 20 mA
Default setting (_:13111:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
Default setting (_:13111:106) Lower limit = 4 mA
Default setting (_:13111:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100

limit - Sensor and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 channels, as the setting possibilities of the
12 channels do not differ.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.4.3 Settings

General
port F
port J
port N
port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1
Channel 1
_:13111:103 Channel 1:Unit % m

C
F

/km
/mi
1/s
A
As
cos
cycles
dB
F/km
F/mi
h
Hz
Hz/s
in
J
J/Wh
K
l/s
m
mi
min
p.u.
Pa
periods
rad
rad/s
s
V
V/Hz
VA
VAh
var
varh
Vs
W
W/s
Wh
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:13111:108 Channel 1:Resolution 1 0.1
0.1
0.01
0.001
_:13111:107 Channel 1:Range active 0 false
1
_:13111:104 Channel 1:Conversion 1 to 10000 100
factor
_:13111:105 Channel 1:Upper limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:13111:109 Channel 1:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:13111:106 Channel 1:Lower limit 0.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:13111:110 Channel 1:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

(Type)
General
Channel 1
_:13111:53 Channel 1:Health ENS O
_:13111:71 Channel 1:Failure SPS O
_:13111:301 Channel 1:20-mA output scale MV O
_:13111:302 Channel 1:20-mA output raw MV O
5.6.5 Communication with the 20-mA Unit
5.6.5.1 Integration of a Serial 20-mA Unit
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 5-59 shows how to connect the 20-mA unit to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45
plug is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.
[dwve20au-150213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-59 Connection of the 20-mA Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module
must be inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the
CB202 expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[sc20ser3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-60 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the 20-mA unit.
[scauser4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-61 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Communication Settings
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the 20-mA unit. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the 20-mA unit. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The settings of the
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scauser5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-62 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function 20-mA unit serial 1 (see following
figure).
[sc20ser6-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-63 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Serial 1
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the 20-
mA unit. This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit (refer to the following figure).
For the first use of the 20-mA unit, the following device configuration must be set on the 20-mA unit:
Bus protocol: mod
Device address: 1
Baud rate: 9600
Parity: no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-64 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Device Address
Finally, load the configuration in the device.
5.6.5.2 Integration of a 20-mA Unit Ethernet
Device Configuration
In DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus, adding the module to the device configura-
tion. Figure 5-65 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alterna-
tively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-65 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scautcp2-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-66 Activation of the protocol
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-67 Selection of the Protocol
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the 20-mA unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the 20-mA unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[sc20tcp4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-68 Insertion of the Function 20-mA Unit Ether. 1
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the 20-mA unit (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the 20-mA unit.
[scautcp5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-69 Setting the Port and IP Address
5.6.6 V/I-Measuring-Transducer Unit with Fast Inputs
5.6.6.1 Overview
The fast analog measuring-transducer inputs process voltage values (DC -10 V to +10 V) as well as current
values (DC -20 mA to 20 mA).
The function MT fast input:
Provides sampled values for recording in the fault record (the maximum sampling frequency in 7KE85 is
16 kHz, and 8 kHz for all other SIPROTEC 5 devices). The recorded sampling frequency results from the
setting of the fault-recorder function.
Calculated measured values from the sampled values. These measured values have been deduced
from the arithmetic mean values. The measuring range for the mean-value calculation is adjustable in
the interval from 10 ms to 100 ms.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Converts the measured current or voltage values into process values, for example, temperature, gas
pressure, etc.
Provides the recorded process variables for further processing by the fault recorder, the CFC, and in
GOOSE-applications for transmission via communication protocols, and for visualization.
The fast measuring-transducer inputs are located on the IO212 module with 8 inputs (optionally current or
voltage inputs), and the IO210 module9 with 4 inputs (optionally current or voltage inputs).

The function MT fast input works in the function group Analog units and contains the number of available
measuring-transducer inputs, depending on the hardware configuration. You can configure these channels
independently from one another either as current or voltage inputs.
[dw_mu-structure, 1, en_US]

Once you have instantiated the MT fast input function, it will be visible in the project tree in the function group
Analog units. You can find the function group Analog units in DIGSI in the Settings folder.
If you open the subdirectory MT fast input, you reach the setting sheet for the respective input (for more
details, see Application and Setting Notes).
The hardware is designed in such a way that either a current or a voltage can be processed at each input.
Use the corresponding terminals (see Hardware manual). Configure the input in accordance with the selected
connection (Parameter (_:101) TD input-signal type). With the parameter (_:142) Measuring
window, you set the measuring range with which the arithmetic mean value is determined. With the param-
eter Measuring window, you also determine measurement speed for the input. For example, a setting of
100 ms means that the measured value is updated every 100 ms.
9 available from V7.10
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scmuio212, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-71 Parameters of the Measuring-Transducer Channels.
The fast measuring-transducer channels can be configured either as current or as voltage inputs. Apart from
this, their function corresponds to the basic function of the 20-mA-channels (see chapter 5.6.3.5 20-mA
Channel ).
Parameter: TD input-signal type
Default setting (_:101) TD input-signal type = Current input

With the parameter TD input-signal type, you determine whether the measuring-transducer input
channel works as a Current input or as a Voltage input.
Make sure that the selected channel has also been wired correctly (see Hardware manual, Input and Output
Module IO212).
Parameter: Unit
Default setting (_:103) Unit = A

With the parameter Unit, you set the physical unit of measurement of the measured values. The possible
setting values are listed in the settings table.
Parameter: Measuring window
Default setting (_:142) Measuring window = 10 ms

With the parameter (_:142) Measuring window, you set the measuring window that is used to determine
the arithmetic mean value from the sampled values. In case of slowly varying signals, Siemens recommends
setting the top value to 100 ms. With this value, a new, current measured value is provided every 100 ms for
further processing.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

If you do not activate the Range active parameter, the function assumes a range of -20 mA to +20 mA or
-10 V to +10 V. The setting of the range for the scaled value then assumes a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA or -10 V to +10 V.
If you activate the Range active parameter, then 4 additional parameters Upper limit, Upper limit
- Sensor, Lower limit, and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Note that this setting is activated by either placing, or not placing the relevant check mark in DIGSI (see
Figure 5-71 ).
Default setting (_:104) Conversion factor = 1.00

With the parameter Conversion factor , you set the conversion factor for the measuring transducer.
Parameter: Upper limit,Lower limit,Upper limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor
With the following parameters, you set the scaling of the measuring variables. By that, you can scale in an
application-specific way:
Default setting Upper limit = 20.00 mA
Default setting Upper limit - Sensor = 1.00
Default setting Lower limit = -20.00 mA
Default setting Lower limit - Sensor = 1.00

With these setting parameters, you set the operating range of the measuring transducer as well as the
conversion of the values transmitted to the sensor values. Harmonize the operating range of the measuring
transducer with the transmitter of the sensor. Using the free scalability of the system, you can meet different
requirements. The following figure shows the setting parameters in general terms.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_measured-value-scaling, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-72 Scaling Principle
Setting Example 1:
A measuring transducer transmitting a current signal of 4 mA to 20 mA is used as a transmitter. Currents well
below 4 mA indicate a transmitter failure; currents around 0 mA indicate a broken wire. A sensor detecting a
temperature is attached to the transmitter. The upper value corresponds to 200 C and the lower value to
-100 C. This results in the following characteristic. In accordance with the set characteristic curve, the func-
tion calculates the sensor value from the measured current. The coefficients of the linear equation (gradient
and foot point) are calculated from the set threshold and the sensor values are determined. A supplied
current of 9.333 mA corresponds to a temperature of 0 C.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_measuring-transducer-characteristic, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-73 Characteristic Curve of Setting Example 1
NOTE
i The hardware of the measuring transducer has been designed in such a way that measured values are
transmitted and analyzed using the setting range ( Upper limit or Lower limit). Therefore, special
applications are possible, if necessary. The limits lie at approximately +16 mA and -16 mA or +32 V and
-32 V. If the measured values are supplied above or below these limits, the quality invalid is assigned.
Setting Example 2:
For special applications, the transmitter sends a maximum of 12 V. This voltage shall be issued accordingly
as sensor voltage.
Set the parameters as follows:
Upper limit = 10.00 V
Upper limit - Sensor = 10.00 V
Lower limit = -10.00 V
Lower limit - Sensor = -10.00 V

With this setting, a signal of 12 V is issued as a 12-V measured value (see following figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_measuring-transducer-setting, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-74 Parameter Settings and Representation of an Input Signal Greater Than 10 V
5.6.6.5 Settings

MT fast #
_:101 MT in #:TD input-signal Voltage input Current input
type Current input
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:103 MT in #:Unit A
%

C
F

/km
/mi
1/s
A
As
cos
cycles
dB
F/km
F/mi
h
Hz
Hz/s
in
J
J/Wh
K
l/s
m
mi
min
p.u.
Pa
periods
rad
rad/s
s
V
V/Hz
VA
VAh
var
varh
Vs
W
W/s
Wh
_:142 MT in #:Measuring 10 ms 10 ms
window 20 ms
40 ms
60 ms
80 ms
100 ms
_:107 MT in #:Range active 0 false
1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion -10000.00 to 10000.00 1.00
factor
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 5.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -10000.00 to 10000.00 1.00
Sensor
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -10000.00 to 10000.00 1.00
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:302 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:306 MT in #:TD scale SAV SAV O
5.6.7 RTD Unit Ethernet
5.6.7.1 Overview
The RTD unit Ether. function:
Communicates with an external RTD unit via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the measured
temperatures from the RTD unit
Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature monitoring function
Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Ether. function can only work in the Analog units function group. A maximum of 20 function
instances can work simultaneously. Each instance contains 12 preconfigured sensor function blocks.
[dwstrfnc-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit
Logic
[lortdtcp-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-76 Logic of the RTD Unit Ether. Function
Communication with an RTD Unit

The function is used to communicate with an RTD box connected via an Ethernet connection. If the connec-
tion of the function is successfully established to the external RTD box via the Ethernet interface, the RTD
box transmits the temperatures of all connected sensors to the RTD box Ether. function. For the connection
to be established successfully, specific communication settings must be set, see chapter 5.6.7.4 Application
and Setting Notes .
The RTD box Ziehl TR1200 IP supports only an Ethernet connection of 10 MBit/s. A direct connection to a
100-Mbit communication module is therefore not possible. For this reason, you must connect the RTD box to
the communication module via a 10/100 MBit/s autosensing switch which automatically recognizes the trans-
mission rates and adapts them accordingly. Further information can be found in the Application and setting
notes, see chapter 5.6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes .
Error Responses
The following table lists the conditions under which the Health status transitions to the Alarm or Warning
state.

The RTD unit Ether. function cannot establish a Alarm
connection with a communication module.
The connection between the communication module Warning
and the RTD unit causes a time-out.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

A communication module has not received any more Warning
data from the RTD unit for 9 sec.
The Failure signal is set as soon as one of the sensor function blocks reports a failure.
Parameter: Port
Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = port J

Use the Port parameter to define over which port the external RTD-Unit is connected to the SIPROTEC 5
device.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to the integrated Ethernet interface, set the parameter Port =
Port J. If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port
= Port F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.
You can connect directly the RTD-Unit to the device via the internal 10-Mbit Ethernet port J. If you operate
the RTD-Unit on another port via a 100-Mbit communication module, you need an interconnected 10/100-Mbit
autosensing switch, which adapts transmission rates accordingly.
Parameter: IP address
Default setting (_:2311:104) IP address = 10.16.60.1

With the IP address settings, you set the IP address of the RTD-Unit connected to the communication
module via the SUP protocol. Every RTD-Unit has to be assigned a unique IP address. The IP address to be
set depends on your network configuration. You can set any valid IPv4 address that does not cause conflicts
with other IP addresses in the network. Set an appropriate IP address first at the Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD-Unit.
Then specify the IP address settings for the communication module to the same address.
Settings on the RTD Unit

The Ziehl TR1200 IP RTD-Unit is set with the front keys or in a Web browser on a laptop computer via its
Ethernet interface. Set the connection type of the sensors (3-wire connection or resistance value for 2-wire
connection), the idle state of the fault-indication relay, as well as the IP interface setting.
The code lock has to be switched off for parameterization. This is only possible using the front keys of the
RTD-Unit. The code lock is off (switched off) in as-delivered condition and has pin 504.
For detailed information on the settings, refer to the TR1200 IP manual that comes with the RTD-Unit. The
documents are also available in the SIPROTEC download area (http://www.siprotec.de) under Accessories ->
7XV5662-xAD.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor
Logic
[lotmpval-311012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-77 Logic Diagram of the Temperature Sensor Function Block
Measured Temperature Value

The Temperature sensor function block processes one single measured temperature value delivered from the
RTD box for the assigned sensor. 12 temperature sensor function blocks are always available in each RTD
box function (both via Ethernet and serial), even if fewer sensors are connected to the RTD box.
Various temperature sensor types are supported: Pt100, Ni100, and Ni120 sensors. The function block is
notified regarding the selection of connected type via the Sensor type setting.
The function block delivers a measured temperature value in C or F as an output variable. The measured
temperature value is available as an operational measured value and can be monitored by the Temperature
supervision function.
Error Responses
If the measured input value is determined to be incorrect, the quality attribute of the output measured temper-
ature value is set to invalid. The statuses for Health and Error take the statuses in accordance with the
following table:
Table 5-10 Error response
Error Description Health Status Error Status

Sensor or line short circuited Alarm Yes
Sensor or line interrupted Alarm Yes
Measured temperature value Alarm Yes
outside the valid measuring range
specified in the technical data. The
valid measuring range depends on
the sensor type.
Sensor not connected OK No
Parameter: Sensor type
Default setting (_:11611:102) Sensor type = Pt 100

The Sensor type parameter is used to set the sensor element used. You can select between Pt 100, Ni
100 and Ni 120.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Temperature unit

To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from C to F, adapt the DIGSI user
default settings accordingly.
Proceed as follows:
In DIGSI select the menu item Extras --> Settings.
In the Settings view select the menu item DIGSI 5 User preferences.
Under Standard unit system change the setting value of the unit system used from SI units to US
units.
[scfahrht-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-78 Change of the Display Between C and F
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
5.6.7.7 Settings

General
port F
port J
port N
port P
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type Pt 100 Pt 100
Ni 100
Ni 120

(Type)
General
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O
5.6.8 RTD Unit, Serial
5.6.8.1 Overview
The RTD unit serial function:
Communicates with an external RTD unit serial via the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP) and records the meas-
ured temperatures from the RTD unit
Provides the captured temperatures to the temperature supervision function
Monitors communication with the RTD unit

The RTD unit Serial function is set up structurally in the same manner as the RTD unit Ether. function. The
mode of operation is also identical (see 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit ).
Parameter: Port
Default setting (_:2311:103) Port = F

With the Port parameter, you set the slot for the communication module that will be used for the connection
with an external RTD unit.
If you want to connect the external RTD box to an Ethernet plug-in module, set the parameter Port = Port
F , Port E, Port P, or plug-in module position.
Parameter: Channel number
Default setting (_:2311:105) Channel number = 1

A serial communication module optionally uses 2 channels. With the Channel number settings, you set the
channel number (1 or 2) through which the RTD unit is connected to the device. The communication module
inputs are labeled with the channel numbers.
Parameter: Slave address
Default setting (_:2311:106) Slave address = 1

Use the Slave address parameter to define the device address of the RTD unit. If only one RTD unit is
connected to the serial bus, the default value 1 can be used. The same device address has to be set on the
RTD unit. The device address is important for distinguishing among several RTD units connected to a serial
bus. Set a unique device address (for example 1, 2 and 3 when connecting 3 RTD units) for each RTD unit
and the same device address for the parameter Slave address in the 3 RTD unit serial functions.
The following settings and information table shows only 1 of the 12 sensors, as the setting possibilities of the
12 sensors do not differ.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.6.8.3 Settings

General
port F
port J
port N
port P
_:2311:105 General:Channel number 1 to 2 1
_:2311:106 General:Slave address 1 to 247 1
Sensor 1
_:11611:102 Sensor 1:Sensor type Pt 100 Pt 100
Ni 100
Ni 120

(Type)
General
Sensor 1
_:11611:52 Sensor 1:Health ENS O
_:11611:60 Sensor 1:Failure SPS O
_:11611:80 Sensor 1:TmpOut MV O
5.6.9 Communication with the RTD Unit
5.6.9.1 Integration of a Serial RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)
Connection of the Communication Lines

Figure 5-79 shows how you connect the RTD box to the SIPROTEC 5 device. Note that Pin 1 of the RJ45
plug is connected to RTD-B and Pin 2 is connected to RTD-A.
[dwverbau-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-79 Connection of the RTD Unit to the SIPROTEC 5 Device
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Adding a USART Module

Add a USART-AB-1EL or a USART-AC-2EL USART module in DIGSI to the device. The USART module
must be inserted at one of the plug-in positions for communication modules in the base module or in the
CB202 expansion module (refer to the following figure).
[scauser3-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-80 Insertion Position for a USART Module
Selecting the SUP Protocol

Select the Slave Unit Protocol (SUP). This protocol is responsible for the communication between the
SIPROTEC 5 device and the RTD Unit.
[scauser4-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-81 Selecting the SUP Protocol
Make the communications settings for the relevant serial channels. For this, use the default settings specified
by the RTD box. Normally, you must adapt only the parameterization of the SIPROTEC 5 device to the
settings of the RTD box. Make sure that the setting values in both devices are the same. The settings of the
Non-flickering light (on/off): is not relevant for the RS485 interface.
NOTE
i The driver for the USART module for the SUP protocol is not preinstalled as standard for the initial use of
this interface (following the firmware update).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scauser5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-82 Making the Communication Settings
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD box DIGSI automatically adds the function group Analog
units to your device configuration. You can now instantiate the function RTD box serial 1 (refer to the
following figure).
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-83 Analog-Unit Instance
Now, set the channel number over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the slave address of the RTD
box. This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box (refer to the following figure).
The following device configuration must be set on the TR1200 RTD unit when the RTD unit is used for the
first time:
Bus protocol: mod
Device address: 1
Baud rate: 9600
Parity: no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scauser7-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-84 Setting the Port, Channel Number, and Slave Address
5.6.9.2 Integration of an RTD-Unit Ethernet (TR1200 IP)
Device Configuration
In the DIGSI, insert an Ethernet module into the provided slot, thus, adding the module to the device configu-
ration. Figure 5-85 displays the available slots in the base module or on the expansion module CB 202. Alter-
natively, you can also use the integrated Ethernet interface Port J.
[scautcp1-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-85 Inserting an Ethernet Module
Activate the SUP Ethernet protocol for the Ethernet module.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scautcp2-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-86 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation
This protocol is also available for Port J of the integrated Ethernet interface of the base module (refer to
following figure).
[scautcp3-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-87 SUP Ethernet Protocol Activation (base module)
With the selection of the SUP protocol for the RTD unit, DIGSI automatically adds the Analog units function
group and the RTD unit Ether. function to your device configuration (refer to the following figure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scauser6-190214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-88 Analog Unit Instance
Now, set the port over which the SUP protocol runs. In addition, set the IP address of the RTD box (refer to
the following figure). This address must be set with the same value in the RTD box.
[scautcp5-220114-01-DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-89 Setting the Port and IP Address
5.6.9.3 Temperature Simulation without Sensors

Connect a resistor on the sensor terminals of the RTD unit. Using this resistor, simulate a constant tempera-
ture. The resistance value should be around 50 to 200 .
If you want to simulate a changeable temperature, connect an adjustable resistor of maximum 470 instead
of a fixed resistor.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
5.7 Function-Group Type User-Defined Function Group
5.7.1 Overview
Within a User-defined function group, you can use the User-defined function block and the User-defined func-
tion block [Control] to group user-defined objects that you find in the DIGSI 5 library under User-defined func-
tions.
With user-defined function groups and user-defined functions, a grouping of user-defined objects, for
example, user-defined function blocks, can be performed. 2 user-defined function blocks are available (see
following figure).
[scudef_lib, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-90 User-Defined Objects in the DIGSI 5 Library
You can insert single-point indications, pickup and operate indications (ACD, ACT), single or double
commands, commands with a controllable whole number as well as measured values in the User-defined
function block (see following figure). You can assign a superordinate name to the grouping (for example,
Process indications, for a group of single-point indications that are read in via binary inputs). This function can
be deactivated via the mode. Readiness is also evaluated and represented.
The user-defined function can be instantiated both at the highest level (in parallel to other function groups)
and within the function groups and functions.
A User-defined function block [control] is also available. In addition to the mentioned option of a general User-
defined function block, this block offers additional tests for user-defined control signals, for example, SPC or
DP.
You can find more information in chapter 7.6.1 Overview of Functions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scbenutz-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-91 Information Routing Through Use of Added User-Defined Function Block: Process Indications
and Single-Point Indications
5.7.2 Basic Data Types
The following data types are available for user-defined objects in the DIGSI 5 library under the heading User-
defined signals.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS: Single-Point Status)

The status of a binary input can be registered in the form of a single-point indication or forwarded as the
binary result from a CFC chart.
EXAMPLE
Acquisition using binary input, further processing in a CFC and/or signaling using an LED.
Single-Point Indication (Type SPS unsaved: Single-Point Status Unsaved)

In contrast to SPS single-point indications, the state of the SPS unsaved indication is not maintained after the
device restarts.
For this purpose, go to Properties > Details > Initialization > Restart and set the Value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scspsfas-140613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 5-92 Single-Point Indication SPS Unsaved (Example: 7KE85 Fault Recorder)
Double-Point Indication (Type DPS: Double-Point Status)

When using a double-point indication, the status of 2 binary inputs can be captured simultaneously and
mapped in an indication with 4 possible conditions (ON, Intermediate position, OFF, Disturbed
position).
EXAMPLE
Acquisition of a disconnector or circuit-breaker switch position.
Marker Command (Type SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

This data type can be used as a command without feedback for simple signaling or as an internal variable
(marker).
State of a Whole Number (Type INS)

The data type INS is used to create a whole number that represents a CFC result.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE
The output of the CFC block ADD_D can, for example, be connected with the data type INS. The result can
be shown on the display of the device.
State of an Enumeration Value (Type ENS)

The data type ENS is used to create an enumerated value that represents a CFC result.
Controllable Single-Point Indication (SPC, Single-Point Controllable)

monitored via a single feedback.
Command with Double-Point Feedback (DPC, Double Point Controllable)

monitored via double-point indication as feedback.
Command with a Whole Number (INC, Controllable Integer Status)

This can be used to issue a command (to one or more relays, selectable under information routing) that is
monitored via a whole number as feedback.
Measured Values (MV)

This data type provides a measured value that can be used as a CFC result, for instance.
NOTE
i Additional data types can be found under other headings in the DIGSI 5 library as well as in the corre-
sponding function blocks. This applies to the following data types:
Pulse-metered values (see User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 library)
Transformer taps
Metered values
Protection Activation Information (ACT)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Tripping. It is available in the library for receiving
protection information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Tripping.
Protection Activation Information with Direction (ACD)

This object type is used by the protection functions for Pickup. It is available in the library for receiving protec-
tion information via the protection interface, which could also indicate Pickup. In addition, both ACD and ACT
can be generated and processed by CFC charts.
5.7.3 Pulse- and Energy- Metered Values
Pulse-Metered Values
Pulse-metered values are available as data types BCR (Binary Counter Reading) in the function group Line
as well as in the DIGSI library under User-defined Functions.
The functionality and the settings of the pulse-metered values can be found in chapter 9.8.1 Pulse-Metered
Values Function Description .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Energy-Metered Values
Energy-metered values no longer need to be created by the user separately. They are available as active and
reactive power in each Line function group for reference and output direction. The calculation is based on the
current and voltage transformers associated with the protected object.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values .
5.7.4 Additional Data Types
The following data types are also used in the system but are not available for general use as user-defined
signals in the library:
ENC (Enumerated Setting Controllable)
The data type ENC models a command with which the user can set predefined values.
WYE (phase-to-ground related measured values of a 3-phase system)
DEL (phase-to-phase related measured values of a 3-phase system)
SEQ (Sequence)
CMV (Complex Measured Value)
BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position)

The data type BSC can, for example, be used to control a transformer tap changer. The commands up,
down can be given.
NOTE
i Transformer taps are included in the Transformer tap changer switching element. If this switching element
is created in the device, the transformer tap position is available as a data object of type BSC (binary
controlled tap changer with tap-position information).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6 Protection and Automation Functions
6.1 Power-System Data 309

6.2 Line Differential Protection 329
6.3 Stub Differential Protection 359
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection 369
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) 387
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method 442
6.7 Impedance Protection 537
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking 554
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection 559
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems 588
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection 640
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed 658
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification 666
6.14 External Trip Initiation 675
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function 678
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 732
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground 763
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases 798
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 831
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions 838
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase 839
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases 852
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection 868
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 919
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 928
6.26 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay 939
6.27 Undercurrent Protection 949
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 954
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 965
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage 969
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding 974
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage 979
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 985
6.34 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 990
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Protection and Automation Functions
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1006

6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1013
6.37 Fault Locator 1019
6.38 Overfrequency Protection 1024
6.39 Underfrequency Protection 1029
6.40 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1035
6.41 Phase-Rotation Reversal 1041
6.42 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 1046
6.43 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase 1049
6.44 Thermal Overload Protection, 1-Phase 1060
6.45 Temperature Supervision 1070
6.46 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1080
6.47 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection 1097
6.48 Out-of-Step Protection 1106
6.49 Inrush-Current Detection 1124
6.50 General Power Protection 3-Phase 1131
6.51 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 1141
6.52 Current-Jump Detection 1150
6.53 Voltage-Jump Detection 1153
6.54 Arc Protection 1157
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection 1176
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.1 Power-System Data
6.1.1 Overview
The Power-system data are provided with each SIPROTEC 5 device and cannot be deleted. You will find
them in DIGSI under Settings Power-system data.
6.1.2 Structure of the Power-System Data
The Power-system data contain the block General and the Measuring points of the device. The following
figure shows the structure of the Power-system data:
[dwandata-180912-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-1 Structure of the Power-System Data
In order to adjust its functions to the application, the device requires some data about the power system. The
necessary settings can be found in the Power-system data under General as well as in the Measuring points.
NOTE
i You can find information on the supervision-function parameters in chapter 8.3 Supervision of the Secon-
dary System.
Type and scope of the required measuring points depend on the application. Possible measuring points are:
Voltage 3-phase (measuring point V 3-ph)
Current 3-phase (measuring point I 3-ph)
Voltage 1-phase (measuring point V 1-ph)
Current 1-phase (measuring point I 1-ph)

The measuring points have interfaces to the function groups requiring voltage and/or current measured
values of the power system.
6.1.3 Application and Setting Notes General Settings
Parameter: Phase sequence
Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Phase sequence= ABC

The parameter Phase sequence is used to set the phase sequence (ABC) or (ACB). The setting value
applies to the entire SIPROTEC 5 device.
Use the General function to set the settings in the power-system data.
You can find detailed information about phase-rotation reversal in chapter 6.41.1 Overview of Functions .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.1.4 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring-Point Voltage 3-Phase (V-3ph)
The following example describes the settings of the voltage measuring point Measuring point V-3ph (voltage
3-phase). Settings for the supervision functions are also located in the voltage measuring point. The descrip-
tion of these settings can be found in chapter Supervision Functions .
Parameter: Rated primary voltage
Default setting (_:8911:101) Rated primary voltage = 400 kV

The Rated primary voltage parameter is used to set the primary rated voltage of the voltage trans-
former.
Parameter: Rated secondary voltage
Default setting (_:8911:102) Rated secondary voltage = 100 V

The Rated secondary voltage parameter is used to set the secondary rated voltage of the voltage
transformer.
Parameter: Matching ratio Vph / VN
Default setting (_:8911:103) Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73

With this parameter Matching ratio Vph / VN, you set the deviation between the calculated zero-
sequence voltage and the residual voltage measured directly via a measurement input. The different trans-
mission ratio of the voltage transformers is the cause for the deviation (see Figure 6-2).
The Matching ratio Vph / VN is equal to the ratio 3 V0 sec/VN sec
with
V0 sec Calculated zero-sequence voltage
VN sec Measured residual voltage
The zero voltage is calculated as phase-to-ground voltages. The residual voltage is measured on the open
delta winding of the voltage transformer. For single-phase voltage transformers, the residual voltage is meas-
ured in the generator or the transformer neutral point.
NOTE
i The measurement residual voltage VN sec is converted to a zero-sequence voltage in the device as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE 1:
[dw_bsp1uwdl_anpassfaktor, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-2 3-Phase Voltage Transformer: Connection = 3-Phase-to-Ground Voltage + VN
If the connection type of the voltage transformer is 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN (parameter: VT connec-
tion) and the voltage input V4 is connected to the open delta winding of the voltage transformer (da/dn), the
Matching ratio Vph / VN is as follows:
When changing the neutral point according to Figure 6-2 , this results in the following values:
The calculated secondary zero-sequence voltage V0 sec is equal to the secondary phase-to-ground
voltage. Expressed as secondary transformer rated voltage, then Vrated sec/3.
The measured residual voltage on the open delta winding is the sum of the voltage drops on the 3 sides.
Expressed with the side ratio, the result is VN, sec = 3 Vrated,sec /3.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
[fo_bsp1, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 1.73.
In example 1 Vrated sec, the phase-to-ground voltage and the secondary voltage on the open delta winding
were identical. If these voltages are different, use the actual numerical values in the calculation.
EXAMPLE 2:
Phase-to-ground voltage Vrated sec = 100 V

Open delta winding (for Vrated sec = 500 V
example, grounding trans- The voltage input of the device is designed for a continuous operation,
former in generator protection) using 230 V max. Therefore, the voltage on the open delta winding (500 V)
is reduced to a 5:2 ratio, using an Ohmic divider. In order to calculate the
matching factor, the secondary voltage of 200 V will be applied.
Calculate the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fo_bsp2, 1, en_US]
Set Matching ratio Vph / VN = 0.866.

Interpretation of the result:
The zero-sequence voltage calculated from the phase-to-ground voltage is 57.73 V (= 100V/3). The meas-
ured residual voltage is 200 V. The calculated adaptation factor is 0.866. The measured residual voltage is
converted to a zero-sequence voltage inside the device:
[fo_umrechnung2, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i During the ground-fault test, the set adaptation factor can be checked by comparing the operational meas-
ured values. The operational measured values contain the calculated zero-sequence voltage V0 sec and the
measured residual voltage VN sec. Proceed with the compilation as follows:
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter is significant for the following functions of the device.
Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage
Measured-value supervision
Scaling of the faulty and measured values
Parameter: VT connection
Default setting (_:8911:104) VT connection = 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN

The parameter VT connection shows the connection type of the voltage transformer for the 3-phase
voltage measuring point. The parameter can be found in the Global DIGSI 5 library under Name of the device
Parameter Power-system data Measuring point V 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of
the voltage transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the voltage transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device Measuring point routing Voltage measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
3 ph-to-gnd voltages
3 ph-to-ph volt. + VN
3 ph-to-ph voltages
2 ph-to-ph voltages
2 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN
Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
voltage measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for voltage transformers in chapter A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers . The connection examples provide assistance when
selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Inverted phases
Default setting (_:8911:106) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-reservoir
plants (see chapter Phase-rotation reversal). This default setting may be retained for power-system protection
applications.
Parameter: Tracking
Default setting (_:8911:111) Tracking = active

The Tracking parameter is used to determine whether the measuring channels of this measuring point
shall be used to determine the sampling frequency.
The sampling frequency of the device is adjusted to the power frequency. The device selects a measuring
channel, through which the sampling frequency is determined. Preferably, this should be a voltage metering
channel. This validity of the signal is monitored (minimum level, frequency range). If these values are invalid,
the device switches to another channel (etc.). Once switched to a current channel, the system automatically
switches back to this channel if a voltage channel is valid again.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point will
be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the determined
sampling frequency is applicable to all functions in the device that do not use
fixed sampling rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for determining
the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive .
Parameter: Magnitude correction
Default setting (_:3811:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, the magnitude (magnitude correction) is adjusted for
the voltage input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
6.1.5 Application and Setting Notes for Measuring Point Current 3-Phase (I-3ph)
The following example describes the settings for the current Measuring point I 3-ph (Current 3-phase). The
supervision function settings are also located in the current measuring point. The description of these settings
can be found in chapter Supervision Functions.
Parameter: CT connection
Default setting (_:8881:115) CT connection = 3-phase + IN-separate
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The parameter CT connection shows the connection type of the current transformer for the 3-phase
current measuring point. The parameter can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device
Settings Power-system data Measuring point I 3-phase. You cannot change the connection type of the
current transformer in the Power-system data.
You can change the connection type of the current transformer only under measuring point routing in
DIGSI 5. Under Name of the device Measuring point routing Current measuring points, select the desired
connection type under Connection type. The following types of connections are possible:
3-phase + IN-separate
3-phase + IN
3-phase
3-phase, 2 primary CT
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
2ph, 2p. CT + IN-sep

Depending on the connection type selected, you must route the measured values to the terminals of the
current measuring point in DIGSI 5. You can find connection examples for current transformers in chapter A.
5 Connection Examples for Current Transformers . The connection examples provide assistance when
selecting the type of connection.
Parameter: Tracking
Default setting (_:8881:127) Tracking = active

With the parameter Tracking, you specify whether you would like to work with the sampling-frequency
tracking function.
active If the parameter Tracking = active has been set, the measuring point will
be included when determining the sampling frequency. If possible, only the 3-
phase measuring points shall be considered.
Note: If the parameter Tracking = active , the determined sampling
frequency applies to all functions in the device not using fixed sampling rates.
inactive If the channels of the measuring point are not to be considered for determining
the sampling frequency, please select the setting value inactive.
Parameter: Rated primary current
Default setting (_:8881:101) Rated primary current = 1000 A

With the Rated primary current parameter, the active rated primary current of the current transformer is
set.
Parameter: Rated secondary current
Default setting (_:8881:102) Rated secondary current = 1 A

With the Rated secondary current parameter, you set the current rated secondary current of the current
transformer.
Parameter: Current range
Default setting (_:8881:117) Current range = 100 x IR

The Current range parameter allows you to set the dynamic range for the current input. Please retain the
default setting for power-system protection applications. The current measuring range 1.6 x Irated applies for
the connection type 3-phase + IN-separate and the sensitive current input or for the measuring inputs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj
Default setting (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj = yes

The Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter is used to set the direction of the neutral point of the
current transformer (see following figure). Often, the neutral point of the current transformer is determined by
the direction of the protected object (for example, in the direction of the line, cable, transformer). For this
reason, the default setting of the parameter was defined as yes.
When switching the parameter, the direction of the phase currents and of the ground current IN or IN-sepa-
rate is rotated device-internally.
[dwpolstromwdl-251013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-3 Polarity of Current Transformers
Default setting (_:8881:114) Inverted phases = none

The Inverted phases parameter is intended for special applications, for example, pumped-reservoir plants
(see Chapter Phase-rotation reversal). This default setting may be retained for power-system protection appli-
cations.
Parameter: CT error changeover
Default setting (_:8881:107) CT error changeover = 1.00

The CT error changeover parameter is only relevant for the Line differential protection function. The CT
error changeover parameter defines the transition range of the transformer fault from low to higher
currents.
You can find more setting notes and calculation samples in chapter 6.1.6 Application and Setting Instructions
for Line Differential Protection Settings .
Parameter: CT error A
Default setting (_:8881:108) CT error A = 5.0

The CT error A parameter considers the transformer fault at rated current plus a safety margin.
Parameter: CT error B
Default setting (_:8881:109) CT error B = 15.0
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The CT error B parameter considers the transformer fault during rated overcurrent factor in addition to the
safety margin. It is the number preceding the letter P of the transformer data.
Parameter: Magnitude correction
Default setting (_:3841:103) Magnitude correction = 1.000

When using the Magnitude correction parameter, you adjust the amplitude (amplitude correction) for
the current input. This allows you to correct the tolerances of the primary current transformer phase-selec-
tively. The magnitude correction may be required for highly precise measurements. Use a comparison meas-
urement to determine the setting value (for example, a high-precision measuring-voltage transformer). If a
primary correction is not necessary, retain the default setting.
NOTE
i The Magnitude correction parameter has nothing to do with the internal adjustment of the input
circuit.
Note Regarding Routable Data

Indications for the current rotating field and the information pertaining to the sampling-frequency tracking can
be found in Information routing under Power-system data General in DIGSI 5. The indication Freq.out
of oper.range means that the frequency operating range has been exceeded. Either the frequency is out
of range (10 Hz to 80 Hz) or the input signals are too small for a manual update. Should this condition occur,
the system switches the update frequency to a sampling rate that corresponds to the rated frequency.
Furthermore, there are 2 additional measured frequency values available. The measured value f sys
displays the current system frequency, and the measured value f track displays the sampling frequency
currently set. Siemens recommends routing both measured values as fault-recording channel.
6.1.6 Application and Setting Instructions for Line Differential Protection Settings
NOTE
i The following parameters are only important for the Line differential protection function. These parameters
can be found in DIGSI 5 project tree under Device name (for example, 7SL86) Settings Power-system
data under Measuring point I-3ph.
Current-Transformer Characteristic Curve

The basic principle of the Differential-protection function assumes that all currents flowing into a healthy
protected object add up to 0. If the sets of current transformers indicate different transformation errors at the
line ends in the overcurrent range, the secondarily measured sum of the current may reach a significant
magnitude during external short circuits and the high flow of current resulting from this fact. This may simulate
an internal short circuit.
The adaptive stabilization method of the line differential protection makes allowance for errors introduced by
the current transformer. For this reason, the measuring error, in relation to the level of current transformed by
the current transformer, must be known. To do this, please set the characteristic data of the current trans-
former and the secondary circuits. In many cases the default setting may be maintained. It considers the data
of the most unfavorable protection current transformer. By using the following settings, the Line differential
protection function approximates the characteristic curve of the transformer fault and calculates the stabiliza-
tion value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwctfail-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-4 Transmission Behavior of the Current Transformer
Parameter: CT error changeover
Default setting (_:8881:107) CT error changeover = 1.50

The CT error changeover parameter defines the transition range of the transformer fault from low to high
currents.
[fofueber-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
n' Operational overcurrent factor (effective overcurrent factor)
n Rated overcurrent factor of the current transformer (index following the letter "P")
PN Rated burden of the current transformer at rated current in [VA]
Pi Internal current transformer burden at rated current in [VA]
P' Actually connected burden (devices and secondary connection cables) at rated current in
[VA]
The rated overcurrent factor n and the rated power PN of the current transformer can be found on the name
plate of the current transformer. These values refer to the specified conditions (rated current, rated burden).
EXAMPLE:
Current transformer per VDE 0414/Part 1 or IEC 60044
Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA n = 10; PN = 30 VA
Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA n = 20; PN = 20 VA
The operational overcurrent factor n' is the result of the rated data and the actual secondary burden P'.
Under normal circumstances, the internal burden of the current transformer is documented in the test
protocol. If this value is unknown, the internal burden Pi can be approximated and determined from the DC
resistance Ri of the secondary winding:
[foeigbue-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can find the Siemens setting recommendation in Table 6-1.
Parameter: CT error A
Default setting (_:8881:108) CT error A = 5.0
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The CT error A parameter considers the transformer fault at rated current plus a safety margin. According
to VDE 0414/Part 1 or IEC 60044, at a primary rated current F1, the CT error A is equal to the measured
current deviation.
Example:
Current transformer 5P: 3%

Current transformer 10P: 5%
You can find the Siemens setting recommendations in Table 6-1.
Parameter: CT error B
Default setting (_:8881:109) CT error B = 15.0

The CT error B parameter considers the transformer fault during rated overcurrent factor in addition to the
safety margin. It is the number preceding the letter P of the transformer data.
You can find the Siemens setting recommendation in Table 6-1.
Setting Recommendations for General Protection Current Transformers

The following table lists general protection current transformers with characteristic data, including associated
setting recommendations:
Table 6-1 Setting Recommendations for Current Transformer Data
Trans- Standard Rated-Current Error Rated-Over- Setting Recommendations for Settings

former current
Class Factor Error
Ratio Angle CT error CT error CT error
change- A B
over
5P IEC 60044-1 1.0 % 60 min 5% 1.50 3.0 % 10.0 %
10P 3.0 % _ 10 % 1.50 5.0 % 15.0 %
TPX 0.5 % 30 min 10% 1.50 1.0 % 15.0 %
TPY 1.0 % 30 min 10% 1.50 3.0 % 15.0 %
TPZ 1.0 % 180 min 10% 1.50 6.0 % 20.0 %
18 min (only I )
PX IEC 60044-1 1.50 3.0 % 10.0 %
BS: Class X
C100 to ANSI 1.50 5.0 % 15.0 %
C800
EXAMPLE:
Current transformer 5P10; 20 VA

Transmission ratio I 600 A/5 A
Inherent burden 2 VA
Secondary lines 4 mm2 copper (Cu)
Specific resistance of Cu 0.0175 mm2/m
Length 20 m
Irated 5A
Burden at 5 A 0.3 VA
The resistance of the secondary lines is calculated as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fobererl-150311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The worst-case scenario has been assumed for the calculation, whereby during a 1-pole error the current
flows back and forth across the secondary lines (factor 2). This follows that the power at a rated current of
Irated = 5 A can be calculated as:
[foberepi-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The entire connected burden comprises the burden of the supply lines and the burden of the device, and is
calculated as follows:
[fobereps-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The ratio of the overcurrent factors is calculated as follows:
[fofakuei-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
According to Table 6-1 Siemens recommends the following setting values:

CT error changeover = 1.50
CT error A = 3.0 %
CT error B = 10.0 %
Transformer with Voltage Control

If the power transformer with voltage control is within the protection range, please observe the following: A
differential electric current occurs already during stationary operation. This differential current depends on the
current and the position of the tap changer. This is a current-proportional error. For this reason, it should be
dealt with as an additional current-transformer error.
Calculate the max. deviation along the limit of the control range (referring to the mean current of the control
range). Add the max. deviation to the calculated transformer faults A and B. Implement this correction only for
the end that is facing the controlled side of the transformer.
EXAMPLE:
For a transformer YNd5, 35 MV, 110 kV/25 kV, Y-side controlled 10 %
This results in the following values:
Rated electric current at rated voltage = 184 A
Rated electric current at Vrated + 10% Imin = 167 A
Rated electric current at Vrated - 10% Imax = 202 A
For the controlled side of the transformer the following mean current is determined:
[foimittl-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The max. deviation of this mean current is:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fodelmax-090311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Add this max. deviation to the transformer error as determined above CT error A and CT error B.
Please ensure that this deviation due to voltage control relates to the mean current at rated apparent power
and not to the rated current at the rated voltage.
6.1.7 Settings
General

General
_:2311:101 General:Phase ABC ABC
sequence ACB
Measuring Point I-1ph

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A
current
_:2311:102 General:Rated secon- 1A 1A
dary current 5A
_:2311:103 General:Current range 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
8 x IR
20 x IR
100 x IR
50 x IR
_:2311:104 General:Internal CT type CT protection CT protection
CT measurement
CT Process bus
_:2311:116 General:Term. 1,3,5,7 in no yes
dir. of obj. yes
_:2311:105 General:Tracking inactive inactive
active
_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to100 0
ID
CT 1
_:3841:103 CT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase IA
IB
IC
IN
INsens
Ix
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

General
_:8881:115 CT 3-phase:CT connec- not assigned 3-phase + IN
tion 3-phase + IN
3-phase
3-phase + IN-separate
3-phase, 2 primary CT
3ph,2prim.CT + IN-sep
_:8881:127 CT 3-phase:Tracking inactive active
active
_:8881:130 CT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
CT phases
_:8881:101 CT 3-phase:Rated 1.0 A to 100000.0 A 1000.0 A
primary current
_:8881:102 CT 3-phase:Rated 1A 1A
secondary current 5A
_:8881:117 CT 3-phase:Current 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range 8 x IR
20 x IR
100 x IR
50 x IR
_:8881:118 CT 3-phase:Internal CT CT protection CT protection
type CT measurement
CT Process bus
_:8881:116 CT 3-phase:Neutr.point no yes
in dir.of ref.obj yes
_:8881:114 CT 3-phase:Inverted none none
phases AC
BC
AB
_:8881:107 CT 3-phase:CT error 1.00 to 10.00 1.00
changeover
_:8881:108 CT 3-phase:CT error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % 5.0 %
_:8881:109 CT 3-phase:CT error B 0.5 % to 50.0 % 15.0 %
CT IN
primary current
_:8881:105 CT 3-phase:Rated 1A 1A
secondary current 5A
_:8881:119 CT 3-phase:Current 1.6 x IR 100 x IR
range 8 x IR
20 x IR
100 x IR
50 x IR
type CT measurement
CT Process bus
CT IN2
primary current
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:8881:113 CT 3-phase:Rated 1 A to 5 A 1A
secondary current
_:8881:121 CT 3-phase:Current 1.6 x IR 1.6 x IR
range 8 x IR
20 x IR
100 x IR
50 x IR
type CT measurement
CT Process bus
CT 1
tion
_:3841:117 CT 1:Phase IA
IB
IC
IN
INsens
Ix
CT 2
tion
_:3842:117 CT 2:Phase IA
IB
IC
IN
INsens
Ix
CT 3
tion
_:3843:117 CT 3:Phase IA
IB
IC
IN
INsens
Ix
CT 4
tion
_:3844:117 CT 4:Phase IA
IB
IC
IN
INsens
Ix
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode off off
on
test
_:5581:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of blocking blocking
blocking auto blocking
not blocking
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:5581:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
for autoblock
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode off off
on
test
_:2491:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:2491:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:2491:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode off off
on
test
_:2551:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. sum I
_:2431:1 Supv. sum I:Mode off off
on
test
_:2431:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2431:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:2431:6 Supv. sum I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:1 Supv.ADC sum I:Mode off off
on
test
Measuring Point V-1ph

General
_:2311:101 General:Rated primary 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
_:2311:102 General:Rated secon- 80 V to 340 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:2311:103 General:Tracking inactive inactive
active
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:2311:130 General:Measuring-point 0 to 100 0
ID
_:2311:108 General:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
VT 1
_:3811:103 VT 1:Magnitude correc- 0.010 to 10.000 1.000
tion
_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase VA
VB
VC
V AB
V BC
V CA
VN
Vx
VCB
VN broken-delta
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time

General
_:8911:101 VT 3-phase:Rated 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
primary voltage
_:8911:102 VT 3-phase:Rated 80 V to 340 V 100 V
secondary voltage
_:8911:103 VT 3-phase:Matching 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
ratio Vph / VN
_:8911:104 VT 3-phase:VT connec- not assigned 3 ph-to-gnd volt.
tion 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN + VN
3 ph-to-ph voltages
_:8911:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted none none
phases AC
BC
AB
_:8911:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking inactive active
active
_:8911:130 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID
VT 1
tion
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:3811:108 VT 1:Phase VA
VB
VC
V AB
V BC
V CA
VN
Vx
VCB
VT 2
tion
_:3812:108 VT 2:Phase VA
VB
VC
V AB
V BC
V CA
VN
Vx
VCB
VT 3
tion
_:3813:108 VT 3:Phase VA
VB
VC
V AB
V BC
V CA
VN
Vx
VCB
VT 4
tion
_:3814:108 VT 4:Phase VA
VB
VC
V AB
V BC
V CA
VN
Vx
VCB
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode off off
on
test
_:2521:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:2521:102 Supv. balan. 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
V:Threshold min/max
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:2521:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode off off
on
test
_:2581:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
Supv. sum V
_:2461:1 Supv. sum V:Mode off off
on
test
_:2461:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 25.000 V
_:2461:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm
VT miniatureCB
_:2641:101 VT minia- 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
tureCB:Response time
General

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:2311:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:2311:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:2311:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:2311:322 General:f sys MV O
_:2311:323 General:f track MV O

(Type)
CT 1
_:3841:300 CT 1:Sampled val. current SAV O

(Type)
General
_:8881:319 CT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8881:320 CT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8881:321 CT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
CT 1
CT 2
CT 3
CT 4
Brk.wire det.
_:5581:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:5581:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:5581:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:5581:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
_:5581:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:5581:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:5581:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:5581:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:5581:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:5581:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
Supv. balan. I
_:2491:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:2491:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:2491:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:2491:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:2491:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:2551:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:2551:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:2551:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:2551:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:2551:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum I
_:2431:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2431:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2431:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2431:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:2431:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Supv.ADC sum I
_:2401:82 Supv.ADC sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:2401:54 Supv.ADC sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:2401:52 Supv.ADC sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:2401:53 Supv.ADC sum I:Health ENS O
_:2401:71 Supv.ADC sum I:Failure SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
VT 1
_:3811:300 VT 1:Sampled val. voltage SAV O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I

(Type)
General
_:8911:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:8911:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:8911:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
VT 1
VT 2
VT 3
VT 4
Supv. balan. V
_:2521:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:2521:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:2521:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:2521:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:2521:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:2581:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:2581:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:2581:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:2581:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:2581:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
Supv. sum V
_:2461:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:2461:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:2461:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:2461:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:2461:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
Definite-T 1
_:2641:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2 Line Differential Protection
Line differential protection (ANSI 87L):

Is a selective short-circuit protection for overhead lines, cables, and busbars with single-side and multi-
side infeed in radial, looped, or meshed systems
Allows fast tripping of 1- or 3-pole short circuits at 2 to 6 line ends
Works strictly phase-selectively,
Line differential protection is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. It works on the basis of current
comparison. For this a device has to be installed at each end of the area to be protected. The devices
exchange their measurands via communication connections. Each device performs the current comparison
with these measurands and trips the assigned circuit breaker, if there is an internal short circuit.
Apart from normal lines, the line differential protection can also protect lines with a transformer in block
connection. The current transformers selectively delimit the protection range. By using the Inrush-current
detection function and the adaptive measuring techniques for the line differential protection, the stages can
be stabilized to prevent tripping that may be caused by transformer-inrush currents.
Measured-Value Transmission
If all the protection equipment is at the same location as is the case with generators, transformers, busbars
the measurands can be processed directly. The processing is different for lines where the protection range
extends more or less far from one station to another. To enable the measurands from all line ends to be
processed at each line end, these measurands must be transferred in a suitable form. In this way, the tripping
condition can be checked at each line end, and the respective local circuit breaker can be tripped if neces-
sary.
The measured values are encrypted and transmitted in digital telegrams via communication channels. For
this purpose, each device features at least one interface for protection-data communication, called the protec-
tion interface in the following.
Figure 6-5 shows this principle for a line with 2 ends. Each device detects the local current and sends the
information on its magnitude and phase relation to the opposite end. Thus, each device can add the currents
from all ends and further process them.
[dwdiff2e-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-5 Differential Protection for a Line with 2 Ends
If there are more than 2 ends, a communication chain is established so that each device is informed of the
sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure 6-6 shows an example of 3 ends. The underlying
principle in this regard is partial current summation. In this process, each device measures the respective
local currents. Device 1 detects the current i1 and transmits its data in the form of a complex phasor I1 to
device 2. This device adds the component I2 from measuring current i2 and transmits this subtotal to device
3. The subtotal I1 + I2 finally reaches device 3 which adds its component I3. In the reverse direction, a corre-
sponding chain runs from device 3 via device 2 to device 1. In this way, all 3 devices have the sum of all 3
currents measured at the measuring points.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If ends 1 and 2 are close together (within about 500 m), currents I1 and I2 can also be detected by one
protection device, provided the number of analog current inputs (8I) in the device permits that. Thus, the
topology shown in Figure 6-6 can also be protected by 2 physical devices.
The order of the devices in the communication chain does not have to correspond with their indexing, as
shown in the example in Figure 6-6. The assignment is made in the course of parameterization for the
topology.
[dwdiff3e-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-6 Differential Protection for a Line with 3 Ends
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown with dashed lines in Figure 6-6. This
enables a redundant transmission. Even if there is an outage of the communication connection, the differen-
tial-protection system remains operational without any restrictions. The devices recognize a failure in the
communication and automatically switch over to a different communication route. It is also possible to trip one
line end (for example, for tests or modifications) and then log out the protection at this line end. In a communi-
cation ring, the remaining operation can continue without interruption.
Constellation Measured Values

Constellation measured values are measured values that have been predefined by Siemens and which are
time-synchronized in the devices, exchanged across the protection interfaces and made available to any
device. You can view the constellation measured values with DIGSI 5.
In the device, current and voltage measured values are displayed in amount and phase as a percentage
value. 100 % conform to the rated current or the rated voltage of the line (see next figure). These measured
values are recorded every 2 seconds by the devices participating in the constellation and then sent to the
other respective devices. At the same time, the current and voltage values or the different devices are time-
synchronous with one another.
You can find these measured values in the device under the following DIGSI mask:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scconstp-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-7 Constellation Measured Values with Phases
Measured-Value Synchronization
The devices detect the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device detects, digitizes, and
preprocesses the associated currents from the current transformers at its own random processor clock. If the
currents of 2 or more line ends are to be compared, however, it is necessary to process all currents with the
same time basis. All devices belonging together exchange their time status with each telegram. The device
whose address is entered first into the protection interface functions as Timing Master, meaning, it specifies
the time frame. Each device can thus calculate the time offset due to the transmission and processing times
relative to the Timing master.
To achieve a sufficiently exact synchronization, the current values are additionally provided with a time stamp
before they are transmitted from one device to the others in digital telegrams. This allows a statement on the
time at which the transmitted current values were valid. The receiving devices can thus carry out a fine
synchronization based on the time stamp and their own time management, that is compare the currents
detected at truly the same time (<5 s tolerance).
The transmission times are continuously monitored by the devices via the time stamp in the measured-data
telegram and taken into account at the respective receiving end. The frequency of the measurands, which is
decisive for the exact calculation of complex phasors, is also measured continuously and updated with the
calculation, if necessary, so that the phasor comparison is synchronous. If the device is connected to voltage
transformers and if at least one voltage is available in sufficient magnitude, the frequency is determined from
this voltage. Otherwise, the measured currents are used as the basis for frequency determination. The deter-
mined frequencies are exchanged between the devices via the communication routes. Under these condi-
tions, all devices operate with the updated frequency.
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of the differential protection is based on the precondition that, during uninterrupted opera-
tion, the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equals 0. This applies to the primary system and
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
only there if the shunt components of current, which occur from the capacitance of the lines or the excitation
currents of the transformers and shunt reactors, are negligible. In contrast, the secondary currents offered to
the devices via the current transformers contain measuring errors originating from the measuring errors of the
current transformers and the input circuits of the devices themselves. Even transmission errors such as signal
jitter can cause measurand deviations.
All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the currents processed in the devices is
not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influences. A special method of Adaptive
self-stabilization is applied in this context to ensure the highest possible sensitivity of the differential protec-
tion.
[dwanspre-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-8 Operate Curve of the Differential Protection
Current-Transformer Errors
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer errors, each device calculates an adaptive
self-stabilization value Ierror. This value results from calculating the possible local transformer errors based on
the data of the local current transformers and the magnitude of the locally measured currents.
Figure 6-9 Approximation of the Current-Transformer Errors
The basis for this are the transformer data of the connected current transformers that must be entered individ-
ually for each device. Since each device transmits its estimated error to the other devices, each device is able
to determine the sum of possible errors and use them for stabilization.
Other Measuring Errors

Other measuring errors which can occur in the device itself due to hardware tolerances, calculation toler-
ances, time deviations, or the quality of the measurands such as harmonics and frequency deviations are
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
also estimated by the device and automatically adaptively increase the local self-stabilization value. The
permissible variance of the transmission and processing times are also taken into account..
Time deviations are caused by residual errors when synchronizing the measurands, runtime variance or
similar. GPS synchronization prevents an increase of the self-stabilization that can be caused by runtime
jumps.
If an influencing variable cannot be detected for example, the frequency if no adequate measurands are
available the device assumes the rated values by definition. In the frequency example, this means the
following: If the frequency cannot be determined because no sufficient measurands are available, the device
uses the rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from the rated frequency within the
permissible range (20 %), the stabilization is automatically increased correspondingly. As soon as the
frequency has been determined (100 ms max. after applying a usable measurand), the stabilization is
decreased accordingly. In practice, this has an effect if no measurand is available in the range to be protected
before the occurrence of a short-circuit, for example when switching a line with line-side voltage transformers
onto a fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at that time, the stabilization is increased at first until the
actual frequency is determined. This can lead to a tripping delay, but only at the pickup threshold, for
example, in the case of very low-current faults.
Supervision of the Differential Current

The process of adaptive self-stabilization is based on the fact that differential current faults that are caused by
disturbing influences can be compensated by supplementary restraints. Thus, the process provide the highest
possible sensitivity for the differential protection.
The additional dynamic monitoring of the differential current is meaningful, since there are interfering effects
that cannot be detected by the device. This includes stationary or slowly building unbalances in the transit
times in the protection interface communication over communication networks. Without external GPS time
synchronization, the transit time monitoring function cannot capture the unbalances in transit times. There-
fore, the received measured values cannot be synchronized precisely and high currents passing through may
cause tripping.
During operation (load operation), the behavior of the differential and restraint current must be monitored to
this effect, and whether in spite of a restraining quantity the differential current approaches the trigger charac-
teristic line in an unexpected manner and without recognizing jumps in transit time. When the monitoring
function is triggered, the indication: Alarm: Idiff too high will be canceled. In addition, a fault record is
initiated in all differential protection devices.
During commissioning, ensure that the differential current in the operate curve is defined primarily by the
charging current and the transformer error (DIGSI 5 Test Suite). If the differential current monitoring function
is already initiated during the commissioning, check first whether the setting recommendation for stage Idiff
was followed. If stage Idiff is set correctly, triggering indicates a stationary unbalance of the signal-transit
times. It is the responsibility of the network operator to apply suitable measures to eliminate the causes.
Stages of Differential Protection

Differential protection consists of 2 stages.
The Idiff stage works with very accurate measurement. Maximum sensitivity can be achieved with it.
The Idiff fast stage works in parallel with the Idiff stage. A very fast algorithm enables tripping decisions
to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
Transformer in the Protection Range

As an option, a transformer may be considered for the protection range. At each end of the protection range,
for example, at each protection device of a differential-protection topology, only a few additional transformer
parameters have to be entered, for example the rated apparent power, primary voltages and vector groups of
the respective windings, and any existing neutral-point displacement ground connections. For this, the Trans-
former in the protection range function block must be loaded from the function library as function enhance-
ment, or a appropriate application template must be selected.
Inrush-Current Detection
If the protection range extends beyond a transformer, a high inrush current, which flows into the protection
range but does not leave it again, has to be expected when connecting the transformer. The inrush current
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a relatively high content of 2nd harmonic
(twice the rated frequency) which is missing almost completely in the case of a short circuit.
The algorithm of the line differential protection recognizes the inrush currents. Temporarily, the adaptive
stabilization function provides an elevated stabilization current, thus preventing any false tripping. When the
inrush-current detection function is activated in the device, inrush currents can be detected correctly. Further-
more, overfunctioning caused by the inrush currents can be prevented by blocking the affected phases or all
phases using the crossblock function.
Charging-Current Compensation
Distributed line or conductor capacitances cause a permanently capacitive charging current. This current has
to be taken into account by the pickup values of the differential-protection stages. In cables in particular, this
charging current can reach considerable values. The charging-current compensation serves to improve the
sensitivity so that maximum sensitivity can be protected even at high charging currents. For this, the
Charging-current compensation function block must be loaded from the function library and activated.
Emergency Mode
Emergency mode of a line protection device is detected if no main protection function is effective as a result
of interference. With differential protection, emergency mode can be triggered not only by protection inter-
faces that have dropped out and become corrupted, but also by invalid current measured values.
Remote Tripping
The Line Differential Protection function transfers the locally generated operate indication to the line differen-
tial protection functions of the remote devices. The remote devices then also generate a operate indication.
Embedding of the Function
[dwdifstr-310512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Overall Logic
[loges13p-310512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-11 General Logic for Differential-Protection Functions with 1-/3-pole Tripping
Mode of Operation
The Line differential protection function is composed of several subfunctions, which are referred to as stages
or function blocks in the following sections. A distinction is made between standard subfunctions and option-
ally configurable subfunctions.
The core of differential protection consists of the 2 stages Idiff and Idiff fast. Both work in parallel and ensure
high sensitivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. The output signals of these stages are
pickup and trip signals, which are routed to the pickup logic and the trip logic, resulting in the corresponding
protection indications.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Charging-current compensation lc-Compensat. is an optional function of differential protection that is

assigned exclusively to the sensitive stage Idiff and for which maximum sensitivity is guaranteed, even with
high capacitive charging currents.
The optional Transformer function is required when a transformer is configured in the protection range. It
guarantees that amplitudes and phase angle of the measured currents will be evaluated correctly at the line
ends.
6.2.4 Application and Setting Instructions - General Settings
NOTE
i Observe the following hints so that the line differential protection operates correctly at all line ends:
The rated values of the line (parameter (_:9001:101) Rated current and (_:9001:102)
Rated voltage) must have the identical setting at both ends of the line.
If a transformer is installed in the line, both parameters must be set such that the rated apparent
power is the same at both ends of the line (parameter (_:9001:103) Rated apparent power).
The rated apparent power is calculated automatically and displayed in the general line data of the
Line function group (parameter _:9001:103) and in the Line differential protection function in the
Transformer block (parameter Rated apparent power).
Parameter: Min. current for release
Default setting (_:2311:102) Min. current for release = 0.00 A

The parameter specifies the minimum local current required for release of tripping.
NOTE
i To stabilize the line differential protection against current-transformer errors, the corresponding settings for
the current measuring points must be taken into account in the system data. These are used exclusively
by the line differential protection.
Parameter: Supervision Idiff
Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Supervision Idiff = yes: block diff. prot.
When using the parameter Supervision Idiff, you specify whether the line differential protection function
operates with or without differential current monitoring.
no The differential current is not monitored.
yes: reporting only The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
monitoring threshold, and a current jump is not present, the indication Alarm:
Idiff too high will be issued.
yes: block diff. The differential current is monitored. If the differential current exceeds the
prot. monitoring threshold and there is no current jump, the line differential protec-
tion is blocked and the indication Alarm: Idiff too high is issued.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2.5 Settings

General
_:2311:1 General:Mode off off
on
test
_:2311:11 General:1-pole operate no yes
allowed yes
_:2311:102 General:Min. current for 1A 0.000 A to 100.000 A 0.000 A
release 5A 0.000 A to 500.000 A 0.000 A
_:2311:104 General:Supervision Idiff no yes: block diff.
yes: reporting only prot.
yes: block diff. prot.

(Type)
General
_:2311:82 General:>Block function SPS I
_:2311:507 General:>Function logoff on SPS I
_:2311:508 General:>Function logoff off SPS I
_:2311:503 General:>Test local device on SPS I
_:2311:504 General:>Test local device off SPS I
_:2311:501 General:>Test all devices on SPS I
_:2311:502 General:>Test all devices off SPS I
_:2311:319 General:Function logoff SPC C
_:2311:309 General:Test local device SPC C
_:2311:308 General:Test all devices SPC C
_:2311:54 General:Inactive SPS O
_:2311:315 General:Function logged off SPS O
_:2311:313 General:Logged off via BI SPS O
_:2311:314 General:Logged off via control SPS O
_:2311:300 General:Test local device act. SPS O
_:2311:306 General:BI: Test local device SPS O
_:2311:307 General:Ctrl:Test local device SPS O
_:2311:301 General:Test all devices activ SPS O
_:2311:304 General:BI: Test all devices SPS O
_:2311:305 General:Ctrl: Test all devices SPS O
_:2311:302 General:Test remote device SPS O
_:2311:316 General:Alarm: Idiff too high SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2.7 IDiff Stage
6.2.7.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo13idif-250512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-12 Logic of the Idiff Stage
Mode of Operation
The Idiff stage is the sensitive differential protection stage. It is based on the principle of current phasor calcu-
lation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the occurrence of a fault
event. The Idiff fast stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping in the event of high-
current errors.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The measurands are analyzed separately for each phase. Each device calculates a differential current from
the sum of the current phasors which are calculated at each end of the protected object and transmitted to
the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current which the differential-protection system sees, ideally
that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging
current in lines in a first approximation. If charging-current compensation is active, the maximum sensitivity is
achieved and the pickup value can be set considerably smaller.
The restraint current counteracts the differential current. The restraint current results from the sum of the
maximum measuring errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated adaptively from the current
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of
the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal errors. Thus, the
restraint current always reflects the maximum possible measuring error of the differential-protection system.
Optional functions such as charging-current compensation (increased sensitivity) and transformer in the
protection range are automatically considered when the differential and stabilization currents are calculated.
Pickup of the Stage

The pickup characteristic of the differential protection (see Figure 6-13) results from the stabilization charac-
teristic curve Idiff = Istab (45 line) which is cut below the setting value of the Threshold parameter. It
complies with the equation
Istab = Threshold + (current transformer error and other measuring errors).
If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal error (dimmed area in Figure 6-13).
Figure 6-13 Pickup Characteristic of Idiff Stage
If the additional criterion of a local minimum current has to be satisfied for tripping in the event of an internal
error, the value of this current can be set in Min. current for release.
Pickup upon Switching

When switching on longer, unloaded cables, overhead lines, and resonant-grounded lines, pronounced
higher-frequency compensating processes can occur. These are strongly dampened by digital filters of the
differential protection. To reliably prevent single-end pickup of the protection when connecting such lines and
cables, the setting value Thresh. switch onto fault is set. This pickup value always becomes effec-
tive as soon as a device has detected that its end is switched onto a dead line. All devices are then changed
over to this pickup value for the duration of the closure detection. In addition, for the switching of transformers
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
and shunt reactors, the device additionally features an inrush-current detection that can block the affected
phase of the differential protection.
You will find the inrush current detection under Line FG Inrush-current detection in the DIGSI 5 function
library. Add this functionality to the Line function group (under DIGSI 5 project tree Name of the device
Parameter Line).
Parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. now also appears in the I-diff stage of the Line Differential
Protection.
Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal an error or when invalid data are received via the protection inter-
face. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection interface
are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to
Yes.
Measured Values of the Idiff Stage

In order to clarify failures, the Idiff stage provides the following measured values:
(_:3451:300) I diff. Differential current
(_:3451:301) I restr. Restraint current (overall restraint)
(_:3451:307) I local Value of local current phasor
(_:3451:308) I l.restr. Local restraint current
(_:3451:309) I l.CTerr. Partial component of the local restraint current that
considers the transformer fault.
(_:3451:310) I l.distor. Subcomponent of the local restraint current that
considers the error caused by signal distortion. Each
deviation of the signal form from the sinus shape is
interpreted as a signal distortion. The deviation
between the actual signal form and the sinus shape
will be converted to a percentage of the stabilization.
(_:3451:311) I sync. Subcomponents of the overall restraint that are
caused by errors during the time synchronization of
the current phasor.
The measured values are available in the fault record. You can read out fault recordings from the device and
analyze them afterwards using evaluation tools such as SIGRA. The device display shows only I diff. and
I restr.. In order to find the measured values, go to Main menu Measurements Line x Functional
measured values Line differential protection.
Detailed information about selecting and deleting fault recordings can be found in the Operating Manual.
6.2.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Idiff Stage
Parameter: Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.
Default setting (_:3451:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the tripping is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current. If the inrush-current detection blocks tripping of the Idiff stage, indi-
cation Inrush blocks operate is generated.
Parameter: Threshold
Recommended setting value (_:3451:3) Threshold = 0.300 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The parameter sets the pickup threshold of the differential current. The total current flowing into the protection
range during a short circuit is decisive, that is the total fault current regardless of how it divides the ends of
the protected object.
Parameter: Thresh. switch onto fault
Recommended setting value (_:3451:101) Thresh. switch onto fault = 0.300 A

A setting of 3 times to 4 times the stationary charging current generally ensures the stability of the protection
when switching.
Parameter: Delay 1-phase pickup
Recommended setting value (_:3451:102) Delay 1-phase pickup = 0.04 s

If the differential protection is used in an isolated or resonant-grounded system, it has to be ensured that trip-
ping due to the fault-ignition oscillation of a simple ground fault is prevented. In extensive resonant-grounded
systems, this time should be extended.
NOTE
i This parameter is only effective for resonant-grounded/isolated neutral-point treatment!
Parameter: Operate delay
Recommended setting value (_:3451:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s

In special cases, it can be advantageous to delay the tripping of the differential protection with an additional
time stage, for example for reverse interlocking. The time delay is started when an internal fault has been
detected.
6.2.7.3 Settings

I-DIFF
_:3451:1 I-DIFF:Mode off on
on
_:3451:2 I-DIFF:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:3451:27 I-DIFF:Blk. w. inrush curr. no no
detect. yes
_:3451:3 I-DIFF:Threshold 1A 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5A 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
_:3451:101 I-DIFF:Thresh. switch onto 1 A 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
fault 5A 0.500 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
_:3451:102 I-DIFF:Delay 1-phase 0.00 s to 0.50 s 0.04 s
pickup
_:3451:6 I-DIFF:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
I-DIFF
_:3451:81 I-DIFF:>Block stage SPS I
_:3451:54 I-DIFF:Inactive SPS O
_:3451:302 I-DIFF:Remote stage inactive SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:3451:52 I-DIFF:Behavior ENS O
_:3451:53 I-DIFF:Health ENS O
_:3451:55 I-DIFF:Pickup ACD O
_:3451:57 I-DIFF:Operate ACT O
_:3451:60 I-DIFF:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:3451:300 I-DIFF:I diff. WYE O
_:3451:301 I-DIFF:I restr. WYE O
_:3451:307 I-DIFF:I local WYE O
_:3451:308 I-DIFF:I l.restr. WYE O
_:3451:309 I-DIFF:I l.CTerr. WYE O
_:3451:310 I-DIFF:I l.distor. WYE O
_:3451:311 I-DIFF:I sync. WYE O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2.8 IDiff Fast Stage
6.2.8.1 Description
Logic of the Stage
[lo13idfs-250511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-14 Logic of the Idiff Fast Stage
Mode of Operation
The Idiff fast stage is the differential-protection stage that is optimized for fast operate times in the event of
high-current faults. It is superimposed on the Idiff stage. The measurands are also analyzed separately for
each phase. Fast tripping for high-current errors is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous
values. Since this procedure is not able to provide stabilization against signal distortions (for example,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
current-transformer saturation) that can occur during high-current external faults, a decision on internal or
external fault has to be made before the possible saturation occurs. It is assumed that the current trans-
formers do not yet go into saturation at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault
inception.
Above a given passing current level (> 2.5pickup value, local measurement), the decision for external fault is
made automatically and the Idiff fast stage is blocked. If saturation occurs for one or more current trans-
formers that delimit the protection range, this blocking is maintained and the differential caused by saturation
is thus neutralized. The Idiff fast stage is normally set to be higher than the rated current. In this way, the
influence of charging currents and cross-flow currents of transformers (fixed and transient) is suppressed.
Otherwise, the Idiff fast stage works in the same way as the sensitive Idiff stage. Each device calculates a
differential current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at
each end of the protected object and transmitted to the other ends. Its value corresponds to the fault current
which the differential-protection system sees, ideally that is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is
small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
measurands and the set substation settings. To this end, the maximum error of the current transformers in
the rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied by the presently flowing current at each end of
the protected object and transmitted to the other ends together with the determined internal errors. Thus, the
restraint current always reflects the maximum possible measuring error of the differential-protection system.
The option of a transformer in the protection range is automatically taken into account when calculating the
differential and stabilization currents. An activated charging-current compensation has no effect on the Idiff
fast stage.
Pickup of the Stage

The decisive element is the RMS value of the current. The pickup characteristic (see Figure 6-15) is derived,
as for the Idiff stage from the stabilization characteristic Idiff = Istab (45 line), which is cut below the setting
value of the parameter Threshold. It complies with the equation
Istab = Threshold + (current transformer error and other measuring errors).
there is an internal error (dimmed area in Figure 6-15).
Figure 6-15 Pickup Characteristic of Idiff Fast Stage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup upon Switching

When switching a line, the pickup value of the Idiff fast stage is automatically doubled for approximately 1.5 s.
This prevents overfunction if (for example also during automatic reclosing) equalizing currents that do not
actually exist in the primary circuit flow due to a remanence in the secondary current-transformer circuit.
Fault Behavior
The Health object is set to Alarm when fast measured value monitoring functions (broken-wire detection,
fast sum I, analog-digital converter) signal an error or when invalid data are received via the protection inter-
face. The validity of the currents used as well as the validity of the data received via the protection interface
are monitored continuously. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to
Yes.
6.2.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Idiff Fast Stage
Recommended setting value (_:3481:3) Threshold = 1.000 A

This parameter is used to set the lowest pickup threshold of the Idiff fast stage.
NOTE
i To stabilize the line differential protection against current-transformer errors, the corresponding settings for
the current measuring points must be taken into account in the system data. These are used exclusively
by the line differential protection.
Since this stage responds very quickly, pickup in response to capacitive charging currents (for lines), induc-
tive excitation currents (for transformers or shunt reactors) including during switching procedures - must be
excluded. This also applies when charging-current compensation is switched on, because this is not effective
for the Idiff fast stage. The pickup value should be set higher than the load current (max. 1.2IN to 2IN).
In resonant-grounded systems, the value must not fall below the value of the non-resonant-grounded ground-
fault current. This value results from the total capacitive ground-fault current without taking into account the
arc-suppression coil. Since the arc-suppression coil has to compensate for approximately the total capacitive
ground fault current, its rated current can approximately be taken as a basis. For transformers, set IN transf./Vsc
transf..
A final dynamic check of the pickup thresholds is performed during commissioning.
Parameter: Thresh. switch onto fault
Recommended setting value (_:3481:101) Thresh. switch onto fault = 1.000 A

If bushing-type current transformers are used for a transformer in the line section to be protected, leakage
fluxes through the bushing-type current transformers can occur during reclosure after an external fault. These
leakage fluxes can corrupt the secondary current and cause the Idiff fast stage to overfunction. If bushing-
type current transformers are used, the pickup value on switching should be set to 2 to 3 times the setting
value of the threshold value of the stage. If selecting the setting value equal to the threshold value, this
parameter becomes ineffective.
Recommended setting value (_:3481:106) Delay 1-phase pickup = 0.04 s

If the differential protection is used in an isolated or resonant-grounded system, it has to be ensured that trip-
ping due to the fault-ignition oscillation of a simple ground fault is prevented. To do this, the pick up is
delayed. In extensive resonant-grounded systems, this time should be extended.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i This parameter is only effective for resonant-grounded/isolated neutral-point treatment!
6.2.8.3 Settings

I-DIFF fast
_:3481:1 I-DIFF fast:Mode off on
on
_:3481:2 I-DIFF fast:Operate & no no
flt.rec. blocked yes
_:3481:3 I-DIFF fast:Threshold 1A 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5A 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A
_:3481:101 I-DIFF fast:Thresh. switch 1A 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
onto fault 5A 4.000 A to 500.000 A 5.000 A
_:3481:106 I-DIFF fast:Delay 1-phase 0.00 s to 0.50 s 0.04 s
pickup

(Type)
I-DIFF fast
_:3481:81 I-DIFF fast:>Block stage SPS I
_:3481:54 I-DIFF fast:Inactive SPS O
_:3481:302 I-DIFF fast:Remote stage inactive SPS O
_:3481:52 I-DIFF fast:Behavior ENS O
_:3481:53 I-DIFF fast:Health ENS O
_:3481:55 I-DIFF fast:Pickup ACD O
_:3481:57 I-DIFF fast:Operate ACT O
6.2.9 Pickup and Tripping
6.2.9.1 Pickup Logic
Pickup Logic
In the pickup logic, the stage pickups are combined for specific phases and issued as superordinate pickup
indications of the differential protection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loanregu-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-16 Pickup Logic
6.2.9.2 Trip Logic
Mode of Operation
The trip logic combines the trip requirements of the differential-protection stages for the specific phases and
generates the superordinate operate indications of the differential protection.
Trip Logic
The trip commands of the differential protection stages are combined phase-selectively. The trip logic of the
differential protection decides via parameters whether a 1-pole pickup can also lead to a 1-pole trip
command. Multiphase pickups lead to a 3-pole trip command. When you set the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed to yes, a 1-pole pickup always results in 1-pole tripping as well.
[loausl13-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-17 Trip Logic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2.9.3 Application and Setting Notes for Pickup and Trip Logic
Recommended setting value (_:2311:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes

In protection devices that are theoretically capable of 1-pole tripping (7SD87, 7SL87), this parameter controls
the permission for 1-pole tripping of the differential protection.
yes The stage has permission to trip 1-pole on 1-phase faults.
no The stage always executes 3-pole tripping regardless of the fault type.

(Type)
Group indicat.
6.2.10 Remote Tripping
6.2.10.1 Description
The local operate indications of the I-DIFF and I-DIFF Fast stages are linked phase-selectively and with a
logical OR operation.
The Line Differential Protection function sends the locally generated operate indication to the line differential
protection functions of the remote devices. The remote devices then also generate a operate indication
(remote tripping).
If a remote device receives a remote trip, the Line Differential Protection function generates the remote
operate indication ((_:5551:57) Operate). The operate indication for remote tripping is linked to the
operate indications of the I-diff and I-diff fast stages by a logical OR operation and results in a group indica-
tion (_:4501:57) Operate.
You can find the remote operate indications in DIGSI 5 information routing under Line Line differential
protection.

(Type)
Remote trip.
_:5551:54 Remote trip.:Inactive SPS O
_:5551:52 Remote trip.:Behavior ENS O
_:5551:53 Remote trip.:Health ENS O
_:5551:57 Remote trip.:Operate ACT O
6.2.11 Function Check of the Line Differential Protection
The line differential protection offers 2 types of tests:

Test of the differential protection in a local device
Test of the entire differential protection in all devices
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Test of the Differential Protection in a Local Device

You can switch the test of the local differential protection function on or off in the following way:
Via the operating dialog in DIGSI (online)
Via the on-site operation panel
Via the binary inputs >Test local device on and >Test local device off
The indications Ctrl:Test local device or BI: Test local device display the source. If a device
test was initiated by the DIGSI or the communications interface, a test of the local device during the line
differential protection is also started.
If a test was activated, the local differential protection function operates in test mode. This is displayed with
thee indications Test local device act. as well as Behavior (Test Idiff) and Behavior (Test Idiff
fast). All differential protection functions in others devices become inactive and report this condition with the
indications Inactive and Test remote device. Now, the local differential protection function interprets
each local current as differential current. The same method can be used to test the pickup thresholds. Indica-
tions generated by local differential protection functions will be identified as Test. This prevents the automatic
activation of the local circuit breaker.
With the a test switch, you can activate the above-mentioned binary inputs and switch over the current inputs
of the protection device to a current generator.
Activation of Test local device via operation:
DIGSI: Online access Interface Device Device Information
On-site operation panel: Main menu Device functions Line 1 Line differential protection
The following diagrams show potential variants on how to control binary inputs. If a control switch is used,
route the binary input >Test local device on as H (active with voltage) and the binary input
>Test local device off as L (active without voltage).
[loextta1-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-18 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device
Figure 6-19 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of the Local Device
Test of the Entire Differential Protection in All Devices

You can switch the test of the entire differential protection function in all devices on or off in the following way:
Via the operating dialog in DIGSI (online)
Via the on-site operation panel
Via the binary inputs >Test all devices on and >Test all devices off
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The indications Ctrl: Test all devices or BI: Test all devices display the source. If a test was
activated, the differential protection function in all devices operates in test mode. This is displayed with the
indications Test all devices activ as well as Behavior (Test Idiff) and Behavior (Test Idiff fast).
In this state the differential protection may be tested. All indications generated by the differential protection
are identified as Test. This prevents the automatic activation of the local circuit breakers. With this test, you
can verify the reaction of the differential protection with regard to setting changes before switching. Within
DIGSI the current operating point along the differential protection characteristic can also be checked.
NOTE
i The test of all devices cannot be set and will be rejected if the local differential protection functions are
already logged off.
Activation of Test all devices via operation:

DIGSI: Online access Interface Device Device Information
On-site operation panel: Main menu Device functions Line 1 Line differential protection
route the binary input >Test all devices on as H (active with voltage) and the binary input
>Test all devices off as L (active without voltage).
Figure 6-20 External Push-Button Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices
Figure 6-21 External Switch Wiring for Controlling the Test of All Devices
Checking the Differential and Restraint Current

You can check the differential and restraint current directly on the device or by means of DIGSI 5.
In order to find the differential and restraining current on the device, go to Operational measured values
Measurements Line 1 Functional measured values Differential protection.
When using the DIGSI 5 to check the differential and restraint current, the connection with the device must be
established first. To find the operational measured values of the line differential protection, go to Name of
device Measurements Line 1. While in the working area, the operational measured values of the function
can be found under Functional measured values Aligning differential protection.
In DIGSI 5 the operating points (OP) derived from the differential and restraint current can also be checked in
the graphic display of the differential protection characteristic curve. In order to find the differential protection
characteristic curve in DIGSI 5, go to the project tree Online device (Name of device) Test Suite Protec-
tion functions Line 1 Line differential protection. The operating points derived from the differential current
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
and the restraint current are graphically displayed in the differential protection characteristic curve (see the
following figure).
[dwueidif-191113-01, 1, en_US]
To ensure reliable operation of the line differential protection, the operating point must be located inside the
working area and clearly below the tripping lines.
If the differential current monitoring function is tripped or the operating point lies within the tripping area,
proceed as follows:
Check the pickup of value for stage Idiff.
Check the polarity of the current transformer.
Verify that the differential current is generated by the primary system. Did you consider the charging
current? It will be depicted as a permanent differential current.
If these were the causes of the differential current, the differential current can be generated by asynchro-
nous communication networks. Such asynchronicity can be created by linking a larger communication
networks.
Another cause of the differential current could be unbalances in the transit times for the protection
communication that have always existed but not been noticed. This means that the transit times for the
protection data back and forth are different, as a result of which the measured values received cannot be
synchronized perfectly. Hence, a differential current that will activate the operate function during
increased current flow will be calculated.
6.2.12 Logging Off the Local Line Differential Protection
For some applications it may be necessary to remove and log off the line differential protection from the total
topology of the line differential protection:
Maintenance work or system expansion
Testing the local line differential protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Before logging off, the feeder protected from the local line differential protection must be switched off.
The locally recorded current of the logged-off line end no longer flows into the sum. The summation of the
currents continues to work regularly in the remaining topology.
The logged-off local line differential protection can be activated for test purposes (see 6.2.11 Function Check
of the Line Differential Protection ). This has no influence or impact on the running protection interface
communication.
Logoff Options of the Line Differential Protection
Via the operating dialog in DIGSI or the on-site operation panel
Via communication through the controllable Function logoff
Via the binary inputs, general: >Function logoff on or >Function logoff off
route the binary input >Function logoff on as H (active with voltage) and the binary input
>Function logoff off as L (active without voltage).
[loexttx3-140311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-22 External Key Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
[loextsx4-020412-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-23 External Switch Wiring for Logging off the Local Line Differential Protection
Indications
The logged-off function reports the status (Function logged off) and the cause of the logoff (Logged
off via BI and Logged off via control).
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer the following logoff options:
Logoff of the local line differential protection
Logoff of the entire device
This functionality is defined to deactivate the protection functions before an unplanned switch-off of the device
(switch off supply voltage).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2.13 Transformer in the Protection Range
Mode of Operation
When using the optional function transformer (function of the differential protection), any random transformer
(two-winding transformer or multi-winding transformer) in the protected line structure can be considered. This
requires taking into account the topology data of the transformer which affect the magnitude and phase of the
differential current to be calculated. In this way, all measurands can be based on the rated data for the power
transformer. For each side of the transformer the rated apparent power of the transformer must be deter-
mined from the rated power and the rated voltage of the transformer side. Additionally, the respective vector
groups for current and voltage and the type of grounding of the transformer neutral point have to be entered.
Note that the same transformer parameters have to be set for all differential protection devices if they are
assigned to the same side from the transformer perspective!
Line Settings
First, enter the primary rated values of the transformer into the general line settings. These include the rated
apparent power and the winding-related phase-to-phase rated voltage.
1. First, enter the rated voltage of the transformer winding (side).
2. Subsequently, enter the rated current of the transformer winding. The rated current is obtained from the
rated apparent power and rated voltage.
Formula: Rated current = rated apparent power / (rated voltage * square root of 3)
To verify this, the resulting rated apparent power is indicated under the rated value of the line.
NOTE
i The rated apparent power must adopt the same value on all ends of the protected object, since it is the
basis for the current comparison of all ends.
In general, select the rated voltage of the winding facing the respective device. However, if a winding has a
voltage regulating range, do not use the rated voltage of the winding, but rather the voltage which corre-
sponds to the mean current of the regulating range. Thus, the fault currents are regulated to a minimum.
Example:
Transformer YNd5
35 MVA
110 kV/25 kV
Y-side regulated 10 %
For the regulated winding (110 kV) the following results:
Maximum voltage Vmax = 121 kV
Minimum voltage Vmin = 99 kV
It follows that the primary rated voltage that must be set is:
[fotfobsp-181010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Transformer Fault Settings

If the transformer winding has a voltage control range, additional current-proportional errors occur due to the
tap-changer switch position. These must be dealt with similar to transformer faults and must be considered
when setting the associated settings. Refer to the setting notes for current transformers.
Protection Settings
For verification purposes, the internally calculated rated apparent power will be displayed the same as a
parameter. The rated apparent power is the result of the rated values of the line settings.
Parameter: Voltage vector group nb.
Default setting (_:103) Voltage vector group nb. = 0

As a rule, the Voltage vector group nb. is set exactly the same as the Current vector group
nb.. If the vector group of the transformer is matched with external means, for example, because matching
transformers are present in the measuring circuit and are still to be used, set Current vector group nb.
= 0 for all ends. In this case, the differential protection works without a matching calculation of its own.
However, the measured voltages would then not be matched beyond the transformer and thus not calculated
and displayed correctly. The Voltage vector group nb. corrects this shortcoming. Here, specify the
actual vector group of the transformer according to the aspects mentioned previously.
The Current vector group nb. is therefore significant for the differential protection, while Voltage
vector group nb. is valid as the basis for calculating measuring voltages beyond the transformer.
Parameter: Current vector group nb.
Default setting (_:104) Current vector group nb. = 0

Current vector group nb. is the vector group of the transformer winding facing the device. The device
used at the reference side of the transformer, which is usually on the upper voltage side, has to keep the digit
0 (default). For the other windings, the corresponding vector group digit has to be stated.
Example: Transformer Yy6d5
The following is set on the Y-side: Current vector group nb. = 0
The following is set on the y-side: Current vector group nb. = 6
The following is set on the d-side: Current vector group nb. = 5
Parameter: Residual curr. elimination
Default setting (_:105) Residual curr. elimination = yes

By using the Residual curr. elimination parameter, fault currents that flow across the current trans-
former can be eliminated without special external measures (for example, during ground fault outside of the
protection range) due to the grounding within the protection range (for example, transformer neutral point, 3-
phase reactance coil, arc suppression coil).
[logfpaus-121210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-24 Ground Fault Outside of the Transformer
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes Active elimination of residual current:
Recommended for applications with neutral-point grounding of the trans-
former in the protection range. (transformer neutral point, grounding trans-
former, arc-suppression coil)
no No elimination of residual current:
Recommended for applications without any neutral point grounding of the
transformer in the protection range.
NOTE
i If elimination of the residual current is activated, and in case of ground faults, the differential protec-
tion becomes less sensitive by a factor of 1/3:
A higher degree of sensitivity is only possible through measurement of the grounded neutral-point
current of the transformer. This requires the installation of a current transformer in the neutral-point
supply of the transformer, whereby its measured current can be captured by a 1-phase current input
configured on the device.
6.2.13.3 Settings

Transformer
_:103 Transformer:Voltage vector 0 to 11 0
group nb.
_:104 Transformer:Current vector 0 to 11 0
group nb.
_:105 Transformer:Residual curr. no yes
elimination yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.2.14 Charging-Current Compensation
Logic of the Stage
[loladeko-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-25 Charging-Current Compensation
Mode of Operation
The charging-current compensation Ic-Compensat. is an optional function of the line differential protection. It
improves the sensitivity of the Idiff stage by compensating for the charging current caused by the capaci-
tances of the overhead line or the cable, flowing due to the ground capacitance of the line. Due to the capaci-
tances of the phases to ground or to each other, charging currents are flowing even in correct operation,
which cause a difference of the currents at the ends of the protection range. Especially in cables or long lines,
the capacitive charging currents can reach considerable magnitudes. If the feeder-side transformer voltages
are connected to the devices, the influence of the capacitive charging currents can largely be compensated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
for by calculation. It is possible here to use the charging current compensation which determines the actual
charging current. If there are 2 line ends, each device performs half the charging-current compensation.
When using M devices, each device assumes the M-th part .
[dwladko2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-26 Charging Current Compensation for a Two-Terminal Line (1-phase system)
For correct operation, stationary charging currents can be regarded as almost constant since they are only
determined by the voltage and line capacitances. Without charging current compensation, they must there-
fore be taken into account when setting the sensitivity of the differential protection. With charging current
compensation, this does not have to be taken into account here. With charging current compensation, the
stationary excitation currents are considered before quadrature-axis reactances. For transient inrush currents,
the devices are provided with separate inrush-current detection.
NOTE
i The charging current compensation requires that the local voltage transformers be connected!
If you use charging-current compensation, monitor the voltage is by means of the Measuring-voltage
failure detection function. If Measuring-voltage failure detection is not present in the Line function
group, add the function to the Line function group from the Global DIGSI 5 library.
If a transformer or common-mode reactors are located in the line section to be protected, charging
current compensation must not be activated!

The rated current Icrated is the capacitive charging current to be expected for the entire line and is the result
of the setting values of the following parameters:
Rated frequency of the device
Rated voltage of the line
Capacitance per unit length of the line
Overall length of the line (parameter of the charging-current compensation)

For verification purposes the rated charging-current is displayed under the parameters of the charging-current
compensation.
In the following cases, no charging current can be calculated:
The voltages are not connected.
The voltages are connected, but the internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker or
Measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.
If one of the 2 cases occurs, the charging-current compensation remains responsible for the line; however, it
must return to the conventional stabilization strategy (see parameter Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i The Idiff parameter must be increased to 2 to 3 times Ic rated before deactivating the charging-current
compensation (parameter Mode ), otherwise undesired tripping might occur.
NOTE
i The charging-current compensation requires the input of some supplementary parameter. This includes
the rated frequency, the rated voltage of the line, the line-related capacitance per unit length C1 per
length unit as well as the Total line length .
Parameter: Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated
Recommended setting value (_:101) Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated = 1.5

With the Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated parameter, the stabilization charging-current/rated-current ratio is
preset. This parameter is only activated during the loss or absence of voltage. It increases the normal stabili-
zation by one additive component (stabilization charging current), which is derived from the rated charging
current.
In case of loss or absence of voltage, Siemens recommends increasing the stabilization charging current by 2
or 3 times the value of the rated charging current. Here, an average value of 2.5 is selected. Since the recom-
mended setting of the parameters Idiff = 1 * Ic-rated of the charging current was already considered once, this
will result in a default setting of Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated = 1.5 for the additional stabilization.
Since the charging current of the device must only be considered for the respective portion of the line, each
device will in fact increase its normal stabilization by a value of Ic-stabilization/Ic-rated divided by
the number of devices.
Parameter: Total line length
Default setting (_:102) Total line length = 100.0 km

The parameter Total line length considers the entire length of the protected line (2 to 6 line ends) .
Thus, the overall capacity of the line and the resulting charging current of the line can be determined.
6.2.14.3 Settings

Ic compensat.
_:1 Ic compensat.:Mode off on
on
_:101 Ic compensat.:Ic-stabiliza- 1.0 to 4.0 1.5
tion/Ic-rated
_:102 Ic compensat.:Total line 0.1 km to 1000.0 km 100.0 km
length

(Type)
Ic compensat.
_:54 Ic compensat.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Ic compensat.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Ic compensat.:Health ENS O
_:300 Ic compensat.:I charge WYE O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.3 Stub Differential Protection
The Stub differential protection (ANSI 87STUB):

Is a selective, 2-step short-circuit protection for a line stub that can be tripped by a disconnector switch.
It is important in 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts.
Detects short circuits that lie between the current transformer and the feeder disconnector switch QB.
Operates strictly phase-segregated and permits 3-pole instantaneous high-speed tripping

The stub differential protection operates on the basis of current comparison. To do this, the current trans-
formers that selectively limit the line range are connected to the device using 2 configured, 3-phase current
measurement locations. The feedback of the disconnector's position (open) activates the stub differential
protection
[dwstubap-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-27 Stub Differential Protection on a 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
Embedding of the Function
[dwstubeb-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-28 Embedding the Stub Differential Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Mode of Operation
The stub-differential protection function is composed of the two stages: Stubdif and Stubdif fast. Both will also
be referred to in the following sections as function blocks. Both stages work in parallel and ensure high sensi-
tivity or fast tripping, depending on the severity of the fault. A release binary input ( >Release function )
switches the stub-differential protection to active. This binary input reports the position as open to the feeder
disconnector switch. The output signals of these stages are pickup and trip signals, which are routed to the
output logic, resulting in the corresponding protection indications.
Overall Logic
[lostubfx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-29 General Logic of the Stub Differential Protection
Adaptive Self-Stabilization
The basic principle of differential protection rests on the precondition that, during an uninterrupted operation,
the sum of all currents flowing into the protected object equal 0. Secondary currents detected by the device
are tainted with measuring errors that are caused by the transmission behavior of the current transformer and
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
the input circuits of the device. All these influences mean that even in healthy operation the sum of the
currents processed in the devices is not exactly 0. The differential protection is stabilized against these influ-
ences. A special method of adaptive self-stabilization is used in this context to ensure the highest possible
sensitivity of the differential protection.
The stabilization variables are calculated from the sum of the potential faults:
Istab = Threshold + (current transformer errors and other measuring errors).
If the measured differential current exceeds the pickup threshold and the maximum possible measuring error,
there is an internal error (shaded area in Figure 6-30). With the adaptive approach it is no longer necessary to
assign parameters for a characteristic curve.
[dwanstub-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-30 Tripping Characteristic of the Stub Differential Protection
Current-Transformer Faults
In order to take into account the influences of current-transformer faults, an adaptive self-stabilization value
Ierror is calculated for each measuring point. This is the result of the sum of all current-transformer errors,
which in turn are the result of the current-transformer data and the degree of currents measured on the trans-
former.
Figure 6-31 Approximation of the Current-Transformer Faults
The set parameters of the transformer data apply to the configured current inputs on the device.
Other Measuring Faults

Additional measuring faults will also be estimated by the device and local self-stabilizing variables will be
automatically increased.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Such measuring faults can be caused by

Hardware and computation tolerances by the device itself
Based on the Quality of the measurands such as harmonic components and frequency deviations.
Stages of the Stub Differential Protection

The stub differential protection consists of 2 stages.
The Stubdif stage works with very accurate measurement for maximum sensitivity.
The Stubdif fast stage works in parallel with the Stubdif stage. A very fast algorithm enables tripping
decisions to be made very quickly in the event of high-current faults.
Both stages will be activated via a release binary input that reports the stub's disconnector position (open).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.3.4 Stubdif Stage Description
Logic of the Stage
[lostubi1-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-32 Logic of the Stubdif Stage
Mode of Operation
The Stubdif stage is the sensitive stage of the stub-differential protection. It is based on the principle of
current phasor calculation. Usable current phasors are available after 1 period has elapsed following the
occurrence of a fault event. The Stubdif fast stage, which operates in parallel, is responsible for fast tripping
in the event of high-current errors.
All measurands are evaluated separately for each phase. The device calculates a differential current from the
sum of the current phasors on the measuring inputs. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault
current, which is detected by the differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
correct operation, it is small and corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approxima-
tion.
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
rated range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents of the current
transformer of the protected object.
Pickup of the Stage

The pickup characteristic of the stub differential protection (see Figure 6-33 ) results from the stabilization
characteristic curve Stubdif = Istab (45 line) which is cut below the setting value of the (_:8401:3)
Threshold parameter. It complies with the equation
Istab = Threshold + (current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
there is an internal error (shaded area in Figure 6-33 ).
Figure 6-33 Pickup Characteristic of the Stubdif Stage
Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions ( broken-wire detection , fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object (_:8401:53) Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents is
constantly monitored. If persistent faults are detected, (_:8401:53) Health is set to Alarm and (_:
8401:54) Inactive is set to Yes.
6.3.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stubdif Stage
Recommended setting value: (_:8401:3) Threshold = 0.300 A

The pickup threshold of the differential current is set using this parameter. The total current flowing into
the protection range during a short circuit is the important criterion. This is the overall fault current,
regardless how the ends of the protected object are divided.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Recommended setting value: (_:8401:6) Operate delay = 0.00 s

In special cases, it can be advantageous to delay the tripping of the stub differential protection with an
additional time stage, for example for reverse interlocking. The time delay is started when an internal
fault has been detected ((_:8401:55) Pickup).
6.3.6 Stubdif Fast Stage Description
Logic of the Stage
[lostubi2-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-34 Logic of the Stubdif Fast Stage
Mode of Operation
The Stubdif fast stage is optimized for fast operate times during high current faults. It is superimposed on the
Stubdif stage. The measurands are also analyzed separately for each phase. Fast tripping for high-current
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
errors is achieved with a procedure based on filtered instantaneous values. During this procedure, stabiliza-
tion to prevent signal distortion (for example, current-transformer saturation), which may occur during high
current external faults, is not possible. For this reason, a decision for internal or external faults must be made
prior to the entry of the potential saturation. It is assumed that the current transformers do not yet go into
saturation at least for the duration of one integration interval (5 ms) after fault inception.
Above a given passing current level (2.5pickup value, local measurement), the decision for external fault is
made automatically and the Stubdif fast stage is blocked. If saturation occurs with at least one of the current
transformers that limits the protection range, this blockage will remain. Thus, the difference generated by the
saturation will be eliminated. Normally, the Stubdif fast is set higher than the rated current. Otherwise, the
Stubdif fast stage works in the same way as the sensitive Stubdif stage. Each device calculates a differential
current for each phase from the sum of the filtered instantaneous values, which are calculated at each end of
the protected object. The sum of the differential current is equal to the fault current, which is detected by the
differential-protection system. Ideally, this is the short-circuit current. In correct operation, it is small and
corresponds to the capacitive charging current in lines in a first approximation.
measurands and the set substation settings. To do this, the maximum error of the current transformers in the
nominal range or the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the straight flowing currents on each end of
the protected object.
Pickup of the Stage

The pickup characteristic (see Figure 6-35 ) is derived, as for the Stubdif stage, from the stabilization charac-
teristic Stubdif = Istab (45 line), which is cut below the setting of the threshold value parameter. It complies
with the equation
Istab = Threshold + (current-transformer errors and other measuring errors).
there is an internal error (shaded area in Figure 6-35 ).
Figure 6-35 Pickup Characteristic of the Stubdif Fast Stage
Fault Behavior
If fast measured-value supervision functions ( broken-wire detection , fast sum I, analog-digital converter)
report a fault, the object Health will be set to Alarm. The validity of the used currents is constantly moni-
tored. If persistent faults are detected, Health is set to Alarm and Inactive is set to Yes.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.3.7 Application and Setting Notes for the Stubdif Fast Stage
Recommended setting value: (_:8431:3) Threshold = 1.000 A

This parameter sets the pickup threshold of the differential current, which must be primarily equal on all
ends of the protection object.
This stage responds very quickly. For this reason, pickup during capacitive charging currents and induc-
tive magnetization currents (for transformers or shunt reactors) including during switching procedures -
must be excluded. The pickup value should be set higher than the load current (max. 1.2IN to 2IN).
6.3.8 Stage Description of the Output Logic
Output Logic
[lostubag-150211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-36 Output Logic
6.3.9 Settings

General
on
test
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Stub DIFF
_:8401:1 Stub DIFF:Mode off on
on
test
_:8401:2 Stub DIFF:Operate & no no
_:8401:3 Stub DIFF:Threshold 1A 0.100 A to 20.000 A 0.300 A
5A 0.50 A to 100.00 A 1.50 A
_:8401:6 Stub DIFF:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
Stub DIFF fast
_:8431:1 Stub DIFF fast:Mode off on
on
test
_:8431:2 Stub DIFF fast:Operate & no no
_:8431:3 Stub DIFF fast:Threshold 1A 0.800 A to 100.000 A 1.000 A
5A 4.00 A to 500.00 A 5.00 A

(Type)
Group indicat.
General
_:2311:500 General:>Release function SPS I
Stub DIFF
_:8401:81 Stub DIFF:>Block stage SPS I
_:8401:54 Stub DIFF:Inactive SPS O
_:8401:52 Stub DIFF:Behavior ENS O
_:8401:53 Stub DIFF:Health ENS O
_:8401:55 Stub DIFF:Pickup ACD O
_:8401:57 Stub DIFF:Operate ACT O
_:8401:300 Stub DIFF:I diff. WYE O
_:8401:301 Stub DIFF:I restr. WYE O
Stub DIFF fast
_:8431:81 Stub DIFF fast:>Block stage SPS I
_:8431:54 Stub DIFF fast:Inactive SPS O
_:8431:52 Stub DIFF fast:Behavior ENS O
_:8431:53 Stub DIFF fast:Health ENS O
_:8431:55 Stub DIFF fast:Pickup ACD O
_:8431:57 Stub DIFF fast:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
The Restricted ground-fault protection function (ANSI 87N):

Detects ground faults in transformers, shunt reactors, neutral reactors or rotating machinery in which the
neutral point is grounded.
Has high sensitivity to ground faults near the neutral point.
Is supplemental main protection to longitudinal differential protection.
Protects grounding transformers in the protection range. It is required that a current transformer be used
in the case of neutral point feed, that is, between neutral point and grounding conductor. The neutral
point transformer and the phase current transformer define the protection range.
Adapts itself to the highest-amperage side with auto transformers and thereby prevents overfunction in
the event of external ground faults.
The Restricted ground-fault protection function is used in the Transformer side or Auto transformer protection
function group. Furthermore, you can use the function in the stabilizing winding of the auto transformer or
also in the Standard UI function. The function depends upon application in the corresponding application
template preconfigured by the manufacturer or can be copied during the engineering into the corresponding
function group.
The Restricted ground-fault protection function is stepless.
[dwstrupt-170712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Function
[loreffkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-38 Logic Diagram of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection Function
The protection function processes the neutral-point current I0* (exactly 3I0) and the calculated residual current
I0** (exactly 3I0) from the phase currents (see following figure). The protection range extends exclusively over
the transformer winding, including current transformer. The amount-adapted (compensated) currents are
described by the * symbol. They are normalized to the rated object current of the respective side.
In case of an internal ground fault, the residual currents flow to the fault location. With an external ground
fault, the fault current inverts itself in the phase current transformers. In this way, the direction of current flow
serves as the decisive criterion for an internal fault.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwgrdpri-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-39 Basic Principle of the Function
In accordance with the logic diagram, Figure 6-38 the protection function consists of 3 parts:
Effect of Pickup Value

The differential current and the restraint current are calculated from the residual currents. The counting
arrows are defined as positive when pointing to the protected object (see Figure 6-39 ). Consider that the
ground current in the fault record and in the DIGSI 5 Test Suite are displayed as positive if the current flows
to ground from the protection device.
NOTE
i The following calculation applies to the configurations with a current transformer for the side. In a special
case of several current transformers per side, the calculation of the restraint current must be performed in
greater detail.
I 0* = km 3 I 0'
I 0** = km 3 I 0'' 3 I 0'' = I A + I B + I C
with km = Irated,transformer/Irated,side
IDiff,REF = | I 0* + I 0**|
Irest,REF = | I 0*| + | I A| + | I B| + | I C|
where:
3 I 0' Measured residual current at neutral point
3 I 0'' Residual current calculated from the phase currents
km Factor for amount adaptation (compensation)
Irated,trans- Primary transformer rated current
former
Irated,side Primary rated current of the transformer side

IDiff,REF Differential current
Irest,REF Restraint current
Using the calculated restraint current, a current IChar. which represents the pickup value for the tripping is
determined from the characteristic curve ( Figure 6-40 ). In this way, the protection function is stabilized in the
event of external, multiphase ground faults, for example, a 2-pole ground fault. This means that the protection
function becomes less sensitive.
If the Slope = 0 is set here, the set Threshold of the operate curve is delivered independent of the
restraint current.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwstabke-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-40 Stabilized Characteristic Curve
Processing a Ground Side for Auto Transformer

Instead of a 1-phase neutral point, with an auto transformer a 3-phase ground side can also be used.
[dwautraf-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-41 Connecting a Ground Side on the Auto Transformer
In this case the neutral-point current calculates as sum of the phase currents of the ground side:
I0* = km 3I0' 3I0' = Ignd,A + Ignd,B + Ignd, C
with km = Irated,transformer/Irated,side
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following applies for the restraint current:

The following applies for the restraint current: Irest.,REF = |Ignd,A| + |Ignd,B| + |Ignd,C| + |IA| + |IB| + |IC|
NOTE
i If both 1-phase neutral point and 3-phase ground side are connected, only the 1-phase neutral point is
used by the restricted ground-fault protection. The 3-phase ground side is not considered.
Pickup
If the calculated differential current IDiff,REF exceeds the calculated current Ichar. curve (see Figure 6-38 ), pickup
occurs and the internal processing is enabled. The pickup is indicated.
Operate Curve
The operate curve represented in the following figure consists of 2 parts. In the right part of the characteristic
curve, you will find a case of an internal ground fault. Under ideal conditions, the angle between the two
residual currents (( I 0*, I 0**)) equals 0. With current-transformer saturation, angle errors can result. The
right part of the characteristic curve is valid for angles 90. The tripping current is the current flowing at the
neutral point ( I 0*). It is compared to the set or increased threshold value.
[dwausken-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-42 Operate Curve Depending on the Phase Angle between l0* and I0** at |I0*| = |I0**| (180 =
External Fault)
In case of an external ground fault the residual current calculated from the phase currents reverses by 180.
The phase angle between the residual currents thus (( I 0*, I 0**)) equals 180. They are located in the left
part of the operate curve and recognize a clearly increased pickup value. Angle deviations of 180 are caused
by transformer saturation in conjunction with external short-circuits.
The current Iangle,REF for the Angle Decision is determined from the following subtraction and totaling:
Iangle,REF = | I 0* - I 0**| - | I 0* + I 0**|
The resulting current Iangle,REF results from the respective fault conditions, which are illustrated in the following
figure. With an internal fault (angle = 0) a current results that has a negative sign. If angle errors occur, the
sign remains negative. The amount of the current decreases.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In an external short-circuit (180), the current becomes positive. At a smaller angle (<180) due to transformer
saturation, the angle remains positive. The amount also decreases.
[dwwinken-011112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-43 Angle Decision in Internal and External Faults
For tripping to occur, the neutral-point current I 0* must reach the value I REF,off. The characteristic curve in the
left part of the figure can be determined from the following relationship:
I REF,off = Ichar. curve + k Iangle,REF
where:
Ichar. curve Pickup value resulting from the pickup value increase
k Factor (permanently set to 4.05657. With this value, the limit angle at | I 0*| = | I 0**| is
precisely 100. No tripping is possible from this angle on.)
Processing of Several Measuring Points on One Side

If several measuring points are present on one side of a star winding, as with a 1 1/2 circuit-breaker applica-
tion, the angle decision occurs separately for each measuring point. The maximum current Iangle,REF is used to
establish the tripping decision.
NOTE
i With an external fault, the current I angle,REF is always > 0.
The following figure shows the behavior under different fault conditions.
Also observe that the restraint current (Irest.,REF) always results from the sum of all currents (phase currents of
the measuring points and the neutral-point current). For pickup, the differential current IDiff,REF is necessary.
This differential current results from the geometric sum of all adapted residual currents. The residual currents
of the measuring points on the outgoing side and of the neutral-point current are meant here.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwfehler-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-44 Behavior under Different Fault Conditions
NOTE
i The following conditions must be observed when setting the threshold values:
Threshold value max { 0.05 I/Irated,S ; 0.05 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object }
Threshold value min { 2.00 I/Irated,S ; 100.00 I/Irated,S * Iprim transf. max / Irated, protected object}
The value 0.05 I/Irated,S is the minimum possible setting value and 2.00 I/Irated,S the
maximum possible. Iprim,transf. max is the largest transformer current and Irated,protected object the protected object
rated current. 100.00 I/Irated,S is the upper measurement limit.
If otherwise it could happen that there is chattering of the pickup indication, the minimum threshold limit is
lifted. The maximum limit on the other hand is corrected downward, if the exceeding current otherwise
through the magnitude scaling must be so large, that it would already be outside of the measuring range of
the transformer.
The adaptation of the setting limits is done automatically. In addition a setting is prevented outside of these
limits.
In the following, typical applications are described for the restricted ground-fault protection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Protection of a Solidly Grounded Star Winding (Y Side)
[dwanster-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-45 Application Star Side
This application is a standard application. Here the phase currents of one side and the neutral-point current
are processed. The function is located in the Transformer Side function group.
The following figure show the structural division of the function. The restricted ground-fault protection gets its
measurands from the current transformers, which are connected to the Transformer side function group. The
neutral-point current is guided via the Transformer neutral point function group to the Transformer side func-
tion group. To be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 (including reference arrow definition of the restricted ground-
fault protection), in addition to the magnitude scaling of the neutral-point current, a rotation of the polarity
(phase rotation by 180) is also done in the Transformer neutral point function group.
NOTE
i The fault record indicates the analog traces according to the connection. For this reason the neutral-point
current is shown rotated by 180 in comparison to SIPROTEC 4.
[dw2wtyde-201112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-46 Function Group Structure of the Restricted Ground-Fault Protection
Explanations on the Connection and Current-Direction Definition
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Uniform reference arrows and transformer burdens are defined for the SIPROTEC 5 device series. These
agreements also apply to the transformer protection devices. The special handling of the neutral-point current
described previously is a result of this.
The current definition states that the sum of the currents flowing into the protected object is equal to 0 ( I A + I
B + I C + I N = 0 or I A + I B + I C = - I N). The protected object is located to the right or left of the transformer set.
The following basic connections result from this.
[tileite2-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-47 Current Transformer Connection (1) According to Definition
or
Figure 6-48 Current-Transformer Connection (2) According to Definition
The following connection is defined for the transformer according to Figure 6-49 . The current flow for an
external ground fault is entered at the same time. It is recognized that the secondary currents each flow from
the device. From this, a differential current (Idiff,REF = | I Y + I A + I B + I C| = | - I 4 - I 3|) results, according to the
reference arrow definition for the restricted ground-fault protection (positive to the protected object) with an
external ground fault. To prevent that, the neutral-point current is rotated in the Transformer neutral-point
function group. It follows that: IDiff, REF = | I 4 I 3| = 0.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i If the neutral-point current is included in the protection function (zero-sequence current correction), this
rotation also has an effect for the differential protection.
[dwstwnas-281112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-49 Current Transformer Connection on the Transformer
The setting of the 1-phase measuring point based on the definition is done as follows:
[scedsall-200214-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-50 DIGSI 5 Setting
The point in Figure 6-49 describes the polarity of the current transformer. At the same time the current
terminal is designed so that this side is fed out on an odd number terminal point. Since in the SIPROTEC 5
system each current transformer can be assigned a 1-phase measuring point, the odd number terminal points
are named in the setting parameters. According to Figure 6-49 the setting must be yes.
Default setting (_:115) terminal 1,3,5,7 in dir.obj.= yes
The following view can be used to derive the threshold value. The transformer is supplied, for example, via
the delta winding and a 1-pole ground fault occurs on the star side.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i For estimation of the short-circuit current, note that the inductance changes quadratically with the winding
and the linearly with the voltage.
The right part in the following figure represents the fault current as a function of the fault location. The fault
current curve F1 shows that the longitudinal differential protection with faults near the neutral point has sensi-
tivity problems due to the sinking current. On the other hand, the neutral-point current F2 is sufficiently large.
There is therefore no need to set the Threshold (current through the neutral point transformer) to sensitive.
[dwf1pole-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-51 Principal Fault Current Curves with a 1-Pole Ground Fault
Recommended setting value (_:103) Threshold = 0.2 I/Irated,S

The previously mentioned condition must be maintained during the setting.
[foschwe1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following lower limiting value results from the data from Figure 6-45 :
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The recommended setting value of 0.2 I/Irated,S lies above it.

Recommended setting value (_:105) Slope = 0.07
You can stabilize the protection function (less sensitive setting) with external multiphase short-circuits to
ground with the parameter Slope . To determine the setting value, no pickup value increase can occur up to
the rated current. After this, the gradient must be active. To derive the gradient, it is assumed that continua-
tion of the straight line must go through the coordinate origin (see Figure 6-52 ). Determine the intersection
from the threshold value and the restraint current at rated current. Calculate the gradient as follows:
[fostbref-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwsteiga-221012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-52 Derivation of the Setting Value for the Gradient
If you have several measuring points on an outgoing side (see Figure 6-44 ), Siemens recommends using the
value 3 I/Irated,S in the intersection calculation for the restraint current. In the load case, the maximum trans-
former rated current flows on one side.
If, however, several measuring points are on the supply side (for example, breaker-and-a-half layout),
Siemens recommends including all phase currents in the intersection calculation, in order to avoid too strong
of a stabilization. With 2 measuring points, a value of 6 I/Irated,S results as intersection with the threshold
value. The slope becomes flatter (0.2 I/Irated,S/6 I/Irated,S = 0.03).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Protection of an Auto Transformer
[dwsptran-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-53 Activation and Application Example of an Auto Transformer (500 MVA: 400 kV, 230 kV;
125 MVA: 34.5 kV)
Use the highest side rated current with the auto transformer for normalization. In the example ( Figure 6-53 ),
the measuring point is M2 (230 kV side). For this side, a rated current of 500 MVA/((3) 230 kV) = 1255 A
results. The primary transformer rated current is 1500 A. With this, you can estimate the minimum permissible
pickup value.
[foscwe01-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Siemens recommends a setting value of 0.2 I/Irated,S.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
To determine the Slope , the restraint current of both sides (400 kV and 230 kV) must be used. The rated
current is used as starting value for the gradient. Since side 2 (230 kV) is the reference side for the normali-
zation, the value of the 400 kV side must be adapted to this rated current. The adaptation factor results from
the inverse ratio (230 kV/400 kV). The following restraint current goes into the calculation:
[fostbrst-231012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Siemens recommends using the setting 0.07.

Protection of a Resistance-Grounded Star Winding (Y Side)
[dwrefspa-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-54 Application with Resistance-Grounded Neutral Point
To also capture faults in the resistance to ground, a current transformer must be installed at the neutral point
of the protected object (see Figure 6-54 ). The pickup values can be derived from the data in the example. As
side rated value, the following results:
140 MVA/(3 20 kV) = 4042 A
The following threshold value results as lower limit:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
So that the function is responsive, select a setting value of 0.08 I/Irated,S.

As gradient, the following results:
[fosteig1-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Because of the grounding resistance RE reduced protection range results. This can be estimated as follows:
The grounding resistance is much larger than the winding reactance, thus the following maximum ground
current results:
IGnd max = 20 kV/(3 12 ) = 962 A
You can determine the minimum tripping current from the setting value:
IGnd min = side rated current * threshold value = 4042 A 0.08 = 323 A
Thus, the following protection range results:
The attainable protection range amounts to approx. 66.4 %. In order to capture ground faults near the neutral
point, it is also recommended to connect a sensitive ground current protection to the neutral point trans-
former. You must coordinate its operate time with the line protection.
NOTE
i Ensure that the protection range further limits itself with larger neutral-point resistances, or the restricted
ground-fault protection can no longer be used.
Protection with Neutral Reactors on the Delta Side

To produce ground currents on the delta side of a transformer, neutral reactors (zigzag reactors) are used. A
resistance for ground current limitation can also be present. In this case, the resistance is much greater than
the reactor and delta reactance of the transformer. The following figure shows a typical implementation. The
restricted ground-fault protection works between output-sided phase current transformers and the current
transformer in the neutral point of the neutral reactor.
In the example, the fault current curve with the ground fault in a delta winding is also represented. The fault
location in which the lowest fault current flows can also be seen. This current influences the protection setting
set close.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwstrpkt-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-55 Application with Neutral Reactor
As side rated value, the following results:

140 MVA/(3 34.4 kV) = 2343 A
You can thus define the lower limit for the threshold value:
If the fault is in the middle of the winding, the minimum ground current will arise, as shown in Figure 6-55 .
The driving voltage is:
VGnd min = Vrated,S2/(2 3) = 34.5 kV/(2 3) = 9.96 kV
The following minimum ground current results:
IGnd min = VGnd min/RGnd = 9.96 kV/19.05 = 523 A
With reference to the side rated current, the relationship is:
IGnd min/Irated,S = 523 A/2343 A = 0.223
With a safety margin of 2, 0.223/2 = 0.1115 results. Select this value as threshold value (rounded: 0.12 I/
Irated,S).
As gradient, the following results:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fosteig2-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Protection of a Shunt Reactor
[dwanquer-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-56 Application with Neutral Reactor
As side rated value, the following results:

10 MVA/(3 132 kV) = 43.7 A
You can thus define the lower limit for the threshold value:
Select 0.35 I/Irated,S as threshold value.

For the shunt reactor, there is no external fault that can lead to overfunction. Siemens recommends a
minimum rise (0.05).
6.4.5 Settings

(Type)
87N REF #
_:82 87N REF #:>Block function SPS I
_:54 87N REF #:Inactive SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:52 87N REF #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 87N REF #:Health ENS O
_:55 87N REF #:Pickup ACD O
_:57 87N REF #:Operate ACT O
_:303 87N REF #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:305 87N REF #:Block by direct. det. SPS O
_:306 87N REF #:I REF,operate MV O
_:307 87N REF #:I Angle,REF MV O
_:311 87N REF #:I REF,Trip operate MV O
_:312 87N REF #:I angle,REF operate MV O
_:301 87N REF #:I diff. MV O
_:302 87N REF #:I restr. MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.5 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD)
The Distance protection with reactance method (RMD) function (ANSI 21/21 N):
Is a selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more ends in radial,
looped, or meshed systems,
Is used as a backup protection for busbars, transformers, and other lines
Works only in systems with a grounded neutral point
Is suitable for use at all voltage levels

Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The Distance
protection with reactance method (RMD) function reduces the unfavorable influence of high fault resistances
at high loads. If the electrical power system shows inhomogeneities, for example, different impedance angles
of the infeeds, the reach of the distance protection can be affected. The reactance method compensates this
influence via adjustable compensation angles.
The RMD function can be placed in function groups that provide voltage and current measured values as well
as line parameters.
The RMD function consists of the following blocks:
General
Ground-fault detection
Adaptive loop selection
Distance zones (preconfigured quadrilateral characteristic curve)
AREC zone (not preconfigured)
Direction determination
Output logic
The RMD function is preconfigured with 4 zones. The zones are structured identically.
[dwstrdisrmd, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Mode of Operation
The RMD function monitors the phase current. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current
thresh, the impedances of the 3 phase-to-phase loops and the positive-sequence loop (phase-to-phase-to-
phase) are calculated.
Ground-fault detection checks whether any ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault is detected, the impe-
dances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
The calculated impedance is assigned to the operate curve (quadrilateral characteristic curve) of the zones.
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the positive-sequence impedance is reflected in the operate
curve of the distance protection. For this case, a load cutout can be configured that eliminates unwanted
pickups due to overload. You can find the description of the settings in chapter 6.5.3 Application and Setting
Notes - General Settings .
For all picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The adaptive loop selection determines which loops
are actually selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops
are not considered by the adaptive loop selection. You can find more detailed information in chapter
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection .
For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic forms the pickup and trip
signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the
zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
Ground-Fault Detection
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the phase-
to-ground measurement loops are released.
For ground-fault detection, the following criteria are available:
Monitoring of the zero-sequence current 3I0
Monitoring of the zero-sequence voltage V0
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-58 ). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero voltage increases. If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion for ground-fault detection must
be met. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary zero-sequence current without a
primary zero-sequence current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of current-
transformer saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detection.
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
[logroundfault RMD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-58 Logic of the Ground-Fault Detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Distance Zones
For each zone, an operate curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
Quadrilateral characteristic
You can set the zones as basic or as advanced zone. With the parameter Advanced, you are provided
with additional settings in the zone. This allows you to adapt the zone better to the specific conditions.
You can find the description in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes .
MHO characteristic curve

The description begins in chapter 6.5.9.1 Description .
Direction Determination
You can define for each zone whether the zone should work forwards, backwards, or non-direc-
tional. For directional zones, you define the direction in the R-X plane. When assigning the impedance
phasors in the R-X plane, the direction is analyzed additionally.
You can find the description of the direction determination in chapter 6.5.7 Direction Determination.
Adaptive Loop Selection

The RMD function works with adaptive loop selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed and
weighted at the same time. You can find the description of the properties of the different criteria in chapter
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection .
Output Logic
The output logic of the RMD function links the output information of the zones. The output logic forms the
accumulative pickup indications and operate indications of the function. You can find the description of the
output logic in chapter 6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection .
6.5.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings
In the General function block of the RMD function, you set the following parameters. The setting values are
valid for all zones in the distance protection.
Parameter: Zone timer start
Recommended setting value (_:2311:110) Zone timer start = on dist. pickup

The Zone timer start parameter is used to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. If the
fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays continue
to run.
Siemens recommends using this setting.
on zone pickup The time delay for the zone starts with zone pickup.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent-
time protection functions, select this setting.
Parameter: V0> threshold value
Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) V0> threshold value = 1.667 V

The V0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence voltage limit for ground-fault
detection.
For ground faults in a grounded system, there is a zero-sequence voltage. The zero-sequence voltage drops
as the distance between the fault location and the measuring point increases. Siemens recommends keeping
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
the default setting of 1.667 V. If power-system unbalances can cause higher zero-sequence voltages to
occur during operation, you may increase the default setting.
Parameter: Parallel-line compensat.
Default setting: (_:2311:105) Parallel-line compensat. = no

The Parallel-line compensat. parameter is used to determine for double circuit lines whether you wish
to take into account the influence of the coupling impedance on the loop impedance or not.
NOTE
i You see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line is
available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
Parameter: Min. phase-current thresh
Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.100 A

Set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter to a very sensitive value (10 % of Irated). If the minimum
phase current is exceeded, the distance protection calculates the impedance. The sensitive setting allows
you to ensure the backup function of the distance protection in case of remote faults in other feeders. If the
minimum phase current in some short circuits depending on system conditions is not exceeded, you will
have to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens recommends using the default setting Min.
phase-current thresh = 0.10 A.
NOTE
i If you have set the parameter Zone settings = Basic in a zone, the zone works with the following
parameters of the function (from the function block General):
(_:2311:130) RF (ph-g)
(_:2311:131) RF (ph-ph)
(_:2311:132) Substitute for IF
(_:2311:134) Comp. angle zero seq.
(_:2311:135) Comp. angle neg. seq.
(_:2311:145) Delta Dist. charact. angle

You can find the description of the parameters in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Use load cutout
Default setting (_:2311:106) Use load cutout=no

With the Use load cutout parameter, you determine if you want to cut out a load cutout from the operate
curve in the R-X plane or not. You can set the load cutout for both directions, forward only, or
reverse only.
Load Cutout
The load cutout parameters are only visible if you set the parameter (_:2311:106) Use load cutout =
forward only, reverse only or both directions.
You set the load cutout using the following parameters:
Default setting (_:2311:107) R load cutout = 2.500
Default setting (_:2311:108) Angle load cutout = 45.0
The load cutout applies only for the positive-sequence loops (phase-phase-phase-loop).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance zone. The
zone may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific application, calcu-
late the smallest load impedance and the greatest load-impedance angle under heavy load (see the following
example).
[dwlastke-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-59 The Load Cutout Acts only on the Positive-Sequence Loop
The R value should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of load-cutout parameters in balanced load conditions
110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the following data:
Maximum transmittable power
Pmax = 100 MVA
Imax = 525 A
Minimum operating voltage
Vmin = 0.9 Vrated
Current transformer 600 A/5 A
Voltage transformer 110 kV/0.1 kV
The primary minimum load impedance is then calculated as follows:
[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]
The secondary minimum load impedance is then:
[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout = 0.9 108.9 = 98 or
Secondary: R load cutout = 0.9 11.9 = 10.7
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameter Angle load cutout) greater (approx. 5) than the
maximum occurring load angle (corresponding to the minimum power factor cos ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load cos = 0.8
max = 36.9
Setting value Angle load cutout = max + 5 = 41.9
You can find additional setting instructions in the example application beginning in chapter 6.5.11.1 Overview.
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following settings will be visible:
Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
Cross polarization(ph-ph)
The settings apply to all MHO zones!
Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-ph)
Default setting (_:2311:112) Mem. polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %

With the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with a
buffered voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO characteristic
curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without
extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.
Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-ph)
Default setting (_:2311:114) Cross polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %

With the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.
6.5.4 Settings

General
_:2311:110 General:Zone timer start on zone pickup on dist. pickup
on dist. pickup
_:2311:102 General:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 1.667 V
value
_:2311:105 General:Parallel-line no no
compensat. yes
_:2311:101 General:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A 0.100 A
current thresh 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:130 General:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:2311:131 General:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.250
_:2311:132 General:Substitute for IF 3I2 3I0
3I0
_:2311:134 General:Comp. angle -40.00 to 40.00 0.00
zero seq.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

neg. seq.
_:2311:136 General:Delta Dist. 0.00 to 80.00 0.00
charact. angle
_:2311:106 General:Use load cutout no no
both directions
forward only
reverse only
_:2311:107 General:R load cutout 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:2311:108 General:Angle load 20.0 to 60.0 45.0
cutout

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
_:4501:301 Group indicat.:Selected loop AG ACD O
_:4501:302 Group indicat.:Selected loop BG ACD O
_:4501:303 Group indicat.:Selected loop CG ACD O
_:4501:304 Group indicat.:Selected loop AB ACD O
_:4501:305 Group indicat.:Selected loop BC ACD O
_:4501:306 Group indicat.:Selected loop CA ACD O
6.5.6 Adaptive Loop Selection
In systems with effective or impedance grounded neutral point, each contact of a phase with ground is a
short-circuit. The closest protection equipment must switch off the fault immediately.
With the distance protection with reactance method (RMD), 7 line loops are calculated (3 ph-gnd loops, 3 ph-
ph loops, 1 positive-sequence loop). Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-circuited lines also
influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-circuit current in line
A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B, C-A, and A-B-C. The ground current is
also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called apparent impe-
dances occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop.
For double phase-to-ground faults, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the
same direction, this can also lead to pick up in the associated phase-to-phase loop.
With a symmetrical load and 3-phase short circuits, the positive-sequence loop (phase-phase-phase-loop) is
evaluated. In this case, the pickup is reported via the 3 phase-to-phase-loops. If a ground fault is detected,
the phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The RMD function works with adaptive loop selection. Different loop-selection criteria are processed and
weighted at the same time. The following table shows the different criteria and their properties:
Criterion Property
Current level The criterion is based on the assumption that the current in the short-
circuited loops increases in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the current
RMS value to the rated current provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Voltage level The criterion is based on the assumption that the voltage in the short-
circuited loops collapses in case of a short circuit. The ratio of the voltage
RMS value to the rated voltage provides information on the type of the short
circuit.
Delta current level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the current are used. The
following delta variables are formed:
Difference between the actual RMS value and a saved value
Difference between the present instantaneous value and the previous
instantaneous value before a nominal period in the past
Difference between the instantaneous phasor values and a saved
value
The magnitude of the calculated delta variables provides information on the
type of the short circuit.
Delta voltage level With this criterion, the so-called delta variables of the voltages are used.
The following delta variables are formed:
Difference between the actual RMS value and a saved value
Difference between the present instantaneous value and the previous
instantaneous value before a nominal period in the past
Difference between the instantaneous phasor values and a saved
value
The magnitude of the calculated delta variables provides information on the
Impedance The criterion calculates impedances for all short-circuit loops. The ratio of
the lowest impedance value to the individually calculated loop impedance
provides information on the type of the short circuit.
Symmetrical components The criterion is based on the symmetrical components. The ratio between
zero, negative and positive-sequence indicator provides information on the
Jump detection The criterion is a logical criterion that has current and voltage jumps as
input variables. A conclusion about the type of the short circuit is drawn on
the basis of the logical operation of the existing current and voltage jumps.
Checking the loops with the adaptive loop selection ensures selectivity in a reliable way. The loop selected by
the criteria leads to a pickup only when the loop impedance is within the pickup range.
This eliminates healthy apparent impedances on the one hand, but on the other hand simultaneously detects
unbalanced multiphase short circuits and multiple faults correctly. The loops found valid are converted into
phase information. This allows the pickup to be signaled in a phase-selective manner.
6.5.7 Direction Determination
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop. The direction of the
short circuit is determined using different methods. The methods are processed and weighted at the same
time. The following table shows the different input variables of the methods and their properties:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Input Variables for Direction Property

Determination
Current, actual short-circuit This method determines the ratio between the instantaneous voltage
voltage phasor and the instantaneous current phasor.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the short
circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selec-
tive.
Saved, actual short-circuit The method determines the ratio between the saved voltage phasor and the
voltage instantaneous current phasor. The voltage phasor adapted to the instanta-
neous phase position is used.
circuit. It is the preferred application for series-compensated systems. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.
Instantaneous quadrature The method determines the ratio between the instantaneous healthy
voltage voltage phasor turned by 90 and the instantaneous current phasor.
Figure 6-60 Direction Determination with Quadrature Voltages

circuit. The method functions only with 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits
without ground contact, and is loop-selective.
Saved quadrature voltage The method determines the ratio between the saved healthy voltage phasor
turned by 90 and the instantaneous current phasor.
circuit. The method functions only with 1-phase and 2-phase short circuits
without ground contact, and is loop-selective.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Input Variables for Direction Property

Determination
Delta variables The direction determination with delta variables works with statistical or
dynamic delta variables.
Direction determination with statistical delta variables:
The method uses the delta phasors of the current and the voltage. The
delta phasors of the current and the voltage are calculated from the
difference between the instantaneous actual phasor and the phasor
saved before the fault.
The ratio between the delta voltage phasor and the delta current
phasor provides information on the direction of the short circuit. The
method functions with all short-circuit types and is loop-selective.
Direction determination with dynamic delta variables:
The method uses the sampled delta values of the current and the
voltage. The sampled delta values of the current and voltage are
calculated from the difference between the instantaneous measured
sampled value and the sampled value recorded before the system
period. The product of the delta current and the delta voltage is inte-
grated.
The result of the integration provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. The method functions with all short-circuit types and is
loop-selective.
Symmetrical components The direction determination is based on the symmetrical components.
The direction determination with zero-sequence variables determines
the zero-sequence impedance from the voltage and current phasors of
the zero-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. The method functions only with short circuits that have
ground contact and is not loop-selective.
The direction determination with negative-sequence variables deter-
mines the negative-sequence impedance from the voltage and current
phasors of the negative-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction of the
short circuit. It is the preferred application for short circuits during
power swing. It functions only with non-symmetrical short circuits and
is not loop-selective.
Delta positive-sequence varia- The direction determination with delta positive-sequence variables deter-
bles mines the ratio between the delta voltage phasor and the delta current
phasor of the positive-sequence system.
The calculated impedance provides information on the direction. It functions
with all short-circuit types and is not loop-selective.
Direction-Characteristic Curve
The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-61 .
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
The source impedance
The power transported on the line before occurrence of the short circuit
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve (forwards) has a reserve distance to the limits of the 1st
quadrant in the R-X diagram:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwritg kl disrm, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-61 Direction-Characteristic Curve in the R-X Diagram
(1) Also valid for non-directional
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward, or non-directional, different (reflected through the center)
direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. The entire tripping range applies to it.
Features of Direction Determination

The theoretical steady-state direction-characteristic curve in Figure 6-61 applies to actual short-circuit
voltages.
Figure 6-62 shows the direction-characteristic curve, taking the source impedance into consideration for
external short-circuit or buffered voltages (without load transport). Since these voltages are equal to the
corresponding generator voltage E, and they also do not change after a short circuit occurs, the direction-
characteristic curve appears in the impedance diagram shifted by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For
fault location F1 ( Figure 6-62 a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in
the reverse direction. For all fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer),
the short-circuit direction is clearly detected as forward ( Figure 6-62 b). If the current reverses, the orientation
of the direction-characteristic curve changes suddenly ( Figure 6-62 c). A reversed current I2 now flows
through the measuring point (current transformer). The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the value of
I2. During load transport on the line, the direction-characteristic curve can also rotate by the load angle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-62 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Quadrature or Buffered Voltages
Direction Determination for Series-Compensated Lines

The direction-characteristic curves and their shift by the source impedance also apply for lines with series
capacitors. For a short circuit upstream of the local series capacitor, however, the short-circuit voltage
reverses if the protective spark gap SF has not picked up (see Figure 6-63 ).
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-63 Voltage Drop for a Short Circuit behind a Series Capacitor
(1) Without pickup of the protective spark gap

(2) With pickup of the protective spark gap
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. In this case as well, however, direction measure-
ment is correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-64 a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus, depending on the
source impedance and the load conditions before the occurrence of the fault, the peaks of the direction-char-
acteristic curves appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of
direction (see Figure 6-64 b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction (see
Figure 6-64 c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-64 Direction-Characteristic Curves for Series-Compensated Lines
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.5.8 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve
6.5.8.1 Description
Logic of the Basic Zone
[lopolydisrmd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-65 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Zone Setting = Basic)
(1) If the Zone settings = Advanced, set the parameters represented in the General FB directly in the
zone!
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loblocki-060511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-66 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continuation)
Mode of Operation
The zone handles the following tasks:
Calculation of the reactance (X) and the fault resistance (RF) from the current and voltage measured
values.
Placement of the impedance into the zone
Generation of pickup and tripping for the zone

If the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the operating polygon of a distance zone, and the direction of
the impedance phasor matches the directionality of the zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are
processed further in the output logic of the distance protection and by external additional functions (for
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral characteristic (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parametersX reach, RF (ph-ph), RF (ph-g), and the inclination
angles Delta Dist. charact. angle and Line angle.
To stabilize the polygon limits, the characteristics have a hysteresis of 5 %. If the fault impedance lies within a
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwklpolygon-DisRM, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-67 Operate Curve with Quadrilateral Characteristic
NOTE
i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
6.5.8.2 Impedance Calculation

The RMD function calculates the line loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A, and A-B-C.
A jump detection synchronizes all calculations to the occurrence of the fault. The synchronization leads to a
minimum operate times that can be reproduced. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are
calculated using the current cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the
current fault condition.
The following figure serves as an example of the description of the impedance calculation:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw ueb impedanzber, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-68 Line Supplied from 2 Sides (1-Pole Representation)
A fault with fault resistance is assumed. In addition to the actual mZL line impedance, the loop impedance
measured also contains the RF fault resistance.
The fault current IF is supplied from both sides. With the classical impedance measurement, the proportional
fault current IB from the opposite end generates a measuring error in the protection device on side A. This
measuring error depends on the preload on the line. The preload causes a phase displacement of the
voltages VA and VB. The following figure shows the effect of this phase displacement on the measured impe-
dance:
[dw_merr_underreach_rmd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-69 Measuring Error with Classic Distance Protection
In Figure 6-69, as a result of an additional voltage drop, the measuring error resulting from supplying the
opposite end B is represented as IB/IA RF. This voltage drop is represented as measuring error X in the
reactance.
To avoid the measuring error, the distance protection with reactance method (RMD) works with an equivalent
current (I Subst.) that compensates the influence of RF in the measuring loop.
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Ground Loops

For calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it must be considered that the impedance of the ground return
conductor generally does not match the impedance of the phases. This is the case, for example, for an A-gnd
short circuit.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_leschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-70 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop
The loop equation for calculating the impedance is:
[fo schl le ohne icomp, 2, en_US]
The loop equation is extended with the equivalent current I Subst. on both sides and converted according to the
impedance.
[fo schl le mit icomp, 2, en_US]
The following applies:
[fo x impber, 1, en_US]
Thus, X is calculated as follows:
[fo xf impber, 1, en_US]
You can select the equivalent current I Subst. in such a manner that the influence of the fault current IB is
compensated at the fault resistance RF. This prevents the measuring error in the reactance.
The resulting measuring error in R can be compensated only partially.
RF is calculated as follows:
[fo rf impber, 1, en_US]
IF cannot be measured by the protection device. For this reason, 3I0 is used as a substitute.
The 2 possible equivalent currents 3I2 and 3I0 achieve a perfect result only with equal impedance angles. If
the impedance angles are not equal, you can compensate the inhomogeneity using the compensation angles.
The compensation angles comp depend on the network condition and can be calculated for the zero and
negative-sequence system using the following formulas.
[fo kompwi nullsys impber, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fo kompwi gegensys impber, 1, en_US]
The relatively smaller compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero and negative-sequence
system) is more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance
at the fault location.
You can find more detailed information in chapter 6.5.8.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Phase Loops

A 2-phase short circuit B-C is assumed as an example for the calculation:
[dw_llschleife_rmd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-71 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop
The loop equation for the calculation of the phase-to-phase loop is:
[fo schl ll ohne icomp, 2, en_US]
Thus, X is calculated as follows:
[fo xf impber LLschl, 1, en_US]
where Ikomp = (a - a2)I2 and a = e j120,

RF is calculated as follows:
[fo rf impber LLschl, 1, en_US]
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in B for example, the loops A-B and B-C are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
Measured-Value Correction for Parallel Lines

For double circuit lines, both line systems are influenced by mutual coupling impedances (see Figure 6-72).
With ground faults, errors in the results of the impedance calculation occur unless particular measures are
taken. They can therefore effectively connect parallel-line compensation (parameter Parallel-line
compensat.).This takes the ground current of the parallel line into consideration in the line equation,
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
compensating for the coupling influence. This ground current must be applied to the device for this purpose.
The loop equation in this case is as follows:
[fo mwkorr parltg1, 2, en_US]
[fo mwkorr parltg, 2, en_US]
IgndP is the ground current of the parallel line. The factor k 0M is a line constant that results from the geometry
of the double circuit line and the suitability of the grounding.
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-72 Ground Fault on a Double Line
Without parallel-line compensation, in most cases, the ground current of the parallel line leads to a move-
back of the breakdown point (the distance measurement falls short, that is, the impedance is too large). If
both lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in Figure 6-72), over-
reach can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-72, there must be no compensation for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is used only if the ground current of the parallel line is less than that
of the end's own line. In the example Figure 6-72, IGnd is greater than IgndP: Compensation occurs at instal-
lation position I by coupling ZM gndP; for installation point II, there is no compensation.
Parameter: Blocked if diff.prot.active
Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if diff.prot.active = no

The Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter is visible only when the Line differential protection func-
tion is available in the application.
You can use the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter to establish whether the distance protection
zone is blocked or not as long as the Line differential protection function is active.
no If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the parameter
Blocked if diff.prot.active = no is set, the zone will run regard-
less of the line differential protection.
If the zone picks up, it will generate an operate indication after the time
delay has elapsed.
yes If the zone is switched on (parameter Mode = on) and the Blocked if
diff.prot.active = yes parameter is set, the zone is blocked as long
as the line differential protection function is working.
If the line differential protection is blocked, then the zone is not blocked.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed=yes

You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the zone is allowed to execute
1-pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole tripping is
allowed on overhead lines. For practical applications, only the quick and selective tripping function should be
1-pole. For the 1st distance zone, set parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes. For all higher zones,
set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = no. The fast and selective tripping function is also signifi-
cant in conjunction with teleprotection scheme and the automatic reclosing function. Use the available param-
eters to set the 1-phase tripping permission in those functions.
Parameter: Function mode
Recommended setting value (_:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph

You can use the Function mode parameter to determine which measuring element the zone will work with.
Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only.
ph-gnd and ph-ph The zone works with phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase measuring
elements. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
ph-gnd only The zone works only with the phase-to-ground measuring element.
ph-ph only The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.
Parameter: Directional mode
Default setting (_:109) Directional mode=forward

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the zone operates forward , reverse
or non-directional . Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
Parameter: X reach
Default setting (_:102) X reach = 2.500

You can use the X reach parameter to set the limit of the polygon in the X direction. Determine the setting
value for the specific application.
Parameter: Operate delay (1-phase)
Default setting (_:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s

You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the grading time of the zone for 1-phase
short circuits. The Operate delay (1-phase) must be set for the specific application.
Parameter: Operate delay (multi-ph.)
Default setting (_:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s

You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the grading time of the zone for multi-
phase faults. The Operate delay (multi-ph.) must be set for the specific application.
Parameter: Zone settings
Recommended setting value (_:129) Zone settings = Basic

You can use the Zone settings parameter to determine whether certain parameters must be set in a
manner that overlaps zones or whether the parameters must be set specifically for certain zones.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Basic If this setting is selected, the zone works with the following parameters that
overlaps the zones:
RF (ph-g)
RF (ph-ph)
Substitute for IF
Comp. angle zero seq.
Comp. angle neg. seq.
Delta Dist. charact. angle
To find these parameters, go to the Distance protection with reactance
method function and click General information.
Note:
If Zone settings = Basic, the following parameters from the function
group Line apply to the zone:
Line angle
Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
Advanced If this setting is selected, the following parameters apply per zone:
RF (ph-g)
RF (ph-ph)
Substitute for IF
Comp. angle zero seq.
Comp. angle neg. seq.
Delta Dist. charact. angle
Line angle
Residual compensation factor (Kr, Kx or K0 and Angle (K0))
If you want one of the previously mentioned parameters to be zone-
specific, set parameter Zone settings = Advanced.
Mixed systems with overhead line and cable sections represent one
possible application. Here, you can set the parameter K0 precisely to the
tipping limit of the zone.
Parameter: RF (ph-g)
Default setting (_:130) RF (ph-g) = 2.500

You can use the RF (ph-g) parameter to set the boundary of the polygon in the R direction for phase-to-
ground loops. The RF (ph-g) setting value considers the fault resistance at the fault location. The fault
resistance is added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resist-
ance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases.
The R radius for ground faults is calculated in a manner similar to that used for RF (ph-ph) setting value for
phase-to-phase faults. For phase-to-ground faults, the fault resistance is greater than that for phase-to-phase
faults. For overhead lines, not only the arc resistance must be taken into consideration for a ground fault, but
also the tower-grounding resistance.
Determine the maximum fault resistance (RFmax, ph-gnd) for your specific application.
For single-side infeed, set the parameter RF (ph-g) to the maximum expected fault resistance RFmax, ph-gnd
plus a safety reserve (see following image). The maximum fault resistance is the sum of the arc and tower
grounding values.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwrfmale-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]
If using a two-sided infeed, the infeed ratios must be considered. Calculate the setting value for the RF (ph-
g) parameter as follows:
[fo zone rf L-E, 2, en_US]
where:
IB/IA Ratio of ground circuit current from opposite end to its own end
RF arc, ph-gnd Maximum arc portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
RF tower grounding Maximum tower grounding portion in fault resistance for phase-to-ground error
Factor = 1.2 When using this factor, you obtain a safety reserve of 20 %.
Parameter: RF (ph-ph)
Default setting (_:131) RF (ph-ph) = 1.250

You can use the RF (ph-ph) parameter to set the polygon limits in the R direction for phase-to-phase loops.
The RF (ph-ph) setting value considers the fault resistance at the fault location. The fault resistance is
added to the impedance of the fault loop as an additional effective resistance. This fault resistance is, for
example, the arc resistance.
For overhead lines, the setting value is determined primarily by the arc resistance. No significant arc is
possible in cables. With very short cables, ensure that the arc flashover at the local cable box is included in
the set resistance for Zone 1.
For single-side infeed, set the parameter RF (ph-ph) to half of the maximum expected fault resistance
RFmax, ph-ph plus a safety reserve.
[dwrfmall-260513-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Substitute for IF
Default setting (_:132) Substitute for IF=3I2

You can use the Substitute for IF parameter to define which substitute value can be used in ground-
impedance loops for the unmeasurable fault current IF and replace it with the fault resistance at the fault loca-
tion.
First, calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system and the negative-sequence system.
Set the parameter Substitute for IF for the relatively smaller compensation angle. The relatively
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
smaller compensation angle indicates that the associated system (zero-sequence and negative-sequence
system) is more homogeneous and the fault current can be approximated better through the fault resistance
at the fault location.
Parameters: Compensation Angle for Zero-Sequence System/Negative-Sequence System
Default setting (_:134) Comp. angle zero seq. = 0.00
Default setting (_:135) Comp. angle neg. seq. = 0.00

If, based on network model tests or calculations, an angle difference between the measured 3I0 or 3I2 and IF
was determined, this can be compensated for with the parameter Comp. angle zero seq. or the param-
eter Comp. angle neg. seq..
A setting of the compensation angle deviating from 0 is only relevant for non-homogeneous systems.
When using the Comp. angle zero seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I0 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
When using the Comp. angle neg. seq. parameter, the angle difference between the 3I2 calculated by
the device and the fault current IF is being compensated.
EXAMPLE:
Calculation of the Compensation Angle
[dwkomprm-300413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
where:
ZS, A Infeed impedance, side A
ZS, B Infeed impedance, side B
ZL Line impedance
m Zone reach
Calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system as follows:
[fo kompwi nullsys zone, 1, en_US]
Calculate the compensation angle for the negative-sequence system as follows:
[fo kompwi gegensys zone, 1, en_US]
If the set compensation value matches network conditions during a fault, the fault reactance is not affected by
the load current, the fault resistance, or any other factors. The measurement compensates for the load
current.
If necessary, a change in the infeed impedance maybe considered by adapting the compensation angle. To
do this, set the compensation angle for supporting zones (Zone 1) smaller than that calculated, or negative if
necessary. The effective range X then tends to tilt downward (see Figure 6-73) and thus increases protection
against overreaching.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Set the compensation angle for all overlapping zones larger than that calculated. This will tilt the effective
range X upward and improve the tendency for underreaching.
[dwreikom-050613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-73 Example of Reduced Reach with Compensation Angle
Default setting (_:108) Line angle = 85

Calculate the setting value for the parameter Line angle from the data for the positive-sequence system
line impedance of the line to be protected.
You can find an example on how to calculate the parameter Line angle from the line data in chapter
5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Delta Dist. charact. angle
Default setting (_:136) Delta Dist. charact. angle = 0.0

You can use the Delta Dist. charact. angle parameter to set an additional slope for the distance
protection characteristic curve. The Delta Dist. charact. angle( ) is added to line angle (Line )
(see the following figure). Please observe the following condition:
90 Line + 30
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwneipol-050613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-74 Example of an Additional Slope for the Polygon Characteristic Curve
Siemens recommends to incline the quadrilateral characteristic curve (angle Pole) parallel to the straight line
(angle Line). For this particular case, maintain the default setting = 0.
If you would like to set the slope of the polygon characteristic line to be different than that of the slope of the
straight line, proceed as shown in the following example:
EXAMPLE:
Line angle Line= 60
Requirement: Polygon characteristic line in 90 - angle to R-axis
Calculation:
Pol = Line+
90 = 60 +
= 30
Result: Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle to + 30.
Default setting (_:104) Kr = 1.00
Default setting (_:105) Kx = 1.00

The Kr and Kx parameters are used to set the residual compensation with scalar factors.
You can find an example on how to calculate the Kr and Kx parameters from the line data in chapter
5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Default setting (_:118) K0 = 1.000
Default setting (_:150) Angle (K0) = 0.00

The K0 and Angle (K0) parameters are used to set the residual compensation with the complex residual
compensation factor.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You can find an example on how to calculate the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters from the line data in
chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
6.5.8.4 Settings

Z 1
_:14191:1 Z 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:14191:2 Z 1:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:14191:121 Z 1:Blocked if no no
diff.prot.active yes
_:14191:11 Z 1:1-pole operate no yes
allowed yes
_:14191:101 Z 1:Function mode ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
_:14191:109 Z 1:Directional mode non-directional forward
forward
reverse
_:14191:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:14191:110 Z 1:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.00 s
phase)
_:14191:112 Z 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.00 s
(multi-ph.)
_:14191:129 Z 1:Zone settings Basic Basic
Advanced
_:14191:130 Z 1:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:14191:131 Z 1:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.250
_:14191:132 Z 1:Substitute for IF 3I2 3I0
3I0
_:14191:134 Z 1:Comp. angle zero -40.00 to 40.00 0.00
seq.
_:14191:135 Z 1:Comp. angle neg. -40.00 to 40.00 0.00
seq.
_:14191:108 Z 1:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
_:14191:136 Z 1:Delta Dist. charact. 0.00 to 80.00 0.00
angle
_:14191:104 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:105 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:118 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14191:150 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Z 1
_:14191:81 Z 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:14191:500 Z 1:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:14191:501 Z 1:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:14191:54 Z 1:Inactive SPS O
_:14191:52 Z 1:Behavior ENS O
_:14191:53 Z 1:Health ENS O
_:14191:55 Z 1:Pickup ACD O
_:14191:300 Z 1:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:14191:301 Z 1:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:14191:302 Z 1:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:14191:303 Z 1:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:14191:304 Z 1:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:14191:305 Z 1:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:14191:56 Z 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14191:57 Z 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.5.9 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve
6.5.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[loMHO RMD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-75 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Mode of Operation
Calculation of the polarization voltage from the current measured values
Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone

To arrange the measurands in the tripping level of the MHO characteristic, the angle between 2 difference
vectors Z1 and Z2 is determined (see Figure 6-76 ). These vectors are calculated from the difference
between the 2 peaks of the circle's diameter and the fault impedance. The peak Zr corresponds to the setting
value of the zone (parameter Zr impedance reach and as in Figure 6-77 ); the peak kZV corresponds
to the polarization value. The difference vectors are calculated as follows:
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the boundary case, ZF is on the periphery of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is
90 (Thales's theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90; outside the characteristic, it is
less than 90.
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-76 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic
With the parameter Zr impedance reach , you set the range of the zone. With the parameter Direc-
tional mode , you specify whether the zone works in forward or reverse direction. In the reverse
direction, the MHO characteristic is reflected across the coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
lies well within the MHO characteristic of a distance zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
example, teleprotection schemes). The output logic of the distance protection is described in chapter
Basic Characteristic of the MHO Circuit

The basic form of the MHO characteristic is shown in Figure 6-77 . The MHO characteristic of the zone is a
circle through the coordinate origin in the R-X plane. The diameter is defined by the parameter Zr impe-
dance reach . The gradient is defined by the parameter Dist. characteristic angle .
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-77 Basic Form of the MHO Characteristic
Polarized MHO Characteristic

The MHO characteristic passes through the coordinate origin. The boundary around the origin is undefined,
since the measuring voltage there is too small for reliable analysis. The phase angle of the voltage can no
longer be determined. Therefore, the MHO characteristic curve is polarized either with a saved voltage or a
healthy voltage after the fault occurs. The polarization determines the lower peak of the circle, that is, the
lower crossing of the diameter line on the circle's circumference. The upper peak remains unchanged. It is
defined by the parameter Zr impedance reach. Immediately after the fault occurs, a part of a voltage
saved before the fault is added to the currently measured voltage (memory polarization). This shifts the lower
peak of the circle. The position of the peak is determined by the source impedance of the system ZS and by
the degree of polarization k (see Figure 6-78 ). If the voltage saved before the fault occurs is too small, a
healthy voltage is used for polarization. This healthy voltage is vertical to the voltage phasor of the loop with a
short circuit (cross-polarization). This voltage is adjusted to the phase angle of the short-circuit voltage with a
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
90 rotation. The displacement of the lower peak is then identical to the displacement in case of memory
polarization.
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-78 Polarized MHO Characteristic
Properties of the MHO Characteristic

The cross-polarized or saved voltage (without load transport) is equal to the corresponding generator voltage
E. After the short circuit, it does not change (see also Figure 6-79 ). The lower peak of the circle's diameter
thus appears shifted in the impedance diagram by the polarization value kZS1 = kE1/I1. The upper peak
remains defined by the setting value Zr impedance reach. For fault location F1 ( Figure 6-79 a), the short
circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the reverse direction. All fault locations up
to directly where the device is installed (current transformer) are unambiguously within the MHO character-
istic ( Figure 6-79 b). If the current reverses, the peak of the circle's diameter changes suddenly ( Figure 6-79
c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring point (current transformer). The source impedance
ZS2 + ZL determines the current I2. The peak Zr remains unchanged. It is now the lower limit of the diameter
of the circle. During load transport on the line, the peak phasor can also rotate by the load angle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-79 Polarized MHO Characteristic with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages
Selecting the Polarization

For short lines, the range of the zone must be set as a small value. For small loop voltages, the phase-angle
comparison between the differential voltage and the loop voltage is unreliable. This can lead to incorrect
directional decisions (tripping or blocking despite reverse faults). If a polarization voltage is used for the
phase-angle comparison, these problems are avoided. The polarization voltage is proportionally composed of
the loop voltage buffered before the fault occurred and the present loop voltage. The polarization voltage VP
for a phase-to-phase loop is calculated as follows:
[fo MHO up spol, 1, en_US]
You can set the degree of polarization for the memory polarization and cross-polarization separately. For
phase-to-phase loops, the RMS value of the saved voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For a subsequent fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage can be missing. In this case, the
saved voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-phase short circuits and 2-
phase short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization.
This voltage is rotated by 90 in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross-polarization). The polarization
voltage VP is a mixture of the present voltage and the corresponding healthy voltage and is calculated as
follows:
[fo MHO up kpol, 1, en_US]
If the saved voltage is not available, the cross-polarization can be used. For the phase-to-phase loops, you
can set the evaluation of the voltage with the factor kcross.
NOTE
i The parameters Mem. polarization(ph-ph) and Cross polarization(ph-ph) are available as

evaluation factors for the polarization.
Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters of the Distance protection function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Using the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter, you establish whether the distance protection
delay has elapsed.
as the line differential-protection function is working.
Default setting (_:101) Function mode = ph-ph only

The zone works only with the phase-to-phase measuring element.
Recommended setting value (_:109) Directional mode = forward

With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward or reverse.
Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
Parameter: Zr impedance reach
Recommended setting value (_:102) Zr impedance reach = 2.500

Use the Zr impedance reach parameter to define the reach of the zone. Determine the setting value for
the specific application.
First, create a time-grading chart for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths with
their primary reactances X in /km into the time-grading chart. The reactances X then define the range of the
distance protection zones.
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-80 Setting of the Range Example for Device A
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set
the time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating
time. For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading-time increment.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
Dropout time for protection systems
Variation in time delays

The usual grading times are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. Set the range of Zone Z2 to a value that extends to about 80 % of
the lower-level zone of the protection for the shortest subsequent line (see Figure 6-80).
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values in either primary or secondary
variables. If you wish to enter secondary variables during parameterization, convert the primary values from
the time-grading chart into secondary values as follows:
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]

With the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter, you set the grading time of the zone for multiphase
short circuits. You must set the Operate delay (multi-ph.) for the specific application.
6.5.9.3 Settings

Z (MHO) #
_:1 Z (MHO) #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Z (MHO) #:Operate & no no
_:121 Z (MHO) #:Blocked if no no
_:101 Z (MHO) #:Function ph-ph only ph-ph only
mode
_:109 Z (MHO) #:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
_:102 Z (MHO) #:Zr impe- 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
dance reach 5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:112 Z (MHO) #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.30 s
delay (multi-ph.)

(Type)
Z (MHO) #
_:81 Z (MHO) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Z (MHO) #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z (MHO) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z (MHO) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z (MHO) #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z (MHO) #:Pickup ACD O
_:303 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop AB ACD O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:304 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Z (MHO) #:Operate ACT O
6.5.10 Output Logic of the Distance Protection
Mode of Operation
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the overlapping indications of the distance protection.
General Pickup
With the impedance pickup, the group indication Pickup is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the
working area of a zone.
The signal Pickup is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions, for
example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and issued as group indications.
[lo pickup RMD, 1, en_US]
Trip Logic
The trip signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
allowed on overhead lines.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the device is capable of 1-pole tripping and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-
pole pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate indi-
cation.
[lo operate RMD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-82 Trip Logic
6.5.11 Application Example
6.5.11.1 Overview
The distance protection clarifies 100 % of errors in a meshed system selectively.
Under extreme conditions, load currents and high fault resistances can influence the selectivity. The RMD
function reduces the unfavorable influence of high fault resistances at high loads. If the electrical power
system shows inhomogeneities, for example, different impedance angles of the infeeds, the reach of the
distance protection can be affected. The reactance method compensates this influence via adjustable
compensation angles.
This example describes the use of the RMD function for the protection of a 380-kV overhead-transmission
line. For this example, the following is assumed:
In the Line function group, the RMD function is selected.
The distance protection works with load cutout.
The distance protection has 4 zones.

The following setting values are explained step-by-step:
Global parameters of the Line function group
Global parameters of the RMD function
Parameters of the zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve

The example describes in detail only the parameters of the RMD function that differ from the classic distance
protection.
The parameters relevant for the zones are summarized in a table.
Supplemental functions, such as teleprotection schemes, power swings, switching onto a fault, and direc-
tional ground-fault protection are not dealt with here.
NOTE
i If you wish to add new functions, take note that the visibility of individual parameters depends on the
configuration. Thus, first define the functions for your specific application and then enter the parameters
afterwards.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.5.11.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with the line to be protected.
[dw ueb example, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-83 Block Diagram
The following system data apply to the application example (primary values):
R1 [] X1 [] Angle Z1 [] R0 [] X0 [] Angle Z0 []
Infeed A 2.363 22.487 84 1.534 14.596 84.00
Infeed B 15.635 33.530 65 14.001 25.761 61.48
Overhead line 2.384 25.6 84.68 13.112 82.432 80.96
(80 km)
In the application example, the infeed impedances with a large angle difference were selected in order to
emphasize the benefits of the reactance method (compensation angle). In most real applications, the angle
difference is too small so that you can use the default setting of 0 for the compensation angle.
The following table shows the time grading of the distance zones for the protection device at the installation
location A:
Zone Directional mode Reach X reach []
[% of the line length]
Zone 1 forward 80 % 20.48
Zone 4 reverse -50 % 12.8
6.5.11.3 Setting Notes General Parameters in the Line Function Group

In the following, only the parameters of the Line function group are described that are relevant for the RMD
function.

line impedance of the line to be protected as follows:
[fo ltgwinkel, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Residual Compensation with Kr and Kx

From the line data, calculate the residual compensation factors Kr and Kx as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fo kr, 1, en_US]
[fo kx, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i For other applications, for example, mixed sections with cable and overhead line, you can overwrite the
residual compensation factors set here in the distance zones with local parameters.
The following tables show the parameters relevant for the application example in the Line function group:
Parameters Setting Value Description
(_:9001:108) Line 84.68 Positive-sequence system impedance angle
angle
(_:9001:104) Kr 1.58 Rgnd/Rph of the line
(_:9001:105) Kx 0.74 Xgnd/Xph of the line
6.5.11.4 Setting Notes General Parameters in the RMD Function

Go to General under the RMD function and set the following parameters. The setting values are valid for all
zones in the distance protection.
The parameters V0> threshold value and Min. phase-current thresh are relevant for the pickup
of the RMD function. For use in a grounded electrical power system, Siemens recommends the default
settings.
Parameters Setting Value [Primary] Description
(_:2311:102) V0> 6.335 kV Default setting
threshold value The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
V0> threshold value (secondary) = 6.335 kV
100 V/380 kV = 1.667 V
(_:2311:101) Min. 100.000 A Default setting
phase-current The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
thresh Min. phase-current thresh (secondary) =
100 A 1 A/1000 A = 0.1 A
Load Cutout
The parameters R load cutout and Angle load cutout define the load cutout. With the reactance
method, the load cutout is important only for 3-phase short circuits. The maximum operating current must be
known for calculation of the load-cutout parameters.
The following output data are assumed in the application example for calculating the load-cutout parameters:
Maximum operating current Iload, max = 2000 A
with an unfavorable power factor cosj = 0.9
Calculate the primary setting values for the parameter R load cutout and the Angle load cutout with
a safety margin of 10 % as follows:
[fo r lastaus, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fo winkel lastaus, 1, en_US]
Parameter: RF (ph-g) and RF (ph-ph)

The following equivalent circuit applies to calculation of the fault resistance with ground faults:
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-84 Combination of Arc Voltage and Tower-Grounding Resistance
Remote infeed (I remote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-84). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio I remote/I local.
You can obtain the effective tower-grounding resistance values in Figure 6-129 . In the example, the primary
effective tower-grounding resistances is 1.9 . When calculating the setting value for RF (ph-g), consider
the infeed from the opposite end when calculating RTF as follows:
[fo rtf RMD, 1, en_US]
The ratio Iremote/Ilocal can only be calculated approximately using the reactance. For the calculation, a 1-phase
short circuit is assumed at the opposite end of the line. This is used to calculate the Iremote/Ilocal ratio as follows:
[fo rtf iOrt, 1, en_US]
[fo rtf iFern, 1, en_US]
[fo rtf iFern_iOrt, 1, en_US]
[fo_rtf iFern_iOrt, 1, en_US]
The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the fault loop is thus:
[fo rtf max, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground. The
arc length should be 7 m in the example. If you assume a double arc length, you consider the curvature of a
burning arc:
Varc = 2500 V larc
Varc = 2500 V 2 7 m = 35 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc
using the smallest fault current. With Ik min = 1,500 A, calculate Rarc as follows:
[fo r lb, 1, en_US]
For ground faults, the total resistance that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF must be covered. By adding a safety
margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the parameter RF (ph-g) can be calculated as follows:
[fo rf L-E, 1, en_US]
For the phase-to-phase fault, only the arc voltage must be considered. If you assume double the value for the
arc length and you use the same value for the minimum fault current, the value of 2 23.3 calculated previ-
ously applies for the arc resistance. By adding a safety margin of 20 %, the primary setting value for the
parameter RF (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows. For the parameter RF (ph-ph), half of the calculated
arc resistance is set.
[fo rf L-L, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Substitute for IF

The Substitute for IF parameter is used for the calculation of the voltage drop via the fault resistance
(RF) in the phase-to-ground loops. In electrical power systems with a grounded neutral point (zero-sequence
infeed), you can use the zero-sequence current (3I0). As an alternative, for the parameter Substitute
for IF, you can select the negative-sequence current 3I2.
For the decision as to which substitute value you select for the IF, determine the change of the phase angle
of the relevant infeed impedance under different operating conditions.
In the application example, the neutral point is grounded at both ends of the line. Thus there is a strong zero-
sequence infeed at the relay installation location as well as at the remote line end. The impedance of the
zero-sequence infeeds does not change significantly due to the remote changes of the infeed impedance (for
example, by the remote switching operations in the electrical power system). Therefore the impedance angles
of the zero-sequence infeed in the application example are more stable than these of the negative-sequence
system. In the application example, set the parameter Substitute for IF = 3I0.
In applications with a non-constant zero-sequence impedance, it is better to use the setting value 3I2 for the
parameter Substitute for IF. Important differences in the zero-sequence impedance occur, for
example, when the neutral point on the infeed busbar can be activated or deactivated.
Parameter: Comp. angle zero seq. and Comp. angle neg. seq.
For optimum results, the RMD function must know the phase angle of the current through the fault resistance.
As this current cannot be measured, the zero or negative-sequence current is used as equivalent current for
the estimation of the phase angle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw ueb impedanzber, 2, en_US]
The protection device cannot measure the fault current IF directly. For an accurate impedance measurement,
the phase angle of the fault current must at least be estimated. In the measurement, the phase angle of the
fault current IF is derived from the zero or negative-sequence current. In electrical power systems with inho-
mogeneous power infeeds, that is the power infeeds have great differences in the impedance angles, a
compensation angle can be used. In the example, the compensation angles for the zero and negative-
sequence systems are calculated with m = 80 % for the limits of zone Z1.
Calculate the compensation angle for the zero-sequence system as follows:
[fo1 comp zero sequence example, 1, en_US]
[fo2 comp zero sequence example, 1, en_US]
[fo comp zero sequence example, 1, en_US]
Set the parameter Comp. angle zero seq. = 8.35.

Calculate the compensation angle for the negative-sequence system as follows:
[fo1 comp neg sequence example, 1, en_US]
[fo2 comp neg sequence example, 1, en_US]
[fo comp neg sequence example, 1, en_US]
Set the parameter Comp. angle neg. seq. = 8.61.
Parameter: Delta Dist. charact. angle

Using the default setting, the inclination of the zones R limit is parallel to the line impedance. For applications
with small line-impedance angles, for example, cable feeders with impedance angles < 50, it is sometimes
better to set the R limit more vertically. With the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle, you turn the R
limit counterclockwise (see Figure 6-73).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In the application example, the line angle with a value of 84.68 is so large that the inclination of the R limit
should run in parallel to the line angle. Set the parameter Delta Dist. charact. angle = 0.00.
General Parameters of the RMD Function

The following table summarizes the general parameters of the RMD function for the application example. The
setting values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.
Parameters Recommended Setting Values (Primary Values)
(_:2311:102) V0> threshold value 6.335 kV
(_:2311:101) Min. phase-current thresh 100.000 A
(_:2311:130) RF (ph-g) 35.200
(_:2311:131) RF (ph-ph) 27.960
(_:2311:132) Substitute for IF 3I0
(_:2311:134) Comp. angle zero seq. 8.35
(_:2311:135) Comp. angle neg. seq. 8.61
(_:2311:136) Delta Dist. charact. angle 0.00
(_:2311:106) Use load cutout both directions
(_:2311:107) R load cutout 99.700
(_:2311:108) Angle load cutout 28.4
6.5.11.5 Setting Instructions Zone Z1 to Z4

The following tables summarize the parameters of the zones Z1 to Z4. The recommended setting values
apply for the application example.
NOTE
i The parameter (_:14191:11) 1-pole operate allowed is only visible in the device variants that
can trip in a 1-pole way!
Zone Z1
Settings Recommended Description

Setting Values
(Primary Values)
(_:14191:121) Blocked no The parameter is only relevant in the 7SLx devices.
if diff.prot.active
(_:14191:11) 1-pole yes Zone Z1 should trip in a 1-pole way.
operate allowed
(_:14191:101) Function ph-gnd and ph-ph The setting value is suitable for all fault types.
mode
(_:14191:109) Direc- forward Zone Z1 acts for faults in a forward direction.
tional mode
(_:14191:102) X reach 20.480 X reach of zone Z1
(_:14191:110) Operate 0.00 s Zone Z1 works without delay.
delay (1-phase)
(_:14191:112) Operate 0.00 s Zone Z1 works without delay.
delay (multi-ph.)
(_:14191:129) Zone Basic Zone Z1 uses the general settings of the RMD func-
settings tion.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i If the zone should not work with the general parameters of the RMD function, set the parameter Zone
settings = Advanced.
Then, the respective zone works with the following zone-specific parameters (example for zone Z1):
(_:14191:130) RF (ph-g)
(_:14191:131) RF (ph-ph)
(_:14191:132) Substitute for IF
(_:14191:134) Comp. angle zero seq.
(_:14191:135) Comp. angle neg. seq.
(_:14191:108) Line angle
(_:14191:136) Delta Dist. charact. angle
(_:14191:104) Kr
(_:14191:105) Kx
Zone Z2

Setting Values
(Primary Values)
if diff.prot.active
(_:14192:11) 1-pole no Zone Z2 should trip in a 3-pole way.
operate allowed
mode
tional mode
(_:14192:110) Operate 0.30 s Tripping delay of zone Z2
delay (1-phase)
delay (multi-ph.)
settings tion.
Zone Z3

Setting Values
(Primary Values)
if diff.prot.active
operate allowed
mode
tional mode
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Setting Values
(Primary Values)
delay (1-phase)
delay (multi-ph.)
settings tion.
Zone Z4

Setting Values
(Primary Values)
if diff.prot.active
operate allowed
mode
(_:14194:109) Direc- reverse Zone Z4 acts for faults in a reverse direction.
tional mode
delay (1-phase)
delay (multi-ph.)
settings tion.
Check the setting values on the basis of the following graphical representation of the operate curve:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[sc_KL_RMD_examble, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-85 Operate Curve in DIGSI 5
6.5.12 Settings

General
on dist. pickup
value
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

compensat. yes
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.250
3I0
zero seq.
neg. seq.
charact. angle
both directions
forward only
reverse only
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
cutout
_:2311:112 General:Mem. polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
_:2311:114 General:Cross polariza- 0.0 % to 100.0 % 15.0 %
tion(ph-ph)
Z 1
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14191:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14191:130 Z 1:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:14191:131 Z 1:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.250
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14191:108 Z 1:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
_:14191:104 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:105 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:118 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14191:150 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 2
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14192:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14192:130 Z 2:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:14192:131 Z 2:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14192:108 Z 2:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
_:14192:104 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14192:105 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14192:118 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14192:150 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 3
on
test
blocked yes
_:14193:11 Z 3:1-pole operate no no
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14193:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.000
phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14193:130 Z 3:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.000
_:14193:131 Z 3:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14193:108 Z 3:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

angle
_:14193:104 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14193:105 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14193:118 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14193:150 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 4
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
_:14194:109 Z 4:Directional mode non-directional non-directional
forward
reverse
_:14194:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14194:130 Z 4:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
_:14194:131 Z 4:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14194:108 Z 4:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
_:14194:104 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14194:105 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14194:118 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14194:150 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

General
on dist. pickup
value
compensat. yes
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.250
3I0
zero seq.
neg. seq.
charact. angle
both directions
forward only
reverse only
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
cutout
tion(ph-ph)
tion(ph-ph)
Z 1
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14191:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14191:130 Z 1:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:14191:131 Z 1:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.250
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14191:108 Z 1:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
_:14191:104 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:105 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14191:118 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14191:150 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 2
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14192:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.100 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 1.000
phase)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14192:130 Z 2:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 1.000
_:14192:131 Z 2:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14192:108 Z 2:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
_:14192:104 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14192:105 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14192:118 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14192:150 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 3
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14193:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.100 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.000
phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14193:130 Z 3:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.000
_:14193:131 Z 3:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 1.000
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14193:108 Z 3:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
_:14193:104 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14193:105 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14193:118 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14193:150 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 4
on
test
blocked yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
forward
reverse
_:14194:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.100 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.400
phase)
(multi-ph.)
Advanced
_:14194:130 Z 4:RF (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.400
_:14194:131 Z 4:RF (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.400
3I0
seq.
seq.
_:14194:108 Z 4:Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 85.00
angle
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:14194:104 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14194:105 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:14194:118 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:14194:150 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6 Distance Protection with Classic Method
The Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N) function is available in 3 variants:

Distance protection for grounded systems with 3-phase tripping
Distance protection for isolated/resonant-grounded systems with 3-phase tripping
Distance protection for grounded systems with 1-/3-pole tripping
6.6.2 Distance Protection for Grounded Systems

The function Distance protection for grounded systems (ANSI 21 N):
Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more end(s) in
radial, looped or meshed systems,
Used as backup protection for busbars, transformers and other lines
Works only in systems with grounded neutral point
Trips 1- or 3-pole
Suitable for use in all voltage levels

The function Distance protection for grounded systems can be placed in function groups that provide voltage
and current measured values as well as line parameters.
The function Distance protection for grounded systems consists of the following blocks:
Generic
Pickup method
Distance zones (preconfigured quadrilateral characteristic)
1-phase/3-pole output logic

The function Distance protection for grounded systems is preconfigured with 4 zones at the factory. The
zones are structured identically.
The following figure shows the structural principles of the function Distance protection for grounded systems.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwstg13p-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impedance is
assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic10) of the zones. In the Impe-
dance pickup method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For all
picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The loop selection determines which loops are actually
selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops are removed
during loop elimination. For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic
forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup
and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the meas-
uring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
Monitoring of the residual current 3I0
Monitoring of the ratio of the residual current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
Current and voltage criteria complement one another (see Figure 6-87). If the ratio of zero-sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is greater, zero voltage increases. If the ratio of zero sequence impe-
dance to positive-sequence impedance is small, the ground current increases. The Ground-fault detec-
tion parameter determines the criterion used to perform ground fault recognition.
If a phase current leads to current-transformer saturation, the voltage criterion must be met for ground-fault
detection. Uneven saturation of current transformers can lead to a secondary residual current without a
primary residual current flowing. Automatic scanning of the voltage criterion in the event of current-trans-
former saturation prevents unwanted ground-fault detection.
Ground-fault detection alone does not lead to the general pickup of the distance protection; it only controls
other pickup modules. Ground-fault detection is also not indicated on its own.
10 in preparation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loerdfeh-240511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-87 Logic of Ground-Fault Detection for Grounded Systems
Ground-Fault Detection: Residual Current 3I0
The residual-current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value).
The residual-current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
Residual currents due to unbalanced load conditions
Residual currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of phase-
current transformers
For detected current-transformer saturation (see Figure 6-87)

Figure 6-88 shows the pickup characteristic of the residual-current criterion. As phase currents increase, the
actual pickup value rises automatically. The reset value is about 95 % of the pickup value.
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-88 Residual-Current Criterion: Pickup Characteristic
Ground-Fault Detection: Residual Current/Negative-Sequence Current (3I0/3I2)
For long, highly loaded lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion
(see Figure 6-88). For the detection of ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current crite-
rion is extended. In addition to the residual current, the ratio of residual current to negative-sequence current
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
is also monitored. In a 1-phase short circuit, the negative-sequence current I2 is approximately as high as the
residual current I0. If the ratio of residual current to negative-sequence current exceeds a preset limit, the
criterion is released. The residual-current/negative-sequence current criterion is stabilized for high negative-
sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-89 shows the connection. A prerequisite for
release of the residual-current/negative-sequence current criterion is a minimum current of 0.2 Irated for 3I0.
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-89 I0/I2 Criterion: Pickup Characteristic
Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Voltage V0
The zero voltage is monitored for exceeding a set value (parameter V0> threshold value). The reset
value is about 95 % of the pickup value. In grounded systems, monitoring of the zero voltage can be used as
an additional ground-fault criterion.
Ground-Fault Detection during 1-Pole Pause

Load currents may not lead to activation of the ground-fault detection during a 1-pole disconnection in the
grounded system. For this, the ground-fault detection is modified during the 1-pole disconnection. In addition
to the magnitude, the phase angles between current and voltage are monitored (see following figure).
[loerdawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-90 Ground-Fault Recognition during 1-Pole Disconnection (Example: 1-Pole Pause L1)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured.
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
Quadrilateral characteristic
MHO characteristics
The description of operate curves can be found in sections 6.6.9.1 Description and 6.6.10.1 Description/
phasors in the R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in Chapter
6.6.4 Direction Determination .
Loop Selection in the Grounded System

In systems with effective or impedance grounded neutral point, each contact of a phase with ground is a
short-circuit-like process. The closest protection equipment must switch off the fault immediately.
For double ground-fault protection, 2 phase-to-ground loops generally pick up. If both ground faults are in the
same direction, this can also lead to pick up in the associated phase-to-phase loop. The Loop select.
with ph-ph-g parameter is used to restrict analysis to certain loops.
In a three-pole fault, all phase-to-phase loops generally pick up. In this case, the 3 phase-to-phase loops are
analyzed. If a fault is detected with ground contact, the phase-to-ground loops are also analyzed.
Output Logic
The output logic of the function Distance protection for grounded systems links the output signals of the
zones and forms the group trip signal of the function. The description of the output logics can be found in
section 6.6.12 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
Influence of the Inrush-Current Detection

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the distance protection can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents. The following configurations are possible in conjunction
with inrush-current detection:
Blocking of pickup for the overcurrent pickup, U/I pickup and U/I/j pickup methods
Blocking of individual distance zones
Blocking of pickup when impedance pickup is used by blocking the outer distance zone(s)
Inrush-current detection can be configured to block the listed pickup methods and distance zones separately.
When blocking is in effect, the distance zone or pickup method linked with inrush-current detection does not
pick up. The Inrush-current detection function signals blocking through a corresponding indication. If blocking
drops out and the pickup condition for the corresponding method or linked distance zone is still satisfied,
pickup is indicated and the corresponding time delay starts. After this time has elapsed, the operate indication
is generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section 6.49.1 Overview of Functions)
is in effect can the blocking be set.
6.6.2.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings

Set the following settings under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems. The setting
values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Recommended setting value (_:2311:110) Zone timer start = on zone pickup

start.
to run.
Parameter: Dist. characteristic angle
Default setting (_:2311:107) Dist. characteristic angle = 85.0

The Dist. characteristic angle parameter allows you to set the inclination angle of the distance
protection characteristic curve. The inclination angle set here for the distance protection characteristic curve
applies to all zones in the function.
Siemens recommends setting the Dist. characteristic angle parameter to the line angle.
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance on the line to be protected:
[foflwink-290411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.
Parameter: Ground-fault detection
Recommended setting value (_:2311:105) Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0

The Ground-fault detection parameter determines the criteria used for ground-fault detection.
3I0 or V0 If either the residual-current criterion (3I0>) or the zero-sequence voltage
criterion (V0>) leads to ground-fault detection, select this setting.
For grounded systems, the OR operation of the criteria 3I0> and V0> is a
reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one
another. For a weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-
sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the conditions are reversed.
Siemens recommends this setting for grounded systems.
3I0 and V0 If you wish to use both criteria for ground-fault detection (logical AND
linking of zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage criteria), select
this setting.
3I0 only If only the zero-sequence current criterion is to be used for ground-fault
detection, select this setting.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold value
Recommended setting value (_:2311:103) 3I0> threshold value = 0.10 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The 3I0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence current limit for ground-fault
detection.
The parameter 3I0> threshold value must be set to a value less than the lowest expected ground
current in ground faults on the protected feeder. For the distance protection to trigger for external remote
faults as backup protection, set the 3I0> threshold value parameter to a more sensitive value than that
necessary for internal faults. Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0.10 A.

detection.
occur during operation, increase the default setting.
Parameter: 3I0 pickup stabilization
Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) 3I0 pickup stabilization = 0.10

The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to set the inclination of the 3I0> characteristic curve
for ground-fault detection.
Power-system unbalance (for example, untwisted lines) and current-transformer errors can cause a residual-
current flow at the protection device in the case of higher phase currents, even if there is no ground fault. The
3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid ground activation. If no extreme power-system
unbalance and unusually large current-transformer errors are expected, Siemens recommends keeping the
default value of 0.10.
Parameter: Loop select. with ph-ph-g
Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g=block leading phase

The Loop select. with ph-ph-g parameter is used to determine which loops will be analyzed by the
distance protection in the event of double ground faults. You can restrict the analysis to certain loops. If you
wish to restrict analysis to certain loops, they must have the same direction.
In two-end feed to a shared fault resistance to ground, the phase-to-ground loop of the leading phase tends
to overreach. If you set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase, these
loops will not be analyzed.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Loop select. with ph-
ph-g parameter:
Parameter Value Picked Up Loops Evalutated Loop(s)
block leading phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-A
block lagging phase A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-gnd, C-A
all A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A
ph-ph only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-B
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-C
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A C-A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter Value Picked Up Loops Evalutated Loop(s)

ph-gnd only A-gnd, B-gnd, A-B A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, B-C B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, C-A A-gnd, C-gnd
In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the internal fault
loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for this applica-
tion. To ensure the selectivity of protection, reduce the range of the underreaching zone.
Parameter: Parallel-line compensat.
Default setting: (_:2311:106) Parallel-line compensat. = no

The Parallel-line compensat. parameter is used to determine for double circuit lines whether you wish
to take into account the influence of the coupling impedance on the loop impedance or not.
NOTE
i You can see the parameter Parallel-line compensat. only if the ground current of the parallel line
is available in the Line function group. To do this, connect the measuring point I-1ph (ground current of the
parallel line) to the Line function group in DIGSI 5.
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
Mem. polarization(ph-g)
Cross polarization(ph-g)
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-g)
Default setting: (:_2310:_111) Mem. polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %

With the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with a buffered
voltage for phase-to-ground loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO characteristic curve
depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without extension,
set the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.
Default setting (:_2310:_112) Mem. polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %

With the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with a
buffered voltage for phase-to-phase loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO characteristic
curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic curve without
Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-g)
Default setting (:_2310:_113) Cross polarization(ph-g) = 15.0%

With the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
external-fault voltage for phase-to-ground loops. This parameter influences the extension of the MHO charac-
without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (:_2310:_114) Cross polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0%

without extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.
6.6.2.4 Settings

General
on dist. pickup
_:2311:107 General:Dist. character- 30.0 to 90.0 85.0
istic angle
_:2311:105 General:Ground-fault 3I0 or V0 3I0 or V0
detection 3I0 and V0
3I0 only
_:2311:103 General:3I0> threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
value
_:2311:104 General:3I0 pickup 0.05 to 0.30 0.10
stabilization
_:2311:108 General:Loop select. block leading phase block leading
with ph-ph-g block lagging phase phase
all
ph-ph only
ph-gnd only
compensat. yes
tion(ph-g)
tion(ph-ph)
tion(ph-g)
tion(ph-ph)
Pickup Z<
_:3661:101 Pickup Z<:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
_:3661:102 Pickup Z<:Use ph-g load no no
cutout yes
_:3661:103 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 25.000
(ph-g) 5A 0.010 to 120.000 5.000
_:3661:104 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 to 60.0 45.0
cutout (ph-g)
_:3661:105 Pickup Z<:Use ph-ph no no
load cutout yes
(ph-ph) 5A 0.010 to 120.000 4.000
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

cutout (ph-ph)
Z 1
on
test
blocked yes
_:3571:27 Z 1:Blk. w. inrush curr. no no
detect. yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
_:3571:114 Z 1:Zone-spec. residu. no no
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3571:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:3571:103 Z 1:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:3571:104 Z 1:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.250
_:3571:113 Z 1:Zone-inclination 0 to 45 0
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3571:105 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:106 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:107 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3571:108 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 2
on
test
blocked yes
detect. yes
allowed yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3572:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
_:3572:103 Z 2:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
_:3572:104 Z 2:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3572:105 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:106 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:107 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3572:108 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 3
on
test
blocked yes
detect. yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3573:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.000
_:3573:103 Z 3:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.000
_:3573:104 Z 3:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3573:105 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:106 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:107 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3573:108 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 4
on
test
blocked yes
detect. yes
allowed yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3574:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
_:3574:103 Z 4:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
_:3574:104 Z 4:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3574:105 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:106 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:107 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3574:108 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Z ph-g WYE O
_:2311:301 General:Z ph-ph DEL O
Group indicat.
Pickup Z<
_:3661:51 Pickup Z<:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:3661:52 Pickup Z<:Behavior ENS O
_:3661:53 Pickup Z<:Health ENS O
Z 1
Z 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Z 3
Z 4
6.6.3 Distance Protection for Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems

The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems (ANSI 21 N):
Is a form of selective short-circuit protection for lines and cables supplied from one or more end(s) in
radial, looped or meshed systems,
Works only in isolated or resonant-grounded systems via an arc-suppression coil
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Trips 3-phase
Suitable for use in all voltage levels

The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems can be placed in function groups
that provide voltage and current measured values as well as line parameters.
The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems consists of the following blocks:
General
Pickup method
Distance zones (preconfigured quadrilateral characteristic)
AREC zones (not preconfigured)
Output logic 3-phase

The function Distance protection for isolated or resonant-grounded systems is preconfigured with 4 zones at
the factory. The zones are structured identically.
The following figure shows the structural principles of the function Distance protection for isolated or reso-
nant-grounded systems.
[dwstriso-090212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
Ground-fault detection determines whether a ground fault has occurred. The pickup method releases the
measurement loops. For the released loops, the impedance is calculated. The calculated impedance is
assigned to the operate curves (quadrilateral, MHO, or circular characteristic 11) of the zones. In the Impe-
dance pickup method, the load cutout is then analyzed and the apparent impedances eliminated. For all
picked up loops, the direction is then determined. The loop selection determines which loops are actually
selected and which loops lie within the operate curves of the zones (loop pickup). All other loops are removed
during loop elimination. For the picked up loops, the time delay in the zone logic is started. The zone logic
forms the pickup and trip signals of the loops and phases for the zone. The output logic processes the pickup
and trip signals of the zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the distance protection.
11 in preparation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Ground-fault detection checks whether a ground fault has occurred. If a ground fault has occurred, the meas-
uring elements for the phase-to-ground loops are released.
Monitoring of the zero-sequence current 3I0
Monitoring of the ratio of the zero-sequence current and negative-sequence current (3I0/3I2)
Monitoring of the balance of phase-to-phase voltages

In isolated/resonant-grounded systems, the pickup of ground-fault detection is unwanted for simple ground
faults. In the event of 1-phase pickup, a simple ground fault is initially presumed. So that the starting oscilla-
tion upon occurrence of the ground fault does not lead to unwanted pickup of the function, the pickup is
suppressed for a settable time. After the Delay 1-phase pickup time has expired, the pickup is released.
This is necessary so that the distance protection can still detect a double ground fault with a base point on a
stub-end feeder. If phase-to-phase voltages are unbalanced, a double ground fault can be assumed. In that
case, pickup is released immediately. The balance criterion prevents unwanted pickup for a simple ground
fault or unbalanced load conditions (see Figure 6-92 ). The Max. unbalance Vph-ph parameter specifies
the maximum permitted unbalance for the load case, or in the event of a simple ground fault.
[losymerk-140211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-92 Balance Detection for Phase-to-Phase Voltages
Figure 6-93 shows the logic of the ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems.
If the following conditions are met, the ground-fault detection responds for double ground faults with very low
ground currents:
The zero-sequence current is 10 % of the measured negative-sequence current I2
The zero-sequence current is at least 5 % of the secondary rated current
The phase-to-phase voltages are unbalanced

Monitoring of the balance in phase-to-phase voltages prevents unwanted pickup in the event of simple
ground faults.
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loisolie-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-93 Ground-Fault Detection in Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Ground-fault detection: Zero-Sequence Current 3I0
The residual-current criterion monitors the fundamental component of the sum of phase currents for
exceeding a settable value (parameter 3I0> threshold value ).
The residual-current criterion is stabilized against unwanted pickup for the following cases:
Zero-sequence currents due to unbalanced load conditions
Zero-sequence currents in the event of faults without ground contact due to differing saturation of phase-
current transformers
For detected current-transformer saturation (see Figure 6-93 )

Figure 6-94 shows the pickup characteristic of the zero-sequence current criterion. As phase currents
increase, the actual pickup value rises automatically. The reset value is about 95 % of the pickup value.
[dwklerds-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-94 Residual-Current Criterion: Pickup Characteristic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Current/Negative-Sequence Current (3I0/3I2)
For long lines, high load currents can lead to destabilization of the residual-current criterion (see
Figure 6-94 ). For the detection of double ground faults, the load-independent negative-sequence current
criterion is extended. In addition to the zero-sequence current, the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-
sequence current is also monitored. If the ratio of zero-sequence current to negative-sequence current
exceeds a preset limit, the criterion is released. The zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current crite-
rion is stabilized for high negative-sequence currents using a parabolic characteristic. Figure 6-95 shows the
connection. A prerequisite for release of the zero-sequence current/negative-sequence current criterion is a
minimum current of 0.2 Irated for 3I0.
[dwkli0i2-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-95 I0/I2 Criterion: Pickup Characteristic
Ground-Fault Detection: Zero-Sequence Voltage V0
Only for current-transformer saturation, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is taken into account for the
release of the ground-fault detection for double ground faults. If V0 exceeds the firmly set threshold of 0.23 V
Vrated, the zero-sequence voltage criterion is released.
Pickup Method
The pickup method selects the fault loops to be measured.
Impedance pickup is preconfigured as the pickup method.
Zone Assignment
The calculated impedance vectors for the fault loops are assigned to the zones. For each zone, an operate
curve is defined in the R-X plane. The following operate curves are available:
Quadrilateral characteristic (preconfigured)
MHO characteristic curve
The description of operate curves can be found in sections 6.6.9.1 Description and 6.6.10.1 Description .
phasors in the R-X plane, the direction is then additionally analyzed. The description can be found in chapter
6.6.4 Direction Determination .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Loop Selection for Double Faults in Isolated/Resonant-Grounded Systems

In isolated or resonant-grounded systems, no short-circuit-like currents flow in the event of a 1-phase-to-
ground fault. There is only a shift of the voltage triangle (see Figure 6-96 ). For system operation, this state is
not an immediate danger. In the entire galvanically connected system, the voltage of the phase affected by
the ground fault is approximately 0 V. Thus each load current gives an impedance of approximately 0 . The
distance protection may not respond in this case. A 1-phase phase-to-ground pickup without ground-current
pickup is thus prevented.
[dwerdslu-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-96 Ground Fault in the Non-Grounded System
If a ground fault occurs, a significant starting current can flow in an extended resonant-grounded system. This
can result in a pickup of the ground-current pickup. Special measures must be taken to prevent unwanted
pickups when a ground fault occurs.
Specify a uniform double ground-fault preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which
fault will be switched off.
For a double ground fault in the isolated or resonant-grounded system, it is enough to switch off one base
point. The 2nd fault can remain in the system as a simple ground fault. Specify a uniform double ground-fault
preference for the galvanically contiguous system. This specifies which fault will be switched off. The Phase
preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference. The following double ground-
fault preferences can be selected.
Setting for Parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph- Principle of Preference
g)
C(A) acyclical Acyclical C before A before B
A(C) acyclical Acyclical A before C before B
B(A) acyclical Acyclical B before A before C
A(B) acyclical Acyclical A before B before C
C(B) acyclical Acyclical C before B before A
B(C) acyclical Acyclical B before C before A
C(A) cyclical Cyclical C before A before B
A(C) cyclical Cyclical A before C before B before A
In the 8 preference cases, a ground fault will be switched off according to the preference program. The 2nd
fault remains as a simple ground fault in the system and can be detected using the Ground-fault detection
function.
Influence of the Inrush-Current Detection

If the device is equipped with the inrush-current detection function, the distance protection can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents. In case of interaction with the inrush-current detection the
following configurations are possible:
Blocking of the pickup for the overcurrent pickup method, V-/I-pickup and V-/I-/j-pickup
Blocking of individual distance zones
Blocking of the pickup during impedance starting by blocking the external distance zone(s)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Inrush-current detection can be configured individually for the blocking of the mentioned pickup methods
and distance zones. In case of blocking, the distance zone that is linked to the inrush-current detection or the
pickup method will not pick-up. The function Inrush-current detection signals the blocking through a corre-
sponding indication. Once the blocking drops out and the pickup condition for the respective method or the
linked distance zone is met, the pickup is signaled and the corresponding time delay will start. After that time,
the operate indication will be generated. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section
6.49 Inrush-Current Detection ) is in effect can the blocking be set.
6.6.3.3 Application and Setting Notes - General Settings

start.
to run.

protection characteristic curve (see Figure 6-108 ). The inclination angle set here for the distance protection
characteristic curve applies to all zones in the function.
Siemens recommends setting the Dist. characteristic angle parameter to the line angle.
EXAMPLE:
Calculate the line angle from the data of the positive-sequence impedance (Z1) on the line to be protected in
the following way:
If you need to coordinate the function with other equipment, you can also set the inclination angle of the
distance protection characteristic differently.

The 3I0> threshold value parameter is used to define the zero-sequence current limit for ground-fault
detection.
Determine the maximum ground current for a simple ground fault. Set the parameter 3I0> threshold
value to a slightly higher value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to set the inclination of the 3I0> characteristic curve
for ground-fault detection.
Power-system unbalance (for example, untwisted lines) and current-transformer errors can cause a residual-
current flow at the protection device in the case of higher phase currents, even if there is no ground fault. The
3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid unwanted ground activation. If no extreme
power-system unbalance and extraordinary current-transformer faults are expected, Siemens recommends
keeping the recommended setting value of 0.10.
Default setting (_:2311:108) Delay 1-phase pickup = 0.04 s

The Delay 1-phase pickup parameter is used to delay pickup in the event of simple ground faults in the
solated/resonant-grounded system for the duration of the transient.
In resonant-grounded systems (neutral point grounding through an arc-suppression coil), when a ground fault
occurs, it leads to non-system-frequency transients. The starting oscillation can lead to pickup of the I0> crite-
rion. The Delay 1-phase pickup parameter is used to delay the pickup.
Parameter: Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g)
Default setting (_:2311:116) Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g) = C (A) acyclic

The Phase preferen. (ph-ph-g) parameter is used to define the order of preference for double ground
faults.
The following table shows which loops are analyzed for different settings of the Phase preferen. (ph-
ph-g) parameter:
Parameter Value Activated Loop(s) Analyzed Loop(s)
C (A) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd
A (C) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) A-gnd
B (A) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd
A (B) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
C (B) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
B (C) acyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
C (A) cyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd
A (C) cyclic A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) B-gnd
all A-gnd, B-gnd, (A-B) A-gnd, B-gnd
B-gnd, C-gnd, (B-C) B-gnd, C-gnd
A-gnd, C-gnd, (C-A) C-gnd; A-gnd
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If you wish to switch off both base points of a ground fault, set the parameter Phase preferen. (ph-ph-
g) = all.
Parameter: Max. unbalance Vph-ph
Default setting (_:2311:115) Max. unbalance Vph-ph = 25 %

The parameter Max. unbalance Vph-ph can be used to specify the maximum permitted unbalance for
phase-to-phase voltages in the healthy condition. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
NOTE
i Only if you are working with MHO characteristics the following parameters will be visible:
The parameters apply to all MHO zones!
Parameter: Mem. polarization(ph-g)
Default setting (:_2310:_111) Mem. polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %

With the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
teristic curve depending on the source impedance. If you wish to work with the basic characteristic without
extension, set the Mem. polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.
Default setting (:_2310:_112) Mem. polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %

With the Mem. polarization(ph-ph) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
Parameter: Cross polarization(ph-g)
Default setting (:_2310:_113) Cross polarization(ph-g) = 15.0 %

With the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter, you can specify the degree of polarization with an
extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-g) parameter to 0.0 %.
Default setting (:_2310:_114) Cross polarization(ph-ph) = 15.0 %

extension, set the Cross polarization(ph-ph) parameter to 0.0 %.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.3.4 Settings

General
on dist. pickup
_:2311:107 General:Dist. character- 30.0 to 90.0 85.0
istic angle
value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
_:2311:104 General:3I0 pickup 0.05 to 0.30 0.10
stabilization
_:2311:108 General:Delay 1-phase 0.00 sto 0.50 s 0.04 s
pickup
_:2311:116 General:Phase preferen. C (A) acyclic C (A) acyclic
(ph-ph-g) A (C) acyclic
C (B) acyclic
B (C) acyclic
A (B) acyclic
B (A) acyclic
C (A) cyclic
A (C) cyclic
all
_:2311:115 General:Max. unbalance 5 % to 50 % 25 %
Vph-ph
tion(ph-g)
tion(ph-ph)
tion(ph-g)
tion(ph-ph)
Pickup Z<
_:3661:101 Pickup Z<:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
_:3661:102 Pickup Z<:Use ph-g load no no
cutout yes
(ph-g) 5A 0.010 to 120.000 5.000
cutout (ph-g)
_:3661:105 Pickup Z<:Use ph-ph no no
load cutout yes
(ph-ph) 5A 0.010 to 120.000 4.000
cutout (ph-ph)
Z 1
on
test
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

blocked yes
detect. yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3571:102 Z 1:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:3571:103 Z 1:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
_:3571:104 Z 1:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.250
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3571:105 Z 1:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:106 Z 1:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3571:107 Z 1:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3571:108 Z 1:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 2
on
test
blocked yes
detect. yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3572:102 Z 2:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:3572:103 Z 2:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
_:3572:104 Z 2:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.010 to 120.000 0.500
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3572:105 Z 2:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:106 Z 2:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3572:107 Z 2:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3572:108 Z 2:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Z 3
on
test
blocked yes
detect. yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3573:102 Z 3:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.000
_:3573:103 Z 3:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.000
_:3573:104 Z 3:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 5.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 1.000
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3573:105 Z 3:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:106 Z 3:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3573:107 Z 3:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3573:108 Z 3:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Z 4
on
test
blocked yes
detect. yes
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
comp. yes
forward
reverse
_:3574:102 Z 4:X reach 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
_:3574:103 Z 4:R (ph-g) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
_:3574:104 Z 4:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.050 to 600.000 12.000
5A 0.010 to 120.000 2.400
angle
phase)
(multi-ph.)
_:3574:105 Z 4:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:106 Z 4:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:3574:107 Z 4:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:3574:108 Z 4:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Z ph-g WYE O
_:2311:301 General:Z ph-ph DEL O
Group indicat.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Pickup Z<
_:3661:51 Pickup Z<:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:3661:52 Pickup Z<:Behavior ENS O
_:3661:53 Pickup Z<:Health ENS O
Z 1
Z 2
Z 3
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Z 4
To determine the direction of a short circuit, an impedance phasor is used for each loop. Depending on the
quality of the measurands, different calculation methods can be used. Immediately after a fault occurs, the
short-circuit voltage is influenced by the compensating processes in the measured signals. Hence, the
voltage buffered before the occurrence of the short circuit is used. If the steady state short-circuit voltage (for
a nearby fault) is also too small for direction determination, an unfaulted voltage is used. This is theoretically
perpendicular to the actual short-circuit voltages. This applies both to phase-to-phase loops and to phase-to-
ground loops (Figure 6-97). When calculating the directional vector, this is taken into account by a rotation of
90. Table 6-2 shows the assignment of the measurands to the 6 fault loops for determining the direction.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwksfreu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-97 Direction Determination with External Short-Circuit Voltages
Table 6-2 Assignment of Measurands for Direction Determination
Loop Measured Current (Direc- Actual Short-Circuit External Short-Circuit

tion) Voltage Voltage
A-gnd IA VA VBC
B-gnd IB VB VCA
C-gnd IC VC VAB
A-gnd 12 IA - Ignd 1 VA VBC
B-gnd 1 IB - Ignd 1 VB VCA
C-gnd 1 IC - Ignd 1 VC VAB
A-B IA - IB VAB VBC - VCA
B-C IB - IC VBC VCA - VAB
C-A IC - IA VCA VAB - VBC
If the measured voltage is too small and no stored voltage is available, the direction is decided to be forward.
If a dead line is connected and this line is faulty (for example, switching when the grounding switch is
engaged), this case can occur.
The theoretical steady state direction-characteristic curve is shown in Figure 6-98.
If buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direction-characteristic curve:
For this reason, the direction-characteristic curve has a reserve distance from the limits of the first quadrant in
the R-X diagram (Figure 6-98).
12 Taking residual compensation into consideration
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Since each zone can be set to forward, backward or non-directional, different (reflected through the center)
direction-characteristic curves are used for forward and backward. A non-directional zone has no direction-
characteristic curve. For such a zone, the entire trip region applies.
Features of Direction Determination

The theoretical steady state direction-characteristic curve in Figure 6-98 applies for actual short-circuit
voltages.
If external short-circuit or buffered voltages are used, the following factors influence the position of the direc-
tion-characteristic curve:
Figure 6-99 shows the direction-characteristic curve, taking the source impedance into consideration for
external short-circuit or buffered voltages (without load transport). Since these voltages are equal to the
corresponding generator voltage E, and they also do not change after the short circuit occurs, the direction-
characteristic curve appears in the impedance diagram shifted by the source impedance ZS1 = E1/I1. For
fault location F1 (Figure 6-99a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in
the backward direction. For all fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer),
there is a consensus for forward (Figure 6-99b). If the current reverses, the orientation of the direction-char-
acteristic curve changes suddenly (Figure 6-99c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring
point (current transformer). The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the value of I2. During load transport
on the line, the direction-characteristic curve can also rotate by the load angle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwrspeiu-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-99 Direction-Characteristic Curve with External Short-Circuit or Buffered Voltages
Direction Determination for Series-Compensated Lines

The direction-characteristic curves and their shift by the source impedance also apply for lines with series
capacitors. For a short circuit upstream of the local series capacitor, however, the short-circuit voltage
reverses if the protective spark gap SF has not picked up (see Figure 6-100).
[dwrserko-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-100 Voltage Characteristic for a Short Circuit Upstream of a Series Capacitor
(1) Without pickup of the protective spark gap

(2) With pickup of the protective spark gap
The distance protection thus senses a false fault direction. But in this case as well, direction measurement is
correct due to the use of buffered voltages (see Figure 6-101a).
For direction determination, the voltage before the occurrence of the fault is used. Thus the peaks of the
direction-characteristic curves, depending on the source impedance and load conditions before occurrence of
the fault, appear shifted so far that the capacitor reactance does not lead to apparent reversal of direction
(Figure 6-101b). The capacitor reactance is always lower than the source reactance.
If the short circuit is downstream of the capacitor thus in reverse direction from where the device is installed
(current transformer) the peaks of the direction-characteristic curve are shifted in the other direction
(Figure 6-101c). This also ensures a correct direction determination in this case.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwrklser-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-101 Direction-Characteristic Curves for Series-Compensated Lines
So that the direction determination for lines with series compensation functions correctly, you must set the
parameter Series compensation = yes in the Line function group.
6.6.5 Pickup Method: Impedance Pickup
6.6.5.1 Description
In impedance pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-
current thresh, the impedances between the phase-to-phase loops are calculated. If a ground fault is
detected, the impedances of the phase-to-ground loops are also calculated.
Impedance pickup includes the elimination of apparent impedance and if activated monitoring of the load
cutout.
Healthy Loops
In impedance pickup, all 6 line loops are calculated. Here, the short-circuit currents and voltages of short-
circuited lines also influence the impedances of the healthy loops. For an A-gnd fault, for example, the short-
circuit current in line A also influences the measured values in measurement loops A-B and C-A. The ground
current is also measured in loops B-gnd and C-gnd. Together with load currents flowing, so-called "apparent
impedances" occur in the healthy loops. These have nothing to do with the actual troubleshooting.
These apparent impedances in the healthy loops are typically greater than the fault impedance of the short-
circuit loop. The healthy loops contain only part of the short-circuit current, and always have a higher voltage
than the faulty loop. They are therefore of no significance for the zone selectivity of the protection.
In addition to zone selectivity, phase selectivity is also important. Phase selectivity includes the identification
of the faulty phase, the generation of phase-selective indications, and the possibility of executing a 1-pole
automatic reclosing function (AREC). Depending on the infeed conditions, short circuits near the station may
have the result that the healthy loops see the short circuit at a greater distance, but they still see it within a
tripping area. This case leads to a disconnection without the option of a 1-pole AREC. The 3-pole disconnec-
tion of the line then results.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Inspecting the loops reliably assures zone and phase selectivity. Loops are inspected in 2 steps.
From the calculated loop impedance and their partial impedances (phase or ground), a replication of the
line is first simulated.
If the replication is plausible, the corresponding loop activation is categorized as valid.

If the impedances of more than one loop lie within the zone range, the smallest is still declared valid. Further-
more, all loops are declared valid whose impedance is greater than the lowest impedance by not more than
50 %. Loops with greater impedances are eliminated. The exception is any loop declared plausible in the first
step. These can then no longer be eliminated.
This eliminates healthy apparent impedances on the one hand, but on the other hand simultaneously detects
unbalanced multiphase short circuits and multiple faults correctly. The loops found valid are converted into
phase information. This allows the pickup to be signaled in a phase-selective manner.
Load Cutout
For long lines with high loads, there is a risk that the load impedance will be reflected in the operate curve of
the distance protection. For operate curves with high R segments, a load cutout can be configured that elimi-
nates unwanted pickups due to overload. The load cutout (see Figure 6-102 can be configured for phase-to-
phase loops and for phase-to-ground loops.
The parameters are explained in chapter 6.6.5.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Recommended setting value (_:101) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.10 A

phase-current thresh = 0.10 A.
Load Cutout
The load cutout can be set using the following parameters:
Default setting (_:102) Use ph-g load cutout = Yes
Default setting (_:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 20.000
Default setting (_:104) Angle load cutout (ph-g) = 45.0
Default setting (_:105) Use ph-ph load cutout = Yes
Default setting (_:106) R load cutout (ph-ph) = 25.000
Default setting (_:107) Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = 45.0

The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops (ph-gnd) and phase-to-phase loops (ph-ph).
Using the parameters Use ph-g load cutout and Use ph-ph load cutout , you specify whether
the load range is cut out of the impedance level or not. The load cutout parameters are visible only if you set
the parameters Use ph-g load cutout = yes and Use ph-ph load cutout = yes .
Since there is no restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of
a 1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load
current. For these cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic.
In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance zone. The
zone may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific application, calcu-
late the smallest load impedance and the greatest load impedance angle under heavy load (see
Figure 6-102 ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-102 Load Cutout
The values should be set a little smaller (about 10 %) than the minimum load impedance expected. The
minimum load impedance results at maximum load current and minimum operating voltage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of load-cutout parameters in balanced load conditions
110 kV overhead line, 150 mm2, with the data:
Pmax = 100 MVA
Imax = 525 A
Minimum operating voltage
Vmin = 0.9 Vrated
Voltage transformer 110 kV/0.1 kV
The primary minimum load impedance is then calculated as follows:
[fo_ltber1-210514, 1, en_US]
The secondary minimum load impedance is then:
[fo_ltber2-210514, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting values result for setting the primary and secondary values:
Primary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 108.9 or
Secondary: R load cutout (ph-ph) = 11.9
Set the opening angle of the load cutout (parameters Angle load cutout (ph-ph) and Angle load
cutout (ph-g) ) greater (approx. 5) than the maximum occurring load angle (corresponding to the
minimum power factor cos ).
EXAMPLE
Minimum power factor under heavy load (cos max)min = 0.8
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
max = 36.9
Setting value Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = max + 5 = 41.9
You can find additional setting notes in Example application high voltage overhead line in 6.6.13.5 Setup
Notes for Pickup Method
When, with double lines, 2 line systems are on a single tower, there is a significant coupling between the 2
line systems. In the event of a 1-pole tripping of neighboring circuits, increased load currents and coupled
ground currents can cause a ground pickup. This pickup can be prevented by separate setting of the load
cutout for phase-to-ground loops.
During the 1-pole dead time on the parallel line, a significant ground current flows on the intact line. This
ground current is caused by the coupling in the zero-sequence system. The ground current during the 1-
phase pause on the parallel line must be taken into consideration when setting the R load cutout (ph-
g) parameter.
EXAMPLE
Calculation of the load-cutout parameters for an application on a double circuit line
This example applies to a double line with zero-sequence system coupling of both line systems and 1-pole
tripping on one system in the double line.
The set values for the load cutout parameters are calculated for a 400-kV overhead line with the following
data:
220 km double line on one tower (zero system coupling of both line systems)
Maximum load current per line with both lines in operation:
Pmax = 1200 MVA
Imax = 1732 A
Minimum operating voltage Vmin = 0.9 Vrated

Voltage transformer 400 kV/100 V
Parameter kr = 1.54
The minimum load impedance results in:
[fofr1bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value applies to phase-to-phase loops. For double lines, the 1-pole dead time on the parallel
line must also be taken into consideration for phase-to-ground loops. During the 1-pole dead time, the load
current on the intact line increases. At the same time, a load current flows in the ground path on the parallel
line in the 1-pole dead time. Calculate the minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops with the load
current in the ground path. For the calculation in this example, this ground current is given as a value relative
to the load current Imax.
For the ratio of Ignd on the healthy line to Imax in the 1-phase pause on the parallel line, the following value is
assumed:
[fofx2bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The line length as well as the source impedance and line impedance have an influence on this ratio. If you
cannot determine the value using a system simulation, you can assume the following approximate values:
Long lines (about 200 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.4
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Short lines (about 25 km) Ignd1pol:Pause/Imax: approximately 0.6
The minimum load impedance for phase-to-ground loops results in the following for the calculation example:
[fofr2bs2-270910-01.tif, 1, en_US]
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values as the primary or secondary
variables. Conversion into secondary values yields:
[fofr3bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofr4bs2-051109-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10%, these settings are used:

R load cutout (ph-ph) = 108 (primary) = 10.8 (secondary)
R load cutout (ph-g) = 53.5 (primary) = 5.35 (secondary)
The opening angle of the load cutout, as in the first example for the single line, is calculated using the
minimum power factor.
6.6.5.3 Settings

Pickup Z<
_:101 Pickup Z<:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.050 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
_:102 Pickup Z<:Use ph-g load no no
cutout yes
_:103 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 25.000
(ph-g) 5A 0.020 to 120.000 5.000
_:104 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 to 60.0 45.0
cutout (ph-g)
_:105 Pickup Z<:Use ph-ph no no
load cutout yes
_:106 Pickup Z<:R load cutout 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 20.000
(ph-ph) 5A 0.020 to 120.000 4.000
_:107 Pickup Z<:Angle load 20.0 to 60.0 45.0
cutout (ph-ph)

(Type)
Pickup Z<
_:51 Pickup Z<:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup Z<:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup Z<:Health ENS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.6 Pickup Method: Overcurrent Pickup
6.6.6.1 Description
In overcurrent pickup, the phase currents are monitored. If the phase currents exceed the set values O/C
threshold Iph>>, a phase-selective pickup signal is output.
The phase-selective pickup signals are converted to loop information for the distance zones. If the network is
grounded, the loop selection for 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection depends on parameter Loops
with 1-ph. pickup.
For more information about ground-fault detection in grounded systems, please refer to chapter 6.6.2.2 Struc-
ture of the Function .
If the network is not grounded, the selection of the 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection always
depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked up.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. If a ground fault is detected, it will be indicated.
Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked
Recommended setting value (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

You can use the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter to determine whether the zone generates an
operate indication or not.
no If the overcurrent pickup is initiated, it will generate an operate indication
after the time delay has elapsed.
Siemens recommends keeping the setting value for typical applications.
yes The overcurrent pickup does not generate an operate indication.
The operate indication is not included in the formation of the group indica-
tion on the function or function group level. Fault recording is not started
automatically.
Default setting (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.=no

The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter is visible only when the Inrush-current detection func-
tion is available in the application. You can use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to deter-
mine whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
NOTE
i If the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes is set, the minimum pickup time is about 1.5
system cycles, even if no transformer inrush current is detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush
curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-current detection is absolutely necessary.
Parameter: O/C threshold Iph>>
Default setting (_:105) O/C threshold Iph>> = 1.8 A

Use the O/C threshold Iph>> parameter to set the pickup threshold for the overcurrent pickup. Set the
parameter O/C threshold Iph>> for the specific application. During fault-free operation, the maximum
current must not exceed the pickup threshold.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Loops with 1-ph. pickup
Recommended setting value (_:114) Loops with 1-ph. pickup = ph-ph or ph-gnd loop
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, the Loops with 1-ph. pickup
parameter will be valid and visible.
You can use the Loops with 1-ph. pickup parameter to determine which loop will be measured during
1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection.
ph-ph or ph-gnd loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the selection of the
loop always depends on the max. current in the phases that are not picked
up. If a current in the phases that are not picked up exceed 2/3 of the
current in the phase that is picked up, the respective phase-phase loop will
be selected, for example:
Pickup A, IB > IC and IB > 2/3 IA Selection loop A-B
Pickup A, IC > IB and IC > 2/3 IA Selection loop A-C
Otherwise, the phase-to-ground loop will be selected, for example:
Pickup A, IB and IC < 2/3 IA Selection loop A-E
phase-to-ground loop During 1-phase pickup without ground-fault detection, the zone will work
with the phase-to-ground measuring element. If A is picked up, the A-E
loop will be selected.
Parameter: Op. delay forward pickup
Default setting (_:115) Op. delay forward pickup = 1.2 s

If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay forward pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the overcurrent pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup
responds independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay forward pickup for the specific application.
Parameter: Op. delay non-dir. pickup
Default setting (_:116) Op. delay non-dir. pickup = 1.2 s

If a forward fault has occurred and the time Op. delay non-dir. pickup (directional finite time) has
elapsed, the overcurrent pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup
responds independently of the distance zones pickup.
Set the parameter Op. delay non-dir. pickup for the specific application.
6.6.6.3 Settings

Pickup I
_:1 Pickup I:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Pickup I:Operate & no no
_:27 Pickup I:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:105 Pickup I:O/C threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
Iph>> 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.25 A to 175.00 A 9.000 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:114 Pickup I:Loops with 1- phase-to-ground loop ph-ph or ph-gnd
ph. pickup ph-ph or ph-gnd loop loop
_:115 Pickup I:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 1.20 s
forward pickup
_:116 Pickup I:Op. delay non- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 1.20 s
dir. pickup

(Type)
Pickup I
_:51 Pickup I:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup I:Health ENS O
_:55 Pickup I:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Pickup I:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pickup I:Operate ACT O
6.6.7 Pickup Method: V/I Pickup
6.6.7.1 Description
V/I pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:
[DwUIanreg-160813-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-103 V/I Characteristic
The geometry of the V/I characteristic is determined by the parameters shown in the figure (dots).
A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must
exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-103 determine the slope of the V/I characteristic.
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I characteristic to provide optimum response to
various fault types and system conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the char-
acteristic in Figure 6-103:
Table 6-3 Assignment of Settings in the V/I Characteristic
Setting When Evaluating Phase-to- Setting when Evaluating Phase-to-Phase

Ground Voltages Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>>
For high-current short-circuits, overcurrent pickup O/C threshold Iph>> is superimposed. If the phase
currents exceed the threshold value O/C threshold Iph>>, pickup occurs regardless of the voltage.
In isolated/arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems, pickup is undesired for single-phase ground faults.
Ground-fault detection prevents undesired pickup in the case of single-phase ground faults.
For more information about ground-fault detection in isolated/arc-suppression-coil-ground systems, please
refer to chapter 6.6.3.2 Structure of the Function.
The pickup will be indicated phase-selectively. Ground faults are indicated only if at least one phase pickup
has occurred.

tion is available in the application. With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
NOTE
Parameter: Pickup program
Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup program = ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage

You can use the Pickup program parameter to define the voltage selection for different fault types. The 1st
position for the setting option applies to ground faults. The 2nd position for the setting option applies to
phase-to-phase faults.
ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are eval-
uated. If no ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-phase voltages
are evaluated.
Siemens recommends this setting value for all system types. With this
setting, you achieve maximum sensitivity for all fault types.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

always ph-ph voltage The phase-to-phase voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
Single-phase ground faults and double ground faults are not always
detected correctly.
If the parameterization is to be compatible with already existing devices,
select this setting value.
always ph-gnd voltage The phase-to-ground voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
This setting value can be used for all fault types as well. If you evaluate the
phase-to-ground voltages in the event of phase-to-phase faults, the sensi-
tivity for pickup is less.
ph-gnd voltage or Iph>> If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are eval-
uated.
If no ground fault has been detected, only overcurrent pickup applies (O/C
threshold Iph>>).
Parameter: Min. current thresh. Iph>
Default setting (_:102) Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A

You can use the Min. current thresh. Iph> parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the
current. Set the threshold to allow operation of the distance protection backup function in the event of remote
faults in other feeders. If the Min. current thresh. Iph> is not exceeded in some short circuits
depending on system conditions it is necessary to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens
recommends using the default setting Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A.
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>
Default setting (_:103) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> = 48.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: Min. current
thresh. Iph>).
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>
Default setting (_:104) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> = 80.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: Min. current
thresh. Iph>).

You can use the O/C threshold Iph>> parameter to set the upper pickup threshold for overcurrent
pickup. Set the parameter O/C threshold Iph>> for the specific application. During fault-free operation,
the maximum current must not exceed the pickup threshold.
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>>
Default setting (_:106) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> = 48.000 V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: O/C threshold
Iph>>).
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>>
Default setting (_:107) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> = 80.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I characteristic (parameter: O/C threshold
Iph>>).
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
loop will be selected.

elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup responds inde-
pendently of the distance zones pickup.

elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup responds inde-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.7.3 Settings

Pickup V/I
_:1 Pickup V/I:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Pickup V/I:Operate & no no
_:27 Pickup V/I:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:101 Pickup V/I:Pickup ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage ph-gnd or ph-ph
program always ph-ph voltage voltage
always ph-gnd voltage
ph-gnd voltage or Iph>>
_:102 Pickup V/I:Min. current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
thresh. Iph> 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 175.000 A 1.000 A
_:103 Pickup V/I:Undervolt. 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
ph-gnd at Iph>
ph-ph at Iph>
_:105 Pickup V/I:O/C threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
Iph>> 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.249 A to 175.000 A 9.000 A
ph-gnd at Iph>>
ph-ph at Iph>>
_:114 Pickup V/I:Loops with 1- phase-to-ground loop ph-ph or ph-gnd
ph. pickup ph-ph or ph-gnd loop loop
_:115 Pickup V/I:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 1.20 s
forward pickup
_:116 Pickup V/I:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 1.20 s
non-dir. pickup

(Type)
Pickup V/I
_:51 Pickup V/I:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup V/I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup V/I:Health ENS O
_:55 Pickup V/I:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Pickup V/I:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pickup V/I:Operate ACT O
6.6.8 Pickup Method: V/I/ Pickup
6.6.8.1 Description
V/I/j pickup is a phase- and loop-based pickup method. The following figure shows the V/I pickup character-
istic:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[DwUIPhia-160813-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-104 V/I/j Characteristic (Normal Characteristic: a-b-c/Sensitive Characteristic: a-d-e)
The basic structure of the V/I/j characteristic is identical to that for V/I pickup with an additional, sensitive
angle-controlled characteristic (short-circuit region j> in Figure 6-104). The sensitive characteristic (a-d-e) is
used if the fault impedance is close to the straight lines. In this way, it is still possible to differentiate reliably
between load and short-circuit conditions in cases where simple V/I pickup fails.
Possible applications include, for instance, protection of long lines or line segments with intermediate infeed
and low external impedance at the same time. In the event of a short circuit at the end of the line or in the
distance protection backup range, the local measured voltage is interrupted only briefly. In this case, the
phase angle between the current and voltage serves as an additional criterion for fault detection.
The angle-dependent region of the characteristic (hatched area in Figure 6-104) can be set for the forward
direction only (line direction) or both directions.
A requirement for pickup is that the phase currents have exceeded the set threshold value Min. current
thresh. Iph>. If phase-to-phase voltages are being evaluated, both associated phase currents must
exceed the Min. current thresh. Iph>.
If the phase currents are greater than the Min. current thresh. Iph>, the pickup value depends on the
voltage and the phase angle between the current and voltage. The voltage settings in Figure 6-104 determine
the slope of the U/I-/j characteristic.
With the Pickup program parameter, you control which voltages are evaluated in the case of ground faults
or phase-to-phase faults. In this way, you can adjust the V/I-/j characteristic to provide optimum response to
various fault types and network conditions. The following table shows which voltage settings define the char-
acteristic in Figure 6-104:
Setting When Evaluating Phase-to- Setting When Evaluating Phase-to-
Ground Voltages Phase Voltages
V(Iph>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Iph> Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>
V(Iph>>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Iph>> Undervolt. phase-phase for Iph>>
V(Iphi>) Undervolt. phase-ground for Iphi> Undervolt. phase-phase for Iphi>
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The phase angle between the current and voltage is determined as follows:
If you are evaluating phase-to-ground voltages, the phase angle is determined from the phase-to-ground
voltage and the associated phase current without consideration of the ground current. A requirement is
that the corresponding phase current must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
If you are evaluating phase-to-phase voltages, the angle is determined from the phase-to-phase voltage
and the associated current difference. A requirement is that both phase currents and the definitive differ-
ential current for the loop must have exceeded the minimum phase current Iph>.
With the j< and j> parameters, you define the upper and lower limits of the short-circuit angle range (see
following figure).
[DwUIphiK-160813-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-105 Limit Angle of the Short-Circuit Angle Range
If the phase angle is greater than the limit angle j> and less than the limit angle j<, the sensitive V/I/j char-
acteristic applies (a-d-e). Otherwise, the lower characteristic applies (a-b-c).

whether pickup is blocked during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
NOTE
Parameter: Pickup program
Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup program = ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage

You can use the Pickup program parameter to define the voltage selection for different fault types. The 1st
position for the setting option applies to ground faults. The 2nd position for the setting option applies to
phase-to-phase faults.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are eval-
uated. If no ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-phase voltages
are evaluated.
Siemens recommends this setting value for all system types. With this
setting, you achieve maximum sensitivity for all fault types.
always ph-ph voltage The phase-to-phase voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
Single-phase ground faults and double ground faults are not always
detected correctly.
always ph-gnd voltage The phase-to-ground voltages are always evaluated regardless of ground-
fault detection.
This setting value can be used for all fault types as well. If you evaluate the
phase-to-ground voltages in the event of phase-to-phase faults, the sensi-
tivity for pickup is less.
ph-gnd voltage or Iph>> If a ground fault has been detected, the phase-to-ground voltages are eval-
uated.
If no ground fault has been detected, only overcurrent pickup applies (O/C
threshold Iph>>).
Parameter: Min. current thresh. Iph>
Default setting (_:102) Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A

You can use the Min. current thresh. Iph> parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the
current. Set the threshold to allow operation of the distance protection backup function in the event of remote
faults in other feeders. If the Min. current thresh. Iph> is not exceeded in some short circuits
depending on system conditions it is necessary to take special measures for the weak infeed. Siemens
recommends using the default setting Min. current thresh. Iph> = 0.200 A.
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>
Default setting (_:103) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> = 48.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/j characteristic curve (parameter: Min.
current thresh. Iph>).
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>
Default setting (_:104) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> = 80.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/j characteristic curve (parameter: Min.
current thresh. Iph>).

You can use the O/C threshold Iph>> parameter to set the upper pickup threshold for overcurrent
pickup. Set the parameter O/C threshold Iph>> for the specific application. During fault-free operation,
the maximum current must not exceed the pickup threshold.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>>
Default setting (_:106) Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> = 48.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/j characteristic curve (parameter: O/C
threshold Iph>>).
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>>
Default setting (_:107) Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> = 80.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at Iph>> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
phase voltage for the lower overcurrent threshold in the U/I/j characteristic curve (parameter: O/C
threshold Iph>>).
Parameter: I>
Default setting (_:108) I> = 1.800 A

You can use the I> parameter to define the pickup threshold for angle-dependent pickup in the U/I/j char-
acteristic curve (j pickup).
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-gnd at I>
Default setting (_:109) Undervolt. ph-gnd at I> = 48.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-gnd at I> parameter to define the threshold value of the phase-to-
ground voltage for the current threshold I> in the U/I/j characteristic curve.
Parameter: Undervolt. ph-ph at I>
Default setting (_:110) Undervolt. ph-ph at I> = 80.000 V

You can use the Undervolt. ph-ph at I> parameter to define the threshold value for the phase-to-
ground voltage for the current threshold I> in the U/I/j characteristic curve.
Parameter: Effective direct. -pickup
Default setting (_:111) Effective direct. -pickup=forward + reverse

You can use the Effective direct. -pickup parameter to specify whether the U/I/j pickup forward
or forward + reverse operates. Set the parameter Effective direct. -pickup for the specific
application.
Parameter: >
Default setting(_:112) > = 50.0 V

You can use the > parameter to define the lower limit of the short-circuit angle range (jK).
Set the > parameter between the load angle jL and the short-circuit angle jK. Set the > parameter 10 to
20 smaller than the line angle (jL = arctan(XL/RL)). Ensure that unfavorable load conditions do not result in
pickup.
Parameter: <
Default setting(_:113) < = 110.0 V

You can use the < parameter to define the upper limit of the short-circuit angle range (jK). This limit is not
critical. Siemens recommends a setting value between 110 and 120.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Only if the Distance protection for grounded systems was instantiated, will the parameter Loops with
1-ph. pickup be valid and visible.
loop will be selected

elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay forward pickup responds inde-

elapsed, the pickup initiates an operate indication. The time Op. delay non-dir. pickup responds inde-
6.6.8.3 Settings

Pickup V/I/
_:1 Pickup V/I/:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Pickup V/I/:Operate & no no
_:27 Pickup V/I/:Blk. w. no no
inrush curr. detect. yes
_:101 Pickup V/I/:Pickup ph-gnd or ph-ph voltage ph-gnd or ph-ph
program always ph-ph voltage voltage
always ph-gnd voltage
ph-gnd voltage or Iph>>
_:102 Pickup V/I/:Min. current 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 35.000 A 0.200 A
thresh. Iph> 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 175.000 A 1.000 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:103 Pickup V/I/:Undervolt. 0.500 V to 200.000 V 48.000 V
ph-gnd at Iph>
ph-ph at Iph>
_:105 Pickup V/I/:O/C 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
threshold Iph>> 5 A @ 100 Irated 1.249 A to 175.000 A 9.000 A
ph-gnd at Iph>>
ph-ph at Iph>>
_:108 Pickup V/I/:I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.100 A to 35.000 A 1.800 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.500 A to 175.000 A 9.000 A
ph-gnd at I>
ph-ph at I>
_:111 Pickup V/I/:Effective forward + reverse forward +
direct. -pickup forward reverse
_:112 Pickup V/I/:> 30.0 to 60.0 50.0
_:113 Pickup V/I/:< 90.0 to 120.0 110.0
_:114 Pickup V/I/:Loops with phase-to-ground loop ph-ph or ph-gnd
1-ph. pickup ph-ph or ph-gnd loop loop
_:115 Pickup V/I/:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 1.20 s
forward pickup
_:116 Pickup V/I/:Op. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 1.20 s
non-dir. pickup

(Type)
Pickup V/I/
_:51 Pickup V/I/:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 Pickup V/I/:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Pickup V/I/:Health ENS O
_:55 Pickup V/I/:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Pickup V/I/:Pickup Phi ACT O
_:56 Pickup V/I/:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Pickup V/I/:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.9 Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve
6.6.9.1 Description
Logic of a Zone
[lopoly13-230511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-106 Logic Diagram of a Zone with a Quadrilateral Characteristic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-107 Logic Diagram of a Zone with Quadrilateral Characteristic Curve (Continuation)
Mode of Operation
Impedance calculation from the measured current and voltage values
Placement of the impedance into the zone

If the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the operating polygon of a distance zone, and the direction of
the impedance phasor matches the directionality of the zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is
example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the distance protection is described in Chapter
Operating Polygon
The quadrilateral characteristic (operating polygon) of the zone is an inclined parallelogram in the R-X plane.
The operating polygon is defined by the parameters X reach, R (ph-ph), R (ph-g), and Zone-incli-
nation angle.
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions.
The following figure shows an example with 4 zones for the distance protection with quadrilateral operate
characteristic.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i You can rename or delete the zones in DIGSI. You can also add additional zones from the DIGSI function
library.
6.6.9.2 Impedance Calculation

There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A.
A jump detection synchronizes all calculations to the occurrence of the fault. Synchronization enables
minimum and repeatable operate times to be achieved. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impe-
dances are calculated using the current cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the meas-
urands of the current fault condition.
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Phase Loops

For calculation of a phase-to-phase loop, for example, for a 2-phase A-B short circuit ( Figure 6-109 ), the
loop equation is:
[foflschl-160909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
(complex) measurands
(complex) line impedance
The line impedance is calculated as follows:
[folimped-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[dwllschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-109 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Phase Loop
As long as one of the lines involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing, the phase-to-phase loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time of the automatic
reclosing in A, for example, the loops A-B and C-A are blocked. This prevents an incorrect measurement with
undefined measurands. The process monitor in the Line function group observes the state of the automatic
reclosing and provides the blocking signal.
Impedance Calculation for Phase-to-Ground Loops

For calculation of a phase-to-ground loop, it must be considered that the impedance of the ground return path
generally does not match the impedance of the phases. This is the case, for example, for an C-gnd
( Figure 6-110 ) short circuit.
[dwleschl-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-110 Short Circuit of a Phase-to-Ground Loop
The voltage VC-gnd, the phase current IC, and the ground current Ignd of the faulty loop are measured.
[fofeschl-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The impedance at the location of the fault is calculated as:
[foreform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
and
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[foxeform-240609-01.tif, 1, en_US]
with
VC-gnd Short-circuit voltage phasor
IC Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
Ignd Phasor of the ground-fault current
V Phase angle of the short-circuit voltage
ph Short-circuit current phasor (phase C)
gnd Phase angle of the ground-fault current
The factors Kr = Rgnd/Rph and Kx = Xgnd/Xph depend only on the line constants and not on the distance to the
fault.
NOTE
i In the impedance calculation, the factors Kr and Kx are used for residual compensation. If you enter the
grounding resistance factors in the format k0 with Phi(k0), they are automatically converted into Kr and
Kx. Conversion is performed under consideration of the line angle. For this reason, pay attention to the
correct setting of the line angle in the general data of the Line function group (parameter (_:9001:108)
Line angle ).
As long as one of the phases involved is switched off, for example, during the 1-pole dead time of the auto-
matic reclosing, the phase-to-ground loops involved are not calculated. During the 1-pole dead time in the
automatic reclosing in C, the C-gnd loop is blocked, for example. This prevents an incorrect measurement
with undefined measurands. The process monitor observes the state of the automatic reclosing and provides
the blocking signal.

For double lines, both line systems are influenced by mutual coupling impedances (see Figure 6-111 ). With
ground faults, errors in the results of the impedance calculation occur unless particular measures are taken.
You can therefore effectively connect parallel-line compensation. This takes the ground current of the parallel
line into consideration in the line equation, compensating for the coupling influence. This ground current must
be applied to the device for this purpose. The loop equation in this case is similar to that of Figure 6-110 :
[fofokpl1-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[fofokpl2-150909-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Ignd-P is the ground current of the parallel line. The ratios R0M/3Rph and X0M/3Xph are line constants that result
from the geometry of the double line and the suitability of the grounding.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dweksdol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-111 Ground Fault on a Double Line
Without parallel-line compensation, the ground current of the parallel line typically results in the under-
reaching of the distance protection (the loop impedance seen by the distance protection appears to be
larger). If both lines end on different busbars and the grounding point is on a remote busbar (at B in
Figure 6-111 ), overreach can result.
The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation may not be
carried out for faults on the parallel line, since it would cause significant overreach. At installation point II in
Figure 6-111 , no compensation may occur for this fault situation.
The device thus receives an additional ground-current balance to perform a cross-comparison of the ground
currents in both lines. The compensation is only connected for those line ends where the ground current of
the parallel line is less than that of the end's own line. In example Figure 6-111 , Ignd is greater than Ignd-P:
There is compensation in I in that ZM Ignd-P is coupled in; in II there is no compensation.

Using the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter, you establish whether the distance protection
delay has elapsed.
as the line differential protection function is working.

whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes only if blocking based on inrush-
current detection is absolutely necessary.

Default setting (_:109) Directional mode=forward

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the zone operates forward, reverse,
or non-directional. Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed=yes

allowed on overhead lines. For practical use cases, only the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone
should be tripped 1-pole. For the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone, set the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed = yes. For all higher zones, set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = no.
Parameter: X reach
Default setting (_:102) X reach = 2.500

You can use the X reach parameter to set the limit of the polygon in the X direction. Determine the setting
First, create a time-grading schedule for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths
with their reactances X in /km into the time-grading schedule. The reactances X then define the range of the
distance zones.
Under the title Notes on the R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting at the end of the section, you will find notes on the
R/X setting.
You can find additional setting notes in Example application: High-voltage overhead line.
Parameter: R (ph-g)
Default setting (_:103) R (ph-g) = 2.500

You can use the R (ph-g) parameter to set the boundary of the polygon in the R direction for phase-to-
ground loops. The R radius for ground faults is calculated in a manner similar to that used for R (ph-ph)
setting value for phase-to-phase faults. For phase-to-ground faults, the fault resistance is greater than that for
phase-to-phase faults. For overhead lines, not only the arc resistance must be taken into consideration for a
ground fault, but also the tower-grounding resistance.
R/X setting.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: R (ph-ph)
Default setting (_:104) R (ph-ph) = 1.250

You can use the R (ph-ph) parameter to set the boundary of the polygon in the R direction for phase-to-
phase loops. The R (ph-ph) setting value considers the fault resistance at the fault location. The fault
ance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. Do not set the reserve
resistance any larger than necessary. For long, heavily loaded lines, the setting value may enter the load
range. A configurable load cutout prevents the pickup of the zone in the event of overload (see Load cutout in
chapter 6.6.5.1 Description.
For overhead lines, the setting value is determined primarily by the arc resistance. No significant arc is
possible in cables. With very short cables, ensure that the arc flashover at the local cable box is included in
the set resistance for Zone 1.
R/X setting.
Default setting (_:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s

You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the grading time of the zone for 1-phase
short circuits. The Operate delay (1-phase) must be set for the specific application.

You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the grading time of the zone for multi-
phase faults. The Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter must be set for the specific application.
Parameter: Zone-inclination angle
Default setting (_:113) Zone-inclination angle = 0.0

You can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to set the angle by which the upper limit of the
polygon is inclined in the 1st quadrant.
Under no circumstances may Zone 1 respond in the event of external faults, since this represents a loss of
selectivity. To prevent the loss of selectivity, the limit of the X setting for Zone 1 is inclined downwards by the
set angle. The default angle of 0 is typically retained for greater distance zones.
Parameter: Zone-spec. residu. comp.
Default setting (_:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp.=no

You can use the Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter to determine whether the zone operates with its
own, specific residual compensation factors or not.
no The zone works with the residual compensation factors set in the Line func-
tion group.
yes The zone works with the specific residual compensation factors of the
zone.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Only if the Zone-spec. residu. comp. = yes parameter in the zone is set, the residual compensation
factors set here will be valid and visible. If the parameter is set Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no, the
residual compensation factors set for the device apply.
Default setting (_:105) Kr = 1.00
Default setting (_:106) Kx = 1.00

You can use the Kr and Kx parameters to set the residual compensation with scalar factors.
NOTE
i The parameters Kr and Kx are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-spec.
residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = Kr, Kx for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
An example of calculation of the Kr and Kx parameters from line data can be found in the High-voltage over-
head-line application example in chapter 6.6.13.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line .
Default setting (_:107) K0 = 1.000
Default setting (_:108) Angle (K0) = 0.00

You can use the K0 and Angle (K0) parameters to set the residual compensation with the complex residual
compensation factor.
NOTE
i The parameters K0 and Angle (K0) are visible in the zone only if you have set the parameter Zone-
spec. residu. comp. = yes in the zone and the parameter Set. format residu. comp. = K0 for
the device. You can only change the setting value of the parameter Set. format residu. comp. in
DIGSI 5 under Device settings.
Notes on the R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting

In practice, the ratio of the resistance to the reactance setting lies in the following ranges:
Section Type R/X Ratio in the Zone Setting
Short cable sections (about 0.5 km to 3 km) 3 to 5
Longer cable sections (> 3 km) 2 to 3
Short overhead-line sections < 10 km 2 to 5
Overhead lines < 100 km 1 to 2
Long overhead lines 100 km to 200 km 0.5 to 1
Long extra-high voltage lines > 200 km 0.5
NOTE
i For short lines with large R/X ratios, note the following during zone setting: The angle errors of the current
and voltage transformers cause a rotation of the impedance measured in the direction of the R axis. The
risk that external faults will be shifted into the first zone increases if, because of the settings for the
polygon, kr and kx, the loop range is large in the R direction in relation to the X direction for Zone 1. Use
the grading factor of 85 % only up to an R/X ratio 1 (loop range).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For larger R/X settings, you can calculate a reduced grading factor for Zone 1 using the following formula:
STF Grading factor = range of Zone 1 relative to the line length
R Loop range in the direction R for Zone 1 = R1 (1 + kr)
X Loop range in the direction X for Zone 1 = X1 (1 + kx)
U Angle error of the voltage transformer (typically 1)
I Angle error of the current transformer (typically 1)
[fofdustf-060709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Alternatively or additionally, you can use the Zone-inclination angle parameter to incline the polygon
of Zone 1 in the first quadrant. This also prevents overreach (see Figure 6-108).
6.6.9.4 Settings

Z #
_:1 Z #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Z #:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:121 Z #:Blocked if no no
_:27 Z #:Blk. w. inrush curr. no no
detect. yes
_:11 Z #:1-pole operate allowed no yes
yes
_:101 Z #:Function mode ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
_:114 Z #:Zone-spec. residu. no no
comp. yes
_:109 Z #:Directional mode non-directional forward
forward
reverse
_:102 Z #:X reach 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:103 Z #:R (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:104 Z #:R (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.250
_:113 Z #:Zone-inclination angle 0 to 45 0
_:110 Z #:Operate delay (1- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.30 s
phase)
_:112 Z #:Operate delay (multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.30 s
ph.)
_:105 Z #:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:106 Z #:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:107 Z #:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:108 Z #:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Z #
_:81 Z #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Z #:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:501 Z #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Z #:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:301 Z #:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:302 Z #:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:303 Z #:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:304 Z #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Z #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.10 Zone with MHO Characteristic Curve
Logic of a Zone
[lomho13p-230511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-112 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-113 Logic Diagram of a Zone with MHO Characteristic (Continued)
Mode of Operation
Calculation of the polarization voltage from the measured current values
Placement of the polarization and loop voltage into the zone

To arrange the measurands in the tripping level of the MHO characteristic, the angle between 2 difference
vectors Z1 and Z2 is determined (see Figure 6-114). These vectors are calculated from the difference
between the 2 peaks of the circle's diameter and the fault impedance. The peak Zr corresponds to the setting
value of the zone (parameter Zr impedance reach and as in Figure 6-115); the peak k ZS corresponds
to the polarization value. The difference vectors are calculated as follows:
[fofdltzr-130709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the boundary case, ZF is on the peak of the circle. Then, the angle between the 2 difference vectors is 90
(Thales' theorem). Within the characteristic, the angle is greater than 90; outside the characteristic, it is less
than 90.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwmhomes-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-114 Vector Diagram of the Measurands for the MHO Characteristic
The Zr impedance reach parameter is used to define the zone. You determine whether the zone works in
a forward or reverse direction. In the reverse direction, the MHO characteristic is reflected across the
coordinate origin. Once the fault impedance of a loop lies well within the MHO characteristic of a distance
zone, the zone picks up. The loop information is converted into phase-selective pickup indications. The
phase-selective pickup indications of the zones are processed further in the output logic of the distance
protection and by external additional functions (for example, teleprotection scheme). The output logic of the
distance protection is described in Chapter 6.6.12 Output Logic of the Distance Protection.
Basic Characteristic of the MHO Circuit

The basic form of the MHO characteristic is shown in Figure 6-115. The MHO characteristic of the zone is a
circle through the coordinate origin in the R-X plane. The diameter is defined by the parameter Zr impe-
dance reach. The gradient is defined by the parameter Dist. characteristic angle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwmhogru-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-115 Basic Form of the MHO Characteristic
Polarized MHO Characteristic

The MHO characteristic passes through the coordinate origin. The boundary around the origin is undefined,
since the measuring voltage there is too small for reliable analysis. The MHO characteristic is thus polarized.
The polarization determines the lower peak of the circle, that is, the lower crossing of the diameter line on the
circle's circumference. The upper peak remains unchanged. It is defined by the parameter Zr impedance
reach. Immediately after a fault occurs, the short-circuit voltage is influenced by the compensation proce-
dure. Hence, the voltage buffered before the occurrence of the short circuit is used to perform the polariza-
tion. This shifts the lower peak by the impedance corresponding to the buffer voltage (seeFigure 6-116). If the
buffered short-circuit voltage is too small, a cross-polarized voltage is used. Theoretically, this is perpendic-
ular to the actual short-circuit voltages for both the phase-to-ground loops and the phase-to-phase loops. This
is taken into consideration with a 90 rotation during the calculation. The cross-polarized voltage also shifts
the lower peak of the MHO characteristic.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwmhopol-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-116 Polarized MHO Characteristic
Properties of the MHO Characteristic

The cross-polarized or buffered voltage (without load transport) is equal to the corresponding generator
voltage E. After the short circuit, it does not change (see also Figure 6-117). The lower peak of the circle's
diameter thus appears shifted in the impedance diagram by the polarization value k ZS1 = kE1/I1. The
upper peak remains defined by the setting value Zr impedance reach. For fault location F1
(Figure 6-117a), the short circuit lies in the forward direction, and the source impedance is in the reverse
direction. All fault locations up to directly where the device is installed (current transformer) are unambigu-
ously within the MHO characteristic (Figure 6-117b). If the current reverses, the peak of the circle diameter
changes suddenly (Figure 6-117c). A reversed current I2 now flows through the measuring point (current
transformer). The source impedance ZS2 + ZL determines the current I2. The peak Zr remains unchanged. It
is now the lower limit of the diameter of the circle. During load transport on the line, the peak phasor can also
rotate by the load angle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwksfrsp-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-117 Polarized MHO Characteristic with Cross-Polarized or Buffered Voltages
Selecting the Polarization

For short lines, the range of the zone must be set as a small value. For small loop voltages, the phase angle
comparison between the differential voltage and the loop voltage is unreliable. This can lead to incorrect
directional decisions (tripping or blocking despite reverse faults). If a polarization voltage is used for the
phase angle comparison, these problems are avoided. The polarization voltage is proportionally composed of
the loop voltage buffered before the fault occurred and the present loop voltage. The following equation
shows the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:
[fofuspch-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
A value (factor kpre) for the prefault voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase
loops. Memory polarization is only carried out when the RMS value of the corresponding buffer voltage for
phase-to-ground loops is greater than 40 % of the rated voltage (Vrated). For phase-to-phase loops, the RMS
value of the buffer voltage must be greater than 70 % of Vrated.
For a subsequent fault or after switching onto a fault, the prefault voltage may be missing. In this case, the
buffer voltage can only be used for a limited time, for reasons of accuracy. For 1-phase short circuits and 2-
phase short circuits without ground contact, you can use a voltage not involved in the fault for polarization.
This voltage is rotated by 90 in relation to the actual fault voltage (cross polarization). The polarization
voltage VP is a mixture of the present voltage and the corresponding external fault voltage. The following
equation shows the polarization voltage VP for a phase-to-ground loop:
[fofukrzp-090709-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the buffer voltage is not available, then cross polarization can be used. An evaluation (factor kcross) for the
voltage can be set separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i The following parameters are available as evaluation factors for polarization:

Set the parameters for all zones in the general parameters for the distance protection function.

You can use the Blocked if diff.prot.active parameter to establish whether the distance-protection
delay has elapsed.
as the differential protection function is operating.

tion is available in the application. Wtith the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine
whether the distance-protection zone is blocked or not during the detection of a transformer inrush current.
NOTE
i With the parameter Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes set, the minimum pickup and operate
time for this distance-protection zone is about 1.5 system cycles even if no transformer inrush current is
detected. Set the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = yes parameter only if blocking based on inrush-
current detection is absolutely necessary.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Recommended setting value (_:109) Directional mode = forward

You can use the Directional mode parameter to specify whether the zone works forward or reverse.
Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
Recommended setting value (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = yes

allowed on overhead lines. For practical use cases, only the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone
should be tripped 1-pole. For the 1st distance zone and the overreaching zone, set the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed = yes. For all higher zones, set the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = no.
Parameter: Zr impedance reach
Recommended setting value (_:102) Zr impedance reach = 2.500

You can use the Zr impedance reach parameter to define the reach of the zone. Determine the setting
First, create a time-grading schedule for the entire galvanically connected system. Enter the section lengths
with their primary reactances X in /km into the time-grading schedule. The reactances X then define the
range of the distance-protection zones.
[dwstaffz-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-118 Setting of the Range Example for Device A
Set the range of Zone Z1 to about 85 % of the line section to be protected. Zone Z1 should trip quickly. Set
the time delay of Zone Z1 to 0.00 s. The protection then switches off faults at this distance with its operating
time. For higher levels, increase the time delay by 1 grading time increment.
The grading time must take the following factors into consideration:
Circuit-breaker opening time including variation
Dropout time for protection systems
Variation in time delays

The usual grading times are 0.2 s to 0.4 s. Set the range of Zone Z2 to a value that extends to about 80 % of
the lower-level zone of the protection for the shortest subsequent line (see Figure 6-118).
When parameterizing using PC and DIGSI, you can select to enter the values in either primary or secondary
variables. If you wish to enter secondary variables during parameterization, convert the primary values from
the time-grading schedule into secondary values as follows:
[fofpmsek-140409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.10.3 Settings

Z (MHO) #
_:1 Z (MHO) #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Z (MHO) #:Operate & no no
_:121 Z (MHO) #:Blocked if no no
_:27 Z (MHO) #:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:11 Z (MHO) #:1-pole operate no yes
allowed yes
_:101 Z (MHO) #:Function mode ph-gnd and ph-ph ph-gnd and ph-
ph-gnd only ph
ph-ph only
_:114 Z (MHO) #:Zone-spec. no no
residu. comp. yes
_:109 Z (MHO) #:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
_:102 Z (MHO) #:Zr impedance 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
reach 5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:110 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.30 s
(1-phase)
_:112 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.30 s
(multi-ph.)
_:105 Z (MHO) #:Kr -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:106 Z (MHO) #:Kx -0.33 to 11.00 1.00
_:107 Z (MHO) #:K0 0.000 to 11.000 1.000
_:108 Z (MHO) #:Angle (K0) -180.00 to 180.00 0.00

(Type)
Z (MHO) #
_:81 Z (MHO) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Z (MHO) #:>Block ph-g loops SPS I
_:501 Z (MHO) #:>Block ph-ph loops SPS I
_:54 Z (MHO) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Z (MHO) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Z (MHO) #:Health ENS O
_:55 Z (MHO) #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop AG ACD O
_:301 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop BG ACD O
_:302 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop CG ACD O
_:303 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop AB ACD O
_:304 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop BC ACD O
_:305 Z (MHO) #:Pickup loop CA ACD O
_:56 Z (MHO) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:57 Z (MHO) #:Operate ACT O
6.6.11 Release of Tripping through the AREC Zone
The AREC zone works together with the Automatic reclosing function. In order for automatic reclosing to be
successful, short circuits on the entire transmission route to all line ends must be switched off at the same
time and with as little delay as possible. In addition, with distance protection, the AREC zone may be func-
tioning as an overreaching distance zone, or example, Zone Z1B, prior to automatic reclosing. After automatic
reclosing, the AREC zone is typically no longer in effect. For the relevant AREC cycle, short circuits up to the
breakdown point of the AREC zone can be switched off quickly (see following figure). Before automatic
reclosing, limited non-selectivity in favor of fast simultaneous disconnection is acceptable. Automatic
reclosing will be performed in any case. The normal stages of the distance protection (Z1, Z2, etc.) are typi-
cally operated independently of the automatic reclosing function.
[dw_reichweite_ar_zone, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-119 Reach Control Before 1st Reclosure for Distance Protection
The automatic reclosing zone is available in the function library in DIGSI (in Line function group Distance
protection Zone types). If necessary you can insert the automatic reclosing zone into the Distance protec-
tion function. The automatic reclosing zone can be controlled from the internal automatic reclosing function
and also externally via the automatic reclosing function type Operation with external automatic reclosing func-
tion.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[loarzo13-310112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-120 Logic of the Automatic Reclosing Zone
Mode of Operation
The automatic reclosing zone is an instance of controlled trip logic. You use the parameter Operate with
to select which distance zones will deliver the pickup information. If the selected distance zones have picked
up and a release from the automatic reclosing function is present, the automatic reclosing zone generates an
operate indication.
You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone. If the selected auto-
matic reclosing cycle is only parameterized for 1-pole tripping (indication (_:6601:308) AR only after
1p. trip ), the automatic reclosing zone only trips if this operate indication leads to a 1-pole trip command
in the trip logic of the Circuit breakers function group.
The, both the 3-pole coupling via pickup or trip command and the handling of 2-pole phase-to-phase short
circuits are considered.
If the selected automatic reclosing cycle is parameterized for 1-pole operation and the parameter 1-pole
operate allowed is set to no , the automatic reclosing zone indicates Inactive .
If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect, you can block the automatic
reclosing zone with the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active . The AREC zone is active only if the tele-
protection with distance protection is not in effect, for example, with a communication failure. If the teleprotec-
tion with distance protection is in effect, you achieve 100% selectivity through the teleprotection method as
distance protection only if the comprehensive AR zone is blocked.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Operate with
Recommended setting value (_:105) Operate with = Z1B

You use the parameter Operate with to specify which distance zones will generate an operate indication
when pickup occurs while an automatic reclosing release is present. Typically, you use an overreaching
distance zone. This is called Z1B in the application templates.
The selection texts for the parameter Operate with are identical to the texts you assign during zone config-
uration in the Distance protection function.
Recommended setting value (_:102) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s

The Operate delay (1-phase) parameter is used to set the tripping delay of the automatic reclosing
zone for 1-phase short circuits. Set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) for the specific application.
If the distance zone selected with the parameter Operate with picks up and all release conditions are met,
the distance zone trips with the Operate delay (1-phase) set here.
Recommended setting value (_:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s

You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the tripping delay for multi-phase short
circuits. Set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) for the specific application. If the distance zone
selected with the parameter Operate with picks up and all release conditions are met, the distance zone
trips with the Operate delay (multi-ph.) set here.
Parameter: Effected by AR cycle
Recommended setting value (_:101) Effected by AR cycle = 1

You use the parameter Effected by AR cycle to select the automatic reclosing cycle for the release of
tripping. If you wish to have a zone release in several automatic reclosing cycles, you must instantiate several
automatic reclosing zones and select a different automatic reclosing cycle for each zone. If you use the auto-
matic reclosing function with the operation with external reclosing system or automatic reclosing with adaptive
dead time (ADT) function type, you must retain the default setting 1.
If the selected automatic reclosing cycle is only parameterized for 1-pole tripping (indication (_:6601:308)
AR only after 1p. trip), the automatic reclosing zone only trips if this operate indication leads to a 1-
pole trip command in the trip logic of the Circuit breakers function group. If you do not use the Automatic
reclosing function, you must delete the automatic reclosing zone in the Distance protection function in order
to ensure consistent parameterization in DIGSI.
Parameter: Blocked if 85-21 active
Recommended setting value (_:121) Blocked if 85-21 active = yes

The Blocked if 85-21 active parameter is used to block the automatic reclosing zone with the telepro-
tection method in effect. If the function teleprotection with distance protection is present and in effect,
Siemens recommends blocking the automatic reclosing zone. To do this, set the parameter Blocked if
85-21 active = yes. If the parameter Blocked if 85-21 active = yes is set, the AR zone is active
only if the teleprotection with distance protection is no in effect (for example, in the case of a communication
failure).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.11.3 Settings

AR zone #
_:1 AR zone #:Mode off on
on
test
_:11 AR zone #:1-pole operate no yes
allowed yes
_:102 AR zone #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
(1-phase)
_:103 AR zone #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
(multi-ph.)
_:101 AR zone #:Effected by AR 1 to 1 1
cycle
_:121 AR zone #:Blocked if 85-21 no yes
active yes
_:105 AR zone #:Operate with Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
AR zone #
_:81 AR zone #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 AR zone #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 AR zone #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 AR zone #:Health ENS O
_:56 AR zone #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 AR zone #:Operate ACT O
6.6.12 Output Logic of the Distance Protection
Operating Mode
The output logic treats the pickup and trip signals of the distance zones separately, in one pickup logic and
one trip logic each. The pickup and trip logic generate the overlapping indications of the distance protection.
General Pickup
In impedance pickup, the signal General is generated once a fault is reliably detected in the working area of
a zone. In the pickup methods I>, V</I>, and V</I>/Phi, the signal General is generated when a pickup
condition is met.
The signal General is indicated and can be further processed by internal and external additional functions,
for example, teleprotection scheme or automatic reclosing.
Pickup Logic
The distance zone pickups are combined phase-selectively and output as indications.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loanrdis-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Trip Logic
The trip signals of the distance zones are combined phase-selectively.
1-pole operate or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of single-phase switching, then 1-pole tripping is
If the device is capable of 1-pole operate and the parameter 1-pole operate allowed = yes is set, 1-
phase pickup also causes a 1-pole operate indication. Multiphase pickups always lead to a 3-pole operate
indication.
[loaus13p-060511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-122 1-Pole/3-Pole Trip Logic
6.6.13 Application Example: High-Voltage Overhead Line
6.6.13.1 Overview
This example describes the use of the distance protection for the protection of a 400 kV overhead-transmis-
sion line. For this example, the following is assumed:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For this example, the following is assumed: In the function group Line, the function Distance protection
for grounded systems (3-pole trip) is selected.
The distance protection operates with the Impedance pickup with load cutout pickup method.
The distance protection has 4 zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve.

the following settings are explained in each step:
Line parameters in the Line function group
Global parameters of the Distance protection for grounded systems function (3-pole trip) (ANSI 21)
Parameters of the pickup method Impedance pickup with load cutout
Parameters of the zones with quadrilateral characteristic curve

Supplemental functions, such as teleprotection schemes, power swings, switching onto a fault, and direc-
tional ground-fault protection are not dealt with here.
NOTE
i If you wish to add new functions, take the following steps:

The visibility of individual parameters depends on the configuration.
First, define the functions for your special use case.
Then set the parameters.
6.6.13.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data
Block Diagram
The following figure shows the block diagram with line 1 to be protected.
[dwplanab-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-123 Block Diagram
Time-Grading Chart
The following figure shows the time-grading chart for the application example:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwstaffp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-124 Time-Grading Chart
The distance protection works with four time-graded distance zones. The distance zones have the following
function:
Table 6-4 Setting Instructions for Distance Zones
Zone Number Function Range Delay

Zone 1 Selective zone, high speed, for 80 % line 1 0.00 s
line 1
Zone 1B Overreaching zone, high speed, 150 % line 1 0.00 s
for line 1
Zone 3 Forward-direction, delayed 20 % less than the Z1 range 1 grading time
backup stage, overreaching in line 3
Zone 4 Non-directional 120 % line 2 2 grading time
NOTE
i If you use an application template, the numbering of the stages of the distance protection is Z1, Z1B, Z3,
and Z4. If you load the function Distance protection from the DIGSI 5 library, the numbering of the stages
is Z1, Z2, Z3, and Z4.
The quadrilateral characteristics of the zones are shown in the R-X plane in Figure 6-125 . The setting
instructions for the parameters of the zones can be found in Chapters 6.6.13.6 Setting Instructions for Zone
Z1 through 6.6.13.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwklpoly-060611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-125 R-X Diagram of the Quadrilateral Zones
Power-System Data
The following system data and line parameters apply to the application example:
Table 6-5 System Data and Line Settings
Settings Value
Power-system Phase-to-phase rated system voltage 400 kV
data Power frequency 50 Hz
Maximum positive-sequence system source impedance (10 + j 100)
Maximum zero-sequence system source impedance (25 + j 200)
Minimum positive-sequence system source impedance (1 + j 10)
Minimum zero-sequence system source impedance (2.5 + j 20)
Maximum ratio of remote infeed / local infeed(I remote/I local) 3
Transducer Voltage-transformer ratio (TV, LINE) 380 kV/100 V
Current-transformer ratio (TI) 1000 A/1 A
Current-transformer data 5PR20, 20 VA, Pi =
3 VA
Current-transformer connecting cable 2.5 mm2, 50 m
TI/TV for impedance conversion 0.2632
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Settings Value
Line data Line 1 length 80 km
Maximum load current 250% of full load
Minimum operating voltage 85% of rated voltage
Character convention for power flow Export = negative
Full-load apparent power (S) 600 MVA
Line 1 positive-sequence impedance per km Z1 (0.025 + j 0,21) /km
Line 1 - Zero-sequence system impedance per km Z0 (0.13 + j 0.81) /km
Line 2 - Total positive-sequence impedance (3.5 + j 39.5)
Line 2 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (6.8 + j 148)
Line 3 - Total positive-sequence impedance (1,5 + j 17,5)
Line 3 - Total zero-sequence system impedance (7.5 + j 86.5)
Maximum fault resistance, 250
Unfavorable power factor under full load 0.9
Tower data Average tower base resistance 15
Grounding conductor 60 mm2 steel
Distance: Phase-to-tower/phase-to-ground (mid-span) 3m
Distance: phase-to-phase 5m
Circuit Breaker Trip pickup time 60 ms
Operate time 70 ms
Based on the source and line impedance, the minimum fault-current levels can be calculated as follows:
[fofiklg1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 3-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal Sum of synchronous source impedance and line impedance (since only the magnitude of the current
= should be calculated, only the magnitude of the impedance is relevant)
For a 3-pole short circuit at the end of the line, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
[fofztt3p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for 3-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi3pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is neglected, the following applies:
Ztotal 1/3 (sum of the positive-sequence, negative-sequence and zero-sequence source as well as line
= impedance)
Ztotal is calculated as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fofztt1p-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Thus for single-phase faults without fault resistance, there results a minimum fault current of:
[fofi1pmi-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the fault resistance for 1-phase short circuits is taken into consideration, Ztotal is calculated as follows:
[fofi1prf-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For 1-phase short circuits with high fault resistance, the minimum fault current is:
[fofi1pir-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.6.13.3 Setting Notes for Function Group Line

The following setting notes apply for the example application for the protection of a 400-kV overhead-trans-
mission line.
The basis for calculation of the settings is the system data and line settings from Table 6-5. The line settings
are configured in the Line function group and apply for all functions in the function group.

With the Rated current parameter, you can set the primary rated current for the line to be protected. The
rated apparent power of the line is 600 MVA. The rated current on the line is thus calculated as follows:
[fofinelg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]

With the Rated voltage parameter, you can set the primary rated voltage for the line to be protected. In
the example application, this value is 400 kV.
Parameter: Neutral point
Default setting (_:9001:149) Neutral point = grounded
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Neutral point parameter allows you to set the type of the neutral point grounding. In the example
application, the system neutral point is grounded.
Parameter: X per length unit
Setting value(_:9001:113) X per length unit = 0.0553 /km (secondary)

The parameter X per length unit is used to configure the characteristic reactance per unit length of the
line to be protected (in this example in /km). Entry of the X quantity per unit length is needed for the Fault
location function to calculate the distance to the fault. In Table 6-5 the X quantity per unit length for Line 1 is
primarily specified as 0.21 /km. Set the parameter X per length unit to this value. If you are setting
secondary values, calculate the secondary setting value as follows:
[fofxstek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Line length
Default setting (_:9001:114) Line length = 80 km

With the Line length parameter, you can set the length of the line to be protected (Line 1).
Default setting (_:9001:108) Line angle = 83.2

line impedance of the line to be protected as follows:
Parameter: Residual Compensation with Kr and Kx
Default setting (_:9001:104) Kr = 1,40
Default setting (_:9001:105) Kx = 0.95

The setting value for Kr is calculated as follows from the line data:
[fof1rerl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for Kx is calculated as follows from the line data:
[fofdxexl-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i For other applications, you can overwrite the residual compensation factors in distance zones set here
with local settings.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.6.13.4 Setting Notes for Distance Protection for Grounded Systems General Settings
Set the following settings under General in the function Distance protection for grounded systems. The setting
values are valid for all zones in the distance protection.

You can use the Zone timer start parameter to determine the time at which the time delays of the zones
start.
on dist. pickup If the time delays of all zones start simultaneously, select this setting. When
the fault type or measurement loop selection changes, all time delays
continue to run together.
If you need to coordinate the function with other distance or overcurrent
protection functions, select this setting.

protection characteristic curve. The inclination angle set here for the distance protection characteristic curve
applies to all zones in the function.
Set the angle of the distance protection characteristic, for example, identical to the line angle. This makes the
resistance coverage for all faults along the line identical (see Figure 6-126).
[dwlwpoly-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-126 Polygon and Line Angle
Parameter: Ground-fault detection
Recommended setting value (_:2311:105) Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0

You can use the Ground-fault detection parameter to determine the criteria used for ground-fault
detection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

3I0 or V0 If either the zero-sequence current criterion (3I0>) or the zero-sequence
voltage criterion (V0>) leads to ground-fault detection, select this setting.
For grounded systems, the OR operation of the criteria 3I0> and V0> is a
reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one
another. For a weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-
sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the conditions are reversed.
Siemens recommends this setting for grounded systems.
3I0 and V0 If you wish to use both criteria for ground-fault detection (logical AND
linking of zero-sequence current and zero-sequence voltage criteria), select
this setting.
3I0 only If only the zero-sequence current criterion is to be used for ground-fault
detection, select this setting.
In the example application, the system is grounded. For grounded systems, the combination of the criteria
3I0> and V0> is a very reliable criterion for ground-fault detection. The criteria complement one another. For
a weak infeed, the zero-sequence current is low and the zero-sequence voltage high. For a strong infeed, the
conditions are reversed. Set the parameter Ground-fault detection = 3I0 or V0.

You can use the 3I0> threshold value parameter to define the zero-sequence current limit for ground-
fault detection.
The parameter 3I0> threshold value must be set to a value less than the lowest expected ground
current in ground faults on the protected feeder. For the distance protection to trigger for external remote
faults as backup protection, set the 3I0> threshold value parameter to a more sensitive value than that
necessary for internal faults. Siemens recommends keeping the default setting of 0.10 A.

You can use the 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter to set the inclination of the 3I0> characteristic
curve for ground-fault detection.
Power-system unbalance (for example, untwisted lines) and current-transformer errors can cause a zero-
sequence current flow at the protection device in the case of higher phase currents, even if there is no ground
fault. The 3I0 pickup stabilization parameter is used to avoid ground activation. If extreme power-
system unbalance and extraordinarily large current-transformer errors are not expected, Siemens recom-
mends keeping the default value of 0.10.
Parameter:V0> threshold value

detection.
occur during operation, increase the default setting.
The zero-sequence voltage results from the following formula:
[fou0bere-011010-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Loop select. with ph-ph-g
Default setting (_:2311:108) Loop select. with ph-ph-g=block leading phase

If a fault resistance (arc voltage) is present, this causes an additional voltage drop for the measured loop
impedance in the fault loop. With 2-phase-to-ground faults, this influence is particularly strong since the
current in the fault resistance is coming from 3 different short-circuit loops. Examinations have shown the
following distribution of measured loop impedances for 2-phase-to-ground faults:
[dwzverte-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-127 Impedance Distribution for 2-Phase Ground Faults with Fault Resistance
The influence of the load (remote infeed and load angle) can increase or reduce the rotation of the measured
fault resistances (see Figure 6-127). The leading phase-to-ground loop tends to produce an overreach. For
this reason, set the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g = block leading phase for the applica-
tion example. In a double line, ground faults may occur simultaneously on both lines. To avoid blocking of the
internal fault loop, the parameter Loop select. with ph-ph-g must be set to ph-gnd only or all for
this application. To avoid overreach, you must reduce the radius and/or modify the zone inclination (alpha
angle).
6.6.13.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method

Setting notes for the Pickup method In the example application, the distance protection works with the Impe-
dance pickup with load cutout starting process. Setting of the parameters of the pickup method is explained in
the following section.
Recommended setting value (_:3661:101) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.10 A

phase-current thresh = 0.10 A
Load Cutout
You can configure the load cutout separately for phase-to-phase loops and phase-to-ground loops with the
following parameters:
Default setting (_:3661:102) Use ph-g load cutout = no
Default setting (_:3661:103) R load cutout (ph-g) = 23.8
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:3661:104) Angle load cutout (ph-g) = 26
Default setting (_:3661:105) Use ph-ph load cutout = no
Default setting (_:3661:106) R load cutout (ph-ph) = 23.8
Default setting (_:3661:107) Angle load cutout (ph-ph) = 26

In the impedance level, the load range must be separate from the tripping area of the distance protection
zone. The zone may only respond under fault conditions, not under load conditions. For the specific applica-
tion, calculate the smallest load impedance and the greatest load impedance angle under heavy load (see
Figure 6-128).
Figure 6-128 Load Cutout
The load cutout is set separately for phase-to-ground loops and phase-to-phase loops. Since there is no
restraint current in the load, load conditions cannot lead to a ground pickup. In the event of a 1-pole tripping
of neighboring circuits, there may simultaneously be a ground pickup and an increased load current. For
these cases, the load cutout must be set for the ground characteristic. The smallest load impedance is calcu-
lated as follows:
[formnalg-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The minimum operating voltage is 85 % of the rated voltage and the maximum load current is 250 % of the
full-load apparent power (see Table 6-5).
[foumnmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The primary minimum load impedance (parameter R load cutout (ph-ph)) can thus be calculated as
follows:
[formnpri-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The secondary setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-ph) can be calculated as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[formnsek-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the following step, you will determine the opening angle of the load cutout for phase-to-phase loops. The
largest angle the load impedance can assume results from the largest angle between the operating voltage
and load current. Since the load current ideally has the same phase as the voltage, the difference is given by
the power factor cos . The largest angle of the load impedance results from the least favorable, smallest
power factor. For this calculation, the power factor for full-load conditions must be used, since under light-load
conditions the reactive power flow can dominate. The load impedance under these conditions is not close to
the set impedance range. According to Table 6-5, the least favorable power factor under full-load conditions
is 0.9. The maximum load angle can thus be calculated as follows:
[fophlmax-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-ph) is 26.
In this example, there is no distinction drawn between the maximum loads for phase-to-phase activation and
phase-to-ground activation. Under this assumption, you can set the load cutout parameters for phase-to-
ground loops to the same values. The setting value for the parameter R load cutout (ph-g) is 23.8 ,
the setting value for the parameter Angle load cutout (ph-g) is 26.
6.6.13.6 Setting Instructions for Zone Z1
Recommended setting value: (_:3571:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph

The possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only, and ph-ph only. In the example appli-
cation, for Zone Z1, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph.
Default setting: (_:3571:109) Directional mode = forward

With the parameter Directional mode, you can specify whether the zone works forward, reverse or
non-directional. In the example application, for Zone Z1, you should set Directional mode =
forward.
Parameter: X reach
Recommended setting value (_:3571:102) X reach = 3.537

The X reach is calculated from the graded reach that this zone must provide. The reach of Zone 1 is shown
as 80 % of phase A in Table 6-4. Thus:
X reach = 0.8 XA
X reach = 0,8 80 0.21 = 13,44 (primary)
With the conversion factor from Table 6-5, the secondary setting value of the X reach parameter can be
X reach = 13.44 0.2632 = 3.537 (secondary)
Recommended setting value ) R (ph-ph) = 2.83

You use the R (ph-ph) parameter to set the resistance reach (R) for phase-to-phase loops. The Dist.
characteristic angle parameter inclines the quadrilateral R reach in such a way that it runs parallel to
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
the line impedance (see Figure 6-126). The resistance settings for the individual zones must therefore only
cover the fault resistance at the fault location. For the setting of Zone 1, arc faults are taken into considera-
tion. For this reason, the arc resistance must be calculated with the following equation:
[foz1rlbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage (Varc) is calculated using the following rule of thumb:
[foz1ulbx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The rule of thumb is a very conservative estimate. The estimated value Rarc is larger than the actual value.
The arc is pulled into a curve due to thermal and magnetic forces. Thus the length of the arc (Iarc) is greater
than the distance between the phases (phase-to-phase). As an estimate, we assume that larc is twice the
distance between the phases. When calculating the setting value, first calculate the largest value of Rarc. To
do so, you must first calculate Rarc with the smallest value of the fault current (calculated in section
6.6.13.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ):
[foz1rbwr-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
By adding a safety reserve of 20 %, the secondary minimum set value can be calculated as follows: The divi-
sion by 2 is necessary because Rarc appears in the loop measurement, while the set value corresponds to the
conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsst-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired coverage of arc
resistances. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased
depending on the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 . For protection of an overhead line on the high-voltage
or very high-voltage range, the following rule of thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-ph) for the
Zone 1:
0,8 X reach < R (ph-ph) < 2,5 X reach
In this example, the lower limit applies. The secondary setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) can be
R(ph-ph) = 0.8 3.537 = 2.830
Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in Zone 1 to 2.830 .
Parameter: R (ph-g)
Recommended setting value (_:3571:103) R (ph-g) = 3.537

The R radius for ground faults is calculated in a manner similar to that used for R (ph-ph) setting for phase-
to-phase faults. For ground faults, not only the arc voltage must be taken into consideration, but also the
tower-grounding resistance. The diagram in Figure 6-129 shows that the resulting tower-grounding resistance
due to the parallel connection of multiple tower-grounding resistances is less than 1.5 .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwmaster-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-129 Effective Tower-Grounding Resistance
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwfernei-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-130 Combination of Arc Voltage and Tower-Grounding Resistance
Remote infeed (Iremote) leads to an additional voltage drop in the effective tower-grounding resistance. The
additional voltage drop is measured in the fault loop of the protection device (see Figure 6-130). To compen-
sate for this influence, you need the highest value of the ratio Iremote/Ilocal. In Table 6-5, this value is specified
as 3. The maximum tower-grounding resistance measured by the protection device in the faulty loop is thus:
[foz1rtfx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The arc voltage for ground faults is calculated using the distance between lines and the tower/ground (see
Table 6-5):
Varc = 2500 V larc
Varc = 2500 V 2 3 m = 15 kV
When calculating the setting value, the largest value of Rarc is relevant. Calculate the largest value of Rarc
using the smallest fault current (calculated in section 6.6.13.2 Block Diagram and Power-System Data ):
[foz1rbmx-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
For ground faults, the total resistance that is, the sum of Rarc and RTF must be covered. By adding a safety
reserve of 20 %, the secondary setting value R (ph-g) can be calculated as follows: The division by the
factor (1 + kr) is necessary because Rarc and RTF appear in the loop measurement, while the setting value
corresponds to the conductor impedance or positive-sequence impedance.
[foz1rsku-250309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to achieve the desired resistance
coverage. To achieve the desired quadrilateral balance for Zone 1, the set value can be increased
depending on the X reach (Z1) calculated above.
For Zone 1, the setting value of X reach is 3.537 . For protection of an overhead line, the following rule of
thumb can be used for setting parameter R (ph-g) for the Zone 1:
[foz1rez1-160309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i The lower limit is the same as for phase-to-phase faults. This ensures fast tripping. The upper limit corre-
sponds to the loop range. This prevents overreach.
In this example, the lower limit applies. The setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) can be calculated for
Zone 1 as follows:
R (ph-g) = 0.8 3.537 = 2.83
Recommended set value (_:3571:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s

Zone Z1 must trip as quickly as possible. Set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.00 s.
Recommended set value (_:3571:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s

Zone Z1 must trip as quickly as possible. Set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.00 s.
Recommended setting value (_:3571:113) Zone-inclination angle = 15

The Zone-inclination angle parameter is used to set the angle by which the upper limit of the polygon
is inclined in the first quadrant.
Under no circumstances may Zone 1 respond in the event of external faults, since this represents a loss of
selectivity. The influence of the remote infeed and the fault resistance must therefore be taken into considera-
tion. From the voltage and current phasors in Figure 6-131, the influence of the transmission angle () on the
fault resistance measured can be seen. The transmission angle () is the angle between voltages VA and
VB. The transmission angle turns the phasor Iremote/Ilocal RF downwards in the impedance level. The risk that
an external fault pushes forward in Zone 1 is shown. To prevent this, the limit of the X setting for Zone 1 is
inclined downwards by the zone inclination.
[dwalphae-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-131 Transmission Angle for the Alpha-Angle Setting (Parameter: Zone Inclination)
To determine the setting value for the zone inclination, the least favorable practical case is assumed. First,
calculate the maximum transmission angle (computer simulation). For the example application, the maximum
transmission angle is 35 (see Table 6-5). The R/X ratio of Zone 1 is 0.8 (2.830/3.537 = 0.8). From
Figure 6-132, use these values to read off the alpha angle. For the example application, the point is valid in
the middle between 30 and 40. This gives an alpha angle of 15. Set the parameter to Zone-inclina-
tion angle = 15.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwklalph-140211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-132 Curves to Select the Zone Inclination
Recommended setting value (_:3571:114) Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no

The Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter is used to specify whether you wish to work with the local
residual compensation factors of the zone or not.
In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone Z1, the
residual compensation factors set in the Line function group now apply.
6.6.13.7 Setting Notes for Zone Z1B
Zone Z1B
In the application example, Zone Z1B operates as an overreaching zone for phase A. Use Zone Z1B for
cooperation with the Automatic reclosing (AREC) and/or Teleprotection scheme functions. These functions
process the output signals (pickup indications) of Zone Z1B. In the example application, Zone Z1B does not
trip independently, but rather only via the AREC and Teleprotection scheme functions. The independent trip-
ping of Zone Z1B is suppressed. To do this, set the time delays of Zone Z1B to .
Recommended setting value (_:3572:101) Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph

Possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only and ph-ph only. In the example applica-
tion, for Zone Z1B, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph .
Default setting (_:3572:109) Directional mode=forward

You can use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the zone operates forward, reverse,
or non-directional. In the example application, for Zone Z1B, you should set Directional mode =
forward.
Parameter: X reach
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Zone Z1B must be set to overreach on Line 1. The minimum setting is 120 % of the line reactance. If the line
is not extremely long, a setting of 150 % of more is used in practice. For this application, a line of medium
length, a range of 150 % is selected:
X reach = 1.5 XLine1
X reach = 1.5 80 0.21 = 25.2 (primary)
The secondary setting value of the X reach of Zone Z1B can be calculated as follows:
X reach = 25.2 0.2632 = 6.633
Recommended setting value R (ph-ph) = 6.633

Just as for the settings for Zone 1, this setting must cover all internal arc faults. The minimum setting value is
thus equal to the setting value R (ph-ph) = 2.83 . Zone 1 is set to the lower range (80 % of phase A). Z1B
works as an overreaching zone. Thus set an additional range in comparison with Z1. The size of the addi-
tional range R depends largely on the ratio of the setting for the R range to the X range. For Zone Z1B, the
following limit is recommended:
X reach < R (ph-ph) < 4 X reach
The X reach setting value of Zone Z1B is 6.633 . The minimum setting value for the parameter R (ph-
ph) is thus 6.633 . Set the R (ph-ph) parameter of the Zone Z1B to 6.633 .
Parameter: R (ph-g)

Set the parameter R (ph-g) similarly to the settings for Zone 1 so that all internal arc faults are covered.
The minimum setting value for the parameter R (ph-g) in Zone Z1B is thus 2.83 . Since Z1B operates as
an overreaching zone, use the following rule of thumb to set an additional range:
[foz1brgl-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the example application, the lower limit applies. The setting value of the R (ph-g) of Zone Z1B can be
[foz1brsk-290309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Recommended setting value (_:3572:110) Operate delay (1-phase) =

In the example application, Zone Z1B should not trip on its own. Set the parameter to Operate delay (1-
phase) = .
Recommended setting value (_:3572:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) =

In the example application, Zone Z1B should not trip on its own. Set the parameter to Operate delay
(multi-ph.) = .

The polygon of Zone Z1B is not inclined. Set the parameter Zone-inclination angle = 0.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

You can use the Zone-spec. residu. comp. parameter to specify whether you wish to work with the
local residual compensation factors of the zone or not.
In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone Z1B, the
residual compensation factors set in the Line function group apply.
6.6.13.8 Setting Instructions for Zone Z3

The possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only, and ph-ph only. In the application
example, for zone Z3, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph .
Default setting (_:3573:109) Directional mode = forward

non-directional. In the application example, zone 3 is used as the first time-graded overreaching zone.
For zone Z3, set the Directional mode = forward.
Parameter: X reach

According to the grading requirements in Table 6-4, the setting value for the X reach should be calculated
as follows:
[foz2xrch-310309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In zone Z3, set the parameter X reach = 6.485 .
Recommended setting value (_:3573:104) R (ph-ph) = 4.15

The parameter R (ph-ph) of Zone 3 must be set such that it covers all arc faults up to the set range (see
Table 6-4). In the example application, Zone Z3 works as a time-graded overreaching zone. The basis for
calculation of the setting value is the resistance coverage for internal arc faults in Zone 1 (R (ph-ph)) and
the X reach of Zone Z3. Calculate the setting value for the parameter R (ph-ph) of Zone Z3 using the
following formula:
[foz2rlsk-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R (ph-g)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The minimum range for this setting is based on the setting the value R (ph-g) of zone Z1 and the set value
of the X reach of zone 3. The set value R (ph-g) of zone Z1 covers the entire internal fault resistance, the
set value X reach of zone Z3 specifies the extent of overreach. Alternatively, you can calculate the set value
R (ph-g) for zone Z3 according to this formula:
[foz2resk-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Recommended setting value (_:3573:110) Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.25 s

Set the time delay for Zone Z3 according to the time-grading chart (see Figure 6-124 and Table 6-4). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.25 s.
Recommended setting value (_:3573:112) Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.25 s

Set the time delay for Zone Z3 according to the time-grading chart (see Figure 6-124 and Table 6-4). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.25 s.

The polygon of Zone 3 is not inclined. Set the parameter Zone-inclination angle = 0.

In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone 3, the
residual compensation factors set in the Line function group apply.
6.6.13.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4

Zone Z4 is used in the application example as a non-directional, final backup zone.

The possible alternatives are ph-gnd and ph-ph, ph-gnd only, and ph-ph only. In the application
example, for zone Z4, you should set the parameter Function mode = ph-gnd and ph-ph .
Default setting (_:3574:109) Directional mode = non-directional

non-directional. In the application example, Z4 is used as a non-directional backup stage. For zone 4,
set the parameter Directional mode = non-directional.
Parameter: X reach
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Set the parameter X reach for zone Z4 according to the grading requirement (see Table 6-4). The set value
is calculated as follows:
[foz3xrch-130509-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In Zone Z4, set the parameter X reach = 17.782 .
Recommended setting value (_:3574:104) R (ph-ph) = 26.32

The resistance reserve settings for the backup protection with distance zones are defined by a lower and an
upper limit. The lower limit is the minimum fault resistance (arc resistance) that must be covered. The upper
limit is based on the corresponding setting for the X reach. Note that for ohmic contact resistances not pure
arc faults the other infeeds into the fault cause significant underreach. Since no detailed values are avail-
able, you can calculate the required arc reserve under the following assumptions: To calculate the arc
voltage, use twice the line distance (5 m) as the arc length, and 50 % of the rated current, or 500 A (primary),
for the fault current.
[foz3rlmn-020409-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With these assumptions, the calculated setting value R (ph-ph)min ensures fault detection in Zone Z4. The
upper limit is determined by restrictions in reach balance. The following apply:
R (ph-ph) < 6 X reach
The X reach of zone Z4 is 17.782 (see section 6.6.13.9 Setting Notes for Zone Z4 Parameter: X range).
The upper limit is thus 106.69 . This extends well into the load range (see Parameter R load sector (L-E) in
section 6.6.13.5 Setup Notes for Pickup Method ). Set the parameter R (ph-ph) in zone Z4 to twice the
minimum value. This is a safe compromise.
R (ph-ph) = R (ph-ph)min 2
R (ph-ph) = 13.16 2 = 26.32
In Zone Z4, set the parameter R (ph-ph) = 26.32 .
Parameter: R (ph-g)

The upper and lower limits are defined by the minimum range and balance similarly to the settings of the
parameter R (ph-g). In the application example, the parameters R (ph-ph) and R (ph-g) of zone Z4
are set to the same value, thus to 26.32 .

Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-124 and Table 6-4). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) = 0.75 s.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Set the delay time for zone Z4 according to the grading schedule (see Figure 6-124 and Table 6-4). For the
application example, set the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.) = 0.75 s.

The polygon of Zone Z4 is not inclined. Set the parameter Zone-inclination angle = 0.

In the application example, set the parameter Zone-spec. residu. comp. = no . For Zone Z4, the
residual-compensation factors set in the Line function group apply.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.7 Impedance Protection
The Impedance protection function (ANSI 21):

Protects transformers as backup protection for transformer differential protection
Is used as backup protection for the block transformer and the generator in block-unit power stations
Functions as backup protection in the event of energy recovery to faults in the upstream electrical power
system beyond a transformer
The Impedance protection function is used in protection function groups which provide current and voltage
measurement values.
The Impedance protection function is preconfigured at the factory with the function block (FB) General and
one zone. A maximum of 4 zones can be operated simultaneously in the function. The zones are structured
identically.
The protection function is structured in that way that the settings in the FB General are valid for all zones.
[dw_strimpedanceprot, 2, en_US]
6.7.3 Description
Impedance Measurement via the Transformer

Pay attention to the following features when measuring impedance in or via transformers:
Impedance is transferred to the side to be measured using the quadrant of the transformer ratio.
For star-delta transformers, an opposite phase rotation occurs in the positive-sequence and negative-
sequence system, depending on the vector group. This changes the fault situation on the other side. A
2-phase short circuit on the star side appears as a 3-phase short circuit with different current distribution
on the delta side (see Figure 6-134 ).
Since star-delta transformers do not permit the zero-sequence system to be transferred, a 1-phase
ground fault on the star side appears as a 2-phase short circuit on the delta side (see Figure 6-135 ).
In the case of auto transformers and transformers grounded on both sides in the star-star connection,
measurement through the transformer is possible. Here, distance protection for lines can be used
without any problems.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_ratio-2pol-ifault, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-134 Transformation of a 2-Phase Short-Circuit Current
[dw_ratio-1pol-fault, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-135 Transformation of a 1-Phase Short-Circuit Current
The changed measurand mapping also leads to a different impedance mapping. Figure 6-136 and
Figure 6-137 show, for example, for a 2-phase or 1-phase short circuit on the star side, the resulting phasors
on the delta side. To simplify it, the transformer ratio was assumed to be 1.
[dw_imp-2pol-short-ciruit, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-136 Impedance Measurement with a 2-Phase Short Circuit
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_imp-1pol-short-ciruit, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-137 Impedance Measurement with a 1-Phase Short Circuit
With a 2-phase short circuit, the phase-to-ground impedance of the phase corresponds to the double phase
current of the actual fault impedance via the transformer. The impedance is correctly measured. All other
impedances are measured as considerably larger. Subtracting the currents results in an infinite impedance
measured value for the C-A loop.
A 1-phase ground fault results in the smallest impedance value based on the calculation with phase-to-phase
voltages (in the example, C-A). Because the zero-sequence system cannot be transferred via a star-delta
transformer, an impedance is measured that is too large by the amount of the zero-sequence impedances
(transformer, line). The actual fault location is seen as being farther away.
With a 3-phase short circuit, the impedance measurement for all measuring loops is correct.
The following table summarizes the results of the impedance measurement for a star-delta transformer:
Table 6-6 Fault Mapping and Measuring Errors during the Impedance Measurement of a Star-Delta
Transformer
Power-System Fault on Fault Mapping on the Correct Impedance Loop Measuring Error
the Star Side Delta Side
3-phase short circuit 3-phase short circuit Phase-to-ground and Correct measurement
phase-to-phase loop
2-phase short circuit 3-phase short circuit, Phase-to-ground loop Correct measurement
different fault-current with largest fault current
distribution
1-phase ground fault 2-phase short circuit Phase-to-phase loop, but Impedance measured too
with measuring error large by the amount of the
zero-sequence impe-
dance (0.5 Z0)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_dis-impedance-protection, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-138 Logic Diagram for Impedance Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_block_imp, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-139 Logic Diagram for Impedance Protection (Continued)
Loop Selection
The function Impedance protection can be used in electrical power systems and plants with different neutral
points. With the Loop selection parameter, you control which parameters influence the loop release.
In power systems with effective neutral point grounding solidly or low-impedance grounded neutral points
all impedance loops (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops) can work parallel to each other. When all
loop are working parallel the loop release are controlled by the parameter Min. phase-current thresh
(see following figure).
[lo_loopselect1 impprot, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-140 Effective Parameter for Loop Release for All Loops
In electrical power systems with a non effective neutral point grounding isolated, grounded or high-impe-
dance grounded neutral point the control for the loop selection is necessary to avoid an overfunction, for
example, a ground fault. The loop selection is controlled by the Current-dependent parameter. The
following figure shows an example which parameter controls the loop selection:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_loopselect2 impprot, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-141 Effective Parameter in Current-Dependent Loop Release
In case of a ground fault the voltage collapsed ideally to 0 and the phase-to-ground loop measures either
a small impedance or 0 . The phase-selective overcurrent detection releases the loops (parameter Over-
current threshold). The undervoltage seal-in (parameter: Undervoltage seal in) keeps the over-
current erect. The undervoltage seal-in is necessary for use in power plants when an exciting transformer is
connected to the generator bus. During a near short circuit the excitation voltage collapses and results in a
decreased synchronous generated voltage. Thereby the fault current sinks below the rated current and
thereby the current threshold value (parameter Overcurrent threshold). The parameter V-seal-in
threshold monitors the positive-sequence voltage. The undervoltage seal-in drops out when the threshold
value V-seal-in threshold is topped or the undervoltage seal-in time (parameter Duration of V-
seal-in time) runs out.
The following rules apply for loop selection:
In the event of 1-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-ground loop is used.
In the event of 2-phase pickup, an associated phase-to-phase loop with the applicable phase-to-phase
voltage is used for the impedance calculation.
In the event of a 3-phase pickup, the loop selection is dependent on the ratio of the current amplitudes of
the phases to one another.
The following table shows the measuring-loop selection:
Pickup Measuring Loops
1-phase A Phase-to-ground A-gnd
B B-gnd
C C-gnd
2-phase A, B Phase-to-phase A-B
B, C B-C
C, A C-A
3-phase with unequal A, 2 B, C If the current in one phase B-gnd
phase current amplitudes A, 2 B, C is double the size, the C-gnd
phase-to-ground loops A-gnd
A, 2 B, C
are measured.
(A, B) 2 C If the current in two A-B
(B, C) 2 A phases is double the size, B-C
the phase-to-phase loops C-A
(C, A) 2 B
are measured
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup Measuring Loops

3-phase with equal ampli- A, B, C When all voltages are A-B
tudes almost equal, the phase- B-C
to-phase loops are meas- C-A
ured.
All 3 loops are released.
Impedance Measurement
From the sampled values of the phase currents and the phase-to-ground voltages, the fundamental phasors
are determined per period using an FIR filter (FIR = Finite Impulse Response). The impedances are calcu-
lated from the fundamental phasors. By using the frequency-tracking sampled values, the impedance is
measured using another frequency range. This is advantageous for island networks or block-unit power
plants, for example, for start-up processes.
There is an impedance measuring element available for each of the 6 possible phase loops A-gnd, B-gnd, C-
gnd, A-B, B-C, C-A. If another fault occurs during analysis, the impedances are calculated using the current
cyclical measurands. The analysis thus always works with the measurands of the current fault condition.
The impedance for phase-to-phase loops is calculated as follows:
[fo_schleife_ZLL, 1, en_US]
The impedance of phase-to-ground loops is calculated as follows:
[fo_schleife_ZLE, 1, en_US]
Mode of Operation
If the phase currents exceed the set Min. phase-current thresh, all released impedance loops are
calculated.
To release phase-to-ground loops, it is sufficient if the corresponding phase current exceeds the Min.
phase-current thresh. For phase-to-phase loops, both phase currents and the loop current must exceed
the Min. phase-current thresh.
There is no special ground-fault detection, such as distance protection for lines.
If the released impedance loop(s) lie in one zone, the Impedance protection function generates a pickup indi-
cation with loop information. At the same time, a pickup indication in the picked up zone occurs with specifica-
tion of the relevant phase and direction. The direction is subsequently determined for all picked up impedance
loops and the associated time delay started. The output logic processes the pickup and trip signals of the
zones and forms the pickup and trip signals of the function.
The direction is determined either using a stored prefault voltage or negative-sequence system variables. If
the measured negative-sequence voltage and the negative-sequence current exceed 10 % of the rated
values of the device, the variables of the negative-sequence system are used exclusively. For the direction
decision, the angle between the negative-sequence current I2 and the negative-sequence voltage V2 is evalu-
ated. Figure 6-142 shows the defined directional areas on impedance level.
For 3-phase symmetrical short circuits, there is no negative-sequence system. In this case, the memory
voltage is used. If the memory voltage is not available either, for example when switching onto a fault, all
zones regardless of their parameterized direction pick up and generate an operate indication after the
time delay has expired.
Optionally, you can link the Impedance protection function with the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault
function (see chapter 6.7.4 Application and Setting Notes ). This enables the selected Impedance protection
zones to trip without delay.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwritgkl-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the zones against trip-
ping due to transformer inrush currents.
Impedance Polygon
The quadrilateral operate curve (impedance polygon) in the zone is a rectangle in the R-X plane. The polygon
is defined by the parameters X reach (ph-g), X reach (ph-ph), R reach (ph-g), and R reach
(ph-ph) and the Directional mode. This means that, in special situations, a different setting is possible
for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground loops.
polygon, the limits are increased by 5 % in all directions. The following figure shows an example with 2 non-
directional zones:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_klpoly-impedanceprot, 1, en_US]
Sample Configuration
The following figure is an example of how the Impedance protection function is used at a feeder point in a
medium-voltage power system.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_example-protection, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-144 Example of a Network Protection Application
The medium-voltage power system is fed on the high-voltage side with a YNd5 transformer. In addition, there
is an infeed that enables energy recovery to faults occurring on the high-voltage side.
The protection device installed on the delta side of the transformer functions as distance protection, which is
the backup protection for the medium-voltage power system.
In addition to distance protection, the protection device on the delta side functions as impedance protection,
which looks in the transformer direction. The power system on the high-voltage side is a meshed system and
also contains distance protection devices.
In the following, you can find recommendations for the protection setting values and a view of the setting
problems. Figure 6-145 shows a possible setting approach.
Zone TZ 1 should be coordinated with the protection system and delayed by approx. 100 ms. The delay
makes preferred tripping possible due to the differential protection and a dropout of the zone.
Zone TZ 2 is intended as a directional reserve stage, whose time must, without fail, be coordinated with the
protection system. At the same time, this stage can be used if, when switching the transformer on, it switches
onto a fault.
In exchange, the function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault must be present and set accordingly (see
functional description in chapter 6.42 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_config-staffel, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-145 System Configuration and Possible Time Grading
For this example, the following data apply:
Table 6-7 Data for Sample Calculations
Transformer Vector group: YNd5

Rated voltages: Upper-voltage side Vrated, UV = 230 kV
Undervoltage side Vrated, LV = 20 kV
Rated power: Srated = 50 MVA
Short-circuit voltage: Vsc = 12 %
Overhead line Reactance per unit length: X = 0.3 /km
Length up to Z1, Dis L = 50 km
Transducer Voltage transformer: 20 kV/3 /100 V/3 / 100V/3
Current transformer, undervoltage side: 1500 A/1 A
The primary side reactances are calculated as follows:

Transformer:
Line (transformed to
20 kV):
The sample calculation clearly shows that the line reactance can be disregarded compared to transformer
reactance due to the quadratic transformation.
To avoid overfunction, select the following setting values for the 1st Zone (TZ 1) :
X1 = 0.9 XTr = 0.9 0.96 = 0.864
For the 2nd Zone, select the double transformer impedance and set the delay time correspondingly high.
X2 = 2 XTr = 2 0.96 = 1.92 .
With the selected setting, Zone TZ 1 does not protect the transformer completely, especially if you take into
account the incorrect measurement for a 1-phase fault.
If you want to achieve a reliable tripping for all fault situations (see Table 6-6), the setting value must extend
far beyond the transformer. One possible strategy for the time grading is a setting value of approx. 1.5 XTr.
You must guarantee the selectivity using the Time criterion. The following figure shows the time-grading
chart:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw_staffel-x1-xtr, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-146 System Configuration and Possible Time Grading
The zone range in the R direction must take into account the fault resistance on the fault location. The fault
ance is, for example, the arc resistance or the dissipation resistance of ground phases. For the zone range in
the R direction, you do not have to take the fault resistance on the upper-voltage side and the line resistance
into account. These are also divided by the transformer-ratio quadrant and can be mostly disregarded.
However, fault resistances on the upper-voltage side during high-current feed on the upper-voltage side also
impact the reactance and resistance measurement on the undervoltage side. This impact is unavoidable and
can result in a short circuit with fault resistance on the upper-voltage side not being detected by the under-
voltage side until the high-current feed on the upper-voltage side is cleared. Do not set the reserve resistance
any larger than necessary. The setting can be adjusted to the maximum load in the direction of the line
section to be protected, in other words, in the transformer direction. The setting value for the R range must be
lower than the resistance under maximum load conditions (RL max). For a sufficient distance to the load range,
Siemens recommends a value of about 20 % to 50 % RL max. This means an incorrect measurement is
avoided by the apparent impedances (seeFigure 6-136 and Figure 6-137).
Parameter: Loop selection
Default setting (_:2311:102) Loop selection = All loops

You can use the Loop selection parameter to control the measuring-loop selection.
All loops The function evaluates all 6 impedance loops.
Siemens recommends using this setting value for electrical power systems
or plants with an effective neutral-point grounding. For effective neutral-
point grounding the neutral point is either fixed or low-impedance
grounded.
Current-dependent Use this setting value for electrical power systems or plants with a non-
effective neutral-point grounding. For non-effective neutral-point grounding
the neutral point is isolated, grounded or high-impedance grounded.
Siemens recommends this setting value for generator-protection applica-
tions.
Default setting (_:2311:103) Min. phase-current thresh = 0.100 A

You can use the Min. phase-current thresh parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the
current.
Set the parameter Min. phase-current thresh under the load current. A practical setting value is
approximately 10 % to 20 % of the rated current of the protected object.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Only if you set the Min. phase-current thresh parameter, the (_:2311:102) Loop selection
= All loops parameter is visible.
Parameter: Overcurrent threshold
Default setting (_:2311:104) Overcurrent threshold = 1.300 A

You can use the Overcurrent threshold parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the overcurrent
pickup.
Set the Overcurrent threshold parameter above the maximum possible load current. A practical setting
value is approximately 1.2 to 1.4 times the generator rated current.
EXAMPLE:
The rated generator current is calculated as:
[fo_1 irated gen, 1, en_US]
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Taking into account the transformer ratios, the secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
Parameter: Undervoltage seal in
Default setting (_:2311:105) Undervoltage seal in = no

You can use the Undervoltage seal in parameter to specify whether you would like to maintain pickup
from undervoltage.
no If the fault current, during the entire fault duration, is above the setting
value of the Overcurrent threshold parameter, then keep the default
setting.
yes Siemens recommends using this setting value for generator-protection
applications, if during static excitation the exciting transformer is connected
to the generator bus.
In this situation the excitation voltage short is interrupted. Thereby reducing
the synchronous generated voltage, the fault current can sink after an
extended period of time after the fault occurred below the generator rated
current. If a fault occurs the fault current is noticeably greater than the rated
current. The undervoltage seal-in maintains the pickup.
When selecting this setting value, the following parameters are visible:
(_:2311:106) V-seal-in threshold
(_:2311:107) Duration of V-seal-in time
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: V-seal-in threshold
Default setting (_:2311:106) V-seal-in threshold = 46.200 V

You can use the V-seal-in threshold parameter to set the lower pickup threshold for the undervoltage
seal-in.
80 % of the generator rated voltage is a typical setting value. As the voltage transformers are precisely
adapted to the object rated voltage, you can set 80 % of the secondary rated voltage. The parameter V-
seal-in threshold evaluates the positive-sequence voltage. With a secondary rated voltage
Vrated, sec = 100 V, the setting value is determined as follows:
[fo_undervolt pickup, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Duration of V-seal-in time
Default setting (_:2311:107) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s

You can use the Duration of V-seal-in time parameter to set how long the pickup must persist. If the
Duration of V-seal-in time is exceeded, the pickup drops off. If, before the end of the Duration of
V-seal-in time, the fault is cleared, the Undervoltage seal in drops off. If, before the end of the
Duration of V-seal-in time the voltage setting V-seal-in threshold is exceeded again the
Undervoltage seal in also drops.
Set the Duration of V-seal-in time above the maximum Operate delay. The default setting 4 is a
practicable value.

The parameter is only visible when the Inrush-current detection function is present in the application. Use the
parameter to define whether the zone is blocked or not during transformer inrush-current detection.
Parameter: X reach (ph-g)
Default setting (_:15301:102) X reach (ph-g) = 2.500

You can use the X reach (ph-g) parameter to set the polygon limit in the X direction for phase-to-ground
impedance loops. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
If the impedance protection has to be measured well beyond the transformer into the upstream power
system, Siemens recommends, as a setting value for the X reach (ph-g), approx. 1.5 times the trans-
former reactance. Adjust the associated delay time high enough so that short circuits downstream from the
transformer can be initially cleared selectively.
EXAMPLE:
For the calculation, the data from Table 6-7 apply.
X range = 150 %
The primary setting value is calculated as follows:
Xprim = 150 %/100 % ZKT = 1.5 0.96 = 1.44 (primary)
[fo_Xreichweite_sek, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: X reach (ph-ph)
Default setting (_:15301:103) X reach (ph-ph) = 2.500

You can use the X reach (ph-ph) parameter to set the polygon limit in the X direction for phase-to-phase
impedance loops. Determine the setting value for the specific application.
If the impedance protection has to be measured well beyond the transformer into the upstream power
system, Siemens recommends, as a setting value for the X reach (ph-ph), approx. 1.5 times the trans-
former reactance. Adjust the associated delay time high enough so that short circuits downstream from the
transformer can be initially cleared selectively.
Because the phase-to-phase loop applies both to a 3-phase short circuit as well as to a 1-phase short circuit,
the 3-phase short circuit is taken as the basis.
You can estimate the range for 1-phase short circuits by taking into account the zero-sequence impedance
(reactance). The following applies:
ZSC = (ZKT + 0.5 Z0T)
For star-delta transformers, the zero-sequence impedance amounts to approx. 0.8 ZKT. This results in the
following impedance measured value:
ZSC = (ZKT + 0.5 Z0T) = (ZKT + 0.5 0.8 ZKT) = 1.4 ZKT
With a time grading of 1.5 ZKT, measure the entire transformer winding for a 1-phase ground fault.
In the example, the same setting values apply for the phase-to-phase loops as for the phase-to-ground loops.
Parameter: R reach (ph-g)
Default setting (_:15301:104) R reach (ph-g) = 2.500

You can use the R reach (ph-g) parameter to set the polygon limit in the R direction for phase-to-ground
loops. For phase-to-ground faults, the fault contact resistance can be greater than that of phase-to-phase
faults.
EXAMPLE:
The rated transformer current is assumed as the rated load current. The current is 1443 A on the 20 kV side.
[fo_Zmax_trafo_RLE, 1, en_US]
For the R reach, 20 % Zmaxis specified. This means the primary setting value of the R reach (ph-g)
parameter is calculated as follows:
R reach (ph-g) = 0.2 7.27 = 1.45
This value corresponds to approx. the X value so that you can select, as a practical setting, R range = X
range.
[fo_Rreichweite_sek, 1, en_US]
Parameter: R reach (ph-ph)
Default setting (_:15301:105) R reach (ph-ph) = 1.250

You can use the R reach (ph-ph) parameter to set the polygon limits in the R direction for phase-to-
phase loops.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE:
Set the range for phase-to-phase loops just like for phase-to-ground loops. This results in the following setting
values:
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 1.45 (primary)
R reach (ph-ph) = R reach (ph-g) = 10.9 (secondary)
Default setting (_:15301:109) Directional mode = reverse

You can use the Directional mode parameter to specify whether the zone operates forward,
reverse, or non-directional. Set the parameter Directional mode for the specific application.
If the Impedance protection function is present in a power-system protection device, the directional mode is in
the direction of the line forward. If you want to use the impedance zone as backup protection for a trans-
former, you have to set the parameter Directional mode = reverse.
Default setting (_:15301:6) Operate delay = 0.30 s

You can use the Operate delay parameter to set the grading time of the zone. Set the parameter
Operate delay for the specific application.
Select the associated time stage for Zone TZ so that it staggers the power-system protection devices of the
following lines. Therefore, check the grading times in the superposed power system as well as the range in
the power system if 1.5 ZKT is set.
6.7.5 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Loop selection All loops All loops
Current-dependent
_:2311:103 General:Min. phase- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0 . 100 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0 . 100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0 . 100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:2311:104 General:Overcurrent 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.300 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.500 A
_:2311:105 General:Undervoltage no no
seal in yes
_:2311:106 General:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 340.000 V 46.200 V
threshold
_:2311:107 General:Duration of V- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
seal-in time
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

TZ 1
_:15301:1 TZ 1:Mode off on
on
test
_:15301:2 TZ 1:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:15301:27 TZ 1:Blk. w. inrush curr. no no
detect. yes
_:15301:102 TZ 1:X reach (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:15301:103 TZ 1:X reach (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:15301:104 TZ 1:R reach (ph-g) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 2.500
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.500
_:15301:105 TZ 1:R reach (ph-ph) 1A 0.100 to 600.000 1.250
5A 0.020 to 120.000 0.250
_:15301:109 TZ 1:Directional mode non-directional reverse
forward
reverse
_:15301:6 TZ 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s; 0.30 s

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
TZ 1
_:15301:81 TZ 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:15301:54 TZ 1:Inactive SPS O
_:15301:52 TZ 1:Behavior ENS O
_:15301:53 TZ 1:Health ENS O
_:15301:55 TZ 1:Pickup ACD O
_:15301:56 TZ 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:15301:57 TZ 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.8 Power-Swing Blocking
Power-swing blocking
Detects power swings
Evaluates the impedances per phase accordingly
Checks the impedance trajectory on a continual basis
Reports the power-swing detection per phase
Blocks the selected zones of the distance protection in case of power swings
Detects 1-phase, 2-phase, and 3-phase short circuits during a power swing and then cancels the
blocking for the specific phase
Works during a 1-pole dead time
Activates only when the distance-protection function is active
Does not generate tripping of the out-of-step condition; a separate out-of-step protection function is
available for this purpose
The Power-swing blocking function is a supplementary function to the distance protection. It only works if the
distance-protection function is activated. If a power swing is detected, power-swing blocking blocks the pickup
and tripping through the distance protection. Each distance-protection zone can be blocked separately.
The Power-swing blocking function is included in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and current
inputs. The process monitor delivers status information to the function regarding the protected object (open
poles in particular).
[dwpsdstr-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-147 Power-Swing Blocking Works Together with the Distance-Protection Function
Power-Swing Event
After dynamic events such as load jumps, short circuits, automatic reclosing functions, or switching opera-
tions, the generators exposed to the oscillations may have to respond to the new power balance of the
system. In case of power swings, the distance-protection function is fed with high compensating currents and
- especially at the electrical center - low voltages (Figure 6-148). Low voltages combined with high currents
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
represent apparently small impedances that can lead to tripping by the distance protection. Power-swing
blocking prevents tripping by the distance protection in case of power swings.
[dwpendel-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-148 Power Swings
Power swings are 3-phase symmetrical events. As a rule, a certain symmetry of the measurands can be
assumed. Power swings may also occur during unsymmetrical events, such as short circuits or during a 1-
pole dead time. For this reason, power-swing detection is structured to use 3 measuring systems. One meas-
uring system is available for each phase, which warrants phase-selective power-swing detection. If short
circuits occur, the power swing detected in the respective phase will be discarded, which enables the
distance protection function to initiate selective tripping.
Functionality
In order to detect the power swing, the rate of change will be adjusted to the impedance phasor.
[dwzvekto-220311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-149 Impedance Vectors During a Power Swing and During a Short Circuit
In order to warrant all functions of the power-swing detection are stable and secure, without the risk of over-
function during a short circuit, the following measurement criteria are used:
Trajectory monotony:
During a power swing, the measured impedance indicates a directional path of movement. This path
occurs precisely if within the measurement window one of the components R and X at the most indi-
cates a change of directions. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it causes a directional change in R as
well as in X within the measured value window.
Trajectory continuity:
The spacing of two consecutive impedance values will clearly indicate a change of R or X during a
power swing. If a short circuit occurs, the impedance vector skips to the fault impedance and remains
motionless.
Trajectory uniformity:
During a power swing the ratio between 2 consecutive changes of R or X do not overshoot a
threshold. As a rule, if a short circuit occurs, it will cause an erratic movement since the impedance
phasor abruptly skips from load impedance to fault impedance.
If the impedance indicator enters the distance protection pickup range and the power-swing detection criteria
are met, a power swing will be indicated. The pickup range is composed of the largest setting values for R
and X in all active zones.
Figure 6-150 shows the logic of the power-swing blocking. The measurement takes place per phase. A
power-swing detection signal will be transmitted only after the measured impedance is in the distance protec-
tion pickup range ((_:55) Block zones). The power-swing detection signal remains active until a short-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
circuit occurs, the power-swing subsides, or the maximum blocking time has elapsed. You can use the binary
input signal >Block function to block the power-swing detection.
[lopendel-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-150 Power-Swing Blocking Logic
When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can place a time limit on the blocking effect of the
power-swing blockage. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated when using
systems that are slowly drifting apart.
When the impedance enters the distance protection pickup range, the maximum blocking time will be started.
When the impedance exits the pickup range while the maximum blocking time is running, the maximum
blocking time will be reset.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lopsdlog-190413-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-151 Functionality of Power-Swing Blocking
The distance protection delivers information about the loops contained in its zones to the power-swing
blocking. If the power-swing blocking detects power swings in the activated loops, it delivers phase-selective
information about the zones to be blocked to the distance protection. The actual blocking is carried out in the
distance protection.
Selection of the Distance Zones to be Blocked
Recommended setting value (_:102) Zones to be blocked = Zone x

Zones to be blocked Via a parameter, the user can individually select each zone present in the
distance-protection function that is to be blocked during a power swing.
Maximum Blocking Time
Default setting (_:103) Max. blocking time =
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
When using the Max. blocking time parameter, you can limit the maximum blocking time of the distance
protection during the power swing. In this way, for instance, the power-swing blockage can be eliminated
when using networks that are slowly drifting apart.
For tripping during an asynchronous long-lasting power swings, Max. blocking time is not relevant. For
this application, use the function Out-of-step protection.
If there is no operational requirement with regards to a time limit of the power-swing blocking, Siemens
recommends the default setting (= not in effect).
Further Application Notes

The following table provides application notes for the interaction with other internal or external functions.
Interaction with Other Note
Functions:
Distance Protection Distance protection delivers information about which impedance loops
picked up. If power swings occur, pickup and tripping of the distance
protection are blocked for the specific phases and zones. Power-swing
blocking only works if the distance-protection function is activated.
6.8.5 Settings

Power-Swing Blocking
_:1 68 P.swing blk:Mode off off
on
test
_:103 68 P.swing blk:Max. 0.00 s to 60.00 s; -1 s
blocking time
_:102 68 P.swing blk:Zones to Setting options depend on
be blocked configuration

(Type)
68 P.swing blk
_:82 68 P.swing blk:>Block function SPS I
_:54 68 P.swing blk:Inactive SPS O
_:52 68 P.swing blk:Behavior ENS O
_:53 68 P.swing blk:Health ENS O
_:55 68 P.swing blk:Block zones ACD O
_:301 68 P.swing blk:Drop off SPS O
_:302 68 P.swing blk:Max. blocking time exp. SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.9 Teleprotection with Distance Protection
To enable selective and non-delayed fault clearance of all faults, on the entire line length, information
exchange with the remote line end is applied. You can implement teleprotection using binary inputs and
outputs (transmission and reception contacts) or using a digital communication connection.
6.9.2 Structure of Function
The Teleprotection method is used in protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in combination
with the distance-protection function. The functions outlined in Figure 6-152 are available.
[dwtpsdst-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-153 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the distance protection and generates the associated
transmission signal for transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is optionally coupled via a binary input, via the unblock logic or via
the communication. For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1 and
Rec.unblk.sig# are available multiple times, once for each remote line end.
The distance zone parameterized for the teleprotection method provides the pickup information. This pickup
information is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled, the
teleprotection method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lotpsfst-160211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-153 Function Blocks and Function Control
In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection method are described. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.
6.9.3 Receipt Blocks
For the coupling of receipt signals from opposite ends, the 3 receipt block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Rec.unblk.sig# and Rec. PI# are available. The teleprotection methods described below can be oper-
ated with the suitable receipt blocks if required.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Reception Block Binary
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-154 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Binary Reception
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via binary signals. If a teleprotection method is
configured with a total of 3 ends, for example, 2 Receipt function blocks are required.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. The receipt signals can thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as
individual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-153.
Reception Block Unblock
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-155 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Unblock Reception
The teleprotection methods can optionally be used with the unblock method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The unblocking method is preferred under the following conditions:

With long lines
If the signal is transmitted via TFH (power line carrier transmission) through the line that is to be
protected
If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so great that reception by the
other line end is not ensured.
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 receipt signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B and >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B, and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the receipt of the trip logic of the teleprotection method is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded
to the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-153.
Reception Block Protection Interface
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-156 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Protection Interface
This receipt logic is used if the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital). Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The identity
and the number of devices participating in the teleprotection method for the protection of the line, are set by
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
using the configuration of the protection interface; see 3.5.3.4 Initialization and Configuration of the Protection
Interface in DIGSI 5 .
6.9.4 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
6.9.4.1 Description
[dwtpsmit-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-157 Function Block: Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
If a fault occurs within the underreaching zone - this is usually zone Z1 for the distance protection - a transfer-
trip signal is sent to the remote end. The receipt signal leads to accelerated tripping in the device at the
remote end.
Sending Logic Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
[lotpssem-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-158 Sending Logic for Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
Sending takes place upon pickup in the distance zone selected as a send condition. You can use the (_:
5671:101) Send prolongation parameter to compensate the differences in the pickup times at both
line ends.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectivity of the permissive underreach transfer trip for double
ground faults on parallel lines can be improved, if 3 phase-selective send signals are transmitted per commu-
nication direction. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3
or phase-jointly as individual signals (general).
If the internal indication Echo Confirmation from the trip logic is present, the sending logic also generates
the Send signal. If, with a present receive signal, an Operate with parameterized zone has picked up, the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Echo Confirmation raises. Even if the Send zone is set below the operate zone, a definite tripping is
possible for all line ends.
Trip Logic Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
[lotpsalm-110611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-159 Trip Logic Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The tripping for the
relevant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection scheme with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter Operate with will be released for trip-
ping. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5671:102) Operate
delay (1-phase); for multi-phase faults use the (_:5671:103) Operate delay (multi-ph.)
parameter.
If the permissive underreach transfer trip is used to protect a line configuration with more than 2 ends, the
receive signals from all line ends are linked with OR.
A trip signal results from a simultaneous presence of the distance zone pickup, the release signal, and the
time sequence. The (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole
tripping in 1-/3-pole trip logic devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the distance zone
pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the corresponding
time delay releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote end is no
longer present.
Measures in the Event of Weak Infeed

If no or only a weak infeed is available at a line end, the protection does not pick up the phase information or
it does so incorrectly. No trip command can therefore be issued there. In SIPROTEC 5 devices tripping can
also be used together with the permissive underreach transfer trip in the event of weak infeed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the permissive underreach transfer trip, the protection trips parallel to the send signal with the under-
reaching distance zone at the line end with strong infeed. An echo from the line end with weak infeed is there-
fore unnecessary as a release signal. However, the echo is advisable for manually testing the signal connec-
tion between the protection devices.
The functions are described in more detail in chapter 6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function) .
6.9.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Intertrip Process, General
Setting the Process

The various permissive underreach transfer trip methods can be implemented by using both parameters
Send with and Operate with (see Figure 6-158 and Figure 6-159). In addition, the selection of the recep-
tion block must be observed.
The following methods can be ordered:
Methods Parameter: Send with Parameter: Operate with
DIS permissive underreach Underreaching zone, type Z1 Pickup, general
transfer trip via pickup, non-direc-
tional
DIS intertrip process via extended Underreaching zone, type Z1 Overreaching zone, type Z1B
range
DIS intertrip process direct Underreaching zone, type Z1 Permissive underreach transfer
trip, reception (direct tripping)
The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1.
Parameter: Send prolongation
Recommended setting value (_:5671:101) Send prolongation = 0.05 s

With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compare the differences in the
pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends, Siemens
recommends the setting value 0.05 s.

You can use the Operate delay (1-phase) parameter to set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting value 0.00 s.

You can use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter to set the tripping delay for multi-phase faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the
Recommended setting value (_:5671:11) 1-pole operate allowed = Yes

This parameter allows 1-pole tripping of the teleprotection scheme in the event of 1-phase short circuits or
multiphase short circuits and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting Yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.9.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via an Extended Measuring
Range (Distance Protection with Underreaching and Grading-Time Shortening)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault within the underreaching zone. If
the fault is detected there within the overreaching zone, the receipt signal leads to tripping.
[dwtpsmeb-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-160 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Extended Measuring Range
You can configure the intertrip process via an extended measuring range with the following settings:
Transmit with
Recommended setting value (_:5671:140) Send with = Z1

With the settings Send with, you can select the underreaching distance zone. The underreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you specify
during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the underreaching
distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1.
Operate with
Recommended setting value (_:5671:141) Operate with = Dis Z1B

With the parameter Operate with, you select the overreaching distance zone Z1B. The selection texts are
identical to the designations which you specify during the zone configuration in the distance protection func-
tion. The selection text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 under-
reaching or 2 overreaching distance zones. For example Z1(Ph-E) then takes effect for ground faults and
Z1(Ph-Ph) for phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as send or tripping zones in the telepro-
tection method. This applies to parameters Send with and Operate with.
6.9.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup (Distance Protection
with Underreaching and Remote Tripping with Release)
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. If the
distance-protection function picks up at the remote end, the signal received there leads to tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtpsmua-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-161 Function Diagram of the Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip via Pickup
You can configure the permissive underreach transfer trip via pickup with the following settings:
Parameter: Send with
Recommended setting value (_:5671:140) Send with = Z1

Default setting (_:5671:141) Operate with= Pickup, general

The Operate with parameter is used to set the pickup for the accelerated tripping.
Pickup, general Select this setting value for the non-directional permissive underreach transfer
trip via pickup.
Reception (direct Select this setting value for a direct operate with the received signal.
operate)
6.9.4.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direct Intertrip Process
A transfer-trip signal is transmitted to the remote end in the event of a fault in the underreaching zone. The
signal received there leads directly to the tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtpsdim-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-162 Function Diagram for the Direct Intertrip Process
Recommended setting value (_:5671:140) Send with = Z1B

Recommended setting value (_:5671:141) Operate with = direct

Set the parameter to direct for the direct intertrip process.
6.9.4.6 Settings

85-21Perm.unde
_:5671:1 85-21Perm.unde:Mode off on
on
test
_:5671:101 85-21Perm.unde:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5671:11 85-21Perm.unde:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
_:5671:102 85-21Perm.unde:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5671:103 85-21Perm.unde:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:5671:140 85-21Perm.unde:Send with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5671:141 85-21Perm.unde:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
85-21Perm.unde
_:5671:81 85-21Perm.unde:>Block stage SPS I
_:5671:501 85-21Perm.unde:>Blocking echo SPS I
_:5671:502 85-21Perm.unde:>Blk. weak infeed trip SPS I
_:5671:54 85-21Perm.unde:Inactive SPS O
_:5671:52 85-21Perm.unde:Behavior ENS O
_:5671:53 85-21Perm.unde:Health ENS O
_:5671:304 85-21Perm.unde:Send ACT O
_:5671:301 85-21Perm.unde:Send signal is echo SPS O
_:5671:302 85-21Perm.unde:Weak infeed trip oper. SPS O
_:5671:56 85-21Perm.unde:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5671:57 85-21Perm.unde:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
_:5851:52 Rec. bin.sig.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5851:53 Rec. bin.sig.1:Health ENS O
_:5851:501 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs A SPS I
_:5851:502 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs B SPS I
_:5851:503 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive phs C SPS I
_:5851:504 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive general SPS I
_:5851:505 Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive failure SPS I
6.9.5 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
6.9.5.1 Description
[dwtpsver-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-163 Function Block: Permissive Modes
If a fault occurs within the overreaching zone, for example, zone Z1B for the distance protection - a send
signal is sent to the remote end. In the distance protection device, the received signal leads to accelerated
tripping if the fault is also detected in the forward direction.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Sending Logic Permissive Modes
[lotpssmv-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-164 Sending Logic for Permissive Modes
Sending takes place upon pickup in the selected overreaching zone or optionally upon pickup in the forward
direction. The send signal can be extended by a parameterizable time (_:5701:101) Send prolonga-
tion, if the protection has already issued a trip command. This also enables the release of the other line end
if the short-circuit is deactivated there very rapidly by the under-reach zone. With this, pickup differences
between the cable ends and signal delays can be considered.
If needed, the transmission signal can be delayed with (_:5701:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). No transmission signal is sent in the event of transient blocking.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the selectiveness of the permissive mode for double faults can be
improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective transmission signals are transferred per communication direc-
tion. Transmission and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-
jointly as individual signals (general).
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Trip logic Permissive Modes
[lotpsavv-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-165 Trip Logic for Permissive Modes
The distance protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The tripping for the rele-
vant zone is undertaken by that teleprotection method with which the distance protection works together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5701:141) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under (_:5701:103)
Operate delay (1-phase). For multi-phase faults, use the (_:5701:104) Operate delay (multi-
ph.) parameter.
The (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed parameter can be used to allow 1-pole tripping in 1-/3-
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive modes for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all line ends are combined for the tripping with AND.
A trip signal results from simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation, the release signal and the
time sequence. For applications with time-delayed tripping, a receipt signal once received is retained until the
distance zone pickup drops out. This ensures that the release signal is still present if the expiration of the
corresponding delay time releases the tripping, and the transmission signal of the protection from the remote
end is no longer present.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
mode. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a change of
direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
Related Topics
6.9.8.1 Description
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

it does so incorrectly. With this, neither a trip command nor a transmission signal can be sent. With the
permissive mode, the line end cannot be tripped quickly with increased infeed because no release signal is
transferred from the end with the weak infeed.
The teleprotection methods have special measures to enable a rapid trip at both line ends in such cases:
For the trip of the cable end with a strong infeed, the echo function can be made effective with a weak
infeed.
In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection methods have a func-
tion for trip with weak infeed.
Related Topics
6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)
6.9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Permissive Schemes, General
Setting the process

The various permissive schemes can be implemented using both parameters Send with and Operate
with (see Figure 6-164 and Figure 6-165 ). In addition, the selection of the reception block must be
observed.
The following methods can be set:
Permissive overreach transfer trip Overreaching zone, type Z1B Overreaching zone, type Z1B
scheme
Direction comparison process Pickup forward Pickup forward
Direction unblock process Overreaching zone, type Z1B Overreaching zone, type Z1B
However, the selected texts are identical to the designations you specify during the zone configuration in the
distance protection function. The selected text for the overreaching distance zone can therefore also be
different from Z1B.
Conditions for the Distance protection

Note for all permissive overreach transfer trips that pickup of the Distance protection in reverse direction is
longer than the overreaching zone of the opposite end (see shaded areas on the right in the following figure)!
For this, at least one of the distance-protection stages must be set to reverse or non-directional. In
case of a fault in Z1B of the protection in B that occurs in the shaded area (on the left in the figure) in case of
false settings, the Distance protection picks up. As an echo function is typically used, protection A would send
an unexpected echo signal and protection B would trip in an unselective way.
[dw_Dis-prot-vergleich-200314-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-166 Setting Distance Protection with Comparison Process
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

With the parameter Send prolongation in the transmission logic, you can compensate the differences in
the pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends,
Siemens recommends the setting value 0.05 s.
Parameter: Send delay
Recommended setting value (_:5701:102) Send delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Send delay, you can set an additional tripping delay. Since the teleprotection method
should lead to a fast and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting value 0.00 s.

With the parameter Operate delay (1-phase) , you can set the tripping delay for 1-phase ground faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

With the parameter Operate delay (multi-ph.), you can set the tripping delay for multi-phase faults.
Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.
Recommended setting value (_:5701:11) 1-pole operate allowed = Yes

This parameter allows 1-pole tripping of the teleprotection method in the event of 1-phase short circuits or
multiphase short circuits and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the
setting Yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.
6.9.5.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme (Distance Protection with
Overreaching and Release)
A send signal is sent to the remote end in the event of a fault in the overreaching zone. If the fault is also
detected there in the overreaching zone, the received signal leads to tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtpssiv-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-167 Function Diagram of the Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip Scheme
You can use the following settings to configure the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme:

With the Send with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations you specify during
the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching distance
zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
Recommended setting value (_:5701:141) Operate with = Z1B

With the Operate with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching
distance zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations which you
specify during the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the over-
reaching distance zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.
For applications in which the ranges for phase and ground faults are to be set differently, there are 2 over-
reaching distance zones. For example Z1B(Ph-Gnd) then takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(Ph-Ph) for
phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as send zones or tripping zones in the teleprotection
method. This applies to parameters Send with and Operate with .
6.9.5.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method

If the distance protection detects a fault in the line direction after an activation, it sends a release signal to the
remote end. If the opposite end receives the release signal and also recognizes an error in the cable direc-
tion, the trip signal is created.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtpsriv-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-168 Function Scheme of the Directional Comparison Procedure
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
Recommended setting value (_:5701:140) Send with = Dis pickup fwd

The parameter Send with is used to set the send condition to Dis pickup fwd..
Recommended setting value (_:5701:141) Operate with = Dis pickup fwd.

The parameter Operate with is used to set the trip condition to Dis pickup fwd..
6.9.5.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Direction Unblocking Process (Distance Protection with Overreaching
and Unblocking)
The directional unblock method corresponds to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme with a preset
function block Receive Unblock. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme, a tripping
is also possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional unblock method cannot be
operated with a communication via a protection interface owing to the way it functions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtpsubl-010311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-169 Function Scheme of the Directional Unblocking Method
With the following settings, you can configure the directional unblocking method:

With the Send with parameter, you can select the overreaching distance zone. The overreaching distance
zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations you specify during
the zone configuration in the distance protection function. The selection text for the overreaching distance
zone can therefore also be different from Z1B.

distance zone is typically designated with Z1B. The selection texts are identical to the designations you
reaching distance zones. For example Z1B(Ph-Gnd) then takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(Ph-Ph) for
phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as send zones or tripping zones in the teleprotection
method. This applies to parameters Send with and Operate with .
6.9.5.6 Settings

85-21Perm.over
_:5701:1 85-21Perm.over:Mode off on
on
test
_:5701:101 85-21Perm.over:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:5701:102 85-21Perm.over:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:5701:105 85-21Perm.over:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5701:106 85-21Perm.over:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5701:11 85-21Perm.over:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
_:5701:103 85-21Perm.over:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5701:104 85-21Perm.over:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:5701:140 85-21Perm.over:Send with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5701:141 85-21Perm.over:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
_:5701:142 85-21Perm.over:Trans. Setting options depend on
block. with configuration

(Type)
85-21Perm.over
_:5701:81 85-21Perm.over:>Block stage SPS I
_:5701:501 85-21Perm.over:>Blocking echo SPS I
_:5701:502 85-21Perm.over:>Blk. weak infeed trip SPS I
_:5701:54 85-21Perm.over:Inactive SPS O
_:5701:52 85-21Perm.over:Behavior ENS O
_:5701:53 85-21Perm.over:Health ENS O
_:5701:305 85-21Perm.over:Send ACT O
_:5701:302 85-21Perm.over:Send signal is echo SPS O
_:5701:303 85-21Perm.over:Weak infeed trip oper. SPS O
_:5701:301 85-21Perm.over:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5701:56 85-21Perm.over:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5701:57 85-21Perm.over:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.9.6 Blocking Method
6.9.6.1 Description
[dwtpsblo-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-170 Function Block: Blocking Procedure
If the protection function recognizes a fault in the reverse direction, the blocking signal is sent to the opposite
end. If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving line end, it generates the trip
signal after a short time delay.
Transmission Logic
[lotpssbl-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-171 Transmission Logic for the Blocking Procedure
The blocking signal is generated upon activation of the distance protection in the reverse direction or non-
directionally. The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5731:101) Send
prolongation , you can extend the blocking signal. In this way, the remote end can continue to be
blocked, even if the fault has already been cleared locally.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5731:102) Send
with jump ). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the distance
protection detects a fault in the forward direction, the blocking signal is stopped immediately and the indica-
tion Stop is generated.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for L1, L2, and L3 or
phase-jointly as individual signals.
Trip Logic Blocking Procedure
[lotpsaub-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-172 Trip Logic for the Blocking Procedure
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:5731:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping. The trip of the blocking procedure must be delayed due to possible differ-
ences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. The time
delay is set with the (_:5731:107) Release delay parameter.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the delay time under Operate delay (1-phase) ;
for multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation,
the internal release signal and the time sequences.
No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. The trip is blocked so that an activation in the
selected over-reach zone in the forward direction does not quickly shut down the external fault at the remote
end.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the blocking procedure for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
pole tripping devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.

Owing to the process, there is no option in the blocking process for achieving a trip command release at weak
infeed by the remote end. Rather, the advantage of the blocking process lies in the fact that tripping can also
occur rapidly at the infeed end without release, as no blocking signal can be formed from the non-feeding
end.
6.9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Procedure

The blocking procedure is used frequently:
If the signal is transmitted with TFH through the protected line and if the attenuation of the transmission
signal at the fault location is so large that the reception from the other cable end cannot be guaranteed.
For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the protection function detects a fault in the reverse direction, a blocking signal is generated. If the other line
end does not receive a blocking signal, the protection function trips in the event of a fault in the over-reach
zone. For this, the over-reach zone must be set to approximately 120 % of the line length. In the case of
multiple end lines, the over-reach zone must extend over the longer line section, irrespective of whether an
additional infeed is possible via the branching point. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end,
single infeed short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking procedure.
[dwtpsrib-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-173 Function Diagram of the Direction Blocking Procedure
Requirements during Distance Protection

When using the blocking procedure, observe that the pickup of the distance protection in the reverse direction
must reach further than the overreach zone of the opposite end! For this purpose, at least one of the distance
steps must be set to reverse or non-directional. If an error has been removed in Z1B (after B) of the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
protection in A Figure 6-173, the distance protection in B must safely pick up in the reverse direction, in order
to be able to send a blocking signal from protection B to protection in A.
Parameter: Send with jump
Recommended setting value (_:5731:102) Send with jump = Yes

With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.

pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC distance protection devices are used at all line ends, Siemens
recommends the setting value 0.05 s.

Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective trip, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

Since the teleprotection method should lead to a fast and selective trip, Siemens recommends the setting
value 0.00 s.

reaching distance zones. For example Z1B(Ph-E) then takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(Ph-Ph) for
phase faults. In this case, you must select both zones as tripping zones.
Parameter: Release delay
Recommended setting value (_:5731:107) Release delay = 0.020 s

With the parameter Release delay, you must set the release delay after a pickup. The trip of the blocking
procedure must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends
and because of the transmission time. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.020 s.
6.9.6.3 Settings

85-21 Blocking
_:5731:1 85-21 Blocking:Mode off on
on
test
_:5731:101 85-21 Blocking:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:5731:102 85-21 Blocking:Send with no yes
jump yes
_:5731:108 85-21 Blocking:Send phase no no
segregated yes
_:5731:105 85-21 Blocking:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5731:106 85-21 Blocking:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5731:107 85-21 Blocking:Release 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.020 s
delay
_:5731:11 85-21 Blocking:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
_:5731:103 85-21 Blocking:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5731:104 85-21 Blocking:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:5731:140 85-21 Blocking:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
_:5731:141 85-21 Blocking:Trans. Setting options depend on

(Type)
85-21 Blocking
_:5731:81 85-21 Blocking:>Block stage SPS I
_:5731:54 85-21 Blocking:Inactive SPS O
_:5731:52 85-21 Blocking:Behavior ENS O
_:5731:53 85-21 Blocking:Health ENS O
_:5731:305 85-21 Blocking:Teleprot. blocking ACT O
_:5731:307 85-21 Blocking:Stop ACT O
_:5731:301 85-21 Blocking:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5731:56 85-21 Blocking:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5731:57 85-21 Blocking:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.9.7 Reverse Interlocking
6.9.7.1 Description
[dwtpsrwv-260613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-174 Function Block: Reverse Interlocking
If a fault occurs within the crossover zone and none of the subordinate protection devices transmits a
blocking signal, this will initiate tripping of reverse interlocking.
Trip Logic
[loruever-260613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-175 Trip Logic for Reverse Interlocking
If a reception signal is not present, the zone that is set through the parameter (_:14311:140) Operate
with will be released for tripping.
The tripping can be delayed. For 1-phase faults, set the time delay under Operate delay (1-phase) ;
for multi-phase faults use the Operate delay (multi-ph.) parameter.
The trip indication therefore results when there is a simultaneous presence of the distance zone activation,
the internal release signal and the time sequences.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If a receiving signal is pending, tripping will be blocked in order to ensure that a pickup in the selected cross-
over zone does not disconnect quickly the short circuit on the outbound line.
If the Reverse interlocking function is used with several receiving blocks, the receiving signals from all
receiving blocks will be linked with OR.
pole tripping devices. If the device is capable of only 3-pole tripping, the parameter 1-pole operate
allowed does not apply and is not visible.
6.9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Reverse Interlocking

If the distance protection is used as backward protection at a transformer tap fed in from one side, you can
protect the busbar via reverse interlocking via quick-operating time. The selectivity of the distance protection
for faults on outgoing lines will not be jeopardized.
The distance zones Z1 and Z2 according to Figure 6-176 serve as reserve stage for errors on the out-bound
lines, for example, in F2. Consider the shortest following line for distance staggering.
Typically, the crossover zone Z1B provides the pickup information for the reverse interlocking. The time delay
for the reverse interlocking must be set higher than the pickup time Ta of the protection devices on the out-
bound lines. In the event of subordinate protection pickup, tripping of the reverse interlocking is blocked. The
pickup signals of the subordinate protection devices will be transmitted as receiving signal to reverse inter-
locking (see Figure 6-176). If none of the subordinate protection devices picks up, reverse interlocking gener-
ates a operate indication. This enables quick disconnection in the following scenarios:
Short circuit on the busbar, for example, in F1
If the circuit breaker fails during a fault in F2.
If the pickup signals of the subordinate protection devices drop faster than the pickup of the selected cross-
over zones, the transient blocking time prevents an unwanted tripping of the reverse interlocking.
[dwrckver-180613-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-176 Functional Schematic of Reverse Interlocking
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices and due to signal transmission times, tripping of
the reverse interlocking must be delayed. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.

Due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices and due to signal transmission times, tripping of
the reverse interlocking must be delayed. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.

reaching distance zones. For example, Z1B(L-E) takes effect for ground faults and Z1B(L-L) for phase faults.
In this case, you must select both zones as tripping zones.
Parameter: Trans. blk. dropout delay
Recommended setting value (_:14311:106) Trans. blk. dropout delay = 0.05 s

With the Trans. blk. dropout delay parameter, you can determine the duration of the transient
blocking. Set the Trans. blk. dropout delay to prevent an unwanted tripping of the reverse inter-
locking during a fast dropout of the pickup signal of the protection devices. Siemens recommends a setting of
0.05 s.
6.9.7.3 Settings

85-21Rev.interlock
_:14311:1 85-21Rev.interlock:Mode off on
on
test
_:14311:106 85-21Rev.interlock:Trans. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
blk. dropout delay
_:14311:11 85-21Rev.interlock:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
_:14311:103 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
delay (1-phase)
_:14311:104 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
delay (multi-ph.)
_:14311:140 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
85-21Rev.interlock
_:14311:81 85-21Rev.interlock:>Block stage SPS I
_:14311:54 85-21Rev.interlock:Inactive SPS O
_:14311:52 85-21Rev.interlock:Behavior ENS O
_:14311:53 85-21Rev.interlock:Health ENS O
_:14311:56 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:14311:57 85-21Rev.interlock:Operate ACT O
_:14311:347 85-21Rev.interlock:Function on SPC C
Rec. bin.sig.1
6.9.8 Transient Blocking
6.9.8.1 Description
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The transient blocking
is used for blocking and permissive overreach transfer trips, but not for a permissive underreach transfer trip.
[lotpstrb-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-177 Logic Diagram of the Transient Blocking
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period Trans. blk. pickup delay. The Transient blocking signal has an
effect on send and trip logic of the permissive overreach transfer trips as well as on the trip logic of the
blocking method. After the omission of the blocking criterium, the transient blocking will be maintained for a
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
set time Trans. blk. dropout delay. If a trip command is generated in the underreaching zone during
a transient blocking (signal Release Trip forward (DIS)), the transient blocking time is triggered. In this way,
the blocking of the teleprotection in the event of an internal fault is prevented.
The teleprotection methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection can affect one another. Use
the Trans. block. with parameter to set whether the transient blocking of the teleprotection method for
the ground-fault protection is to affect that of the distance protection. The reciprocal influence is advisable if
the teleprotection methods for distance protection and ground-fault protection work with a common communi-
cation channel.
6.9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking
Trans. Block through
Default setting (_:5731:141) Trans. block. with = EF: TrBlock XBlk

Set the parameter Trans. block. with to EF: TrBlock XBlk, if the teleprotection method for the
distance protection works on the same communication channel as an teleprotection method for the ground-
fault protection. Set the parameter to invalid if you are using separate communication channels. If no tele-
protection method is used for the ground-fault protection, it will not be possible to set the settings and the link
is automatically deactivated.
Parameter: Trans. blk. pickup delay
Recommended setting value (_:5731:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay = 0.04 s

With the parameter Trans. blk. pickup delay, you can set how long a reverse or non-directional
pickup should remain before the transient blocking occurs. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.
NOTE
i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are
recommended.

blocking. The time must be set longer than the duration of the transient compensation methods for the occur-
rence or switching of exterior short circuits.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems
6.10 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in

Grounded Systems
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded-neutral systems function (ANSI
67N):
Detects high-resistance ground faults in electric equipment in grounded systems
Detects short circuits phase selectively
Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems function is used in the Line
protection function group. The function is preconfigured at the factory to have 2 stages with definite-time
delay (definite time-overcurrent protection stages). Within the function, maximum 6 definite time-overcurrent
protection stages can be operated as well as 1 simultaneously by each inverse type. A maximum of 2 func-
tions can be operated within the function group.
The following stage types are available:
Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay (definite-time overcurrent protection)
Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI)
Ground-fault protection with definite-time delay with logarithmic inverse characteristics (AMZ-3I0-log)
Ground-fault protection with zero-sequence power-dependent time delay (S0 inverse)
Ground-fault protection with zero-sequence voltage-dependent time delay (V0 inverse)

The process for direction determination and phase selection is on the function level and has a uniform effect
on the stages (see Figure 6-178 and section 6.10.9.1 Description ). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of
a function receive the same direction result. Each stage can be set non-directional or directional forwards or
reverse. The process for direction determination is independent of the direction determination for the distance
protection.
The group-indications output logic (see Figure 6-178) generates the following group indications for the entire
Ground-fault protection function by logic OR from the stage-selective indications:
Pickup
Operate delay expired
Operate
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwgfpstr-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-178 Function Structure/Embedding
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and delay times of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected from outside
via a binary input signal.
Automatic reclosing (AREC)
Binary input signal
Automatic reclosing (AREC) If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages
can be stabilized against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents (see section 6.10.11.1 Description).
The stages can be used for directional-comparison protection via the Teleprotection method with ground-fault
protection function, if necessary (see chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions).
6.10.3 Stage Control
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types definite-time overcurrent protection
(UMZ), inverse-time overcurrent protection (AMZ) according to IEC and ANSI and inverse-time overcurrent
protection (AMZ) with logarithmic inverse characteristics.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loggfp02-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-179 Stage Control for the Stages Types Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Inverse Time-Over-
current Protection, and Logarithmic Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stage is blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage
failure, insofar as the stage works directionally, and the transformer neutral-point current is not connected.
The following figure represents the stage control for the stage types S0 inverse and V0 inverse.
[loggfp12-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-180 Stage Control for the Stage Types S0 Inverse and V0 Inverse
Besides the universally applicable stage control, the stages is also blocked upon a measuring-voltage failure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.4 Stage with Definite-Time Characteristic Curve
Logic of a Stage
[loggfp01-170611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-181 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Measurand
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition
equation
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available to
the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this ground current (residual
current). The linear range of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.5 A. At higher currents,
the device automatically switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
zero current from the conductor currents.
Method of Measurement
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending
on the application:
Measurement of the fundamental component over 1 cycle filter (standard filter)
This measuring procedure processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters

nent numerically. Harmonics and transient faults are damped particularly strongly over the extended
filter length in comparison to the standard filter. The extended filter length causes the pickup time to
increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see Technical specifications).
Stabilization with Phase Currents

In grounded systems, unbalanced line and load ratios cause a residual current in normal operational applica-
tions. Likewise, different current-transformer faults lead to a secondary residual current. The amplitude of this
undesirable residual current increases as the phase current increases. An undesirable residual current can
lead to false pickup and unwanted tripping at low setting values for the ground-current stages. To avoid false
pickup and unwanted tripping, the ground-current stages are stabilized with the phase currents. The threshold
value increases as phase currents rise (see the following graphic).
You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-182 Stabilization with Phase Currents
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or backward
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
The direction determination works across stages (see chapter 6.10.9.1 Description ).
Phase Selection
Phase Selection Depending on the distribution of the currents and voltages, the phase selection detects if a
1-phase (determination of the affected phase) or multiphase short circuit is present (see Chapter
6.10.10 Phase Selection ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup for Signal Supplement

The Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection function can be used to apply the stage for directional
comparison protection as well. The stage provides the internal signal signal supplement pickup for
this. Complete the necessary settings in the function Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection (see
chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions ).
Operating Mode upon 1-Pole Interruption

The Op.mode at 1p dead time parameter is used to define whether the stage is blocked during a 1-pole
pause or works non-directionally, even if it is set to directional operation. If the 1-pole pause is ended, the
corresponding device-internal signal is extended (retained) by the time of the Hold mode 1p dead time
parameter.
Blocking of the Stage Pickup

The following blockings suppress the pickup of the stage and fully reset the picked up stage:
Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see also Figure 6-179 and
Figure 6-180 )
During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead time
parameter is set to blocked .
Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.10.13.1 Description )
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
Parameter Blocking by prot. pickup

The pickup type at which the blocking is to occur is defined with this parameter. The blocking can occur
at any pickup or only at 1-pole or only at multipole pickups.
The parameter is also used to set that no blocking is to occur at pickup of the main protection. This also
applies if you have selected one or more zones/stages from the Blocking by parameter.
Blocking of the Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

Blocking of tripping via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function is described in section
6.10.11.1 Description .
Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings

If the following functions are present in the device, they can affect the dynamic settings Threshold and
Operate delay of the level:
Automatic reclosing
Cold-load pickup detection
Binary input signal

The influence of these functions via dynamic settings is described in chapter 6.10.13.1 Description .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Stage-Type Selection
If the tripping delay is to be independent of the current level, select the stage type Definite time-overcurrent
protection.
A multi-stage Definite time-overcurrent protection function is realized by the parallel operation of several defi-
nite time-overcurrent protection stages.
Parameter: Blocking by the main protection
Default setting (_:4861:140) Blocking by = none
Default setting (_:4861:130) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup

If you wish to give the selective fault clarification by the main protection function (for example, differential or
distance protection) priority over tripping by ground-fault protection, you can define this via both parameters.
The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or levels of the main protection function(s), upon
whose pickup the ground-fault protection is to be blocked.
The Blocking by prot. pickup parameter can be used to define the type of pickup, which leads to the
blocking.
every pickup Blocking at every pickup
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-pole pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multipole pickup
no pickup No blocking at pickup of the main protection function
Parameter: Operating mode at 1-pole dead time
Default setting (_:4861:129) Op.mode at 1p dead time = blocked

The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is used to define the behavior of the stage in the event of a 1-
pole interruption.
blocked As the load current also has a zero component in the 1-pole pause, a blocking
with this setting is advisable if the response threshold of the stage is less than /
equal to the maximum load current.
non-directional Select this setting if the ground-fault protection is to continue working in the 1-
pole pause, as a reliable direction measurement is not possible owing to load
current in the zero and negative-sequence system with 1-pole open circuit
breaker.
Set the response threshold of the stage greater than the maximum load
current.
Parameter: Hold mode 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time
Default setting (_:4861:112) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s

The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is used to define the time by which the operating mode the event
of a 1-pole pause will be extended after the end of the 1-pole pause.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the parameterized oper-
ating mode for a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole
dead time) until the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the
maximum time between connection of the 1st circuit breaker and connection of the last circuit breaker at all
ends of the feeder after a 1-pole pause.
Default setting (_:4861:114) Directional mode = non-directional
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You use the Directional mode parameter to define the directional mode of the stage.
non-directional If the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in the direction of
the line and busbar), then select this setting.
The stage also works with this setting if no direction measurement is possible,
for example, owing to lower or no polarization voltage.
forward Select these settings if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direc-
tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the level is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
direction of the busbar).
Parameter: Method of measurement
Recommended setting value (_:4861:8) Method of measurement = 1-cycle filter

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the measurand is determined via 1 or 2
cycle filters.
1-cycle filter This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Siemens recommends using this setting as the standard method.
2-cycle filter To implement a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient
faults, select the setting 2 cycle filter. Please note that in this case the pickup
time of the tripping level increases slightly (see Technical specifications).
Parameter: Stabilization with phase currents
Recommended setting value (_:4861:111) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %

value increases as phase currents rise. You can change the stabilization factor (= gradient) via the
Stabiliz. w. phase current parameter.
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.
Dynamic Parameter: Threshold
Default setting (_:4861:3) Threshold = 1500 A

Define the pickup value corresponding to the application.
At a very sensitive setting, you must ensure that a residual current due to unbalance (for example, untwisted
line) does not cause the level to respond.
Dynamic Parameter: Operate delay
Default setting (_:4861:6) Operate delay = 300 ms

The time delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart for ground faults that has been prepared for
the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, note whether stage tripping is direction-dependent and whether
signal transmission is used. See chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions
If you use a stage direction independently and with signal transmission, it can also have a non-delayed effect
during the release process. Parameterize a short delay for the blocking method equal to the signal-transmis-
sion time plus a reserve of approx. 20 ms.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:4861:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

Specify the parameter for the specific application.
yes The stage generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which poles
of the circuit-breaker to open is not made until central trip command control
becomes involved.
no The stage always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.
6.10.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:114 General:Polarization with V0 + IY or V2 + I2 V0 + IY or V2 +
V0 + IY (neutral pt.) I2
IY (neutral pt.) only
V2 + I2 (neg. seq.)
zero-sequence power
_:2311:101 General:Angle forward 0 to 360 338
_:2311:103 General:Min. zero-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V0
_:2311:115 General:Dir.reslt=forw.at no no
V0<min yes
_:2311:104 General:Min.3I0 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.030 A
f.increas.dir.sens. 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.150 A
_:2311:105 General:Min. neutral-point 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
curr. IY 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:107 General:Min. neg.-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V2
_:2311:106 General:Min. neg.-seq. 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
current I2 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.250 A
_:2311:108 General:Compensation 0 to 360 255
angle
_:2311:109 General:Forw. dir. power 1A 0.08 VA to 10.00 VA 0.52 VA
threshold 5A 0.42 VA to 50.00 VA 2.60 VA
_:2311:116 General:Dir.corr.at no no
ser.comp.lines yes
General
_:4861:1 Definite-T 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:4861:2 Definite-T 1:Operate & no no
_:4861:114 Definite-T 1:Directional non-directional non-directional
mode forward
reverse
_:4861:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole operate no no
allowed yes
_:4861:8 Definite-T 1:Method of 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
measurement 2-cycle filter
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:4861:116 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:4861:130 Definite-T 1:Blocking by every pickup every pickup
prot. pickup 1-phase pickup
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
_:4861:129 Definite-T 1:Op.mode at 1p blocked blocked
dead time non-directional
_:4861:112 Definite-T 1:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:4861:115 Definite-T 1:Dynamic no no
settings yes
_:4861:111 Definite-T 1:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:4861:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:6 Definite-T 1:Operate delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.300 s
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:4861:117 Definite-T 1:Effect. by AR no no
off/n.ready yes
_:4861:123 Definite-T 1:Stage blocked no no
yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:4861:118 Definite-T 1:Effected by AR no no
cycle 1 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
cycle 2 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
cycle 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
cycle gr. 3 yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:4861:122 Definite-T 1:Effected by no no
binary input yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:4861:140 Definite-T 1:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration
General
on
test
_:4862:114 Definite-T 2:Directional non-directional non-directional
mode forward
reverse
_:4862:11 Definite-T 2:1-pole operate no no
allowed yes
_:4862:8 Definite-T 2:Method of 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
_:4862:116 Definite-T 2:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
_:4862:129 Definite-T 2:Op.mode at 1p blocked blocked
_:4862:112 Definite-T 2:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
settings yes
phase current
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:4862:117 Definite-T 2:Effect. by AR no no
off/n.ready yes
yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
cycle 1 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
cycle 2 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
cycle 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
cycle gr. 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
configuration

(Type)
General
_:2311:501 General:>Test of direction SPS I
_:2311:301 General:Test direction ACD O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:4861:81 Definite-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:4861:84 Definite-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:4861:54 Definite-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:4861:52 Definite-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:4861:53 Definite-T 1:Health ENS O
_:4861:60 Definite-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:4861:301 Definite-T 1:Mode 1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:4861:302 Definite-T 1:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:4861:62 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:4861:65 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:4861:67 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:4861:68 Definite-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:4861:55 Definite-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:4861:56 Definite-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:4861:57 Definite-T 1:Operate ACT O
Definite-T 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.5 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection According to IEC and ANSI
Logic of the Stage
[loggfp03-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-183 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection
According to IEC and ANSI
Measurands
The residual current is used as a measurand. The residual current is calculated according to its definition
equation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
from the sum of the 3 phase currents. Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the residual
current can be measured or calculated.
If you connect a current input in the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (residual current) will be directly available to
the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the residual current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device will calculate the
residual current from the phase currents.
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant method of measurement,
depending on the application:
Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
nent numerically.
Measurement of the fundamental component via 2-cycle filter

nent numerically. Harmonics and transient faults are damped particularly strongly over the extended
filter length in comparison to the standard filter. The extended filter length causes the pickup time to
increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see Technical specifications).

value increases as phase currents rise (see following graphic).
[loggfpst-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse
direction. Non-directional operation is also possible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Phase Selection
The phase selection detects whether a 1-pole (determination of the relevant conductor) or a multiphase short
circuit is present via the distribution of the currents and voltages (see section 6.10.10 Phase Selection ).
Pickup for Signal Supplement

The Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection function can be used to apply the stage for directional
comparison protection as well. The stage provides the internal signal signal supplement pickup for
this. Complete the necessary settings in the function Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection (see
chapter 6.11.1 Overview of Functions ).
Pickup, Dropout, and Tripping Behavior of the Dependent Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by a factor of 1.1, the inverse-time characteristic curve
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. This time results from the
characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
When the measured value falls short of the pickup value by a factor of 1.045 (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value),
the dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via
setting parameters. You can select between the following options:
Non-delayed dropout: The summed time is deleted.
Dropout according to characteristic curve: The summed time is reduced in relation to the characteristic
curve.
The dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
weighted reduction of the time is initiated from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
The execution of the characteristic curve after exceeding 1.1 times the threshold value can be delayed by a
constant time ( Additional time delay parameter).

The Op.mode at 1p dead time parameter is used to define whether the stage is blocked during a 1-pole
pause or works non-directionally, even if it is set to directional operation. If the 1-pole pause is ended, the
corresponding device-internal signal is extended (retained) by the time of the Op.mode at 1p dead time
parameter.

The following blockings suppress the pickup of the stage and fully reset the picked up stage:
Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see also Figure 6-179 and
Figure 6-180 )
During a 1-pole pause by the Automatic reclosing function, insofar as the Op.mode at 1p dead time
parameter is set to blocked .
Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see section 6.10.13.1 Description and section
6.10.6.1 Beschreibung )
The blocking cause is indicated.
Blocking of the Tripping by Pickup of the Distance Protection or Differential Protection Function
The pickup and pickup type of the main protection function (distance or differential protection) can block the
stage tripping. You can perform this setting via 2 parameters:
Parameter Blocking by
This parameter is used to select the distance-protection zone or the differential at whose pickup the
blocking is to occur.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter Blocking by prot. pickup

The parameter is also used to set that no blocking is to occur at pickup of the main protection. This also
applies if you have selected one or more zones/stages from the Blocking by parameter.
Blocking of the Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

Blocking of the tripping via the device-internal inrush-current detection is described in section

If the following functions are present in the device, they can affect the dynamic settings Threshold and
Operate delay of the level:
Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal

If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to the IEC or ANSI standard, select this
type of stage.
Parameter: Blocking by the main protection
Default setting (_:140) Blocking by = none
Default setting (_:131) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup

The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or levels of the main protection function(s), upon
blocking.
Parameter: Operating mode at 1-pole dead time
Default setting (_:130) Op.mode at 1p dead time = blocked

The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is used to define the behavior of the stage in the event of a 1-
pole interruption.
blocked As the load current also has a zero component in the 1-pole pause, a blocking
with this setting is advisable if the response threshold of the stage is less than /
equal to the maximum load current.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

non-directional Select this setting if the ground-fault protection is to continue working in the 1-
pole pause, as a reliable direction measurement is not possible owing to load
current in the zero and negative-sequence system with 1-pole open circuit
breaker.
Set the response threshold of the stage greater than the maximum load
current.
Parameter: Hold mode for 1-pole dead time after falling edge 1-pole dead time
Default setting (_:113) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s

The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is used to define the time by which the operating mode the event
of a 1-pole pause will be extended after the end of the 1-pole pause.
maximum time between connection of the 1st circuit breaker and connection of the last circuit breaker at all
ends of the feeder after a 1-pole pause.
Default setting (_:115) Directional mode = non-directional

tion of the line).
Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = 1-cycle filter

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the measurand is determined via a 1 or
2 cycle filter.
peaks.
faults, select the setting 2 cycle filter. Please note that in this case the pickup
time of the tripping level increases slightly (see Technical specifications).
Parameter: Stabilization with phase currents
Recommended setting value (_:112) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Siemens recommends a setting of 10% under normal conditions.
Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1500 A

At a very sensitive setting, you must ensure that a residual current due to unbalance (for example, untwisted
line) does not cause the level to respond.
Parameter: Type of character. curve
Default setting (_:133) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

Select the type of characteristic curve specified for the system. The characteristic curves and the associated
formulas are shown in the Technical Data.
Dynamic Parameter: Time dial
Default setting (_:106) Time dial = 1.00

The time multiplier is derived from the grading chart for ground faults established for the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, note whether stage tripping is direction-dependent and whether
signal transmission is used. See also section 6.10.12 Signal Transmission and section 6.11.1 Overview of
Functions .
If you use a stage direction independently and with signal transmission, it can also have a non-delayed effect
during the release process. Parameterize a short delay for the blocking method equal to the signal-transmis-
sion time plus a reserve of approx. 20 ms.
Parameter: Additional time delay
Recommended setting value (_:132) Additional time delay = 0 s

This additional delay is intended for special applications.
Siemens recommends setting this time to 0 so that it has no effect.
Parameter: Reset
Default setting (_:134) Reset = instantaneous

You use the Reset parameter to define whether the stage drops out according to the dropout characteristic
curve (in accordance with the behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disk) or instantaneously.
disk emulation Use this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical devices or
other devices, performing a dropout after disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation and
an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.
Default setting (_:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

of the circuit breaker are to open is not made until the central trip command
control is involved.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.5.3 Settings

General
_:1 Inverse-T #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Inverse-T #:Operate & no no
_:115 Inverse-T #:Directional non-directional non-directional
mode forward
reverse
_:11 Inverse-T #:1-pole operate no no
allowed yes
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
_:117 Inverse-T #:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:131 Inverse-T #:Blocking by every pickup every pickup
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
_:130 Inverse-T #:Op.mode at 1p blocked blocked
_:113 Inverse-T #:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:116 Inverse-T #:Dynamic no no
settings yes
_:112 Inverse-T #:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:133 Inverse-T #:Type of char-
acter. curve
_:106 Inverse-T #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:132 Inverse-T #:Additional time 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
delay
_:134 Inverse-T #:Reset instantaneous instantaneous
disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:118 Inverse-T #:Effect. by AR no no
off/n.ready yes
_:124 Inverse-T #:Stage blocked no no
yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:119 Inverse-T #:Effected by AR no no
cycle 1 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
cycle 2 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
cycle 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
cycle gr. 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
_:123 Inverse-T #:Effected by no no
binary input yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:140 Inverse-T #:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 Inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 Inverse-T #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:54 Inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Mode 1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:62 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:65 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:67 Inverse-T #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 Inverse-T #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 Inverse-T #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 Inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Inverse-T #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.6 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic-Inverse

Characteristic Curve
6.10.6.1 Beschreibung
Logik der Stufe
[loggfp05-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-185 Logikdiagramm Erdkurzschlussschutz mit stromabhngiger Verzgerung mit logarithmisch

inverser Kennlinie (AMZ-3I0-log)
Dieser Stufentyp ist bis auf die Auslsekennlinie identisch mit dem Typ Erdkurzschlussschutz mit stromab-
hngiger Verzgerung nach IEC und ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (siehe Kapitel 6.10.5.1 Description ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Das vorliegende Kapitel geht nur auf die Ausprgung der Auslsekennlinie ein. Fr die weitere Funktionalitt
verweist Siemens auf das Kapitel 6.10.5.1 Description .
Auslsekennlinie
Figure 6-186 zeigt qualitativ die Wirkung der Parameter der Kennlinie.
Die Einstellung des Parameters Threshold ist der Bezugswert fr alle Stromwerte. Dabei bildet der Param-
eter Threshold multiplier den Beginn der Kennlinie, d.h. den unteren Arbeitsbereich auf der Stro-
machse bezogen auf den Schwellwert. Der Zeitwert Max. time of the curve bestimmt den Anfangswert
der Kennlinie (fr 3I0 = Schwellwert). Der Parameter Time dial verndert die Steilheit der Kennlinie. Bei
hohen Strmen gibt der Parameter Min. time of the curve die untere Zeitgrenze an.
[loggfp04-030810-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-186 Auslsekennlinie

Apart from the characteristic curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with
inverse-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
This section will only discuss the nature of the operate curve. For the further functionality, Siemens refers to
section 6.10.5.2 Application and Setting Notes .
If the operate delay is to be dependent on the current stage according to a logarithmic characteristic curve,
select this stage type.
Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1500 A

Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for the time-graded stages, the setting
for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into account in the grading chart.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Threshold multiplier
Default setting (_:106) Threshold multiplier = 1.1

You can use the Threshold multiplier parameter to define the beginning of the characteristic curve on
the current axis (in relation to the threshold value).
General information cannot be provided. Define the value corresponding to the application.
Dynamic Parameter: Time dial
Default setting (_:106) Time dial = 300 ms

You can use the Time dial parameter to change the slope of the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Max. time of the curve
Default setting (_:113) Max. time of the curve = 1.200 s

The time value Max. time of the curve determines the initial value of the characteristic curve (for 3I0 =
Threshold).
Parameter: Min. time of the curve
Default setting (_:112) Min. time of the curve = 1.200 s

The time value Min. time of the curve determines the lower time limit (at high currents).
6.10.6.3 Settings

General
_:1 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate & no no
_:118 Log.-inv.-T #:Directional non-directional non-directional
mode forward
reverse
_:11 Log.-inv.-T #:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
_:8 Log.-inv.-T #:Method of 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
_:120 Log.-inv.-T #:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:134 Log.-inv.-T #:Blocking by every pickup every pickup
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
_:133 Log.-inv.-T #:Op.mode at blocked blocked
1p dead time non-directional
_:116 Log.-inv.-T #:Hold mode 1p 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
dead time
_:119 Log.-inv.-T #:Dynamic no no
settings yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:115 Log.-inv.-T #:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:3 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:106 Log.-inv.-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:6 Log.-inv.-T #:Time dial 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.250 s
_:112 Log.-inv.-T #:Min. time of 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
the curve
_:113 Log.-inv.-T #:Max. time of 0.000 s to 60.000 s 5.800 s
the curve
_:114 Log.-inv.-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:121 Log.-inv.-T #:Effect. by AR no no
off/n.ready yes
_:127 Log.-inv.-T #:Stage blocked no no
yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:122 Log.-inv.-T #:Effected by no no
AR cycle 1 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
yes
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:140 Log.-inv.-T #:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
Log.-inv.-T #
_:81 Log.-inv.-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 Log.-inv.-T #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:54 Log.-inv.-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Log.-inv.-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Log.-inv.-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 Log.-inv.-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 Log.-inv.-T #:Mode 1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 Log.-inv.-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:62 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:65 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:67 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 Log.-inv.-T #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:55 Log.-inv.-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Log.-inv.-T #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.7 Stage with S0 Characteristic Curve
Logic of the Stage
[loggfp10-300511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-187 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence System Power-Dependent
Time Delay (S0 Inverse)
Apart from the operate curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with inverse
time-overcurrent protection according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Descrip-
tion ).
section 6.10.5.1 Description .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Operate Curve
Figure 6-188 shows the operate curve of the stage.
The zero-sequence system power protection operates according to a power-dependent operate curve.
The zero-sequence system power is calculated from the zero-sequence voltage and the zero-sequence
system current. The Sr component in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle comp is definitive.
This component is designated as a compensated zero power.
Sr = 3I0 3V0 cos(-comp) with = V0 I0
comp therefore indicates the direction of maximum sensitivity (cos( comp) = 1, if = comp). The power
calculation automatically contains the direction via its sign information. Reversing the signs also allows the
power for the reverse direction to be determined. Figure 6-194 represents the direction-characteristic curve.
The tripping time results according to the equation:
[fogfp003-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The power-time characteristic curve can be shifted with the reference value Sref (S ref for Sr-charac-
teristic = basic value for the inverse characteristic curve for = comp) in power direction. The power-
time characteristic curve can be shifted in the time direction by the factor k-fact. for Sr-character..
You can set additional power-dependent delays with the time setting Additional time delay.
[loggfp11-250111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-188 Operate Curve

Apart from the characteristic curve, this type of stage is identical to the ground-fault protection type with
inverse-time delay according to IEC and ANSI (AMZ-3I0-IEC/ANSI) (see section 6.10.5.1 Description ).
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero power according to an inverse characteristic curve, select
this stage type.
Parameter: Compensation angle
Default setting (_:2311:108) Compensation angle = 255

The Compensation angle setting is used to define the direction of maximum sensitivity.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: k-fact. for Sr-character.
Default setting (_:102) k-fact. for Sr-character. = 0.500 s

The k-fact. for Sr-character. parameter can be used to shift the power-time characteristic curve on
the time line.
Parameter: S ref for Sr-characteristic
Default setting (_:103) S ref for Sr-characteristic = 10 VA

The S ref for Sr-characteristic parameter can be used to shift the power-time characteristic curve
on the power axis.
Default setting (_:104) Additional time delay = 1.200 s

You can set additional power-dependent delays with the Additional time delay parameter.
6.10.7.3 Settings

General
_:1 S0 inverse-T #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 S0 inverse-T #:Operate & no no
_:108 S0 inverse-T #:Directional non-directional non-directional
mode forward
reverse
_:11 S0 inverse-T #:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
_:8 S0 inverse-T #:Method of 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
_:109 S0 inverse-T #:Blk. w. no no
_:111 S0 inverse-T #:Blocking by every pickup every pickup
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
_:106 S0 inverse-T #:Hold mode 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
1p dead time
_:105 S0 inverse-T #:Stabiliz. w. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
phase current
_:3 S0 inverse-T #:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 1.500 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 7.500 A
_:101 S0 inverse-T #:Threshold 1.00 to 4.00 1.10
multiplier
_:102 S0 inverse-T #:k-fact. for 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.500 s
Sr-character.
_:103 S0 inverse-T #:S ref for Sr- 1 A 0.84 VA to 100.00 VA 17.32 VA
characteristic 5A 4.20 VA to 500.00 VA 86.61 VA
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:104 S0 inverse-T #:Additional 0.000 s to 60.000 s 1.200 s
time delay
_:140 S0 inverse-T #:Blocking by Setting options depend on
configuration

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:81 S0 inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 S0 inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 S0 inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 S0 inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 S0 inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 S0 inverse-T #:Mode 1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 S0 inverse-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:55 S0 inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 S0 inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 S0 inverse-T #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.8 Stage with U0 Characteristic Curve
Logic of the Stage
[lo gfp stage V0 invers 1-/3-pol, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-189 Logic Diagram for Ground-Fault Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage-Dependent Time
Delay (V0 Inverse)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measurands
The device measures the residual voltage. The measured voltage is converted to the zero-sequence voltage
V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand from the broken-delta winding, the
zero-sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC:
[fo_U0 nullspannung, 1, en_US]
The zero-sequence current is used as a measurand. The zero-sequence current is calculated its definition
equation from the sum of the 3 phase currents.
[fo_I0 nullstrom, 1, en_US]
Depending on the use of the current inputs of the device, the zero-sequence current can be measured or
calculated.
If you connect a current input to the neutral-point feed of the current transformer or to a separate ground-
current transformer of the line to be protected, the ground current (zero-sequence current) will be directly
available to the device.
If the device is equipped with a sensitive current input INsens, the device will use this current. The linear range
of this measuring input ends at an amplitude of approx. 1.6 A. At higher currents, the device automatically
switches to analysis of the zero-sequence current calculated from the phase currents.
If the ground current is not present in the device as a directly measured variable, the device calculates the
zero-sequence current from the phase currents.
The Method of measurement parameter is used to select the relevant measuring procedure, depending
on the application:
Measurement of the fundamental component via 1-cycle filter (standard filter)
This method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental
component numerically.
Measurement of the fundamental component via 2-cycle filter

component numerically. Harmonics and transient faults are damped particularly strongly over the
extended filter length in comparison to the standard filter. The extended filter length causes the pickup
time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see Technical data).

value increases as phase currents rise (see next graphic).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[logfpsta-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Directional mode
You use the Directional mode parameter to define whether the stage works in a forward or reverse direc-
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
Voltage-Dependent Operate Curve

The voltage-dependent operate curve is based on the following formula:
[fo_U0 kennl, 1, en_US]
with
V0 Actually occurring zero-sequence voltage
V0 min Setting value of the parameter Min. zero-seq. volt. V0
The following figure shows the voltage-dependent characteristic curve of the V0-inverse stage:
[dw-GFP-kennl, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-191 Parameter of the Voltage-Dependent Characteristic Curve of the V0-Inverse Stage (without
Additional Times)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The operate time depends on the value of the zero-sequence voltage. In meshed, grounded systems, the
zero-sequence voltage increases towards the location of the ground fault. Due to the inverse characteristic
curve, the operate time decreases with rising zero-sequence voltage.
The V0> threshold value parameter defines the lower voltage limit (dotted line c in Figure 6-191). The
lower voltage limit c cuts off the characteristic curve b.
The Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direc-
tion of V0.
The Time delay directional parameter shifts the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the direc-
tion of time.
The setting value of the Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter is the asymptote a of the characteristic
curve a for t .
Processing the inverse characteristic curve after exceeding the threshold value V0> threshold value can
be delayed by the time set in the Time delay directional parameter.

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking is possible externally or internally via the
binary input signal >Block stage (see Figure 6-180).
Blocking of Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

Blocking of the tripping via the device-internal inrush-current detection is described in chapter
6.10.11.1 Description.
If the tripping delay is to be dependent on the zero-sequence voltage according to an inverse characteristic
curve, select this stage type.
Default setting (_:108) Directional mode = forward

forward Select this setting if the stage is only to work in a forward direction (in direction
of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is only to work in the reverse direction (in the
non-directional Select this setting if the stage is to work in the forward and reverse direction (in
the direction of the line and busbar).
Default setting 1-pole operate allowed = no

yes The stage generates a phase-selective operate indication. The decision as to
which poles of the circuit breaker to open is not made until the central trip-
command control becomes involved.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:8) Method of measurement = 1-cycle filter

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the measurand is determined via a 1- or 2-
cycle filter.
peaks.
faults, select the setting 2-cycle filter. Note that in this case, the pickup time of
the stage increases slightly (see Technical specifications).
Default setting (_:109) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the V0-inverse stage is
blocked or not blocked during the detection of the transformer inrush current.
Parameter: Blocking by the Main Protection
Default setting (_:140) Blocking by = none
Default setting (_:111) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup

The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or stages of the main protection function(s), upon
blocking.
1-phase pickup Blocking only at 1-phase pickup
multi-phase pickup Blocking only at multiphase pickup
Related Topics
Parameter: Hold mode 1p dead time
Default setting (_:106) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s

With the Hold mode 1p dead time parameter you define the time by which the behavior during a 1-pole
dead time is extended.
At all line ends, there is no simultaneous switch-in after a 1-pole dead time. Thus, the device-internal signal
for a 1-pole dead time must be retained for a certain time after the switch-in (end of the 1-pole dead time)
until the other end or ends have securely switched in. The time to be set here corresponds to the maximum
time between the connection of the 1st circuit breaker and the connection of the last circuit breaker at all ends
of the feeder after a 1-pole dead time.
Parameter: Stabiliz. w. phase current
Default setting (_:105) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Siemens recommends a setting of 10 % under normal conditions.
Parameter: Threshold 3I0
Default setting (_:101) Threshold 3I0 = 1.000 A

With the Threshold 3I0 parameter, you define the pickup value for the zero-sequence current. Set the
Threshold 3I0 lower than the minimum ground-fault current.
Default setting (_:102) V0> threshold value = 1.667 V

With the V0> threshold value parameter, you set the lower voltage limit of the voltage-dependent
operate curve (see Figure 6-191). The lower voltage limit cuts off the characteristic curve.
Parameter: Min. zero-seq. volt. V0
Default setting (_:103) Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 = 0.200 V

With the Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 parameter, you shift the voltage-dependent characteristic curves in
the direction of V0 (see Figure 6-191).
Parameter: Time delay directional
Default setting (_:104) Time delay directional = 0.90 s

With the Time delay directional parameter, you shift the voltage-dependent characteristic curve in the
direction of time (see Figure 6-191).
Parameter: Time delay non-direct.
Default setting (_:112) Time delay non-direct. = 1.20 s

With the Time delay non-direct. parameter, you can set additional direction-independent time delays.
The level of the zero-sequence voltage does not affect the previously set time delay.
Define the value corresponding to the application.
6.10.8.3 Settings

V0 inverse-T #
_:1 V0 inverse-T #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 V0 inverse-T #:Operate no no
& flt.rec. blocked yes
_:108 V0 inverse-T #:Direc- non-directional forward
tional mode forward
reverse
_:11 V0 inverse-T #:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:8 V0 inverse-T #:Method 1-cycle filter 1-cycle filter
of measurement 2-cycle filter
_:109 V0 inverse-T #:Blk. w. no no
_:111 V0 inverse-T #:Blocking every pickup every pickup
by prot. pickup 1-phase pickup
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
_:106 V0 inverse-T #:Hold 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
mode 1p dead time
_:105 V0 inverse-T #:Stabiliz. 0 % to 30 % 10 %
w. phase current
_:101 V0 inverse-T 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
#:Threshold 3I0 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 17.500 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 87.500 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 0.560 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 2.800 A 5.000 A
_:102 V0 inverse-T #:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 1.667 V
threshold value
_:103 V0 inverse-T #:Min. 0.000 V to 200.000 V 0.200 V
zero-seq. volt. V0
_:104 V0 inverse-T #:Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.90 s
delay directional
_:112 V0 inverse-T #:Time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.20 s
delay non-direct.
_:140 V0 inverse-T #:Blocking Setting options depend on
by configuration

(Type)
V0 inverse-T #
_:81 V0 inverse-T #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 V0 inverse-T #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V0 inverse-T #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V0 inverse-T #:Health ENS O
_:60 V0 inverse-T #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:301 V0 inverse-T #:Mode 1p dead-tm.active SPS O
_:302 V0 inverse-T #:Prot.PU blocks operate SPS O
_:55 V0 inverse-T #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V0 inverse-T #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V0 inverse-T #:Operate ACT O
The direction determination works across stages. Various methods are available for determining the direction
and for increasing the accuracy of the determination.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following diagram shows which variables and settings are used for direction determination.
[logfpri1-010311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-192 Logic Diagram for the Direction Determination
Method for Direction Determination

Use the Polarization with parameter to define which method and variables the direction determination
works with:
V0 + IY or V2 + I2 (direction determination with zero-sequence system transformer neutral-point
current or negative-sequence system)
V0 + IY (neutral pt.) (direction determination with zero-sequence system transformer neutral-

point current)
IY (neutral pt.) only (direction determination with transformer neutral-point current)
V2 + I2 (neg. seq.) (direction determining with negative-sequence system)
zero-sequence power (direction determination with zero system power)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The individual methods are described in more detail below.

The device automatically selects a suitable method with the V0 + IY or V2 + I2 setting.
Direction Determination with Current/Voltage Zero-Sequence Variables/Transformer Neutral-Point Current

The forward and reverse region is defined by the two parameters Angle forward and Angle forward
(see also Figure 6-194). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles
are defined positively in a mathematical sense (that is, counterclockwise). The range between the limit angle
, in a mathematically positive direction from this and the limit angle is the forward range. The remaining
range is the reverse range.
The direction is determined from the measuring current IN and a reference voltage Vp. If no transformer
neutral-point current is connected to the device, the reference voltage Vp is the zero-sequence voltage V0.
The zero-sequence voltage is calculated from its definition equation:
Depending on the device connection, it is measured or calculated. If a voltage input is connected at the
broken-delta winding Vdadn of a voltage-transformer set, the device will use this voltage with consideration for
the Matching ratio Vph / VN (see section 8.3.9.3 Function Description). Otherwise the device calcu-
lates the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
If the neutral-point current IY of a grounded transformer (supply transformer) is connected, the reference
voltage VP is the sum of the zero-sequence voltage V0 and a variable proportional to the neutral-point current
IY (see Figure 6-193). This corresponds to 20 V with the rated current. With the setting IY (neutral pt.)
only, VP is only derived from the transformer neutral-point current.
To determine the direction, the device sets the measuring current IN (= -3I0) to the real axis. If the phasor of
the reference voltage VP is within the defined forwards range, the device determines the direction as forward.
In other cases, the device determines the direction as backward.
As a prerequisite for direction determination, the adjustable minimum variables for the zero-sequence voltage
or the transformer neutral-point current must be exceeded (parameters Min. zero-seq. voltage V0
and Min. neutral-point curr. IY).
If the device detects a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit, the direction determination is
prevented with V0. If the transformer neutral-point current is connected to the device, the direction can be
determined via this.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-193 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Zero-Sequence System Values
Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values

This method works in the same way as the direction determination with zero-sequence system current and
zero-sequence system voltage. Instead of 3I0 and V0, the negative-sequence system values I2 and V2 are
used for the measurement. These measuring values must also have a Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 and
a Min. neg.-seq. current I2.
Direction Determination with Zero-System Power

The zero-system power can also be used for the direction determination. The sign of the compensated zero-
system power is then crucial. This is the component mentioned in section 6.10.7.1 Description under operate
curve Sr of the zero-system power in the direction of an adjustable compensation angle comp, that is, Sr =
3I03U0cos( comp).
The direction determination yields:
Forwards, if Sr positive and |Sr| > Forw. dir. power threshold
Backward, if Sr negative and |Sr| > Forw. dir. power threshold
Determining the direction requires a minimum residual voltage that can be set as Min. zero-seq.
voltage V0. Another prerequisite is that the compensated zero power must have an adjustable minimum
value (parameter Forw. dir. power threshold).
The following figure shows an example of the direction characteristic curve.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-194 Direction-Characteristic Curve for Direction Determination with Zero-System Power
Measuring-Voltage Failure, 1-Pole Dead Time

If the device detects a fault in the voltage transformer secondary circuit or a 1-pole dead time, the direction
determination is prevented.
Method for Direction Determination Response to the Measuring-Voltage Failure and 1-Pole Dead Time
V0 + IY or V2 + I2 If IY is unavailable, the readiness (Health) does not change and the
directional stages become inactive
V0 + IY (neutral pt.) If IY is unavailable, the readiness (Health) does not change and the
IY (neutral pt.) only No change of the directional stages
V2 + I2 (neg. seq.) If IY is unavailable, the readiness (Health) does not change and the
zero-sequence power Readiness (Health) does not change and the directional stages become
inactive
Increased Directional Sensitivity at Low V0 Voltage

The following figure shows the principle for increasing the directional sensitivity.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-195 Principle of Increased Directional Sensitivity at Low V0 Voltage
The V0 voltage at a ground fault with direction = reverse is determined with the following equation:
V0F0=backward = I0 (Z0trf + Z0L)
This equation can be used to determine a I0 threshold with corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0 threshold is
exceeded, the measured V0 voltage at a reverse fault must exceed the corresponding V0 threshold. If the I0
threshold is exceeded and the measured V0 voltage is less than the U0 threshold, the direction = forwards
can thus be determined.
The method can improve the directional sensitivity in the case of long lines (large Z0L).
Switch on this functionality via the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min parameter.
If the measured U0 voltage falls below the minimum value Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 and 3I0
exceeds the threshold Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens., the decision is for forwards.
Directional Correction with Series Compensation

If series compensation is used on the line, you can then correct the direction determination with V0. Activate
the correction via the Dir.corr.at ser.comp.lines parameter. Set the data required for the correction
(reactance of the capacitor bank) in the Line function group.
You can find more detailed information in Chapter 5.1.3 Application and Setting Notes.
Parameter: Polarization with
Recommended setting value (_:2311:114) Polarization with = V0 + IY or V2 + I2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i If a teleprotection scheme with ground-fault protection is used, it must be ensured that the direction meas-
urement at all line ends is carried out using the same procedure. The setting for the Polarization
with parameter must be the same at all line ends. If a device is used at a line end that does not have all
the setting options, then the direction measurement must be limited to a single procedure that is possible
at all line ends, for example, only V0 (setting option V0 + IY (neutral pt.)).

V0 + IY or V2 + I2 The default setting V0 + IY or V2 + I2 is universal. The device auto-
matically selects the best (largest) measured value for direction determina-
tion. You can also use this setting if the transformer neutral-point current IY
is not connected to the device.
Siemens recommends using this setting (see note on teleprotection
scheme).
V0 + IY (neutral pt.) If the direction determination is to be deliberately imposed via negative-
sequence variables (V2 and I2), select this setting. You can also use this
setting irrespective of whether the transformer neutral-point current IY is
connected to the device or not. If the transformer neutral-point current is
not connected to the device, the direction measurement only operates with
V0.
For the teleprotection scheme, it can be necessary to carry out the direction
measurement with the zero-sequence system only if a device only provides
this option at the opposite end.
IY (neutral pt.) only This setting can be advisable if a transformer neutral-point current IY is reli-
ably available at the device input at any time. The direction determination is
then not affected by faults in the secondary circuit of the voltage trans-
former. It also works if there is a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary
circuit.
However, this setting requires that ground-fault currents are at least
predominantly fed via the transformer whose neutral-point current is meas-
ured.
V2 + I2 (neg. seq.) Select this setting if you only wish to determine the direction with the nega-
tive-sequence system values I2 and V2.
If zero-sequence voltages occur during ground faults, which are too low for
analysis of the zero-sequence variables, direction determination with nega-
tive-sequence system values is advantageous.
Direction determination with negative-sequence system values is also
advantageous if, for example, parallel lines falsify the zero-sequence varia-
bles through mutual coupling.
You can also use these settings if the zero-sequence voltage is not avail-
able in the device.
zero-sequence power This setting is intended for special applications.
Parameters: Limit angle of the forward range
Recommended setting value (_:2311:102) Angle forward = 122

You can use the Angle forward and the Angle forward parameters for all methods based on the
angular measurement between the measuring and reference value which change the position of the direction-
characteristic curve. Only the method for determining the direction via the zero power is excluded.
Siemens recommends using the default settings, as the function reliably determines the direction of ground
faults with this.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Directional Correction with Series Compensation
Recommended setting value (_:2311:116) Dir.corr.at ser.comp.lines = no

no If no series compensation is
used on the line, set this
parameter to no.
yes If a series compensation is
used on the line, set this
parameter to yes. Direction
determination is then
corrected using V0.
Parameter: Minimum zero-sequence voltage V0
Default setting (_:2311:103) Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 0.15 V

You can use the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter to define the minimum zero-sequence voltage
for the direction determination with V0. The minimum zero-sequence voltage V0 must be set greater than the
maximum operational unbalance (zero-sequence system) plus voltage-transformer measuring errors. As the
measuring error of the individual voltage transformers in the zero-sequence system is not added up, the crit-
ical measuring error influence is the unbalance of the primary system.
Siemens recommends observing the operational zero-sequence voltage V0 of the protected object (for
example, the line) via the operational measured values of the device and providing the maximum value with a
certainty of 20 %.
Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 1.2 max. operational measured value of voltage zero-sequence
system V0
Example:
Max. operational measured value of voltage zero-sequence system V0 = 0.5 Vsec
Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 = 1.2 0.5 V = 0.60 Vsec
The setting value refers to the zero-sequence voltage V0 according to the definition equation and not to 3V0,
as with the SIPROTEC 4 devices.
Parameter: Minimum neutral-point current IY
Recommended setting value (_:2311:105) Min. neutral-point curr. IY = 0.05 A

The Min. neutral-point curr. IY parameter is used to set the lower threshold for the reference
current from the neutral point of a supply transformer. You can set the value relatively sensitive (see recom-
mended setting value), as the neutral-point current detection is naturally accurate.
Parameters: Minimum negative-sequence variables V2 and I2
Recommended setting value (_:2311:107) Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 = 0.7 V
Recommended setting value (_:2311:106) Min. neg.-seq. current I2 = 0.05 A

The parameters are used to define the minimum negative-sequence system values for determining the direc-
tion with V2 and I2. The set limiting values must not be exceeded by operational unbalances.
Parameter: Compensation angle
Recommended setting value (_:2311:108) Compensation angle = 255

The Compensation angle parameter is used to set the angle of the maximum sensitivity, cos( -
comp) = 1, if = comp.
The default setting 255 therefore corresponds to a zero-impedance angle of 75 (255 180). Siemens
recommends using the default settings, as the direction of ground faults is determined reliably with this.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Forward direction power threshold
Default setting (_:2311:109) Forw. dir. power threshold = 0.3 VA

The Forw. dir. power threshold parameter is used to define the value of the compensated zero-
system power, above which the direction is detected as forward. To ensure direction determination even at
low zero-system powers, this value is to be below the reference power S ref for Sr-characteristic
(see chapter 6.10.7.1 Description).
Parameter: Direction result = forward at V0 < minimum zero-sequence voltage
Default setting (_:2311:115) Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min = no

With long lines it may be the case that the zero-sequence voltage at a remote fault is too low on the line to be
protected. This is due to the high ratio between the zero-sequence impedance of the line and the supply
(source). If the setting for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter is fallen below, it will no longer be
possible to determine the direction by angular measurement. In the case of reverse faults in long lines, the
zero-sequence voltage cannot drop so sharply if the set 3I0 threshold value (Min.3I0
f.increas.dir.sens. parameter) is exceeded.
no If the direction has to remain undetermined under the described condition
and a stage pickup is not therefore possible in a directional stage, you
should select the setting no.
yes If the direction has to be automatically detected as forwards under the
described condition, you should select the setting yes.
Parameter: Minimum zero-sequence current 3I0 for increased directional sensitivity
Default setting (_:2311:104) Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens. = 0.05 A

The Min.3I0 f.increas.dir.sens. parameter only has to be set if the Dir.reslt=forw.at V0<min
parameter has been set to yes.
Then calculate the setting value with the following equation (see also Figure 6-195):
[fofrbest-060110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this equation, V0 is the setting value for the Min. zero-seq. voltage V0 parameter. SM is a reserve
(for example, 1.2).
6.10.10 Phase Selection
As the ground-fault protection works with the zero-sequence or negative-sequence values, direct determina-
tion of the ground fault is not possible. To be able to implement 1-pole automatic reclosing despite high-
resistance ground faults, the ground fault protection has a phase selector. The phase selection detects
whether a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred with the distribution of the currents. The phase
selection detects which phase is affected in the case of a 1-phase short circuit.
The phase selection filters the negative-sequence and the zero-sequence out of the phase currents. The fault
type, that is, whether a 1-pole or multiphase short circuit has occurred, is determined from the phase
displacement between the negative-sequence current and the zero-sequence current. The phase currents,
purged of the load current, are also evaluated from this. This utilizes the fact that, in the case of a 1-phase
short circuit, the healthy conductors can only conduct either no fault currents at all or only in-phase fault
currents.
The phase selection has an action time of approx. 40 ms. If the phase selection is unable to make a decision
in this time, 3-phase is signaled.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.11 Blocking of the Tripping by Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection
With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can define whether tripping of the stage
should be blocked when a threshold value is exceeded due to an inrush current. In case of a blocking, the
stage picks up. The S0 inverse stage and the V0 inverse stage do not pick up. The start of the time delay and
tripping are blocked. The stage signals this by way of a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out
and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started. After that time, the stage oper-
ates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage (exemplified by definite time-overcurrent protection
stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current detection.
[loggfp13-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-196 Partial Logic Diagram for the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st
Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage
Parameter: Blocking with Inrush-Current Detection

no The transformer inrush current detection does not affect the stage.
Select this setting in the following cases:
1) In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
2) In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold value
of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the transformer. This
typically applies for the high-current stage. The high-current stage is set corre-
sponding to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer so that it only
responds to high-voltage side faults. The transformer-inrush current cannot
become larger than the maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that
can lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and tripping of the
stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value
of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the transformer. This
applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a backup stage
with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the transformer.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.10.12 Signal Transmission
You can extend the ground-fault protection by means of the integrated signal-transmission logic for directional
comparison protection. You can find more detailed information on the possible transmission methods and
their function in section 6.11.1 Overview of Functions.
6.10.13 Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings
The Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the tripping are so-called dynamic settings. Depending
on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see Figure 6-197).
Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically.
[lodynpar-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-197 Principle of the Dynamic Settings in the Example of 1st Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Stage
If the following functions are available in the device, they can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functionalities Priority
Automatic reclosing Priority 1
Cold-load pickup detection Priority 2
Binary input signal Priority 3
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the protection stage
or block it, if necessary. In the latter case, the settings for the threshold value and time delay are of no rele-
vance. To each of the signals, the overcurrent-protection stage provides a configuration parameter
Affected by function ... and own dynamic settings (Operate delay and Threshold). The config-
uration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this means whether the dynamic
settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal function x) becomes active and
is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly active. This means that the
setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes inactive, the standard
settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Where several signals are active in parallel, the preceding priority applies. This means that a signal with
priority 1 precedes that of priority 2. The settings assigned to signal 1 become active.
The functionality of the dynamic settings can be disabled. In this case, the settings assigned to the signals
are not visible and are without effect.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing
[loeinawe-260111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-198 Influence of the AREC Signals on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the threshold value and time delay of the protection stage and
its blocking.
AREC is ready for reclosing 1 (= Automatic reclosing cycle 1)
AREC is ready for reclosing 4 (= Automatic reclosing cycle >3)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following signal can only block the protection stage:

AREC is switched off or not ready (= Automatic reclosing off/not ready)
You can activate the influence for each signal. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in section 6.15.2 Structure of the Function.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection
[logfpkal-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-199 Influence of the Cold-Load Pickup Detection on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings
to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in section 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
Link to an external function via a binary input signal
[loeinbin-270111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-200 Influence of the Binary Input on the Overcurrent-Protection Stage
You can use the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings to change the settings for the Threshold
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Parameter: Dynamic settings
Default setting (_:4861:115) Dynamic settings = no

no The influence on the protection stage by device-internal or external functions is
not necessary.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes If a device-internal function (for example, Automatic reclosing function) or an
external function is to affect the protection stage (for example, change to the
setting of the threshold value or the time delay, blocking of the stage), it is
necessary to set it to yes.
In this way, the configuration parameters Affected by function... as
well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage are visible and you can parameterize the specific influ-
ence.
Further application and setting notes can be found in the Overcurrent protection, phases and function in
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection
Information is exchanged with the remote station so that the ground-fault protection switches off immediately
and selectively on the entire line for all errors. You can implement the teleprotection through reception and
transmission contacts or through a digital communication connection.
The Teleprotection methods are used in Protection function groups with voltage-measuring point in combina-
tion with the Ground-fault protection function. The methods of the function illustrated in the following figure
are available.
[dwtestru-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-202 displays the functional control and the function blocks.
The transmission logic analyzes the pickup signals of the ground-fault protection and creates the respective
transmission signal for the transmission to the other line end.
The receipt signal from the other line end is coupled either through:
Binary Input
Unblock logic
Communication
For the protection of multi-terminal lines ends, the function blocks Rec. bin.sig.1 and Rec.unblk.sig#
are available multiple times, once for each removed line end.
The stage parameterized for the teleprotection method delivers the pickup information. This pickup informa-
tion is combined with the reception information for the trip condition. If the trip condition is fulfilled, the telepro-
tection method creates the operate indication.
A trip signal results through the simultaneous presence of a pickup and a release signal.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lotefste-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-202 Function Blocks and Function Control
In the following, the individual function blocks for the teleprotection method are described. Detailed informa-
tion about the function control can be found in chapter 2.3 Function Control.
6.11.3 Receipt Blocks
For the coupling of reception signals from opposite ends, the 3 reception block types Rec. bin.sig.1,
Unblock reception and protection interface reception are available. The teleprotection method described in
the following can be operated with the suitable reception blocks as needed.
A mixture between a line end connected through a protection interface and a binary connected line end is
possible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Reception Block Binary
[lotprxbi-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-203 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Binary Reception
If the communication occurs through binary signals, this reception logic is used. If a teleprotection method is
configured, for example, with altogether 3 ends, 2 function blocks Reception are required.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity for double ground faults can be improved on parallel lines if 3
phase-selective transmission signals can be transferred per communication direction. The receipt signals can
thus be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or in general as individual signals.
For common-phase teleprotection, the signal >Receive general is used, for phase-selective teleprotection
the 3 signals >Receive phs A, >Receive phs B, and >Receive phs C.
The binary input >Receive failure affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-202.
Reception Block Unblock
[lotpsunb-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-204 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Unblock Reception
You can use the teleprotection methods optionally with the unblocking method. The difference to the conven-
tional binary receipt is that a trip is also then possible if a release signal arrives from the opposite end.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The unblocking method is preferred under the following conditions:

With long lines
If the signal is transmitted via TFH (power line carrier transmission) through the line that is to be
protected
If the attenuation of the transmission signal at the fault location can be so large that the reception from
the other line end is not provided
For transmission of the signal, 2 signal frequencies are required, which are sent from the transmission signal
of the protection device. If the transmission device has channel monitoring, a monitoring frequency (blocking
frequency) can be switched to a working frequency (unblocking frequency). During the idle state or during an
external error, the monitoring frequency is transmitted, which signalizes the binary input >Blocking
general (or during phase-selective teleprotection to the binary inputs >Blocking phs A, >Blocking
phs B and >Blocking phs C) of the unblock logic.
If in the event of a fault due to the transmission signal from the opposite line end the working frequency is
received healthy, the receipt signal >Unblocking general will appear at the binary input of the unblock
logic. During phase-selective teleprotection, instead of >Unblocking general the 3 reception signals
>Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs Band >Unblocking phs C are used. Subsequently, the
blocking signal >Blocking general disappears. During the phase-selective teleprotection, the 3 blocking
signals >Blocking phs A, >Blocking phs B, and >Blocking phs C are used. With this, the signal
>Unblocking general (or the the respective signals >Unblocking phs A, >Unblocking phs B, and
>Unblocking phs C) are transmitted and the reception of the trip logic of the teleprotection method is
approved.
A short circuit on the line can cause an attenuation or reflection of the signal and the signal to be transmitted
no longer reaches the other line end. In this condition both binary inputs >Unblocking general and
>Blocking general are not active. After a time delay of 20 ms, the release is still created and forwarded
to the receipt logic. The release is then retracted over the time stage after a further 100 ms.
If the signals continue to receive without disruptions, the release is possible again after a dropout delay of
100 ms.
If the device does not receive any of the signals for 10 s, the indication Unblock receive fail. is gener-
ated. This indication affects the status indications of the function control, see Figure 6-202.
Reception Block Protection Interface
[lotprxws-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-205 Logic Diagram of the Reception Block: Protection Interface
If the communication takes place via a protection interface (digital), this receipt logic is used. Independent of
the number of configured devices, only one function block Protection interface is always required. The
number and the identity of the devices that participate in the teleprotection method for protection of the line
configuration can be set in the function group Protection-data communication under Device configuration.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.11.4 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
[dwtevgve-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-206 Function Block: Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a forward direction, a send signal will be sent to the oppo-
site end. If the error is also recognized in the forward direction, the received signal in the device on the oppo-
site end will lead to an increased trip.
Sending Logic Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
[loteseve-310511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-207 Sending Logic for Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
With the parameters Send with, you can select which stage of the ground-fault protection affects the send
signal. The send condition is fulfilled if the selected stage - or stages - are picked up in a forward direction. If
the protection has already submitted a trip command, the send signal can be prolongated by a set time (_:
5761:101) Send prolongation. This allows for the release of the other cable end even if the short
circuit is very quickly switched off. With this, pickup differences between the cable ends and signal delays can
be considered.
If needed, the send signal can be delayed with (_:5761:102) Send delay.
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) provides additional security from fault signals due to
transient oscillations caused by a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example, on
parallel lines). The detailed description can be found in chapter 6.11.6.1 Description . No send signal is sent
in the event of transient blocking.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectivity of the permissive overreach transfer trip for double ground
faults can be improved on parallel lines if 3 phase-selective send signals are transferred per communication
direction. Send and reception signals can thus be used phase-specifically for L1, L2 and L3 or phase-jointly
as individual signals (general).
Trip Logic Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
[loteausv-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-208 Trip Logic for Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection scheme. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection scheme with which the ground-fault protection collabo-
rates.
If a reception signal is present, the stage set through the parameter (_:5761:141) Operate with will be
released for tripping. The trip can be delayed. You can set the time delay under Send delay.
With the parameter (_:5761:11) 1-pole operate allowed, the tripping logic can allow for 1-pole trip
in 1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.
If the permissive overreach transfer trip for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is
used, the reception signals from all line ends are combined for the trip with AND.
A trip signal results from the simultaneous presence of
Stage pickup
Release signal
Expired time
For applications with delayed trip, a non-recurring receipt signal is only kept until the stage pickup returns.
Through this, it is guaranteed that the release signal is also present if the time-out of the corresponding time
delay releases the trip and the send signal of the protection of the opposite end is no longer imminent.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The transient blocking (signal Transient blocking) prevents the release of the tripping in the permissive
overreach transfer trip. It ensures additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by
a change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines). The detailed
description can be found in chapter 6.11.6.1 Description .

it does so incorrectly. With this, neither a trip command nor a send signal can be sent. With the permissive
overreach transfer trip, the line end cannot be tripped quickly with increased infeed, because no release
signal is transferred from the end with the weak infeed.
In order to allow for a quick disconnection on both cable ends in such cases, the teleprotection schemes have
special measures:
For the trip of the cable end with a strong infeed, the echo function can be made effective with a weak
infeed.
In order for the cable end to also be tripped with a weak infeed, the teleprotection schemes have a func-
tion for trip with weak infeed.
The functions are described in detail in the chapter Echo and Tripping in the event of weak infeed.
6.11.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Trip Logic of the Comparison Procedures
The various comparison procedures can be implemented by using both parameters Send with and
Operate with (see Figure 6-207 and Figure 6-208) . Additionally, you must observe the selection of the
reception block.
The following methods can be ordered:
Ground-fault comparison proce- One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
dure
Ground-fault unblock procedure One or multiple stages One or multiple stages
(unblock logic as a reception block)

pickup times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC devices are used on all cable ends, Siemens recommends
the setting value 0.05 s.
Parameter: Send delay
Recommended setting value (_:5761:102) Send delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Send delay, you can set an additional tripping delay. Since the teleprotection method
should lead to a rapid and selective tripping, Siemens recommends the setting value 0.00 s.

With the parameter 1-pole operate allowed, you allow 1-pole trip of the teleprotection method for 1-
phase faults or multi-phase faults and 1-phase reception. In devices with 1-pole trip, Siemens recommends
the setting yes. In devices with 3-pole trip, this parameter does not apply.
6.11.4.3 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Comparison Method

If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in the cable direction after a pickup, it will transmit a release
signal to the opposite end. If the opposite end receives the release signal and also recognizes an error in the
cable direction, the trip signal is created.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtevgvf-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-209 Function Scheme of the Directional Comparison Procedure
With the following settings, you can configure the directional comparison:
Recommended setting value (_:5761:140) Send with = ground-fault stage

With the parameter Send with, you can select one or multiple stages of the ground-fault protection as trans-
mission criteria. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to them in the
ground-fault protection.
Parameter: (_:5761:141) Operate with
Recommended setting value (_:5761:141) Operate with = ground-fault stage

With the settings Operate with, select the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection that leads to
trip during signal reception. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to
them in the ground-fault protection.
6.11.4.4 Application and Setting Notes for the Directional-Unblocking Method

The directional unblock method corresponds with the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme with a preset
function block Receive Unblock. Thus, compared to the permissive overreach transfer trip scheme, a tripping
is also possible without a release signal from the opposite end. The directional-unblocking method cannot be
operated with a communication through a protection interface (WS) due to its function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwteublv-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-210 Function Scheme of the Directional-Unblocking Method
With the following settings, you can configure the directional-unblocking method:
Recommended setting value (_:5761:140) Send with = ground-fault stage

With the parameter Send with, you can select one or multiple stages of the ground-fault protection as trans-
mission criteria. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to them in the
ground-fault protection.

With the settings Operate with, select the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection that leads to
trip during signal reception. The selection texts of the stages are identical with the labels that you assign to
them in the ground-fault protection.
6.11.4.5 Settings

85-67N Dir.com
_:5761:1 85-67N Dir.com:Mode off on
on
test
_:5761:101 85-67N Dir.com:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5761:102 85-67N Dir.com:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:5761:105 85-67N Dir.com:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5761:106 85-67N Dir.com:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5761:104 85-67N Dir.com:3I0 0 % to 100 % 75 %
threshold rev./forw.
_:5761:11 85-67N Dir.com:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:5761:103 85-67N Dir.com:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5761:140 85-67N Dir.com:Send with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5761:141 85-67N Dir.com:Operate Setting options depend on
with configuration
_:5761:142 85-67N Dir.com:Trans. Setting options depend on

(Type)
85-67N Dir.com
_:5761:81 85-67N Dir.com:>Block stage SPS I
_:5761:501 85-67N Dir.com:>Blocking echo SPS I
_:5761:502 85-67N Dir.com:>Blk. weak infeed trip SPS I
_:5761:54 85-67N Dir.com:Inactive SPS O
_:5761:52 85-67N Dir.com:Behavior ENS O
_:5761:53 85-67N Dir.com:Health ENS O
_:5761:305 85-67N Dir.com:Send ACT O
_:5761:302 85-67N Dir.com:Send signal is echo SPS O
_:5761:303 85-67N Dir.com:Weak infeed trip oper. SPS O
_:5761:301 85-67N Dir.com:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5761:308 85-67N Dir.com:Pickup 3I0 ACD O
_:5761:56 85-67N Dir.com:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5761:57 85-67N Dir.com:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.11.5 Blocking Method
[dwtefblo-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-211 Function Block: Blocking Method
If the protection function recognizes a ground fault in the backward direction, the blocking signal is sent to the
opposite end (signal Blocking). If the protection device does not receive a blocking signal at the receiving line
end, it generates the trip signal after a short time delay.
Transmission Logic
[lotesblk-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-212 Transmission Logic for the Blocking Method
The blocking signal is created in the event of pickup of the ground-fault protection in the backward or non-
directional direction. The threshold value for creation of the blocking signal is the percentage of the threshold
value of the level that affects tripping in the blocking procedure. The percentage is set with the parameter (_:
5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. in the teleprotection method. Further information can be found
in the section 6.11.7.1 Description .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The logic is designed in a phase-selective manner. With the parameter (_:5791:101) Send prolonga-
tion , you can extend the blocking signal. Even if the error has already been cleared up locally, the opposite
end can continue to be blocked through this.
The blocking signal can also be immediately sent with jump detection (parameter (_:5791:102) Send
with jump ). If the communication channel can react very quickly to the absence of the blocking signal, you
can use this jump signal, because the jump signal appears for every jump in the dimensions. If the ground-
fault protection recognizes an error in the forward direction, the blocking signal is immediately stopped and
the indication Stop is created.
For applications with 1-pole trip, the selectiveness of the blocking procedure for double faults can be
tion. Transmission and reception signals can therefore be used phase-specifically for A, B, and C or phase-
jointly as individual signals.
Trip Logic Blocking Method
[loteaubv-300511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-213 Trip Logic for the Blocking Method
The ground-fault protection provides the pickup information to the teleprotection method. The trip for the
affected stage is attended to by that teleprotection method with which the ground-fault protection works
together.
If a reception signal is present, the zone set through the parameter (_:5791:140) Operate with will be
released for trip. The trip of the blocking method must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup
times of the devices at both cable ends and because of the transmission time. You can set the time delay
with the parameter (_:5791:107) Release delay .
The tripping can be delayed. You can set the time delay under (_:5761:102) Send delay .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The operate indication results for the simultaneous presence

of the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection
of the internal release signal
of the time expirations

No release of the trip occurs for an upcoming reception signal. In order to make sure that the pickup of the
selected stage(s) does not switch the exterior errors on the opposite end, the trip is blocked for upcoming
reception signals.
If the blocking procedure for the protection of a line configuration with more than 2 ends is used, the reception
signals from all cable ends are combined with OR.
With the parameter (_:5791:11) 1-pole operate allowed , the trip logic can allow for 1-pole trip in
1-/3-pole trip devices. This parameter does not apply to devices that only have 3-pole trip.

For the blocking procedure, there is not possibility, depending on the procedure, to achieve a trip command
release through the opposite end with a weak infeed. The advantage of the blocking procedure is instead that
there can be a trip on the infeed end without a release, because the end not being fed in cannot form a
blocking signal.
6.11.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Blocking Method

The blocking method is often used:
If the signal is transmitted with TFH through the protected line and if the attenuation of the transmission
signal at the fault location is so large that the reception from the other cable end cannot be guaranteed.
For the protection of line configurations with more than 2 ends with different infeed
If the ground-fault protection recognizes an error in a backward direction, a blocking signal is transmitted. If
the other cable end does not receive a blocking signal, the ground-fault protection trips in a forward direction
in the case of a ground-fault current. Since no release signal is required by the opposite end, single infeed
short circuits are quickly switched off with the blocking method.
[dwteblve-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-214 Function Scheme of the Blocking Method
Parameter: Send with jump
Recommended setting value (_:5791:102) Send with jump = Yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the parameter Send with jump, you can set if the blocking signal is sent without delay with the jump
detection. Siemens recommends using the fast blocking with jump and retaining the setting.

With the settings T SENDEVERL. in the transmission logic, you can compare the differences in the pickup
times for both cable ends. If SIPROTEC devices are used on all cable ends, Siemens recommends the

With the parameter Operate with, you can select the ground-fault stage.
Parameter: Release delay
Recommended setting value (_:5791:107) Release delay = 0.020 s

With the parameter Release delay, you must set the release delay after a pickup. The trip of the blocking
method must be delayed due to possible differences in the pickup times of the devices at both cable ends
and because of the transmission time. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.020 s.
6.11.5.3 Settings

85-67N Block.
_:5791:1 85-67N Block.:Mode off on
on
test
_:5791:101 85-67N Block.:Send 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
prolongation
_:5791:102 85-67N Block.:Send with no yes
jump yes
_:5791:108 85-67N Block.:Send phase no no
segregated yes
_:5791:105 85-67N Block.:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
pickup delay
_:5791:106 85-67N Block.:Trans. blk. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
dropout delay
_:5791:107 85-67N Block.:Release 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.020 s
delay
_:5791:104 85-67N Block.:3I0 0 % to 100 % 75 %
threshold rev./forw.
_:5791:11 85-67N Block.:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
_:5791:103 85-67N Block.:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay (1-phase)
_:5791:140 85-67N Block.:Operate with Setting options depend on
configuration
_:5791:141 85-67N Block.:Trans. Setting options depend on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
85-67N Block.
_:5791:81 85-67N Block.:>Block stage SPS I
_:5791:54 85-67N Block.:Inactive SPS O
_:5791:52 85-67N Block.:Behavior ENS O
_:5791:53 85-67N Block.:Health ENS O
_:5791:305 85-67N Block.:Teleprot. blocking ACT O
_:5791:307 85-67N Block.:Stop ACT O
_:5791:301 85-67N Block.:Transient blocking SPS O
_:5791:308 85-67N Block.:Pickup 3I0 ACD O
_:5791:56 85-67N Block.:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:5791:57 85-67N Block.:Operate ACT O
Rec. bin.sig.1
6.11.6 Transient Blocking
The transient blocking provides additional security from fault signals due to transient oscillations caused by a
change of direction after disconnection of external faults (for example on parallel lines).
[lotetrbl-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-215 Logic Diagram of the Transient Blocking
If a pickup in the reverse direction or non-directionally is present (non-forward fault), the transient blocking
occurs after a waiting period ((_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay). After the omission of the
blocking criteria, the transient blocking will be maintained for a set time ((_:5791:106) Trans. blk.
dropout delay).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection can influence each other simultane-
ously. With the parameter Trans. block through, you can set if the transient blocking of the teleprotec-
tion for the distance protection should have an effect on the teleprotection of the ground-fault protection. The
mutual influence is meaningful if the teleprotection for ground-fault protection and distance protection works
with a shared communication channel.
6.11.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Transient Blocking
Parameter: Trans. block. with
Default setting (_:5791:141) Trans. block. with = DIS: TrBlock XBlk

Set the parameter Trans. block. with to DIS: TrBlock XBlk if the teleprotection method for the
distance protection works on the same communication channel as a teleprotection method for the ground-
fault protection. Set the parameter to invalid if you are using separate communication channels. If you are
not using a teleprotection method for the ground-fault protection, the parameter setting is not possible and the
link is automatically disabled.
Parameter: Trans. blk. pickup delay
Recommended setting value (_:5791:105) Trans. blk. pickup delay = 0.04 s

With the parameter Trans. blk. pickup delay, you can set how long a reverse or non-directional
pickup should remain before the transient blocking occurs. Siemens recommends a setting of 0.04 s.
NOTE
i The time Trans. blk. pickup delay may not be set to zero. This makes sure that the transient-
blocking time Trans. blk. dropout delay is not already started if the directional information comes
in a delayed manner compared to the function pickup. Depending on the time of the circuit breaker on the
parallel line or the circuit breaker lying in a reverse direction, settings between 10 ms and 40 ms are
recommended.

blocking. The time must be set longer than the duration of the transient compensation methods for the occur-
rence or switching of exterior short circuits.
6.11.7 Sensitive Measuring Stage of Ground-Fault Protection
In order to avoid a faulty echo during comparison, it must be ensured that an external ground-fault with a
flowing ground-fault current is recognized on both cable ends. During the blocking method and for the tran-
sient blocking, a secure blocking signal must be created under these conditions.
If the error is not recognized in a ground-fault in accordance with Figure 6-216 the protection in B, this would
be interpreted as an error fed-in from A. With a comparison, protection B would send an echo signal. For the
blocking procedure and for the transient blocking, the required blocking signal would not be created. The
consequence would be a faulty trip of the ground-fault protection in A.
[dwt3i0v1-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-216 Possible Current Distribution with an External Ground-Fault
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The teleprotection method with ground-fault protection has a sensitive ground-current stage (_:5791:104)
3I0 threshold rev./forw..
[lotsigzu-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-217 Logic of the Sensitive Ground-Fault Protection
With the permissive overreach transfer trip, the sensitive ground-current stage has an effect on the echo func-
tion and the transient blocking. If the stage for the recognition of a backward fault in B is always more sensi-
tive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees an error from the other line end A in a
forward direction, no fault echo signal can result and the transient blocking will also work correctly.
With the blocking method, the sensitive ground-current stage is the threshold from which the blocking signal
is created if there are reverse errors. For this application, it also applies that the recognition of a reverse error
in B must be more sensitive than the stage pickup of the ground-fault protection, which sees the error from
the other cable end A in a forward direction. Thus, the blocking signal sent from B leads to the required
blocking of the trip ground-current stage on the cable end A.
The setting value for the sensitive ground-current stage is a percent value. For permissive overreach transfer
trips, it automatically relates to the threshold value of the stage or the stages of the ground-fault protection,
which are connected with the permissive overreach transfer trip through the parameter Send with.
During the blocking procedure, the percentage setting value is automatically in regards to the stage or stages
of the ground-fault protection, which are connected with the blocking procedure through the parameter
Operate with.
6.11.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for the Sensitive Stage of the Ground-Fault Protection
Parameter: 3I0 threshold rev./forw.
Default setting (_:5761:104) 3I0 threshold rev./forw. and (_:5791:104) 3I0

threshold rev./forw.= 75%
With the parameter 3I0 threshold rev./forw., you can set the threshold value for the ground-fault
signal addition stage in a ratio to the thresholds of the ground-fault stages selected under Send with
The sensitive stage of the ground-fault protection must be more sensitive than the ground-current stage that
works with the transmission or trip stage in order for the teleprotection method to function correctly. The
sensitive stage must be set in a more sensitive manner depending on the size of the capacitive ground
current (3I0c in Figure 6-216). Normally, 70 % to 80 % of the setting for the ground-current stage is adequate
for overhead lines. Siemens recommends the setting of 75 % for this application.
For cables or very long overhead lines, if the capacitive currents in the event of a ground fault have the same
dimensions as the ground-fault currents, the echo function should be avoided or it should only be used for
open circuit-breakers; the blocking procedure should then not be used at all.
For lines with 3 ends (feeder), it must be considered that the ground-fault current is unevenly distributed over
the ends of the line in the event of an external ground fault. The critical case is illustrated in Figure 6-218. In
the least favorable case, the ground current flowing from A divides itself half and half over line ends B and C.
The setting value 3I0 threshold rev./forw.significant for the echo or the blocking signal, must there-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
fore be below half of the response value of the ground-current stage used for signal transmission. Addition-
ally, the considerations described above apply with regard to the capacitive ground current, which is not dealt
with in Figure 6-218. The conditions are more convenient for a ground-current distribution different than
assumed here, because then one of the 2 ground currents 3I0b or 3I0c must be greater than in the previous
consideration.
[dwt3i0v2-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-218 Possible Inconvenient Current Distribution through a Teed Feeder in the Event of an External
Ground Fault
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed
The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function is used to support the teleprotection method for distance
protection and ground-fault protection. Its use is only advisable, therefore, if you are using an appropriate
teleprotection method.
In the following situations, a permissive overreach transfer trip (signal comparison, directional comparison,
and directional unblock method) does not receive a release signal from the opposite end of the line:
Lines with single-side infeed, from the end of the line without infeed
Neutral-point grounding at just one end of the line, from the end of the line without residual current
From the end of the line with no infeed or only weak infeed
To accelerate tripping at both ends of the line in these situations, the Echo and tripping on weak infeed func-
tion supports the Echo function and the TWI function (TWI = tripping on weak infeed).
To trip the end of the line with a strong infeed, the echo function can be implemented at the end of the line
with a weak infeed. In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received
signal back to the other end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be enabled there.
The Echo function can also be used to test the signal connection between the protection devices in the
context of permissive underreach transfer trip.
You can also use the TWI function to trip the end of the line with missing or weak infeed. You can use the
TWI function together with permissive overreach transfer trips and permissive underreach transfer trip.
Please note that the function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The Echo and tripping on weak infeed function comprises the subfunctions shown in the following figure. The
function is used in the Line function group.
[dwwnstru-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 2 subfunctions Echo and tripping on weak infeed receive control signals from the teleprotection method
for distance protection and ground-fault protection in the local device; see the following figure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwwnfblk-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-220 Function Blocks
In the following, the individual function blocks are described.
6.12.3 Echo Function
In the absence of pickup at one end of the line, the echo function sends the received signal back to the other
end of the line as an echo, so that the trip command can be released there.
Echo Release
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection method with distance protection is generated as
follows:
[lodisecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-221 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Distance Protection
The release signal for the echo function in the teleprotection method with ground-fault protection is generated
as follows:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loeksecf-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-222 Release Logic for the Echo Function with Ground-Fault Protection
Echo Logic
There are 2 echo logics. Structured in exactly the same way, they are assigned to the distance protection and
ground-fault protection functions. The echo logic is shown in the following figure.
[lodisecl-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-223 Logic Diagram for the Echo Function
The time delay (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay takes effect when the echo release for
distance protection or ground-fault protection is set. This time delay is necessary if the pickup time for the
protection function at the weak end of the line is higher for a reverse fault or if the protection function picks up
later due to unfavorable short-circuit or ground-current distribution. The echo is transmitted at the end of the
time delay. If the circuit-breaker position at the end of the line without infeed is 3-pole open, the echo time
delay is not necessary. The echo time delay is bypassed.
You can set the length of the echo pulse with the (_:5821:103) Echo pulse parameter.
The circuit-breaker position is signaled centrally by the process monitor.
A new echo cannot be transmitted for at least 50 ms (default setting of the (_:5821:101) Echo block
time after Tx parameter) once the echo pulse has been released or for the duration of the send signal
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
associated with the release method currently in use. This prevents the echo from being repeated immediately
after the line is disconnected.
Common Communication Channel

If the teleprotection methods with distance protection and ground-fault protection are used in parallel and a
common communication channel is used for the send signals, it is no longer possible at the remote end of the
line to tell whether the original echo signal is coming from distance protection or from ground-fault protection.
The single-channel coordinator ensures that an echo is only transmitted if an echo release is pending for both
protection functions: in other words, if neither protection function picks up.
[lokankoo-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-224 Logic of the Single-Channel Coordinator
Detection of Weak Infeed

If there is a short-circuit, it has to be assumed that there is only a low voltage at the end of the line with weak
infeed, as the weak short-circuit current can only induce a low voltage drop in the short-circuit loop. If there is
no infeed, the loop voltage is close to zero. Therefore, the trip on weak infeed is induced dependent upon the
measured undervoltage V<. The measured undervoltage also permits selection of the faulty phase.
For supply systems with grounded neutral point, detection of the weak infeed is phase-selective. The infeed is
assumed to be weak in the absence of pickup in the phase concerned and if undervoltage is detected when
the circuit-breaker is closed ((_:5821:106) Undervoltage threshold parameter). The information
about the circuit-breaker condition is supplied by the process monitor.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loasephe-070311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-225 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Ground Voltages (Grounded Systems)
For systems with isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, the phase-to-phase voltages are used as the
criteria for undervoltage detection. Phase-selective detection of weak infeed is not possible.
[loasephp-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-226 Detection of Weak Infeed for Phase-to-Phase Voltages (Isolated or Resonant-Grounded
Systems)
6.12.4 Tripping on Weak Infeed (TWI Function)
The TWI function is used to trip the circuit breaker at the end of the line with missing or weak infeed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic for TWI
[lownfrei-310511-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-227 Release Logic for Tripping on Weak Infeed
Phase-selective TWI pickup is triggered if a weak infeed is detected and a receive signal from the teleprotec-
tion scheme for distance protection or ground-fault protection is pending at the same time. On TWI pickup,
the trip logic of the associated method triggers the trip signal.
TWI pickup and thus tripping can be delayed with the parameterizable time (_:5821:102) Echo and
operate delay. TWI tripping is also delayed by the release time (_:5821:103) Echo pulse. Synchro-
nization between echo and TWI is achieved by both functions using the same time parameters.
To select the Echo and tripping on weak infeed function, use the function library with DIGSI.
The function is designed for working together with permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive over-
reach transfer trips. The function must not be used in conjunction with blocking methods.
The function contains the following parameters:
Parameter: Weak infeed action

The basic mode of operation is set with the (_:5821:104) Weak infeed action parameter.
Recommended setting value (_:5821:104) Weak infeed action = only echo

only echo The echo function is active. There is no tripping on short circuits with
missing or weak infeed.
off A missing or weak infeed does not induce echo or tripping.
echo and WI operate The echo function and tripping on short circuits with missing or weak
infeed are active.
only WI operate Only tripping on short circuits with missing or weak infeed is active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: 85-21/67N common chan.

If distance protection and ground-fault protection are using the same communication channel and generate
an echo independently of one another, you must set the (_:5821:105) 85-21/67N common
chan.parameter to yes to avoid unwanted tripping.
Parameter: Echo and operate delay

The length of the echo delay time (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay must be set so that
different pickup response times for Distance-protection functions or Ground-fault protection functions at all
ends of the line cannot lead to an unwanted echo if faults occur outside the system.
Recommended setting value (_:5821:102) Echo and operate delay = 40 ms
Parameter: Echo pulse
The echo pulse duration (_:5821:103) Echo pulse can be adapted to transmission-system conditions. It
must be long enough to ensure that the receive signal is detected even if the movement delays of the protec-
tion and transmission devices at the ends of the line are not the same.
Recommended setting value Echo pulse = 50 ms
Parameter: Echo block time after Tx
To avoid an infinite echo between the ends of the line, a new echo cannot be sent for a period of (_:
5821:101) Echo block time after Tx after an echo signal has been sent. An infinite echo could
otherwise be triggered by interference coupling on the signal path, for example. The echo is also blocked for
this time once distance protection or ground-fault protection has been sent.
Recommended setting value Echo block time after Tx = 50 ms
Parameter: Undervoltage threshold
This parameter is only relevant if you are using the TWI function (tripping on missing or weak infeed).
The upper limit for this threshold value (_:5821:106) Undervoltage threshold must be below the
minimum voltage to be expected during operation. The maximum voltage drop to be expected at the end of
the line with weak infeed if there is a short circuit on the line to be protected, at which distance protection
might no longer pick up, applies as the lower limit.
In systems with grounded neutral point, phase-to-ground voltages apply as reference values; in systems with
isolated or resonant-grounded neutral point, phase-to-phase voltages apply.
6.12.6 Settings

Weak infeed
_:5821:101 Weak infeed:Echo block 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
time after Tx
_:5821:102 Weak infeed:Echo and 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.04 s
operate delay
_:5821:103 Weak infeed:Echo pulse 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
_:5821:104 Weak infeed:Weak off only echo
infeed action only WI operate
only echo
echo and WI operate
_:5821:105 Weak infeed:85-21/67N no no
common chan. yes
_:5821:106 Weak infeed:Under- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 25.000 V
voltage threshold
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Weak infeed
_:5821:51 Weak infeed:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:5821:52 Weak infeed:Behavior ENS O
_:5821:53 Weak infeed:Health ENS O
_:5821:81 Weak infeed:>Block stage SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification
6.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French

Specification
6.13.1 Function Overview
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification:
Also switches off the line end with weak infeed with a short circuit on the line
Selects the faulty phases via a relative undervoltage threshold
Trips instantaneously or with a delay
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is used in the function
group Line.
The function is preconfigured with an Instantaneous stage and a Delayed stage. The undervoltage and 3I0
detection settings are in the General function block and apply to all stages.
[dw_struck-3I0-erkennung, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.13.3 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection
Logic
[lo_unterspann-3I0-erkennung, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-229 Undervoltage and 3I0 Detection Logic
Undervoltage Detection
The faulty phases are selected via undervoltage detection. The threshold value of the undervoltage detection
is dynamic and results from the product of the measured phase-to-phase voltage and the Vph-g< factor.
This accounts for operational deviations from the rated voltage in the undervoltage threshold.
The average value is obtained from the measured phase-to-phase voltages of the last 500 ms. The average
value is held via a voltage memory for an adjustable time (Time constant Tau). Changes in the phase-to-
phase voltage thus have an effect on the undervoltage threshold in a time-delayed manner. When a phase
picks up, the most recently determined voltage threshold of the picked-up phase is held until generation of the
operate indication. The voltage threshold is thus not affected by the error in the case of long time delays. The
undervoltage is determined for all 3 phases.
If the stored phase-to-phase voltage drops below the 3 Threshold Vph-gnd< threshold, an under-
voltage detection is no longer possible in the respective phase.
Since positive feedback results from tripping, that is, the measured fault condition cannot be removed by trip-
ping, the pickup of both stages automatically drops out again after tripping of at least one stage. If the present
voltage exceeds the dropout threshold again, renewed pickup is possible after a maximum of 1 s.
NOTE
i The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification is suited for use only
in grounded systems.
3I0 Detection
The Instantaneous and the Delayed stage both use 3I0 detection. If the zero-sequence current exceeds the
3I0> threshold, the 3I0 detection picks up and generates the indication 3I0> exceeded. If the pickup
drops out, the indication 3I0> exceeded is held for an adjustable time T 3I0> extension.
The Health of the function is set to Warning in the event of a measuring-voltage failure.
If the measured voltage values or the 3I0 measured values are invalid, Health is set to Alarm and the
stage/function is blocked.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: (_:2311:2) Vph-g< factor
Default setting Vph-g< factor = 0.70

With the Vph-g< factor parameter you specify the factor for the calculation of the undervoltage threshold.
The threshold value of the undervoltage detection results from the product of the measured phase-to-phase
voltage and the Vph-g< factor. The average value is obtained from the measured phase-to-phase
voltages of the last 500 ms and is used for the calculation of the undervoltage threshold.
Set the parameter Vph-g< factor for the specific application.
Parameter: (_:2311:3) Threshold Vph-gnd<
Default setting Threshold Vph-gnd< = 30.000 V

With the Threshold Vph-gnd< parameter you set the phase-to-ground voltage for the determination of the
dropout threshold. The dropout threshold of the undervoltage detection is calculated from 3 Threshold
Vph-gnd<.
If the Voltage criterion is instantiated in the Process monitor function, you must set the Threshold U open
there. Set the Threshold Vph-gnd< to the same value as the Threshold U open parameter.
Parameter: (_:2311:4) Time constant Tau
Default setting Time constant Tau = 5 s

With the Time constant Tau parameter you determine how long the average value of the phase-to-phase
voltages is stored.
Set the parameter Time constant Tau for the specific application.
Parameter: 3I0> threshold
Default setting (_:2311:5) 3I0> threshold = 0.500 A

Use the parameter 3I0> threshold to determine the pickup threshold for the zero-sequence current.
Set the parameter 3I0> threshold for the specific application.
Parameter: T 3I0> extension
Default setting (_:2311:6) T 3I0> extension = 0.60 s

With the T 3I0> extension parameter you determine how long the indication 3I0> exceeded is held.
Set the parameter T 3I0> extension for the specific application.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.13.4 Instantaneous Stage
Logic
[lo_unverz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-230 Logic of the Instantaneous Stage
(1) Not for devices with 3-pole tripping only
If the input signal >Receive from the remote end is received and an undervoltage is simultaneously
detected, the Instantaneous stage generates an operate indication. The input signal >Receive is held for
an adjustable time (parameter: Receive extension ) so that tripping is also possible in case of a fast
dropout of the signal from the opposite end.
As long as the Distance protection function has picked up in a phase or after a line has been tripped, the
pickup of the Instantaneous stage is blocked. The Instantaneous stage is blocked until the input signal
>Receive drops off again.
If no undervoltage is detected while the input signal >Receive is on, but the 3I0> threshold is
exceeded, an internal fault on the line is indicated. If this state lasts longer than 500 ms, a 3-pole operate
indication is generated.
The Instantaneous stage works only if the binary input signal >Receive OK indicates correct functioning of
the communication channel.
The Instantaneous stage can also be blocked via the phase-segregated signals TWI block. False pickups,
for example, after switching off the local line end are thereby avoided.
Default setting (_:15451:1) Operating mode = on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You use the Operating mode parameter to define whether the Instantaneous stage is enabled or disabled.
Parameter: Receive extension
Default setting (_:15451:2) Receive extension = 0.65 s

With the Receive extension parameter you determine how long the binary input signal >Receive is held.
The function Tripping with missing or weak infeed according to French specification can thereby also trip in
case of a fast dropout of the sending side.
Set the parameter Receive extension for the specific application.
Parameter: T 3I0> alarm
Default setting (_:15451:3) T 3I0> alarm = 10.00 s

With the T 3I0> alarm parameter, you define the time delay for the output indication 3I0> detected.
When the T 3I0> alarm has expired and the zero-sequence current still exceeds the threshold value 3I0>
threshold, the indication 3I0> detected is issued.
Set the parameter T 3I0> alarm for the specific application.

You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Instantaneous stage is
allowed to execute 1-pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of switching 1-pole, then 1-pole trip-
ping is allowed on overhead lines.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.13.5 Delayed Stage
Logic
[lo_verz-Stufe-3I0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-231 Logic of the Instantaneous Stage
With the Delayed stage you can still trip the local line end even in case of a failure in the communication
channel. The Delayed stage picks up in a phase-segregated way with a detected undervoltage and trips after
a configurable time. Depending on how the stage (1-pole operate allowed or 3-pole operate
allowed) functions, different time delays take effect (Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) or Op. delay
multi-ph. (TT)). If no tripping is indicated even after expiration of the the times TM and TT following the
pickup, the voltage memory is reset and the pickup drops out.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In the following cases, the phase selection is blocked via the undervoltage detection:
The internal supervision functions Voltage-transformer circuit breaker or Measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion (Fuse Failure Monitor) detect a loss of voltage.
The Distance protection function has picked up.
Default setting (_:15481:1) Operating mode = on

With the Operating mode parameter you determine the functioning of the Delayed stage.
on The Delayed stage is enabled.
off The Delayed stage is disabled.
on receive err. The Delayed stage works only in case of a reception disruption.
In this case, the signal >Receive OK is off.
Parameter: Operate delay 1-ph. (TM)
Default setting (_:15481:2) Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) = 0.40 s

The Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) parameter is used to set the tripping delay for 1-pole tripping.
The Delayed stage generates a phase-segregated operate indication after expiration of the Operate delay
1-ph. (TM).
Parameter: Op. delay multi-ph. (TT)
Default setting (_:15481:3) Op. delay multi-ph. (TT) = 1.00 s

The Op. delay multi-ph. (TT) parameter is used to set the tripping delay for 3-pole tripping.

You can use the 1-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Delayed stage is allowed to
execute 1-pole tripping or not. If the circuit breaker is capable of switching 1-pole, then 1-pole tripping is
Parameter: 1-pole operate with 3I0>
Default setting (_:15481:5) 1-pole operate with 3I0> = yes

With the 1-pole operate with 3I0> parameter you determine whether a 1-pole operate indication is
generated or not depending on the zero-sequence current.
yes If the 1-pole operate with 3I0> = yes parameter is set and the zero-
sequence current exceeds the 3I0> threshold the Delayed stage generates a
1-pole operate indication.
no When the 1-pole operate with 3I0> = no parameter is set, the Delayed
stage generates a 1-pole operate indication independently of the zero-
sequence current supervision.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You can use the 3-pole operate allowed parameter to specify whether the Delayed stage is allowed to
execute 3-pole tripping or not.
6.13.6 Settings

General
on
test
_:2311:2 General:Vph-g< factor 0.10 to 1.00 0.70
_:2311:3 General:Threshold Vph- 0.300 V to 100.000 V 30.000 V
gnd<
_:2311:4 General:Time constant 1 s to 60 s 5s
Tau
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.250 A to 5.000 A 2.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.050 A to 0.500 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.250 A to 2.500 A 2.500 A
_:2311:6 General:T 3I0> exten- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.60 s
sion
Undelayed
_:15451:1 Undelayed:Operating off on
mode on
_:15451:2 Undelayed:Receive 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.65 s
extension
_:15451:3 Undelayed:T 3I0> alarm 0.00 s to 60.00 s 10.00 s
_:15451:11 Undelayed:1-pole no yes
operate allowed yes
Delayed
_:15481:1 Delayed:Operating off on
mode on
on receive err.
_:15481:2 Delayed:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.40 s
1-ph. (TM)
_:15481:3 Delayed:Op. delay multi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
ph. (TT)
_:15481:11 Delayed:1-pole operate no yes
allowed yes
with 3I0> yes
allowed yes

(Type)
General
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:2311:83 General:>Receive SPS I
_:2311:84 General:>Receive OK SPS I
_:2311:55 General:Undervoltage ACT O
_:2311:56 General:3I0> exceeded SPS O
Undelayed
_:15451:55 Undelayed:Pickup ACD O
_:15451:57 Undelayed:Operate ACT O
_:15451:58 Undelayed:Operate 3I0> SPS O
_:15451:59 Undelayed:3I0> detected SPS O
Delayed
_:15481:81 Delayed:>Block stage SPS I
_:15481:55 Delayed:Pickup ACD O
_:15481:56 Delayed:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:15481:57 Delayed:Operate ACT O
Group indicat.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.14 External Trip Initiation
The External trip initiation for phase-segregated signals function:

Processes any signals from external protection or supervision devices
Enables the integration of any signals from external protection equipment in the indication and tripping
processing, for example transient ground-fault relays or Buchholz protection
Enables direct tripping of the circuit breaker in conjunction with busbar-protection applications
Enables direct tripping of the circuit-breaker in the case of circuit-breaker failure at the other line end
Links the teleprotection scheme (permissive underreach transfer trip and permissive overreach transfer
trip) for direct trip command transfer with the signal from the other line end
The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals function comes factory-set with 1 tripping stage. A
maximum of 1 stage can be operated in the function. The External trip initiation for phase-selective signals
function can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dwstrext-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.14.3 Stage Description
Logic of the Stage
[lotripha-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-233 Logic Diagram for the External Trip Initiation for Phase-Segregated Signals Stage
3-Phase and Phase-Selective Binary Input Signals

The 3-phase binary input signal >External trip phs ABC and the phase selective input signals
>External trip phs A,>External trip phs B, >>External trip phs C start the Pickup and
the Operate delay. The stage is uniformly phase-selective in structure.
Output Signals
The function provides the binary output signals Pickup, Operate delay expired and Operate. The
signals are available phase-selective.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Blocking the Stage

The stage can be switched to ineffective via a number of signals. If the stage is in the activate state at the
time of blocking, it will be immediately reset. However, the tripping remains stopped for the minimum oper-
ating time Min.Op.T.
Recommended setting value (_:931:6) Operate delay = 50 ms

The Operate delay parameter must be set for the specific application. After expiry of the Operate delay
the time overshoot and tripping are signaled. The duration of the initiation signal as well as the adjustable
minimum command time determine the signal duration of the Operate.
Recommended setting value (_:931:11) 1-pole operate allowed = no

The 1-pole operate allowed parameter allows you to set the tripping option of the stage. If 1-pole trip-
ping is allowed, phase-selective tripping will be possible.
6.14.5 Settings

Stage 1
_:931:1 Stage 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:931:2 Stage 1:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:931:11 Stage 1:1-pole operate no no
allowed yes
_:931:6 Stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s

(Type)
Stage 1
_:931:82 Stage 1:>Block function SPS I
_:931:501 Stage 1:>External trip phs ABC SPS I
_:931:502 Stage 1:>External trip phs A SPS I
_:931:503 Stage 1:>External trip phs B SPS I
_:931:504 Stage 1:>External trip phs C SPS I
_:931:54 Stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:931:52 Stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:931:53 Stage 1:Health ENS O
_:931:55 Stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:931:56 Stage 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:931:57 Stage 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15 Automatic Reclosing Function
The Automatic reclosing function:

Automatically closes overhead lines after arc short-circuits
Is only permissible for overhead lines, because only the possibility of self-activated extinguishing of an
arc short-circuit exists here
Can be controlled by integrated protection functions and by external protection devices
The automatic reclosing can occur through an external automatic reclosing function via binary inputs.
The automatic reclosing after switching off through a short-circuit protection is taken over by the automatic
reclosing function (AREC). The following figure shows an example for the normal procedure with a two-time
automatic reclosing where the second automatic reclosing attempt is successful.
[dw2awewz-090210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-234 Process Diagram of a Two-Time Reclosing With Action Time (2nd Reclosing Successful)
The integrated Automatic reclosing function allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Each of the 8 disruption
cycles can work with different parameters.
The automatic reclosing function is used in function groups for circuit breakers. In a function group for circuit
breakers, one of the 3 types of functions illustrated in the following figures can be used. The Automatic
reclosing function has a central function control.
[dwfktawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

The Cyclic automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-236) allows for up to 8 reclosing attempts. Here each
disruption cycle may work with different settings.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For the Cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be deleted. You can
add and delete additional cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
[dwzykawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-236 Structure/Embedding of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time

The Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT) works without fixed disruption cycles
(Figure 6-237). The requirement for the usage of ADT is that voltage transformers on the line-side are
connected or there is a possibility to transfer a close command to a remote line end. With the ADT, the Auto-
matic reclosing function decides independently if and when an automatic reclosing is reasonable and permis-
sible and when it is not. The criteria is the phase-to-ground voltage, which is switched through after reclosing
from the opposite line end. The Automatic reclosing function with ADT occurs as soon as it is known that the
line from the opposite end has been placed back under voltage.
[dwaweasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-237 Structure/Embedding of the Automatic Reclosing Function With Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function

The cooperation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the
function mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function (Figure 6-238). The function only provides
binary inputs for the influence of the protection functions in the SIPROTEC protection device. The external
automatic reclosing device delivers the close command. The SIPROTEC protection functions then provide for
the trip commands.
[dwextawe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-238 Structure/Embedding of the Operating Function With External Automatic Reclosing Function
Function Control
The automatic reclosing function contains a central function control, see the following figure. You can find
detailed information on the function control in the section Function/Stage Control.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loarcfkt-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-239 Function Control for the Automatic Reclosing Function
6.15.3 Cooperation of the Automatic Reclosing Function and Protection Functions
The automatic reclosing function (AREC) can be influenced by the protection functions in the following way:
The AREC is started through pickup indications and operate indications by the selected protection func-
tions or protection stages. The start is independent of the set operating mode for the AREC.
Individual protection functions or protection stages can be configured so that their operate indication
blocks the AREC. If such a blocking exists, the AREC cannot be started. If the AREC is already started,
the blocking will lead to the cancellation of the AREC.
The automatic reclosing device can thus have an influence on the effects of the protection functions. The
following influence possibilities exist:
The AREC provides signals that can be used by protection functions for the blocking or release of
special stages or zones. An example is the release of overreaching zones with distance protection.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the automatic reclosing function provides a signal, based on which
the protection functions can turn off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
For the application with 1-pole tripping and stage or zone release through the automatic reclosing func-
tion, this function provides a signal that uses the protection functions that lets the stage and zone
release act only if a 1-pole faults occurs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loawesig-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-240 Signals between Protection Functions and Automatic Reclosing Functions
The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and automatic reclosing functions
can be set separately for each protection function, see Figure 6-240. The configuration occurs in a matrix
view in DIGSI, see Figure 6-241.
If a protection function or the stage of a protection function is connected with the AREC through the matrix,
this means that the respective pickup and operate indications are forwarded to the AREC.
The links can be created separately
For starting the automatic reclosing function and
For the blocking of the automatic reclosing function.
The automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which
the external protection devices can be connected to the internal automatic reclosing function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-241 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI 5
6.15.4 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function
6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

For the cyclic automatic reclosing function, there are 4 operating modes, from which one can be selected for
the parameterization (parameter (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode).
The selection of the operating mode is dependent on the tripping behavior of the protection functions and the
circuit breaker.
For applications with 3-pole tripping, all 4 operating modes are available. For applications with 1- and 3-pole
tripping, one can select between 2 operating modes.
Their connections are displayed in the following table.
Table 6-8 Operating modes of the cylindrical automatic reclosing function in accordance with tripping
behaviors
Operating Mode of the Cyclic Auto- Tripping Behavior

matic Reclosing Function (AREC) 3-Pole Tripping 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping
Operating mode 1 X X
with op., with act. time
Operating mode 2 X -
w.pickup, w. action time
Operating mode 3 X X
with op., w/o act. time
Operating mode 4 X -
w.pickup, w/o act. time
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Operating mode 1: with op., with act. time

The operating mode with op., with act. time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the tripping type and operate time of the protection function(s). With this operating mode, the automatic
reclosing must be started with the operate indications. Additionally, the general pickup must also be consid-
ered.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and clearing operate indication, the automatic reclosing
cycle to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the
expiring automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
During a 3-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 3-pole dead times are
set.
During a 1-pole trip indication, the automatic reclosing cycle(s) start(s), for which 1-pole dead times are
set.
The following example in Figure 6-242 shows a 1-pole tripping that comes after expiration of the action time
of cycle 1, but still before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Cycle 2 is set to make a
1-pole tripping possible. Cycle 2 will now become active with the settings for 1-pole tripping.
Within the following reclaim time, there will be another pickup and a 3-pole tripping. Since cycle 2 is already
complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The second trip command comes during
the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 becomes active with the settings for 3-phase trippings.
[dwawebx1-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-242 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/With Action Time
Through the action time, there is a direct influence on the dead time behavior of the automatic reclosing func-
tion. With faults with short operate times, other dead times can be realized than for removed faults with longer
tripping time. With faults with short operate time, an automatic reclosing is executed, with removed faults this
does not occur with longer operate time. The operating mode with op., with act. time allows for
different automatic reclosing cycles depending on 1- or 3-pole tripping and the trip time of the protection func-
tion(s).
Operating mode 2: w.pickup, w. action time

The operating mode w.pickup, w. action time allows different automatic reclosing cycles depending
on the operate time and type of fault. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With this operating mode, the automatic reclosing must be started with the operate indications from the
protection functions. Additionally, the pickup sample from the conductor pickups and the general pickup are
considered:
With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
With 2-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 2-phase dead times are activated.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup.
With raising general pickup, the action times of the configured automatic reclosing cycles start. The general
pickup is in this connection the group indication of all internal protection functions configured for starting the
automatic reclosing and the external binary input for general pickup >Gen. pickup for start.
Through the time between the raising general pickup and raising trip command, the automatic reclosing cycle
to be started will be determined. Here for multiple automatic reclosing cycles, the sequence of the expiring
automatic reclosing cycles is not fixed, like the operating modes without action time.
The following example shows a tripping that comes after expiration of the action time of cycle 1, but still
before the expiration of the action times from cycle 2 and cycle 3. Since it is a 2-phase pickup, cycle 2 is
active with the dead-time setting for 2-phase faults.
After reclosing, there will be another, this time 3-phase, pickup and tripping within the following reclaim time.
Since cycle 2 is already complete, these and all lower cycles are no longer able to expire. The trip command
comes during the current action time of cycle 3. Thus, cycle 3 is active, with the dead time setting for 3-phase
faults.
[dwarcbm2-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-243 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/With Action Time
Operating mode 3: with op., w/o act. time

With the operating mode with op., w/o act. time, the respective dead time is started after each trip
command. The sequence of the automatic reclosing function is exclusively control by the operate indications.
The pickups are not considered. Unless parameters are not set otherwise, a 3-pole operate indication initiates
the 3-pole dead time start, a 1-pole operate indication initiates the 1-pole dead time start. If more than one
automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is identical
with the cycle number (1, 2, and 3.).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwawebs3-010612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-244 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Tripping/Without Action Time
Operating mode 4: w.pickup, w/o act. time

With the operating mode w.pickup, w/o act. time, the automatic reclosing must be started with the
operate indications from the protection functions. It is only suitable and applicable for applications with 3-pole
tripping.
The start of the dead time occurs after each trip command. Additionally, the pickup sample from the
conductor pickups is considered:
With 1-phase pickup, the automatic reclosing cycles set for 1-phase dead times are activated. 1-phase
pickup includes both pickup samples phase-to-ground and only grounding.
With each automatic reclosing cycle, it is checked to see if it is a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup. If more
than one automatic reclosing cycle is configured, the sequence of the expiring automatic reclosing cycles is
identical with the cycle number (1, 2, 3, etc.).
[dwarcbs4-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-245 Operating-Mode Signal Examples: With Pickup/Without Action Time
6.15.4.2 Structure of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function

In Figure 6-246, the functional structure of the cyclic automatic reclosing function is illustrated as a block
diagram. The figure displays the important signals, coming from outside of the cyclic automatic reclosing
function, and the most important signals between the individual function blocks.
The automatic reclosing function works as a state machine. From the idle state AREC ready, the automatic
reclosing function gets through the tripping or pickup indications of the protection functions to the Dead time
state. After expiration of the dead time, the subsequent state is reached with the closing indication. The
reclaim time is also started together with the closing indication. If the reclaim time can expire without further
operate or pickup indications, the automatic reclosing is successful and the automatic reclosing function turns
back to idle state.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the automatic reclosing function is restarted during the current reclaim time, there will be either a dynamic
blocking or other reclosing cycles will be executed. If other reclosing cycles are possible, there will be a dead
time start and the described process starts again.
After the end of a dynamic blocking, the automatic reclosing function switches back to idle state or it goes into
the state Static Blocking if the blocking condition is permanently present. In the following sections, the indi-
vidual function blocks are described in detail.
[lozykawe-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-246 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Block Diagram of Automatic Reclosing
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.4.3 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Tripping

The operate indications are used as starting signals. For operating modes with action time, the start of the
action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications. During all operating modes, the pickup indications are also
required during the processing of faults and for supervision during the reclaim time.
Applications with 3-Pole Tripping

For applications with only 3-pole tripping options, the internal operate indications are always 3-pole. For
external starts, there is a binary input, which signalizes a 3-pole tripping of the external protection device.
The outputs of the input logic signalize that the reclosing start has occurred through a 3-pole operate indica-
tion.
Application with 1-Pole and 3-Pole Tripping

Depending on the generated protection function, during the application with 1-pole and 3-pole tripping
options, the internal trip indication may be phase-selective or 3-phase. If an external start via binary input is
selected, phase-selective inputs as well as inputs for 3-pole start are available.
The outputs of the input logic indicate whether the reclosing start has occurred through a 1-pole or 3-pole
operate indication. A start initiated by a 3-pole tripping is recognized if more than 1 pole signaled a tripping
during at least one time lapse within the period from the first incoming operate indication up to the last
outgoing operate indication.
At the time of the outgoing operate indication, all tripped poles will be stored. This information is used for the
plausibility check between the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker and assigned operate indication, see
chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping.
[lobtaaus-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-247 Input Logic for Operating Modes: With Tripping
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.4.4 Input Logic for Operating Modes with Pickup

The operate indications and the pickup indications are used as starting signals. The internal pickup indica-
tions are processed selective to the phase. Through binary inputs, the pickup information can also be coupled
by external protection devices (>Pickup A for start, >Pickup B for start and >Pickup C for
start). Optionally, the pickup information can be externally captured as a pickup sample, thus, as a 1-
phase, 2-phase and 3-phase pickup.
The outputs of the input logic signalize if the automatic reclosing start occurs through a 1-phase, 2-phase, or
3-phase pickup:
On Start with 3-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 3 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing outgoing pickup indication.
On Start with 2-phase pickup, it is recognized if all 2 phases were picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication and at no time 3 phases.
On Start with 1-phase pickup, it is recognized if only 1 phase was picked up in the period from the first
raising pickup indication up to the last clearing pickup indication.
For operating modes with action time, the start of the action time(s) occurs with the pickup indications. During
operating modes with pickup, the pickup indications affect the selection of the dead times. During all oper-
ating modes, the pickup indications are also required during the processing of faults and for supervision
during the reclaim time.
The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with 3-pole tripping.
Therefore, the outputs of the input logic always signal 3-pole operate indications.
[lobtaanr-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-248 Input Logic for Operating Modes: with Pickup
6.15.4.5 Start
In the Start function block, the automatic reclosing function is switched from the idle state AREC ready to the
state Dead time, see Figure 6-249. The length of the starting signals is controlled with a supervision time.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Start-Signal Supervision Time

The start-signal supervision stops the automatic reclosing if the short circuit is not switched off within the
normal time; for example, in the case of a circuit-breaker failure.
With the first raising operate indication, the start-signal supervision time is initiated, parameter Start
signal supervis.time. The time is stopped as soon as no operate indications are active or if the circuit
breaker is recognized as being no longer 3-pole closed.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked if there is an expiration of the start-signal supervision time
through a long operate indication. The blocking lasts until the operate indication stops, extended by a further
0.5 s.
Transition to the Dead-Time State

The transition of the automatic reclosing function to the dead-time state occurs for:
Clearing operate indications if none of the signal inputs for operate indications are active
Or if the circuit breaker can no longer be recognized as 3-pole closed
And the start-signal supervision time is not expired

Additionally, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
The circuit breaker signalizes the readiness for automatic reclosing typically through a binary input. If the
circuit breaker is not ready, the automatic reclosing function can be statically blocked. In this situation,
the automatic closing function is not in idle state automatic closing function ready. The control of the
circuit-breaker readiness is optional and can be turned off through settings, see also chapter
6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.17 Blockings.
The circuit breaker must be 3-pole closed before the trip command. This condition is not considered if
the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected to the protection device.
You can delay the transition to the dead-time state through the binary input >Dead Time Start Delay. As long
the corresponding binary signal is present, the dead time of the automatic reclosing function will not be
started. The maximum duration of this binary signal is monitored through a time stage that can be set, param-
eter Max. dead-time delay. Upon expiration of this time stage, that is, if the binary signal is present
longer than permitted, the automatic reclosing function will be blocked until the end of the binary signal, addi-
tionally extended by another 0.5 s. See also chapter 6.15.4.17 Blockings.
[logistar-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-249 Logic for Function-Block Start
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-250, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
The cycle availability is influenced through the parameterization of the dead time and through a binary input.
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Accordingly, the automatic reclosing does not occur if Dead time aft. 1-
pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective automatic reclosing
cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the associated
automatic reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead
to 1-pole tripping.
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming general
pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are released
through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no
longer active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loauswir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-250 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Tripping/With Action Time
6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time
The cycle control checks the readiness for each automatic reclosing cycle and controls the process of the
action time(s). In Figure 6-251, the cycle control is illustrated.
Cycle Availability
In this way, setting the parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup to invalid avoids an automatic
reclosing after 3-pole tripping due to 1-phase short circuits. This also applies to Dead time aft.2ph.
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Action Time
If the automatic reclosing function is in the idle state automatic reclosing function ready, an incoming general
pickup will affect the start of the action time. This applies for the reclosing function cycles that are released
through the parameter Start from idle state allow. and not blocked.
During one of the started action times, the corresponding reclosing cycle is blocked and the reclosing cycle is
assigned the next highest cycle number, whose action time is running and is not blocked.
With raising trip commands, the action times are stopped and reset. The process state of the action times
existing at this moment determines the automatic reclosing cycle that should be started.
If all initiated action times expire without capturing a tripping, the automatic reclosing function does not take
place. However, if a tripping function is initiated after expiry of the action time, the automatic closing function
is blocked for 3 seconds. A new start of the reclosing function is only possible if the general pickup is no
longer active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loanrwir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-251 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Pickup/With Action Time
6.15.4.8 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 3: With Tripping/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-252, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, there is no automatic reclosing after 1-pole tripping if Dead
time aft. 1-pole trip is set to invalid. If both dead times are set to invalid, the respective auto-
matic reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the
associated automatic reclosing cycle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the cycle control provides a signal, based on which the protection func-
tions can recognize that the automatic reclosing function only occurs after 1-pole tripping (AR only after
1p. trip). The approval or switch over of special protection stages only occurs for types of faults that lead
to 1-pole tripping.
[loauowrk-210311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-252 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Tripping/Without Action Time
6.15.4.9 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 4: With Pickup/Without Action Time
The cycle control checks the availability for each automatic reclosing cycle. In Figure 6-253, the cycle control
for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle and other reclosing cycles is illustrated. The further automatic reclosing
cycles are generally described with the cycle number n and apply for all other configured automatic reclosing
cycles.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup. If all 3 dead times are set to invalid, the respective
reclosing cycle will be completely blocked. With the binary input >Block 79 cycle, you can block the asso-
ciated automatic reclosing cycle.
[loanowrk-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-253 Cycle Control With Operating Mode: With Pickup/Without Action Time
6.15.4.10 Stage Release

The function block Stage release creates output indications for the release or switching over of special stages
for protection functions (stage release in the 1st cycle or stage release in the n. cycle). Examples for this are
the release of overreaching zones with distance protection and the dynamic adjustment of delays or threshold
values with overcurrent protection.
Figure 6-254 shows the tripping stage release for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. With available automatic
reclosing functions, the tripping stage release typically occurs up to the expiration of the dead time. In this
state, the cycle number is 1. However, if the automatic reclosing function cycle is only set to 1-pole, the stage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
release will be returned at the start of the 1-pole dead time. This is necessary, since every additional evolving
fault that occurs within the dead time causes a 3-pole cut-off, and subsequently, the automatic reclosing func-
tion can no longer take place.
[lo1awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-254 Stage Release for Protection Functions in the 1st Automatic Reclosing Cycle
The tripping stage release for higher automatic reclosing cycles is set to the beginning of the reclaim time for
rising edge close commands. Simultaneously, the cycle number is increased. The reset condition is identical
to the condition for the 1st automatic reclosing cycle. If the reduced dead time (RDT) mode is selected and no
additional reduced dead time occurs, the release of the 2nd cycle will be maintained, since it can be assumed
that the opposite end is open.
[lo2awezk-170912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-255 Stage Release for Protection Functions Starting with the 2nd Automatic Reclosing Cycle
6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with Tripping

In the Dead-time function block, the dead time which corresponds with the previous trip command is started.
After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status Switch on.
Figure 6-256 shows the dead time logic.
There are 3 time stages that can be set differently:
Dead time after 3-pole tripping
Dead time after 1-pole tripping (only available for applications with 1-pole tripping)
Dead time after evolving fault

reclosing after 3-pole tripping. Correspondingly, if after 1-pole tripping there is no automatic reclosing if Dead
time aft. 1-pole trip is set to invalid.
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead
Time), switching to an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption occurs. With the 3-pole cut-off of the
evolving fault, a separate adjustable dead time for the evolving fault begins. The total dead time is composed
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the first disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault to
invalid, no other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault. The tripping
through evolving faults is then finished.
3-Pole Circuit-Breaker Condition With 1-Pole Tripping And Implausible Circuit-Breaker Condition
With applications with 1-pole tripping, during the dead time there is a plausibility check between the assigned
trip command and the current flow in the open conductor. If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected pole-selectively, the plausibility check also occurs with the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. More
information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition .
The plausibility check determines whether the circuit-breaker poles that have not been switched off after a 1-
pole trip command remain closed.
For an implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip-command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed, provided the trip-command synchronization through the parameter is permitted (parameter 3-pole
operate by 79). After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole automatic reclosing cycles
may follow.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lopauaul-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-256 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: With
Tripping
6.15.4.12 Dead time for operating modes with pickup

In the dead time function block, the dead time corresponding to the type of short circuit that led to the trip
command is started. The automatic reclosing operating modes with pickup are only ideal for applications with
3-pole tripping. After expiration of the dead time, the automatic reclosing function changes to the status
Switch on. Figure 6-257 shows the dead time logic.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
There are 4 time stages that can be set differently:

Dead time after 1-phase short circuits
Dead time for evolving faults

pickup and Dead time aft.3ph. pickup.
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized (see chapter 6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead
Time), a separate dead time for faults begins with the stopping of the fault. The total dead time is composed
of the part of the dead time that expired until the evolving fault was stopped for the 1st disruption plus the
dead time for the evolving fault. With the setting of the Dead time aft. evolv. fault to invalid, no
other automatic reclosing cycle is executed after tripping through the evolving fault. The tripping through
evolving faults is then finished.
[lopauare-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-257 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of the Dead Time for the Operating Modes: with
Pickup
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time

Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time. This may be
the case during 1-pole tripping and there is a short circuit in the non-switched conductors after this.
After 3-pole tripping there may also be evolving faults if the line is fed through a second (non-3-pole) opened
circuit breaker, for example, for systems with a 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
The evolving-fault detection is divided into components:
Detection of Evolving Faults
Evolving Faults Processing
3-pole circuit-breaker intertripping during evolving faults

The procedure during evolving faults is illustrated in Figure 6-258.
Detection of Evolving Faults

For the detection of an evolving fault, the following criteria can be selected through parameters:
Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with trip
For this setting, any tripping during the dead time leads to evolving-fault detection. At any tripping it is
decided if an internal protection function is tripped or if the tripping is signaled through a binary input.
Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured for the start of the automatic
reclosing function or not.
Parameter Evolving-fault detection = with pickup

Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function configured for the automatic
reclosing function start is picked up or if an external pickup is recognized through a binary input.
Binary input >Evolving fault start

The evolving-fault detection can also be introduced through a binary input without an internal protection
pickup being available.
Reaction to Evolving Faults

After a recognized evolving fault, the automatic reclosing function can be influenced in 2 ways.
Parameter Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79
As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, the reclosing function will be blocked. There are no other
reclosing attempts and the automatic reclosing function is blocked until the pickup and operate indica-
tions causing the evolving fault disappear.
Parameter Response to evolv. faults = strt. evol.flt.dead time

As soon as an evolving fault is recognized, an automatic reclosing cycle for 3-pole interruption is
switched to. The automatic reclosing function does not allow any 1-pole tripping until the fault is solved
or there is a final switch off; thus, every following trip command will be 3-pole. When the evolving fault is
fixed, the separate dead time for faults will start, see also chapter Dead time. The further process is as
by 3-pole cycles.
[dwbspffe-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-258 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Example for an Evolving Fault
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For tripping through evolving faults, the entire dead time consists of the part of the dead time expired until
disconnecting the evolving fault for the 1-pole interruption plus the dead time for the fault together, see
Figure 6-259.
The dead time for evolving faults is started with the return of the operate indication or with the opening of all
3 circuit-breaker poles, provided the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected.
3-Pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker for Automatic Reclosing Function Blocking through Evolving Faults in a 1-Pole
Dead Time
If due to an evolving fault there is a blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead time
without a protection function submitting a 3-pole trip command, for example, during an evolving-fault detec-
tion with pickup, the automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole trip command. Thus, the circuit breaker
will have 3-pole tripping in which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur.
[lo_fofeer_080115, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-259 Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function - Logic of Evolving-Fault Detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command

After the expiration of the dead time, the Automatic reclosing function will be in the closing state.
The closing state can depend on the following influences, see Figure 6-260:
through a synchrocheck if the circuit breaker was opened during the 3-pole dead time
Through the readiness of the circuit breaker signaled through the binary input
Through a binary input for delaying the close command (>Delay close cmd.)
The Close cmd. indication is a requirement for the assignment of the actual close command to the
circuit breaker.
The mentioned criteria must not be fulfilled directly after expiration of the dead time. If a dead-time prolonga-
tion is set, the mentioned criteria will be checked during the prolongation. With the release of the closing indi-
cation, the automatic reclosing function will switch to the reclaim time state.
[loeinsha-141111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-260 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Closing Indication
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Testing the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly before Closing

For each of the automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a test of the circuit-breaker readiness should occur
directly before closing (parameters CB ready check bef.close, Figure 6-261). Independent of this, a
test of the circuit-breaker readiness before the start of the 1st automatic reclosing cycle can be set, see
Chapter 6.15.4.5 Start and chapter 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition .
[lolsvoei-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-261 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Query of the Circuit-Breaker Readiness Directly
before Closing
Synchrocheck
For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, you can set if a synchrocheck should be executed and
which functionality should be used here, see Figure 6-262. You may only use the internal synchrocheck if the
device is connected to a voltage transformer.
Alternatively, you can also connect an external device with synchrocheck through a binary input.
The measuring request for the synchrocheck is placed if the optional test of the circuit-breaker readiness was
positive. The measuring request for the synchrocheck exists until the synchrocheck assigns the allowance for
the closure. If the allowance is not given within the set maximum dead time extension, the closure will be
cancelled through the blocking of the automatic reclosing function. The minimum duration of the measuring
request is 50 ms.
[losyncro-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-262 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Inquiry of the Synchronism
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Close Command
As soon as the test of the circuit-breaker readiness and the synchrocheck deliver a positive result, the closing
indication will be created. It will be assigned for 100 ms. The actual close command is not created by the
automatic reclosing function, but rather from the circuit-breaker function block outside of the automatic
reclosing function. Here the set maximum duration of the close command is also considered.
In addition to the closing indication, additional indications will be created that describe the type of closure.
These include:
Close command after 1-pole tripping in the 1st cycle (Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc)
Close command after 3-pole tripping in the first cycle (Cls.cmd after 3p.1.cyc)
Close command after 1-pole or 3-pole tripping starting with the second cycle (CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc)
Creation of the Signal Remote close signal

The cyclic automatic reclosing function can create information Remote close signal. This information
can be transferred to the protection device as a binary signal on the line that is to be protected on the oppo-
site end. From the automatic reclosing function, it can be processed in the operating mode adaptive dead
time. Furthermore, the binary signal may be arranged as data for transmission via an existing protection inter-
face.
The information Remote close signal is created by the closing logic. It can be delayed by a set time over
the local close indication. With this delay, you can make sure that information is only set if the automatic
reclosing was successful and there was no further tripping. The pulse duration of the inter-close signal has a
fixed length of 500 ms.
6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time

With the assignment of the close command, the automatic reclosing function goes into the reclaim time state.
During this time, it is decided if the current reclosing cycle was successful or not.
If during the reclaim time no further tripping occurs, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle, and
thus the entire automatic reclosing, was successful.
If during the reclaim time another tripping occurred, the currently running automatic reclosing cycle was
not successful. If other automatic reclosing cycles are permitted, one of these cycles will be used to
continue the process. If, in contrast, the currently executed cycle was the last permissible cycle, the
automatic reclosing process will end and be reported as unsuccessful.
In both cases, the automatic reclosing function switches back to the idle state automatic reclosing function
ready.
Short Circuits during Running Reclaim Time

A trip command that occurs during a reclaim time leads to a cancellation of the reclaim time. If further auto-
matic reclosing cycles are allowed, the regulation of the cycle depends on if the automatic reclosing function
is executed in an operating mode with action times or without action times, see Figure 6-263.
With operating modes with action time, the action times of all higher cycles are started with the begin-
ning of the new general pickup if these are not blocked. The cycle with the lowest cycle number is
selected, whose action time is not yet expired with the incoming trip indication. If no further cycles are
possible or if the action times of all possible cycles are expired before the operate indication, there will
be no further reclosing.
With the operating modes without action time, the cycle following the current cycle will always be
selected in the set cycle. If this is blocked, the cycle following this one will be selected, etc. If no higher
cycles exist or if they are all blocked, there will be no further automatic reclosing.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[losperre-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-263 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Reclaim Time
6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition

The automatic reclosing function requires the readiness of the circuit breaker for the following purposes, see
Figure 6-264:
Recognition of the circuit-breaker readiness from the beginning:
In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, an unavailable circuit breaker leads to the blocking of
the automatic reclosing function. This monitoring is optional and must be switched off through settings if
the readiness signal is not available for the protection device.
Analysis of the circuit-breaker readiness directly before the close command:

For each of the configured automatic reclosing cycles, it can be set whether the circuit-breaker readi-
ness is a requirement for the assignment of the close command. This monitoring is also optional.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lolsbere-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-264 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Circuit-Breaker Readiness
The automatic reclosing function uses the information from the circuit breaker for the following purposes (see
Figure 6-265):
Detection of a non-closed circuit breaker before the start:
In idle state of the automatic reclosing function, a non-3-pole closed circuit breaker leads to the blocking
of the automatic reclosing function, see also chapter 6.15.4.17 Blockings. This monitoring is not needed
if the auxiliary-contact signals are not available.
Detection of the reaction of the circuit breaker after a trip command:

The automatic reclosing function dead time is started immediately with the opening of the circuit breaker
if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected. Here a decision is made based on the opening of
the circuit breaker if the circuit breaker is no longer 3-pole closed.
An exception is the reaction to an evolving fault. As the circuit breaker already has 1 pole open before
the occurrence of an evolving fault, the dead time is started if the circuit breaker is detected as having 3
poles open.
If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not connected, the automatic reclosing function dead time will
start with the dropout of the operate indication.
After a 1-pole trip, a check is done during the dead time to determine whether the circuit-breaker poles
that were not switched off remain closed. The circuit-breaker position recognition is delivered from the
central circuit-breaker position recognition of the Circuit-breaker function group.
For implausible circuit-breaker condition, a 3-pole trip command synchronization for the circuit breaker is
executed provided the settings allows this. After this 3-pole tripping, if set and not blocked, more 3-pole
automatic reclosing cycles may follow, see also chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating Modes with
Tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lolsuebe-010611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-265 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for Circuit-Breaker Condition and Supervision
6.15.4.17 Blockings
The Automatic reclosing function differentiates between 2 types of blockings, see Figure 6-266:
Static blocking and
Dynamic blocking
Static Blocking
The Automatic reclosing function is statically blocked if the function is switched on, but is not ready for
reclosing and also cannot be started as long as this blocking is present. The dynamic blocking is signaled
with the indication Inactive.
The following conditions lead to the static blocking:
Condition Indication
Manual closing of the circuit breaker, recognition through binary Inactive
input or internal device control.
The blocking is temporary, the duration can be set with the
parameter Block. time aft. man.close.
Circuit breaker not available for automatic reclosing function, Inactive
recognition through binary input. This cause can be switched on
or off through the parameter CB ready check bef.close.
Circuit breaker of non-closed 3-pole, recognition through binary Inactive
input.
This criteria is used if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are
connected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
No reclosing cycle possible Inactive
Recognition due to the following causes:
Automatic reclosing cycle is not set.
Automatic reclosing cycles are set, but all are blocked, for
example, via binary input.
There is no internal device function and no binary input
configured for starting the automatic reclosing function.
With operating modes with tripping:
both 1-pole and 3-pole cycles are blocked via binary
inputs
With operating modes with pickup:
1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase automatic reclosing
cycles, the blocking is done through binary inputs.
With operating modes without action time:
the first automatic reclosing cycle is blocked via binary
input.
With the dead-line check functionality:
if the voltage measurement is not available or is
disrupted.
Dynamic Blocking
The automatic reclosing function is blocked dynamically if a blocking condition occurs while an automatic
reclosing function is running. The dynamic blocking is signalized with the indication Not ready.
After the occurrence of a dynamic blocking, it is checked in intervals of 0.5 s to see if the blocking can be
removed. If the blocking condition remains or if a different blocking condition occurs in the meantime, the
blocking will remain. If, in contrast, the cause of the blocking disappears, the dynamic blocking will be
removed if no general pickup or no tripping configured for the automatic reclosing function start is available.
A separate indication for logging exists for each individual blocking cause.
The following conditions lead to the dynamic blocking:
If no reclosing cycle fitting the fault type is released: Not ready
With operating modes with tripping: Block. by no cycle
If a 1-pole or 3-pole operate indication occurs during the
automatic reclosing function start input, however, the auto-
matic reclosing function does not start in accordance with
the parameterization for this type of tripping, the respective
dead time will be set to invalid.
With operating modes with pickup:
If a 1-phase, 2-phase or 3-phase pickup indication occurs
during the automatic reclosing function starting process,
but the automatic reclosing function may not be started in
accordance with the parameterization for this type of
pickup.
If a protection function causes the automatic reclosing function Not ready
to be blocked in accordance with the configuration Block. by protection
If the maximum set waiting time for the delay of the start of the Not ready
dead time through the binary input >Dead time start Blk.by max. d.t. delay
delay expires without the binary input becoming inactive during
this period of time
If the synchrocheck is set and the synchronism conditions after Not ready
the expiration of the maximum dead-time prolongation are not Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
fulfilled before the assignment of the close command
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the inquiry of the circuit-breaker readiness is switched on Not ready
directly before the close command through the parameter and Blk.by CB ready sup.
the maximum dead-time prolongation expires Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
If the closing indication is delayed through the binary input Not ready
>Delay close cmd. for so long until the maximum dead time Blk.by max.d.t. expiry
extension is exceeded before the assignment of the close
command
If an evolving fault occurs and the parameter Response to Not ready
evolv. faults is set to blocks 79 Blk. by evolving fault
If the start-signal supervision time for the operate indication Not ready
starting from the automatic reclosing function or the starting Blk.by strtsig.superv.
binary input expires.
In this case, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed.
If after the start of the automatic reclosing function a dead time Not ready
is already running and a blocking binary input is active, with the Block. by binary input
following binary inputs:
>Blk. 1-pole AR, >Blk. 3-pole AR, >Blk. with 1-ph
pickup, >Blk. with 2-ph pickup, >Blk. with 3-ph pickup
If the maximum number of automatic reclosing attempts is Not ready
reached and there is a trip command within the reclaim time Block. by max. cycles
With operating modes with action time: Not ready
If the action times of all released automatic reclosing cycles Blk.by action time exp
expire without a trip command
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by dead-line check
If during the dead time the required voltage criteria is not fulfilled
For applications with voltage measurement and switched on Not ready
functionalities with dead-line check: Blk.by loss of voltage
If during a running automatic reclosing cycle a failure of the
measuring voltage is determined.
After the completion of the automatic reclosing cycle, the
dynamic blocking becomes static blocking if there is a continued
failure of the measuring voltage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lobloawe-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-266 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Blocking Logic as an Example for a 1-Pole Cycle (Static and
Dynamic Blocking)
6.15.4.18 1-/3-pole Tripping of the Circuit Breaker

During short circuits, a 1-pole may shut off the circuit breaker if the corresponding protection functions
generate trip indications in accordance with the parameterization and short circuit type, and the automatic
reclosing function is parameterized such that 1-pole reclosing cycles are allowed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
By displaying the message 79 permits 1-pole trip (see Figure 6-266 in Section 6.15.4.17 Blockings)
the automatic reclosing function signals the 1-pole tripping option of the circuit breaker within the associated
function group of the circuit breaker.
Subject to the following conditions, the message 79 permits 1-pole trip will neither be generated nor
reset:
during the current 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle if a blocking of the automatic reclosing func-
tion occurs prior to the reclosing
If an automatic reclosing function start is signaled with 2-pole tripping, for example, through external
binary inputs
During operating modes with tripping, if there is a 1-pole trip indication and the automatic reclosing func-
tion does not allow for 1-pole cycles in accordance with their parameterization.
If during a 1-pole automatic reclosing function cycle the monitoring of the circuit-breaker pole recognizes
an implausible condition.
The automatic reclosing function may generate a 3-pole trip command (3-pole intertrip), if a blocking of the
automatic reclosing function occurs based on the above-mentioned causes, e.g., during the detection of an
evolving fault with pickup and blocking of evolving faults. Thus, the circuit breaker will have 3-pole tripping in
which the blocking of the automatic reclosing function will occur, see also Chapter 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for
Operating Modes with Tripping.
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT)

The additional functions Dead-line check (DLC) and Reduced dead time (RDT), are only possible for applica-
tions with a voltage-transformer connection. Another requirement is that the voltage of the line being switched
on can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker. This is only possible if the voltage transformer is
aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
Both additional functions DLC and RDT are mutually exclusive, because the DLC checks if the value falls
below a voltage threshold, while the RDT checks if the value exceeds the voltage threshold.
The respectively selected additional function runs in the automatic reclosing state dead time.
Reduced Dead Time (RDT)

With the Reduced dead time, a close command can be assigned before the expiration of the set dead times if
the line to switch on is recognized as fault-free through the measurement of the line voltage.
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-phase-voltages.
In systems with a grounded neutral point, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages are additionally observed.
In systems with compensated or with isolated neutral points, the largest 2 of the 3 phase-to-ground voltages
are additionally considered. Through this, a RDT can also be executed with 1-phase ground connections.
For the approval of the close command with RDT, the following conditions apply:
The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
Each measured voltage is above the set threshold values Volt. thres.f. live line/bus
The phase-to-phase voltages are divided by 3 prior to comparison with the threshold value. Thus, the
phase-to-ground voltage UN3 applies as the reference size for the parameterization.
Exceeding the threshold is fulfilled for the set duration Voltage supervision time.
Dead-Line Check (DLC)

If after switching off a short-circuit the voltage on the switched off line does not disappear, the automatic
reclosing function can be avoided with the dead-line check (DLC).
The voltage measurement occurs with the 3 phase-to-ground voltages.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For the release of the close command with DLC, the following conditions apply:
The automatic reclosing function is in the state dead time.
All measured voltages for the set duration Voltage supervision time are below the set threshold
Volt. thres.f. live line/bus.
The set dead time is expired.

As soon as the voltages fall below the threshold value for the set duration, the allowance for automatic
reclosing with DLC is assigned. This also applies if the values are not below the voltage threshold until the
expiration of the set dead time. In this way, an automatic reclosing is executed if the automatic reclosing func-
tion is first switched to at the end of the protected line and thus, the line is exposed to voltage again.
The automatic reclosing function is blocked by the DLC under the following conditions:
The automatic reclosing function is in the Closure state, the dead time has expired
All measured voltages were not simultaneously below the set threshold values Voltage supervision
time for the set durationVolt.thres. f. dead line/bus during the dead time.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lovrkarc-130511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-267 Cyclic Reclosing Function: Logic for the Functions of Reduced Dead Time and Dead-Line
Check
6.15.4.20 Settings

General
_:6601:1 General:Mode off on
on
test
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:6601:101 General:79 operating with op., w/o act. time with op., with
mode with op., with act. time act. time
_:6601:102 General:CB ready check no no
bef. start yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
superv. time
by 79 yes
_:6601:108 General:Evolving-fault with trip with trip
detection with pickup
_:6601:109 General:Response to strt. evol.flt.dead time blocks 79
evolv. faults blocks 79
_:6601:110 General:Max. dead-time 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.50 s
delay
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:112 General:Send delay f. 0.00 s to 300.00 s;
remot. close
DLC, RDT
_:6601:113 General:Dead-line without without
check/reduc.d.t Reduced dead t. RDT
Dead-line check DLC
_:6601:114 General:Voltage super- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
vision time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
_:6601:116 General:Volt.thres. f. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 30.000 V
dead line/bus
Cycle 1
_:6571:102 Cycle 1:Start from idle no yes
state allow. yes
_:6571:103 Cycle 1:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; 0.20 s
_:6571:108 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 3- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; 0.50 s
pole trip
_:6571:107 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 1- 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; 1.20 s
pole trip
_:6571:104 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.00 s to 1800.00 s; 1.20 s
1ph. pickup
2ph. pickup
3ph. pickup
_:6571:109 Cycle 1:Dead time aft. 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.20 s
evolv. fault
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:6571:111 Cycle 1:CB ready check no no
bef.close yes
_:6571:110 Cycle 1:Synchroch. aft. none none
3-pole d.t. internal
external
_:6571:112 Cycle 1:Intern. synchro- Setting options depend on
check with configuration

(Type)
General
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I
_:6601:502 General:>Blk. with 1-ph pickup SPS I
_:6601:505 General:>Blk. 1-pole AR SPS I
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:510 General:>Pickup 1ph for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:518 General:>Trip 1-pole for start SPS I
_:6601:520 General:>Evolving fault start SPS I
_:6601:521 General:>Dead time start delay SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:313 General:Evolv.-fault detected SPS O
_:6601:314 General:RDT CloseCmd indicat. SPS O
_:6601:315 General:Dead t. aft.1pole trip SPS O
_:6601:317 General:Dead t. aft.1ph pickup SPS O
_:6601:320 General:Dead t. aft.evolv.flt. SPS O
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:322 General:Cls.cmd after 1p.1.cyc SPS O
_:6601:324 General:CloseCmd >=2nd.cyc SPS O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:326 General:Remote close signal SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:332 General:Blk.by max. d.t. delay SPS O
_:6601:333 General:Blk. by evolving fault SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:334 General:Blk.by dead-line check SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
_:6601:339 General:Cyc1 1p AR INS O
_:6601:341 General:Cyc2+ 1p AR INS O
_:6601:342 General:Cyc2+ 3p AR INS O
Cycle 1
_:6571:51 Cycle 1:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6571:500 Cycle 1:>Block 79 cycle SPS I
_:6571:52 Cycle 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6571:53 Cycle 1:Health ENS O
_:6571:301 Cycle 1:Cycle running SPS O
_:6571:302 Cycle 1:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6571:303 Cycle 1:Synchrocheck request SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.5 Automatic Reclosing Function with Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
Considering the cyclic automatic reclosing function, it is assumed that defined and similar dead times were
set at both line ends and, if applicable, they are set for different types of faults and/or disruption cycles.
It is also possible to set the dead times only at one line end and to configure the adaptive dead time at the
other end or ends. The requirements for this is that the voltage transformer aligned on the line-side or a
possibility to transfer a close command to a remote line end exists.
Figure 6-268 shows an example with a voltage measurement. It is assumed that device I works with defined
dead times, while the adaptive dead time is configured in device II. It is important that the line is at least fed
from the busbar A, so from the side with the defined dead times.
With the adaptive dead time, the automatic reclosing function at the line end II decides independently if and
when a reclosing is reasonable and permissible and when it is not. The criteria is the voltage of the line at the
end II, which is switched through after reclosing from end I. The reclosing at end II occurs, as soon as it
exists, so that the line from end I is set back under voltage. Basically, all phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground voltages are monitored.
With an implied short-circuit, the lines at the positions I, II, and III in the example are switched off. Position I is
switched on again after the dead time set there. At position III the reduced dead time (RDT) can be executed
with the appropriate configuration (see chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time
(RDT) ) if an infeed is also available on busbar B.
If the short circuit has been cleared after successful reclosing, the line A-B from the busbar A will be set
under voltage through the position I. Device II recognizes this voltage and switches on to warrant adequate
voltage measurement time after a short delay The system incident is thus successfully cleared.
If the short circuit is not cleared after closure at position I, I will be switched to the fault again. At line end II,
now no healthy voltage will appear. The device here recognizes this and does not close again.
With multiple reclosing, the process may repeat if the reclosing is unsuccessful until one of the reclosings is
successful or a final closing occurs.
[dwarcasp-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-268 Example for Adaptive DeadTtime (ASP)
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time brings along the following advantages:
The circuit breaker at position II does not switch off again with a remaining fault and is protected through
this.
With a non-selective tripping through flashing over to position II, no more disruption cycles may exist
here, because the short-circuit path through busbar B and the position II remains disrupted even with
multiple reclosing.
At position I, with multiple reclosing and even with a final tripping, an overlapping is allowed, because
the line at position II remains open and thus, no actual overreaching.
The adaptive dead time also contains the reduced dead time (VWE), because the criteria are the same. A
special setting of the reduced dead time (VWE) is unnecessary if the automatic reclosing function is used with
adaptive dead time (ASP).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.5.2 Settings

General
_:6601:1 General:Mode off on
on
test
_:6601:101 General:79 operating mode with op., w/o act. time with op., with
with op., with act. time act. time
_:6601:102 General:CB ready check no no
bef. start yes
_:6601:103 General:Reclai. time 0.50 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
aft.succ.cyc.
_:6601:104 General:Block. time aft. 0.00 s to 300.00 s 1.00 s
man.close
_:6601:105 General:Start signal 0.01 s to 300.00 s 0.13 s
supervis.time
_:6601:106 General:CB ready superv. 0.01 s to 300.00 s 3.00 s
time
_:6601:107 General:3-pole operate by no yes
79 yes
_:6601:111 General:Max. dead-time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; 1.20 s
extension
_:6601:114 General:Voltage supervi- 0.10 s to 30.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:6601:115 General:Volt. thres.f. live 0.300 V to 340.000 V 48.000 V
line/bus
ADT
_:6631:101 ADT:1-pole trip allowed no no
yes
_:6631:104 ADT:Action time 0.00 s to 300.00 s; 0.20 s
_:6631:105 ADT:Maximum dead time 0.50 s to 3000.00 s 5.00 s
_:6631:102 ADT:CB ready check no no
bef.close yes
_:6631:103 ADT:Synchroch. aft. 3-pole none none
d.t. internal
external
_:6631:106 ADT:Intern. synchrocheck Setting options depend on
with configuration

(Type)
General
_:6601:87 General:>Function off SPS I
_:6601:524 General:>Function on SPS I
_:6601:347 General:Function on SPC C
_:6601:501 General:>Release by ext.sync. SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:6601:507 General:>Pickup A for start SPS I
_:6601:508 General:>Pickup B for start SPS I
_:6601:509 General:>Pickup C for start SPS I
_:6601:513 General:>Gen. pickup for start SPS I
_:6601:514 General:>General trip for start SPS I
_:6601:515 General:>Trip pole A for start SPS I
_:6601:516 General:>Trip pole B for start SPS I
_:6601:517 General:>Trip pole C for start SPS I
_:6601:522 General:>Delay close cmd. SPS I
_:6601:301 General:79 state ENS O
_:6601:302 General:Actual reclose cycle INS O
_:6601:303 General:Not ready SPS O
_:6601:304 General:79 successful SPS O
_:6601:305 General:CB ready superv.expir SPS O
_:6601:306 General:CB is not ready SPS O
_:6601:307 General:79 permits 1-pole trip SPS O
_:6601:308 General:AR only after 1p. trip SPS O
_:6601:309 General:In progress SPS O
_:6601:310 General:Reclaim time running SPS O
_:6601:311 General:Start sig. superv.exp. SPS O
_:6601:312 General:Max. dead time expired SPS O
_:6601:321 General:Close cmd. indication ACT O
_:6601:325 General:3-pole operate by 79 SPS O
_:6601:327 General:Block. by binary input SPS O
_:6601:328 General:Blk.by CB ready sup. SPS O
_:6601:329 General:Blk.by strtsig.superv. SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:6601:330 General:Blk.by action time exp SPS O
_:6601:331 General:Blk.by max.d.t. expiry SPS O
_:6601:337 General:Block. by no cycle SPS O
_:6601:338 General:Block. by protection SPS O
_:6601:335 General:Blk.by loss of voltage SPS O
_:6601:336 General:Block. by max. cycles SPS O
ADT
_:6631:51 ADT:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:6631:501 ADT:>Remote close signal SPS I
_:6631:52 ADT:Behavior ENS O
_:6631:53 ADT:Health ENS O
_:6631:301 ADT:ADT is running SPS O
_:6631:302 ADT:Stage release prot. SPS O
_:6631:303 ADT:Synchrocheck request SPS O
6.15.6 Operation with External Automatic Reclosing Function
The operation of an external reclosing device with the SIPROTEC protection device occurs through the func-
tion mode Operation with external automatic reclosing function. In this function mode, the SIPROTEC protec-
tion functions create the trip command and the external reclosing device creates the close command.
The following figure shows the interaction of an external reclosing device with the functions of the SIPROTEC
5 device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loaweext-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-269 Connection of an External Automatic Reclosing Function
There are no setting parameters for operation with external automatic reclosing functions. The function
provides exclusively the following described binary inputs. The external reclosing device can thus have an
influence on the effects of the internal protection functions.
The following connection possibilities exist:
From the external reclosing function, the signal >Release stages can be coupled so that the protec-
tion functions use special stages or zones for release. An example is the release of an overreaching
zone with a distance protection or the non-delayed tripping of an overcurrent protection stage in the 1st
reclosing cycle.
For applications with 1-pole tripping, the external reclosing can provide the signal >1-pole trip
permitted, based on which the protection functions can switch off the 1-pole circuit breaker.
For applications with reclosing functions only with 1-pole faults and stage or zone releases through the
reclosing function can the signal >1-pole AR only be connected. The protection functions use this
information to allow the stage or zone release only affect 1-pole faults.

(Type)
Ext
_:6661:51 Ext:Mode (controllable) C
_:6661:501 Ext:>Release stages I
_:6661:502 Ext:>1-pole trip permitted I
_:6661:503 Ext:>1-pole AR only I
_:6661:52 Ext:Behavior O
_:6661:53 Ext:Health O
_:6661:54 Ext:Inactive O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.15.7 Application and Setting Notes for General Settings
For the automatic reclosing function, there are 3 functions available in the function library. In each circuit-
breaker function group, a function from the automatic reclosing function can be used.
Configure one of the 3 following function specifications:
Cyclic automatic reclosing function
Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT)
Starting the Automatic Reclosing Function

The configuration of the interaction between internal protection functions and the automatic reclosing function
can be set separately for each protection function. The configuration occurs in a matrix view in DIGSI. The
Automatic reclosing function also has the corresponding binary inputs and binary outputs through which the
external protection devices can be connected to the internal Automatic reclosing function.
Configure the starting and blocking condition for the automatic reclosing function at the position shown in
Figure 6-270 in DIGSI or route the corresponding binary inputs.
[scdigsia-080311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-270 Configuration of the Protection Functions for Starting and Blocking the Automatic Reclosing
Function in DIGSI
General Settings
If you use the Cyclic automatic reclosing function or Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time
function, set the following settings under General.
There are no settings for the function Operation with external automatic reclosing function. The control occurs
exclusively through binary inputs and binary outputs.
Parameter: 79 operating mode
Default setting (_:6601:101) 79 operating mode = with op., with act. time
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You can use the 79 operating mode parameter to determine which start criteria the automatic reclosing
function works with.
with op., with act. The automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s). The start occurs with all protection function(s) or
protection stages that are configured through the automatic reclosing function
start matrix.
Siemens generally recommends this setting for applications with 1/3-pole trip-
ping and for applications with 3-pole tripping if a single dead time, independent
of the type of connection working, is required in the automatic reclosing func-
tion cycle.
Detailed information can be found in Chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating mode 1
w.pickup, w. action The automatic reclosing function cycles are dependent on the operate time of
time the protection function(s) and the type of fault. The start occurs with all protec-
tion function(s) or protection stages that are configured through the automatic
reclosing function start matrix.
For applications with 3-pole tripping and dead time dependent on the circuit
type, Siemens recommends this setting.
Detailed information can be found in the chapter 6.15.4.1 Operating Modes for
Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function , section Operating Mode 2
with op., w/o act. Each operate indication starts the automatic reclosing function. The start
time occurs with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured
through the automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur
after tripping.
w.pickup, w/o act. Each operate indication starts the automatic reclosing function. The automatic
time reclosing function cycles are dependent on the type of fault. The start occurs
with all protection function(s) or protection stages that are configured through
the automatic reclosing function start matrix.
The automatic reclosing function start must be configured so that it only occurs
from the protection stages/zones for which an automatic reclosing should occur
after tripping.
Parameter: CB ready check bef. start
Default setting (_:6601:102) CB ready check bef. start = no

With the CB ready check bef. start parameter, you can determine if the readiness of the circuit
breaker should be tested before starting the automatic reclosing function.
Additionally or alternatively, it is possible to check the readiness of the circuit breaker after the expiration of
the dead time, directly before the assignment of the close command. There is another parameter described in
the chapter 6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing Function for
this function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes The automatic reclosing function checks the readiness of the circuit breaker for
a switching cycle, consisting of a tripping-reclosing-switching.
If the circuit breaker is ready - signaled through a binary input - the startup of
the automatic reclosing function can occur. If the circuit breaker is not ready,
the automatic reclosing function reports the static blocking.
Note: The presetting of this parameter does not correspond with the recom-
mended setting for operation. The automatic reclosing function would other-
wise be blocked with a non-available circuit breaker-ready-signal. Please set
the parameter as recommended.
no The readiness of the circuit breaker is not checked before starting the auto-
matic reclosing function. The test also does not occur if the readiness signal
from the circuit breaker is connected to a binary input on the device.
Parameter: Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc.
Default setting (_:6601:103) Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. = 3.00 s

With the Reclai. time aft.succ.cyc. parameter, set the time used to decide if the currently running
reclosing cycle was successful or not. Detailed information about the function of the reclaim time can be
found in the chapter 6.15.4.15 Reclaim Time .
The presetting for the reclaim time can be frequently maintained. In regions where thunderstorms and storms
often occur, a shorter reclaim time makes sense in order to minimize the danger of the final disconnection
due to sequential lightning strikes or cable spark over.
Select a long reclaim time if there is no possibility for circuit-breaker supervision with multiple automatic
reclosing, for example, due to missing auxiliary contacts or lacking circuit-breaker-ready-information. In this
case, the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker.
Parameter: Block. time aft. man.close
Default setting (_:6601:104) Block. time aft. man.close = 1.00 s

With the Block. time aft. man.close parameter, the time is determined for which the automatic
reclosing should be blocked after a manual connection.
Set the time so that the circuit breaker can be safely switched on and off during connection to a short circuit
without the automatic reclosing function being automatically closed.
Parameter: Start signal supervis.time
Default setting (_:6601:105) Start signal supervis.time = 0.25 s

With the Start signal supervis.time parameter, set the maximum time after which a circuit breaker
must be opened after a trip command. If the time expires, a failure of the circuit breaker is assumed and the
automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
Detailed information about the function of the start supervision time can be found in the chapter
6.15.4.5 Start .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i With the use of an internal or external circuit-breaker failure protection at the same line branch, observe
the following:
The start supervision time should be the same as the circuit-breaker failure protection time delay.
With this, you can make sure that in the case of a circuit-breaker failure followed by the tripping of the
busbar, no automatic reclosing will be executed.
(Note: An exception to this recommendation is described below.)
During a 1-pole trip command repeat caused by the circuit-breaker failure protection, the start super-
vision time must be longer than the delay time for the 1-pole trip command repeat. With this, it can be
ensured that the trip command is not connected before the 1-pole trip command repeat through the
circuit-breaker failure protection from the trip-command synchronization of the 3-pole automatic
reclosing function.
The start supervision time must be longer than the time delay for the tripping of the busbars if a 1-
pole trip command for the line branch should not be coupled by the automatic reclosing function or
the circuit-breaker failure protection 3-pole before the circuit-breaker failure protection can trip the
busbars. With this case, the automatic reclosing function must be blocked with the trip command for
the busbars. This helps to avoid an automatic reclosing function being executed after the tripping of
the busbars for the line branch. The blocking of the automatic reclosing function can occur with a
CFC link to the binary input >Block function.
Parameter: CB ready superv. time

The setting of this parameter is only important if the cycle-specific parameter CB ready check bef.close
is set to yes. Otherwise, this parameter has no effect.
Default setting (_:6601:106) CB ready superv. time = 3.00 s
With the CB ready check bef. start parameter, you can determine after which maximum time after the
tripping the circuit breaker must be ready for the reclosing function.
Set the time somewhat longer than the regeneration time of the circuit breaker after an OFF-ON-OFF cycle.
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .
Parameter: 3-pole operate by 79

This parameter is irrelevant and cannot be set if the circuit breaker is configured exclusively for 3-pole trip-
ping.
Recommended setting value (_:6601:107) 3-pole operate by 79 = yes
With the 3-pole operate by 79 parameter, you can determine if the automatic reclosing function creates
a 3-pole operate indication to the 3-pole coupling of the circuit-breaker pole.
yes The automatic reclosing function can create a 3-pole operate indication under
the following conditions:
With the blocking of the automatic reclosing function in the 1-pole dead
time, for example, through an evolving fault or external blocking
If an automatic reclosing function start is signalized with 2-pole tripping,
for example, through external binary inputs
For operating modes with tripping, if there is a 1-pole operate indication
and the automatic reclosing function does not allow for 1-pole cycles in
accordance with their parameterization.
If during a 1-pole the automatic reclosing function cycle the supervision of
the circuit-breaker pole recognizes an implausible condition.
no The automatic reclosing function does not create 3-pole tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the chapters 6.15.4.11 Dead Time for Operating
Modes with Tripping, 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and Circuit-Breaker Condition and
6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detection During the Dead Time.
Parameter: Evolving-fault detection

This parameter is not important and cannot be set if you use the ADT function (automatic reclosing function
with adaptive dead time).
Default setting (_:6601:108) Evolving-fault detection = with trip
With the Evolving-fault detection parameter, you can determine which criteria is used to recognize
an evolving fault. The actual effect of the recognized evolving fault on the automatic reclosing function can be
set with the parameter described below Response to evolv. faults.
Evolving faults are short circuits, which occur after switching off a short circuit during dead time.
You can find detailed information about evolving-fault detection in the chapter 6.15.4.13 Evolving-Fault Detec-
tion During the Dead Time.
with trip Evolving faults are recognized if an operate indication occurs during the dead
time. Thus, it does not matter if the tripping-protection function is configured for
the start of the automatic reclosing function or not.
The pickup of a protection function without an operate indication does not lead
to evolving-fault detection.
with pickup Evolving faults are detected if during the dead time a protection function config-
ured for the automatic reclosing function start is picked up or if an external
pickup is detected through a binary input.
For applications with 1-/3-pole tripping, Siemens recommends the setting with trip if the system is
adequately interconnected.
If multiple individual lines in a row form a total transmission path, the setting with pickup may be better
suitable. With this setting, you can prevent 2 lines following each other from switching to 1-pole in different
conductors during evolving faults. The consequence of this fault would be the remainder of a single conductor
in the dead time for the overall transmission path. This is particularly important if power plants are coupled
through the overall transmission path.
Parameter: Response to evolv. faults

Default setting (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults = blocks 79
With the Response to evolv. faults parameter, you can determine how the automatic reclosing func-
tion reacts to recognized faults.
You can find detailed information about the automatic reclosing function for faults in the chapter
blocks 79 The automatic reclosing function is immediately blocked until the disconnection
of the fault.
For blockings through faults during the 1-pole dead times, you can force a 3-
pole trip command through the automatic reclosing function if the you set the
parameter 3-pole operate by 79 to yes.
strt. evol.flt.dead After the 3-pole trip command to clear up the fault, the automatic reclosing
time function starts a new 3-pole automatic reclosing function cycle with the set
Dead time aft. evolv. fault.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Max. dead-time delay

Default setting (_:6601:110) Max. dead-time delay = 0.5 s
With the Max. dead-time delay parameter, you determine at which time the starting of the dead time
may be delayed before the automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
The delay of the start of the dead time is possible with the binary input >Dead time start delay.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.5 Start .
Parameter: Max. dead-time extension
Default setting (_:6601:111) Max. dead-time extension = 1.2 s

With the Max. dead-time extension parameter, you determine the time by which the dead time may be
extended before the automatic reclosing function is dynamically blocked.
With the setting oo (invalid), the extension is unlimited.
An extension of the dead time can be required under the following conditions:
Waiting for the readiness of the circuit breaker
Inquiry of a synchronous test
Delay through binary input in order e.g. to give the leading automatic reclosing function priority in a
system with 1 1/2 circuit breaker layout.
Remember that longer dead times after 3-pole disconnection are only permissible if no stability problems
occur or if a synchronous test occurs before the reclosing.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command .
Parameter: Voltage supervision time

This parameter is only important if you use the subfunctions RDT, DLC, or the ADT function. If you do not use
any of these functions, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
Default setting (_:6601:114) Voltage supervision time = 0.1 s
With the Voltage supervision time parameter, you can determine the measuring time that is available
as a criteria for the voltage decision. It should be longer than all transient oscillations through switching oper-
ations.
For the subfunctions Reduced dead time and Reclosing function with adaptive dead time, this measuring time
applies for the determination of the surpassing of a voltage threshold. For the subfunction Dead-line check,
the surpassing of a voltage threshold is checked.
Siemens recommends the setting 0.10 s.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the following parameters and in the chapters
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.15.5.1 Description .
Parameter: Volt. thres.f. live line/bus

This parameter is only important if you use the subfunction RDT or the function ADT. If you do not use any of
these functions, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
Default setting (_:6601:115) Volt. thres.f. live line/bus = 48 V
With the Volt. thres.f. live line/bus parameter, you can determine the limit voltage above which
the line should be seen as fault-free. It must be lower than the smallest expected operating voltage. The
phase-to-ground voltage applies as the reference value.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in the following settings and in the chapters
6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and Reduced Dead Time (RDT) and 6.15.5.1 Description .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Dead-line check/reduc.d.t

Default setting (_:6601:113) Dead-line check/reduc.d.t = without
With the Dead-line check/reduc.d.t parameter, you can determine if the automatic reclosing function
should work with one of the additional functions Dead-line check DLC or Reduced dead t. RDT.
without The automatic reclosing function occurs after the expiration of the parameter-
ized dead times. DLC or RDT are not activated.
Reduced dead t. RDT The automatic reclosing function works with a reduced dead time (RDT).
Dead-line check DLC The automatic reclosing functions works with dead-line check. The closing indi-
cation is only assigned if the line was really de-energized during the dead time.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT) .
NOTE
i Use RDT or DLC only if the voltages of the line can be correctly measured with an open circuit breaker.
This is only possible if the voltage transformer is aligned on the line-side - seen from the circuit breaker.
Parameter: Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus

This parameter is only important if you use the Dead-line check subfunction. If you do not use any of this
subfunction, the setting of this parameter is free to select.
Default setting (_:6601:116) Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus = 30 V
With the Volt.thres. f. dead line/bus parameter, you can determine the limit voltage below which
the line should be seen with certainty as dead or turned off. The threshold value is used by the Dead-line
check subfunction (dead-line check). The reference size is the phase-to-ground voltage.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.19 Dead-Line Check (DLC) and
Reduced Dead Time (RDT) .
Parameter: Send delay f. remot. close

With the Send delay f. remot. close parameter, you can determine after which time after the auto-
matic reclosing function the information is sent to the remote closing.
Default setting (_:6601:112) Send delay f. remot. close = oo (invalid)
The transmission delay prevents the device operating in the adaptive dead time mode on the opposite side
from closing unnecessarily if the local reclosing function remains unsuccessful. On the other hand, it must be
remembered that the line is not available for transporting energy as long as the opposite end is also closed.
Thus, the Send delay f. remot. close must be added to the dead time in order to determine the
system stability.
You can find detailed information about this functionality in the chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command .
6.15.8 Application and Setting Notes for 1 Cycle of the Cyclic Automatic Reclosing
Function
For the function of the cyclic automatic reclosing function, 1 cycle is preset. The preset cycle cannot be
deleted. You can add and delete more cycles from the function library in DIGSI 5.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Start from idle state allow.

This parameter is only important and can be set if you use the automatic reclosing function in an operating
mode with action time.
Default setting (_:6571:102) Start from idle state allow. = yes
With the parameter Start from idle state allow. you can determine whether the action time of this
automatic reclosing cycle is started, if the automatic reclosing function is in idle state during with incoming
general pickup. Please set the parameter always to yes, if the automatic reclosing function is configured for
only 1 cycle. If several cycles are configured, you can control the effectiveness of the automatic reclosing
cycles with this parameter and various action times.
Detailed information about the functionality can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating
Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time und 6.15.4.7 Cycle Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With
Action Time .
Parameter: Action time

mode with action time.
Default setting (_:6571:103) Action time = 0.2 s
With this parameter Action time you can determine, within which time frame the trip command must
appear, in order to start the automatic reclosing function. If the trip command occurs only after the action time
has expired, automatic reclosing does not occur within the active automatic reclosing cycle.
You can find detailed information about the functionality in
Chapters 6.15.4.6 Cycle Control With Operating Mode 1: With Tripping/With Action Time and 6.15.4.7 Cycle
Control with Operating Mode 2: With Pickup/With Action Time .
Parameter: Dead time aft. 3-pole trip, Dead time aft. 1-pole trip
mode with tripping.
Default setting (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip = 0.5 s
Default setting (_:6571:107) Dead time aft. 1-pole trip = 1.2 s

With this parameter Dead time aft. 3-pole trip and Dead time aft. 1-pole trip, you can
determine after which dead time the automatic reclosing function will be executed. You can set different dead
times for 1-pole and 3-pole reclosing cycles. Whether a trip occurs for 1-pole or 3-pole depends on the type of
the protection function, and if the tripping protection function for the start of the automatic reclosing function
has been configured.
NOTE
i If you would like to permit the automatic reclosing function only after a 1-pole tripping of the circuit breaker,
set the dead time after the 3-pole trip (parameter dead time after 3-pole OFF) to . If the automatic
reclosing function should only occur after a 3-pole trip, set the dead time after the 1-pole trip (parameter
Dead time aft. 1-pole trip) to . Therefore, all protection functions will be tripped as 3-pole after
each type of fault.
After a 3-pole trip of the circuit breaker, the system stability is priority. Since the switched off line cannot
develop synchronizing forces, only a short dead time is permitted in most cases. The usual duration is 0.3 s
to 0.6 s. A longer period can be tolerated if a synchrocheck is carried out prior to reclosing. Even in radial
systems longer 3-pole dead times are possible. The dead time after a 1-pole trip of the circuit breaker must
be long enough to ensure the short circuit arc has extinguished and the ambient air is deionized. It is only
then that the automatic reclosing function can be successful. Due to the charge reversal of the conducted
capacity, this time is longer, depending on the length of the line. Standard durations are between 0.9 s and
1.5 s.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Dead time aft.1ph. pickup, Dead time aft.2ph. pickup, Dead time aft.3ph. pickup
mode with pickup.
Default setting (_:6571:104) Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s

With the 3 dead-time parameters, you can determine after which dead time the automatic reclosing function
will be executed. Please set the times as desired for the respective type of short circuit.
The parameter Dead time aft.1ph. pickup applies to dead times after 1-phase short circuits and
the following protection tripping: A, B, C, or A-Gnd, B-Gnd, C-Gnd
the following protection tripping: A-B, B-C, C-A, or A-B-gnd, B-C-gnd, C-A-gnd
the following protection tripping: A-B-C or A-B-C-Gnd
NOTE
i If you would like to avoid automatic reclosing during individual short-circuit types, please set the respective
dead times to oo (invalid).
Example:
After 1-phase short-circuits, the automatic reclosing function should occur after 1.2 sec. The automatic
reclosing function should not occur for 2-phase and 3-phase short circuits.
For this application, the parameters should be set as follows:
Dead time aft.1ph. pickup = 1.2 s
Dead time aft.2ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
Dead time aft.3ph. pickup = oo (invalid)
Parameter: Dead time aft. evolv. fault

These parameters are only significant if the parameter (_:6601:109) Response to evolv. faults is
set to strt. evol.flt.dead time.
Default setting (_:6571:109) Dead time aft. evolv. fault = 1.2 s
With the parameter Dead time aft. evolv. fault, you can determine after which dead time the auto-
matic reclosing function should be executed, if based on an evolving fault during the current dead time, a 3-
pole trip has occurred. For this 3-pole dead time, stability concerns for the system are also important. Often,
this dead time as well as the parameter (_:6571:108) Dead time aft. 3-pole trip can be set.
Detailed information about the function during evolving faults during dead time are described in Chapter
Parameter: CB ready check bef.close
Default setting (_:6571:111) CB ready check bef.close = no

With the parameter CB ready check bef.close you can determine if after the expiration of the dead time
(meaning, directly prior to assigning the close command) readiness of the circuit breaker should be queried.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

no With the setting no, the automatic reclosing function does not check again the
readiness of the circuit breaker prior to assigning the close demand.
Siemens recommends this setting, if it is sufficient to check the readiness of
the circuit breaker for the entire switching cycle once before the start of a
reclosing function, consisting of tripping-reclosing-tripping. The setting for
checking the readiness of the circuit breaker prior to the start of the automatic
reclosing function is done using the parameter (_:6601:102) CB ready
check bef. start.
yes With the setting yes, the dead time can be extended if after the expiration of
the dead time the circuit breaker is not ready for the next ON-OFF cycle. The
maximum delay of the dead time can be set with the parameter (_:
6601:111) Max. dead-time extension.
Siemens recommends this setting, if it can be assumed that the circuit breaker
becomes available to switch on the reclosing function only after an additional
waiting period.
Detailed information about the function can be found in Chapters 6.15.4.16 Circuit-Breaker Readiness and
Circuit-Breaker Condition and 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command .
Parameter: Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t.
Default setting (_:6571:110) Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. = none

With the parameter Synchroch. aft. 3-pole d.t. you can determine if a synchrocheck must be
carried out for the configured automatic reclosing cycle.
If during a 3-pole interruption in the system stability problems may be a concern, the synchrocheck should be
carried out. If only 1-pole reclosure cycles are possible or stability problems are not to be expected during the
3-pole dead time, for example, due to a highly intermeshed system or radial system, please select the param-
eter none.
none During the automatic reclosing cycle a synchrocheck is not executed.
internal In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
For the synchrocheck a synchrocheck stage of the internal synchronization
function is used, which is contained in the same function group as the circuit
breaker and the automatic reclosing function. The selection of the synchro-
check stage that is used in the automatic reclosing cycle occurs through the
following described parameter Internal synchrocheck.
external In the configured automatic reclosing cycle, a synchrocheck is executed after a
3-pole dead time prior to the close command of the circuit breaker.
An external synchrocheck device initiates the synchrocheck. The external
synchrocheck device is connected with the binary signals Synchrocheck
request and >Release by ext.sync.. Detailed information about the
function can be found in Chapter 6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close
Command under the section Synchrocheck.
Parameter: Internal synchrocheck

These parameters are only significant if the previously described parameter (_:6571:110) Synchroch.
aft. 3-pole d.t. is set to internal.
With the parameter Internal Synchrocheck, you can determine which function block of the synchroniza-
tion function for the automatic reclosing function is used after a 3-pole dead time. This selection is only
possible for function blocks of the synchronization function, and which are included in the same circuit-
breaker function group as the automatic reclosing function. The setting options of the parameter will be
generated dynamically, according to the actual parameterization.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 50/51):

Detects short circuits at electrical equipment
Can be used as backup or emergency overcurrent protection in addition to the main protection
Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups. Depending on the device, it
is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 definite time-overcurrent protection stages (Definite-T stages)
and 1 inverse time-overcurrent protection stage (Inverse-T stage). A maximum of 4 definite time-overcurrent
protection stages, as well as 1 inverse time-overcurrent protection stage and 1 stage with a user-defined
characteristic curve can be operated simultaneously within this function. Apart from the time delay character-
istic, the stages are identical in structure.
The protection function is implemented so that the emergency mode can act across all overcurrent-protection
stages (see Figure 6-271).
The group indications output logic (see Figure 6-271) generates the following group indications for the entire
Overcurrent protection, phases function by a logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
Pickup
Operate
[dwocpph1-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device-internal functions listed below are present in the device, these functions can influence the pickup
values and time delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an external
source via a binary input signal.
Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[loocp1p1-310511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-272 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Emergency Mode
You use the Emergency mode parameter to define whether the stage operates as emergency overcurrent
protection or as backup overcurrent protection. With the setting Emergency mode = caused by main
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. This happens,
for example, in the case of distance protection when a short circuit occurs in the voltage-transformer secon-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
dary circuit or the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected, or in the case of line differential
protection where protection communication is disconnected. This means that the emergency mode replaces
the main protection as short-circuit protection. With the appropriate parameterization (Emergency mode =
caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also be activated from an external source.
If the overcurrent protection is set as backup overcurrent protection (parameter Emergency mode = no), it
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel. Backup overcurrent protection can also
serve as sole short-circuit protection when, for example, no voltage transformers are available for an initial
startup.
You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
comp. or the calculated RMS value.
Measurement of the fundamental component:
Measurement of the RMS value:

This method of measurement determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.
Dropout delay
If the value falls below the dropout threshold, the pickup dropout can be delayed. The pickup is maintained for
the specified time. The tripping delay continues to run. If the time delay expires while the pickup is still main-
tained, the stage operates.
Blocking of the Stage

The following blockings reset the picked up stage completely:
Via the binary input signal >Block stage from an external or internal source
Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see subtitle Influence of other functions on the dynamic
settings and Section 6.16.7.1 Description )
Blocking of the Time Delay

You can use the binary input signal >Block delay & op. to prevent the start of the time delay and thus
also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and the fault logging and
recording takes place.
Blocking of the Tripping Delay and the Trip Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
Blocking of the operate delay and the operate signal via the device-internal Inrush-current detection function
is described in chapter 6.16.6.1 Description .

If available in the device, the following functions can influence the overcurrent-protection stages:
Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal

Parameter: Emergency mode
Default setting (_:2311:101) Emergency mode = no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Emergency mode parameter is set for all stages. The setting applies equally to all stages within the
function.
no Overcurrent protection does not operate in emergency mode. It is always
active in parallel to main protection.
caused by main prot. Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. If main protection
can no longer operate, overcurrent protection automatically starts to
operate. The situations in which main protection can no longer operate are:
Main protection, distance protection: measuring-voltage failure
Main protection, line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure
caused by binary Overcurrent protection operates in emergency mode. Activation is not
input performed automatically by internal main protection, but via a binary input
signal, for example, by an external main protection.
Recommended setting value (_:841:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.

comp. (standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement if harmonics or transient current peaks
are to be suppressed.
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard method.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take
harmonics into account (for example, at capacitor banks). For this method
of measurement, do not set the threshold value of the stage to less
than 0.1 Irated,sec.
Parameter: Threshold, Operate delay
Default setting (_:841:3) Threshold = 1.50 A (for the 1st stage)
Default setting (_:841:6) Operate delay = 0.300 s (for the first stage)
Set the Threshold and Operate delay parameters for the specific application.
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite time-overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the maximum occurring operating current. Pickup by overload must be excluded
since overcurrent protection operates with short tripping times as short-circuit protection and not as overload
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer = 600 A/5 A
Safety factor = 1,1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Settings in primary and secondary values result in the setting values:
[foocpph1-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
2nd Stage (High-Current Stage):

This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined by means of a system analysis. The following
example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZA/s = 0.46 /km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance to positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance to positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZV0/ZL1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZA and the source impedance ZP1:
[foocp002-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The 3-phase short-circuit current at the end of the line is Isc end:
[foocpph3-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocp004-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If short-circuit currents exceed 2365 A (primary) or 19,7 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to
be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance and line impedance have different angles, you have use complex numbers to calculate the
Threshold.
Parameter Dropout delay
Recommended setting value (_:841:101) Dropout delay = 0 s

Siemens recommends that the default setting 0 s be used because a protection stage has to drop out as
quickly as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it
together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electrome-
chanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical
Data) and set the result.
Parameter: Dropout ratio
Recommended setting value (_:841:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications.
To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
can increase the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping
stage.

The parameter must be set for the specific application.
no The function always causes 3-pole tripping of the circuit breaker.
yes The stage generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which
poles of the circuit-breaker to open is not made until central trip command
control becomes involved.
6.16.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Emergency no no
mode caused by main prot.
caused by binary input
General
on
test
_:841:11 Definite-T 1:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
settings yes
_:841:27 Definite-T 1:Blk. w. no no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:841:8 Definite-T 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental
measurement RMS value comp.
_:841:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:841:4 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
ratio
_:841:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:841:101 Definite-T 1:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:841:6 Definite-T 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:841:28 Definite-T 1:Effect. by no no
AR off/n.ready yes
_:841:35 Definite-T 1:Stage no no
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:841:33 Definite-T 1:Effect. b. no no
cold-load pickup yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
General
on
test
operate allowed yes
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
ratio
_:842:102 Definite-T 2:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
delay
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Activation emg. mode SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Emergency mode act. SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:841:500 Definite-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:841:66 Definite-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
Definite-T 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.16.4 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Logic of the Stage
[locop1p2-281013, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-273 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Emergency Mode
dary circuit or the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected, or in the case of line differential
startup.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI
is processed. An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results
from the characteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined
from the characteristic curve. Once the weighted time exceeds the value 1, the stage operates.
setting parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout
according to the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The
dropout according to characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The
Minimum Time of the Curve

With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define a minimum operate delay time. The operate
delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time.
[Dwocp1_3Mi_20140716-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-274 Minimum Operating Time of the Curve
Additional Time Delay

With the parameter Additional time delay, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay. With this setting, the whole curve is shifted on the time axis by this additional definite time.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015


Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see subtitle Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and chapter 6.16.7.1 Description ).


Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal


function.
sion failure
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015


Default setting (_:871:108) Type of character. curve = IEC normal inverse

The device offers all the usual inverse-time characteristic curves according to IEC and ANSI. Select the Type
of character. curve required for your specific application.
Default setting (_:871:113) Min. time of the curve = 0.00 s

delay time of inverse-time characteristic curve never falls below the minimum operate delay time. If the
setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic curve.
This parameter is only required for time coordination in recloser schemes. For all other applications, Siemens
recommends keeping the default setting of 0 s.
NOTE
i If the set value is smaller than the smallest possible time delay of the inverse-time characteristic curve, the
parameter has no influence on the delay time.
Default setting (_:871:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, this parameter has no effect on the inverse-time characteristic
curve.
Default setting (_:871:3) Threshold = 1.50 A

Set the Threshold and Type of character. curve parameters for the specific application.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
protection. Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx. 10 %, for transformers and motors to approx.
20 % above the maximum expected load.
Note that a safety margin is set between pickup value and threshold value. The stage only picks up at approx.
10 % above the Threshold.
EXAMPLE
Overcurrent-protection stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
Pmax = 120 MVA
Correspondingly
Imax = 630 A
Settings in primary and secondary values result in the setting values:
[foocp005-030311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Parameter: Time dial
Default setting (_:871:101) Time dial = 1

Use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The set value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared
for the electrical power system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time
delays might be reasonable (one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates
if the main protection function fails.
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the
parameter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset
Default setting (_:871:109) Reset = disk emulation

disk emulation Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
devices or other devices which perform a dropout after a disk emulation.
instantaneous Use this setting if the dropout is not to be performed after disk emulation
and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes The function generates phase-selective tripping. The decision as to which
poles of the circuit-breaker to open is not made, however, until central trip
6.16.4.3 Settings

General
General
_:871:1 Inverse-T 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:871:2 Inverse-T 1:Operate & no no
_:871:11 Inverse-T 1:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
_:871:26 Inverse-T 1:Dynamic no no
settings yes
_:871:27 Inverse-T 1:Blk. w. no no
_:871:8 Inverse-T 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental
_:871:3 Inverse-T 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:871:110 Inverse-T 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:871:108 Inverse-T 1:Type of
character. curve
_:871:113 Inverse-T 1:Min. time of 0.00 s to 1.00 s 0.00 s
the curve
_:871:109 Inverse-T 1:Reset instantaneous disk emulation
disk emulation
_:871:101 Inverse-T 1:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
_:871:115 Inverse-T 1:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:871:28 Inverse-T 1:Effect. by no no
AR off/n.ready yes
_:871:35 Inverse-T 1:Stage no no
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:871:29 Inverse-T 1:Effected by no no
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:871:33 Inverse-T 1:Effect. b. no no
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:871:81 Inverse-T 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:871:84 Inverse-T 1:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:871:500 Inverse-T 1:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:871:54 Inverse-T 1:Inactive SPS O
_:871:52 Inverse-T 1:Behavior ENS O
_:871:53 Inverse-T 1:Health ENS O
_:871:60 Inverse-T 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:871:62 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:871:65 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:871:66 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:871:67 Inverse-T 1:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:871:68 Inverse-T 1:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:871:59 Inverse-T 1:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:871:55 Inverse-T 1:Pickup ACD O
_:871:56 Inverse-T 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:871:57 Inverse-T 1:Operate ACT O
6.16.5 Stage with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
This stage is structured the same way as the stage with inverse-time characteristic curve (see section
6.16.4.1 Description ). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.
User-Defined Characteristic Curve

With the user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the operate curve point by point using up to 30
value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic curve from
these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior with the User-Defined Characteristic Curve

When the input variable exceeds the threshold value by 1.1 times, the characteristic curve is processed.
An integrating method of measurement totalizes the weighted time. The weighted time results from the char-
acteristic curve. For this, the time that is associated with the present current value is determined from the
[dwocpken-140611-02.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-275 Pickup Behavior and Dropout Behavior when Using a User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Note that the currents that are lower than the current value of the smallest characteristic-curve point do not
extend the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis up to the smallest
characteristic-curve point. Currents that are larger than the current value of the largest characteristic-curve
point do not reduce the operate time. The pickup characteristic runs in parallel to the current axis from the
largest characteristic-curve point.

This stage is structured the same way as the stage with the inverse-time characteristic curve. The only differ-
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves. For guidance on the other parameters of the stage, see chapter
6.16.4.2 Application and Setting Notes .
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (from the operate curve)

Use these settings to define the characteristic curve. Set a current/time value pair for each characteristic-
curve point. The setting depends on the characteristic curve you want to realize.
Set the current value as a multiple of the threshold value. Siemens recommends that you set the Threshold
parameter to 1.00 in order to obtain a simple relation. You can change the threshold value setting afterwards
if you want to displace the characteristic curve.
Set the time value in seconds. The characteristic curve is displaced using the Time dial parameter.
NOTE
i The value pairs must be entered in continuous order.
Default setting (_:101) Time dial = 1

for the electrical power system. Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter set to 1.
Parameter: Reset
Default setting (_:110) Reset = disk emulation

disk emulation In the case of this setting, a dropout characteristic curve has to be set in
addition to the operate curve.
Select this setting if the device is coordinated with electromechanical
but an instantaneous dropout is desired.
Parameter: Current/time value pairs (of the dropout characteristic curve)

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
6.16.5.3 Settings

General
_:1 User curve #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 User curve #:Operate & no no
_:11 User curve #:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
_:26 User curve #:Dynamic no no
settings yes
_:27 User curve #:Blk. w. no no
_:8 User curve #:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental
_:3 User curve #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
_:111 User curve #:Pickup 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
delay
_:110 User curve #:Reset instantaneous disk emulation
disk emulation
_:101 User curve #:Time dial 0.05 to 15.00 1.00
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
_:28 User curve #:Effect. by no no
AR off/n.ready yes
_:35 User curve #:Stage no no
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
_:29 User curve #:Effected by no no
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
_:33 User curve #:Effect. b. no no
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
User curve #
_:81 User curve #:>Block stage SPS I
_:84 User curve #:>Activ. dyn. settings SPS I
_:500 User curve #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 User curve #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 User curve #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 User curve #:Health ENS O
_:60 User curve #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:62 User curve #:Dyn.set. AR cycle1act. SPS O
_:65 User curve #:Dyn.set. ARcycl.>3act SPS O
_:66 User curve #:Dyn.set. CLP active SPS O
_:67 User curve #:Dyn.set. BI active SPS O
_:68 User curve #:Dyn. set. blks. pickup SPS O
_:59 User curve #:Disk emulation running SPS O
_:55 User curve #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 User curve #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 User curve #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite time-overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the blocking. Only
if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section 11.54 Inrush-Current Detection) is in effect can the
blocking be set.
[loocppha-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-276 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage

In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the
transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that
is set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former-inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current
that would lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and
tripping of the stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold
value of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the trans-
former. This applies to the overcurrent-protection stage, which is used as a
backup stage with grading time for faults on the undervoltage side of the
transformer.
The Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the tripping are so-called dynamic settings (DP).
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically (see
Figure 6-277). Depending on other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loocpdpa-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings of the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is
provided with a configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings
(Operate delay and Threshold). The configuration parameters are used to set whether the signal shall
be active or not, this means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for
example, signal function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic,
that is, instantly active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the
signal becomes inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing
[loocpawe-040311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and Operate delay parameters of the
protection stage and its blocking.

AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of
AREC off/not on standby.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and
Operate delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in section 6.15.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection
[loocpkal-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In the case of cold-load pickup, you have the option to change the settings for the Threshold and Operate
delay parameters of the protection level. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influ-
ence of the cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings
to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Link to an external function via a binary input signal
[loocpbin-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
and the Operate delay parameters of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you
must activate the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or
assign settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Dynamic settings

no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or
external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent level (1st level) can be used as a fast level before automatic reclosing
describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. Additionally, it is to be
used as fast level before an automatic reclosing. Because a fast disconnection of the short-circuit current
takes priority over the selectivity prior to reclosing, the tripping delay can be set to 0 or a very small value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
If the threshold value (1.5 A) is exceeded before AREC 1 and AREC 2, the overcurrent-protection stage
trips instantaneously. If the fault still exists after AREC 2 (unsuccessful AREC), the stage trips with the time
delay of 600 ms according to the time-grading schedule.
Influence of External Devices

The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, the AR ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.17 Overcurrent Protection, Ground
The Overcurrent protection, ground function (ANSI 50N/51N):

Detects short circuits in electrical equipment
The Overcurrent protection, ground function is used in protection function groups. 2 kinds of functions are
available for the 3-phase overcurrent protection:
Overcurrent protection, ground advanced (50N/51N OC-gnd-A)
Overcurrent protection, ground basic (50N/51N OC-gnd-B)
Only the function type Advanced is available in the devices of the line protection family. The function type
Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more functionality and is
provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite time-overcurrent protection stages
and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground advanced the following stages can be operated simulta-
neously:
Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection advanced
1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection advanced
1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection

In the function type Overcurrent protection, ground basic the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:
Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection basic
1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection basic
The function type Advanced is implemented such that the emergency mode can act across all advanced
overcurrent-protection stages (see Figure 6-281).
The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the following figures. Apart from the tripping delay charac-
teristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The measured-value selection (only advanced stage) is general functionality and has a uniform effect on the
stages (see Figure 6-281 and chapter 6.17.3.1 Description). This ensures that all stages of the function
receive the same measured current value.
The group-indication output logic generates the following group indications of the protection function by the
logical OR of the stage-selective indications:
Pickup
Operate
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwocpga1-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-281 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground Advanced
[dwocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-282 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, Ground Basic
If the following listed, device-internal functions are present in the device, these functions can influence the
pickup values and tripping delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an
external source via a binary input signal.
Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with an Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents (available in both function types).
6.17.3 General Functionality
Measured-Value Selection
The function provides the option to select between the values IN measured or 3I0 calculated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loMasValue-201507-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-283 Logic Diagram of Measured-Value Selection
Both options are only available for the current-transformer connection types 3-phase + IN and 3-phase +
IN-separate. For other connection types respectively, only one option is possible. If you select an option
that is not allowed, an inconsistency message is given.
Depending on the CT secondary rated current, the CT connection type, and the selected setting, the secon-
dary threshold setting range varies according to the following table.
Table 6-9 Threshold Setting Range
Connec- Measured CT Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting Threshold Setting
tion Type Value Terminal Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.: Range (rated I-sec.:
Type ph = 1 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 1 A, IN = 5 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 1 A) ph = 5 A, IN = 5 A)
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.030 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.15 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.005 A to 8.000 A
3ph + IN
urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.030 A to 35.000 A N/A N/A 0.15 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A N/A N/A 0.005 A to 8.000 A
urement
3I0 calcu- 4 * Protec- 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A
lated tion
3 * Protec- 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
3ph + IN-separate
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A

urement
IN meas- 4 * Protec- 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A
ured tion
3 * Protec- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A
tion, 1 *
sen.
4 * Meas- 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A
urement
Parameter: Measured value
Recommended setting value Measured value = IN Measured

This parameter is not available in the basic function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
IN Measured The function operates with the measured ground current IN. This is the
recommended setting unless there is a specific reason to use the calculated
zero-sequence current 3I0.
3I0 Calculated The function operates with the calculated zero sequence current 3I0. This
setting option can be used when applying a redundant 50N/51N function for
safety reasons.
6.17.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:9 General:Measured 3I0 calculated IN measured
value IN measured
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Basic Stage
[loocpgb1-060213-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-284 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) Basic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Advanced Stage
[loocpgr1-081111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-285 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) Advanced
Emergency mode (Advanced Stage)

dary circuit, when the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected or in the case of line differential
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
startup.
Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)


Dropout Delay (Advanced Stage)

Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)

Via the functionality of the dynamic settings (see chapter Influence of other functions via dynamic
settings and section 6.17.8.1 Description ).
Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
is described in chapter 6.17.7.1 Description.
Influence of Other Functions via Dynamic Settings (Advanced Stage)

Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal


This parameter is not visible in the basic stage.
function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Main protection distance protection: measuring-voltage failure
Main protection line differential protection: Protection-data transmis-
sion failure

The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the stage uses the fundamental
Default setting (_:751:3) Threshold = 1.20 A (for the first stage)
The following details apply to a 2-stage characteristic curve (1st stage = definite time-overcurrent protection
stage and 2nd stage = high-current stage).
1st stage (overcurrent stage):
The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.
For very small ground-fault currents, Siemens recommends using the Ground-fault protection against high-
resistance ground faults in grounded systems function.
The Operate delay to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for the
system. Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable
(one grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection func-
tion fails.
2nd stage (high-current stage):
This tripping stage can also be used for current grading. This applies in the case of very long lines with low
source impedance or ahead of high reactances (for example, transformers, shunt reactors). Set the
Threshold parameter to ensure that the stage does not pick up in case of a short-circuit at the end of the
line.
Set the Operate delay parameter to 0 or to a low value.
Siemens recommends that the threshold values be determined with a system analysis. The following
example illustrates the principle of grading with a current threshold on a long line.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE
High-current stage: 110-kV overhead line, 150 mm2 cross-section
s (length) = 60 km
ZL/s = 0.46 /km
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the line: ZL0/ZL1 = 4
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:
Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
Ratio of zero-sequence impedance and positive-sequence impedance of the source impedance at the
beginning of the line: ZP0/ZP1 = 2
Resulting in the following values for the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZP:
[fo_OCP002_030311, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP003_030311, 1, en_US]
The 1-pole short-circuit current at the end of the line is IscG end:
[fo_ocp005_030311, 1, en_US]
The settings in primary and secondary values result in the following setting values which include a safety
margin of 10 %:
[foocpgr4-030311-01.tif, 3, en_US]
In case of short-circuit currents exceeding 1246 A (primary) or 10.39 A (secondary) there is a short-circuit on
the line to be protected. The overcurrent protection can cut off this short circuit immediately.
Note: The amounts in the calculation example are accurate enough for overhead lines. If the source impe-
dance, line impedance and zero-sequence impedance have very different angles, you have use complex
numbers to calculate the Threshold.
Parameter: Dropout delay
Recommended setting value (_:751:101) Dropout delay = 0

Siemens recommends to use the default setting 0 since the dropout of a protection stage must be done as
fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter 0 to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it together
with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electromechanical
relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical Data) and
set the result.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

To achieve high-precision measurements, the setting value of the parameter Dropout ratio can be
reduced, for example, to 0.98. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you
stage.
6.17.4.3 Settings

General
General
on
test
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
General
on
test
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Basic Stage
Figure 6-286 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) Basic
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Advanced Stage
Figure 6-287 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Ground) Advanced
Emergency mode (Advanced Stage)

dary circuit, when the voltage-transformer secondary circuit is disconnected or in the case of line differential
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
startup.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI (Basic and Advanced
Stage)
Minimum Time of the Curve (Advanced Stage)

With the parameter Min. time of the curve, you define the minimum operate delay time. The operate
[Dwocpgr3Mi_20140716-01, 1, en_US]
Additional Time Delay (Advanced Stage)

Method of Measurement (Basic and Advanced Stage)


Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Blocking of the Stage (Basic and Advanced Stage)

Blocking of the Time Delay (Basic and Advanced Stage)

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function (Basic
and Advanced Stage)
is described in chapter 6.17.7.1 Description.

Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal


Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal

function.
sion failure
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015


of character. curve required for your specific application. For more information about the parameter
Type of character. curve, refer to chapter 11.21 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground .

This parameter is only available in the advanced stage.
NOTE
Recommended setting value (_:781:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
curve.
recommend keeping the default setting of 0 s.

The setting depends on the minimal occurring ground-fault current. This must be determined.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Where no time grading and therefore no displacement of the characteristic curve is required, leave the Time
dial parameter at 1.
Parameter: Reset

6.17.5.3 Settings

General
General
on
test
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
character. curve
the curve
disk emulation
time delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
This stage is only available in the advanced function type.
This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent protection advanced stage (see
chapter 6.17.5.1 Description ). The only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.


the dropout is started. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting parameters. You can select
between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to the characteristic curve
(reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout according to characteristic
curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted reduction of the time is initiated
from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The following figure shows the pickup and dropout behavior when a user-defined characteristic curve is used.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE

This stage is structured the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent protection advanced stage. The only
difference is that the user can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides applica-
tion and setting notes for setting characteristic curves. For guidance on the other parameters of the stage,
see chapter 6.17.5.2 Application and Setting Notes .

NOTE

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
curve is required, leave the parameter Time dial at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset


NOTE
6.17.6.3 Settings

General
on
test
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
disk emulation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A

(Type)
User curve #
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
stage picks up. The start of the tripping delay and the trip signal are blocked. The function signals this through
time delay is started. After that time, the stage operates. The following figure only shows the part of the stage
(exemplified by definite time-overcurrent protection stage 1) that illustrates the influence of the inrush-current
detection. Only if the central function Inrush-current detection (see section 11.54 Inrush-Current Detection) is
in effect can the blocking be set.
[loocpgrd-210812-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-290 Part-Logic Diagram on the Influence of Inrush-Current Detection Exemplified by the 1st Defi-
nite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

transformer. This, for example, applies to the high-current stage that
is set such according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer
that it only picks up on faults from the high-voltage side. The trans-
former-inrush current cannot become larger than the maximum trans-
mittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current
transformer.
The Threshold and Operate delay settings used for tripping are so-called dynamic settings.
Depending on other functions, the settings of these parameters can be changed dynamically. Depending on
other functions, the stage can also be blocked dynamically. This functionality is only available in function type
Advanced.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loocpgnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Stage
If available in the device, the following functionalities can affect the overcurrent-protection stages:
Automatic reclosing (AREC) Priority 1
These functionalities generate signals that change the settings of the dynamic settings of the overcurrent-
protection stage or block it, if required. In the latter case, the settings for the Threshold and the Operate
delay are of no relevance. Within the overcurrent-protection stage, each of these signals is provided with a
configuration parameter Influence of function ... and its own dynamic settings (Operate delay
and Threshold). The configuration settings are used to set whether the signal shall be active or not, this
means whether the dynamic settings shall be activated or not. If one of these signals (for example, signal
function x) becomes active and is to take effect, these parameter settings become dynamic, that is, instantly
active. This means that the setting assigned to the signal replaces the standard setting. If the signal becomes
inactive, the standard settings apply again. The activation of the dynamic settings is reported.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Where several signals are active in parallel, the priority specified above shall apply. This means that a signal
with priority 2 precedes that of priority 3. The settings assigned to signal 2 become active.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Automatic Reclosing (Advanced Stage)
[loocpgrnd-040311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Several AREC signals can affect the setting for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
stage and its blocking.

AREC is not ready or switched off (= Automatic reclosing off / not ready)
This means that if the AREC is ready and the protection stage is in the idle state, the settings for
AREC cycle 1 are active and not the standard settings. The standard settings are active in the case of
AREC off/not ready.
The influence can be activated for each signal individually. You also have to set the Threshold and
Operate delay or Stage blocked parameters, which take effect when the signal is active.
The way AREC signals are generated is described in section 6.15.1 Overview of Functions.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)
[loocpkalgnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
level for a cold-load pick-up You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Link to the Device-Internal Function Cold-Load Pickup Detection (Advanced Stage)
[loocpkalgnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
You have the option of changing the settings for the Threshold and the Operate delay of the protection
level for a cold-load pick-up You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate the influence of the
cold-load pickup. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign settings to Stage
blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The way signals are generated Cold-load pickup is described in section 5.1.4.15 Cold-Load Pickup
Detection (Optional) .
Link to an External Function via a Binary Input Signal (Advanced Stage)
[loocpbingnd-030311-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
and the Operate delay of the protection stage. You can also block the level. To do so, you must activate
the influence of the binary input. You also have to set the Threshold and Operate delay or assign
settings to Stage blocked, which take effect when the signal is active.
6.17.8.2 Application and Setting Notes (Advanced Stage)
Binary Input Signal: Dynamic settings

no The influence on the overcurrent-protection stage by device-internal or
external functions is not necessary.
yes If a device-internal function (automatic reclosing function or cold-load
pickup detection) or an external function should affect the overcurrent-
protection stage (such as change the setting of the threshold value or time
delay, blocking of the stage), the setting must be changed to yes.
This makes the configuration parameters Influence of function...
as well as the dynamic settings Threshold, Operate delay and Stage
blocked of the stage visible and enables the settings to be set for the
specific influence.
Influence of AREC
The example of how the overcurrent-protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before auto-
matic reclosing describes the influence exerted by AREC.
The setting of the overcurrent level (1st level) results from the time-grading schedule. It is to be used as fast
stage before an automatic reclosing. Because fast disconnection of the short-circuit current takes priority over
the selectivity prior to reclosing, the Operate delay parameter can be set to 0 or to a very low value. To
achieve the selectivity, the final disconnection must be done with the grading time.
AREC is set to 2 reclosings. A secondary Threshold of 1.5 A and a Operate delay of 600 ms are
assumed (according to the time-grading schedule) for the overcurrent-protection stage. The standard settings
of the stage are set to these values.
To realize the application, the configuration settings Effected by AR cycle 1 and Effected by AR
cycle 2 are changed in the example to yes (= influenced). This activates the AR cycle 1 and AR cycle
2 input signals within the stage. When they become active, they switch to the assigned dynamic settings.
The two dynamic settings Operate delay assigned to these input signals (sources of influence) are set to
the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The two dynamic settings Threshold assigned to these input
signals are set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Influence of External Devices

The influence of an external device can also be configured. The above is an example of how the overcurrent-
protection stage (1st stage) can be used as a fast stage before automatic reclosing, in which case the AREC
function is performed by an external device.
To realize the application, the configuration setting Effected by binary input must be changed to yes
(= influenced). This activates the >Activ. dyn. settings input signal within the stage. When the input
signal becomes active, it switches to the assigned dynamic settings. The external device must provide the
Cycle 1 and Cycle 2 signals or, alternatively, an AREC ready signal. The signals must be connected with
the binary input signal >Activ. dyn. settings.
The dynamic setting Operate delay, which is assigned to the input signal (source of influence) >Activ.
dyn. settings, is set to the time delay 0 (instantaneous tripping). The dynamic setting Threshold
assigned to this input signal is set to the normal threshold value of 1.5 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.18 Directional Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases function (ANSI 67):

Detects short circuits at electrical equipment
Ensures selective fault detection for parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end
Ensures selective fault detection in cable runs with infeed at both ends or in lines connected to form ring
topologies
Trips 1- or 3-pole
The Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases function is used in protection function groups 3-phase
current and voltage measurements. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the manufacturer with
2 directional definite time-overcurrent protection stages and 1 directional inverse time-overcurrent protection
stage. A maximum of 4 definite time-overcurrent protection stages, as well as 1 inverse time-overcurrent
protection stage and 1 stage with a user-defined characteristic curve can be operated simultaneously within
this function. Apart from the time delay characteristic, the stages are identical in structure.
The protection function is implemented so that the emergency mode can act across all overcurrent-protection
stages (see following figure).
The directional characteristic curve is set on the function level and has a uniform effect on the stages (see
following figure and section 6.18.7.1 Description ). In this way, it is ensured that all stages of a function deter-
mine the same direction. Every stage can be set to the forward or reverse direction. The process of direction
determination is independent of the direction-determination procedure of other functions (for example,
distance protection, if this function is permitted for the device and available).
The group indications output logic (see Figure 6-296) generates the following group indications for the Direc-
tional time-overcurrent protection, phases function by a logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
Pickup
Operate
[dwdocp01-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If the device-internal functions listed below are present in the device, these functions can influence the pickup
values and time delays of the stages or block the stages. The stage can also be affected by an external
source via a binary input signal.
Binary input signal

If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized against trip-
ping due to transformer-inrush currents.
6.18.3 Stage Control
Logic
The following figure represents the stage control. It applies to all types of stages.
[lodocp02-251110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-297 Stage-Control Logic Diagram
Emergency Mode
prot., emergency overcurrent protection starts automatically when the main protection fails. With the appro-
priate parameterization (Emergency mode = caused by binary input), the emergency mode can also
be activated from an external source.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
operates independently of the main protection and thus in parallel.
Blocking of Stage in case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In the event of blocking, the picked up stage
will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Section 8.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions)
From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection
blocks the stage or does not block it.

function.
can no longer operate, directional time-overcurrent protection automatically
starts to operate. Main protection can no longer work in the following situa-
tions:
The use of directional time-overcurrent protection in emergency mode
is not recommended in this case, as the function also requires voltage
measurement (for direction determination). Non-directional overcur-
rent protection is the appropriate emergency mode.
sion failure
Parameter: Blk. by meas.-volt. failure
Recommended setting value (_:8311:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the behavior of the stage when a
measuring-voltage failure is detected.
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following two conditions is met:
The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and switched
on.
The binary input signal >Open of the function block VTCB is connected to the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker (see Chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions ).

yes The directional overcurrent-protection stage is blocked. Siemens recom-
mends that you retain the default setting, as correct direction determination
cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage failure occurs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

no The directional overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked.
Logic of a Stage
[lodocp01-141013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-298 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Directional mode
tion.
Direction determination itself works across stages (see section 6.18.7.1 Description ).
Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory

If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter l6.18.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the stage response
can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty
setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the func-
tion does not pick up.
Directional Comparison Protection

The stage can be used for directional comparison protection. This is set using the Directional compar-
ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold value violation to determine the direc-
tion (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent of the
directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the Release via input
signal input signal is active.
Method of measurement

Dropout delay

Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)
Via the dynamic settings functionality (see Using dynamic settings to influence other functions and
section 6.16.7.1 Description )

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal


becomes involved.

tion of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work only in a reverse direction (in the direc-
tion of the busbar).

Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal
Default setting (_:8311:104) Directional comparison = no
Default setting (_:8311:106) Release via input signal = no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
Directional comparison protection is performed via the Direction and >Release delay & op. signals.
no The stage is not used for directional comparison protection.
yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release
via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the
>Release delay & op. input signal become available.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start of the
time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are only enabled
if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The >Release delay
& op. input signal must be connected to the release information from the
opposite end (forward information from the Direction output signal); see also
the application example in chapter 6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional
Comparison Protection .
Parameter: Non-directional pickup
Default setting (_:8311:107) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< & mem.empty

at volt.< & Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
mem.empty voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed at
low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may exist, for
example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the circuit breaker
(CB) trips.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.
Default setting (_:8311:3) Threshold = 1.50 A (for the 1st stage)

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection.
For further information, refer to section 6.16.3.2 Application and Setting Notes .
The tripping delay to be set is derived from the time-grading chart that has been prepared for the system.
Where overcurrent protection is used in emergency mode, shorter time delays might be reasonable (one
grading time above fast tripping), since the emergency mode only operates if the main protection function
fails.
Typical examples of grading times are provided in sections 6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends and 6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection .

For high-precision measurements, the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter can be reduced, for
example to 0.98. If you expect heavily fluctuating measurands at the response threshold, you can increase
the setting value of the Dropout ratio parameter. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
Recommended setting value (_:8311:101) Dropout delay = 0 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Siemens recommends using this setting value, since the dropout of a protection stage must be performed as
fast as possible.
You can use the Dropout delay parameter 0 s to obtain a uniform dropout behavior if you use it
together with an electromechanical relay. This is required for time grading. The dropout time of the electrome-
chanical relay must be known for this purpose. Subtract the dropout time of your own device (see Technical
Data) and set the result.
6.18.4.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 to 180 45
of ref. volt.
General
on
test
_:8311:105 Definite-T 1:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
operate allowed yes
_:8311:107 Definite-T 1:Non-direc- no at volt.< &
tional pickup at volt.< & mem.empty mem.empty
_:8311:104 Definite-T 1:Directional no no
comparison yes
_:8311:106 Definite-T 1:Release via no no
input signal yes
_:8311:10 Definite-T 1:Blk. by no yes
meas.-volt. failure yes
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
ratio
delay
delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
General
on
test
_:8312:105 Definite-T 2:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
operate allowed yes
_:8312:107 Definite-T 2:Non-direc- no at volt.< &
_:8312:104 Definite-T 2:Directional no no
comparison yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:8312:106 Definite-T 2:Release via no no
input signal yes
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
ratio
delay
delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

delay
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 10.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
delay

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:8311:501 Definite-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:8311:300 Definite-T 1:Direction ACD O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[lodocp03-120612-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-299 Logic Diagram of the Directional, Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (Phases)
Directional mode
tion.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Non-Directional Pickup, Voltage Memory

If a 3-phase close-up fault occurs, all 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop to almost 0. If this happens, direction
determination can fall back on a voltage memory (see chapter l6.18.7.1 Description ). If no voltage measure-
ments which can be used to determine the direction are available in the voltage memory, the stage response
can be defined via the Non-directional pickup parameter. With the at volt.< & mem.empty
setting, the function picks up in such a situation without direction determination. With the no setting, the func-
tion does not pick up.
Directional Comparison Protection

The stage can be used for directional comparison protection. This is set using the Directional compar-
ison parameter. With the yes setting, the function uses the threshold value violation to determine the direc-
tion (forward or reverse) and reports the indication Direction. The direction indicated is independent of the
directional mode set for the stage.
The Release via input signal setting and the >Release delay & op. input signal are available
with directional comparison protection. If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the
start of the time delay, and therefore the tripping of the stage, are only enabled if the >Release delay &
op. input signal is active.
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
Minimum Time of the Curve

[DwDocpMin_040715-01, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Additional Time Delay


Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)
Measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 6.18.3.1 Description)

also the operate signal. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

Automatic reclosing
Binary input signal


becomes involved.

forward Select this setting if the stage is to work in a forward direction (in the direction
of the line).
reverse Select this setting if the stage is to work in a reverse direction (in the direction
of the busbar).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Parameter: Directional comparison, Release via input signal
Default setting (_:8341:110) Directional comparison = no
Default setting (_:8341:112) Release via input signal = no

You use these parameters to define whether the stage is to be used for directional comparison protection.
Directional comparison protection is performed via the Direction and >Release delay & op. signals.
no The stage is not used for directional comparison protection.
yes If the Directional comparison parameter is set to yes, the Release
via input signal parameter, the Direction output signal, and the
>Release delay & op. input signal become available.
If the Release via input signal parameter is set to yes, the start of the
time delay, and therefore also the operate signal of the stage, are only enabled
if the >Release delay & op. input signal is active. The >Release delay
& op. input signal must be connected to the release information from the
opposite end (forward information from the Direction output signal); see also
the application example in chapter 6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional
Comparison Protection .
Parameter: Non-directional pickup
Recommended setting value (_:8341:113) Non-directional pickup = at volt.< &

mem.empty

at volt.< & Select this setting if the stage is to pick up in a non-directional manner if the
mem.empty voltage memory is empty and determining of direction has to be performed at
low voltages (3-phase close-up fault). An empty voltage memory may exist, for
example, if there is a voltage transformer at the line end and the CB trips.
no Select this setting if determining of direction is required under all circum-
stances, that is, even in the event of pickup on a 3-phase close-up fault.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The same considerations apply to setting the threshold value as for non-directional overcurrent protection.
Therefore, refer to chapter 6.16.4.2 Application and Setting Notes for further information.

NOTE
Default setting (_:8341:115) Additional time delay = 0.00 s

time delay.
curve.

dial parameter at 1 (default setting).
Parameter: Reset

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.18.5.3 Settings

General
_:2311:102 General:Rotation angle -180 to 180 45
of ref. volt.
Inverse-T 1
on
test
_:8161:111 Inverse-T 1:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
_:8161:113 Inverse-T 1:Non-direc- no at volt.< &
_:8161:110 Inverse-T 1:Directional no no
comparison yes
_:8161:112 Inverse-T 1:Release via no no
input signal yes
_:8161:10 Inverse-T 1:Blk. by no yes
settings yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
character. curve
the curve
disk emulation
time delay
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
_:8341:501 Inverse-T 1:>Release delay & op. SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:8341:301 Inverse-T 1:Direction ACD O
This stage is structured in the same way as the level with a directional, inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.

With the directional, user-defined characteristic curve, you can define the tripping curve point by point using
up to 30 value pairs of current and time. The device uses linear interpolation to calculate the characteristic
curve from these values. You can also define a dropout characteristic curve if you wish.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Figure 6-301 Pickup and Dropout Behavior when Using a Directional User-Defined Characteristic Curve
NOTE

This stage is structured in the same way as the level with a directional, inverse-time characteristic curve. The
only difference is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides applica-
tion and setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

NOTE

curve is required, leave the Time dial parameter set to 1.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Reset


NOTE
6.18.6.3 Settings

General
on
test
_:110 User curve #:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
_:11 User curve #:1-pole no no
operate allowed yes
_:112 User curve #:Non-direc- no at volt.< &
_:109 User curve #:Directional no no
comparison yes
_:111 User curve #:Release no no
via input signal yes
_:10 User curve #:Blk. by no yes
settings yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
disk emulation
Dyn.s: AR off/n.rdy
AR off/n.ready yes
blocked yes
Dyn.set: AR cycle 1
AR cycle 1 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 2
AR cycle 2 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: AR cycle 3
AR cycle 3 yes
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: AR cycle>3
AR cycle gr. 3 yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.s: Cold load PU
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Dyn.set: bin.input
binary input yes
blocked yes
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 7.500 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
User curve #
_:501 User curve #:>Release delay & op. SPS I
_:309 User curve #:Direction ACD O
General
Every phase has a separate direction-measuring element. If the threshold value in a phase is exceeded, the
direction determination is started for this phase. If there are multiphase short circuits, all measuring elements
involved perform direction determination independently. If one of the determined directions matches the set
direction, the stage picks up (see descriptions of the stage logic).
The direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between the short-circuit current and a reference
voltage.
Measurands for Direction Determining

The directional measuring element uses the short-circuit current of the phase concerned and the cross-polar-
ized phase-to-phase voltage (as the reference voltage) to determine the direction. This means that the direc-
tion can still be determined unambiguously and correctly, even if the short-circuit voltages collapse
completely when a 1 or 2-phase fault occurs (close-up fault).
The phase-to-phase voltages are calculated when phase-to-ground voltages are connected.
The cross-polarized voltage (reference voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-circuit voltages for 1-phase-
to-ground faults (Figure 6-302, left). For 2-phase short circuits, the position of the reference voltages changes
up to 30o, depending on the extent to which the short-circuit voltages collapse (Figure 6-302, right).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwdocp02-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-302 Cross-Polarized Voltages for Direction Determination
The following table shows how measurands are assigned for direction-determination purposes in the event of
different types of fault.
Table 6-10 Measurands for Direction Determining
Threshold-Value Measuring Element

A B C Ground
Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage Current Voltage
A IA VBC
B IB VCA
C IC VAB
Gnd Ir V0
A, Gnd VBC Ir V0
B, Gnd IB VCA Ir V0
C, Gnd IC VAB Ir V0
A, B IA VBC IB VCA
B, C IB VCA IC VAB
A, C IA VBC IC VAB
A, B, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA Ir V0
B, C, Gnd IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
A, C, Gnd IA VBC IC VAB Ir V0
A, B, C IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB
A, B, C, Gnd IA VBC IB VCA IC VAB Ir V0
Voltage Memory
Saved voltages are used if, when a 3-pole close-up fault occurs, the measuring voltages are not sufficient for
reliable direction determination. Insofar as and as long as no sufficient measuring voltage is available after
the storage time (2 s) has elapsed, the detected direction is retained. If the memory does not contain any
voltages (when closing onto a short circuit, for example), the behavior of the stage is defined using the Non-
directional pickup parameter.
As mentioned in the General section, the direction is determined by calculating the phase angle between
short-circuit current and reference voltage. To take different system conditions and applications into account,
the reference voltage can be rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt.
parameter). This moves the vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector of the short-circuit
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
current. Consequently, the result of direction determination is as reliable as possible. Figure 6-303 illustrates
the relationship based on a 1-phase ground fault in phase A. The short-circuit current IkA lags the short-circuit
voltage by the short-circuit angle k. The reference voltage, in this case VBC for measuring element A, is
rotated positively (counterclockwise) by the setting value of the Rotation angle of ref. volt. param-
eter. In the scenario illustrated here, the rotation is +45o.
[dwdocp03-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-303 Rotation of the Reference Voltage, Phase-Measuring Element
The rotated reference voltage defines the forward and reverse range; see Figure 6-304. The forward range is
calculated as 88o around the rotated reference voltage Vref,rot. If the short-circuit current vector is located in
this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the device decides on the back-
ward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
[dwdocp04-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-304 Forward Characteristic of the Directional Function, Phase-Measuring Element
Direction Determination for Test Purposes

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. The direction can be determined as soon
as current and voltage are greater than approx. 7 % of their secondary rated values.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.
Default setting (_:2311:102) Rotation angle of ref. volt.= 45o

The directional characteristic, that is, the position of the forward and reverse ranges, is set with the Rota-
tion angle of ref. volt. parameter. The short-circuit angle is typically to be found in a range from
30 to 60 inductive. Therefore, in most cases, the default setting of +45o can be retained to position the refer-
ence voltage, as it ensures a reliable directional result.
Some example settings for special applications appear in the following (Table 6-11). Please note that for
phase-to-ground faults (PG faults), the reference voltage (fault-free voltage) is vertical in relation to the short-
circuit voltage. This results in the following setting for the rotation angle:
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - sh phase-measuring elements (PG faults)
Please also note that for phase-to-phase faults, the reference voltage is rotated between 0 (distant fault) and
30o (close-up fault) dependent upon the collapse of the faulted voltage (see Figure 6-303). You can take this
into account with an average value of 15.
Rotation angle of ref. volt. = 90 - sh - 15o phase-measuring elements (PP faults)
Table 6-11 Example settings
Application sh typical Setting

Rotation angle of ref. volt.
60o Range 30o to 0o for PP faults
Selected: 15o

Selected: 45o

Selected: 45o
Input signal: >Test of direction

If you activate the binary input signal >Test of direction, the direction is determined and indicated even
without the current threshold being exceeded in one of the stages. This provides an easy means of checking
the direction during commissioning, without changing the threshold values of the stages.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The influence of other functions via dynamic settings is described in the sections 6.16.7.1 Description and
6.16.7.2 Application and Setting Notes (Application and Setting Notes).
6.18.9 Application Notes for Parallel Lines and Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends
Parallel Lines or Transformers

In parallel lines or transformers with infeed at one end (see Figure 6-305), if there is no directional measuring
element, a fault on feeder T1 will also trip the other feeder T2. In contrast, a directional measuring element in
the devices on busbar B prevents the tripping of the circuit-breaker in the parallel feeder. Therefore, in
Figure 6-305, directional time-overcurrent protection is used in the places marked with direction arrows.
Please note that the forward direction of the protection device represents the direction towards the object to
be protected. This does not have to be the same as the power direction of normal load flow.
Set time grading in opposition to the load flow with increasing time. As load can only flow in one direction, you
can set the directional devices without time delay.
[dwdocp05-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-305 Parallel Line with Transformers
Legend for Figure 6-305

Stage : Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time
Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends

Cable runs with infeed at both ends and lines connected to form ring topologies also require that you supple-
ment overcurrent protection with the directional criterion. Figure 6-306 shows a ring system implementation,
with the 2 infeeds shown merging in the ring to form a single infeed. For the directional devices whose
forward direction matches the power-flow direction, set time grading in opposition to the power flow with
increasing time. As power flow from both ends is possible, grading has to be set at both ends.
[dwdocp06-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-306 Cable Runs with Infeed at Both Ends
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Stage : Directional stage, forward direction set
Stage: Non-directional stage
T: Grading time
6.18.10 Application Notes for Directional Comparison Protection
The direction determination of directional time-overcurrent protection can be used to implement directional
comparison protection for cable runs with infeed at both ends. Directional comparison protection is used for
the selective isolation of a faulted line section (for example, subsections of closed rings). Sections are
isolated in fast time, that is, they do not suffer the disadvantage of long grading times.
This technique requires that directional information can be exchanged between the individual protection
stations. You can implement this information exchange using a communication channel (protection interface
or IEC 61850 GOOSE) or with pilot wires for signal transmission via an auxiliary voltage loop.
Protection Principle
The protection principle is shown in Figure 6-307. 2 devices (one at the start of the line and the other at the
end of the line) work together in each line section. The information fault in forward direction is transferred
between them. A directional definite time-overcurrent protection level is in operation in both devices in the
forward direction (1st level). However, this level is not enabled in the idle state. The level is only released
when the information fault in forward direction is received from the opposite end. If the enabled level also
defines the fault in the forward direction, the fault must be on this line section and the level trips immediately.
As this protection principle works with an enable procedure (and not with a blocking procedure), there is no
need to delay the level.
A second directional definite time-overcurrent protection stage with standard time grading works in parallel
with the first stage as a selective backup stage. This ensures full selectivity of protection in the following situa-
tions:
Infeed at one end or weak infeed at one end: In this case, no release signal is generated.
Failure of the communication route: In this case, the release signal is not transmitted.
To provide selective protection in fast time for busbars between the line sections also, you can combine this
protection principle with the principle of reverse interlocking. This principle is not discussed in further detail in
this document.
[dwdocp07-240611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-307 Selectivity through Directional Comparison Protection

Stage : Stage is set in the forward direction; stage 1 is instantaneous, stage 2 is graded
, : If a threshold value is exceeded, the stage indicates the direction (forward or reverse)
If you are using a communication channel, the protocol-transmission methods detect if the channel is inter-
rupted. If you are using pilot wires, we recommend operation based on a closed-circuit connection. The
device uses a function chart to check and indicate if the binary input is dead for an unexpectedly long period.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In contrast with the blocking procedure, overfunction is not possible if communication is lost. Therefore, a loss
of communication is not critical where this procedure is concerned, although it must be detected and indi-
cated.
Directional comparison protection can also be implemented as a blocking procedure. This procedure works
under all system switching states, i.e. also with infeed at one end (or weak infeed). However, to use it you
must delay the stage (typically by 100 ms) so that the blocking signal is received in time under all circum-
stances. It is also essential that you monitor the communication channel to avoid overfunction in the event of
failure followed by a system incident.
Configuration of the Stage, Function Chart

To configure the stage, proceed as follows:
The Directional mode parameter of both stages must be set to forward
The Directional comparison and Release via input signal parameters of the first stage
must be set to yes. This is so that the first stage is only released if the >Release delay & op. input
signal is active. Furthermore, the direction is indicated if a threshold value is exceeded.
The first stage can be set without a time delay. The second stage has to be graded
The information forward from the Direction signal in the first stage must be transmitted to the oppo-
site end. The routing is determined by the type of transmission
A function chart has to be implemented at the receive end to link the received (forward information)
and release signals, dependent upon the type of transmission.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.19 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping
The Instantaneous high-current tripping function has the following tasks:

Instantaneous tripping when switching onto an existing fault, for example, if a grounding switch is closed.
Instantaneous breaking of extremely high currents above the highest overcurrent protection stage.
Trips 1- or 3-pole.
The Instantaneous high-current tripping function offers 2 different increment types:

Stage with standard release method
Stage with release method via protection interface (only applicable if the device is equipped with a
protection interface)
The function with the stage for the standard release procedure is factory-set.
[dwihcstr-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.19.3 Standard Release Procedure
Logic
[lohlore1-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-309 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Standard Release Method
Activation
Using the (_:3961:101) Activation parameter, you set the conditions under which the stage is
released.
on CB closure
With this procedure, the stage is released only if the circuit breaker is about to be closed (the CB is open) or if
the circuit breaker is being closed or the binary input signal>release is active. The way signals are gener-
ated Rel. by CB switch on is described in section 5.1.4.7 Closure Detection .
always active
The stage is always released and is thus independent of closing of the circuit breaker switch and from the
binary input signal >release.
only with binary signal
The stage is released only if the binary input signal >release is active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Method of Measurement, Threshold Value

The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement.
component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold.
Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:

If the current exceeds a preset threshold value by
current 22threshold value
this stage will use unfiltered measurands in addition. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
Parameter: Activation
Recommended setting value (_:3961:101) Activation = on CB closure

Using the parameter Activation, you define the conditions under which the stage is released.
on CB closure Select this setting to activate the stage only when the circuit breaker is closed.
always active Select this setting to release the stage statically.
only with binary signal Select this setting to release the stage via an external signal.
Recommended setting value (_:3961:3) Threshold = 10.0 A for Irated = 1 A or 50.0

A for Irated = 5 A
The stage works independently of the position of the remote circuit breakers. For this reason, set the
Threshold so that the fault current flowing through does not trigger the stage. Thus, use this stage only if
current grading over the protected object is possible, that is, for transformers, shunt reactors or long lines with
low source impedance. In other cases, deactivate the stage.
EXAMPLE
Calculation example for current grading of a 110 kV overhead line measuring 150 mm2
s (length) = 100 km;
R1/s = 0.21 /km;
X1/s = 0.43 /km
Since the stage is non-directional, the calculation must consider the maximum short-circuit power at the start
of the line or at the opposite end:
Ssc" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, because the function can respond to the 1st peak value)
Current transformer: 600 A/5 A
The line impedance ZL and the minimum source impedance ZS are calculated on this basis:
[foglchzv-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The maximum 3-phase short-circuit current I"sc flowing through is (at a source voltage of 1.1 VN):
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[foglchik-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
With a safety margin of 10 %, the following setting value results:
[foglnste-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If short-circuit currents exceed 1,496 A (primary) or 12.5 A (secondary), there is a short circuit on the line to
be protected. It can be disconnected immediately.
NOTE
i The calculation was performed with absolute values, which is accurate enough for overhead lines. A
complex calculation is required only if the source impedance and the line impedance have extremely
different angles.

poles of the circuit breaker to open is not made, however, until central trip

The default setting of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain high-precision measurements, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold, you
stage.
6.19.5 Release Procedure via Protection Interface
This stage can be applied only if the device is equipped with a protection interface.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lohinre1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-310 Logic Diagram of Instantaneous High-Current Tripping with Release Procedure via Protection
Interface
Release
If the following conditions are fulfilled simultaneously, the stage is released (the internal Release signal is
present) (for further information, see Chapter 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions ):
No voltage has yet been applied to the protected object, which means that the remote circuit breakers
are open, or
switching to the local circuit breaker is immanent.

These conditions are recognized internally if a circuit breaker is open or just closed
Furthermore, the stage can be activated externally via the >release binary input signal.
NOTE
i To enable internal release of the stage, the devices at all ends of the protected object must be informed of
the circuit-breaker position (the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be connected to the devices; the
respective binary input signals must be jumpered).
Method of Measurement, Threshold Value

The stage works with 2 different methods of measurement.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

component numerically. A DC component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the fundamental compo-
nent is compared with the set threshold.
Weighting of the unfiltered measurand:

If the current exceeds a preset threshold value by
current 22threshold value
this stage will use unfiltered measurands in addition. Thus, very short tripping times are possible.
Recommended setting value (_:3961:3) Threshold = 2.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 12.5

A for Irated = 5 A
Select the value high enough for the protection not to pick up on the RMS value of the inrush current that
occurs when the local circuit breaker is closed. You do not have to consider short-circuit currents flowing
through, because the stage is released only if the circuit breakers are opened at all remote ends of the
protected object or the release was caused by the binary input >release.

Parameter value Description
poles of the circuit breaker to open is not made, however, until central trip

The default setting of 0.90 is sufficient for many applications. To obtain extremely accurate measurements,
the dropout ratio can be reduced. If you expect highly fluctuating measurands at the pickup threshold, you
can increase the dropout ratio. This avoids chattering of the tripping stage.
6.19.7 Settings

Standard 1
_:3961:1 Standard 1:Mode off on
on
test
_:3961:102 Standard 1:1-pole operate no yes
allowed yes
_:3961:101 Standard 1:Activation on CB closure on CB closure
only with binary signal
always active
_:3961:3 Standard 1:Threshold 1A 0.030 A to 100.000 A 10.000 A
5A 0.150 A to 500.000 A 50.000 A
_:3961:4 Standard 1:Dropout ratio 0.50 to 0.90 0.90
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Group indicat.
Standard 1
_:3961:500 Standard 1:>release SPS I
_:3961:81 Standard 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3961:54 Standard 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3961:52 Standard 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3961:53 Standard 1:Health ENS O
_:3961:300 Standard 1:Rel. by CB switch on ACT O
_:3961:55 Standard 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3961:57 Standard 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions
6.20.1 Description
The function block Group indications of the overcurrent protection functions uses the pickup and operate indi-
cations of the following functions:
Overcurrent protection, phases
Overcurrent protection, ground
Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases
Directional overcurrent protection, ground
Ground-fault protection for high-resistance ground faults in grounded systems
Instantaneous high-current tripping

The group indications of the overcurrent protection are generated by a logical OR of the stage-selective
pickup and operate indications of the functions listed above (see also Figure 6-311):
Pickup
Operate
The pickup and operate indications are output, where present, with direction information.
[loocgrin-240112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-311 Logic Diagram of the Overcurrent Protection Group Indications
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.21 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
6.21.1 Function Overview
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function (ANSI 50N/51N):

Detects and monitors the current measured in a transformer neutral point grounding
Can operate as sensitive tank leakage protection
Detects and monitors the circulating current between the neutral points of 2 capacitor banks
Switches off high-current faults instantaneously
The Overcurrent protection, 1-phase function is used in protection function groups with 1-phase current
measurement. 2 function types are offered:
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase advanced (50N/51N OC-1ph-A)
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase basic (50N/51N OC-1ph-B)
The function type Basic is provided for standard applications. The function type Advanced offers more func-
tionality and is provided for more complex applications.
Both function types are pre-configured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite time-overcurrent protection stages
and with 1 Inverse time-overcurrent protection stage.
In the function type Overcurrent protection, 1-phase advanced the following stages can be operated simul-
taneously:
Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection (UMZ)
1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection (AMZ)
1 stage User-defined characteristic curve overcurrent protection
1 Fast stage
In the function type Time-Overcurrent protection, 1-phase basic, the following stages can operate simulta-
neously:
Maximum of 3 stages Definite time-overcurrent protection
1 stage Inverse time-overcurrent protection
The non-preconfigured stages in Figure 6-312 and Figure 6-313 are shown in gray. Apart from the operate-
delay characteristic curve, the Definite time-overcurrent protection stage, the Inverse time-overcurrent protec-
tion stage, and the User-defined characteristic curve time-overcurrent protection stage are structured identi-
cally.
The Fast stage uses a fast tripping algorithm. It is therefore suited in particular for sensitive ground-fault
detection according to the high-impedance principle.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwocp1pa-280113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-312 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Advanced
[dwocp1pb-310113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-313 Structure/Embedding the Function Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase Basic
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, you can stabilize the stages against
issuing of the operate indication due to transformer inrush-currents.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[loinvocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-314 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Method of measurement

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The picked up stage can reset completely via the binary input signal >Block stage.

also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can block the operate indication of the stage
for a threshold-value violation due to the inrush current. In case of a blocking, the stage picks up. The start of
the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function signals this through a corresponding indi-
cation. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is
started. When complete, the stage generates an operate indication. The blocking can only be set if the central
function Inrush-current detection is effective.
Blocking of tripping with the Inrush-current detection function is possible only if the following conditions have
been met:
The central Inrush-current detection function has to be available in another protection function group
with 3-phase current measurement.
You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree Name of the device Function group connections.
Related Topics

Default setting (_:12661:3) Threshold = 1.200 A (for the first stage)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.21.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
on
test
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay
Definite-T 2
on
test
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Definite-T 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[lodefocp-270612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-315 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection (1-Phase)
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve according to IEC and ANSI
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015


The picked up stage can reset completely via the binary input signal >Block stage.

also tripping. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is reported and a fault is opened.

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you can block the operate indication of the stage
for a threshold-value violation due to the inrush current. In case of a blocking, the stage picks up. The start of
the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function signals this through a corresponding indi-
cation. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the stage is still exceeded, the time delay is
started. When complete, the stage generates an operate indication.
Blocking of tripping with the Inrush-current detection function is possible only if the following conditions have
been met:
The central Inrush-current detection function has to be available in another protection function group
with 3-phase current measurement.
You have to connect the protection function group with 1-phase current measurement to the protection
function group with 3-phase current measurement. You connect protection function groups in the
DIGSI 5 Project Tree Name of the device Function group connections.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015



Parameter: Reset

6.21.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T 1
on
test
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.200 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.000 A
character. curve
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

disk emulation

(Type)
Group indicat.
Inverse-T 1
The User-defined characteristic curve time-overcurrent protection stage is only available in the advanced
function type.
ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired.


Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE

ence is that you can define the characteristic curve as desired. This chapter only provides application and
setting notes for setting characteristic curves.

NOTE

dial parameter at 1.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Reset
Default setting Reset = disk emulation


NOTE
6.21.5.3 Settings

General
on
test
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.00 A
disk emulation

(Type)
User curve #
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.22 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V) function:

Detects short circuits affecting electric equipment
Can be used for special network conditions where the overcurrent pickup level should be decreased
depending on the fault voltage
Can be used for generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals and the
overcurrent pickup should be kept depending on the fault voltages
The Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with 3-phase
current and voltage measurement.
The function Voltage-dependent overcurrent protection comes with the following factory-set stages:
Voltage-dependent stage
Definite-time, undervoltage seal-in stage
In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent voltage-dependent stages
A maximum of 2 inverse-time overcurrent voltage-released stages
A maximum of 2 definite-time overcurrent undervoltage seal-in stages
A maximum of 2 voltage-released definite-time overcurrent undervoltage seal-in stages
[dwstuvol-210713-03_Release.vsd, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.22.3 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Dependent
Logic of the Stage
[lovoldep-210713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-318 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent, Voltage-Dependent
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measurement of the fundamental comp.:


Voltage-Dependent Pickup Threshold

The pickup threshold of the overcurrent stage depends on the voltage magnitude. A lower voltage decreases
the current pickup value (see Figure 6-319). In the range between V/Vrated = 1.00 to 0.25 a linear, directly
proportional dependence is realized.
[dwvolpic-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-319 Voltage Influence of the Pickup Threshold
With:
V = Measured phase-to-phase voltage
Vrated = Rated voltage (parameter Rated voltage in the function block General of the protec-
tion function group)
PU sett. = Pickup threshold setting (parameter address: _11491:3)
PU(V) = Applied pickup threshold according to the voltage influence
The minimum current pickup threshold value is 0.03 * Irated. This value cannot be decreased any further
even not by voltage-dependent pickup threshold factor.
Decreasing the pickup threshold is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to current-
carrying phases is shown in Table 6-12.
Table 6-12 Controlling Voltages in Relation to the Fault Current
Current Controlling Voltage

IA VAB
IB VBC
IC VCA
Pickup and Dropout Behavior of the Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve According to IEC and ANSI
is processed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
When the measured value falls below the pickup value by 1.045 times (0.95 x 1.1 x threshold value), the
dropout is started. The pickup will be indicated as clearing. You can influence the dropout behavior via setting
parameters. You can select between instantaneous dropout (totalized time is deleted) or dropout according to
the characteristic curve (reduction of totalized time depending on the characteristic curve). The dropout
according to the characteristic curve (disk emulation) is the same as turning back a rotor disk. The weighted
reduction of the time is started from 0.9 of the set threshold value.
The characteristic curve and associated formulas are shown in the Technical data.
Influence On the Operate Curve

The current pickup threshold is decreased proportional to the voltage decrease. Consequently, for a constant
current I the I/Threshold-value ratio is increased and the operate time is reduced. Compared with the
standard curves represented in the Technical Data, the operate curve shifts to the left side as the voltage
decreases.
Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

In case of a measuring-voltage failure detection the input voltage value is automatically set to Vrated, so that
the pickup threshold factor will be 1.

Blocking of the Operate Delay and the Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

no The transformer inrush-current detection does not affect the stage. Select
this setting in the following cases:
transformer. This applies, for example, to the high-current stage that
is set according to the short-circuit voltage Vsc of the transformer in
such a way that the stage only picks up on faults from the high-
voltage side. The transformer-inrush current cannot become larger
than the maximum transmittable short-circuit current.
yes When the transformer inrush-current detection detects an inrush current
transformer.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

You use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses thefundamental
Siemens recommends using this method as the standard process.
harmonics into account (for example at capacitor banks).

The recommended setting value of 1.500 A is suitable for most applications.
protection.
Set the Threshold parameter for lines to approx.10 %, for transformers and motors to approx. 20 % above
the maximum expected load.
Parameter Type of character. curve

Parameter: Reset

The Reset parameter allows you to define whether the stage decreases according to the dropout character-
istic curve (behavior of a disk emulation = rotor disc) or instantaneously.
instantaneous Select this setting if the dropout does not have to be performed after a disk
emulation and an instantaneous dropout is desired instead.

You can use the Time dial parameter to displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
The setting value for the Time dial parameter is derived from the time-grading chart that has been
prepared for the electrical power system.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.22.4 Stage with Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Voltage-Released
Logic of the Stage
[lovolrel-210713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-320 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overcurrent, Voltage-Released
This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage (see
chapter 6.22.3.1 Description). The only differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the
operate curve.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measuring-Element Release
When the controlling voltage drops below the setting Undervoltage threshold, the respective measuring
element is released.
The release of the measuring elements is carried out phase-selectively. The assignment of voltages to
current-carrying phases is shown in Figure 6-319.
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The stage can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the picked up stage is
reset. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function

This stage is structured in the same way as the Inverse time-overcurrent, voltage-dependent stage. The only
differences are the conditions for the pickup and the influence on the operate curve. This chapter only
provides the application and setting notes for the setting Blk. by meas.-volt. failure and Under-
voltage threshold. For guidance on the other parameters of this stage, refer to chapter 6.22.3.2 Applica-
tion and Setting Notes.
Recommended setting value (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

You can use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if one of the following 2 conditions is met:
The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.
The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is connected to
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.

no The overcurrent-protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage
failure is detected.
yes The overcurrent-protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage
failure is detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as
correct operation of the stage cannot be guaranteed if a measuring-voltage
failure occurs.
Parameter: Undervoltage threshold
Default setting (_:104) Undervoltage threshold = 75.0 V

When the controlling voltage is below the set value, the inverse time-overcurrent stage is released.
The parameter is set to a value just below the lowest phase-to-phase voltage admissible during operation, for
example, from 75 % to 80 % of Vrated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.22.5 Stage with Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage Seal-in
Logic of the Stage
[lo_Seal-in_20150215, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-321 Logic Diagram of the Definite-Time Overcurrent, Undervoltage Seal-in
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short-circuit fault.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-
seal-in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal-in with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Undervoltage seal-in can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the
pickup signal Pickup I>+V-seal-in drops out immediately. The following blocking options are available
for the Undervoltage seal-in:
From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in remains unaffected if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure
is switched off.
Default setting (_:16951:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

With the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked, you can block the operate indication, the fault
recording, and the fault log.

The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current.
Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate delay time is set. Set the
Threshold parameter for generators to a value between 20 % and 30 %, for transformers and motors
approx. 40 % above the expected peak load.

The parameter Operate delay must be coordinated with the time grading of the network protection to guar-
antee the selectivity. Practical time delays are between 1 s to 2 s.
Default setting (_:16951:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you can activate (yes) or deactivate (no) the
blocking by the Measuring voltage failure detection function. The recommended setting is the default setting.
Parameter: State of V-seal-in
Default setting (_:16951:101) State of V-seal-in = off

With the parameter State of V-seal-in, the seal-in functionality can be activated (switched on).
Siemens recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator.
Default setting (_:16951:102) V-seal-in threshold = 46.2 V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The V-seal-in threshold (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage admissible during an operation, for example 80 % of the rated voltage of a generator. The positive-
sequence voltage is evaluated. The practicable value for a voltage transformer with a rated secondary
voltage of 100 V is 46.2 V.
The following table shows an example of a specification:
Threshold 1.4 * Irated, Gen
Operate delay 3.00 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 * Vrated, Gen
Duration of V-seal-in time 4.00 s
Dropout ratio 0.95
Rated current Irated, Gen 483 A Rated voltage Vrated, Gen 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, prim 500 A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, sec 1A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, sec 100 V
The following secondary setting values result from this specification:
[fo_OCP_UVSI_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP_UVSI_Seal-in, 1, en_US]
Default setting (_:16951:104) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s

The parameter Duration of V-seal-in time limits the pickup seal-in induced by an overcurrent or
undervoltage. The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay. The difference
shall be greater than 0.5 s. In the default setting, a difference of 1 s is used.
6.22.5.3 Settings

V-seal-in 1
_:16951:1 V-seal-in 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:16951:2 V-seal-in 1:Operate & no no
_:16951:3 V-seal-in 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.75 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 6.75 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.750 A
_:16951:6 V-seal-in 1:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay
_:16951:10 V-seal-in 1:Blk. by no yes
_:16951:101 V-seal-in 1:State of V- off off
seal-in on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:16951:102 V-seal-in 1:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.019 V
threshold
_:16951:104 V-seal-in 1:Duration of 0.10 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
V-seal-in time

(Type)
V-seal-in 1
_:16951:81 V-seal-in 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:16951:500 V-seal-in 1:>Block V-seal-in SPS I
_:16951:52 V-seal-in 1:Behavior ENS O
_:16951:53 V-seal-in 1:Health ENS O
_:16951:54 V-seal-in 1:Inactive SPS O
_:16951:55 V-seal-in 1:Pickup ACD O
_:16951:300 V-seal-in 1:Pickup I>+V-seal-in SPS O
_:16951:56 V-seal-in 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:16951:57 V-seal-in 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.22.6 Stage with Voltage-Released Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Undervoltage

Seal-in
Logic of the Stage
[lo_Seal-in_Rel20150215, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-322 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Released Definite-Time Overcurrent, Undervoltage Seal-in Part
1
Signal 4 in the following figure refers to Figure 6-322.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_Seal-in_Rel2, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-323 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Released Definite-Time Overcurrent, Undervoltage Seal-in Part
2
Voltage Release
In addition to the current criterion with undervoltage seal-in, a voltage-released logic must be present to issue
the indication Pickup. The voltage-released logic monitors the negative-sequence voltage and phase-to-
phase voltages respectively for detecting unsymmetrical faults and symmetrical faults. With the voltage-
released logic, the setting value of the parameter Threshold can be reduced in a certain range and the reli-
ability and sensibility of this function can be improved correspondingly.
Undervoltage Seal-In
In generators where the excitation voltage is derived from the machine terminals, the short-circuit current
decreases quickly in the event of close-in faults (for example, in a generator or a generator-transformer
range). The current decreases to a value below the current threshold within a few seconds because of the
absence of the excitation voltage. To avoid a dropout of the relay, the positive-sequence voltages are used as
an additional criterion for detecting a short-circuit fault.
The pickup signal is maintained for a settable seal-in time Duration of V-seal-in time, if the positive-
sequence voltage falls below a settable threshold V-seal-in threshold after an overcurrent pickup, even
if the current falls below the threshold again. If the voltage recovers before the seal-in time has elapsed, or if
the undervoltage seal-in is blocked via a binary input >Block V-seal-in, the signal Pickup I>+V-
seal-in drops out immediately.
You can switch off the undervoltage seal-in via the parameter State of V-seal-in.
Blocking of the Undervoltage Seal-in with Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Undervoltage seal-in can be blocked if a measuring-voltage failure occurs. In case of a blocking, the
pickup signal Pickup I>+V-seal-in drops out immediately. The following blocking options are available
for the Undervoltage seal-in:
From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function.
From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block VT miniature CB, which
The parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure can be used to control the measuring-voltage failure
detection. The Undervoltage seal-in ramains unaffectecd if the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure is switched off.
Default setting (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no

recording, and the fault log.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 1.350 A

The setting is mainly determined by the maximum operating current.
Pickup by overload must be excluded since the protection may trip if a short operate delay time is set. Set the
Threshold parameter for generators to a value between 20 % and 30 %, for transformers and motors
approx. 40 % above the expected peak load.
Default setting (_:6) Operate delay = 3.00 s

The parameter Operate delay must be coordinated with the time grading of the network protection to guar-
antee the selectivity. Practical time delays are between 1 s to 2 s.
Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

With the parameter Blk. by meas.-volt. failure, you can activate (yes) or deactivate (no) the
blocking by the Measuring voltage failure detection function. The recommended setting is the default setting.
Parameter: State of V-seal-in
Default setting (_:101) State of V-seal-in = off

With the parameter State of V-seal-in, the seal-in functionality can be activated (switched on).
Siemens recommends this setting if the excitation transformer is connected to the main lead of the generator.
Default setting (_:102) V-seal-in threshold = 46.2 V

The V-seal-in threshold (positive-sequence voltage) is set to a value below the lowest phase-to-phase
voltage admissible during an operation, for example 80 % of the rated voltage of a generator. The positive-
sequence voltage is evaluated. The practicable value for a voltage transformer with a rated secondary
voltage of 100 V is 46.2 V.
The following table shows an example of a specification:
Threshold 1.4 * Irated, Gen
Operate delay 3.00 s
Undervoltage seal-in 0.8 * Vrated, Gen
Duration of V-seal-in time 4.00 s
Dropout ratio 0.95
Rated current Irated, Gen 483 A Rated voltage Vrated, Gen 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, prim 500 A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, prim 6.3 kV
Rated current Irated, VT, sec 1A Rated voltage Vrated, VT, sec 100 V
The following secondary setting values result from this specification:
[fo_OCP_UVSI_threshold, 1, en_US]
[fo_OCP_UVSI_Seal-in, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:104) Duration of V-seal-in time = 4.00 s

The parameter Duration of V-seal-in time limits the pickup seal-in induced by an overcurrent or
undervoltage. The value must be set higher than the value of the parameter Operate delay. The difference
shall be greater than 0.5 s. In the default setting, a difference of 1 s is used.
Parameter: Vph-ph< threshold
Default setting (_:105) Vph-ph< threshold = 60.000 V

With the parameter Vph-ph< threshold, you can set the threshold at which the output signal Voltage
release is activated when the minimum phase-to-phase voltage falls below this threshold.
Parameter: V2> threshold
Default setting (_:106) V2> threshold = 4.600 V

With the parameter V2> threshold, you can set the threshold at which the output signal Voltage
release is issued when V2 exceeds the threshold.
6.22.6.3 Settings

Vseal-in+Vrel#
_:1 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate no no
_:3 Vseal-in 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
+Vrel#:Threshold 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 6.750 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 6.750 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.350 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 6.750 A
_:6 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
delay
_:10 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Blk. by no yes
_:101 Vseal-in+Vrel#:State of off off
V-seal-in on
_:102 Vseal-in+Vrel#:V-seal-in 0.300 V to 175.000 V 46.200 V
threshold
_:104 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Duration 0.10 s to 60.00 s 4.00 s
of V-seal-in time
_:105 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Vph-ph< 0.300 V to 175.000 V 60.000 V
threshold
_:106 Vseal-in+Vrel#:V2> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 4.600 V
threshold
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Vseal-in+Vrel#
_:81 Vseal-in+Vrel#:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 Vseal-in+Vrel#:>Block V-seal-in SPS I
_:52 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Health ENS O
_:54 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Inactive SPS O
_:55 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Pickup ACD O
_:300 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Pickup I>+V-seal-in SPS O
_:301 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Voltage release SPS O
_:56 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Vseal-in+Vrel#:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection
2 functions are available for ground-fault detection: A directional one that is used if, in addition to the zero-
sequence current 3I0, the zero-sequence voltage V0 is also available, and a non-directional one that is used
if only the zero-sequence current 3I0 is available.
The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection (ANSI 67Ns, 59N) serves:
For directional detection of permanent ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
For directional detection of fast extinguishing transient ground faults in isolated or resonant-grounded
systems
For determination of the faulty phase
For detection of high-resistance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-resistance (semi-solidly)

grounded systems
The Non-directional sensitive ground-current protection (ANSI 50Ns/51Ns) serves:
For ground-fault detection in isolated or resonant-grounded systems
For detection of high-resistance ground faults in effectively (solidly) or low-resistance (semi-solidly)
grounded systems
Directional Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection

The Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function can be used in protection function groups that make
current and voltage zero-sequence systems (3I0 and V0) available. The function is preconfigured at the
factory with a V0> stage, a directional 3I0> stage with cos or sin measurement, and a transient ground-
fault stage.
The following stages can be operated simultaneously within the function:
2 V0> stages with determination of the faulty phase
4 directional 3I0> stages with cos or sin measurement
2 directional transient ground-fault stages
4 directional 3I0> stages with (V0, 3I0) measurement
4 directional Y0> stages with G0 or B0 measurement (admittance method)
2 directional stages for Spanish specification
4 non-directional 3I0> stages
2 non-directional Y0> stages

The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
Pickup
Operate indication
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[DwStrGFP-250113-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-324 Structure/Embedding of the Directional Function in Protection Function Groups
Sensitive Ground-Current Protection

The Sensitive ground-current protection function can be used in protection function groups that only make the
zero-sequence system (3I0) available. The function is preconfigured at the factory with a non-directional 3I0>
stage.
4 non-directional 3I0> stages and 2 non-directional Y0> stages can be operated simultaneously in the func-
tion.
The general functionality works across stages on the function level.
The group-indications output logic generates the following group indications of the entire function by the
logical OR from the stage-selective indications:
Pickup
Operate indication
[DwSGFPu4-230113-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-325 Structure/Embedding of the Non-Directional Function in Protection Function Groups
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[LoGFPger-280113-01, 3, en_US]
[logfpnon-261012-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-326 Logic Diagram of the Cross-Stage Functionality of the Non-Directional Function
Operational Measured Value (I,V)

The function block calculates the angle between IN and V0 and makes the angle available as function meas-
ured value Phi(I,V).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[DwPhINU0, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-327 Sign Definition for the Measured Value
Fault-Extinction Detection
The extinction of the fault is characterized by the fact that the zero-sequence voltage subsides. Depending on
the system conditions and fault characteristics, this process can last several 100 ms. If a continuously falling
zero-sequence voltage is detected during the set time Decay time V0 , then the fault is considered extin-
guished. The signal Flt. extinction det. is issued.
Thus, the possibility exists, for example, to block the 3I0> stage with cos or sin measurement directly
after the fault extinction, in order to avoid an overfunction during the subsiding process with a very sensitive
setting of the stage.
Angle-Error Compensation
The high reactive power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air-gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core
balance current transformer. Using the characteristic shown in the following figure, the device approaches the
angle error of the core balance current transformer with sufficient precision.
[dwerdwdl-110512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-328 Correction of the Transmission Characteristic Curve of a Core Balance Current Transformer
Ground-Fault Indication, Stabilization at Intermittent Ground Fault

The indication (_:302) Ground fault indicates the ground fault and manages the ground-fault log (see
Ground-Fault Log, Page 872 ). The corresponding information of the stages used is accessed for the gener-
ation of this indication.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The indication Ground fault contains the direction information, independent of the parameterized working
direction of a stage. The indication is thus suited for transfer to a station.
To avoid a flood of indications in case of an intermittent ground fault, a maximum of 30 state changes of this
indication is logged per ground fault. An intermittent ground fault must be treated as a ground fault so that the
stabilization can take action. This is ensured with the parameter Dropout delay , by the dropout of the
indication Ground fault being delayed. If the next ignition of the ground fault takes place during the
dropout delay, the indication does not drop out and the log remains open.
NOTE
i The Ground fault indication in the General stage must be routed to the ground-fault log. If not, you can
meet an overflow of the ground-fault log when an intermittent ground fault occurs.
Ground-Fault Log
Ground faults can be recorded in a designated buffer, the ground-fault log. As long as the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked parameter is set to yes , all indications routed into the ground-fault log are written in
the ground-fault log.
The criterion for opening the ground-fault log is the raising of any indication which is routed to the ground-fault
log, for example, the indication Ground fault. The criterion for closing is the clearing of all routed indica-
tions.
Related Topics
You can find general notes on the ground-fault log in chapter Indications under 3.1.5.4 Ground-Fault Log .
Value Indications
If the following value indications can be calculated, they are written into the log (ground-fault log or fault log)
at the time of the 1st raising ground-fault indication and the 1st operate indication of any stage.
3I0 (value)
3I0 active component
3I0 reactive component
V0
(IN, V0)
Indication: Ground fault

To indicate the ground fault and its direction via the protocol, Siemens recommends using the indication (_:
302) Ground fault. The indication contains the direction information, independent of the parameterized
working direction of a stage. And this indication is also stabilized against a flood of indications in case of an
intermittent ground fault.
Parameter: Decay time V0
Recommended setting value (_:101) Decay time V0 = 0.10 s

With the Decay time V0 parameter, you specify the time slot for the detection of a fault extinction. If V0
continuously falls within this time, fault extinction is detected and the indication Flt. extinction det. is
issued.
Recommended setting value (_:102) Dropout delay = 1.00 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
To avoid chattering of the indication Ground fault during an intermittent ground fault and thus a frequent
opening and closing of the ground-fault log, the dropout of the indication Ground fault (and thus the
closing of the log) can be delayed by the Dropout delay.
Using the default setting ensures that no flood of indications arises in case of an intermittent ground fault for
the indication Ground fault. The intermittent ground fault is then treated as a ground fault, and the stabili-
zation of the indication Ground fault can thus take action.
Angle-Error Compensation of the Core Balance Current Transformer
Default setting (_:103) Core balance CT- current 1 = 0.050 A
Default setting (_:104) Core balance CT- current 2 = 1.000 A
Default setting (_:105) CT angle error at I1 = 0.0
Default setting (_:106) CT angle error at I2 = 0.0

The high reactive-power factor in the arc-suppression-coil-ground system and the unavoidable air gap of the
core balance current transformer often make necessary a compensation of the angle error of the core
balance current transformer. For the burden actually connected, the maximum angle error CT angle error
at I1 and the corresponding secondary current Core balance CT- current 1 as well as a further
operating point CT angle error at I2/Core balance CT- current 2 are entered, from which point
the angle error no longer changes appreciably.
In the isolated or grounded system, angle compensation is not necessary.
6.23.3.3 Settings

General
_:101 General:Decay time V0 0.06 s to 0.20 s 0.10 s
_:102 General:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
_:103 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
CT- current 1 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 0.250 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:104 General:Core balance 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
CT- current 2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 5.000 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:105 General:CT angle error 0.0 to 5.0 0.0
at I1
_:106 General:CT angle error 0.0 to 5.0 0.0
at I2

(Type)
General
_:302 General:Ground fault ACD O
_:303 General:Flt. extinction det. SPS O
_:309 General:Pos. measuring window SPS O
_:301 General:Phi(I,V) MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.4 Stage with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Logic
[logfpsv0-291112-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-329 Logic Diagram of an Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
Stage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement

The device measures the residual voltage at the broken-delta winding. The measured voltage is converted to
the zero-sequence voltage V0. If the residual voltage is not available to the device as a measurand, the zero-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
sequence voltage V0 is calculated from the measured phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC using the
defining equation.
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application:
Measurement of the fundamental component (standard filter):
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental
Measurement of the RMS value (true RMS):

This method of measurement determines the voltage amplitude from the sampled values according to
the defining equation of the RMS value.
Measurement of the fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window:
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
11.29.2 Overvoltage Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence System/Residual Voltage ).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the Threshold with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter, you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the Threshold.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

With the Detection of faulty phase parameter, you can enable or disable the determination of the
ground-fault phase. Determining is released when the stage picks up. If 2 phases exceed the threshold value
V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and one phase falls below the threshold value V< faulty ph-to-gnd
volt., the last phase is determined to be faulty and is signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function. The Blk. by meas.-
volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or
does not block it.
From an external source via the binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by
meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the
stage or not.

You can block the operate indication, the fault recording, and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
Recommended setting value (_:8) Method of measurement = fundamental comp.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Method of measurement parameter allows you to define whether the function works with the funda-
mental component or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
RMS value Select this method of measurement if you want the stage to take harmonics
into account (for example at capacitor banks).
fund. comp. long filter To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient faults,
select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length of the filter is
longer than that of the standard filter.
Please note that in this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly
(see 11.29.2 Overvoltage Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence System/
Residual Voltage ).
Parameter: Pickup delay
Recommended setting value (_:107) Pickup delay = 0 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0 ms.
Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 30 V

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. Siemens recommends setting the value between
20 V and 40 V. A higher sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
Siemens recommends setting a more sensitive (smaller) value in grounded systems. This value must be
higher than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
EXAMPLE
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0,5 57.7 V = 28.9 V 30 V
Recommended setting value (_:4) Dropout ratio = 0.95

The recommended setting value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

The device-internal supervision function Measuring-voltage failure detection is configured and enabled.
The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is
linked with the voltage transformer circuit breaker.

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting). Siemens recommends
using the default setting.
no The protection stage is not blocked.
Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
Default setting (_:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the stage responds to determine which
phase is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the stage to detect
ground faults, for example for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage, the device tries to determine which
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
Default setting (_:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V

Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 30 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
Default setting (_:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V

Set the threshold value for the 2 healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground measurand.
The set value must be above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 70
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 70 V.
Operation as Supervision Function

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, the generation of the operate indication and fault logging
can be disabled via the (_:2) Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.4.3 Settings

V0> #
_:1 V0> #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 V0> #:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:10 V0> #:Blk. by meas.-volt. no yes
failure yes
_:109 V0> #:Detection of faulty no no
phase yes
_:8 V0> #:Method of measure- fundamental comp. fundamental
ment fund. comp. long filter comp.
RMS value
_:3 V0> #:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
_:4 V0> #:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:107 V0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 V0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 3.00 s
_:101 V0> #:V> healthy ph-to-gnd 0.300 V to 200.000 V 70.000 V
volt.
_:104 V0> #:V< faulty ph-to-gnd 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
volt.

(Type)
V0> #
_:81 V0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 V0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V0> #:Health ENS O
_:300 V0> #:Faulty phase ACT O
_:55 V0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 V0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 V0> #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.5 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with cos or sin Measurement
Logic
[logfp3i0stufe-280314-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-330 Logic Diagram of the Stage Control
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[logfp3i0f-280314-01, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-331 Logic Diagram of the Function
Measured Value V0, Method of Measurement

defining equation.
This method of measurement processes the sampled voltage values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement

The function usually evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current trans-
former. Since the linearity range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary
ground currents, the function switches to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a
very large linearity and settings range.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Depending on the setting of the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph as well as the
current terminal block used, the following different linearity and settings ranges result in addition to the usual
application:
Setting Value Connection 3I0 Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Type of the Measuring Point Settings Range
I-3ph (Secondary) 13
3-phase + IN separate 14 Measured 3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
3-phase + IN 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
3-phase Calculates 4 x protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 x protection, 1 x sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 x measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
With the use of the function within a 1-phase function group and therefore at a 1-phase measuring point
I-1ph, the following different linearity and settings ranges result:
Measuring Point I-1ph 3I0 Current Terminal Block 3I0 Threshold Value
Settings Range
(Secondary) 15
Measured Sensitive 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
The method of measurement processes the sampled current values and filters out the fundamental compo-
nent numerically.
The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to harmonics, espe-
cially the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (leakage) current.
Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value and
the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0> threshold value,
the stage recognizes the ground fault. The direction determination (see the next paragraph) is started when
the V0 threshold value is exceeded. The direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the
General function block). If the direction result equals the parameterized direction (parameter Directional
mode), the stage picks up.
Exceeding the threshold values by the zero-sequence voltage V0 is a criterion for the ground fault. The direc-
tion determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. deter-
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result form the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
cos- direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight lines from 0 (parameter
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-
suppression-coil-ground system where the variable 3I0 cos is decisive for the direction determination.
13 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.
14 Usual application
15 These values apply for a secondary rated current of 1 A. The values need to be multiplied by 5 when the secondary rated current is 5
A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwcosphi-171012-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-332 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Cos Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is basically the reference value for the real axis. The axis of symmetry of the
direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0react axis for this example. For the direction determina-
tion, basically the portion of the current vertical to the set direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is
decisive (3I0 dir.). In this example, this is the active portion 3l0active of the current 3l0. The current 3l0dir.
(here = 3I0active) is calculated and compared with the setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. If
the current 3I0 dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is forward. If the current 3I0 dir. exceeds
the negative setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the 1 reduction dir. area and 2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in the figure. With this, the direction determination is secured in case
of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle correction parameter) in a range of 45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45 turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a rotation of +45.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwphicor-171012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-333 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with Cos Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to sin and the correction parameter to 0, the
symmetry axis of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the 3I0active axis and the V0 axis. Since
the portion of the current vertical to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (3l0dir.),
here, the current 3l0react is included in the direction determination. If the current 3l0dir. (here, =3I0react)
exceeds the negative setting value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., the direction is forward. If the
current 3l0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range in between, the
direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwsinphi-011112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-334 Direction-Characteristic Curve with Sin Measurement
Blocking the Stage via Binary Input Signal

You can block the stage externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the event of
blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.
Blocking the Stage in Case of Measuring-Voltage Failure

will be reset.
The following blocking options are available for the stage:
From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer
circuit breaker, which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection
Blocking the Pickup with Detection of the Fault Extinction

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the Blk.
after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault extinc-
tion.
Blocking the Time Delay

also the operate indication. A running time delay is reset. The pickup is indicated and a fault record is
opened.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Blocking the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter allows you to define whether the operate indication of
the stage should be blocked by exceeding of the threshold values due to an inrush current. In case of a
blocking and fulfilled pickup conditions, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indica-
tion are blocked. The function indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and
the pickup conditions are still met, the time delay is started.


The binary input signal >Open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is linked with the
voltage transformer circuit breaker.

Recommended setting value (_:27) Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. = no

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect.parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
detection of an inrush current.
Siemens recommends disabling the blocking. The fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage is a
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by an enabling procedure.
Parameter: Blk. after fault extinction
Recommended setting value (_:110) Blk. after fault extinction = yes

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection of
the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

When a fault is detected, the selection of the parameter Directional mode defines whether the pickup of
the stage occurs in forward or backward direction.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, correction, Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det., 3I0> threshold
value
Default setting (_:109) Dir. measuring method = cos
Default setting (_:107) correction = 0.0
Default setting (_:102) Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. = 0.030 A
Default setting (_:101) 3I0> threshold value = 0.050 A

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only a portion of the current vertical to the set direction-
characteristic curve (3I0dir.) is decisive, refer to 6.23.5.1 Description. This portion of the current is compared
to the threshold value Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det.. In contrast, the absolute value of the current 3I0
is compared with the 3I0> threshold value parameter.
System Type/ Description
Neutral-Point Treat-
ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt leakage current 3I0 cos of the
arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt leakage current, set the parameters as follows:
Dir. measuring method = cos
correction = 0.0
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger capacitive or inductive reactive current is superimposed on the small watt
leakage current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the fault evalu-
ation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary considerably in its
values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device should only
evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle meas-
urement of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Min.polar.
3I0> for dir.det. parameter, the rule of thumb is: Set the pickup value only to
half of the expected measuring current as only the watt leakage current can be put into
use.
The 3I0> threshold value parameter can also be set to half of the expected
measuring current, whereby here the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 sin is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
Dir. measuring method = sin
correction = 0.0
In an isolated system, the capacitive ground-fault currents of the entire electrically
connected system flow through the measuring point in case of a ground fault. The
ground current of the faulty feeder is compensated in the measuring point. As the
pickup value of the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold
value parameters, select about half of this capacitive ground-fault current flowing via
the measuring point.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

ment
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is deci-
Grounded sive for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
Dir. measuring method = cos
correction = -45.0
Set the Min.polar.3I0> for dir.det. and 3I0> threshold value parame-
ters to a value below the minimum ground-fault current to be expected.
Parameter: 1 reduction dir. area, 2 reduction dir. area
Recommended setting value (_:105) 1 reduction dir. area = 2

With the 1 reduction dir. area and 2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2.
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to
set a somewhat larger angle 1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.

The V0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the zero-sequence voltage sensitivity of the stage.
Set the threshold value smaller than the minimum absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 that must
still be detected.
Parameter: Dir. determination delay
Default setting (_:104) Dir. determination delay = 0.00 s

The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

The parameterized time Operate delay determines the minimum time within which the pickup conditions
must be present. An operate indication is only issued when this time is exceeded.
6.23.5.3 Settings

3I0> cos/sin#
_:1 3I0> cos/sin#:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 3I0> cos/sin#:Operate no no
_:10 3I0> cos/sin#:Blk. by no yes
_:27 3I0> cos/sin#:Blk. w. no no
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:110 3I0> cos/sin#:Blk. after no yes
fault extinction yes
_:108 3I0> cos/sin#:Direc- forward forward
tional mode reverse
_:109 3I0> cos/sin#:Dir. cos cos
measuring method sin
_:107 3I0> cos/sin#: correc- -45 to 45 0
tion
_:102 3I0> cos/ 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
sin#:Min.polar.3I0> for 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
dir.det.
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 35.000 A 0.150 A
_:105 3I0> cos/sin#:1 1 to 15 2
reduction dir. area
_:106 3I0> cos/sin#:2 1 to 15 2
reduction dir. area
_:101 3I0> cos/sin#:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
threshold value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:103 3I0> cos/sin#:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.000 V
threshold value
_:104 3I0> cos/sin#:Dir. 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
determination delay
_:6 3I0> cos/sin#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> cos/sin#
_:81 3I0> cos/sin#:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 3I0> cos/sin#:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> cos/sin#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> cos/sin#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> cos/sin#:Health ENS O
_:60 3I0> cos/sin#:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 3I0> cos/sin#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> cos/sin#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> cos/sin#:Operate ACT O
_:302 3I0> cos/sin#:Ground fault ACD O
6.23.6 Usage Information for Detection of Intermittent Ground Faults
The stage type 3I0> with cos or sin measurement is suited for directional detection of intermittent ground
faults. Many years of field experience and field tests have shown that the direction determination of this stage
type reliably determines the direction of the current peaks. Between the current peaks, the direction is
detected as unknown. To generate a tripping or an alarm, you can analyze the individual pickups of a stage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
(each directional pickup corresponds to a current peak) in a time-based way or count them via an additional
user logic (CFC chart).
You can also ensure the result in the user logic via a 2nd directional stage that works in the backward direc-
tion, as well as a V0 stage.
You can operate a 3rd directional stage in parallel for detection of permanent ground faults.
In the following, certain settings are explained that are necessary for this application (detection of intermittent
ground faults):
Parameter: (_:102) Dropout delay
The function must treat the intermittent process as one ground fault. For this, it is necessary that the
indication Ground fault does not drop out between 2 consecutive current peaks. This is ensured via
the Dropout delay parameter (FB General). A dropout delay of 1 s is a feasible value.
Parameter: (_:104) Dir. determination delay

You must set the delay of the direction determination to 0 s so that the direction of the current peaks can
be determined.
Parameter: (_:105) 1 reduction dir. area and (_:106) 2 reduction dir. area
The current peaks show a clear ohmic component. With these parameters, you can limit the direction
characteristic and ensure a reliable direction result.
Siemens recommends setting both parameters to 10.
Parameter: (_:110) Blk. after fault extinction

To make possible a continuous and immediate detection of the current peaks, you must switch off the
blocking after fault suppression.
No further parameters need particular consideration with regard to an intermittent ground fault. You can set
these as for the detection of permanent ground faults.
6.23.7 Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Overview
Ground faults occurring in arc-suppression-coil-ground systems quite often extinguish a short time after the
ignition, mostly within a few milliseconds. Such transient occurrences are called transient ground faults. In
order to detect the ground-fault direction, based on these transient occurrences, a special measuring method
is required that can also capture high frequencies. Conventional methods based on phasor calculations are
not suitable. Even for ground faults lasting for a short time, usually, a high-frequency charging process occurs
in healthy phases. The transient charging process is evaluated by the transient ground-fault measuring
method to determine the ground-fault direction. An integrating method of measurement ensures a high
degree of sensitivity and a positive stability against parasitic signals in the zero-sequence system.
Since permanent ground faults also start with the transient charging process of flawless wires, those errors
will be detected as well.
This process is most suitable for the use in closed loops or meshed systems. Operational, circulating residual
currents are eliminated and therefore, cannot affect the directional result.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Stage-Control Logic
[lostuwis-240113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-335 Stage-Control Logic Diagram


From an external source via the binary input signal >Open of the function block Volt.-transf. c. b., which
blocks the stage or not.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Transient Ground-Fault Functionality
[lowisfut-240113-01.tif, 5, en_US]
Figure 6-336 Logic Diagram Directional Transient Ground-Fault Functionality
Measured Values, Method of Measurement

The zero-sequence values of zero-sequence voltage and zero-sequence current are measured directly or
calculated from the phase variables. When measuring directly, the following is detected:
Zero-sequence voltage on the broken-delta winding
Residual current via Holmgreen connection or via core balance current transformer
The voltage measured on the broken-delta winding will be converted to zero-sequence voltage V0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) that are sampled at a high frequency (8 kHz)
serve to determine the point in time of the ground fault occurrence T0.
The instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage v0(t) and the ground current 3i0(t), which are
sampled at a high frequency (8 kHz), are the basis for direction determination.
The fundamental-component values of the zero-sequence voltage V0 serve to release the directional result
and the pickup as well as a criterion for the stabilization against switching operations.
The positive-sequence system (if it exists as a measured value) serves as an additional criterion for the stabi-
lization against switching operations.
The fundmental-component values V0 and 3I0 will be used in the optional trip logic.
Operational, meaning circulating residual currents, can occur in closed loops or meshed systems. This type of
residual current is also present in case of a malfunction and can falsify the directional result. Therefore, an
operational residual current is eliminated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Determining the Time of the Ground-Fault Ignition

The algorithm uses the evaluation of the instantaneous values of the zero-sequence voltage to verify continu-
ously if a ground fault occurred. This takes place regardless of whether the set threshold value for V0 is
exceeded. If a ground fault occurred, the measuring window for determining the direction is positioned and
the direction determination is performed. The position of the measuring window is logged via the indication
(_:309) position measuring window (in FB General). The precise identification of the time T0 at
which the ground fault occurred is decisive for the correct direction determination.
Determination of Direction, Method of Measurement

The active energy of the zero-sequence system is calculated for the direction determination. Once the ground
fault occurrence has been detected, the active energy will be calculated across approximately 1 cycle
frequency. If the active energy of the zero-sequence system is negative, a forward fault is present; otherwise
it is a backward fault.
Direction Result Message, Pickup

Determining the time of the ground-fault ignition and the direction is always done with maximum sensitivity.
With the parameter V0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction and
the pickup of the stage.
If the fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the associated threshold value
(V0> threshold value parameter) within 100 ms after detecting the ground-fault ignition, the direction
result will be reported. In this way, high-resistance ground faults are also reported in which the zero-sequence
system values rise only slowly, and, for this reason, the occurrence of the ground fault is detected noticeably
earlier than the exceedance of the parameterized threshold value.
The direction result will be reported to the function via the (_:302) Ground fault of the function block
General information. This indication is reported irrespective of the parameterized direction of the function.
If the determined direction corresponds with the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), a
pickup occurs.
Reset of the Algorithm

To allow a new directional measurement, the algorithm needs to be reset. The normal reset takes place when
the fundamental component of the zero-sequence voltage V0 drops below the V0 reset threshold. This reset
threshold is a small device-internal V0 threshold. It is also depending on an operational V0 and is thus a
dynamic threshold. The threshold value is 3.0 V secondary without dynamic influence.
Stabilization against Switching Operations

Switching operations in the system to be protected can cause transient signals in the zero-sequence system.
The stage is stabilized against possible overfunction due to switching operations.
The fundamental-component value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 is not influenced by switching operations
and is thus a good criterion for distinguishing the ground fault from a switching procedure. The condition that
the fundamental-component value must exceed the V0> threshold value for reporting the direction
result effectively suppresses switching operations.
For rare cases in which high zero-sequence voltages occur over longer time periods after switching off the
feeder or line, a criterion on the basis of the positive-sequence system current is also effective. This criterion
compares the positive-sequence system current before and after the transient event and thus detects a
disconnection. In case of disconnection, the direction result is not reported.
Through stabilization mechanisms, the direction result is reported 100 ms after the ground-fault ignition. Thus
a pickup occurs with a 100-ms delay.
If the stage is used in a 1-phase function group, the additional criterion via the positive-sequence system
current is not effective.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Trip Logic
[loauswis-240113-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-337 Trip Logic Diagram
In many applications, the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction. In this case, the
trip logic is not required and remains disabled. However, this stage can also be used to disable a permanent
ground fault. For this, you enable the optional trip logic with the Operate functionality parameter. If the
fundamental-component values V0 and 3I0 exceed the set threshold values, the operate delay (Operate
delay parameter) starts with the pickup. In order to start the operate delay, the threshold values must be
exceeded during the time delay. The process of the operate delay will be indicated. If the Operate &
flt.rec. blocked setting is set to no, the pickup indication is sent.

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value cycle of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction of the
ground fault can be detected faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the
pickup value. The fast detection of the fault extinction (see function block General information) blocks the trip
time delay. When using the parameter Blk. after fault extinction, this accelerated blocking mecha-
nism can be enabled or disabled.
Parameter: Operate functionality
Default setting (_:108) Operate functionality = no

If the transient ground-fault stage is used only to indicate the direction, this optional trip logic is not required
and remains disabled. If the transient ground-fault stage is used to disable permanent faults as well, this
optional trip logic is enabled. Pickup of the stage will initiate the tripping delay.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015



If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the tripping delay is reset after the detec-
tion of the fault extinction. Therefore, if the tripping delay is set for a short time, the possibility of an overfunc-
tion is avoided. The reason for an overfunction is a slower attenuation in the zero-sequence system following
the fault extinction. Siemens recommends keeping this default setting if the stage is used for tripping. If you
are using the stage only for reporting, you can disable the blocking.


With the parameter V0> threshold value, you define the sensitivity for the indication of the direction and
the pickup of the stage.
Note that the sensitivity of the direction determination itself is not thereby changed. The direction determina-
tion always works with maximum sensitivity.
Should high-resistant ground faults be reported as well, very sensitive settings are possible, for example, V0>
threshold value = 5 V secondary.

The setting is significant only for optional trip logic for switching off permanent ground faults. Select the
setting such that the static ground-fault current exceeds the threshold value.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The setting of the Operate delay depends on the specific application. Ensure that the pickup is delayed by
100 ms with regard to the time of the ground-fault ignition.
6.23.7.3 Settings

Trans.Gnd.flt#
_:1 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Operate no no
_:10 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Blk. by no yes
_:107 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Blk. after no yes
_:108 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Operate no no
functionality yes
_:106 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Direc- forward forward
tional mode reverse
_:103 Trans.Gnd.flt#:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 15.000 V
threshold value
_:104 Trans.Gnd.flt#:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:6 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay

(Type)
Trans.Gnd.flt#
_:81 Trans.Gnd.flt#:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Health ENS O
_:55 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Operate ACT O
_:302 Trans.Gnd.flt#:Ground fault ACD O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.8 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with 3I0-(V,I) Measurement
Logic
[logfppvi-291112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-338 Logic Diagram Directional Overcurrent Protection Stage with 3I0-(V,I) Measurement

defining equation.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
nent numerically.
Measured Value 3I0, Method of Measurement

nent numerically.
Depending upon the settings of the Connection type and Measuring point I-3ph parameters, as
well as the current terminal blocks used, different linearity and setting ranges result, refer for this to chapter
6.23.5.1 Description, Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup.

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> threshold value and
the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value Min. V0> for dir.
determ., the stage detects the ground fault . The direction determination (see in the following paragraph) is
started when the zero-sequence voltage exceeds the threshold. The result form the direction determination is
only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its threshold value. The direction
result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block).
As long as the direction result equals the parameterization direction (parameter Directional mode), the
stage is picked up.
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands.
The direction is determined via the determination of the phase angle between the angle-error compensated
ground current 3I0com. and the rotated zero-sequence voltage V0, indicated in the following as reference
voltage Vref,rot. To take different system conditions and applications into account, the reference voltage can be
rotated through an adjustable angle (Rotation angle of ref. volt. parameter). This moves the
vector of the rotated reference voltage close to the vector ground current -3I0com. Consequently, the result of
direction determination is as reliable as possible.
The rotated reference voltage Vref,rot and the Forward section +/- parameter define the forward and
backward section, refer to Figure 6-339. The forward section results as range around the rotated refer-
ence voltage, Vref,rot. The value is set with the Forward section +/- parameter. If the ground current
-3I0 vector is located in this range, the device decides on the forward direction. In the mirrored range, the
device decides on the backward direction. In the intermediate range, the direction is undetermined.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwdirrot-011112-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-339 Parameters for Setting the Directivity
1. 1st parameter = Rotation angle of ref. volt.

2. 2nd parameter = Forward section +/-


will be reset.
blocks the stage or not.

opened.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015


The binary input signal >open of the function block Voltage transformer circuit breaker is connected to


With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains unaffected by an enabling procedure.

Parameter: Rotation angle of ref. volt.,Forward section +/-
Default setting (_:104) Rotation angle of ref. volt. = -45
Default setting (_:103) Forward section +/- = 88

With the Rotation angle of ref. volt. and Forward section +/- parameters, you set the direc-
tion characteristic, that is, the position of the ranges forward and backward. With this, you set the direction
characteristic to the system conditions and the neutral-point treatment.
Typical settings for the Rotation angle of ref. volt.parameter are:
Arc-suppression-coil-ground system: 0
Isolated system: +45
Grounded system: -45
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Forward section +/- parameter can normally be left at its default setting. A reduction of the forward
section by a few degrees is practical, for example in an arc-suppression-coil-ground system with long cable
feeders, that generate high capacitive fault currents.
Parameter: Min. V0> for dir. determ.
Default setting (_:102) Min. V0> for dir. determ. = 2.000 V

With the Min. V0> for dir. determ. parameter, you determine the minimum voltage V0 necessary for
the release of the direction determination that must be attained within the time delay Dir. determination
delay.

The 3I0> threshold value parameter allows you to set the ground-current sensitivity of the stage. Set
the threshold value lower than the minimum absolute value of the ground-fault current 3I0 that must still be
detected.

The start of the ground fault normally shows a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed from the occurrence of the zero-sequence
voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The dura-
tion of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault characteristics. If
you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default setting.

6.23.8.3 Settings

3I0> (VI) #
_:1 3I0> (VI) #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 3I0> (VI) #:Operate & no no
_:10 3I0> (VI) #:Blk. by no yes
_:27 3I0> (VI) #:Blk. w. no no
_:106 3I0> (VI) #:Directional non-directional forward
mode forward
reverse
_:104 3I0> (VI) #:Rotation -180 to 180 -45
angle of ref. volt.
_:103 3I0> (VI) #:Forward 0 to 90 88
section +/-
_:102 3I0> (VI) #:Min. V0> for 0.300 V to 200.000 V 2.000 V
dir. determ.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:101 3I0> (VI) #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:105 3I0> (VI) #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 3I0> (VI) #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
delay

(Type)
3I0> (VI) #
_:81 3I0> (VI) #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 3I0> (VI) #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> (VI) #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> (VI) #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> (VI) #:Health ENS O
_:301 3I0> (VI) #:Fault not in trip area SPS O
_:60 3I0> (VI) #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 3I0> (VI) #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> (VI) #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> (VI) #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.9 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement
[LoY0G0B0-300713-01, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-340 Logic Diagram of a Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with G0 or B0 Measurement

definition equation.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
nent numerically.
Measured Value 3I0, G0, B0, Method of Measurement

The function usually evaluates the ground current 3I0 sensitively measured via a core balance current trans-
former, this current being converted with the voltage V0 into the admittance Y0 = G0 + jB0. Since the linearity
range of the sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary ground currents, the func-
tion switches to the 3I0 calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very large linearity and settings
range.
nent numerically. The methods of measurement are characterized by high accuracy and by insensitivity to
harmonics, especially the 3rd and 5th harmonics frequently present in the ground-fault (leakage) current.

If the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 exceeds the threshold value 3I0> release thresh.
value and the absolute value of the zero-sequence voltage V0 exceeds the threshold value V0>
threshold value, the stage recognizes the ground fault. The calculation of G0 or B0 is started with
exceeding the threshold values and then, the direction determination (see the following) is performed. The
direction result is indicated via the Ground fault signal (in the General function block). If the direction
result equals the parameterized direction (parameter Directional mode), the stage picks up.
mination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measurands. The result from the direction determina-
tion is only valid if the absolute value of the ground current 3I0 has also exceeded its release threshold value.
The following figure shows an example of the direction determination in the complex phasor diagram for the
G0 direction measurement method with a correction value of the direction straight line from 0 (Parameter
correction). The example is suitable for the determination of the ground-fault direction in an arc-suppres-
sion-coil-ground system where the value G0 is decisive for the direction determination.
[DwY0Dire-171012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-341 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the G0 Measurement
The zero-sequence voltage V0 is generally the reference value for the real axis and is identical to the G0
axis. The axis of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the B0 (reactive) axis for this
example. For the direction determination, the component of the admittance perpendicular to the set direction-
characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive G0dir (=Y0dir). In this example, this is the active compo-
nent G0active of the admittance Y0. The conductance G0dir. (here = G0active) is calculated and compared
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
with the setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the positive
setting value, the direction is forward. If the conductance G0dir. exceeds the negative setting value, the direc-
tion is backward. In the range in between, the direction is undetermined.
With the 1 reduction dir. area and 2 reduction dir. area parameters, you can limit the
forward and backward ranges as shown in Figure 6-342. With this, the direction determination is secured in
case of high currents in the direction of the axis of symmetry.
The symmetry axis can be turned via a correction angle ( correction parameter) in a range of 45.
Through this, it is possible, for example, to attain the greatest sensitivity in grounded systems in the resistive-
inductive range with a -45 turn. In the case of electric machines in busbar connection on the isolated system,
the greatest sensitivity in the resistive-capacitive range can be attained with a turn of +45 (see following
figure).
[DwY0meas-171012-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-342 Turning the Direction-Characteristic Curves with G0 Measurement with Angle Correction
If you set the Dir. measuring method parameter to B0 and the correction parameter to 0, the axis
of symmetry of the direction-characteristic curve coincides with the G0 and V0 axes. Since the component of
the admittance Y0 perpendicular to the direction-characteristic curve (= axis of symmetry) is decisive (B0dir.
(=Y0dir.)), here, the susceptance B0 (reactive) is used in the direction determination. If the susceptance
B0dir. (B0reactive) exceeds the negative setting value Polarized G0/B0 threshold, the direction is
forward. If the susceptance B0dir. exceeds the positive setting value, the direction is backward. In the range
in between, the direction is undetermined.
This direction measurement thus is appropriate for the determination of ground-fault direction in isolated
systems.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[DwSiCoY0-011112-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-343 Direction-Characteristic Curve for the B0 Measurement


will be reset.
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that Measuring-voltage failure detection

Using the evaluation of the instantaneous value developing of the zero-sequence voltage, the fault extinction
can be recognized faster than via the dropout of the V0 fundamental-component value under the pickup
value. The pickup of the stage is blocked with the fast detection of the fault extinction. With this, the pickups
are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence system after the fault extinction. With the Blk.
after fault extinction parameter, you enable or disable this accelerated detection of the fault extinc-
tion.

opened.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015




With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you specify whether the operate is blocked during
reliable criterion for the ground fault and remains untouched by an enabling procedure.

If the Blk. after fault extinction parameter is set to yes, the pickup is blocked after detection of
the fault extinction. With this, the pickups are avoided due to the decay procedure in the zero-sequence
system after the fault extinction. Siemens recommends using the default setting.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Dir. measuring method, correction, Polarized G0/B0 threshold, 3I0> release
thresh. value
Default setting (_:109) Dir. measuring method = G0
Default setting (_:107) correction = 0.0
Default setting (_:102) Polarized G0/B0 threshold = 2.00 mS
Default setting (_:101) 3I0> release thresh. value = 0.002 A

These parameters are used to define the direction characteristic of the stage. The direction characteristic to
use is dependent on the neutral-point treatment of the system.
Note that, for the direction determination, basically only the component of the admittance perpendicular to the
set direction-characteristic curve is decisive, see chapter 6.23.9.1 Description. This admittance component is
compared to the threshold value Polarized G0/B0 threshold. In contrast, the absolute value of the
current 3I0 is compared with the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

ment
Grounded In the arc-suppression-coil-ground system, the watt leakage current 3I0 cos of the
arc-suppression coil is decisive for the direction determination.
To evaluate the watt leakage current, set the parameters as follows:
Dir. measuring method = G0
correction = 0.0
The direction determination for a ground fault is made more difficult in that a much
larger reactive current of capacitive or inductive character is superimposed on the
small watt leakage current. Therefore, depending on the system configuration and the
fault evaluation, the total ground current supplied to the device can vary considerably
in its values regarding the magnitude and the phase angle. However, the device
should only evaluate the active component of the ground-fault current.
This requires extremely high accuracy, particularly regarding the phase-angle meas-
urement of all the instrument transformers. Furthermore, the device must not be set to
operate too sensitively. A reliable direction measurement can only be expected with
connection to a core balance current transformer. For the setting of the Polarized
G0/B0 threshold parameter, the following formula applies:
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current (watt leakage current) of the
protected line
Vrated: Secondary rated voltage in the healthy case
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0>: Pickup threshold of the residual voltage 0.1
If a parallel resistor Rp is used on the arc-suppression coil, the threshold value G0
must also be smaller than:
where:
ks: Safety margin 1.5
IRp: Secondary rated current of the parallel resistor
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter can be set to half of the expected
measuring current and here, the entire zero-sequence current can be put to use.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

ment
Isolated In the isolated system, the capacitive ground reactive current 3I0 sin is decisive for
the direction determination.
To evaluate the capacitive ground reactive current, set the parameters as follows:
Dir. measuring method = B0
correction = 0.0
In isolated systems, a ground fault allows the capacitive ground-fault currents of the
entire electrically connected system, except for the ground current in the faulty cable
itself, to flow through the measuring point as the latter flows directly away from the
fault location (that is, not via the measuring point). The following formula can be used
to determine the pickup value of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter.
where:
I0min: Ground current in the healthy case

In healthy operation, B0 0.
For the 3I0> release thresh. value parameter, select around half of this
capacitive ground-fault current flowing via the measuring point.
Resistance- In the resistance-grounded system, the ohmic-inductive ground-fault current is deci-
Grounded sive for the direction determination.
To evaluate this short-circuit current, set the parameters as follows:
Dir. measuring method = G0
correction= -45.0
For the setting of the Polarized G0/B0 threshold parameter, the rule of thumb
is: Set the pickup value according to the following formula where only the active
ground-fault current can be put into use.
where:
ks: Safety margin, ks = 1.2 (cable networks), ks = 2.0 (overhead lines)
I0active: Active component of the ground-fault current of the protected line
I0min: Min. ground current in the healthy case, 5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current
transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
The 3I0> release thresh. value parameter must be set to a value below the
minimum expected ground-fault current.
Parameter: 1 reduction dir. area, 2 reduction dir. area

With the 1 reduction dir. area and 2 reduction dir. area parameters, you specify the angle
for the limitation of the direction range. Siemens recommends using the default setting of 2.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In an arc-suppression-coil-ground system in feeders with a very large reactive current, it can be practical to
set a somewhat larger angle 1 to avoid a false pickup based on transformer and algorithm tolerances.

The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.

The start of the ground fault normally indicates a significant transient behavior. This can lead to an incorrect
direction decision. The direction determination can be delayed for this reason from the occurrence of the
zero-sequence voltage with the Dir. determination delay parameter to achieve steady-state measur-
ands. The duration of the transient cycle is determined from the system conditions and the respective fault
characteristics. If you have no knowledge of a suitable time delay, Siemens recommends keeping the default
setting.

6.23.9.3 Settings

Y0> G0/B0 #
_:1 Y0> G0/B0 #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate & no no
_:10 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. by no yes
_:27 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. w. no no
_:110 Y0> G0/B0 #:Blk. after no yes
_:108 Y0> G0/B0 #:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
_:109 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. meas- G0 G0
uring method B0
_:107 Y0> G0/B0 #: correc- -45 to 45 0
tion
_:102 Y0> G0/B0 #:Polarized 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
G0/B0 threshold
_:105 Y0> G0/B0 #:1 reduc- 1 to 15 2
tion dir. area
_:106 Y0> G0/B0 #:2 reduc- 1 to 15 2
tion dir. area
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:101 Y0> G0/B0 #:3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
release thresh. value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.15 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.030 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.150 A
_:103 Y0> G0/B0 #:V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V 30.960 V
threshold value
_:104 Y0> G0/B0 #:Dir. deter- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
mination delay
_:6 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate 0.00 s to 60.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
Y0> G0/B0 #
_:81 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> G0/B0 #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> G0/B0 #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> G0/B0 #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> G0/B0 #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> G0/B0 #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> G0/B0 #:Operate ACT O
6.23.10 Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with 3I0
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function the stage of the non-directional sensitive ground
current also works on demand.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[logfpdyn-291112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-344 Logic Diagram Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with 3I0
Measured Value 3I0

Depending upon the settings of the Connection type and Measuring point I-3ph parameters, as well as
the current terminal blocks used, different linearity and setting ranges result, refer for this to chapter
6.23.5.1 Description, Ground-Fault Detection, Pickup.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015



opened.
Blocking the Tripping via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function

blocking, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function
indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the
stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started.

You can block the operate indication, the fault recording and the fault log with the Operate & flt.rec.
blocked parameter. In this case a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the tripping is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.

into account (for example, at capacitor banks). For this method of measure-
ment, do not set the threshold value of the stage to less than
0.1 Irated,sec.

The Threshold parameter allows you to set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

6.23.10.3 Settings

3I0> #
_:1 3I0> #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 3I0> #:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:27 3I0> #:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:8 3I0> #:Method of meas- fundamental comp. fundamental
urement RMS value comp.
_:3 3I0> #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
_:102 3I0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 3I0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
3I0> #
_:81 3I0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:500 3I0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 3I0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 3I0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 3I0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 3I0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 3I0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 3I0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 3I0> #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.11 Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with Y0
In the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function, the stage of the non-directional sensitive admit-
tance protection also works on demand.
Logic
[logfpsy0-240614-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-345 Logic Diagram of the Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with Y0
Measured Value 3I0, Y0

The function evaluates the sensitively measured ground current 3I0 via a core balance current transformer,
this current being converted with the voltage V0 into the admittance Y0=I0/V0. Since the linearity range of the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
sensitive measuring input ends at approx. 1.6 A, for larger secondary ground currents, the function switches
to the 3I0 current calculated from the phase currents. This results in a very large linearity and settings range.
Depending on the settings of the Connection type and Measuring point I-3ph parameters, as well as the
current terminal block used, different linearity and setting ranges result, refer for this to chapter
6.23.9.1 Description.

Blocking of the stage is possible externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage. In the
event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset.

will be reset.

opened.
Blocking of the Operate Indication via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
blocking, the stage picks up. The start of the time delay and the operate indication are blocked. The function
indicates this through a corresponding indication. If the blocking drops out and the threshold value of the
stage is still exceeded, the time delay is started.


measuring-voltage failure is detected. A measuring-voltage failure can only be detected if 1 of the following 2
conditions is met:
on.
the voltage transformer circuit breaker.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes The protection stage is blocked (= default setting).

With the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter, you determine whether the operate is blocked
during the detection of an inrush current.

The threshold value must be smaller than the minimum amount of the zero-sequence voltage V0 which must
still be detected.
Parameter: Threshold Y0>
Default setting (_:102) Threshold Y0> = 2.00 mS

With the parameter Threshold Y0>, you set the threshold value of the ground admittance Y0. If the ground
admittance for the setting value is unknown, you can assume the following relation:
[fo_SeGfY0-270614-01, 2, en_US]
ks: Factor, takes into account the ohmic components of the current
(1.2 for overhead lines, 1.0-1.05 for cable systems)
Ic,line Secondary capacitive ground-fault current for the protected line
Vph-gnd Secondary phase-to-ground voltage in the healthy case
3I0min Secondary ground current in the healthy case (resulting from transformer error),
5 mA to 10 mA (core balance current transformer), 50 mA to 100 mA (Holmgreen transformer)
V0> Secondary pickup threshold of the residual voltage
Default setting (_:103) Pickup delay = 0.00 s

With the parameter Pickup delay, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed or not. If the tran-
sient cycle of the ground fault occurrence should not be evaluated, set a delay of 100 ms, for example.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.23.11.3 Settings

Y0> #
_:1 Y0> #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 Y0> #:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:10 Y0> #:Blk. by meas.- no yes
volt. failure yes
_:27 Y0> #:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:101 Y0> #:V0> threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 5.000 V
value
_:102 Y0> #:Threshold Y0> 0.10 mS to 100.00 mS 2.00 mS
_:103 Y0> #:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6 Y0> #:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s

(Type)
Y0> #
_:81 Y0> #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 Y0> #:>Block delay & op. SPS I
_:54 Y0> #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Y0> #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Y0> #:Health ENS O
_:60 Y0> #:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:55 Y0> #:Pickup ACD O
_:56 Y0> #:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:57 Y0> #:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.24 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
A typical characteristic of intermittent ground faults is that they often extinguish automatically and strike again
after some time. The fault duration can last between a few milliseconds and many seconds. Thus, such faults
are not detected at all or not selectively by the ordinary overcurrent protection. If pulse durations are
extremely short, not all protection devices in a short-circuit path can pick up. Thus, selective tripping is not
ensured.
Due to the time delay of the overcurrent protection function, such faults are too short to initiate switching off
the faulted cable. The short-circuit protection can clear such ground faults selectively only if the ground faults
have become permanent.
But such intermittent ground faults already bear the risk of damaging the equipment thermally. This is why
SIPROTEC 5 devices feature a protection function that is able to detect such intermittent ground faults and
accumulates their duration. If the sum reaches a configurable value within a certain time, the limit of the
thermal rating has been reached. If intermittent ground faults are distributed over a long period or if the
ground fault disappears and does not restrike after some time, the equipment under load is expected to cool
down. Tripping is not necessary in this case.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function is used to protect against intermittent ground
faults which occur, for example, in cables due to poor insulation or water ingress in cable joints.
The Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protection function can be used in protection function groups
with current measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a maximum
of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously. The non-preconfigured stages are shown in gray in the following
figure.
[DwIntGFP, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[LoIntnon, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-347 Logic of the Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measured Value 3I0

The intermittent ground-fault current 3I0 can either be detected via the standard ground-current input IN or via
the sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3-phase currents. The
measured value depends on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.
Table 6-13 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types
Connection Type of Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range

the Measuring Point (Secondary at Irated = 1 A)
I-3ph
3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
x + IN Measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
x + IN-separate 4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured and calcu- 3 * Protection, 1 * sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
lated when exceeding
1.6 A
The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonics
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
Maximum 3I0 of the Fault

The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault. The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. With the coming operate signal, this value is logged via the information 3I0
max..
Pickup and Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

When 3I0 exceeds the threshold value, the pickup signals Pickup and Limited pickup (log) are
issued. The stage generates the Stabilized pickup signal by extending the Pickup for a defined time
(parameter Pickup extension time).
The stage counts the Pickup signals. If the counted number reaches the configured No. pickups till
interm.GF, the Intermittent gnd.flt. signal is issued. The signal Limited pickup (log) is not
issued anymore after the issue of the Intermittent gnd.flt. signal.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[DwIntFaD, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-348 Fault Detection of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Text. Defined time for extending the Pickup signal
Number of Pickups
The stage counts the number of Pickup signals during the intermittent ground fault. With the operate of the
stage this number is logged via the information No. of pickups.
Accumulation of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Current and Issuing the Operate Signal
An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected equipment. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-fault current are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the thermal
stress, the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integration value
reaches the predefined Sum of extended PU times, the limit of the thermal load is reached. The stage
issues the signal Sum limit reached and operates when the signal Pickup is active.
Reset Timer for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, an operation is not
necessary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset timer. If a ground fault occurs, the
Timer T-reset with its setting Reset time is launched simultaneously with Integrator T-sum. Unlike the inte-
grator, each new ground fault restarts the reset timer with its initial value. If Timer T-reset expires, that is, no
new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. Timer T-reset
thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as intermittent
ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as a new fault
event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset.
The Intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
The general operate indication is going.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state.
Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protec-
tion stage issued.
Fault Log and Fault Recording

You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault recording.
If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and fault
recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.
Start & Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the
function group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals

Intermittent ground faults may cause other functions, based on overcurrent measurement, to pick up, which
may result in a burst of signals. In order to avoid an overflow of the fault log, a special mechanism is applied
to the signals of these functions after detection of an intermittent ground fault (signal Intermittent
gnd.flt.).
The special mechanism is applied for the following listed functions and other functions are not influenced:
Overcurrent protection, phases
Overcurrent protection, ground
Directional overcurrent protection, phases
Directional overcurrent protection, ground
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase
Negative-sequence protection with definite-time characteristic curve
Directional negative-sequence protection with definite-time delay
Directional overcurrent-protection stage with cos phi or sin phi measurement
Directional overcurrent-protection stage with 3I0-phi (V,I) measurement
Sensitive ground-current protection with 3I0

If a function picks up, normally its output signals are sent directly to the information targets, for example, the
pickup signal is written to the fault log. To avoid overflow of logs due to intermittent ground faults, a special
log buffer mechanism is used. If one of the preceding functions or stages picks up after an intermittent ground
fault has been detected (signal Intermittent gnd.flt. has been issued), its output signals are
processed as shown in the following 2 tables.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table 6-14 Processing of the Signal Status Changes
Processing of Signal Status Changes Description

Special buffering mechanism The status changes of signals are written to a special
buffer. This buffer can store a maximum of 2 status
changes (the most recent ones) for each signal.
With the pickup signal as example, if one of the
preceding protection functions or stages picks up
during an active Intermittent gnd.flt. signal,
the pickup signal is not written in the fault log
anymore unless one of the preceding functions oper-
ates. After the operation, the buffered signals are
written to the information target with the original time
stamp. This measure ensures that a pickup signal,
although delayed, is always signaled in association
with each operate command.
Discard The signal status changes are discarded.
Pass through The signal is forwarded to the information target
without restriction.
Special buffering does not apply for specific informa-
tion targets as protection measure, for example,
reverse interlocking, need these signals for proper
operation.
Table 6-15 Information Target with Different Processing of Signal Status Changes
Information Target Processing of Signal Status Changes

Processing of Signal Status Operational log Special buffering mechanism
Changes Fault log
Ground-fault log
User-defined log
Communication interface IEC 61850-8-1 Client/Server Special buffering mechanism
IEC 60870-5-103/104
DNP V3.0
Protection interface PDI Pass through
IEC 61850-8-1 GOOSE Pass through
CFC Pass through
LEDs Pass through
Binary output Pass through
Fault recorder Pass through
Automatic reclosing function Discard
Circuit-breaker failure protection Discard
Group indications Discard
No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults as the protection function
only operates after repeated detection of a fault or after the integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times. Besides this, its basic design is to prevent thermal overload. For these reasons, the
intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the automatic reclosing function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Rooting of Pickup Signals

The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to LED and relay. The signal Limited pickup (log) is only
reported to the fault log and communication interface before the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued.
This scheme prevents a burst of messages.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of messages, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and fault log.
Parameter: 3I0 Threshold

With the Threshold parameter, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.
Parameter: No. pickups till interm.GF
Default setting (_:11341:101) No. pickups till interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No. pickups till interm.GF, you set the number of counted Pickup signals after
which the ground fault is considered as intermittent.
Parameter: Pickup extension time
Default setting (_:11341:102) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s

You can get a stabilized pickup signal with the Pickup extension time parameter. This stabilization is
especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent protections.
Parameter: Sum of extended PU times
Default setting (_:11341:103) Sum of extended PU times = 20 s

With the Sum of extended PU times parameter, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the inte-
gration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the pickup state is present.
This Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 4 selectivity criteria (pickup threshold, pickup
extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of the relays on adjacent feeders.
It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection. The protection in the radial system which is
closest to the intermittent fault and picks up, has the shortest summation time Sum of extended PU
times.
Parameter: Reset time
Default setting (_:11341:104) Reset time = 300 s

With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE
[TiExaInt, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-349 Example of Selectivity Criteria of the Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
6.24.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
_:11341:2 Stage 1:Operate & no no
_:11341:3 Stage 1:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:11341:101 Stage 1:No. pickups till 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:11341:102 Stage 1:Pickup exten- 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:11341:103 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 100.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:11341:104 Stage 1:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:11341:81 Stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:11341:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:11341:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:11341:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:11341:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:11341:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:11341:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:11341:307 Stage 1:No. of pickups MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.25 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection:

Detects the intermittent ground faults in grounded, compensated, or isolated cable systems selectively
Can be operated in 2 different modes:
Operate only by counting directional ground-current pulses
Operate by integration of the fault current in combination with a directional criterion by counting
directional ground-current pulses
The intermittent ground faults in cable systems are frequently caused by weak insulation or water ingress in
cable joints. The ground faults are characterized by the following properties:
Intermittent ground faults show very short high ground-current pulses (up to several hundred amperes)
with a duration of less than 1 ms.
Intermittent ground faults are self-extinguishing and reignite within one half period up to several periods,
depending on the power-system conditions and the fault type.
Intermittent ground faults can persist over longer periods (several seconds to minutes) and develop to
static ground faults.
The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection can be used in protection function groups with
current and voltage measurement. The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 stage, and a
maximum of 2 stages can be operated simultaneously.
[DwStrDirIGFP_20140618, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Overview
[LoOverview, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-351 Logic of the Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection
Blocking of the Stage with Measuring-Voltage Failure

From an internal source upon pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function
The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that the measuring-voltage failure detec-
tion blocks the stage or does not block it.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic for Direction Determination and Pulse Counting
[LoIntdir1, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-352 Logic Diagram of Direction Determination and Pulse Counting
(1) The input signal 3 is from Figure 6-353.
Measurement Values for Direction Determination

The function Directional intermittent ground-fault protection uses the zero-sequence active energy to deter-
mine the direction of the ground-current pulse.
The zero-sequence active energy is calculated from v0(t) and 3i0(t). The zero-sequence voltage v0(t) can
either be measured via the voltage input VN or can be calculated from the sum of 3 phase-to-ground
voltages. The measured value depends on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point V-3ph.
The intermittent ground-fault current 3i0(t) can either be measured via the ground-current input IN or via the
sensitive ground-current input INS. It can also be calculated from the sum of the 3 phase currents. The meas-
ured value and its setting range depend on the parameter Connection type of the measuring point I-3ph.
Table 6-16 Threshold Setting Range with Different Connection Types
Connection Type of Ground Current CT Terminal Type Threshold Setting Range

the Measuring Point (Secondary at Irated = 1 A)
I-3ph
3-phase Calculated 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
3 * Protection, 1* sensitive 0.030 A to 35.000 A
4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
x + IN Measured 4 * Protection 0.030 A to 35.000 A
x + IN-separate 4 * Measurement 0.001 A to 1.600 A
Measured and calcu- 3 * Protection, 1 * sensitive 0.001 A to 35.000 A
lated when exceeding
1.6 A
Direction Determination and Pulse Counting

When the RMS value of 3I0 exceeds the set threshold value (signal no. 3 in Figure 6-352), the direction
determination process is started and is continuously carried out until the function resets. At first, the current
pulse (current peak) detection takes place. If a current pulse is detected, the direction determination for this
pulse is carried out.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The direction is determined by calculating the active zero-sequence energy of the current pulse. The active
zero-sequence energy of the pulse is compared to internal threshold values resulting in the directional deci-
sion forward, reverse, or non-directional. During the ongoing intermittent ground fault, the directional
results for all current pulses are counted.
Directional Mode and Directional Pulse Counter Criterion

The parameter Directional mode defines whether the function operates in forward or in reverse direc-
tion. The pulses in the specified direction are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the threshold value set in
the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the signal Pulse no. reached is issued. Depending on
the operating mode (Counter or Integrator and counter) of the function, the signal can immediately
cause the operate of the function (Counter mode) or it is processed as directional release criteria (Inte-
grator and counter operating mode). Refer to the further description in the following sections.
The directional pulse counter is reset when a different direction than the set Directional mode is
detected. An undefined direction result does not reset the counter.
Operating Mode
2 different functional operating modes are available: Counter and Integrator and counter. You can
select the different operating modes using the parameter Operating mode.
Operating mode Counter:
Many ground-current pulses of intermittent ground faults can result in a damage of the protected object.
In this mode, the criterion for operate is only the number of directional current pulses. This is similar to
the SIPROTEC 4 implementation.
Operating mode Integrator and counter:

An intermittent ground fault can result in thermal stress on the protected object. The magnitude and the
duration of the ground-current pulses are decisive for the thermal stress. In order to calculate the
thermal stress, the stage sums up the duration of the stabilized pickups with an integrator. If the integra-
tion value reaches the threshold value, one criterion for the operate is fulfilled. The 2nd criterion for the
operate is the ground-fault direction. The ground-fault direction is determined by counting the directional
ground-current pulses.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Counter Mode
Figure 6-353 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Counter
(1) The internal signal 4 is from Figure 6-352.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup, Operate, and Reset logic for the Integrator and Counter Mode
Figure 6-354 Pickup, Operate, and Reset Logic in Operating Mode Integrator and Counter
(1) The internal signal 4 and 5 are from Figure 6-352.
Measurement Value for Pickup and Integration

The stage calculates the RMS value of 3I0 since this value takes into account the higher-order harmonic
components and the direct component (DC). Both components contribute to the thermal load.
Pickup, Limited Pickup, and Stabilized Pickup

Whenever 3I0 exceeds Threshold, the stage issues the signal Pickup. The signal is intended to be applied
for LED and relay output.
Stabilized pickup is formed by prolonging the pickup indication by a settable time Pickup extension
time. This stabilization is especially important for the coordination with the existing static or electromechan-
ical overcurrent protection.
The Limited pickup (log) signal is intend to be applied for logging and communication interface. The
Limited pickup (log) signal will be entered in the fault log and reported via the system interface unless
the Intermittent gnd.flt. indication is given. This behavior prevents a burst of indications.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Intermittent Ground-Fault Indication

The stage counts the 3I0 pulses. If the sum of forward pulse counts, reverse counts, and directional unde-
fined counts is equal to or greater than No.of pulses for interm.GF, the signal Intermittent
gnd.flt. is issued.
If the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is issued, the pickup indications of some protection functions will be
restraint to avoid an indication burst during an intermittent ground fault.
Operate
The conditions for issuing the signal Operate depend on the operating mode.
Operating Mode Conditions for Issuing the Operate Signal
Counter The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
Integrator and counter The 3I0 current integration value reaches the predefined Sum of
extended PU times, which is signaled via the Sum limit
reached indication.
The current-pulse counter reached the No. of pulses for
operate, which is signaled via the Pulse no. reached indication.
The pickup is active, which is signaled via the Pickup indication.
When an opposite current pulse against the setting Directional mode is detected, the Integrator T-sum
and the Counter are reset.
Reset Time for the Definition of the Interval between Independent Ground Faults
If there is a large interval between independent ground faults or if the ground fault extinguishes and does not
restrike again within a larger time, the stressed equipment can cool down. In this case, no operate is neces-
sary. The interval between ground faults is monitored with the reset time. If a ground fault occurs, the Timer
T-reset with the setting Reset time and the Integrator T-sum are launched simultaneously. Unlike the inte-
grator, each new ground-current pulse restarts the reset time with its initial value. If the Timer T-reset expires,
that is, no new ground fault was detected during that period, all memories and the stage logics are reset. The
Timer T-reset thus determines the time during which the next ground fault must occur to be processed yet as
intermittent ground fault in connection with the previous fault. A ground fault that occurs later is considered as
a new ground-fault event.
Reset Conditions
Under one of the following 2 conditions, Timer T-reset is reset:
The intermittent ground-fault protection stage operates.
The general operate indication is going.

Under one of the following conditions, Integrator T-sum and Counter are reset and the whole stage is reset
and returns to its idle state:
The Timer T-reset expires without an operate signal of this stage or another function was issued.
The operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protection stage is going.
The general operate indication is going without the operate signal of the intermittent ground-fault protec-
tion stage issued.
Maximum Value 3I0 of the Ground Fault

The stage records the maximum RMS value of 3I0 during the intermittent ground fault.The statistic value 3I0
max. is a percentage value calculated through dividing the primary maximum RMS value by the rated current
value of the protected object. If the function resets or operates, this value is logged via the signal 3I0 max..
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Fault Log and Fault Recording

You can select between the ground-fault log without fault recording or the normal fault log with fault recording.
If you set the parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked to yes, the operate of the stage and fault
recording are blocked and the information automatically appears in the ground-fault log. Otherwise, the
operate and fault recording are not blocked and the information appears in the normal fault log.
Start and Stop of Fault Recording, Fault Logging, and General Pickup
The Stabilized pickup signal initiates fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the func-
tion group. The fault recording starts according to the pre-trigger time before the Stabilized pickup
signal rises.
With the reset condition of this stage, the fault recording, fault logging, and the general pickup of the function
group are terminated.
Influence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Indications

In this case, the function uses the same mechanism as the Non-directional intermittent ground-fault protec-
tion. For more information, refer to chapterInfluence on Other Functions to Avoid a Burst of Signals,
Page 923.
No Start of the Automatic Reclosing Function

Automatic reclosing is not an effective measure against intermittent ground faults. For this reason, the Direc-
tional intermittent ground-fault protection function is not intended to start the Automatic reclosing function.
Routing of Pickup Signals

The signal Pickup is supposed to be routed to an LED and a relay. The signal Limited pickup (log)
is only reported to the fault log and communication interface until the signal Intermittent gnd.flt. is
issued. This scheme prevents a burst of indications.
NOTE
i To avoid a burst of indications, do not route the signal Pickup to the operational log and to the fault log.

With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value of the ground current 3I0, measured as RMS
value.
A rather sensitive setting is possible to respond also to short ground faults since the pickup time shortens as
the ground-fault current increases.

With the parameter Directional mode, you define if the function operates in forward or in reverse
direction.
Parameter: Pickup mode
Default setting (_:16291:102) Pickup mode = with 3I0>
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the parameter Pickup mode, you define under which conditions pickup is detected and fault logging
and recording start:
When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with 3I0>, the signal Pickup is released without
considering the ground fault direction. The signal Pickup is issued once the IN/3I0 exceeds the
threshold value.
When the parameter Pickup mode is set to with direction, the signal Pickup is issued when at
least one pulse direction is the same as the direction specified by the set value of parameter Direc-
tional mode.
Default setting (_:16291:103) Operating mode = Counter

With the parameter Operating mode, you define if the function operates in Counter or in Integrator
and counter mode.
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes
Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate criterion. This
is a simple method which is similar to the implementation in the 7SJ
SIPROTEC 4 devices. Siemens recommends using this method if no time
grading or only simple time grading between protection devices (time
grading of only 2 or 3 devices) is required.
Time grading is then carried out by increasing the parameter value No.
of pulses for operate towards the infeed.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate criteria while
the counter criterion is only used for the direction determination. The inte-
grator works in the same way as for the non-directional intermittent
ground fault function. This allows the same time-grading principles as for
the non-directional intermittent ground fault function. Refer to this function
for more description.
Parameter: No.of pulses for interm.GF
Default setting (_:16291:104) No.of pulses for interm.GF = 3

With the parameter No.of pulses for interm.GF, you set the total number of pulse counts (forward,
reverse and non-dir. pulses) at which the ground fault is considered to be intermittent. Siemens
recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Pickup extension time
Default setting (_:16291:105) Pickup extension time = 0.10 s

With the parameter Pickup extension time, you get a prolonged and thus stabilized pickup signal. This
stabilization is especially important for the coordination with existing static or electromechanical overcurrent
protections.
Parameter: No. of pulses for operate
Default setting (_:16291:108) No. of pulses for operate = 5

The pulses in the specified direction from Directional mode are counted. If the pulse counter reaches the
set value of the parameter No. of pulses for operate, the directional counter criterion is fulfilled.
The setting of parameter No. of pulses for operate depends on the Operating mode.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Operating Mode Application and Setting Notes

Counter The number of directional pulses is the determining operate
criterion. Thus do not set the value for parameter No. of
pulses for operate too small. Consider that a permanent
intermittent ground fault will cause many current pulses. If no
time-grading considerations are required, Siemens recommends
using a value in the range of 10 to 20.
Integrator and counter The integrator and the counter are the determining operate
criteria while the counter criterion is only used for the direction
determination. The value for parameter No. of pulses for
operate to fulfill the directional criterion can be set to a rather
small value in the range of 3 to 5.
Parameter: Sum of extended PU times
Default setting (_:16291:106) Sum of extended PU times = 20.00 s

This parameter is only relevant in the operating mode Integrator and counter.
With the parameter Sum of extended PU times, you set the threshold value for the integrator. If the inte-
gration reaches Sum of extended PU times, the stage operates if the Pulse no. reached signal
and the pickup state is present.
The parameter Sum of extended PU times represents one of the 5 selectivity criteria (ground-fault direc-
tion, pickup threshold, pickup extension time, reset time, and integrator threshold value) for coordination of
the relays on subordinate devices. It is comparable to the time grading of the overcurrent protection.
The Sum of extended PU times has the shortest summation time in the radial system for the device that
is closest to the intermittent ground fault and that picks up.
Default setting (_:16291:107) Reset time = 300 s

With the parameter Reset time, you can define the maximum interval between 2 adjacent ground faults. If
the interval is larger than the Reset time, the counter and integrator are reset.
The Reset time parameter must be much higher than the operate value of the Sum of extended PU
times.

recording, and the fault log. In this case, a ground-fault log is created instead of the fault log.
6.25.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
_:16291:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.- no yes
volt. failure yes
_:16291:101 Stage 1:Directional forward forward
mode reverse
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:16291:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode with 3I0> with 3I0>
with direction
_:16291:103 Stage 1:Operating mode Counter Counter
Integrator and counter
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:16291:105 Stage 1:Pickup exten- 0.00 s to 10.00 s 0.10 s
sion time
_:16291:104 Stage 1:No.of pulses for 2 to 10 3
interm.GF
_:16291:106 Stage 1:Sum of 0.00 s to 100.00 s 20.00 s
extended PU times
_:16291:107 Stage 1:Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
_:16291:108 Stage 1:No. of pulses for 2 to 100 5
operate

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:16291:302 Stage 1:Stabilized pickup ACD O
_:16291:303 Stage 1:Limited pickup (log) ACD O
_:16291:304 Stage 1:Intermittent gnd.flt. SPS O
_:16291:301 Stage 1:Sum limit reached SPS O
_:16291:308 Stage 1:Pulse no. reached SPS O
_:16291:305 Stage 1:Reset time running SPS O
_:16291:306 Stage 1:3I0 max. MV O
_:16291:310 Stage 1:Forward pulses MV O
_:16291:311 Stage 1:Reverse pulses MV O
_:16291:312 Stage 1:Non-dir. pulses MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.26 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent Time Delay
6.26 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Current-Independent

Time Delay
The function Directional negative-sequence protection with current-independent time delay (ANSI 46) serves
as the backup short-circuit protection for unbalanced faults.
With the negative-sequence system, various supervision and protection tasks can be realized, for example:
Recording of 1 or 2-phase short circuits in the system with a higher sensitivity than in classic overcurrent
protection. The pickup value can be set under the rated object current.
Recording of phase conductor interruptions in the primary system and in the current-transformer secon-
dary circuits
Location of short circuits or reversals in the connections to the current transformers
Indication of unbalanced states in the energy system
Protection of electrical machines following unbalanced loads that are caused by unbalanced voltages or
conductor interruptions (for example, through a defective fuse)
The Directional negative-sequence protection with definite time delay function can be used in protection func-
tion groups with 3-phase current and voltage measurement.
The function comes factory-set with 1 stage. A maximum of 6 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously
in the function.
[dwnspdir-271112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
If the device is equipped with the Inrush-current detection function, the tripping stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer-inrush currents.
Stage Control
The following figure shows a stage control. It is available separately for each stage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lostensp-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-356 Stage Control of the Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection
In addition to the generally valid stage control, the stage is blocked in the event of a measuring voltage
failure, provided the stage is working directionally.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[lonspdir-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-357 Logic Diagram of the Function Directional Negative-Sequence System Protection with
Current-Independen Time Delay
Measurand
The negative-sequence current I2 is used as a measurand. From the 3-phase currents, the fundamental
phasors are determined via a 1-cycle filter and, corresponding with the definition equation of the symmetrical
components, the negative-sequence system is calculated from this.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functioning
The stage picks up if the negative-sequence system current exceeds the set threshold value and the parame-
terized direction agrees with the measured direction. The pickup drops out if the negative-sequence system
current falls below 95 % of the set threshold.
Stabilization with Phase Current

Unbalance in operation and unbalanced transformer ratios can lead to spurious pickups and incorrect trip-
ping. In order to avoid this, the directional negative-sequence system stage is stabilized with the phase
currents. The threshold value increases with rising phase currents (see next image).
[dwstabil-300112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The direction determination takes place with the negative-sequence system measurements I2 and V2.
The forward and reverse region is defined through the parameters Angle forward and Angle forward
(see next figure). The reference for the 2 angles that must be set is the positive real axis. The angles are
positively defined in a mathematical sense (counter-clockwise). The region between the limit angle and the
limit angle - counted from the former in a positive direction - is the forward region. The remaining region is
the reverse region.
For determining of the direction, the function places the measuring current I2 on the real axis. If the phasor of
the negative-sequence system voltage V2 is located within the defined forward region, the function deter-
mines the direction as forward. In the other case, the function determines the direction as reverse.
The requirement for determining the direction is that the adjustable minimum variables have been exceeded
for the negative-sequence system current and negative-sequence system voltage (parameters Min. neg.-
seq. current I2 and Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwphasor-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-359 Phasor Diagram for Direction Determination with Negative-Sequence System Values
If the device determines a fault in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit (through the binary input
voltage transformer circuit-breaker dropout or through measuring-voltage failure detection),
direction determination will be disabled and every directionally set stage will be blocked. Non-directionally set
stages become active again if there are faults in the voltage-transformer secondary circuit.
[lorichtu-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-360 Logic of Direction Determination
Directional Mode
tion. Non-directional operation is also possible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

With the parameter Op.mode at 1p dead time, you determine if the stage is blocked during a 1-pole
dead time, or if it works in a non-directional manner, even if it is set for directional operation. When the 1-pole
dead time is complete, the corresponding device-internal signal is extended by the time of the parameter
Hold mode 1p dead time.
NOTE
i The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
with 3-pole tripping, this setting does not apply.
Blocking the Tripping by Pickup of the Main Protection Functions

The pickup and type of pickup for the main protection functions can block the tripping of the stage. You can
perform this setting via 2 parameters:
Blocking by
This setting is used to select the zone or stage at which blocking is to occur in the event of pickup.
Blocking by prot. pickup

This parameter is also used to set that no blocking should occur when the main protection has picked
up.

If the device is equipped with the additional Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer inrush currents.
stage picks up. The start of the time delay and tripping are however blocked. The stage signals this by way of
tripping delay (time delay) is started. After that time, the stage operates.
6.26.4 Application and Setting Notes for Direction Determination
Parameter: Limit Angle Region Forward

With the parameters Angle forward and Angle forward , you can change the location of the direc-
tional characteristic curve.
Siemens recommends using the defaults, because the function with these settings reliably determines the
direction.
Parameter: Minimum Negative-Sequence System Variables V2 and I2
Default setting (_:2311:107) Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 = 0.7 V
Default setting (_:2311:106) Min. neg.-seq. current I2 = 0.05 A

With the parameters Min. neg.-seq. voltage V2 and Min. neg.-seq. current I2, you can
specify the minimum negative-sequence system values for direction determination with V2 and I2. The set
limiting values must not be exceeded by operational unbalances.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.26.5 Application and Setting Notes for Stages

The stage will work with this setting even if no direction measurement is
possible, for example due to insufficient polarization voltage (or none at all), or
due to failure of the measuring voltage.
tion of the line).

If the device is equipped with the additional Inrush-current detection function, the stages can be stabilized
against tripping due to transformer inrush currents.
1) In cases where the device is not used on transformers.
2) In cases where the device is used on transformers and the threshold value
of the stage is set above the maximum inrush current of the transformer.
yes When the transformer inrush current detection detects an inrush current that
can lead to a tripping of the stage, the start of the time delay and tripping of the
stage are blocked.
Select this setting if the device is used on transformers and the threshold value
of the stage is set below the maximum inrush current of the transformer.
Parameter: Blocking by the main Protection
Recommended setting value (_:8101:140) Blocking by =

If you wish to give selective fault clarification through the main protection function precedence over tripping
through the directional negative-sequence protection, you can define this via the 2 parameters Blocking by
and Blocking by prot. pickup. The Blocking by parameter is used to select the zones or tripping
stages of the main protection function(s), upon whose pickup the negative-sequence protection is to be
blocked.
Parameter: Blocking by prot. pickup
Default setting (_:8101:130) Blocking by prot. pickup = every pickup

blocking.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

no pickup If the pickup of the main protection function should not lead to blocking of the
negative-sequence protection, select this setting.
Parameter: Op.mode at 1p dead time
Default setting (_:8101:129) Op.mode at 1p dead time = blocked

The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is used to define the behavior of the stage in the event of a 1-pole
interruption.
blocked The energy-transmission system is unbalanced in the 1-pole dead time. A
mode-dependent negative-sequence system results from this, which can lead
to an undesired pickup of the directional negative-sequence protection. That is
why blocking with this setting makes sense if the pickup threshold of the stage
is lower than/equal to the maximum mode-dependent negative-sequence
system current in the 1-pole dead time.
non-directional If the directional negative-sequence protection is to continue to work in the 1-
pole dead time, select this setting. The directional measurement works in a
non-directional manner, because a reliable direction dead time measurement is
not possible due to load current in the zero and negative-sequence system with
the circuit breaker open on one pole.
Set the pickup threshold of the stage higher than the maximum mode-
dependent negative-sequence system current in the 1-pole dead time.
NOTE
i The Op.mode at 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
Parameter: Hold mode 1-p dead time
Default setting (_:8101:112) Hold mode 1p dead time = 0.040 s

The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is used to define the time by which the device-internal signal for the
1-pole interruption is extended after the end of the 1-pole interruption.
maximum time between the switch-in of the 1st circuit breaker and the switch-in of the last circuit breaker at
all ends of the feeder after a 1-pole dead time.
NOTE
i The Hold mode 1p dead time setting is only available in devices with 1-/3-pole tripping. In devices
Parameter: Stabiliz. w. phase current
Recommended setting value (_:8101:111) Stabiliz. w. phase current = 10 %

In order to avoid unwanted pickups and tripping, the negative-sequence system current stage is stabilized
with the phase currents.
More information can be found in chapter 6.26.3 Function Description.
The threshold value increases as the phase currents increase.
Siemens recommends a default setting of 10 % under normal operations.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Define the pickup value corresponding to the application. In doing so, for the time-graded stages, the setting
for the superordinate and subordinate stages must be taken into account in the grading chart.
With a very sensitive setting, you must make sure that the negative-sequence system current does not lead
to undesired response of the stage due to unbalance (for example non-twisted line).

The tripping delay (time delay) to be set is derived from the time-grading schedule that has been prepared for
the system.
When selecting the current and time setting, pay attention to whether the stage must work dependent on the
direction.
6.26.6 Settings

General
_:2311:107 General:Min. neg.-seq. 0.150 V to 34.000 V 1.213 V
voltage V2
_:2311:106 General:Min. neg.-seq. 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
current I2 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
on
test
_:8101:114 Definite-T 1:Directional non-directional forward
mode forward
reverse
phase current
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 7.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 7.500 A
delay
multi-phase pickup
no pickup
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:8101:129 Definite-T 1:Op.mode at blocked blocked
1p dead time non-directional
_:8101:112 Definite-T 1:Hold mode 0.000 s to 60.000 s 0.040 s
1p dead time
configuration

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.27 Undercurrent Protection
The Undercurrent protection function (ANSI 37):

Detects the going current in a feeder after the opening of the infeed circuit breaker
Detects the loss of loads
Detects and protects pumps from running idle
The Undercurrent protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Undercurrent protection function comes with 1 protection stage preconfigured at the factory. A maximum
of 2 protection stages can be operated simultaneously in this function. The protection stages are structured
identically.
[lostuundcu-150813, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.27.3 Stage Description Undercurrent Protection
Logic of the Stage
[loundcur-200713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-362 Logic Diagram of the Undercurrent Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

This measurement method processes the sampled current values and numerically filters out the funda-
mental component.
Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:

This measurement method determines the current amplitude from the sampled values according to the
definition equation of the RMS value. Harmonics are included in the analysis.
Pickup Mode
The Pickup mode parameter defines whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).
Blocking the Stage

When blocked, the picked-up protection stage will drop out. Blocking the stage is possible externally or inter-
nally via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Activation and Blocking of the Stage Depending On the Circuit-Breaker Condition

With the parameter Activation, you define if the Undercurrent protection stage is always active or only
active if the circuit breaker is indicating closed.
If the parameter Activation is set to with CB closed and the local circuit breaker is not closed, the
function Undercurrent protection is blocked and no pickup is generated.
The circuit-breaker position is detected as closed if one of the following condition is met:
The binary inputs are connected to the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. The circuit-breaker switch
position is detected as closed via the related binary inputs of the Position indication. This is also true
under the condition that no phase current is flowing.
The current-flow criterion indicates that the circuit breaker is closed. This is also true under the condition
that the auxiliary contacts indicate the circuit breaker as open.
Parameter: Activation
Default setting (_:13051:103) Activation = with CB closed

with CB closed The Undercurrent protection is active only when the circuit-breaker position
is detected as closed.
A precondition is, that the Position indication is routed to binary inputs to
obtain the CB position information via the CB auxiliary contacts. If this is
not the case, the function will always be inactive.
always active The Undercurrent protection stage is always active independent of the
position of the circuit breaker.

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
comp.(standard method) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or
transient current peaks.
Siemens recommends using this method as default setting.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

RMS value Select this measurement method if you want the stage to take
harmonics into account (for example, at capacitor banks).
Default setting (_:13051:102) Pickup mode = 3 out of 3

Use the Pickup mode parameter to define whether the protection stage picks up if all 3 measuring elements
detect the undercurrent condition (3 out of 3) or if only 1 measuring element has to detect the undercur-
rent condition (1 out of 3).

Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) for the specific application.

Operate delay must be set according to the specific application. No general application notes can be given.
6.27.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
_:13051:103 Stage 1:Activation always active with CB closed
with CB closed
_:13051:8 Stage 1:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental
_:13051:102 Stage 1:Pickup mode 1 out of 3 3 out of 3
3 out of 3
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.28 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
Monitor the permissible voltage range
Protect equipment (for example, plant components, machines, etc.) against damages caused by over-
voltage
Decouple systems (for example, wind power supply)

Abnormally high voltages in power systems are caused by voltage controller failure at the transformer or on
long transmission lines under low-load conditions.
When using common-mode reactors in the protected power system, the device must shut down the line
quickly if the reactors fail (for example, due to fault clearance). The insulation is endangered by the over-
voltage condition.
Overvoltages at capacitor banks can be caused by resonances with line or transformer inductances.
In power plants increased voltage levels can be due to one of these factors:
Incorrect operation when controlling the excitation system manually
Failure of the automatic voltage controller
After full load shedding of a generator
Generators which are disconnected from the network or in island mode
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with voltage
measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Definite
time-overvoltage protection stages. In this function, the following stages can operate simultaneously:
3 stages Definite time-overvoltage protection
2 stages Inverse time-overvoltage protection
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
[dw3phovp-030211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[lo3phasi-090611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-364 Logic Diagram of the Definite Time-Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental comp.
or the RMS value.
Measurement fundamental comp.:
Measurement RMS value:

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the tripping stage analyzes the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
If the measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the function reports those measuring elements that have
picked up.
Blocking the Stage

binary input signal >Block stage.

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the stage uses the fundamental
component (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient
voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends this method of measurement as the default setting.
into account (for example, at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
value of the stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Default setting (_:181:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
Siemens recommends the measured value phase-to-phase as the
default setting.
phase-to-ground Select the phase-to-ground setting if you want to detect voltage unbal-
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
Default setting (_:181:3) Threshold = 110 V

Depending on the Measured value , the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity. The default setting assumes that the voltage range is monitored on long-distance
transmission lines under low-load conditions.
Default setting (_:181:6) Operate delay = 3 s

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The recommended set value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement
precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging can
be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
EXAMPLE
Example for 2-stage overvoltage protection
The example describes the possible settings for a 2-stage overvoltage protection function. We will look at the
settings of the parameters Threshold and Operate delay.
1. Stage:
To detect stationary overvoltages, set the threshold value of the first overvoltage-protection element at
least 10 % above the max. stationary phase-to-phase voltage anticipated during normal operation.
When setting the parameter Measured value to phase-to-phase voltage and a secondary rated
voltage of 100 V, the secondary setting value of the first overvoltage-protection element is calculated as
follows:
Threshold value: 10 % above Vrated
Vthreshold, sec = 1.1 Vrated, sec = 1.1 100 V = 110 V

This requires that the primary rated voltages of protected object and voltage transformer are identical. If they
are different, you have to adjust the pickup value.
For the Operate delay set a value of 3 s.
2. Stage:
The second overvoltage-protection stage is intended for high overvoltages with short duration. A high
pickup value is selected here, for example, 1.5 times the rated voltage. A time delay setting of 0.1 s to
0.2 s is sufficient then.
Stage Setting Values

Threshold value Time delay
1 Time delay 1.1 Vrated 3s
2 1.5 Vrated 0.1 s to 0.2 s
6.28.3.3 Settings

Definite-T 1
on
test
_:181:9 Definite-T 1:Measured phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
value phase-to-phase
_:181:3 Definite-T 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
ratio
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

delay
Definite-T 2
on
test
ratio
delay

(Type)
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
_:181:300 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:181:301 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:181:302 Definite-T 1:Pickup loop CA SPS O
Definite-T 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[lo3phinv, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-365 Logic Diagram of the Inverse Time-Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
or the RMS value.

Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
VAB, VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.
picked up.
Pickup and Operate Curve

When the input voltage exceeds the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks up
and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. Operate delay starts. The operate delay is the sum of
inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Where
Top Operate delay
Tinv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup, the time value Tinv is calculated for every input voltage exceeding the dropout threshold. An inte-
grator accumulates the value 1/Tinv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-
time delay expires. The additional time delay Tadd starts. The stage operates after the additional time delay
expires.
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwovpinv, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-366 Operate Curve of Inverse-Time Characteristic
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
Curve constant (parameter Charact. constant )
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage falls below the dropout threshold (0.95 pickup factor threshold value), the pickup signal
is going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time. Instan-
taneous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired
delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the pickup value is exceeded again
within this period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
Blocking the Stage

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

With the Method of measurement parameter, you define whether the tripping stage uses the fundamental
voltage peaks.
value of the tripping stage under 10 V for this method of measurement.
Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the tripping stage monitors the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC, and VCA or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the
default setting. In this case, the function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances and overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor
Default setting (_:3) Threshold = 110.000 V
Default setting (_:101) Pickup factor = 1.10

The stage picks up when the measured voltage value exceeds the pickup value Threshold Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as phase-
to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor parameter, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long-time operate delay after
pickup when the measured value is slightly over the threshold, Siemens recommends using the default
setting.
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.
Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant , Charact. constant c
Default setting (_:102) Charact. constant k = 1.00
Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant = 1.000
Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant c = 0.000

With the parameters Charact. constant k, Charact. constant , and Charact. constant c,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic curve.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).

With the Additional time delay parameter, you define a definite-time delay in addition to the inverse-
time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.
Default setting (_:107) Reset time = 0.00 s

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage falls
below the dropout threshold. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value (> 0 s) to ensure the operation. Otherwise Siemens
recommends to keep the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.
6.28.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
on
test
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup 1.00 to 1.20 1.10
factor
_:102 Inverse-T #:Charact. 0.00 to 300.00 1.00
constant k
constant
constant c
_:106 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:107 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Inverse-T #
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.29 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage (ANSI 59) is used to:
Detect symmetric stationary overvoltages
Supervise the voltage range if the positive-sequence voltage is the decisive quantity
Unbalanced overvoltages, for example, caused by ground faults and unbalanced faults, are not detected due
to the evaluation of the positive-sequence voltage.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage comes with 2 factory-set stages. A
maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
identical structure.
[dwovpu1s-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[logovpu1-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-368 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Blocking the Stage


The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.
Default (_:211:6) Operate delay = 3 s

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The default value of 0.95 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high measurement precision, the
Dropout ratio can be reduced, to 0.98, for example.
General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

If you want the tripping stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault
logging can be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
6.29.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
_:211:3 Stage 1:Threshold 0.300 V to 200.000 V 65.000 V
_:211:4 Stage 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
Stage 2
on
test
blocked yes

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.30 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function (ANSI 47) monitors the electrical power
system for voltage unbalance.
Voltage unbalances can be caused by various factors:
The most common cause is unbalanced load, caused by different consumers in the individual phases,
for example.
Other causes can include faults in the primary system, for example at the transformer or in installations
for reactive-power compensation.
Voltage unbalance can also be caused by phase failure, for example due to a tripped 1-phase fuse.
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups
The Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage function comes with 2 factory-set tripping stages.
A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
[dwu2ovps-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[lou21pol-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-370 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the negative-sequence voltage. The negative-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defined equation.
Blocking the Stage

When it is blocked, the tripping stage drops out. The following blocking options are available for the stage:
During a 1-pole dead time associated with the device's internal AR function. The occurring negative-
sequence system variable is determined only by the unbalanced power flow
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
From an internal source on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see Chapter
8.3.2.1 Overview of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that
the measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker The Blk. by meas.-volt.
failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not
block it.
Recommended setting value (_:301:3) Threshold = 5.8 V16

The Threshold is set according to the definition of the negative-sequence system.
Recommended setting value (_:301:6) Operate delay = 3 s

Operate delay must be set for the specific application.

precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.

on.



The following table provides application notes for interaction with other internal or external functions.
16 The specific setting limits depend on the transformer data and transformer connections set.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Interaction with: Note

External automatic If the device is working together with an external automatic reclosing function,
reclosing function or another protection device (working in parallel) is capable of 1-pole tripping,
External 1-pole tripping the stage must be blocked by the binary input signal >Block stage during 1-
protection pole disconnection.
6.30.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
_:301:10 Stage 1:Blk. by meas.-volt. no yes
failure yes
Stage 2
on
test
blocked yes
failure yes

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding
6.31 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and

Compounding
The Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding function (ANSI 59) detects
stationary overvoltages at the opposite line end.
On long, unloaded or weakly loaded transmission lines stationary overvoltages are caused by the capaci-
tance per unit length (Ferranti effect). The overvoltage is present at the opposite line end in this case, but it
can only be eliminated by switching off the local line end.
The Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage and compounding function is used in protection
function groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage Protection with Positive-sequence Voltage and Compounding comes with 2 factory-
set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping
stages have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured so that the line data parameters can act on all stages (see Figure 6-371).
[dwovpuko-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[lovpu1ko-090611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-372 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and
Compounding
The compounding calculates the positive-sequence system of the voltage at the opposite line end. For this,
the function uses the line data (X per length unit, C1 per length unit, Line angle, Line
length).
NOTE
i Compounding is not suitable for lines with series capacitors or common-mode reactor.
The voltage Vend at the remote line end is calculated from the voltage measured at the local line end and from
the flowing current based on the equivalent circuit diagram for the line (see Figure 6-373):
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fofuende-170309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
with
VEnd Calculated voltage at the opposite line end
Vmeas Measured voltage at the local line end
Imeas Measured current at the local line end
CB Effective capacitance of the line
RL Ohmic operating resistance of the line
LL Working inductance of the line
[dwerskom-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-373 Equivalent Circuit Diagram of the Line
Blocking the Stage

Line Data/Method of Measurement

For the correct calculation, the compounding function needs the line data. Values, which are unsuitable for
practical application have the result that the compounding calculates a too high voltage at the line end that
immediately initiates a pickup when measurands are applied. The line data (X per length unit, C1 per
length unit,C0 per length unit, Line angle, Line length) is set centrally in thepower-system
data (see Power-System Data chapter).
Compounding together with series capacitors is only possible if the voltage transformer is installed on the line
side of the capacitors. In this case, the model (see Figure 6-373) calculates the voltage at the opposite end
without corruption caused by the series voltage across the series capacitor.
To prevent that the compounding result is corrupted when using common-mode reactors, install the current
transformer on the line side (contrary to the usual recommendation). If common-mode reactors exist, the
function only has to be active at the line end without reactor. If the compensation is used for both ends, the
function must be inactive.

The Threshold is set according to the definition of the positive-sequence system.

Operate delay must be set for the specific application.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

General Notes
If the overvoltage is high, the first stage can trip with a short time delay. If overvoltages are lower, the second
stage can either only signal the threshold value violation (see Operation as monitoring function) or trip with a
longer delay to allow the voltage controller to regulate the voltage back into the nominal range.

6.31.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
Stage 2
on
test

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:V1 compounding MV O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.32 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function (ANSI 59):
Is used in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded systems to detect ground faults
Determines which phase is affected by the ground fault
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function is used in protection func-
tion groups, which are based on voltage measurement.
The Overvoltage protection with zero-sequence voltage/residual voltage function comes with 1 factory-set
stage. A maximum of 3 stages can be operated simultaneously in the function.
The stages have an identical structure.
[dwu0ovps-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[lou01pol-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-375 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual
Voltage
Measured Value, Method of Measurement

defining equation.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Use the Method of measurement parameter to select the relevant method of measurement, depending on
the application.
Measurement of the fundamental comp. (standard filter):
Measurement of the RMS value parameter value (true RMS):

the defining equation of the RMS value.
fund. comp. long filter (fundamental component over 2 cycle filters with triangular window):
component numerically. The extended filter length compared to the standard filter and the use of the
triangular window results in a particularly strong attenuation of harmonics and transient faults. The
extended filter length causes the pickup time to increase slightly compared to the standard filter (see
Technical Data).
Pickup, Dropout
The stage compares the threshold value with the zero-sequence voltage V0. The Pickup delay parameter
allows you to delay the pickup of the tripping stage depending on the residual voltage.
With the Dropout ratio parameter you can define the ratio of the dropout value to the threshold value.
Determination of the Faulty Phase

You can use the Detection of faulty phase parameter to enable or disable the determining of the
phase affected by the ground fault. Determining is released when the tripping stage picks up. If 2 phases
exceed the threshold value V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. and 1 phase falls below the threshold value
V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt., the last phase is considered to be affected by the ground fault and is
signaled as such.
Blocking the Stage

stage:
During 1-pole dead time of the device-internal automatic reclosing function (AR)
From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
b., which links in the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. The Blk. by meas.-volt.
block it.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

fundamental comp. This method of measurement suppresses the harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
fund. comp. long To implement particularly strong damping of harmonics and transient faults,
filter select this method of measurement. At 2 periods, the length of the filter is
longer than that of the standard filter.
Please note that in this case the pickup time of the stage increases slightly
(see Technical Data).
Recommended setting value (_:361:107) Pickup delay = 0 ms

The Pickup delay parameter allows you to delay the analysis of the measurand (to generate the pickup)
depending on the occurrence of the residual voltage. A pickup delay can be necessary if high transients are
anticipated after fault inception due to high line and ground capacitances.
Siemens recommends using the default setting Pickup delay = 0 ms.
Default setting (_:361:3) Threshold = 30 V17

The threshold value of the function is set as the zero-sequence voltage V0. The device calculates the zero-
sequence voltage V0 either from the residual voltage measured via the broken-delta winding or from the
3 phase-to-ground voltages.
The setting value depends on the system grounding:
Since virtually the full residual voltage occurs during ground faults in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-
grounded systems, the setting value is uncritical there. It should range between 20 V and 40 V. A higher
sensitivity (= lower threshold value) can be necessary for high fault resistances.
You should select a more sensitive (smaller) value in a grounded system. This value must be higher
than the maximum residual voltage anticipated during operation caused by system unbalances.
Example
For an isolated system
The residual voltage is measured via the broken-delta winding:
If the ground fault is fully unbalanced, a residual voltage of 100 V is present at the device terminals.
The threshold value should be set so that the stage picks up on 50 % of the full residual voltage.
At full residual voltage, the zero-sequence voltage is 100 V/3 = 57.7 V

Setting value: 0.5 * 57.7 V = 28.9 V 30 V

precision, the dropout ratio can be reduced to 0.98, for example.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The Operate delay allows you to prevent transient residual voltages from initiating a trip. The setting
depends on the specific application.

on.

Parameter: Detection of faulty phase
Default setting (_:361:109) Detection of faulty phase = no

The Detection of faulty phase parameter controls how the tripping stage responds to determine
which phase is affected by the ground fault.
no The phase affected by the ground fault is not determined.
Select the default setting if you do not want to use the tripping stage to detect
ground faults, e.g. for applications in grounded systems.
yes After a pickup by the residual voltage the device tries to determine, which
Select this setting for applications in isolated or arc-suppression-coil-grounded
systems.
Parameter: V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt.
Recommended setting value (_:361:104) V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40 V18

Set the threshold value for determining which phase is affected by the ground fault in the V< faulty ph-
to-gnd volt. parameter. The setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must be smaller than the minimum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting V< faulty ph-to-gnd volt. = 40 V.
Parameter: V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt.
Recommended setting value (_:361:101) V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75 V19

Set the threshold value for the two healthy phases in the V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. parameter. The
setting value is a phase-to-ground quantity.
The set value must lie above the maximum phase-to-ground voltage occurring during operation, but below
the minimum phase-to-phase voltage present during operation. At Vrated = 100 V, the value has to be set to 75
V, for example. Siemens recommends using the default setting V> healthy ph-to-gnd volt. = 75 V.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

6.32.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
failure yes
_:361:109 Stage 1:Detection of faulty no no
phase yes
_:361:8 Stage 1:Method of measure- fundamental comp. fundamental
ment fund. comp. long filter comp.
RMS value
_:361:107 Stage 1:Pickup delay 0.00 s to 320.00 s 0.00 s
_:361:101 Stage 1:V> healthy ph-to- 0.300 V to 200.000 V 75.000 V
gnd volt.
_:361:104 Stage 1:V< faulty ph-to-gnd 0.300 V to 200.000 V 40.000 V
volt.

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:361:300 Stage 1:Faulty phase ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.33 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 59) detects any 1-phase overvoltages and is
intended for special applications.
The Overvoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are based
on voltage measurement.
The function Overvoltage protection with any voltage comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 trip-
ping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dwovpuxs-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[louxovpr-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-377 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Measured value is not visible.
Measurement of the parameter value RMS value:

Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Blocking the Stage


fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
into account (for example at capacitor banks). Do not set the threshold
Default setting (_:391:9) Measured value = VA measured

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC (VC measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)
Measured voltage VN (VN measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)
Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)

The selection depends on the corresponding application.
NOTE
i If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the parameter
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Depending on the measured value, the Threshold is set either as Measured voltage or as Phase-to-
phase quantity.



6.33.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
_:391:9 Stage 1:Measured value VA measured VA measured
VB measured
VC measured
VAB measured
VBC measured
VCA measured
VN measured
VAB calculated
VBC calculated
VCA calculated
V0 calculated
ment RMS value comp.
Stage 2
on
test
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

VB measured
VC measured
VAB measured
VBC measured
VCA measured
VN measured
VAB calculated
VBC calculated
VCA calculated
V0 calculated
ment RMS value comp.

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.34 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage (ANSI 27) is used to:
Protect equipment (for example, plant components and machines) against damages caused by under-
voltage
Handle disconnection or load shedding tasks in a system
The Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is used in protection function groups with voltage
measurement.
The Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 2 Defi-
nite time-undervoltage protection stages.
In the function Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage, the following stages can be operated simultane-
ously:
3 stages Definite time-undervoltage protection
2 stages Inverse time-undervoltage protection
Stages that are not preconfigured are shown in gray in the following figure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protection
stages (see Figure 6-378). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you can only
set the current-flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstru3p-110211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[louvp3ph-140611-01_stagecontrol.vsd, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[louvp3ph-140611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
With the Method of measurement parameter, you select the relevant method of measurement, depending
on the application.
Measurement fundamental component:

Measured Value
With the Measured value parameter, you define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
picked up.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup Mode
With the Pickup mode setting, you define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-value
violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in all 3
measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
If the circuit breaker opens when the current-flow criterion is being used, the undervoltage detection and
current-flow dropout functions conflict with one another. Depending on the threshold value settings for under-
voltage detection and current-flow criterion, it is possible that the undervoltage is detected before the current-
flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay parameter to
prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved by
delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Current-Flow Criterion
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
criterion works across all tripping stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Figure 6-380 illustrates the influence of the current-flow criterion.
NOTE
i If the (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion parameter is deactivated, the device picks up imme-
diately if a missing measuring voltage is detected while the undervoltage protection is active. The param-
eter setting can be changed even when the device has picked up.
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage will be reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
From inside on pick up of the measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-voltage
failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
block it.

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

voltage peaks.
Siemens recommends using this parameter value as the default setting.
Recommended setting value (_:421:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC. Parameter Value

phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.

The Threshold is set in accordance with the Measured value as either a phase-to-phase or phase-
to-ground variable.
For the default setting, the lower limit of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80% of the rated
voltage of the protected object.
EXAMPLE:
Rated voltage of the protected object: Vrated, obj.= 10 kV
Voltage transformer:
Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.
The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[foschwlw-190309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Recommended setting value (_:421:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
value violation in one measuring element (1 out of 3) or when there is a lower threshold-value violation in
all 3 measuring elements (3 out of 3).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects
how the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4,
SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).
Default setting (_:421:102) Pickup delay = no

The Pickup delay parameter is only available if you are using the current-flow criterion of the function
(parameter Current-flow criterion = on). If the current-flow criterion is deactivated, no pickup delay is
required.
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
40 ms or not. The delay avoids possible brief pickup of the stage when the circuit breaker opens.
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted tripping,
you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.
Default (_:421:6) Operate delay = 3 s


The recommended set value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).

on.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Parameter: Current-flow criterion
Recommended setting value (_:2311:104) Current-flow criterion = on

Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged either on the supply side or the junction
side. These 2 possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping
and opening of the circuit breaker:
If they are located on the supply side, the voltage remains on
If they are located on the junction side, the voltage is cleared.

on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup fall back when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off Since the voltage is switched off, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
stage persists when the current-flow criterion is not used.
Parameter: Threshold I>
Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit-breaker is closed. Siemens
recommends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated trans-
former current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer will extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To
speed up dropout, increase the default setting.

If you want the stage to have a reporting effect only, generation of the operate indication and fault logging can
be disabled via the Operate & flt.rec. blocked parameter.
6.34.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:104 General:Current-flow off on
criterion on
_:2311:101 General:Threshold I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Definite-T 1
on
test
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:421:101 Definite-T 1:Pickup 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
mode 3 out of 3
_:421:102 Definite-T 1:Pickup no no
delay yes
ratio
delay
Definite-T 2
on
test
_:422:101 Definite-T 2:Pickup 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
mode 3 out of 3
_:422:102 Definite-T 2:Pickup no no
delay yes
ratio
delay

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Current flow-criterion SPS I
_:2311:300 General:Current crit. fulf. SPS O
Group indicat.
Definite-T 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Definite-T 2
Logic
[lo_UVP3ph_In_StageControl, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_UVP3ph_In, 2, en_US]
or the RMS value.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measured Value
Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage analyzes the phase-to-phase voltages
picked up.
Pickup Mode
Use the Pickup mode parameter to define whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
Pickup and Operate Curve

When the input voltage falls below the threshold value by a settable value Pickup factor, the stage picks
up and the inverse-time characteristic curve is processed. The operate delay starts. The operate delay is the
sum of inverse-time delay and additional time delay.
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
TInv Inverse-time delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)
After pickup the time value TInv is calculated for every input voltage less than the dropout value. An integrator
accumulates the value 1/TInv. Once the accumulated integral reaches the fixed value 1, the inverse-time delay
expires. The stage operates after the additional time delay.
The inverse-time delay is calculated with the following formula:
[fo_UVP3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Where
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
Curve constant (Parameter Charact. constant )
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)
The inverse-time characteristic is shown in the following figure:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwUVP3ph_inverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-383 Inverse-Time Characteristics for Undervoltage Protection
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion
of the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay parameter to
prevent the stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens. This is achieved by
delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
Dropout Behavior
When the voltage exceeds the dropout value (1.05 x pickup factor x threshold value), the pickup signal is
going and the dropout is started. You can define the dropout behavior via parameter Reset time. Instanta-
neous reset takes place by setting Reset time to 0 s. A delayed reset takes place by setting the desired
delay time.
During the Reset time (> 0 s), the elapsed operate delay is frozen. If the stage picks up again within this
period, the stage operates when the rest of operate delay expires.
The undervoltage protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage-protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded. A current below the minimum current blocks
the stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal >Current flow-crite-
rion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked-up stage is reset. The following blocking options are available for the
stage:
From inside on pick up of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see chapter 8.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions ) . The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set so that measuring-
voltage failure detection blocks the stage or does not block it.
block it.

Use the Method of measurement parameter to define whether the stage uses the fundamental compo-
nent (standard method = default setting) or the calculated RMS value.
voltage peaks.
Recommended setting value (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-phase

Use the Measured value parameter to define whether the stage monitors the phase-to-phase voltages VAB,
VBC, and VCA, or the phase-to-ground voltages VA, VB, and VC.

phase-to-phase If you want to detect voltage dips caused by multiphase short circuits, or
generally monitor the voltage range, keep phase-to-phase as the default
setting. The function will not pick up on ground faults.
default setting.
ances or overvoltage conditions caused by ground faults.
Parameter: Threshold, Pickup factor
Default setting (_:109) Pickup factor = 0.90
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The stage picks up when the measured voltage value falls below the pickup value Threshold Pickup
factor.
Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as phase-to-phase quantity or as
phase-to-ground quantity.
With the Pickup factor, you modify the pickup value. To avoid a long operate delay time after pickup,
Siemens recommends using the default value of Pickup factor .
Specify the Threshold (pickup threshold) and Pickup factor for the specific application.
Recommended setting value (_:101) Pickup mode = 1 out of 3

With the Pickup mode parameter, you specify whether the stage picks up when there is a lower threshold-
1 out of 3 Use this setting for protection applications or for monitoring the voltage
range.
Siemens recommends 1 out of 3 as the default setting. This reflects
how the function behaved in previous generations (SIPROTEC 4,
SIPROTEC 3).
3 out of 3 Select this setting when using the stage to disconnect from the power
system (in the case of wind farms, for example).
Default setting (_:102) Pickup delay = no

required.
With the parameter Pickup delay, you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want stage pickup to be subject to a
time delay in the event of a fault. This setting results in pickup and, where
applicable, tripping being performed as quickly as possible.
Note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can result in brief
pickup of the stage, depending on the threshold-value settings for under-
voltage pickup and the current-flow criterion. To prevent unwanted tripping,
you must set a minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB) are not
permitted to result in stage pickup.
Note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This delay is added to
the operate time.
Parameter: Charact. constant k, Charact. constant , Charact. constant c
Default setting (_:103) Charact. constant k = 1.00
Default setting (_:104) Charact. constant = 1.000
Default setting (_:105) Charact. constant c = 0.000

With the Charact. constant k, Charact. constant , and Charact. constant c parameters,
you define the required inverse-time characteristic.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

With the Time dial parameter, you displace the characteristic curve in the time direction.
As usually, there is no time grading for voltage protection and therefore no displacement of the characteristic
curve, Siemens recommends leaving the Time dial parameter at 1.00 (default setting).
Default setting (_:108) Reset time = 0.00 s

With the Reset time parameter, you define the reset time delay which is started when the voltage exceeds
the dropout value. Set the parameter Reset time to 0 s when instantaneous reset is desired.
Under network conditions of intermittent faults or faults which occur in rapid succession, Siemens recom-
mends setting the Reset time to an appropriate value > 0 s to ensure the operation. Otherwise, Siemens
recommends to keep the default value to ensure a fast reset of the function.

time delay.
If the setting is left on its default value of 0 s, only the inverse-time delay is operative.
Default setting (_:10) Blk. by meas.-volt. failure = yes

on.
breaker (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions ).


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers are arranged either on the supply side or the junction
side. These 2 possible voltage-transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping
and opening of the circuit breaker:
If they are located on the supply side, the voltage remains on.
If they are located on the junction side, the voltage is cleared.

on If the voltage transformers are located on the junction side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup fall back when the current falls
below a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off Since the voltage is switched off, the pickup of the undervoltage protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.34.4.3 Settings

Inverse-T #
on
test
_:10 Inverse-T #:Blk. by no yes
_:9 Inverse-T #:Measured phase-to-ground phase-to-phase
_:8 Inverse-T #:Method of fundamental comp. fundamental
_:101 Inverse-T #:Pickup 1 out of 3 1 out of 3
mode 3 out of 3
_:102 Inverse-T #:Pickup delay no no
yes
_:3 Inverse-T #:Threshold 0.300 V to 175.000 V 80.000 V
_:109 Inverse-T #:Pickup 0.80 to 1.00 0.90
factor
constant k
constant
constant c
_:107 Inverse-T #:Additional 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time delay
_:108 Inverse-T #:Reset time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s

(Type)
Inverse-T #
_:300 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop AB SPS O
_:301 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop BC SPS O
_:302 Inverse-T #:Pickup loop CA SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.35 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function (ANSI 27) is used to:
Protect equipment (for example, plant components and machines) from damage caused by under-
voltage
2-phase short circuits or ground faults lead to an unbalanced voltage collapse. In comparison to three 1-
phase measuring systems, such events have no noticeable impact on the positive-sequence voltage. This
makes this function particularly suitable for the assessment of stability problems.
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function is used in protection function groups,
The Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage function comes with 2 factory-set tripping stages.
A maximum of 3 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an
The protection function is structured in such way that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage
protection stages (see Figure 6-384). If the protection function group used has no current measurement, you
can only set the current- flow criterion as fulfilled via the corresponding binary input signal.
[dwstuvu1-110211-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[louvpu1p-280912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-385 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage
The stage uses the positive-sequence voltage. The positive-sequence voltage is calculated from the meas-
ured phase-to-ground voltages according to the defining equation.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Pickup Delay
The Pickup delay parameter is only available and of relevance if you are using the current-flow criterion of
the function (parameter Current-flow criterion = on).
flow criterion has dropped out. In this case, the tripping stage picks up briefly. Use the Pickup delay
parameter to prevent the tripping stage from briefly picking up in this way when the circuit breaker opens.
This is achieved by delaying pickup by approximately 40 ms.
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The Current-flow
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is activated, the undervoltage protection stages only pick
up if a settable minimum current (Threshold I>) is exceeded in at least one phase. A current below the
minimum current blocks the tripping stages.
The current-flow criterion can also be set to fulfilled with the binary input signal Threshold I>. The function
reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

stage:
During a 1-pole dead time associated with the device's internal AR function. The reduced positive-
sequence system variable, which occurs when the voltage transformer is located on the output side, is
only conditional upon the unbalanced power flow. A fault in the electrical power system has no effect on
this reduced positive-sequence system variable.
From inside on pickup of the Measuring-voltage failure detection function (see section 8.3.2.1 Overview
of Functions). The Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter can be set to either block or not block
the tripping stage when the measuring-voltage failure detection picks up.
failure parameter can be set to either block or not block the tripping stage when the measuring-
voltage failure detection picks up.

For the default setting, the lower limit of the voltage range to be monitored is assumed to be 80% of the rated
voltage of the protected object.
EXAMPLE:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Rated voltage of the protected object (for example, the Vrated,obj. = 120 kV
line):
Voltage transformer:
Threshold value: 80 % of Vrated, obj.
With regard to the setting, please note that according to the definition, with symmetrical voltages the value of
the zero-sequence voltage must correspond to Vrated/3.
[foswprim-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The secondary setting value is calculated as follows:
[foswseku-280211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Default setting (_:511:101) Pickup delay = no

required.
With the parameter Pickup delay you set whether pickup of the stage is to be delayed by approximately
no Use this setting if you definitely do not want tripping-stage pickup
to be subject to a time delay in the event of a fault. This setting
results in pickup and, where applicable, tripping being performed
as quickly as possible.
Please note that switching procedures (opening of the CB) can
result in brief pickup of the tripping stage, depending on the
threshold-value settings for undervoltage pickup and the current-
flow criterion. To prevent unwanted tripping, you must set a
minimum tripping delay of 50 ms.
yes Use this setting when switching procedures (opening of the CB)
are not permitted to result in tripping-stage pickup.
Please note that pickup is delayed by approximately 40 ms. This
delay is added to the operate time.


The recommended set value of 1.05 is appropriate for most applications. To achieve high-precision meas-
urements, the Dropout ratio can be reduced (to 1.02, for example).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

on.


Depending on the system, the voltage transformers can be located on the supply or the outgoing side. These
2 possible voltage transformer locations induce a different behavior of the function after tripping and opening
of the circuit breaker:
If they are located on the supply side, the voltage remains on
If they are located on the output side, the voltage is switched off

on If the voltage transformers are located on the output side, you can use the
current-flow criterion to make the pickup fall back when the current falls below
a minimum value (parameter Threshold I>).
off Since the voltage is switched off, the pickup of the undervoltage-protection
Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Threshold I> = 0.05 A

The Threshold I> parameter makes it possible to detect when the circuit-breaker is closed. Siemens
recommends setting the Threshold I> parameter to 5% of the rated current. With a secondary rated trans-
former current of 1 A, the secondary setting value for Threshold I> would be 0.05 A.
If the sensitivity of the Threshold I> parameter is set too high, compensation processes in the secondary
circuit of the current transformer will extend the dropout time when breaking extremely high currents. To
speed up dropout, increase the default setting.


The following table provides application notes for interaction with other internal or external functions.
Interaction with: Note
External automatic If the device interacts with an external automatic reclosing function or is
reclosing function capable of 1-pole tripping of protection equipment (operating in parallel), the
External 1-pole tripping tripping stage of the undervoltage protection must be blocked via the binary
protection input signal >Block stage while 1-pole disconnection is being performed.
Failure to observe this results in the tripping stage picking up and tripping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.35.5 Settings

General
criterion on
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.050 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.250 A
Stage 1
on
test
volt. failure yes
_:511:101 Stage 1:Pickup delay no no
yes
Stage 2
on
test
volt. failure yes
_:512:101 Stage 2:Pickup delay no no
yes

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Stage 1
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.36 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage (ANSI 27) detects any 1-phase undervoltage and is
intended for special applications.
The Undervoltage protection with any voltage function is used in protection function groups, which are based
on voltage measurement.
The function Undervoltage protection with any voltage comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 trip-
ping stages can be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The protection function is structured such that one current-flow criterion can act on all undervoltage protection
stages (see Figure 6-386).
[dwstuvux-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of a Stage
[louvpuxx-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-387 Logic Diagram of a Stage: Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage
NOTE
i If the function is used in 1-phase function groups, the parameter Measured value is not available.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measured Value
The parameter Measured value allows you to select whether the stage uses a measured (directly
connected) voltage or a calculated phase-to-phase voltage.
If the function is used in 1-phase function groups, the parameter Measured value is not available.
The undervoltage-protection stages work optionally with a current-flow criterion. The current-flow criterion
works across all stages.
When the Current-flow criterion parameter is switched on, the undervoltage protection stages only
pick up when the current-flow criterion has been set to fulfilled via the binary input signal >Current flow-
criterion. The function reports when the current-flow criterion is fulfilled.
NOTE
Blocking the Stage

In the event of blocking, the picked up stage will be reset. Blocking the stage is possible externally or inter-

fundamental comp. Select this method of measurement to suppress harmonics or transient voltage
peaks.
Default setting (_:571:9) Measured value = VA measured

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which voltage is monitored by the stage.
The scope of setting options depends on the connection type for the voltage transformers and the routing of
the measured values to the terminals of the voltage measuring point. You can find connection examples for
voltage transformers in the Appendix.
The following setting options can be available:
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA (VA measured)
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB (VB measured)
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC VC measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB measured)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA measured)
Measured voltage VN (VN measured)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB (VAB calculated)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC (VBC calculated)
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA (VCA calculated)
Calculated voltage V0 (V0 calculated)

The selection depends on the corresponding application.
NOTE
i If the function is used in 1-phase function groups, the parameter Measured value is not available.

Depending on the Measured value, the Threshold is set either as measured voltage or as a phase-
to-phase variable.


precision, the Dropout ratio can be reduced to 1.02, for example.

on Because of the application, it makes sense that the stage is only active (that is,
not blocked) when a certain current flow is present (see note).
off Current flow monitoring does not make sense for the application.
NOTE
i Because of the flexible setting options of the voltage measurand, the function itself does not determine the
current associated with the voltage. A suitable current-flow monitoring function must be created by the
user with the Continuous Function Chart (CFC), and connected to the binary input signal >Current
flow-criterion.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.36.5 Settings

General
criterion on
Stage 1
on
test
VB measured
VC measured
VAB measured
VBC measured
VCA measured
VN measured
VAB calculated
VBC calculated
VCA calculated
V0 calculated
Stage 2
on
test
VB measured
VC measured
VAB measured
VBC measured
VCA measured
VN measured
VAB calculated
VBC calculated
VCA calculated
V0 calculated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.37 Fault Locator
6.37 Fault Locator
The Fault locator function serves for measuring the fault distance in the event of a short circuit.
Quick determination of fault location and the associated rapid troubleshooting increase the availability of the
line for the power transmission in the electrical power system. Determining the fault location is based on the
loop-impedance calculation of short-circuited measuring loops.
The Fault locator function is used in the Line protection function group.
[dwstrufo-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The recording of phase currents and voltages is a prerequisite for calculation of fault locations. The Fault
locator function contains all necessary control parameters.
Fault-point calculation starts only if the functions Distance protection, Differential protection, Ground-fault
protection or Overcurrent protection are picked up or triggered.
Starting Conditions
The fault location is an independent function with its own measurand memory and its own filter algorithms. To
define the valid measuring loop and the most favorable time interval for the measured variable saving, only a
start command is required by the short-circuit protection. The fault location can be started by tripping of the
short-circuit protection or also at each pickup. If another protection device causes the disconnection of a
short-circuit, a fault-location calculation is then also possible for each pickup. In the event of a fault outside
the line to be protected, the fault-location indication cannot always be relevant, however, because the meas-
urands can be falsified by the center infeed for example.
Determining the Fault Location

The recorded sampled values of the short-circuit voltage and voltage are frozen shortly after tripping of the
protection. No error in the measured value has then occurred through the switch-off process, even in the case
of very fast circuit-breakers. The measurands and the impedance calculations are automatically filtered and
only indicate a steady-state measured value in the determined data window.
After disconnection of the short-circuit, the measured values are analyzed and the fault location calculated
from the short-circuit loops. If no fault location can be calculated, the indication FO invalid is output.
Output of the Fault Location

The following results for the fault location are output:
Short-circuit loop determined from the fault reactance
Fault reactance X in primary
Fault resistance R in primary
Fault impedance in polar coordinates (amount in , angle in degrees)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.37 Fault Locator
Fault distance d of the line proportional to the reactance in kilometers or miles, converted on the basis of
the parameterized reactance per unit length of the line
Fault distance d as a percentage of the line length, calculated on the basis of the parameterized reac-
tance per unit length and the parameterized line length
Selected fault loop for calculation of the fault location
NOTE
i Specification of distance in kilometers, miles, or percent is relevant only for homogenous line sections. If
the line comprises parts which exhibit different reactances per unit of length (for example, overhead-line-
cable sections), you can then analyze the reactance determined from the fault location for separate calcu-
lation of the fault distance.

In the event of ground faults on double lines, the values determined for the impedance calculation are influ-
enced by the coupling of the ground impedances of both line systems. Without special measures, this leads
to measuring errors in the impedance-calculation result. The device is therefore equipped with parallel-line
compensation. This parallel-line compensation takes into account the ground current of the parallel line in the
line equation and consequently compensates the coupling influence, similar to determining of the distance in
distance protection. The ground current of the parallel line must be connected to the device and configured
for this. The parallel-line compensation applies only to faults on the line to be protected. Compensation is not
possible for faults located externally including those on the parallel line.
You can activate and deactivate the parallel-line compensation with the Parallel-line compensat.
parameter.
Measured-Value Correction at Load Current on Lines Fed on Both Sides

In the case of faults on lines fed on both sides and with load transport (see next figure), the fault voltage F1
is not only influenced by the source voltage 1, but also by the source voltage 2, if both voltage sources feed
to the common fault resistance RF. Without special measures, this leads to measuring errors in the impe-
dance-calculation result, since the current component F2 cannot record at the measuring point M. For long
lines and lines subject to high loads, this measuring error can be considerable in the crucial X component of
the fault impedance (for the distance calculation).
The fault location has a load compensation, which corrects this measuring error in 1-pole short-circuits. A
correction is not possible for the R component of the fault impedance. However, the measuring error is not
critical here, as only the X component is decisive for the fault distance.
The load compensation acts in 1-phase short circuits. In doing so, both the positive-sequence and zero-
sequence system of the balanced components are analyzed for the correction. You can activate and deacti-
vate the load compensation via the Load compensation parameter.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.37 Fault Locator
[dwfailur-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-389 Fault Currents and Voltages in a Line Fed on Both Sides
M Measuring point
S1, S2 Source voltage (EMF)
IF1, IF2 Partial fault currents
IF1 + IF2 Total fault current
VF1 Fault voltage at the measuring point
RF Common fault resistance
ZF1, ZF2 Fault impedances
ZF1gnd, Ground fault impedances
ZF2gnd
ZS1, ZS2 External impedances
ZS1gnd, Ground external impedances
ZS2gnd
The function requires the following key line data to calculate fault distance:
Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
Residual-compensation adjustment factors in the setting format KR and KX or K0
NOTE
i The visibility of the parameter Parallel-line compensat. depends on the selected setting format of
the Line.
The parameter Parallel-line compensat. is visible if you have connected a parallel line for the
device.
Parameter: Start
Default setting (_:101) Start = with pickup

The Start parameter is used to define the criterion for starting the fault location.
with pickup The calculation of a fault location occurs with dropout of the protection
pickup.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.37 Fault Locator

with trip The calculation of a fault location is started upon tripping of the protection
function.
Parameter: Parallel-line compensation
Default setting (_:102) Parallel-line compensat. = no

If you wish to apply the parallel-line compensation for double lines, set the Parallel-line compensat.
parameter to yes .
no The parallel-line compensation is deactivated with this setting.
yes The parallel-line compensation becomes effective with this setting.
The following conditions have to be fulfilled so that the parallel-line compensation functions:
Connect the ground current of the parallel line in the correct polarity to an additional current input.
Set the input used for the parallel current in the correct ratio to the phase currents for the power-system
data.
Set the coupling impedances to the parallel system for the line data.
Parameter: Load compensation
Default setting (_:103) Load compensation = no

The Load compensation parameter can be used to correct measuring errors for 1-pole short circuits on
lines fed on both sides. This is the case for overhead lines without grounding cable or with unfavorable
grounding conditions of the towers, if high transition resistances can occur in the event of 1-pole short
circuits.
no The load compensation is deactivated with this setting.
yes The load compensation becomes effective with this setting.
6.37.5 Settings

Fault locator
_:1 Fault locator:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Fault locator:Start with operate with going
with going pickup pickup
_:102 Fault locator:Parallel-line no yes
compensat. yes
_:103 Fault locator:Load no no
compensation yes

(Type)
Fault locator
_:54 Fault locator:Inactive SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.37 Fault Locator

(Type)
_:52 Fault locator:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Fault locator:Health ENS O
_:302 Fault locator:Fault resistance prim. MV O
_:303 Fault locator:Fault reactance prim. MV O
_:308 Fault locator:Fault resistance sec. MV O
_:309 Fault locator:Fault reactance sec. MV O
_:304 Fault locator:Fault distance MV O
_:305 Fault locator:Fault distance in % MV O
_:306 Fault locator:Fault loop ENS O
_:307 Fault locator:FLO invalid ENS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.38 Overfrequency Protection
The Overfrequency protection function (ANSI 81O):

Detect overfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
Disconnect generating units when the power frequency is critical
Provide additional turbine protection if the speed limiter fails

Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed.
Overfrequency is caused by load shedding (island network), power system disconnection or disturbances of
the frequency controller. Overfrequency implies a risk of self excitation of machines which are connected to
long lines without load.
Overfrequency protection is available in two functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Overfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The overfrequency protection function comes with 2 factory-set stages. A maximum of 3 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dwstofqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.38.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lostofqp-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-391 Logic Diagram of the Overfrequency-Protection Stage
Frequency-Measurement Method
Overfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
Angle-difference method (method A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short pickup
time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps during
switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Functional Measured Value

The angle-difference method provides the following measured value:
Value Description
f Calculated frequency with the angle-difference method
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

The sampling frequency tracking makes an additional frequency-operating range possible. If the stage has
picked up before leaving the frequency-operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set
minimum voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

Blocking will cause a tripping stage that has picked up to dropout. The following blocking options are avail-
able for the stage:
Externally or internally via the logical binary input >Block stage
Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Frequency-Measurement Description
Method
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
Recommended setting value (_:31:3) Threshold = 50.20 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the overfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 50.20 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.
Recommended setting value (_:31:6) Operate delay = 10 s

The Operate delay parameter is used to set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.
Parameter: Minimum voltage
Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37.5 V

For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the protected object's rated voltage is recommended.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
Parameter: Dropout differential
Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz

Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold ) of the tripping stage is set to 50.20 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 50.10 Hz.
Application example of the overfrequency protection

Overfrequency protection can be used for monitoring the frequency range. If the frequency deviates from the
rated frequency by for example, 0.2 Hz, a fault indication is generated. The trip command is delayed to avoid
overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example, switching operations). A delay of a few seconds (for
example, 10 s) is deemed to be a good value. You can leave the Dropout differential at the default
value of 20 mHz. The following table shows a setting recommendation.
For this application, 1 stage of the overfrequency protection is used. The following table shows a setting
suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1> Warning 50.20 Hz 60.20 Hz 10.00
f2> Not used (OFF) - - -
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.38.5 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V 37.500 V
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
_:31:3 Stage 1:Threshold 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz 51.50 Hz
Stage 2
on
test
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015


(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Undervoltage blocking SPS O
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.39 Underfrequency Protection
The Underfrequency protection function (ANSI 81U) is used to:

Detect underfrequencies in electrical power systems or machines
Monitor the frequency band and output failure indications
Decouple power systems
Load shedding to ensure power system stability and protect motors
Disconnect generating units when the power system frequency is critical (for example, f < 0.95 frated)
Frequency deviations are caused by an unbalance between the active power generated and consumed.
Underfrequency is caused by an increase of the consumers' active power demand or by a decrease of the
power generated. These conditions occur in the case of power system disconnection, generator failure, or
disturbances of the power and frequency controller.
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations (selectable from the DIGSI functions
library). The functional configurations differ in the frequency measurement method they use.
The Underfrequency protection function is used in protection function groups, which are based on voltage
measurement.
The Underfrequency protection function comes with 3 factory-set stages. A maximum of 5 tripping stages can
be operated simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The parameters Dropout differential and Minimum voltage are set for all stages.
[dwstufqp-090211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.39.3 Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lostufqp-040411-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-393 Logic Diagram of the Underfrequency-Protection Stage
Underfrequency protection is available in 2 functional configurations. These work with different frequency-
measurement methods. You select the frequency-measurement method in dependence of the application.
Angle-difference method (method A):
The angle-difference method determines the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage in multiphase
systems. In the case of 1-phase connection, it always processes the phasor of the connected voltage.
Since the change of angle of the voltage phasor over a given time interval is proportional to the
frequency change, the current frequency can be derived from it.
Filtering method (method B):

The filtering method processes the instantaneous voltage values and determines the current frequency
using a suitable combination of filters. The frequency-protection function selects automatically the
largest voltage as the measurand. In a multiphase connection, the phase-to-phase voltage is always the
largest. If in a multiphase connection the selected voltage is no longer available, the function changes
over automatically to the next maximum voltage. The function can even operate with just one voltage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Both methods of measurement are characterized by a high measuring accuracy combined with a short
response time. Disturbance values such as harmonics, high frequency disturbances, phase-angle jumps
during switching operations and compensation processes due to power swings are effectively suppressed.
Behavior on Leaving the Operating Range

The sampling frequency tracking makes an additional frequency-operating range possible. If the stage has
picked up before leaving the frequency-operating range and the measuring voltage is higher than the set
minimum voltage, the pickup is maintained. A dropout of the pickup is only possible by means of a blocking.
Blocking the Stage

Blocking will cause a tripping stage that has picked up to dropout. The following blocking options are avail-
able for the stage:
Internally when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
The frequency measurement method is selected with the functional configuration from the DIGSI functions
library. The letter at the end of the function name describes the method of measurement.
Redundant solutions can be implemented by combining 2 different methods of frequency measurement. You
can implement a 2-out-of-2 decision by connecting the operate indications of both functions in a CFC with a
logical AND gate. This increases the reliability of protection.
Method of Measurement Description
Angle difference method Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
(method A) used for the protection of machines.
Filtering method (method B) Select this method of measurement if the frequency protection stage is
used in an electrical power system.
Recommended setting value (_:61:3) Threshold = 49.80 Hz for frated = 50 Hz
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the underfrequency protection stage in
dependence of the application. 49.8 Hz is a typical warning threshold in 50-Hz systems.

The Operate delay parameter is used to set the stage so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences
(for example, switching operations) are avoided. Fairly high time delays are sufficient for warning indications.
Recommended setting value (_:2311:101) Minimum voltage = 37 500 V

For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the protected object's rated voltage is recommended.
When determining the setting value, please keep in mind the measurement method and the measuring
connection that you have selected. If you work with the positive-sequence voltage, remember that the
maximum voltage is equal to the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
Recommended setting value (_:2311:109) Dropout differential = 20 mHz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Due to the high-precision frequency measurement, the recommended setting value for the Dropout
differential can remain at 20 mHz. If in your application you wish a subsequent dropout of the tripping
stage, then increase the setting value of the dropout differential. For instance, if the pickup value (parameter
Threshold ) of the tripping stage is set to 49.8 Hz and the Dropout differential to 100 mHz, the
stage will drop out at 49.9 Hz.
Application example of the underfrequency protection

Frequency protection can be used for load shedding. The UCTE has defined a 5-stage plan for the Western
European power grid. The setting values of the stages are based on that plan (see table below).
Table 6-17 Stage Plan
Frequency Activity
49.80 Hz Alarm and activation of reserves following an established plan
49.00 Hz Undelayed disconnection of 10 % to 15 % of the power system load
48.70 Hz Undelayed disconnection of another 10 % to 15 % of the power system
load
48.40 Hz 3rd load shedding stage. Another 15 % to 20 % of the power system load is
disconnected.
47.50 Hz Power plants are decoupled from the electrical power system
For this application, 3 stages of the underfrequency protection are used. 2 of these stages are used for load
shedding. The following table shows a setting suggestion.
Stage Caused by Setting Values
At frated = 50 Hz At frated = 60 Hz Delay
f1< Warning 49.80 Hz 59.80 Hz 10.00
f2< 1st load shedding 49.00 Hz 59.00 Hz 0.00
f3< 2nd load shedding 48.70 Hz 58.70 Hz 0.00
NOTE
i This table shows one example of a possible frequency protection setting. The setting values can differ
depending on the application.
6.39.5 Settings

General
_:2311:109 General:Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2000 mHz 20 mHz
Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Stage 2
on
test
blocked yes
Stage 3
on
test
blocked yes

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Stage 2
Stage 3
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.40 Rate of Frequency Change Protection
The function Rate of frequency change protection is used to:

Detect a frequency change quickly
Prevent the system from not secure states caused by unbalance between the generated and consumed
active power
Network decoupling
Load shedding
The function Rate of frequency change protection can be used in protection function groups containing a
3phase voltage measurement.
2 function block types are available:
df/dt rising
df/dt falling
The function Rate of frequency change protection is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 df/dt rising
stage and 1 df/dt falling stage. A maximum of 5 df/dt rising stages and 5 df/dt falling stages can operate
simultaneously within the function. Both of the function block types are similar in structure.
Undervoltage check and df/dt calculation are general functionalities and take place on the function level. All
stages use these general functionalities.
[dwdfdt01-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
6.40.3 Rate of Frequency Change Protection (Undervoltage Check, df/dt Calculation)
Logic
The following figure represents the logic of undervoltage check and df/dt calculation. It applies to all types of
stages.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lodfdtgf-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-395 Logic Diagram of General Functionality
Measurand
This function uses the frequency calculated via the angle difference algorithm.
For more information, refer to chapter 6.38.3 Overfrequency-Protection Stage .
The frequency difference is calculated over a settable time interval (default setting: 5 periods).
The ratio between the frequency difference and the time difference reflects the frequency change which can
be positive or negative.
A stabilization counter works to avoid overfunction. This counter is increased if the set threshold value is
exceeded. If the value drops below the threshold value, the counter is reset immediately. The counter is set to
8 internally and is activated at each half system cycle.
Undervoltage Blocking
If the measuring voltage drops below the Minimum voltage, the Rate of frequency change protection is
blocked because precise frequency values cannot be calculated anymore.
Recommended setting value (_:13171:101) Minimum voltage = 37.500 V

For the Undervoltage blocking, 65 % of the rated voltage of the protected object is recommended.
The method of measurement uses the phasor of the positive-sequence voltage. When determining the setting
value, keep in mind that the absolute value of the sound positive-sequence voltage is equal to the absolute
value of the phase-to-ground voltage. The default setting is referred to this value.
Parameter: Measuring window
Default setting (_:13171:137) Measuring window = 5 periods

You can use the Measuring window parameter to optimize the measuring accuracy or the pickup time of
the function. For information regarding pickup time and measuring accuracy, refer to the technical data.
The default setting provides maximum measuring accuracy. If you do not have specific requirements for a
decreased pickup time, Siemens recommends using the default setting.
The default setting is a reasonable compromise between measuring accuracy and pickup time. For a non-
sensitive setting (high threshold value), you can set the parameter Measuring window to a smaller value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[lodfdtst-160113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-396 Logic Diagram of Rate of Frequency Change Protection
(1) For the stage type df/dt rising, the value df/dt rising is used.
Frequency Rising/Falling
The stage df/dt falling is used to detect frequency falling and the stage df/dt rising is used to detect frequency
rising.
You set the threshold value as an absolute value. You define the frequency-change direction via the selected
stage type.

Via the binary input signal >Block stage
Via the undervoltage blocking when the voltage drops below the Minimum voltage
Default setting (_:13231:3) Threshold = 3.0 Hz/s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The pickup value depends on the application and is determined by power-system conditions. In most cases, a
network analysis will be necessary. A sudden disconnection of loads leads to a surplus of active power. The
frequency rises and causes a positive frequency change. On the other hand, a failure of generators leads to a
deficit of active power. The frequency drops and results in a negative frequency change.
The following relations can be used as an example for estimation. They apply for the change rate at the
beginning of a frequency change (approximate 1 s).
Where:
frated Rated frequency
P Active power change
P = PConsumption - PGeneration
Srated Rated apparent power of the machines
H Inertia constant
Typical data for H:

For hydro generators (salient-pole machines) H = 1.5 s to 6 s
For turbine-driven generators (non-salient pole rotors) H = 2 s to 10 s
For industrial turbine-driven generators H = 3 s to 4 s
EXAMPLE
frated = 50 Hz
H=3s
Case 1: P/Srated = 0.12
Case 2: P/Srated = 0.48
Case 1: df/dt = -1 Hz/s
Case 2: df/dt = -4 Hz/s

You can use the Operate delay parameter to avoid overfunction due to disturbing influences (for example,
switching operations). If the protection function is supposed to respond quickly, set the Operate delay
parameter to 0 s.
For monitoring small changes (< 1 Hz/s), a small time delay is useful to avoid overfunctioning.
Recommended setting value (_:13231:4) Dropout differential = 0.10 Hz/s

You can use the Dropout differential parameter to define the dropout value. The recommended value
is 0.10 Hz/s.
NOTE
i In case of power-system incidents, especially in case of transmission incidents and influence of voltage-
stabilizing measures via power-electronic components (reactive-power compensation through SVC), the
magnitude and the phase angle of the voltage can change. Sensitive settings can lead to overfunction.
Therefore, it is reasonable to block the Rate of frequency change protection if other protection functions,
for example, residual voltage or negative-sequence voltage, pick up. To do this, use the blocking input
>Block stage and connect it via CFC.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.40.4.3 Settings

General
_:13171:137 General:Measuring window 2 periods to 5 periods 5 periods
df/dt falling1
_:13231:1 df/dt falling1:Mode off off
on
test
_:13231:2 df/dt falling1:Operate & no no
_:13231:3 df/dt falling1:Threshold 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s 3.0 Hz/s
_:13231:4 df/dt falling1:Dropout differ- 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
ential
_:13231:6 df/dt falling1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
df/dt rising1
_:13201:1 df/dt rising1:Mode off off
on
test
_:13201:2 df/dt rising1:Operate & no no
_:13201:3 df/dt rising1:Threshold 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s 3.0 Hz/s
_:13201:4 df/dt rising1:Dropout differ- 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s 0.10 Hz/s
ential
_:13201:6 df/dt rising1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
df/dt falling1
_:13231:81 df/dt falling1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13231:54 df/dt falling1:Inactive SPS O
_:13231:52 df/dt falling1:Behavior ENS O
_:13231:53 df/dt falling1:Health ENS O
_:13231:55 df/dt falling1:Pickup ACD O
_:13231:56 df/dt falling1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:13231:57 df/dt falling1:Operate ACT O
df/dt rising1
_:13201:81 df/dt rising1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13201:54 df/dt rising1:Inactive SPS O
_:13201:52 df/dt rising1:Behavior ENS O
_:13201:53 df/dt rising1:Health ENS O
_:13201:55 df/dt rising1:Pickup ACD O
_:13201:56 df/dt rising1:Operate delay expired ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:13201:57 df/dt rising1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.41 Phase-Rotation Reversal
The Phase-sequence switchover function enables correct execution of the protection of the device and super-
vision functions, independently of the phase sequence in a system or system section.
The phase sequence is set via parameters. You can select between the phase sequences ABC or ACB .
Binary inputs provide the option of switching over the phase sequence contrary to the parameter setting. By
changing over the phase sequence you temporarily change the direction of rotation in motors for example.
The phase sequence has an effect on calculation of the positive-sequence system and negative-sequence
system values and on calculation of phase-to-phase values. A phase-rotation reversal therefore has an effect
on all protection and supervision functions that use these values.
You can change the phase sequence in 2 ways via binary inputs.
Change over the phase sequence for the entire device.
In doing so, all 3-phase measuring points are switched over. All analog inputs are therefore affected (for
example, current and voltage inputs simultaneously).
Changing over the phase sequence per measuring point.

In doing so, only the activated measuring points are switched over. The other measuring points remain
unaffected.
The Phase-sequence switchover function is integrated in the Power-system data. You will find the signals in
the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Parameters. There you will find the parameter for setting
the phase sequence and the binary inputs via which you can influence a change in the phase sequence.
[dwphrein-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
General
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter. You will find
the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Parameters Power-system data
General. There are 2 methods to change the phase sequence for different operational requirements.
With the binary signal >Phs-rotation reversal you change over the phase sequence of all meas-
uring points.
With the binary signal >Invert Phases you change over the phase sequence per measuring point.
The Inverted phases parameter available per measuring point is used to set which phases at the
measuring point must be swapped. The parameter can be found at each 3 phase measuring point.
The two mechanisms are explained separately below.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Switchover of the Phase Sequence of All Measuring Points

The direction of rotation of the currents and voltages depends on the phase sequence. The following drawing
shows the vector definitions for the 2 phase sequences.
[dwphrdrf-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-398 Vector with Different Phase Sequences
The phase sequence of a system or a system section is defined when parameterizing via the Phase
sequence parameter. The setting parameter acts on all measuring points.
The operationally induced switchover between the phase sequence ABC and the phase sequence ACB is
initiated via the binary input >Invert Phases . This switches over the phase sequence simultaneously at
all 3-phase measuring points.
The following image shows a logic diagram for determining the current phase assignment and switchover.
The indications shown on the right show the present phase sequence. If the phase sequence is set via the
Phase sequence parameter to ABC , the activation of the binary input will result in a switchover to the
phase sequence ACB .
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. If the current and voltage values of all 3-phase measuring
points are below 5 % of the nominal variable, this is recognized as machine standstill.
A renewed machine standstill must be detected for a resetting of the phase sequence to the set preferred
position.
[dwphrpsys1-151013, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-399 Phase Sequence Switchover
Changing Over the Phase Sequence per Measuring Point

A switchover of the phase sequence per measuring point can also be necessary for operational reasons. This
switchover enables proper performance of the protection devices at the transition from generator operation to
motor operation (pump operation).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following example shows an application in a pumped storage plant. The switchover of the phase
sequence (change in rotational direction) realizes the transition there from generator operation to motor oper-
ation. Which phases and measuring points are changed over depends on the conditions in the system.
[dwphrapp-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-400 Application Example for Phase-Rotation Reversal in a Pump Station
The example shows 2 differential protection devices (IED1 and IED2) and an impedance protection (IED3)
with the connected measuring points.
The phase sequence is insignificant for the differential protection of IED1, as the protected object is not
affected by the switchover option of the phase sequence.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the differential protection of IED2, as the protected object extends
beyond the switchover option.
The phase sequence is also relevant to the impedance protection (IED3). Depending on the switch position,
the voltage measured values 1 and the current measured values 3 have a different phase sequence.
The phase sequence of the system is set in the device via the Phase sequence parameter for generator
operation. The Inverted phases parameter is used to set which phase is swapped for the relevant meas-
uring point. The swap is communicated to the measuring point via the binary input signal >Invert
Phases . The changed phase sequence is then included for calculation of the measurands at the measuring
point.
In accordance with Figure 6-400 , the phase sequence is set to ABC . A is swapped with C in motor opera-
tion. The Inverted phases parameter must be set to AC for the current measured values 2 and current
measured values 3 measuring points. As a result, the phase assignment for the differential protection IED2
and the impedance protection IED3 is correct. The positive-sequence and negative-sequence current is
calculated correctly.
The following logic diagram shows the principle for determining the present phase assignment and measured
variables with the example of currents.
The switchover of the phase sequence is only authorized for a time at which no measured values are
pending. The switchover command must be present for at least 200 ms. The change of phase sequence is
only permissible when the machine is at standstill. In doing so, the system checks for the measuring point to
be switched over whether the measured variables are below 5 % of the nominal variables. If the currents of
the measuring points current measured values 2 and current measured values 3 in the example fall below
5 % of their nominal variables, machine standstill is detected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lophrgph-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-401 Measured Values for Changed-Over Phases
Parameter: Phase sequence
Default setting (_:101) Phase sequence = ABC
ABC Phase sequence A, B, C

ACB Phase sequence A, B, C
Default setting (_:106) Inverted phases = none
none No phase exchange

AC Conductor A changed over with conductor C
BC Conductor B changed over with conductor C
AB Conductor A changed over with conductor B
Input signal: >Phs-rotation reversal

The binary input >Phs-rotation reversal is used to switch over between the phase sequence ABC
and the phase sequence ACB . The switchover direction depends on the setting of the Phase sequence
parameter. In doing so, the phase sequence of all 3-phase measuring points is changed.
Input signal: >Invert Phases

The binary input >Invert Phases is used to activate the setting of the parameter Inverted phases . In
doing so, the phase sequence of the selected measuring point is changed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.41.5 Settings

General
_:101 General:Phase sequence ABC ABC
ACB
General
_:101 VT 3-phase:Rated primary 0.20 kV to 1200.00 kV 400.00 kV
voltage
_:102 VT 3-phase:Rated secon- 80 V to 230 V 100 V
dary voltage
_:103 VT 3-phase:Matching ratio 0.10 to 9.99 1.73
Vph / VN
_:104 VT 3-phase:VT connection 3 ph-to-gnd volt. + VN 3 ph-to-gnd
3 ph-to-gnd voltages volt. + VN
3 ph-to-ph voltages
_:106 VT 3-phase:Inverted none none
phases AC
BC
AB
_:111 VT 3-phase:Tracking inactive active
active
_:107 VT 3-phase:Measuring- 0 to 100 0
point ID

(Type)
General
_:500 General:>Phs-rotation reversal SPS I
_:501 General:>Invert Phases SPS I
General
_:319 General:Phase sequence ABC SPS O
_:320 General:Phase sequence ACB SPS O
_:321 General:Freq.out of oper.range SPS O
_:322 General:f sys MV O
_:323 General:f track MV O
General
_:315 VT 3-phase:Phases AB inverted SPS O
_:316 VT 3-phase:Phases BC inverted SPS O
_:317 VT 3-phase:Phases AC inverted SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.42 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
The Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function serves for immediate tripping when switching onto a
fault.
The function does not have its own measurement and must be linked to another protection function with the
pickup (measurement).
The function Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault can be used in all protection function groups.The
function is preconfigured with a stage. A maximum of 2 tripping stages can be operated simultaneously in the
function. The stages have an identical structure.
[dwstrsto-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic of the Stage
[logisotf-170312-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-403 Logic Diagram of the Stage Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault
Connection of the Stage

The stage is intended to initiate instantaneous tripping when switching onto a fault. To do this, the stage must
be connected to one or more pickups from protection functions or protection stages, for example, to Distance
protection pickup or the pickup of an overcurrent-protection stage . That is, the stage of the Instantaneous
tripping at switch onto fault function does not have its own measuring function but requires the pickup of
another protection function or protection stage to pick up.
The stage is active only if switching is pending or executed (for this, see section 6.6 Distance Protection with
Classic Method or 6.16 Overcurrent Protection, Phases ).
NOTE
i If the pickup of a protection stage takes place and tripping is blocked by the Inrush-current detection func-
tion, no pickup of the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function takes place. In this case, there is
no fault recording neither. Despite this, if a fault recording is necessary, you can activate it with the param-
eter (_:114) Start flt.rec of the Inrush-current detection function (see chapter 6.49 Inrush-Current
Detection ).
Parameter: Configuration
Default setting (_:5941:102) Configuration = no stage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Configuration parameter is used to define with which pickup of a protection function or protection
stage the Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault function responds.
Normally, the pickups of protection functions and stages with high fault current are selected:
Distance Protection
Overcurrent protection (phase and ground)
Directional time-overcurrent protection (phase and ground)
Ground-fault protection for grounded systems

A specific protection stage is generally used. This can be one of the protection stages provided for the protec-
tion application, which itself trips with a delay. An additional protection stage with settings optimized for this
use case, for example, increased threshold value and blocking of self-tripping, can also be used.

When switching onto a fault, the tripping should usually be instantaneous. The tripping delay is therefore set
to 0.
6.42.5 Settings

Stage 1
on
test
blocked yes
_:5941:102 Stage 1:Configuration Setting options depend on config-
uration

(Type)
Group indicat.
Stage 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.43 Thermal Overload Protection, 3-Phase
The Thermal overload protection function (ANSI 49) is used to:

Protect the equipment (motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables)
against thermal overloads
Monitor the thermal state of motors, generators, transformers, capacitors, overhead lines, and cables
The Thermal overload protection function is used in protection function groups with current measurement.
The Thermal overload protection function is steplessly preconfigured.
[dwtolpst-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lopttrdi-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-405 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection Function
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the phase currents on the basis of a thermal
single-body model according to the thermal differential equation with
[fo_diffgl-170914, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the following standardization:
[fo_normie-170914, 2, en_US]
Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum

permissible phase current k Irated, obj
Amb Standardized ambient temperature, where Ambdescribes the coupled ambient
temperature. The coupled ambient temperature Amb can be the measured
ambient temperature or the ambient temperature preset using the Default
temperature parameter.
rated obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
th Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object
k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The
factor refers to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated, obj)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the assigned protected object side:
In the case of transformers, the rated current of the winding to be protected, which the device calculates
from the set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
The uncontrolled winding forms the basis in the case of transformers with voltage control
In the case of generators, motors and reactors, the rated current, which the device calculates from the
set rated apparent power and rated voltage, is decisive.
In the case of lines, nodes and busbars, the rated current of the protected object is set directly
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature end. The time constant th determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold warn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit Off (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-406 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-406 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)
The overtemperature is calculated separately for each phase. The current overtemperature can be obtained
from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent. An indication of 100 % means that the thermal
threshold has been reached. The maximum overtemperature of the phases is regarded as the tripping
temperature. This means that the highest of the 3 phase currents is always assumed.
The analysis of the RMS values of the currents over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
If the flowing current falls below an adjustable minimum current Imin cooling, the Cooling time
constant is activated.
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration. The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit increases.
The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter temperature rise at Irated).
The measured ambient temperature is measured by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit serial of the function group Analog trans-
former. When using the Temperature sensor parameter, the respective temperature sensor can be
selected.
If the temperature measurement is faulty, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the device reports this. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured
last or the value set under the Default temperature parameter, depending on which value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits, motor startup currents). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica
must be influenced for overcurrents (exceeding lthreshold). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Freezing of the thermal memory
Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping temperature)
is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection avoided. At
a normal K-factor of 1.1 , a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the trip
command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see Technical Data).
Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure

The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the setting parameter
Storage of thermal replica. You can save the thermal state for a time of 500 min. Once the supply
voltage returns, the thermal replica continues to function with the saved thermal state.
If the thermal replica is not saved, it will be reset to 0 upon failure of the auxiliary voltage.
Resetting the Thermal Map

You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica. The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.
Emergency Start
Depending on the operating conditions, tripping can be blocked or closure enabled despite the permissible
thermal limits being exceeded. Upon activation of the binary input signal >Emergency start, tripping is
blocked and closure enabled. This does not affect the state of the thermal memory. After the input >Emer-
gency start disappears, the blocking remains in effect for the set Emerg. start T overtravel.
Blocking the Function

Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The tripping function can be blocked externally or inter-
nally by the binary input signal >Block stage.
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
Functional Measured Values
Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

(_:601:305) Time until Expected time until tripping s s s
trip
(_:601:304) Time until Time until close release s s s
close
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Values Description Primary Secondary % Referenced to

(_:601:306) Overload Thermal measured values of % % Tripping temperature
phase A the phases
(_:601:307) Overload
phase B
(_:601:308) Overload
phase C
(_:601:309) Overload Thermal measured value of % % Tripping temperature
maximum the overload protection
(_:601:310) Equival. Current measured value which A A Rated operating current
current phs A serves as basis for the over- of the primary values
(_:601:311) Equival. load measured value
current phs B
(_:601:312) Equival.
current phs C
(_:601:313) Equival. Maximum current measured A A Rated operating current
current max. value which serves as basis of the primary values
for the overload measured
value
Parameter: Threshold current warning
Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A at Irated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for the K-factor .
Parameter: Threshold thermal warn.
Recommended setting value (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %

The default setting can be left at a K-factor , of 1.1, as the thermal memory results for 83 % at continu-
ously flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to ( K-factor )2 and
x % corresponds to 12.
[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is already 91 % filled. Increase the
Threshold thermal warn. to 95 %.
Parameter: Dropout threshold operate
Recommended setting value (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %

The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to drop out pickup and tripping when the value
drops below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended.
You can select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling or longer blocking of
closing.
Note that the calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.
Parameter: Emerg. start T overtravel
Default setting (_:112) Emerg. start T overtravel = 6300 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
This functionality is not required for protection of lines and cables. If the logical binary indication is not routed,
the Emerg. start T overtravel will be ineffective. The Emerg. start T overtravel presetting
can therefore be retained.
Parameter: K-factor
Recommended setting value (_:106) K-factor = 1.1

The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous
load. The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, cable) is the basic current for overload
sensing.
You can determine the K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:
[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or from
the specifications of the manufacturer!
In the case of cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section, insulation material,
design type, and the manner in which the cables have been laid. In the case of overhead lines, an overload of
10 % is permissible.
EXAMPLE
For the Permissible Continuous Current
Cross-linked polyethylene cables (N2XS2Y): 10 kV 150 mm2 (Cu)
Current-carrying capacity (underground laying): Imax, perm = 406 A
Selected K factor of 1.1
This yields a rated current of Irated, obj= 369 A
Parameter: Thermal time constant
Default setting (_:110) Thermal time constant = 2777 s (46.29 min)

The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the tripping characteristics of the stage. If no
data on the Thermal time constant is available, you can determine this from the short-time current-
rating capacity of the cable, for example, from the 1-s current. The 1-s current is the maximum current
permissible for 1 s application time. The 1-s current can be found in the cable specifications. Calculate the
Thermal time constant according to the following formula:
[fodauers-170309-07.tif, 2, en_US]
If the short-term current-rating capacity is specified for an application time other than 1 s, use the short-time
current instead of the 1-s current. Multiply the result by the specified application time.
For a given short-term current-carrying capacity of 0.5 s, use the following formula:
[fodauers-170309-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE for a Cable

For a cable
Permissible continuous current: Imax, perm = 406 A
Maximum short-circuit current for 1 s: I1s = 21.4 kA
Therefore, for the Thermal time constant, it follows
[fokonsta-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
with 46.29 min = 2777 s
Parameter: Cooling time constant
Recommended setting value (_:111) Cooling time constant = 2777 s

The Cooling time constant parameter is used to define the dropout behavior of the stage. Cables and
overhead lines have the same time constant for both heating and cooling. Therefore, set the same value for
the Cooling time constant as for the parameter Thermal time constant .
Parameter: Imax thermal
Recommended setting value (_:107) Imax thermal = 2.5 A at Irated = 1 A
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected threshold current of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
Parameter: Imin cooling
Recommended setting value (_:108) Imin cooling = 0 A

If only the thermal time constant (parameter Thermal time constant ) must provide protection, set the
current parameter Imin cooling to 0 A.
Parameter: temperature rise at Irated
Default setting (_:109) temperature rise at Irated = 70 K

As a value, set the overtemperature that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the rated
current and at an ambient temperature of 40C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object. You
can find the temperature value in the technical data of the equipment or measure it. If you use a temperature
sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or the coolant tempera-
ture from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually,
you will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute
temperature is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (max) and the temperature rise at Irated
(rated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120C (80 K + 40C) can be derived when using a temperature sensor for
the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155C (105 K + 40C) derives.
From these values, the K factor can be derived:
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If you select a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
NOTE
i For electrical machines, the limits can vary depending on the type of coolant.
Consult the machine manufacturer to agree on a setting value for the overtemperature.
Parameter: Storage of thermal replica
Recommended setting value (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no

If a continuous auxiliary voltage for the bay units is ensured, the bay default setting can be retained.
Parameter: Behav. at I> Imax therm.
Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = freeze therm. rep.
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected to be compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further
temperature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.
freeze therm. rep. If input currents exceed the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value is
provided to enable compatibility with older products!
current limiting The input currents are limited to the value set in the Imax thermal param-
eter. If the measured current exceeds the set current value, the limited current
value is supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current threshold is
approx. 2 to 2.5 Irated, obj.
Parameter: Temperature sensor
Default value (_:44) Temperature sensor = none

With the Temperature sensor parameter, you determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) is used to measure the ambient tempera-
ture of the protected object and feed it to the device via an RTD unit. The Thermal overload protection func-
tion receives the measured temperature value via the functions RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit Serial from the
function group Analog transformer.
Parameter: Default temperature
Recommended setting value (_:118) Default temperature = 40C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Default temperature is set as ambient temperature under the following conditions:
No temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is connected.
The temperature measurement is faulty and the last measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Parameter: Minimal temperature
Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20C

If the measured ambient temperature drops below the set value, the set value is assumed as the ambient
temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this temperature
drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal temperature is also
used.
6.43.5 Settings

49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & no no
_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:112 49 Th.overl. #:Emerg. 0 s to 15000 s 300 s
start T overtravel
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:111 49 Th.overl. #:Cooling 10 s to 60000 s 3600 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
thermal 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:108 49 Th.overl. #:Imin 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A 0.500 A
cooling 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.00 A to 50.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.000 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated
_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of no no
thermal replica yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm. freeze therm. rep.
_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55C to 55C 40C
temperature
_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55C to 40C -20C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration

(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:502 49 Th.overl. #:>Emergency start SPS I
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase A MV O
_:307 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase B MV O
_:308 49 Th.overl. #:Overload phase C MV O
_:309 49 Th.overl. #:Overload maximum MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs A MV O
_:311 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs B MV O
_:312 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current phs C MV O
_:313 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current max. MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function (ANSI 49) is used to:
Protect the equipment (reactors or resistors in the neutral point of a transformer) from thermal overload
The Thermal overload protection 1-phase function is used in 1-phase protection function groups with current
measurement..
The Thermal overload protection, 1-phase function is steplessly preconfigured.
[dwtolp1p-270613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lotolp1p-250713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-408 Logic Diagram of the Thermal Overload Protection Function
Thermal Replica
The protection function calculates the overtemperature from the current flowing in the protected object (for
example, reactor or resistance in the transformer neutral point) on the basis of a thermal single-body model
according to the thermal differential equation with
[fodiffgl-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With the following standardization:
[fonormie-310510-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Current overtemperature, in relation to the final temperature at a maximum

permissible current k Irated, obj
V Standardized ambient temperature, where Amb describes the coupled ambient
temperature. The coupled ambient temperature Amb can be the measured
ambient temperature or the ambient temperature preset using the Default
temperature parameter.
rated obj Overtemperature of the protected object set at rated current
th Thermal time constant (temperature rise/cooling) of the protected object
k This factor indicates the maximum continuous permissible phase current. The
factor refers to the rated current of the protected object (k = Imax/Irated, obj)
Irated., obj Rated current of the protected object
At the same time, Irated, obj is the rated current of the protected object.
In a steady state, the solution to the thermal differential equation is an e-function whose asymptote repre-
sents the final overtemperature end. The time constant th determines the rise. After reaching an initial adjust-
able overtemperature threshold warn (Threshold thermal warn.), a warning indication is given.
If the overtemperature limit Off (tripping overtemperature) is exceeded, an operate indication is immediately
issued and the equipment disconnected from the power supply. This threshold is specified at 100 % and
corresponds to the final temperature set at a flowing permissible continuous current (Imax).
Figure 6-409 shows the temperature rise at different overload currents and the supervision thresholds.
[dwtempve-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-409 Temperature History for Different Overload Currents (K-factor = 1.1)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The current overtemperature can be obtained from the operational measured values. It is shown in percent.
An indication of 100 % means that the thermal threshold has been reached.
The analysis of the RMS value of the current over a broad frequency band also includes the harmonic
components. These harmonic components contribute to the temperature rise of the equipment.
Ambient Temperature
This function can take the ambient temperature into consideration The reference temperature of the thermal
model is 40 C. If the ambient temperature drops below the reference temperature, the thermal limit
increases. The equipment can be stressed more. If the ambient temperature is higher, the conditions change.
The Default temperature parameter can be used to fix or measure the ambient temperature. The
Minimal temperature parameter limits the coupled ambient temperature. If the measured ambient
temperature is lower than the minimum temperature, the minimum temperature is processed in the thermal
model.
The ambient temperature refers to the overtemperature of the protected object, which sets itself at the rated
current (parameter temperature rise at Irated).
The measured ambient temperature is recorded by an external RTD unit (RTD = Resistance Temperature
Detector) and provided by the functions RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit serial of the function group Analog units.
When using the Temperature sensor parameter, the respective temperature sensor can be selected.
If the temperature measurement is disrupted, for example, due to an open circuit between the device and the
RTD unit, the device will report it. In this case, the process continues with either the temperature measured
last or the value set under the Default temperature parameter, whichever value is the highest.
Current Influence
The thermal replica based on the single-body model applies with limitations to high overcurrent situations
(short circuits). To avoid an overfunction of the overload protection, the thermal replica must be influenced for
overcurrents (exceeding llimit). You can select between 2 strategies for this:
Freezing of the thermal memory
Limitation of the input current for the thermal replica to the set current. The temperature rise is thereby
retarded at high currents.
Warning Thresholds
The thermal warning threshold issues a warning indication before the tripping threshold (tripping temperature)
is reached. In this way, for example, a load can be reduced in sufficient time and a disconnection avoided. At
a normal K-factor of 1.1, a thermal memory value of 83 % sets in at continuously flowing rated current.
Apart from the thermal warning threshold, the overload protection also has a current-warning threshold. This
current-warning threshold can signal an overload current in sufficient time before the overtemperature value
has reached the warning or tripping threshold.
Dropout of Tripping
Once the thermal memory has fallen below the setting value of the Dropout threshold operate, the trip
command is cancelled upon tripping. In contrast, the current-warning threshold and the thermal warning
threshold are reduced at a fixed dropout threshold (see technical data).
Behavior in the Event of Auxiliary-Voltage Failure

The behavior of the thermal replica can be controlled upon auxiliary-voltage failure via the Storage of
thermal replica parameter. You can save the thermal state for a down time of 500 min. If the supply
voltage returns, the thermal replica continues to function with the saved thermal state.
If the thermal replica is not saved, it will be reset to 0 upon failure of the auxiliary voltage.
Resetting the Thermal Map

You can reset the thermal memory via the binary input indication >Reset thermal replica. The thermal
memory will then have a 0 value. A reparameterization will also lead to resetting the thermal memory.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Blocking the Function

Blocking will cause a picked up function to be reset. The function can be blocked externally or internally by
the binary input signal >Block stage.
All indications then drop out and the thermal memory is set to the value 0.
Blocking Closure
The signal Block close can be used to prevent closure of the protected object at a high thermal load. The
signal is set if the tripping overtemperature is exceeded, and cancelled if the temperature falls below the
dropout threshold.
Functional Measured Values

(_:310) Equival. current Besides the thermal measured values in percent, the equivalent
current is also issued as a thermal current-measured value (A or
kA). The current equivalent is the primary current, which corre-
sponds to the thermal measured value in percent, assuming
steady-state conditions.
(_:304) Time until close The Time until close is the expected time until it is possible
for the protected object for reclosure. The calculation of this
value is based on the assumption of constant currents. The
thermal replica has then fallen below the setting value of the
dropout threshold.
(_:305) Time until trip The Time until trip is the expected time until tripping
(100 % value exceeded) occurs. The calculation of this value is
based on the assumption of constant currents.
(_:306) Overload The value Overload indicates the current temperature of the
protected object in percent. Tripping occurs if 100 % is
exceeded.
Parameter: Threshold current warning
Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold current warning = 1.1 A for lrated = 1 A
Set the threshold to the maximum permissible continuous current (Imax, perm). This results in the same setting
value as for K-factor.
Parameter: Threshold thermal warn.
Recommended setting value (_:104) Threshold thermal warn. = 90 %

The default setting can be left at a K-factor of 1.1, because the thermal memory sets itself to 83 % at
continuously flowing rated current. The calculation uses the rule of three: 100 % corresponds to (K-factor)2
and x % corresponds to 12.
[fowarnsc-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
At a K-factor of 1.05, the thermal memory for rated current is 91% filled. Increase the Threshold
thermal warn. to 95%.
Parameter: Dropout threshold operate
Recommended setting value (_:105) Dropout threshold operate = 90 %
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Dropout threshold operate parameter is used to cancel pickup and tripping when the value drops
below this threshold. A setting on the order of magnitude of the warning threshold is recommended. You can
select a lower setting value for special applications, desired additional cooling, or longer blocking of switching
on.
The calculation of the operational measured value Time until close refers to this value.
Parameter: K-factor
Recommended setting value (_:106) K-factor = 1.1

The K-factor parameter is used to describe the limiting value for the maximum permissible continuous
load. The rated current Irated, obj of the protected object (for example, resistance) is the basic current for over-
load sensing.
You can determine K-factor on the basis of the thermally permissible continuous current Imax, perm.:
[fotolpkf-100810-01.tif, 2, en_US]
NOTE
i The thermally permissible continuous current for the protected object is known from relevant tables or from
the specifications of the manufacturer!
Siemens recommends using the default value as it is a typical value for many applications.
Parameter: Thermal time constant
Default value (_:110) Thermal time constant = 900 s (15 min)

The Thermal time constant parameter is used to define the operate curve of the stage. If no time
constant is given, you can derive it from other values.
EXAMPLE
Protection of a current-limiting resistance
Rated current of the resistance: Irated = 100 A
Values for the overload capability:
1.1 Irated permanent (k-Factor = 1.1; k = 1.1)
1.5 Irated for 20 s for charge by cold
The following time constant results from these assumed values:
[fo_time_constance_11082015, 1, en_US]
For Thermal time constant, set 26 s.

The following time-dependent characteristic results from the data. In case of a current increase to 1.5 I rated,
the tripping occurs in 20 s.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwtime-dependent-110815-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Parameter: Imax thermal
Recommended setting value (_:107) Imax thermal= 2.5 A for lrated = 1 A
The Imax thermal parameter allows you to set the threshold current for the Behav. at I> Imax
therm. parameter. The selected current threshold of 2.5 Irated, obj is a practicable value.
Parameter: temperature rise at Irated
Default setting (_:109) temperature rise at Irated = 70 K
NOTE
i For an application as a 1-phase overload protection, the ambient temperature measured via the tempera-
ture sensor is not taken into account. Therefore, the setting has no influence. You can keep the default
setting. If you take into account the temperature, note the following descriptions.
Set the overtemperature as the value that is the result if the equipment is continuously operated with the
rated current and at an ambient temperature of 40C. Here, the rated current refers to the protected object.
You can find the temperature value in the Technical data of the equipment or you can measure the value. If
you use a temperature sensor when measuring at the rated current, deduct the actual ambient temperature or
the coolant temperature from the measured value.
When selecting the setting value, you can also use the specified temperature class for orientation. Usually,
you will find the overtemperature expressed in Kelvin (K), which can be accepted as is. If the absolute
temperature is given, the ambient temperature must be deducted. As a rule, this is 40 C.
The overtemperature at maximum permissible current (max) and the temperature rise at Irated
(rated,obj.) can be converted by using the following formula:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[fo_ueb_for_Irated, 3, en_US]
EXAMPLE:
Temperature class B for continuous operation: permissible overtemperature = 80 K
From this, a temperature for Irated of 120 C (80 K + 40 C) can be derived when using a measuring element
for the measurement.
Temperature class F as thermal limiting value: permissible overtemperature = 105 K.
From this, a maximum temperature of 155 C (105 K + 40 C) derives.
From these values, the magnitude of the K factor can also be derived.
[fo_bsp_kfaktor, 3, en_US]
If selecting a setting value of 1.1 for the K-factor, your selection can be considered as conservative.
Parameter: Storage of thermal replica
Recommended setting value (_:113) Storage of thermal replica = no

If a continuous auxiliary voltage of the bay units is ensured, the default setting can be retained.
Parameter: Behav. at I> Imax therm.
Recommended setting value (_:114) Behav. at I> Imax therm. = current limiting
The Behav. at I> Imax therm. parameter is used to select the process by which the function reacts to
short-circuit currents. To prevent premature tripping of the overload protection at low time constants, high
preloading and high short-circuit currents, the thermal replica can be modified.
The default setting has been selected compatible with SIPROTEC 4 devices. If you wish to take further
temperature rise into consideration, the current limiting procedure is recommended.
current limiting The input current is limited to the value set in the Imax thermal parameter. If
the measured current exceeds the set current value, the limited current value is
supplied to the thermal replica. An advisable current threshold is approx. 2 to
2.5 Irated, obj.
freeze therm. rep. If the input current exceeds the Imax thermal parameter, the thermal replica
will be frozen for the time the parameter is exceeded. This parameter value is
provided to enable compatibility with older products!
Parameter: Temperature sensor
Default setting (_:44) Temperature sensor = none

Use the Temperature sensor parameter to determine which temperature sensor to use to detect the
ambient temperature.
A temperature sensor (RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector) is used to measure the ambient tempera-
ture of the protected object and to feed it to the device via an RTD unit. The function Thermal overload
protection receives the measured temperature value via the function RTD unit Ether. or RTD unit Serial from
the function group Analog units.
Parameter: Default temperature
Recommended setting value (_:118) Default temperature = 40C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Under the following conditions, the Default temperature will be set as ambient temperature:
A temperature sensor for measuring the ambient temperature is not connected.
The temperature measurement is interrupted and the measured temperature value is less than the
Default temperature.
Parameter: Minimal temperature
Default setting (_:117) Minimal temperature = -20C

If the measured ambient temperature drops below the preset value, the set value will be assumed as the
ambient temperature. If the overload protection works with a prespecified outside temperature, and this
temperature drops below the value set in the Minimal temperature parameter, the Minimal tempera-
ture can also be used.
6.44.5 Settings

49 Th.overl. #
_:1 49 Th.overl. #:Mode off off
on
test
_:2 49 Th.overl. #:Operate & no no
_:101 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
current warning 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
_:104 49 Th.overl. #:Threshold 50 % to 100 % 90 %
thermal warn.
_:105 49 Th.overl. #:Dropout 50 % to 99 % 90 %
threshold operate
_:106 49 Th.overl. #:K-factor 0.10 to 4.00 1.10
_:110 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal 10 s to 60000 s 900 s
time constant
_:107 49 Th.overl. #:Imax 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
thermal 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 12.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 12.500 A
_:109 49 Th.overl. #:tempera- 40 K to 200 K 70 K
ture rise at Irated
_:113 49 Th.overl. #:Storage of no no
thermal replica yes
_:114 49 Th.overl. #:Behav. at current limiting current limiting
I> Imax therm. freeze therm. rep.
_:118 49 Th.overl. #:Default -55C to 55C 40C
temperature
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:117 49 Th.overl. #:Minimal -55C to 40C -20C
temperature
_:44 49 Th.overl. #:Tempera- Setting options depend on
ture sensor configuration
6.44.6 Information

(Type)
49 Th.overl. #
_:500 49 Th.overl. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 49 Th.overl. #:>Reset thermal replica SPS I
_:54 49 Th.overl. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 49 Th.overl. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 49 Th.overl. #:Health ENS O
_:301 49 Th.overl. #:Current warning SPS O
_:302 49 Th.overl. #:Thermal warning SPS O
_:303 49 Th.overl. #:Block close SPS O
_:55 49 Th.overl. #:Pickup ACD O
_:300 49 Th.overl. #:Operate alarm only ACT O
_:57 49 Th.overl. #:Operate ACT O
_:304 49 Th.overl. #:Time until close MV O
_:305 49 Th.overl. #:Time until trip MV O
_:306 49 Th.overl. #:Overload MV O
_:310 49 Th.overl. #:Equival. current MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.45 Temperature Supervision
The Temperature supervision function checks the thermal state of:

Motors
Generators
Transformers
In rotating machines, it also checks bearing temperatures for a limit violation.
The temperatures are measured at various locations of the protected object using temperature sensors (RTD
= Resistance Temperature Detector) and are sent to the device via one or more RTD units.
The Temperature supervision function receives its measured temperature values via the RTD unit Ether. ,
Serial RTD unit or IO 111 functions from the Analog units function group.
The Temperature supervision function can work in all protection function groups. A maximum of 48 tempera-
ture supervision locations can operate simultaneously in the Temperature supervision function function. Each
temperature supervision location has 2 threshold stages.
[dwstrtmp-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lotmpsup-170712-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-411 Logic Diagram for a Temperature Supervision Location
The Temperature supervision location function block (Location FB) receives a measured temperature value in
C or F as an input variable delivered from the temperature sensor function blocks of the Analog units func-
tion group. The Sensor number parameter is used to select the temperature sensor.
2 threshold value decisions can be performed for each measuring point. If the measured temperature value is
greater than or equal to the set threshold values, the stages generate a pickup indication independent of one
another and, after a set tripping time delay, an operate indication.
The indications from the supervision locations remain available for further processing.
NOTE
i The pickup of the stages does not result in fault logging. The operate indications of the stages do not go
into the trip logic of the device.
If you use an external RTD unit, connect the RTD unit via an interface (Ethernet or serial) to the SIPROTEC 5
device. Observe the setting notes for configuration of the interfaces in chapter Analog Transformer Function
Group Type under 5.6.7.3 Communication with an RTD Unit .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Sensor location
Default setting (_:11101:46) Sensor location = Other

You inform the device of the sensor installation location using the Sensor location parameter. Oil,
Ambient, Winding, Bearing and Other are available for selection. The selection is not evaluated in the
device, it only serves an informational purpose in the medium in which the temperature measurement takes
place.
Parameter: Sensor number
Default setting(_:11101:44) sensor number = no function block selected

With the sensor number parameter, you assign a specific sensor whose temperature is to be monitored to
the Location function block. You perform the assignment in DIGSI using a list box that contains all connected
RTD units and their sensors.
Parameter: Threshold stage 1
Default setting (_:11101:40) Threshold stage 1 = 100C

With the Threshold stage 1 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 1st tripping stage.
Parameter: Operate delay of stage 1
Default setting (_:11101:41) Operate delay of stage 1 = 5 s

With the Operate delay of stage 1 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 1st
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to the operate indication is blocked.
Parameter: Threshold stage 2
Default setting (_:11101:42) Threshold stage 2 = 120C

With the Threshold stage 2 parameter you establish the temperature value whose exceedance causes a
pickup of the 2nd tripping stage.
Parameter: Operate delay of stage 2
Default setting (_:11101:43) Operate delay of stage 2 = 0 s

With the Operate delay of stage 2 parameter you establish the time the operate indication of the 2nd
tripping stage should be delayed after the pickup. This time delay depends on the specific application. If you
set the time delay to the operate indication is blocked.
Temperature Unit
Temperature Unit To change the display and evaluation of measured temperature values from C to F, adapt
the DIGSI user default settings accordingly (see 5.6.7.5 Temperature Sensor ).
6.45.5 Settings

Point 1
_:11101:46 Point 1:Sensor location Oil Other
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:11101:1 Point 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:11101:40 Point 1:Threshold stage 1 -50C to 250C 100C
_:11101:41 Point 1:Operate delay of 0 s to 60 s; 5s
stage 1
stage 2
_:11101:44 Point 1:Sensor Setting options depend on config-
uration
Point 2
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 3
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 4
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 5
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 6
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 7
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 8
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 9
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 10
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 11
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Point 12
Ambient
Winding
Bearing
Other
on
test
stage 1
stage 2
uration
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Point 1
_:11101:81 Point 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:11101:54 Point 1:Inactive SPS O
_:11101:52 Point 1:Behavior ENS O
_:11101:53 Point 1:Health ENS O
_:11101:61 Point 1:Pickup stage 1 SPS O
_:11101:62 Point 1:Operate stage 1 SPS O
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Point 11
Point 12
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.46 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection
6.46.1 Overview of Function
The Circuit-breaker failure protection function (ANSI 50BF) monitors the tripping of the associated circuit-
breaker (CB) and generates a backup trip signal if the circuit-breaker fails.
The function Circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) can be used in the Circuit-breaker function group.
[dwstrbfp-260213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-413 shows the functionalities and the function control of the function.
The start is initiated by the device-internal protection function or by an external protection. Along with the
start, the current-flow criterion or the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is used to check whether the
circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit breaker is closed, the function picks up and starts the time delay. During
the time delay, the system checks continuously whether the circuit breaker has opened. If this is the case, the
function drops out. If the circuit breaker is not opened, the function trips upon expiration of the time delay.
The following description elaborates on the detailed functionality of the individual function blocks.
[losvsbfp-090712-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-413 Function Logic Overview
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The function starts via the device-internal protection functions and/or externally (via a binary input or inter-
face, for example, GOOSE). The start can be there 1-pole or 3-pole. Figure 6-414 and Figure 6-415 showing
the functionality.
Internal Start
By default, each device-internal protection stage, which has to control the local circuit breaker starts the
circuit-breaker failure protection. The function is started by the tripping of the protection stage. In case of
phase-selective tripping, the start will also be phase-selective. In addition, circuit-breaker failure protection is
started with 3-pole tripping of automatic reclosing (AREC). In the default setting, the starting signalInternal
start (see Figure 6-414) is held when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protection function has
tripped. The Circuit-breaker failure protection function can in this case only dropout if the circuit breaker is
detected to be open. This is detected using the current flow or circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion. If
necessary, the Circuit-breaker failure protection function can also dropout when the pickup signal has a falling
edge or the protection function trips (internal starting signal is not held).
Where required, individual protection stages or protection functions can be routed so that they are excluded
as starting source. If all device-internal starting sources are excluded in this manner, the start must be initi-
ated externally.
The internal starting sources are routed in the protection function groups via the Circuit-breaker interaction
entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device , DIGSI 5 Project Tree (excerpt)).
[lointsta-160611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-414 Internal CBFP Start
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
External Start
The parameter Start via binary input is used to set whether the external start is initiated by a 1-
channel or 2-channel signal. The required routing of the input signals is compared with the setting. If a routing
is missing, an error message is generated. The Health signal changes to the state Warning.
[loanwext-180713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-415 Configuration of the External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
In 1-channel mode, start for 1-pole tripping is initiated only with the binary input signals >Start pole A,
>Start pole B, or >Start pole C. In the case of 3-pole tripping, start is initiated only with the input
signal>Start 3-pole (see Figure 6-416).
In 2-channel operation, to initiate the start, the binary input signal >Release 1-polemust also be activated,
in case of the 1-pole start, and >Release 3-pole in case of the 3-pole start. In the default setting, the
internal starting signals External start Lx and External start 3pol drop out immediately when the
binary input signals have a falling edge (see Figure 6-416). If necessary, the internal start signal can be held.
In this case the start remains active when the binary input signals have a falling edge.
The input signals are monitored to avoid an unwanted pickup of the function.
Static supervision (see Figure 6-416):
If one of the binary starting and release signals is active for more than 15 s without a pickup of the func-
tion, an error in the binary input circuit is assumed. The corresponding signal is blocked to exclude an
external pickup of the function. An indication to this effect is output and the ready signal changes to the
state Warning. The blocking is reset as soon as the binary input signal drops out.
This static supervision is disabled in the following cases:
a) On pickup of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function (only in the case of an external start).
This prevents an unwanted pickup of the supervision if the external protection that starts the Circuit-
breaker failure protection function uses a lockout functionality. When the starting signal drops out, the
supervision is enabled again.
b) As long as the function (or the device) is in test mode. This allows to check the function without the
supervision blocking the function.
Dynamic supervision (see Figure 6-416):

If one of the starting signals is active but no release signal is present after a settable supervision time
has elapsed, pickup is blocked and a corresponding indication is issued. The Health signal changes to
the state Warning. The blocking is reset with the dropout of the starting signal.
The binary input signals only take effect if the binary inputs are activated for at least 10 ms (SW filter, see
Figure 6-416).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loexlsvs-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-416 External Start of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function, Logic
1-Pole or Multi-Pole Start

Based on the starting signals, it is determined whether the start in question is 1-pole or multi-pole (see
Figure 6-417). This information is required for starting the various delay times.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loveranw-100311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-417 Processing the Starting Signals of CBFP
The current-flow criterion is the primary criterion for determining the circuit-breaker position. A circuit-breaker
pole is supposed to be closed, and the pole-selective current-flow criterion fulfilled, as soon as one of the
phase currents exceeds the phase-current threshold value, and at the same time a plausibility current
exceeds the associated threshold value. The plausibility current can be either a 2nd phase current (to
compare with the threshold value for phase currents) or the zero-sequence or negative-sequence current (to
compare with the threshold value for ground currents). The additional evaluation of a plausibility current
increases the safety of a criterion.
By converting the parameter Plausibility check 3I0 to the value no, you prevent the plausibility check
of the zero-sequence current. In this way, you can achieve a pickup only by way of this current. The plausi-
bility check of the phase currents is unaffected by this.
In the case of ground faults, the ground-current threshold value can be dynamically applied to the phase
currents as well. The current-flow criterion is in this case fulfilled when the currents exceed the ground-current
threshold value. The phase-current threshold value is then ineffective. The binary signal >Thresh. ground
curr. is used for the switchover.
The measuring algorithm is optimized for fast dropout when the value drops below the threshold value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lostromk-300610-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-418 Current-Flow Criterion
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion

Settings allow you to specify whether the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are permitted for determining the
circuit-breaker position. The following settings are possible:
In this function, circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are not used for determining the CB position.
The position is determined (pole-selective) via the double-point indications Position Lx (from the
Circuit breaker function block).
The double-point indication 3-pole position (from theCircuit breaker function block) is used to deter-
mine whether all 3 poles of the circuit breaker are closed.
If the double-point indications are not routed, an error message is issued. The Health signal changes to the
state Warning.
A detected static disturbed position (not an intermediate position) has the effect that the circuit breaker auxil-
iary contact criterion is not used (the signals Aux.co.crit. CB Clsd Lx are inactive).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lohikols-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-419 Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary-Contact Criterion
Pickup/Dropout
After the start, a check is performed whether the circuit breaker or the individual circuit-breaker pole is closed.
The current-flow criterion and the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion are available for this purpose.
Even if the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion is permitted, preference is given to the fulfilled current-
flow criterion because it is the most reliable criterion for determining whether the CB or CB pole is closed.
This means that the CB or CB pole is considered to be closed if it is closed according to the current-flow crite-
rion but, at the same time, open according to the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion.
If no current is flowing at the moment of start, the function can be activated only on the basis of the circuit-
breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. For this purpose, the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts must be permitted
as criterion. When the current begins to flow after the start, the function switches over to the current-flow
criterion.
If the circuit-breaker or a circuit-breaker pole is detected to be closed, the function picks up.
The pickup starts a time delay (see Delay/Tripping). While the time delay is running, the system checks
continuously whether the circuit breaker or a CB pole has opened. In the default setting, the opening of the
circuit breaker is checked on the basis of the currently valid criterion, which is normally the current-flow crite-
rion because it is preferred. If until expiration of the time delay, no current flow above the set threshold values
has been detected, the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion becomes effective.
The function has also a setting in which dropout is only possible if both criteria detect in parallel the CB or CB
pole to be open (dropout with auxiliary contact and current-flow criterion).
In the default setting, the internal starting signal is held (see Figure 6-414 and Figure 6-416). This means that
dropout is controlled solely by the current-flow or circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion. If dropout is also to
occur on the falling edge of the starting signal (that is, when the pickup signal has a falling edge or the protec-
tion function trips), holding of the start signal must be disabled.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loanregu-170611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-420 Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Delay/Tripping
In a first step, tripping at the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of the
settable delay T1. You can set various T1 times for a 1-pole and multipole start. In case of a 1-pole start,
tripping can be repeated in a 1-pole or 3-pole way depending on the setting.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can commence in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of
time T1. You can set various T2 times for a 1-pole and multipole start.
If the assigned 1-pole period is initially started by a 1-pole start and a multiphase short circuit and multiphase
start occur subsequently, the corresponding multiphase period is also started so that the 2 periods run in
parallel. Tripping is determined by the period that expires first.
When there is a 1-pole start with 3-pole trip repeat, the 3-pole T2 time is started.
If time delay T2 expires without a dropout of the function, a circuit-breaker failure is assumed, and the backup
tripping signal Trip T2 is generated. This tripping is always 3-pole. If the device is equipped with a protec-
tion interface, a transfer-trip signal can be sent to the opposite end if necessary (see chapter Protection inter-
face 3.5.3.1 Overview of Functions).
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed, and the backup tripping
signal T2 is generated immediately (without delay). The binary input of the >CB defect input signal must be
activated for at least 20 ms before the signal becomes valid.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for tripping the function. In contrast
to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the setting is inde-
pendent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loverzau-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-421 Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection Function
Figure 6-422 gives an overview of the functions involved in an external start of the CBFP function.In the case
of an internal start, there is no external protection device and the protection functionality is located in the
CBFP device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loschema-160611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-422 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection with External Pole-Selective Start, Pole-Selective Tripping
Repetition, and 3-Pole Tripping (T2)
Routing: Configuration of Internal Starting Sources (Internal Protection Function)

Configuration of the internal starting sources takes place in the protection function groups via the Circuit-
breaker interaction entry (for this, see 2.1 Function Embedding in the Device ).
By default, the function can be started by any tripping of the internal protection functions, which control the
local circuit breaker. Depending on the specific application, it can be necessary to exclude certain device-
internal protection functions from starting the CBFP. For instance, busbar disconnection following a local
circuit-breaker defect can be undesirable in the case of load-shedding applications or ground faults in
isolated/resonant-grounded systems.
Where a start exclusively from external sources is required, all internal protection functions must be routed so
that they are excluded as starting source.
Parameter: Start via binary input
Default setting (_:107) Start via binary input=no

no If no external start is intended, the parameter is set to no.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

2 channel 2-channel start is used if there is a risk that the circuit-breaker failure
protection causes a tripping due to a faulty activation of the start binary
input. This is the case in the following situations:
a) The CBFP pickup value (threshold value) is set to less than the load
current.
b) There can be operating conditions under which the current flow is higher
than the pickup value.
To avoid a possible overfunction, Siemens recommends using the 2-
channel start.
1 channel The 1-channel start must be used where only one control circuit is available
for starting the CBFP.
Input Signals: >Start, >Release

The start and release input signals have a filtering time of 10 ms as default setting. If a transient control
signal to the binary inputs is to be expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and
due to environmental conditions, the filtering time can be extended. This delays the start of the CBFP func-
tion.
Input Signals Description
>Start pole A The start input signal is linked with the tripping of the external protection
>Start pole B device. When the external protection trips phase-segregated, the CBFP
>Start pole C can be started phase-segregated using the input signals >Start phsx
(see Figure 6-422).
>Start 3-pole
>Release 1-pole The enabling input signal is normally linked with the pickup of the external
>Release 3-pole protection device (see Figure 6-422). Another common configuration is the
parallel wiring of the external trip initiation to both binary inputs (start and
release).
Parameter: Supervision time release signal
Default setting (_:108) Sup.time for release signl = 0.06 s

The setting depends on the external function which generates the release signal. If the pickup or tripping of
the external protection is used as release signal, the default setting can be kept. If it is ensured that the
release signal is always present before the starting signal, the time can be set to 0.
Parameter: Holding internal start signal
Recommended setting value (_:105) Holding int. start signal = yes

yes In the case of an internal start, the starting signal is latched. The dropout of
the CBFP depends exclusively on the determination of the CB position.
This setting must be selected if it is not ensured that all 3 poles of the CB
have opened when the pickup signal of the protection function has a falling
edge.
no Latching of the starting signal can be deactivated if it is ensured by the
application that the CB has reliably opened when the starting signal has a
falling edge. If the CBFP is explicitly required to drop out when the starting
signal has a falling edge, latching of the starting signal can also be deacti-
vated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE
Holding internal start signal (setting value: yes)
In the presence of a 2-pole fault, only one contact of the CB opens. The fault current is thus reduced, and the
starting phase short-circuit protection drops out.
Parameter: Holding ext. start signal
Recommended setting value (_:106) Holding ext. start signal = no

no The CBFP drops out when the external starting signal has a falling edge.
This setting prevents the CBFP from generating a tripping signal when an
unwanted pulse is received at the binary input and the current flow is high
enough.
yes You can hold the starting signal if it is not ensured that the circuit breaker is
open when the external starting signal has a falling edge .
EXAMPLE
Holding external starting signal (setting value: yes)
The function is started from the opposite end via an auxiliary device for command transmission. This device
generates only a signal pulse.
NOTE
i Siemens would like to point out that, with a hold signal, the CBFP generates a trip signal each time a
starting pulse is received and the current flow is high enough. Remember this particularly in the case of an
external start!
Parameters: Threshold phase current/Threshold ground current
Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold phase current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
Recommended setting value (_:101) Threshold ground current = approx. 0.50 Isc, min
In order to ensure that the disconnection of the fault is promptly detected and the function can drop out
quickly, Siemens recommends setting both thresholds to half the minimum short-circuit current (Isc, min).
If - depending on the neutral-point treatment and/or load conditions - ground faults lead to relatively low fault
currents, a sensitive setting of the parameter Threshold ground current must be selected according to
the rule (0.5 lsc, min). There can also be values which are noticeably below the rated or load current.
Input signal: >Thresh. ground current

In order to ensure that the function picks up reliably in all switch positions of the power system (examples:
opposite end of line open, switching onto a ground fault), the parameter Threshold ground current can
be applied dynamically to all currents including phase currents in the presence of ground faults. For this
purpose, the binary signal >Thresh. ground curr. must be activated. This can be done via a device-
internal function for ground-fault detection (if provided in the device), for example, using Overvoltage protec-
tion with zero-sequence voltage. In this case, the pickup of the V0> function must be linked with the binary
signal. Alternatively, the signal from a separate sensitive ground-fault detection device can be injected using
a binary input.
Parameters: Plausibility check 3I0
Recommended setting value (_:120) Plausibility check 3I0 = yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes The additional evaluation of a plausibility current increases the safety of a
current-flow criterion.
no The plausibility check is omitted.
Parameter: Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact criterion allowed
Recommended setting value (_:103) CB aux.cont. crit. allowed = no

no If sufficient current flow is ensured under all conditions with the CB closed,
Siemens recommends not to permit the auxiliary contacts as a further crite-
rion for determining the CB position, because measurement based on the
current flow is the most reliable criterion.
with position The auxiliary contacts are permitted as a further criterion in applications
with position phsx (see the following examples) where the current is no reliable criterion for
determining the circuit-breaker position.
When the protection trips phase-segregated, it makes sense to link also the
auxiliary contacts to the device phase-segregated to ensure a pole-selec-
tive detection of the position To do so, select with Position Lx.
If pole-selective detection is not possible, set with Position. Observe
that the CB is deemed open as soon as the 1st pole has opened.
EXAMPLES
Applications which require you to permit the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion:
Tripping of the high and low voltage side CB on the transformer: If only one of the 2 CBs trips, there is
no more current flow.
Tripping of protection functions whose tripping decision is not based on current measurement in combi-
nation with low-load situations.
Injection of the tripping signal from Buchholz protection
Parameter: Dropout
Recommended setting value (_:104) Dropout = with effective criterion

The parameter Dropout is available if the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact criterion is permitted (see param-
eter CB aux.cont. crit. allowed).
with effective crite- Siemens recommends keeping the default setting, because it prefers the
rion current as a reliable criterion for detection of an open CB and thus for
dropout of the CBFP function.
w. aux.c. and Select this setting for applications on transformers or generators (see the
curr.crit. preceding examples) in which the current flow is such that the current is no
longer a reliable criterion for detecting the opening of the CB.
Parameter: Retrip
Default setting (_:110) Retrip after T1=no

no Where no redundant CB control is provided, a repetition of the trip signal to
the local CB is not required.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

start T2 after T1 Where a redundant CB control (2nd trip coil with 2 trip circuits) is provided,
a repetition of the trip signal to the local CB makes sense.
Siemens recommends the setting start T2 after T1 because it
provides a clear chronological separation of the processes for trip repeat
and backup tripping. Remember here that the overall fault-clearance time in
case of a defect of the local CB is the sum of T1 and T2.
parallel start T2, T1 Alternatively to setting start T2 after T1, parallel start T2, T1
can be started.
Parameters: Delay T1 for 1-pole retrip, Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip
Default setting (_:113) Delay T1 for 1-pole retrip = 0.05 s

The parameters are visible only when the repetition of tripping is set.
For most applications, the time delays for the 1-pole and the 3-pole (multipole) start are set equally.
The setting depends on the user's philosophy.
The following settings make sense:
If the minimum fault-clearing time has top priority, Siemens recommends setting the time to 0. This
setting causes initiation of the retrip immediately upon the start. The drawback is that a defect of the 1st
trip circuit is not detected.
With a small time delay of, for instance, 50 ms, the defect of the 1st trip circuit can be detected based on
the analysis of the fault record.
With a long time delay which reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open, the rising edge
indication of the trip repeat Retrip T1 is a sure signal for a fault in the 1st trip circuit. The following
example shows how this time is determined.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T1 time that reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open:
Time of device binary output (when tripping is caused 5 ms
by the device-internal protection)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Safety Factor 2
Total (time T1) 130 ms
EXAMPLE
Different T1 times, depending on whether the start was 1-pole or 3-pole:
The protection tripping can be 1-pole. 1-pole tripping results in a 1-pole AR. The trip repeat prompted by the
CBFP should be 3-pole on principle.
Under these circumstances, the T1 time can be set short (for example 50 ms) in a 3-pole start. The T1 time
for 1-pole start, however, must be set to the full clearance time (for example, 130 ms) because the two fault-
free phases are to be tripped only in case of an authentic circuit-breaker defect.
Parameters: Delay T2 1-pole, Delay T2 3-pole
Default setting (_:114) Delay T2 for 1-pole trip = 0.13 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
This setting has to ensure that after opening of the local CB the function drops out reliably and that backup
tripping is avoided under all circumstances. The setting depends on the parameter Retrip after T1.
If T2 is started afterT1, there is no need to consider the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Determining the T2 time that reliably ensures the dropout of the CBFP with the CB open:
Time of binary device output 5 ms
(when tripping is caused by device-internal protec-
tion)
CB inherent time up to current interruption 2 periods (assumed rated frequency = 50 Hz)
Dropout time of CBFP function 1 period
Subtotal 65 ms
Safety Factor 2
Total (time T2) 130 ms
If T1 and T2 are started in parallel, take into account the time T1 for the setting of T2.
EXAMPLE
Simultaneous start of T2 and T1
Time for a reliable dropout after the local CB has 130 ms
opened
Setting of T1 50 ms
Total (= T2) 180 ms
Various times can be set for a 1-pole and 3-pole (multipole) start. In the presence of 1-phase short circuits
that do not jeopardize network stability it can make sense to allow more time to the local CB (such as twice
the clearance time: 2 x 130 ms = 260 ms), expecting that the CB will open yet. This way, tripping of the
surrounding CBs can be avoided.
Default setting (_:115) Minimum operate time = -

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for tripping the function.
! CAUTION
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow crite-
rion) that the device contacts will interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts will burn
out.
Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reaches its final position open-
circuited reliably after a control operation.
Input Signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a preset filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input signal
from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be caused
by the pressure change when the CB opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient response of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the
CB design.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Output signal: Retrip T1

The output signal Retrip T1 must be explicitly routed to a binary output.
If only one control circuit is available for the local CB, the output signal must be routed to the binary output to
which the general CB trip command (command Position) is routed.
If a 2nd control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal must be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output signal: Trip T2

In order to operate the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2) must be routed to
a binary output; andif necessary, to an interface (intertripping to opposite end).
6.46.5 Settings

50BF CB fail.#
_:1 50BF CB fail.#:Mode off on
on
test
_:105 50BF CB fail.#:Holding no yes
int. start signal yes
_:107 50BF CB fail.#:Start via no no
binary input 2 channel
1 channel
_:106 50BF CB fail.#:Holding no no
ext. start signal yes
_:108 50BF CB fail.#:Sup.time 0.06 s to 1.00 s 0.06 s
for release signl
_:103 50BF CB fail.#:CB no no
aux.cont. crit. allowed w. 'CB pos. closed 3p.'
w. 'CB pos. closed Lx'
_:104 50BF CB fail.#:Dropout with effective criterion with effective
w. aux.c. and curr.crit. criterion
_:110 50BF CB fail.#:Retrip no no
after T1 start T2 after T1
parallel start T2, T1
_:109 50BF CB fail.#:Retrip 3-pole 3-pole
1-/3-pole 1-pole
_:102 50BF CB 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
fail.#:Threshold phase 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 2.500 A
current
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:101 50BF CB 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
fail.#:Threshold ground 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A 1.250 A
current
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:111 50BF CB fail.#:Delay T1 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
for 3-pole retrip
for 1-pole retrip
for 3-pole trip
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

for 1-pole trip
_:115 50BF CB fail.#:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
operate time
_:120 50BF CB fail.#:Plausi- no yes
bility check 3I0 yes
6.46.6 Information

(Type)
50BF CB fail.#
_:501 50BF CB fail.#:>Start 3-pole SPS I
_:502 50BF CB fail.#:>Start pole A SPS I
_:503 50BF CB fail.#:>Start pole B SPS I
_:504 50BF CB fail.#:>Start pole C SPS I
_:506 50BF CB fail.#:>Release 3-pole SPS I
_:505 50BF CB fail.#:>Release 1-pole SPS I
_:82 50BF CB fail.#:>Block function SPS I
_:507 50BF CB fail.#:>CB defect SPS I
_:500 50BF CB fail.#:>Thresh. ground curr. SPS I
_:54 50BF CB fail.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 50BF CB fail.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 50BF CB fail.#:Health ENS O
_:55 50BF CB fail.#:Pickup ACD O
_:309 50BF CB fail.#:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:310 50BF CB fail.#:Trip T2 ACT O
_:306 50BF CB fail.#:BI start routing miss. SPS O
_:308 50BF CB fail.#:BI aux.ct. rout. miss. SPS O
_:300 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start 3pole' SPS O
_:301 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start poleA' SPS O
_:302 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start poleB' SPS O
_:303 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'Start poleC' SPS O
_:305 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'release 3p.' SPS O
_:304 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. BI 'release 1p.' SPS O
_:311 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI release 3p SPS O
_:312 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI rel.pole A SPS O
_:313 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI rel.pole B SPS O
_:314 50BF CB fail.#:Fail. no BI rel.pole C SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.47 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function:

Monitors the circuit breaker against restriking, for example, caused by an overvoltage over the circuit-
breaker poles after switching off a capacitor bank
Generates a backup operate signal in case of a circuit-breaker restriking
The Circuit-breaker restrike protection function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group. A maximum of 2
functions can operate simultaneously within the function group.
[lo_strrestrike_2014-03-05.vsd, 2, en_US]
The function logic is grouped into the parts shown in Figure 6-424. In the following chapter, these logic parts
are described in detail.
[lo_respro-210113-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-424 Logic Overview of the Function
Plausibility Release
The function Circuit-breaker restrike protection issues a trip command to a superordinated circuit breaker,
usually the infeed circuit breaker of a busbar. Overfunction of this protection can cause extreme problems for
the whole application.
The logic of plausibility release strongly reduces the risk of a false start of the function by adding an extra
release criteria for a function start.
Each criterion can be switched on or off individually.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_paus1-3pol-210113-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-425 Logic Diagram for the Plausibility Release of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
The plausibility-release logic checks the following conditions:

When the parameter Plausibility via 50BF fct. is set to yes, the pickup signal of the Circuit-
breaker failure protection is monitored. The plausibility release is given if the Circuit-breaker failure
protection has picked up.
When the parameter Plaus. via open/trip cmd is set to yes, the trip/open command is moni-
tored. The plausibility release is given if the trip/open command has been generated.
When the parameter Plaus. via binary input is set to yes, the >release signal is monitored.
The plausibility release is given if the >release signal has been received.
If one of the conditions is fulfilled, the plausibility release is given for 5 s. The 5-s timer ensures that the
release criterion and start condition relate to the same circuit-breaker opening/tripping process.
If all the 3 plausibility settings are set to no, the start/stop-monitoring logic considers the release as fulfilled.
For safety reasons, the input signal >release has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
Start/Stop Monitoring
Via the start/stop monitoring logic, the monitoring duration of the current signal regarding restriking is deter-
mined.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo_starstop-1-3-pole-part1-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-426 Logic Diagram for Start/Stop Monitoring of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection, 1 Pole
[lo_starstop-1-3-pole-part2-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-427 Logic Diagram for Start/Stop Monitoring of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection, 3 Pole
The monitoring is started if one of the following conditions is met:

The circuit-breaker position is detected as open via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts during the time
set with the parameter Position recognition delay.
The Position recognition delay time is used for safety means to ensure that the circuit breaker
is definitely open when the monitoring starts. This parameter allows to adapt this start criterion to all
kinds of auxiliary-contact configurations.
One of the binary input signals >Start 3-pole, >Start pole A, >Start pole B, and >Start
pole C is activated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
In addition to the active start criterion, the plausibility release (refer to the Plausibility Release, Page 1097 )
must be present to start the monitoring duration.
With the fulfilled start condition, the Monitoring duration timer is started. This timer defines how long the
current signal is monitored regarding restriking. If the time expires, the monitoring is terminated.
The monitoring is also terminated immediately if one of the following conditions is met:
The circuit-breaker position is detected no longer as open.
A close command is given by the device.
The binary input signal >Stop is activated.

For safety reasons, the input signal has a preset software filtering time of 20 ms.
Measuring Value, Pickup/Dropout

During the Monitoring duration, the current signal is monitored phase-selectively regarding restriking.
As a measuring value, the fundamental component of the current is used.
On one hand, current peaks are damped but still detected reliably by the fundamental-component value.
On the other hand, a DC (Direct Current) component is suppressed. A DC component can occur after
switching off the circuit breaker.
Thus, the fundamental-component value is a good choice for a reliable restrike detection.
If any phase current exceeds the set current threshold value, the function picks up. The coming pickup indi-
cates the first restrike current pulse. With the pickup, the operate delay timers are started, see also the
following description Delay/Tripping, Page 1100.
[lo_pickdrop-1-3pol_210113-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-428 Logic Diagram for Measuring Value, Pickup/Dropout of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
If restriking occurs, the current signal drops below the current threshold if the time between restrike pulses is
long enough. In this case, the operate delay must not be reset. During the dropout delay, the pickup is
extended to ensure that the operate delay timers are not reset. However, if the dropout delay time expires (no
new current peak occurred), the function drops out and the operate delay timers are reset.
Delay/Tripping
In the first step, tripping of the local circuit breaker can be repeated. Tripping is repeated after expiration of
the settable delay T1. The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism as well. In the event of
a wrong start and pickup, only the local circuit breaker is opened instead of the superordinated circuit
breaker.
Time delay T2 (backup tripping) can start in parallel either with the start of time T1 or after expiration of time
T1.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If time delay T2 expires, circuit-breaker restriking takes place and the backup-tripping signal Trip T2 is
generated.
If the >CB defect input signal is valid, any repetition of the trip signal is suppressed and the backup-trip-
ping signal Trip T2 is generated immediately (without delay). For safety reasons, a default software filter
time of 20 ms is preset (configurable in DIGSI) for the binary input signal >CB defect.
The Minimum operate time parameter defines the minimum duration for the trip command of the func-
tion. In contrast to other protection functions, the parameter is set within its own function. As a result, the
setting is independent of the identically named comprehensive parameter that is set in the Device settings.
[lo_deltrip-030211-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-429 Logic Diagram for Delay/Tripping of the Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection
Parameter: Switch On or Off Additional Plausibility Release Criteria
Default setting (_:101) Plausibility via 50BF fct. = no
Default setting (_:102) Plaus. via open/trip cmd = no
Default setting (_:103) Plaus. via binary input = no

When using the plausibility release, the start condition and the release condition instead of only the start
condition must be present to start the current monitoring regarding restriking. Since the current threshold
value is set below the operating current, a false start would directly cause tripping. Thus, the plausibility
release strongly reduces the risk that a falsely given start criterion leads to a wrong tripping of the superordi-
nated circuit breaker.
3 different release criteria are available. You can use one or more than one or none of them. The selection
depends on the application.
NOTE
i When using release criteria, it must be ensured that the criteria are given under all the conditions where
the Circuit-breaker restrike protection shall be started. If you choose no release criteria, the release is
permanently given.
Open/trip command by the device

Use this criterion in case that all control or trip commands are given by the protection device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker manually without using the device will not release the start of the Circuit-
breaker restrike protection.
Pickup of the Circuit-breaker failure protection

Use this criterion if the Circuit-breaker restrike protection should only be started in case that the Circuit-
breaker failure protection was started (picked up) before.
NOTE
i Opening the circuit breaker by control or manually will not trigger the circuit breaker failure protection.
Consequently the Circuit-breaker restrike protection cannot be released either.
Binary input signal

Use this option if neither of the above 2 release criteria fit the application and you want to define your own
release criterion.
Input signal: >Start 3-pole, >Start pole A, >Start pole B, >Start pole C, >release, >Stop
Input Signals Description

>Start 3-pole These input signals allow to start the monitoring, for example, via
>Start pole A protocol commands from a master (by use of a CFC chart) or by other
>Start pole B specific conditions.
>Start pole C
>release This input signal allows to define specific release conditions by use of a
CFC chart. Also refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off Additional Plausi-
bility Release Criteria , Page 1101.
>Stop This input signal allows to stop the monitoring, for example, via protocol
commands from a master (by use of a CFC chart) or by other specific
conditions.
The input signals >Start 3-pole, >Start pole A, >Start pole B, >Start pole C,
>release , and >Stop have a filtering time of 20 ms as default setting. If a transient spurious signal to the
binary inputs is expected due to the design of the external binary-input control circuits and environmental
conditions, the filtering time can be extended.
Parameter: Position recognition delay
Default setting (_:105) Position recognition delay = 0.02 s

With the parameter Position recognition delay, you define how long the circuit breaker must be
detected as open (via the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts) before the monitoring time is started. This defini-
tion is a safety feature to ensure that the monitoring is not started too early. For example, in case that due to
a non-standard auxiliary-contacts configuration, the circuit-breaker is already detected as open while current
flow is still present.
The setting depends on the circuit-breaker auxiliary-contacts configuration. If it can be ensured that the auxil-
iary contacts announce the circuit breaker as open after the current flow is interrupted, the time can be set to
zero.
Parameter: Monitoring duration
Default setting (_:104) Monitoring duration = 200.00 s

With the parameter Monitoring duration , you define how long the current signal is monitored regarding
restriking after the circuit breaker has been opened.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
With ongoing discharging of the capacitor bank, the probability of restriking is decreasing. There is no need to
set the monitoring time longer than the discharging time. Siemens recommends setting the monitoring time in
the range of 0.5 * discharging time to 1 * discharging time.

After opening of the circuit breaker, the phase currents are compared with the threshold value. If no restriking
takes place, the current is zero. Consequently the threshold for detecting restriking can be set much smaller
than the operating current. A typical value is 25 % of the operating current.
With a threshold below the operating current, a falsely-given start directly cause tripping. For minimizing this
risk, Siemens recommends applying a release criterion additionally. Refer to Parameter: Switch On or Off
Additional Plausibility Release Criteria , Page 1101.
Default setting (_:7) Dropout delay = 0.05 s

The parameter Dropout delay ensures that a short dropping below the current threshold does not cause
the operate delay timers to be reset.
Since restriking is normally a periodical effect, the dropout delay can be set to a rather small time. Siemens
recommends applying the default value of 50 ms.
Input signal: >CB defect

The input signal >CB defect has a preset filtering time of 20 ms. This filtering time prevents the input signal
from becoming effective in the case of a transient activation of the physical binary input, which can be caused
by the pressure change when the circuit breaker opens.
This time can be set to 0 if such a transient response of the physical binary input can be excluded due to the
circuit-breaker design.
Parameter: Retrip after T1
Default setting (_:106) Retrip after T1 = start T2 after T1

start T2 after T1 The retrip on the local circuit breaker is a safety mechanism to avoid
false tripping of the superordinated circuit breaker. With generating a
retrip, only the local circuit breaker is tripped in the event of a false
start. Afterwards the Circuit-breaker restrike protection function drops
out during the T2 delay time.
Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens also recommends applying the parameter value start T2
after T1. The parameter value provides a clear chronological separa-
tion of the processes for trip repeat and backup tripping. Remember
that the overall fault-clearance time in case of circuit-breaker restriking
is the sum of T1 and T2.
no No retrip is given
parallel start T2, T1 As an alternative to the setting parallel start T2, T1 the
customer can start T2 and T1 in parallel.
Parameter: Delay T1 for 3-pole retrip

The parameter is visible only when the parameter Retrip after T1 is set to start T2 after T1 or
parallel start T2, T1 .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The retrip on the local circuit breaker is as a safety mechanism to avoid false tripping of the superordinated
circuit breaker. In the event of a false start, only the local circuit breaker is tripped by the retrip. Afterwards the
Circuit-breaker restrike protection function will drop out during the T2 delay time.
Siemens recommends applying a retrip on the local circuit breaker. Since the retrip is a safety mechanism, it
can be given without a delay time. Siemens recommends setting the delay time to 0 s.
Parameter: Delay T2 for 3-pole trip

This parameter defines the duration of restriking after the backup tripping is sent. The following should be
considered:
When using the retrip functionality, this delay time must ensure a safe function dropout after giving the
retrip on the local circuit breaker.
Siemens recommends applying a delay time of 150 ms which is the default setting.
Default setting (_:109) Minimum operate time = 0.15 s

The Minimum operate time parameter is used to set the minimum duration for the trip command of the
function.
! CAUTION
If you set a time that is too short, there is a danger (dropout of the function without the current-flow crite-
rion) that the device contacts interrupt the control circuit. If this happens, the device contacts burn out.
Set a duration that is long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker reliably reaches its final position
(open) after a control operation.
Output signal: Retrip T1

The output signal Retrip T1 must be routed to a binary output.
If only one control circuit is available for the local circuit breaker, the output signal must be routed to the
binary output to which the general circuit breaker trip command (command Position) is routed.
If a second control circuit is present, the Retrip T1 output signal can be routed to the associated binary
output.
Output signal: Trip T2

In order to trip the adjacent circuit breakers, the backup tripping (indication Trip T2 ) must be routed to a
binary output and if necessary, to an interface (intertripping to the opposite end). Thus, the circuit breaker on
the opposite end can be tripped without delay.
6.47.5 Settings

Restrike prt.#
_:1 Restrike prt.#:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Restrike prt.#:Plausibility no no
via 50BF fct. yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:102 Restrike prt.#:Plaus. via no no
open/trip cmd yes
_:103 Restrike prt.#:Plaus. via no no
binary input yes
_:106 Restrike prt.#:Retrip no start T2 after T1
after T1 start T2 after T1
parallel start T2, T1
_:104 Restrike prt.#:Monitoring 1.00 s to 600.00 s 200.00 s
duration
_:105 Restrike prt.#:Position 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.02 s
recognition delay
_:3 Restrike prt.#:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 1.25 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.250 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 1.250 A
_:7 Restrike prt.#:Dropout 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s
delay
_:107 Restrike prt.#:Delay T1 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.25 s
for 3-pole retrip
_:108 Restrike prt.#:Delay T2 0.05 s to 60.00 s 0.15 s
for 3-pole trip
_:109 Restrike prt.#:Minimum 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.15 s
operate time

(Type)
Restrike prt.#
_:82 Restrike prt.#:>Block function SPS I
_:502 Restrike prt.#:>Start 3-pole SPS I
_:503 Restrike prt.#:>Start pole A SPS I
_:504 Restrike prt.#:>Start pole B SPS I
_:505 Restrike prt.#:>Start pole C SPS I
_:506 Restrike prt.#:>Stop SPS I
_:501 Restrike prt.#:>release SPS I
_:500 Restrike prt.#:>CB defect SPS I
_:54 Restrike prt.#:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Restrike prt.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Restrike prt.#:Health ENS O
_:304 Restrike prt.#:Release by plausibility SPS O
_:303 Restrike prt.#:Monitoring running ACT O
_:55 Restrike prt.#:Pickup ACD O
_:301 Restrike prt.#:Retrip T1 ACT O
_:302 Restrike prt.#:Trip T2 ACT O
_:308 Restrike prt.#:Immediate Operate SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.48 Out-of-Step Protection
The out-of-step protection function (ANSI 78)

Detects an out-of-step condition (asynchronous operation) between machines connected and the power
system and between power systems
Protects generators from unacceptable electromechanical stresses
Prevents damage and unacceptable aging of equipment
Ensures the stability of the entire power system by disconnection
Suitable for integration into more complex automatic operations for power system monitoring and
disconnection
Serves as a basic function for the protection of larger power plant units
Used in the protection of power systems for selective disconnection in case of power swings
The out-of-step protection function is preconfigured with one zone by the manufacturer. A maximum of 4
zones can be operated simultaneously in the function (see Figure 6-430). All zones are configured identically.
The out-of-step protection function is contained in a function group with at least 3 voltage inputs and current
inputs. The process monitor provides the function with status information regarding the protected object (open
poles on the line in particular). The protected object can be a line or a power plant unit (generator with main
transformer).
[dwoosstr-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-430 Structure of the Function
6.48.3 Description of a Zone
Measuring Principle of Out-of-Step Protection

Out-of-step protection is based on measuring the impedance and analyzing the history of the impedance
phasor. The simplified 2-machines model shown in the following figure is used for that purpose. The left side
of the figure shows the generator with a driving voltage VG. The impedances - generator impedance ZG,
transformer impedance ZTr, and system impedance ZN are located between the 2 sources. The power
system with a voltage VNet can be found as a backup machine on the right side.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwmodlpe-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-431 The 2-Machines Model to Explain a Power Swing
Measuring point m divides the total impedance into 2 impedances m Ztotal and (1-m) Ztotal. The following
details apply to the impedance at a measuring point m:
[foimpdnz-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current I does not depend on the measuring point m:
[fostroms-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Voltage V at the measuring point m is calculated for:
[fospanng-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In combination with
[foumesor-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
the data results in the formula:
[fozmesrt-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Angle is the angle between the generator voltage and the power system voltage. In normal operation, this
angle depends on the load profile and is relatively constant. In contrast, in the event of an out-of-step condi-
tion, the angle changes continuously and passes through all values between 0 and 360. Figure 6-432
shows the impedance process at the measuring point m according to the equation mentioned above. The
point of origin corresponds to the point where the protection device is built in (measuring point of the voltage-
transformer substitute). Assuming a constant ratio between VNet/VG and a variable angle , the locus diagram
is a set of circles. The center and the radius are specified through the ratio VNet/VG. All centers of the circles
are located on one axis specified by the direction of Ztotal. The maximum and minimum impedance values are
the result for the 2 extreme values = 0 and = 180. If the measuring point coincides directly with the elec-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
trical center of the system, the measured voltage and thus the operating impedance result in 0 at an angle =
180.
[dwzverla-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-432 Impedance Trajectories for Different Voltage Conditions
Impedance Method of Measurement

The fundamental components are determined from the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase currents and
are the basis for calculating the phasors of the positive sequence system. The phasors of the positive-
sequence system are the basis for calculating the impedance.
Special cases:
If an unbalanced fault occurs during swinging, the zone (zones) is/are frozen.
If an open circuit-breaker pole is detected, the loop resistance of a healthy loop is calculated temporarily.
Out-of-step detection works when the positive-sequence current flow is high enough. If the flow falls below
the adjustable positive-sequence current threshold I1<threshold blocks zone, the zone (zones) is/are
frozen.
Behavior in the Event of Unbalanced Faults

To avoid overfunctioning of the out-of-step protection in the event of unbalanced faults (for example, short-
circuits), the negative sequence current is evaluated. If the negative-sequence current exceeds the pickup
threshold I2>threshold blocks zone, the zones for the detection of an out-of-step condition are
blocked. Figure 6-433 shows the partial logic and the input variables for the impedance calculation.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo0imped-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-433 Impedance Measurement and Monitoring of the Positive and Negative Sequenced of the
Currents
Identifying the Out-of-Step Condition / Central Logic

Figure 6-434 shows the central logic. Cycling of the positive-sequence impedance phasor through the set
impedance zone is monitored and counted. The power swing counter is incremented depending on the
setting of the parameter (_:3691:108) Count at. Each counter increment is signaled. The signal dura-
tion can be set via the (_:3691:100) Signal time parameter. The trip command is issued when the
counter status (parameter (_:3691:107) Number of power swings) is reached after incrementing.
Between each counter increment, the function checks whether another power swing occurs within a specified
time (parameter (_:3691:101) Re-entry time). If this is not the case, the counter is reset. The central
logic detects the direction of the power swing and issues an indication. In generator mode, for example, the
impedance swings into the zone from the right.
NOTE
i If the impedance phasor enters through the straight lines, which can be set using the parameters Zone
limit X top or Zone limit X bottom, the power swing direction is not determined. Since the direc-
tion determination is coordinated with the setting parameter Count at, the above limitation applies only to
the setting entry, entry left and entry right.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loostzon-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-434 Logic Diagram of a Zone
Impedance Zone (Characteristic Curve)

An impedance phasor within the impedance zone is the essential criterion for the out-of-step condition. In
order to implement different applications, resistance and reactance are freely settable. The resistance setting
parameter Zone limit R works inversely to the imaginary axis. A lower and an upper setting value (Zone
limit X bottom and Zone limit X top) can be selected for reactance. The zone can be shifted in any
X direction. Figure 6-435 shows 2 possible setting examples. To map the power system impedance (R, jX),
the zone can also be rotated through an angle Rotation angle. If several zones are used in power system
protection applications, they are typically interleaved.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwzonein-230211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-435 Zone Setting
Power-Swing Counter
Passing though the impedance zone is the criterion for incrementing the power swing counter. Use the setting
parameter (Count at) to define when the counter is incremented. Depending on the application, there are
different selection options available for this parameter. For machine protection applications, you only see 3
selection options without direction dependency.
entry The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone.
entry left The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the left.
entry right The counter is incremented upon entry into the zone from the right.
axis The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone.
axis from left The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
axis from right left.
The counter is incremented upon crossing the middle ordinate of the zone from the
right.
exit The counter is incremented upon exit of the zone.
exit left The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the left.
exit right The counter is incremented upon exiting the zone from the right.
In all cases, the impedance phasor must first have crossed the entry line and the
middle ordinate.
Figure 6-436 shows how counting is done for the different trajectories of the impedance phasor. 2 zones are
shown as an example. Each zone has a counter of its own.
4 cases are shown:
Case A: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1.
Case B: The counter for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the
settings (entry, entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case C: The counter for zone 2 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 2. The counter
for zone 1 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry right, axis, axis from right, exit, exit left).
Case D: The counter for zone 1 is incremented only if entry or entry right is set for zone 1. The counter
for zone 2 is incremented. The time at which the increment takes place depends on the settings (entry,
entry left, axis, axis from left, exit, exit right).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwerhzae-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-436 Incrementing the Power Swing Counter for Different Impedance Phasor Trajectories
6.48.4 Application and Setting Notes (System Protection)
The protection setting is exemplified by a power-system configuration. If a power swing occurs in the power
system, the out-of-step protection must separate the power system into islands. Each system island must be
able to establish a stable operating state. Although a certain amount of load shedding must be taken into
account, the aim is to minimize power loss. Figure 6-437 shows the power-system configuration used in the
example.
[dwbspnet-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-437 Power-System Configuration
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If an asynchronous swing condition occurs, the out-of-step protection function separates the 2 systems A and
C from each other. To allow the subnetwork with power reserve to remain connected to the busbar (and the
local load), either the lines A1 and A2 or the lines C1 and C2 must be disconnected from the busbar,
depending on the direction of the impedance curve. This ensures that the infeeding side remains connected
with the busbar and the local load.
Focus of the Example

In the example (Figure 6-437), the setting values for relay A are determined. All information and calculations
in this section are therefore based on relay A. Out-of-step tripping by this relay is also passed to the circuit -
breakers for lines A1 and A2, since both lines must be disconnected if an out-of-step condition occurs. Simi-
larly, relay C affects the circuit breakers for lines C1 and C2. Since the out-of-step impedance measurement
in relay A is also affected by the power flows in line A2, 2 separate setting values are determined for relay A.
The appropriate setting characteristic is enabled depending on the switch position of the line A2 circuit
breaker (On or OFF).
The parameters for the 2 zones (zone 1 and 2) are shown below with reference to the operating state of line
A2 (active or open). In practice, the corresponding zone must be blocked or enabled using the binary input
(GOOSE). Settings that are the same for both zones are not described separately.
Blocking the Zone
Recommended setting value (_:2311:100) I2>threshold blocks zone = 20 %

Out-of-step tripping must be prevented in case of unbalanced faults and single open-pole conditions. To do
so, the negative-sequence current threshold (parameter I2>threshold blocks zone) is set to 20 %
(default).
If swing frequencies greater than 7 Hz are expected to occur, Siemens recommends increasing the setting
value to 40 % to 45 %.
The setting value should not be set to be too sensitive in the case of a 1-pole AWE. Check the possible nega-
tive-sequence current on the line to be protected if a pole on the adjacent line is open following a 1-pole
AWE. As a result, a certain negative-sequence current flows on the healthy line (parallel line).
Zone Impedance Calculation

To set the zones, the electrical center of the power system, as seen from the relay, must be determined. Note
that the infeed conditions are not fixed to the sources and that the parallel line is not always available. There-
fore, the electrical center of the power system is not located at a fixed point. For setting the zone limit, you
have to calculate the electrical center active and open using the maximum and minimum infeed and with
parallel line. The source impedances of the infeeds and lines in Figure 6-438 are specified for the purposes of
the example. All impedance values are secondary values and are related to a secondary rated current of 1 A.
Power system simulation tests are recommended in practice to determine the zone limits.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwvorimp-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-438 Source Impedances of Infeeds and Feeders
To determine the source impedances as seen from relay A, Figure 6-438 is simplified as follows for the state
= line A2 open (zone 2 active):
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwvrimp2-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-439 Calculation of Source Impedances with Open Line A2 (Zone 2 Active)
The impedances of lines C1 and C2 and of infeed C are combined in Figure 6-439. Only one of the two lines
is used for calculation in the case of a weak infeed (10 ); both are used in parallel for a strong infeed (5 ).
Since the values for zone 2 are calculated with line A2 open here, simply add the impedance in the direction
of power system A for strong infeed to the line impedance of 10 and 25 for weak infeed. The results for
zone 2 are entered in Table 6-18.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwvorim1-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-440 Calculation of Source Impedances with Closed Line A2 (Zone 1 Active)
When line A2 is in operation, the current is split between lines A1 and A2. The impedance seen from Relay A
is therefore doubled at the infeeds. Figure 6-440 shows the relevant values for strong and weak infeed. The
impedances for zone 1 are entered in Table 6-18. Zone 1 is effective when line A2 is active.
Table 6-18 Extreme Conditions: Extreme Conditions: Impedance, Seen from Relay A
Condition Activated Zone in Line A2 Impedance / secon- Impedance / secon-

Relay A
dary dary
In the direction of In the direction of

source A source C
Strong source Zone 1 active 50 70
power system A Zone 2 Open 30 35
Weak source power
system C
Weak source power Zone 1 active 110 30
system A Zone 2 Open 60 15
Strong source
power system C
The condition in which both sides provide a weak or strong source is not relevant for the determination of the
outermost ends of the electrical center.
If one end shows a maximum source impedance and the other a minimum one, you obtain the outermost end
of the electrical center. Use the following equation for calculation (shown for relay A):
[foeztrum-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The results must be calculated separately for zone 2 and zone 1 according to the open or closed switch posi-
tions of infeed B. Table 6-19 shows the electrical center, as seen from relay A.
Table 6-19 Calculation Results for the Electrical Center
Source Side A / Source Side C / Activated Zone in Line A2 Electrical Center

secondary secondary Relay A (Impedance, Seen
from Relay A) /
secondary
50 70 Zone 1 active -10
30 35 Zone 2 Open -2.5
110 30 Zone 1 active 40
60 15 Zone 2 Open 22.5
If the 2 sources have different voltage levels, the power-swing impedance differs from the electrical center.
This fact must be considered when determining the outermost ends of the electrical center:
[fodvitio-170309-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Table 6-20 shows the results obtained for relay A.
Table 6-20 Impedance Deviation from Electrical Center
Ztotal / secondary Activated Zone Line A2 Electrical Center Deviation with a Outer End of the
in Relay A (Seen from Voltage Level Electrical
Relay A) / secon- Difference of 10 Center / secon-
% / secondary
dary dary
50 + 70 Zone 1 active -10 -6 -16

30 + 35 Zone 2 Open -2.5 -3.25 -5.75
110 + 30 Zone 1 active 40 7 47
60 + 15 Zone 2 Open 22.5 3.75 26.25
Figure 6-441 shows the outer ends of the electrical center for relay A, zone 2 (line A2 is open), including the
possible power-swing impedance locations.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwimpelo-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-441 Swing Impedance Locations and Outer Ends of the Electrical Center for Relay A (Line A2 is
Open)
To ensure that the power swing zone in Figure 6-441 covers the power swing trajectories, the upper and
lower zone limits X are calculated as shown in the following formula. The calculated values reliably cover the
determined outermost electrical centers in Table 6-20. The safety clearance is half the distance between the
determined centers. Depending on the application, another formula can be used to satisfy the requirements
placed on the geometry of the zone:
[foznengr-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Table 6-21 shows the zone limit X setting for relay A based on this formula.
Table 6-21 jX Setting for the Zones
Activated Zone Line A2 Most Extreme Most Extreme Upper Zone Lower Zone
in Relay A Electrical Electrical Limit X Limit X
Center, 1st Center, 3rd
Quadrant Quadrant
Zone 1 active 47 -16 78.5 -47.5
Zone 2 Open 26.25 -5.75 42.25 -21.75
To determine the Zone limit R, the out-of-step tripping mode must be considered:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If an out-of-step tripping on entry occurs, the R setting must equal the smallest value which occurs when
the power swing reaches the transient stability limit angle.
The R setting is less critical if the out-of-step condition trips when the axis of symmetry is exceeded. It
can be set to the 0.9-fold minimum stable load impedance or to the 0.25-fold distance between the
values of zone limit X. Note that the circuit breaker is exposed to a very strong recovery voltage after
switching.
If an out-of-step tripping on exit occurs, the R setting depends on how long the trip command is to be
present after the axis of symmetry has been exceeded (180-condition). The calculation of the R setting
can be based on the currently set swing locus angle.
In the example, tripping is to occur when the zone is entered. Therefore, you have to calculate the R setting
using the transient stability limit angle . Based on the maximum transmission angle under stable operating
conditions, the transient stability limit angle is calculated as follows:
Transient stability angle = 180 - maximum transmission angle.
A maximum transmission angle of 60 can be assumed in most cases. The result is a transient stability limit
of 120.
To ensure that the R setting is not too high, it must be determined on the basis of the minimum source impe-
dances. The minimum source impedances (with closed/open line A2) or relay A are shown in Table 6-22.
Table 6-22 Calculated R Setting Values
Condition Activated Zone Line A2 Impedance in Impedance in Zone Limit R

in Relay A the Direction of the Direction of Setting
Source A Source C
Strong source A Zone 1 active 50 30 23.1
Strong source C Zone 2 Open 30 15 13.0
[dwreinst-210211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-442 Calculation of the R Setting with Minimum Source Impedances (Line A2 Active, Zone 1)
[forfmel1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Determination of the Rotation Angle of the Characteristic

Not all impedances in the power system have the same angle. Set the rotation angle to the same value as the
impedance angle of the total impedance between the 2 sources (sum of the impedances of power system A
and C). This example uses the typical angle of 85 for transmission lines.
(_:3691:102) Rotation angle = 85
Counting of Power Swings

In this application, power swing tripping is to take place immediately on entry. Therefore the number of power
swings is set to 1:
(_:3691:107) Number of power swings = 1
Power swing tripping is to cause selective disconnection to keep the busbar connected to the infeeding power
system. Figure 6-443 and Figure 6-444 show the swing impedance trajectory for relay C and A depending on
the energy flow. Power swing tripping is to cause a selective disconnection of the power system that draws
energy from the busbar. Therefore, power swing tripping takes places at entry from the right. In Figure 6-443,
line A1 is disconnected from the busbar by relay A with swing tripping. Power system C remains connected to
the busbar via lines C1 and C2 and feeds the load connected there.
(_:3691:108) Count at = entry right
[dwenergc-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-443 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System C to
Power System A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwenerga-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-444 Direction of the Swing Impedance Locus with Energy Transfer from Power System A to Power
System C
In Figure 6-444, the energy flows in the opposite direction. Out-of-step tripping must take place at lines C1
and C2. In this case, power system A remains connected to the local load of the busbar.
Setting the Time Function Elements
Recommended setting value (_:3691:101) Re-entry time = 20 s

Use the Re-entry time parameter to define the resetting condition for the counter. If the counter was incre-
mented and if there is no new swing cycle during the reentry time, the swing counter is set back to 0.
Assuming slow power swings of approx. 0.2 Hz (corresponds to a duration of 5 s), the setting value of 20 s
offers sufficient safety.
Recommended setting value (_:3691:100) Signal time = 0.05 s
Use the Signal time parameter to define how long a binary indication (incrementing or swing direction), is
present, for instance at a contact. The time depends on the speed of subsequent evaluation units. A value
between 50 ms and 100 ms is sufficient for fast further processing.
6.48.5 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:I1<threshold 10 % to 400 % 20 %
blocks zone
_:2311:100 General:I2>threshold 5 % to 500 % 20 %
blocks zone
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Zone 1
_:3691:1 Zone 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:3691:2 Zone 1:Operate & flt.rec. no no
blocked yes
_:3691:103 Zone 1:Zone limit R 1A 0.100 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.000
_:3691:104 Zone 1:Zone limit X top 1A 0.100 to 600.000 10.000
5A 0.020 to 120.000 2.000
_:3691:105 Zone 1:Zone limit X 1A -600.000 to 600.000 -10 000
bottom 5A -120.000 to 120.000 -2000
_:3691:102 Zone 1:Rotation angle 60.0 to 90.0 90.0
_:3691:108 Zone 1:Count at exit exit
axis
entry
exit left
exit right
axis from left
axis from right
entry left
entry right
_:3691:107 Zone 1:Number of 1 to 20 1
power swings
_:3691:101 Zone 1:Re-entry time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 20.00 s
_:3691:100 Zone 1:Signal time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.05 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:300 General:Zone blocked SPS O
_:2311:302 General:I1< blocking SPS O
_:2311:301 General:I2> blocking SPS O
Zone 1
_:3691:81 Zone 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:3691:54 Zone 1:Inactive SPS O
_:3691:52 Zone 1:Behavior ENS O
_:3691:53 Zone 1:Health ENS O
_:3691:55 Zone 1:Pickup ACD O
_:3691:56 Zone 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:3691:57 Zone 1:Operate ACT O
_:3691:300 Zone 1:Counter status reach. SPS O
_:3691:301 Zone 1:Out-of-step condition SPS O
_:3691:302 Zone 1:Power swing from left SPS O
_:3691:303 Zone 1:Power swing from right SPS O
_:3691:304 Zone 1:No. of power swings INS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Group indicat.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.49 Inrush-Current Detection
The function Inrush-current detection

Recognizes an inrush process on transformers
Generates a blocking signal for protection functions that protect the transformer (protected object) or for
protection functions that are affected in undesirable ways when transformers are switched on
Allows a sensitive setting of the protection functions

The following protection functions evaluate the blocking signal
Overcurrent protection with a pickup value below the maximum inrush current
Negative-sequence protection as sensitive backup protection for transformers
Distance protection for impedance stages graded through the transformer
The function Inrush current detection is not an individual protection function. In the connection process of a
transformer, it transmits a blocking signal to other protection functions. For this reason, the inrush-current
detection must be in the same function group as the functions that are to be blocked.
The following figure shows the embedding of the function. The setting parameter Blk. w. inrush curr.
detect. establishes the connection between inrush-current detection and the functions that are to be
blocked. If the parameter is set to yes, the connection is effective.
A jump detection or the threshold value exceeding of the functions to be blocked is used as trigger signal for
synchronization of the internal measurement methods.
The jump detection reacts to changes in the current. The threshold value exceeding is recognized due to an
internal pickup of the protection function that is to be blocked.
[dwirsh01-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The function Inrush-current detection analyzes the trigger signal of the jump detection or the threshold-value
violation of the function to be blocked in a start logic, and synchronizes the method of measurement. In order
to securely record the inrush processes, the function uses the Harmonic analysis method of measurement
and the CWA method (current wave shape analysis). Both methods work in parallel and link the results
through a logical OR.
If you wish to work with only one process, deactivate the other method by way of the parameters Blocking
with 2. harmonic or Blocking with CWA .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loinru02-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-446 Basic Structure of the Inrush-Current Detection
Harmonic Analysis
For this method of measurement, the content of the 2nd harmonic and the fundamental component (1st
harmonic) are determined for each of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC and the quotient I2nd harm / I1st harm is
formed from this. If this quotient exceeds the set threshold value, a phase-selective signal is issued.
If 95 % of the set threshold value is exceeded, this leads to a pickup reset (dropout ratio = 0.95).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loinru10-040912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-447 Logic of the Harmonic Analysis Function (T = 1 Period)
CWA Method (Current Wave Shape Analysis)

The CWA method executes a wave shape analysis of the phase currents IA, IB, and IC. If all 3 phase
currents show flat areas at the same point in time, the inrush-current detection signal will be issued. This
signal applies for all 3 phases simultaneously. The following figure shows a typical inrush-current character-
istic, with the simultaneously occurring flat areas clearly recognizable.
[dwinru03-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-448 Inrush-Current Characteristic
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the CWA method.
From the present fundamental-component current (1st harmonic), the threshold value for identification of the
flat areas is derived via an internal factor.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loinru05-240211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-449 Logic of the CWA-Method Function (T = 1 Period)
Logic of the Inrush-Current Detection

The following logic diagram shows the link of the 2 methods of measurement Harmonic Analysis and CWA
method.
The crossblock function influences the Harmonic Analysis process. If you have set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes, you will receive in the event of threshold-value violation a blocking indication for all 3
phase currents and the measured or calculated zero-sequence current (l2nd harm / l1st harm). The crossblock
function works via a timer. Set parameters for the time depending on the expected duration factor via the
parameter Cross-blocking time.
If the phase current exceeds the maximum permissible current Operat.-range limit Imax, the inrush-
current detection will be blocked.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loinru12-060912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-450 Logic Diagram of the Inrush-Current Detection
Parameter: Operat.-range limit Imax
Recommended setting value (_:106) Operat.-range limit Imax = 7.5 A

With the parameter Operat.-range limit Imax , you can specify at which current the inrush-
current detection is blocked internally. The setting value must be above the maximum inrush current of
the transformer. A practicable value is 7.5 times the transformer rated current.
Parameter: Blocking with CWA
Recommended setting value = (_:111) Blocking with CWA = yes

yes CWA process activated.
no CWA process deactivated.
Parameter: Blocking with 2. harmonic
Recommended setting value (_:110) Blocking with 2. harmonic = yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

yes Harmonic analysis process activated.
no Harmonic analysis process deactivated.
NOTE
i Make sure that at least one process is activated. Siemens recommends retaining the advised setting
values.
Parameter: 2nd harmonic content
Recommended setting value (_:102) 2nd harmonic content = 15 %

With the parameter 2nd harmonic content , you can specify the pickup value of the harmonic anal-
ysis function. The setting value of 15 % is practicable for most transformers.
Parameter: Cross-blocking
Recommended setting value (_:112) Cross-blocking = no

no Through the CWA process working in parallel in the inrush-current detection,
the function is not activated as standard.
yes If a subfunction of the inrush-current detection is identified in the course of
the closure trials during commissioning, set the parameter Cross-
blocking to yes .
Parameter: Cross-blocking time
Default setting (_:109) Cross-blocking time = 0.06 s

You define the duration of this blocking with the Cross-blocking time parameter. The default
setting of 0.06 s (about 3 periods) has proven practicable. Set the time as short as possible and check
the value during the closure trials. The parameter Cross-blocking time is inactive at Cross-
blocking = no .
Parameter: Start flt.rec
Default setting (_:114) Start flt.rec = yes

With the Start flt.rec parameter, you determine whether a fault record should be started upon
pickup of the inrush-current detection. The following settings are possible:

no No fault recording starts with pickup.
yes The fault recording starts with pickup. When the protection function is
blocked by the inrush-current detection, a fault recording is started neverthe-
less.
6.49.5 Settings

Inrush detect.
_:1 Inrush detect.:Mode off on
on
test
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:106 Inrush detect.:Operat.- 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
range limit Imax 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 37.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 7.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 37.500 A
_:111 Inrush detect.:Blocking no yes
with CWA yes
_:110 Inrush detect.:Blocking no yes
with 2. harmonic yes
_:102 Inrush detect.:2nd 10 % to 45 % 15 %
harmonic content
_:112 Inrush detect.:Cross- no no
blocking yes
_:109 Inrush detect.:Cross- 0.03 s to 200.00 s 0.06 s
blocking time
_:114 Inrush detect.:Start no yes
flt.rec yes

(Type)
Inrush detect.
_:81 Inrush detect.:>Block stage SPS I
_:54 Inrush detect.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Inrush detect.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Inrush detect.:Health ENS O
_:300 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase A SPS O
_:301 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase B SPS O
_:302 Inrush detect.:2.harmonic phase C SPS O
_:305 Inrush detect.:CWA SPS O
_:306 Inrush detect.:Cross-blocking SPS O
_:55 Inrush detect.:Pickup ACD O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.50 General Power Protection 3-Phase
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function (ANSI 32) is used to:
Detect whether the active or reactive power rises above or drops below a set threshold
Monitor agreed power limits and output warning indications
Detect both active and reactive power feedback in the power systems or on electric machines
Detect machines (motors, generators) running without load and output an indication to shut them down.
Be integrated into any automation solution, for example, to monitor very specific power limits (further
logical processing in CFC)
The 3-phase power protection (P, Q) function can be integrated in function groups, which provide measured
voltages and currents of the 3-phases for calculation of the power.
The 3-phase power protection (P,Q) function comes with one factory-set stage each for the active and the
reactive power. The following stages are preconfigured:
Power P> 1
Power Q> 1
Power P< 1
Power Q< 1
A maximum of 4 active power stages and 4 reactive power stages can be operated simultaneously in the
function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
[dwstpq3p-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Logical Combination of Output Signals

The operate indications of the active and reactive power stage(s) can be logically combined in CFC. When an
operate indication is present in both the active and the reactive power stage, an alarm indication is generated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[loausmel-050411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-452 Logical Combination of Operate Indications in CFC
6.50.3 Active Power Stage
Logic of a Stage
[lop3phas-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-453 Logic Diagram of the Active Power Stage (Stage Type: Power P<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is analyzed by the tripping
stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of phase A,
power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power P> 1) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power P< 1).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
[dwdvzpgr-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-454 Tilt-Power Characteristic
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
P> 1 or Power P< 1) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
Blocking the Stage

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.50.4 Reactive Power Stage
Logic of a Stage
[loq3phas-040411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-455 Logic Diagram of the Reactive Power Stage (Stage Type: Power Q<)
Measured Value
The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is processed by the trip-
ping stage. Possible settings are positive seq. power and the phase-selective powers power of
phase A, power of phase B or power of phase C.
Pickup Characteristic
With the stage type you specify if the stage work as a greater stage (stage type: Power Q> 1) or as a smaller
stage (stage type: Power Q< 1).
The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the stage. The Tilt power charac-
teristic parameter is used to define the tilt of the pickup characteristic. The figure below shows the defini-
tion of the signs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwdvzqgr-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-456 Tilt-Power Characteristic
Pickup
The stage compares the selected power value with the set Threshold. Depending on the stage type (Power
Q> 1 or Power Q< 1) being above or falling below the threshold value will lead to a pickup.
Dropout Delay
A delay can be set for the dropout when the measured value falls below the dropout threshold. The pickup is
maintained for the specified time. The time delay of the tripping (parameter Operate delay) continues to
run. Once the Operate delay has elapsed, the stage trips.
Blocking the Stage

6.50.5 Application Example
The setting of the function will be explained using an active/reactive power range as an example. If the appa-
rent power phasor is within the power range (in Figure 6-457 tripping zone defined by characteristics), an
alarm indication is generated. For this purpose, you have to make an AND operation of the stage indications
of the active and reactive power stage in CFC. The function used is 3-phase power measurement.
Figure 6-457 shows the threshold values and the location of the characteristics in the PQ diagram.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwpqd7sa-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-457 Pickup Values and Characteristic Curves
6.50.6 Setting Notes for the Active Power Stage
Stage Type
In the following example, a drop of the active power below a threshold is to be monitored. In the 3-phase
circuit breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power P< 1.
Recommended setting value (_:6271:105) Measured value = positive seq. power

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.
Recommended setting value (_:6271:3) Threshold = 0 %

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the active power stage. In the example,
the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter Threshold to
0%.

A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 1.05.
Parameter: Tilt power characteristic
Recommended setting value (_:6271:103) Tilt power characteristic = +70

The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the above
example, an inclination is required. The setting value is +70 (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-454).
Recommended setting value (_:6271:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.
6.50.7 Setting Notes for the Reactive Power Stage
Stage Type
In the example, the reactive power is to be monitored if it falls below the threshold. In the 3-phase circuit
breaker (P, Q) function, work with the stage type Power Q< 1.
Recommended setting value (_:6331:105) Measured value = positive seq. power

The Measured value parameter is used to specify which measured power value is evaluated. For 3-phase
measurement, Siemens recommends to evaluate the positive-sequence system power.
Recommended setting value (_:6331:3) Threshold = 0 %

The Threshold parameter is used to define the pickup threshold of the reactive power stage. In the
example, the pickup characteristic runs across the point of origin of the coordinates. Set the parameter
Threshold to 0%.

A hysteresis of 5 % is sufficient for most applications. The setting value for the lower stage is therefore 0.95.
Parameter: Tilt power characteristic
Recommended setting value (_:6331:103) Tilt power characteristic = +20

The Tilt power characteristic parameter is used to incline the pickup characteristic. In the example
(see Figure 6-457 ), the power characteristic has a tilt of 20. Set the Tilt power characteristic
parameter to +20 (for a definition of the sign, see Figure 6-456 ).
Recommended setting value (_:6331:7) Dropout delay = 20 ms

The Dropout delay parameter maintains the pickup even if the measured value drops momentarily below
the threshold value. A delay is required for very low pickup values to prevent a so-called chattering of the
function. In the example, the setting value is 20 ms.

The Operate delay must be set for the specific application. In the example, a setting value of 100 ms has
been selected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.50.8 Settings

Power P> 1
_:6241:1 Power P> 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:6241:2 Power P> 1:Operate & no no
_:6241:104 Power P> 1:Measured power of phase A positive seq.
value power of phase B power
power of phase C
positive seq. power
_:6241:3 Power P> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 80.0 %
_:6241:101 Power P> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6241:103 Power P> 1:Tilt power -89.0 to 89.0 0.0
characteristic
_:6241:7 Power P> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6241:6 Power P> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power P< 1
_:6271:1 Power P< 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:6271:2 Power P< 1:Operate & no no
_:6271:105 Power P< 1:Measured power of phase A positive seq.
power of phase C
positive seq. power
_:6271:3 Power P< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 5.0 %
_:6271:101 Power P< 1:Dropout ratio 1.01 to 1.10 1.05
_:6271:103 Power P< 1:Tilt power -89.0 to 89.0 0.0
characteristic
_:6271:104 Power P< 1:Pickup delay no yes
yes
_:6271:7 Power P< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6271:6 Power P< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q> 1
_:6301:1 Power Q> 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:6301:2 Power Q> 1:Operate & no no
_:6301:105 Power Q> 1:Measured power of phase A positive seq.
power of phase C
positive seq. power
_:6301:3 Power Q> 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % 70.0 %
_:6301:101 Power Q> 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6301:103 Power Q> 1:Tilt power -89.0 to 89.0 0.0
characteristic
_:6301:7 Power Q> 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:6301:6 Power Q> 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s
Power Q< 1
_:6331:1 Power Q< 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:6331:2 Power Q< 1:Operate & no no
_:6331:105 Power Q< 1:Measured power of phase A positive seq.
power of phase C
positive seq. power
_:6331:3 Power Q< 1:Threshold -200.0 % to 200.0 % -30.0 %
_:6331:101 Power Q< 1:Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 0.95
_:6331:103 Power Q< 1:Tilt power -89.0 to 89.0 0.0
characteristic
_:6331:104 Power Q< 1:Pickup delay no yes
yes
_:6331:7 Power Q< 1:Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
_:6331:6 Power Q< 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.00 s

(Type)
Power P> 1
_:6241:81 Power P> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6241:54 Power P> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6241:52 Power P> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6241:53 Power P> 1:Health ENS O
_:6241:55 Power P> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6241:56 Power P> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6241:57 Power P> 1:Operate ACT O
Power P< 1
_:6271:81 Power P< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6271:54 Power P< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6271:52 Power P< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6271:53 Power P< 1:Health ENS O
_:6271:55 Power P< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6271:56 Power P< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6271:57 Power P< 1:Operate ACT O
Power Q> 1
_:6301:81 Power Q> 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6301:54 Power Q> 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6301:52 Power Q> 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6301:53 Power Q> 1:Health ENS O
_:6301:55 Power Q> 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6301:56 Power Q> 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6301:57 Power Q> 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Power Q< 1
_:6331:81 Power Q< 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:6331:54 Power Q< 1:Inactive SPS O
_:6331:52 Power Q< 1:Behavior ENS O
_:6331:53 Power Q< 1:Health ENS O
_:6331:55 Power Q< 1:Pickup ACD O
_:6331:56 Power Q< 1:Operate delay expired ACT O
_:6331:57 Power Q< 1:Operate ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.51 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function (ANSI 27/Q):

Detects critical power-system situations, mainly in case of regenerative generation
Prevents a voltage collapse in power system by disconnecting the power-generation facility from the
main power systems
Ensures reconnection under stable power-system conditions
The Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function can be used in protection function groups
containing 3-phase voltage and current measurement. Depending on the device, it is preconfigured by the
manufacturer with 1 Protection stage and 1 Reclosure stage. A maximum of 2 Protection stages and 1 Reclo-
sure stage can operate simultaneously within the function.
[dwqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.51.3 Description of the Protection Stage
Logic of the Stage
[loqvprst-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-459 Logic Diagram of the Protection Stage of the Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power
Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measurand
To detect critical power-system situations, the Undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection function
uses the fundamental values of the phase-to-phase voltages, the positive-sequence current, and the reactive
power.
Q-Measurement Direction
The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the protected object. Via parameter Q sign, the direction of the
positive reactive-power flow Q can be changed by inverting the sign of the reactive power Q.
Pickup
The protection stage picks up under the following conditions:
All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are below the parameterized threshold value.
The positive-sequence current I1 is above the parameterized threshold value.
The power-generation facility requires more than the parameterized reactive power (Q is above the
parameterized threshold value).
Trip Interface
The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid). Depending
on the parameter Trip interface contains, one or none of them will be forwarded to the trip interface
of the circuit-breaker interaction.

Externally or internally via the binary input signal >Block stage
Measuring-voltage failure
Blocking of the Operate Delay and Operate Signal via the Device-Internal Inrush-Current Detection Function
The Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter permits you to define whether the operate delay should
be blocked by a threshod-value violation due to an inrush current.
For further information about device-internal Inrush-current detection function, refer to chapter

You use the Blk. by meas.-volt. failure parameter to control the response of the stage when a
The device-internal Measuring-voltage failure detection function is configured and switched on.

yes The Protection stage is blocked when a measuring-voltage failure is
detected. Siemens recommends using the default setting, as there is
no assurance that the Protection stage will function correctly if the
measuring voltage fails.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
no The Protection stage is not blocked when a measuring-voltage failure

is detected.

You use the Blk. w. inrush curr. detect. parameter to determine whether the operate delay and
operate signal are blocked during the detection of an inrush current.
Parameter: I> release threshold
Recommended setting value (_:13921:105) I> release threshold = 0.100 A

You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can pick up. The
default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: V< threshold value
Recommended setting value (_:13921:103) V< threshold value = 85.000 V

You use the V< threshold value parameter to define one of the 2 pickup criteria. If all 3 phase-to-phase
voltages drop below the parameterized undervoltage threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
The setting should be set below the lower value of the permissible voltage range, according to the national
transmission code. In Germany, the recommended undervoltage threshold is 85 % of the rated voltage.
Therefore Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Q> threshold value
Default setting (_:13921:3) Q> threshold value = 5 %

You use the Q> threshold value parameter to define the second of the 2 pickup criteria. If the positive
reactive power exceeds the parameterized Q> threshold value, the pickup criterion is fulfilled.
In the following example, the pickup takes place if Q exceeds 5 % of the power-supply system rated power.
EXAMPLE
The following example is given for settings in secondary values.
Rated voltage: Vrated, sec = 100 V
Rated current: Irated, sec = 1 A
Threshold value: 5 % of the power-supply system rated power
You can calculate the setting value as follows:
[foqvprot-110713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Default setting (_:13921:6) Operate delay grid CB = 1.50 s
Default setting (_:13921:108) Oper. delay generator CB = 0.50 s

You can set the Operate delay grid CB for the circuit breaker at the power-supply system connection
point, or set the Oper. delay generator CB for the circuit breaker of the facility, for example, the gener-
ator.
The time of the Operate delay grid CB should always be set longer than the time of the Oper. delay
generator CB.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Trip interface contains
Default setting (_:13921:101) Trip interface contains = operate (grid)

The stage provides 2 operate signals, the Operate (generator) and the Operate (grid).
You use the Trip interface contains parameter to define whether one or none of them will be
forwarded to the trip interface of the circuit-breaker interaction. The selected operate signal will trip the circuit
breaker that has been connected to the protection function group.
The setting depends on the specific application.
Parameter: Q sign
Default setting (_:13921:102) Q sign = not reversed

The default directions of the positive reactive-power flow Q and the forward direction of the short-circuit
protection are identical, in the direction of the main protected object (for example, a feeder). You use the Q
sign parameter to reverse the sign and therefore the direction of the reactive-power flow Q. This reversal
may be required for specific application, where the main protected object (for example, a line towards the
main power systems) is in different direction to the power-generation facility.
not reversed The protected object is in the same direction as the power-
generation facility.
reversed The protected object is not in the same direction as the power-
generation facility.
6.51.3.3 Settings

Prot. stage 1
_:13921:1 Prot. stage 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:13921:2 Prot. stage 1:Operate & no no
_:13921:10 Prot. stage 1:Blk. by no yes
_:13921:27 Prot. stage 1:Blk. w. inrush no no
curr. detect. yes
_:13921:101 Prot. stage 1:Trip interface no operate operate (grid)
contains operate (generator)
operate (grid)
_:13921:102 Prot. stage 1:Q sign not reversed not reversed
reversed
_:13921:3 Prot. stage 1:Q> threshold 1.00 % to 200.00 % 5.00 %
value
_:13921:103 Prot. stage 1:V< threshold 3.000 V to 175.000 V 85.000 V
value
_:13921:105 Prot. stage 1:I> release 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
_:13921:108 Prot. stage 1:Oper. delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.50 s
generator CB
_:13921:6 Prot. stage 1:Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 1.50 s
grid CB
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Group indicat.
Prot. stage 1
_:13921:81 Prot. stage 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:13921:54 Prot. stage 1:Inactive SPS O
_:13921:52 Prot. stage 1:Behavior ENS O
_:13921:53 Prot. stage 1:Health ENS O
_:13921:60 Prot. stage 1:Inrush blocks operate ACT O
_:13921:55 Prot. stage 1:Pickup ACD O
_:13921:301 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(gen.) ACT O
_:13921:302 Prot. stage 1:Operate (generator) ACT O
_:13921:56 Prot. stage 1:Op.delay expir.(grid) ACT O
_:13921:57 Prot. stage 1:Operate (grid) ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.51.4 Description of the Reclosure Stage
Logic of the Stage
[loqvclst-110713-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 6-460 Logic Diagram of Reclosure Stage in Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection
Measurand
The stage works with fundamental values of voltage and current.
Release for Reconnecting

The release for reconnecting the power-generation facility is given under the following conditions:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
All 3 phase-to-phase voltages are above the threshold value.
The power frequency is within a specified range.
The reclosure time delay, started by the operate of specific protection functions, has elapsed. The time
delay is started by the first operate signal of the protection stages configured via the Configuration
parameter. All protection stages of the voltage protection, the frequency protection, and the QV protec-
tion are available for configuration.
External Start of Reclosure Time Delay

Reclosure time delay can be started via the binary input signal >V, f trip, which can be connected to
external voltage and frequency protection trip signals.

The stage can be blocked via the binary input signal >Block stage.
Parameter: Configuration
Default setting (_:13951:102) Configuration = no stage

You use the Configuration parameter to define which operate signal of specific protection functions starts
the release time delay of the Reclosure stage:
Overfrequency protection
Underfrequency protection
Overvoltage protection
Undervoltage protection
Protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection

When the protection stage of undervoltage-controlled reactive-power protection is selected, only the signal
Operate (generator) can start the release time delay of this stage. The signal Operate (grid) cannot
start the release time delay.
The configuration depends on the specific application.
Parameter: I> release threshold
Recommended setting value (_:13951:106) I> release threshold = 0.100 A

You use the I> release threshold parameter to define a precondition that the stage can work.
The default setting is at 10 % of the rated current. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: V> threshold value
Recommended setting value (_:13951:101) V> threshold value = 95.000 V

You use the V> threshold value parameter to set one of the 2 release criteria. The setting should be set
above the lower value of the allowed voltage range, according to the national transmission code. In Germany,
the recommended overvoltage threshold is 95 % of the rated voltage. Therefore Siemens recommends using
the default setting.
Parameter: Frequency range
Recommended setting value (_:13951:104) f difference positive = 0.05 Hz
Recommended setting value (_:13951:105) f difference negative = -2.50 Hz

You use these 2 parameters to define the admitted frequency deviation from the rated frequency. f
difference positive defines the upper frequency range limit. f difference negative defines the
lower frequency range limit.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Siemens recommends using the default settings, which reflect common practice in Germany. Other national
transmission codes may require a slightly different range.
Parameter: Time delay
Default setting (_:13951:108) Time delay = 0.00 s

You use the Time delay parameter to specify the minimum time delay for releasing the reconnection of the
power-generation facility after tripping by protection.
The setting depends on the specific application.
6.51.4.3 Settings

Reclos. stage
_:13951:1 Reclos. stage:Mode off off
on
test
_:13951:101 Reclos. stage:V> threshold 3.000 V to 340.000 V 95.000 V
value
_:13951:104 Reclos. stage:f difference 0.01 Hz to 5.00 Hz 0.05 Hz
positive
_:13951:105 Reclos. stage:f difference -5.00 Hz to -0.01 Hz -2.50 Hz
negative
_:13951:106 Reclos. stage:I> release 1A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
_:13951:108 Reclos. stage:Time delay 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 0.00 s
_:13951:102 Reclos. stage:Configura- Setting options depend on
tion configuration

(Type)
Reclos. stage
_:13951:81 Reclos. stage:>Block stage SPS I
_:13951:501 Reclos. stage:>V, f trip SPS I
_:13951:54 Reclos. stage:Inactive SPS O
_:13951:52 Reclos. stage:Behavior ENS O
_:13951:53 Reclos. stage:Health ENS O
_:13951:301 Reclos. stage:Release closure ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.52 Current-Jump Detection
The Current jump detection function has the following tasks:

Recognition of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current (I)
Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system cylce to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence current is an additional function used for indi-
cation purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore neither
opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Current-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on current measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dwstruki-111026-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Current-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the current. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
Using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from 3 line currents or the residual current.
Current-jump detection is phase-selective for the line current A, B and C.
The difference from the previous sampled value of the first system cycle is calculated for each sampled value.
The rectified average is then determined for a system cycle from this differential signal i(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value I by subsequent multiplication by 1.11.
The resultant measurand I is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If you have
selected the phase currents for measurement, the output indication data type used includes the separate
phase information. If you have selected the residual current for measurement, the output indication data type
used includes the NI information. If the current-jump detection responds (ILimit), the general information is
generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value (ILimit) in accordance with the logic in
Figure 6-462. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
The output indication Pulse is formed with the configurable timer (_:102) Minimum pulse length. As
a consequence this output indication has a consistent minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse
extension, you can prolong the pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has
been activated, the indication Pulse drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of
the binary input is detected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lojumpii-271011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-462 Current-Jump Detection Logic
Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase currents

With the parameter Measured value, you set whether the line current(s) or the residual current is to be
used for jump detection.
phase currents The tripping stage evaluates the line currents IL1, IL2
and IL3 phase-selectively to detect a jump.
zero-sequence current The tripping stage evaluates the residual current
IN/3I0 to detect a jump.
Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 0.10 A for Irated = 1A or 0.50 A for Irated = 5 A
With the parameter Threshold, you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Minimum pulse length
Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s

With the parameter Minimum pulse length, you specify a consistent minimum size for the output indica-
tion Pulse.
6.52.5 Settings

I-jump det. #
_:1 I-jump det. #:Mode off off
on
test
_:9 I-jump det. #:Measured phase currents phase currents
value zero-sequence current
_:101 I-jump det. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 I-jump det. #:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:102 I-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

(Type)
I-jump det. #
_:81 I-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 I-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 I-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 I-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 I-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.53 Voltage-Jump Detection
The Voltage-jump detection function has the following tasks:

Recognition of jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage (V)
Generation of an indication when the measurands change by more than a configured threshold value
from one system cycle to the next.
The function for detecting jumps in the phase or zero-sequence voltage is an additional function used for indi-
cation purposes or for further processing in user-specific CFC logics. Pick up of the function therefore neither
opens a separate fault in the fault log nor generates an operate indication.
The Voltage-jump detection function is used in protection function groups based on voltage measurement. It
can be instantiated multiple times.
[dwstruku-011211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Voltage-jump detection operates directly with the sampled values without numeric filtering. This provides very
short response times to sudden changes in the voltage. The method used is not sensitive to slow changes of
amplitude or frequency.
By using a configurable selection of measured values, you can select from phase-to-ground voltages, phase-
to-phase voltages or the zero-sequence voltage. Voltage-jump detection is phase-selective.
The difference from the previous sampled value of 1 system cycle is calculated for each sampled value. The
rectified average is then determined for a system cycle from this differential signal v(t). The rectified
average for sinusoidal measurands is then converted to a RMS value V by subsequent multiplication by
1.11. The resultant measurand V is then compared with the threshold value.
If the parameter (_:101) Threshold is exceeded, the output indication Jump is generated. If the meas-
ured value is set to phase-to-phase, the sudden change in voltage is signaled selectively for the individual
measuring elements that have picked up (Jump VAB, Jump VBC or Jump VCA). If you have selected the
phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground voltages for measurement, the output indication data type used included
the separate phase information. If you have selected the zero-sequence voltage for measurement, the output
indication data type used includes the N information. If the voltage-jump detection responds (VLimit), the
general information is generated in the output indication in all cases.
Dropout occurs with a dynamically increased threshold value ULimit in accordance with the information in
Figure 6-464. Dynamic increase of the dropout threshold value achieves optimally short dropout times.
A timing element is added to the indication Jump. The element generates a pulse from this. The length of this
pulse can be set using the parameter (_:102) Minimum pulse length. This gives the output indication
Pulse a reliable minimum size. If you activate the binary input >Pulse extension, you can prolong the
pulse duration even further. If the binary input >Pulse extension has been activated, the indication Pulse
drops off when the configured time has elapsed and the falling edge of the binary input is detected. If the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
measured value is set to phase-to-phase, the pulse duration is signaled selectively for the individual meas-
uring elements that have picked up (Pulse VAB, Pulse VBC or Pulse VCA).
Logic
[lojumpuu-011211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-464 Voltage-Jump Detection Logic
Default setting (_:9) Measured value = phase-to-ground

With the parameter Measured value , you specify which measured values of voltage are to be used for
determining the voltage jumps.
phase-to-ground The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-ground
voltages VA, VB and VC.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

phase-to-phase The tripping stage evaluates the phase-to-phase
voltages VAB, VBC and VCA.
zero-sequence voltage The tripping stage evaluates the zero-sequence
voltage VN/V0.

With the parameter Threshold , you set the threshold value for the measurand which, when exceeded,
generates the output indication Jump .
Parameter: Minimum pulse length
Default setting (_:102) Minimum pulse length = 0.10 s

With the parameter Minimum pulse length , you specify a consistent minimum size for the output indica-
tion Pulse .
6.53.5 Settings

V-jump det. #
_:1 V-jump det. #:Mode off off
on
test
_:9 V-jump det. #:Measured phase-to-ground phase-to-ground
zero-sequence voltage
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:101 V-jump det. #:Threshold 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
_:102 V-jump det. #:Minimum 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s
pulse length

(Type)
V-jump det. #
_:81 V-jump det. #:>Block stage SPS I
_:501 V-jump det. #:>Pulse extension SPS I
_:54 V-jump det. #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 V-jump det. #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 V-jump det. #:Health ENS O
_:301 V-jump det. #:Jump ACT O
_:302 V-jump det. #:Jump VAB SPS O
_:303 V-jump det. #:Jump VBC SPS O
_:304 V-jump det. #:Jump VCA SPS O
_:305 V-jump det. #:Pulse ACT O
_:306 V-jump det. #:Pulse VAB SPS O
_:307 V-jump det. #:Pulse VBC SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:308 V-jump det. #:Pulse VCA SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
6.54 Arc Protection
The function Arc protection:

Detects arcs in air-insulated switchgears without delay and in a fail-safe way
Limits system damage through instantaneous high-speed tripping
Protect systems from thermal overload
Increases safety of personnel
Trips in a 3-pole way
Is suitable for use in all voltage levels
The Arc protection function can be added to function groups that provide current measured values.
The Arc protection function consists of the following blocks.
General
3 stages
Output logic 3-phase

The Arc protection function is preconfigured with 3 stages. A maximum of 17 tripping stages can be operated
simultaneously in the function. The tripping stages have an identical structure.
The following figure shows the basic structure of the Arc protection function.
[dw_structure_arcprot, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-465 Structure/Embedding of the Arc Protection Function
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
General Logic of the Function Block
[lo_fb0_arcprot, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-466 General Logic Diagram of the Function Block
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
Logic of the Stage
[lo_stage_arcprot, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-467 Logic Diagram of the Stage
TheArc protection function uses a locally connected optical arc sensor or an external trip initiation by other
devices in order to detect arcs.
NOTE
i Install the arc sensors inside the switchgear in such a way that they are not hidden behind other system
components!
Shadowing of the arc sensors must be avoided!
Within the Arc protection function, you can use a fast current-flow criterion as an additional release criterion.
The parameters for the current-flow criterion can be found in the General block. For each stage, you can
select individually whether the current-flow criterion must be evaluated as well.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
Method of Measurement, Current-Flow Criterion

The current-flow criterion works with 2 different methods of measurement.
component numerically. A direct-current component is thus eliminated. The RMS value of the funda-
mental component is compared with the set threshold.
Evaluation of the unfiltered measurand:

If the current exceeds the threshold value set by the current amount 2 2 , the stage uses additional
unfiltered measurands. Thus, very short operate times are possible.
NOTE
i If using the current-flow criterion in addition to the light, prevent a potential overfunction caused by the
suddenly occurring light signal.
The current-flow criterion delays the operate indication up to 4 ms!
Self Monitoring
The Arc protection function uses a self-monitoring circuit. This circuit monitors the optical arc sensors and the
fiber-optic cables. The arc-protection module uses the fiber-optic cable to send a cyclic test signal (light) to
the arc sensors. If the channel is operating properly, the test signal is sent back to the arc protection module.
If the test signal is not returned to the arc-protection module, the indication channel # Sensor failure
is generated.
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault, the indication Health is set to Alarm, and the stage/function is
blocked.
6.54.4 Application and Setting Notes General Settings
Go to General under the function Arc protection and set the following parameters. The setting values apply to
all stages.
Default setting (_:2311:3) Threshold I> = 2.000 A

Use the parameter Threshold I> to define the trigger threshold of the phase currents. The Threshold I>
is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the arc protection function.
Set the Threshold I> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold I> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.16.3.2 Application and Setting Notes
Parameter: Threshold 3I0>
Default setting (_:2311:4) Threshold 3I0> = 1.000 A

Use the parameter Threshold 3I0> to determine the tripping threshold for the zero-sequence current. The
Threshold 3I0> is relevant for the current-flow criterion of the Arc protection function.
Set the Threshold 3I0> of the function Arc protection in such a manner that the RMS value of the inrush
current does not exceed the Threshold 3I0> when activating the local circuit breaker.
For more information about how to calculate the setting value, refer to 6.17.4.2 Application and Setting Notes
NOTE
i If you set the parameter CT connection = 3-phase, 2 primary CT for the 3-phase current meas-
uring point, the parameter Threshold 3I0> has no effect.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
6.54.5 Application and Setting Notes for the Stage
Parameter: External trip initiation
Default setting (_:14551:9) External trip initiation = no

Use parameter External trip initiation to set whether an external input signal is used to trigger the
stage.
no The stage does not operate with an external input signal.
yes The stage operates with an external input signal.
If the signal operates with an external input signal, the binary input signal
>External Arc must be routed in the DIGSI 5 information routing. In this
setting option, the binary input signal >External Arc is only visible in the
DIGSI 5 information routing
Note: When working with external trip initiation, do not select a channel. If
an additional channel is selected with this setting value, DIGSI 5 will signal
an inconsistency.
Default setting (_:14551:8) Operating mode = Current and light

Use the parameter Operating mode to define the basic functionality of the stage.
Current and light The stage operates with the input variables current and light.
The current-flow criterion ensures that the light signal originates from an
arc.
Light only This stage operates only with the input signal 'light' and is triggered even if
current is not measured.
This operating mode can cause a overfunction if light is detected suddenly.
Use this setting value only if the effect caused by external light signals is
impossible.
Parameter: Sensor
Default setting (_:14551:11) Sensor = Point sensor

Use the parameter Sensor to set which sensor type is connected to the device.
Point sensor A point sensor is connected to the device.
Line sensor A line sensor is connected to the device.
Custom If you select this setting option, the parameter Threshold Light is
visible.
Siemens recommends the default setting values Point sensor or Line
sensor. This allows arcs to be detected reliably regardless of diffused
light.
Parameter: Threshold Light
Default setting (_:14551:7) Threshold Light = -20.00 dB

Use the parameter Threshold Light to set the light sensitivity. Set the parameter Threshold Light
manually only if you have special default settings for light sensitivity.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
Parameter: Channel
Default setting (_:14551:10) Channel = No channel is selected

Use parameter Channel to select which sensor channel the stage uses.
If the Arc protection function has several stages, a different channel must be selected for each stage.
For parameter Channel , the selection texts are identical to the name of the arc-protection module and its
channels.
6.54.6 Settings

General
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 10.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 2.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 10.000 A
_:2311:4 General:Threshold 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 5.00 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 1.000 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 5.000 A
Stage 1
on
test
_:14551:9 Stage 1:External trip no no
initiation yes
_:14551:8 Stage 1:Operating mode Light only Current and
Current and light light
_:14551:11 Stage 1:Sensor Point sensor Point sensor
Line sensor
Custom
_:14551:7 Stage 1:Threshold Light -28.00 dB to 0.00 dB -20.00 dB
_:14551:10 Stage 1:Channel Setting options depend on
configuration
Stage 2
on
test
initiation yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection

Line sensor
Custom
configuration
Stage 3
on
test
initiation yes
Line sensor
Custom
configuration

(Type)
General
Group indicat.
Stage 1
_:14551:82 Stage 1:>External Arc SPS I
_:14551:58 Stage 1:Arc detected SPS O
Stage 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection

(Type)
Stage 3
Informationen der Selbstberwachung vom Lichtbogenschutz-Modul

(Type)
channel #
_:307 channel #:Sensor failure SPS O
6.54.8 Application Example for Arc Protection with Operating Mode: Light Only
Overview
The example describes the Arc protection function in a medium-voltage switchgear with one infeed and 2
feeders. The Arc protection operates with the Operating mode = Light only .
The following items are considered in the example:
Positioning the optical sensors in the switchgear
Connecting the optical sensors to the protection devices in the feeders and the infeed
Number of necessary stages of the functions in the protection devices of the feeders and the infeed
Setting notes about selected parameters in the stages of the function

The following figure shows the arrangement and the connection of the optical sensors:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-light-only, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-468 Layout and Connection of the Optical Sensors (Operating Mode = Light Only)
For this example, the following is assumed:

The circuit breaker of the infeed must be switched off. This ensures that arcs in the busbar compart-
ments of the infeed and the feeders or in the circuit-breaker compartment of the feeders can be cleared.
Install the optical sensors in the busbar compartments of the infeed and feeder. Install additional sensors
in the circuit-breaker compartment (CB compartment) of each feeder. Connect all sensors to the protec-
tion device of the infeed.
The optical sensors in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders detect arcs in this compartment.
Install one optical sensor in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders and connect it to the
protection device of the feeder. This allows the selective clearing of arcs inside the cable-connection
compartment.
Due to the pressure wave that occurs during an arc, partitions may deform and cause undesirable light
influences in adjacent compartments. This may result in a non-selective trip.
If an arc occurs in the CB compartment and in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, the
superordinate protection device trips.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = Light only, external light effects
may lead to non-selective trips.
NOTE
i It must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that can be connected to the device
depends on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using a modular device, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use a non-modular
device, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
General Notes
Connect one optical sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 1 to the protection device
in feeder 1. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
feeder 1.
Connect one optical sensor from the cable-connection compartment in feeder 2 to the protection device
in feeder 2. Arcs in the cable-connection compartment are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in
feeder 2.
Connect the optical sensors from all busbar compartments and all CB compartments of feeder 1 and 2
to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in these compartments are detected and cleared by the
device in the infeed.
Setting Information for the Protection Device in Feeder 1

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
Parameter: Operating mode = Light only
Parameter: External trip initiation = no
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1

The parameters in block General are not relevant since the Operating mode = Light only.

The Arc protection function operates with one stage.
Set the parameters of the stage as follows:
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod.. 1 channel 1

Setting Information for the Protection Device in the Infeed

The Arc protection function operates with 5 stages.
Set the parameters of the stages as follows:
Parameter: Operating mode = Light only (applies to all stages)
Parameter: External trip initiation = no (applies to all stages)
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 1 (Stage 1) Monitoring busbar compartment in

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 2 (Stage 2) Monitoring CB compartment in feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) Monitoring of busbar compartment in
feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 1 (Stage 4) Monitoring of CB compartment in
feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 2 channel 2 (Stage 5) Monitoring of busbar compartment in
the infeed
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
6.54.9 Application Example for Arc Protection with Operating Mode: Light and Current
Overview
feeders. The Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = Current and light. In the
example, all arcs are detected by the protection device in the infeed.
[dw_light-and-current, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-469 Layout and Connection of the Optical Sensors (Operating Mode = Current and Light)

The current-flow criterion offers additional security to prevent unwanted tripping caused by sudden light
influences.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder,
the current will therefore be evaluated in the infeed.
Install the optical sensors in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, and the cable-connection
compartment of the feeders as well as the busbar compartment of the infeed. Connect the optical
sensors to the protection device in the infeed.
The protection device in the infeed clears all arcs in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, and
the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2. Furthermore, the protection device clears arcs in
the busbar compartment of the infeed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
If the optical sensors in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, and the cable-connection
compartment of the feeder, or in the busbar compartment of the infeed detect an arc, the protection
device in the infeed evaluates the current as well.
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates with the Operating mode = Current and light , the addi-
tional current-flow criterion prevents unwanted tripping caused by external light influences.
NOTE
i This application example requires the connection of several optical sensors to a single protection device. It
must be considered that the number of arc-protection modules that can connected to the device depends
on the hardware configuration of the device.
When using modular devices, a maximum of 15 sensors can be connected. If you use non-modular
devices, a maximum of 6 sensors (3 sensors per module) can be connected.
General Notes
Connect the optical sensors from the busbar compartments, the CB compartments, and the cable-
connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2 to the protection device in the infeed. Arcs in the busbar
compartment, the CB compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of feeder 1 and 2 are
detected and cleared by the device in the infeed.
Connect the optical sensor from the busbar compartment in the infeed to the protection device in the
infeed. Arcs in the busbar compartment of the infeed are cleared selectively by the circuit breaker in the
infeed.

Parameter: Operating mode = Current and light (applies to all stages)

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 channel 3 (Stage 3) Monitoring cable-connection compart-
ment in feeder 1
feeder 2
ment in feeder 2
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 3 channel 1 (Stage 7) Monitoring busbar compartment in the
infeed
Information about the settings of parameters Threshold I> and Threshold 3I0> can be found in
Chapter 6.54.4 Application and Setting Notes General Settings.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
6.54.10 Application Example for Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation
Overview
feeders. The stages of the Arc protection function are triggered by External trip initiation.
[dw_arcprot-extern-input, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-470 Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation Variant 1 (without Feedback to Feeder Protection
Devices)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
[dw_arcprot-extern-input-reverse, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-471 Arc Protection with External Trip Initiation Variant 2 (with Feedback to Feeder Protection
Devices)

compartment of the feeder and the infeed. Connect the optical sensors to the respective protection
device in the feeder and infeed.
If the optical sensors detect an arc in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, or the cable-
connection compartment of the feeders, the indication Arc detected is sent via binary inputs/outputs,
a protection interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device in the infeed. Then, the protection
device in the infeed evaluates the current as well. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed clears the malfunction.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.54.10.2 Application and Setting Notes for Variant 1
(without Feedback to Feeder Protection Devices)
Alternatively, arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeders can be cleared selectively by the
protection device of the affected feeder. To do this, the pickup indication from the infeed unit must be
sent back to the appropriate protection device in the feeder.
You can find detailed information in chapter 6.54.10.3 Application and Setting Notes for Variant 2 (with
Feedback to Feeder Protection Devices)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
NOTE
i If the Arc protection function operates via the External trip initiation, only 3 optical sensors are
required per feeder protection device in order to detect arcs (only one arc-protection module).
The signals from the feeder protection devices are sent via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface, or
IEC 61850 GOOSE to the protection device of the infeed and processed there.
The number of GOOSE messages is not limited. Therefore, the number of feeders is not limited, and the
protection of complex systems is possible.
Siemens recommends using the Arc protection function with external trip initiation.
6.54.10.2 Application and Setting Notes for Variant 1 (without Feedback to Feeder Protection Devices)
General Notes:
compartment of the feeders and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
Arcs in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, and the cable-connection compartment of the
feeders must be switched off by the protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in
the feeder device must send the indication Arc detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/
outputs, a protection interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the thresh-
olds Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed clears the malfunc-
tion.
Connect the signals using 6 stages with the external trip initiation or a CFC chart.

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes (applies to all stages)

feeder 1
Parameter: Channel = Arc mod. 1 Channel 2 (Stage 2) Monitoring CB compartment in feeder 1
ment in feeder 1

Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes (applies to all stages)

feeder 2
ment in feeder 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection

Stage 1 (busbar-compartment monitoring):
Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = no
If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment and the thresholds Threshold I> and/or Threshold
3I0> are exceeded, an operate indication is generated immediately.
Parameter: Operating mode = Current and light

Stage 2 (CB compartment monitoring):
Parameter: Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
If an arc is detected in the CB compartment of the infeed (light-gray sensors in Figure 6-470), a pickup
indication is generated immediately. The arc is cleared by a superordinate protection device.

Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment monitoring):
If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray sensors in
Figure 6-470), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is cleared by a superordinate
protection device.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed,
the current must be evaluated by the superordinate protection device.

Stage 4 to 9 (External trip initiation):
Parameter: External trip initiation = yes

If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, or the cable-connection compart-
ment of the feeder, the feeder device sends the indication Arc detected to the infeed device. An
external trip initiation via these stages is effective only if the indication Arc detected is connected with
the signal >External Arc in the infeed device.
olds Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed clears the arc.
6.54.10.3 Application and Setting Notes for Variant 2 (with Feedback to Feeder Protection Devices)
General Notes:
Connect the optical sensors in the busbar compartment, the CB compartment, and the cable-connection
compartment of the feeder 1 and 2 and the infeed to the respective protection devices.
Arcs in the busbar compartment and in the CB compartment of the feeders must be cleared by the
protection device in the infeed. To do this, the protection devices in the feeder must send the indication
Arc detected to the infeed device. Use the binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface, or IEC 61850
GOOSE.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
Arcs in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder are cleared selectively. Here, the message Arc
detected is sent as well via binary inputs/outputs, a protection interface, or IEC 61850 GOOSE to the
protection device in the infeed.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the threshold
values Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed sends the pickup
indication of the stage back to the protection device in the affected feeder. The protection device in the
affected feeder clears the arc selectively.
Due to the pressure wave that occurs during an arc, partitions may deform and cause undesirable light
influences in adjacent compartments. This may result in a non-selective trip.
NOTE
i The External trip initiation function must be instantiated in the protection devices of the feeders.

Stage 1 to 3:

feeder 1
ment in feeder 1
Stage 4 (External trip initiation):

If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, the indication Arc detected is
sent to the protection device in the infeed.
olds Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed picks up. The pickup
indication from the protection device in the infeed is injected via this stage into the feeder protection
device. This makes a selective tripping in the feeder possible.

Stage 1 to 3:

feeder 2
ment in feeder 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
Stage 4 (External trip initiation):


If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, the indication Arc detected is
sent to the protection device in the infeed.
olds Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed picks up. The pickup
indication from the protection device in the infeed is injected via this stage into the feeder protection
device. This makes a selective tripping in the feeder possible.

If arcs in the cable-connection compartments of the feeder shall be switched off selectively by the protection
device in the feeder, the following setting notes for the protection device in the infeed apply.
Stage 1 (busbar-compartment monitoring):
If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment of the infeed, an operate indication is generated immedi-
ately.

Stage 2 (CB compartment monitoring):
Parameter Operate & flt.rec. blocked = yes
If an arc is detected in the CB compartment of the infeed (light-gray sensors in Figure 6-470), a pickup
indication is generated immediately. The arc is cleared by a superordinate protection device.

Stage 3 (cable-connection compartment monitoring):
If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed (light-gray sensors in
Figure 6-470), a pickup indication is generated immediately. The arc is cleared by a superordinate
protection device.
Depending on the arc location in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed, it is not always
possible to measure the current. If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the infeed,
the current must be evaluated by the superordinate protection device.

Stage 4 to 7 (External trip initiation):
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.54 Arc Protection
If an arc is detected in the busbar compartment or the CB compartment of the feeders, the feeder device
sends the indication Arc detected to the infeed device. An external trip initiation via these stages is effec-
tive only if the indication Arc detected is connected with the signal >External Arc in the infeed device.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed clears the arc.
Stage 8 and 9 (External trip initiation):

If an arc is detected in the cable-connection compartment of the feeder, the feeder device sends the indica-
tion Arc detected to the infeed device. An external trip initiation via these stages is effective only if the
indication Arc detected is connected with the signal >External Arc in the infeed device.
The protection device in the infeed evaluates the current. If the measured current exceeds the thresholds
Threshold I> and/or Threshold 3I0>, the protection device in the infeed picks up. The pickup indication
Arc detected will be sent back to the feeder protection device. This makes a selective tripping in the
feeder possible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
6.55 Voltage Measuring-Point Selection
The function block Voltage measuring-point selection can:

Provide the ability to switchover the voltage measuring points to be applied, if various voltage measuring
points are connected to the voltage interface of the function group
Select the correct voltage based on the switch position of the plant
If more than one voltage measuring points are connected to the same voltage interface of the function group,
use the Voltage measuring-point selection function block in the function group to select the correct voltage
based on the switch position of the plant.
The Voltage measuring-point selection is a common functionality for the function groups of the protected
objects.
The Voltage measuring-point selection function block realizes the selection of voltage measuring points by a
logic block chart. The logic block chart controls the input >MP-ID selection depending on the switch posi-
tions of disconnectors.
Example
Figure 6-472 shows an example of voltage measuring points selection for the function group Capacitor bank
in a double busbar application.
[dwbusbardouble.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 6-472 Double Busbar with Capacitor Bank
Connecting Measuring Points to Capacitor Bank Function Group

Figure 6-473 shows the connection of the function group Capacitor bank with several measuring points in
DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in the bracket after the name.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scconnection, 1, en_US]
Figure 6-473 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Capacitor Bank Function Group
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface of the
function group.
The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
If more than 1 measuring point is connected to one voltage interface, a function block must be added to
enable the selection of the voltage measuring points.
CFC Control
The voltage measuring point is selected by logic block chart on basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than
one measuring point is connected to the interface of the function group, instantiate the function block Voltage
measuring-point selection from the library in the corresponding function group.
In order to ensure the correct measuring-point connection for the function group, a logic block chart has to
define the actual valid IDs for the input >MP-ID selection of the function block.
The following logic block chart implementation is based on the example given in Figure 6-472.
If the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is closed and no matter what the position the Disconnector 2 (QB2) is, the value
2 is the output of CFC block mux_d_1 and transferred to the input >MP-ID selection. Then, the
Meas.point V-3ph with ID 2 is selected as the reference voltage. Similarly, the Meas.point V-3ph with ID 3 is
selected as the reference voltage if the Disconnector 1 (QB1) is not closed (open or in intermediate position)
while Disconnector 2 (QB2) is closed.
[SclocfcVP, 1, --_--]
Figure 6-474 Logic Block Chart: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
However, the disconnectors might be both open or in a transient state. In this case, the input IN3 of the block
bool_int_1 becomes true, the value 0 is used as the ID for voltage selection input ( >MP-ID selection). If
ID 0 is selected, then all voltage values of the respective function-group interface are set to 0 V immediately.
An alarm indication Selection invalid is issued and the indication Health is issued as OK. In case you
want to supply the function group with voltage values under the condition that both disconnectors are open or
in transient state from one or the other busbar, you can alter the CFC chart respectively.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i An invalid measuring-point selection (ID < 0 or an ID of a unconnected measuring point) for input >MP-ID
selection results in the following:
The voltage measured values are displayed as failure.
The validity of the voltage measured values is set to invalid.
The indication Health is set to Alarm.
The indication Selection invalid becomes true.

(Type)
V-MP selection
_:501 V-MP selection:>MP-ID selection INS I
_:53 V-MP selection:Health ENS O
_:301 V-MP selection:Selection invalid SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
7 Control Functions
7.1 Introduction 1180

7.2 Switching Devices 1183
7.3 Switching Sequences 1209
7.4 Control Functionality 1216
7.5 Synchronization Function 1238
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control] 1275
7.7 Transformer Tap Changers 1277
7.8 Voltage Controller 1288
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
7.1 Introduction
7.1.1 Overview
The SIPROTEC 5 series of devices offers powerful command processing capability as well as additional func-
tions that are needed when serving as bay controllers for the substation automation technology or when
providing combi-protection. The object model for the devices is based on the IEC 61850 standard, making the
SIPROTEC 5 series of devices ideally suited for use in systems employing the IEC 61850 communication
protocol. In view of the function blocks necessary for the control functions, other logs are also used.
7.1.2 Concept of Controllables
The concept of so-called controllables is based on the data model described in IEC 61850. Controllables are
objects that can be controlled, such as a switch with feedback. The model of a transformer tap changer , for
example, contains controllables. The controllables are identifiable by their last letter C of the data type (for
example, DPC = Double Point Controllable/Double Command with feedback or BSC = Binary-Controlled Step
Position Indication / transformer tap command with feedback ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
[sc_contrl, 1, en_US]
(1) Position (connect with binary inputs)

(2) Signalization of the current condition
(3) Command output (connect with relay)
The trip, opening and the close commands are connected to the relays. For the trip command, a choice
between saved and unsaved output is possible. The position is connected with 2 binary inputs (double-point
indication). In addition, signals are available that display the current state of the switch (not selected, off, on,
intermediate position, disturbed position). These signals can be queried in CFC for example, in order to build
interlocking conditions.
Control Models
You can set the operating mode of the controllables by selecting the control model.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.1 Introduction
4 different control models are available:

Direct without feedback monitoring ( direct w. normal secur. )
With reservation (SBO)20 without feedback monitoring ( SBO w. normal secur. )
Direct with feedback monitoring ( direct w. enh. security )
With SBO with feedback monitoring ( SBO w. enh. security )

The next figure shows the command sources, command types, and control models.
[dwsteuer-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-1 Command Sources, Command Types and Control Models
The figure shows the control models (right) with the respective control mechanisms (center). The standard
control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850 compliant system is SBO with feedback monitoring
( SBO w. enh. security ). This control model is the default setting for newly created switching devices.
20 SBO: Select Before Operate
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.2 Switching Devices
7.2.1 General Overview
The following switching devices can be found in the DIGSI 5 library in the Circuit-breaker and Switching-
devices function groups (see the following images).
[sccbausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-2 Selecting the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device Using the DIGSI Circuit-Breaker Function
Group Menu
[scswausw, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-3 Selecting the Remaining Switching Devices Using the DIGSI Switching-Devices Menu
7.2.2 Switching Devices
7.2.2.1 Structure of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device

This chapter describes the control properties of the Circuit breaker switching device.
The Circuit breaker switching device contains the following function blocks that are needed for control:
Function block Circuit breaker
Function block Control
Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XCBR, CSWI, and CILO in IEC 61850.
In the case of protection devices or combined protection and control devices, additional functions can be
contained in the circuit breaker switching device, for example, synchrocheck, the automatic reclosing (AREC),
the trip logic or manual On function. However, these are not relevant for the control function. The description
of these functions is in the chapter Protection and Automatic Functions..
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwbreake-220512-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-4 Control Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Device
The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is linked with the binary inputs that acquire the switch position via information
routing. The circuit breaker in DIGSI 5 is also linked with the binary outputs that issue the switching
commands.
The Circuit breaker switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 3 different variants:
3-pole circuit breaker
This switching device contains additional base function blocks for protection functions (for example, trip
logic, Manual close, circuit-breaker test).
1-pole circuit breaker

This switching device is intended for 1-pole tripping via the protection functions and contains the same
base function blocks for protection as the 3-pole circuit breaker switching device.
Circuit breaker (status only)

This switching device contains only the Circuit-breaker function block. It is used to acquire the position of
a switch, for example, from a neighboring bay. This object type can be used to model switches that can
only be read but not controlled by the SIPROTEC 5 device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
NOTE
i When setting the parameters of a device, you will find 2 circuit-breaker types in the DIGSI 5 library:
- 3-pole circuit breaker or 1-pole circuit breaker, depending on the device type selected (3-pole or 1-pole
tripping)
- Circuit breaker (status only)
Function Blocks of the Circuit Breaker
Table 7-1 Function Blocks of the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Function Description Parameters Function

Block
Circuit The Circuit breaker function Output time The circuit breaker forms the
breaker block in the SIPROTEC 5 switch position from the posi-
device represents the phys- tions of the binary inputs and
ical switch. also outputs the command via
the binary outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command check, communi-
SBO time-out cation with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block Circuit breaker
Check switching
authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Check blk. by protection
Interlocking Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (deposited The Interlocking functionality
protection in CFC) generates the releases for
switchgear interlocking
protection.
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Setting Options of the Circuit-Breaker Switching Element

The setting options of the circuit breaker are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance.
Additional setting options of the circuit breakers that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function
blocks are nevertheless available:
Table 7-2 Setting Options of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker.
Properties Function To Be Found in

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control(1) function
detection block
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filtering time on/off by changing the block
position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block
time stamp
Suppress intermediate When activated, only the inter- Position of the Control(1) function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block
the duration of the software filtering
time.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

Treatment of spontaneous If the General software Position of the Control(1) function
position changes (Gen. soft- filter setting is selected, the block
ware filt./Spont. software filt.) general settings for software
filtering of spontaneous position
changes and for position changes
caused by a switching command
apply. By selecting Spontaneous
software filter, a separate
filtering is activated for sponta-
neous position changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
filtering time neous position changes block
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Inhibit intermediate posi- When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
tion for a spontaneous neous change to the intermediate block
chng. (yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
(1) First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
Table 7-3 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Circuit Breaker Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Circuit breaker (1)
function block
(1) First click Position and then click the Details button in the Properties window (below).
Table 7-4 Additional Settings in the Device Settings having Effects on the Circuit Breaker

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
status changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Chatter idle time
Chatter check time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Circuit-breaker and Control function blocks are
described in the next section (see 7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker).
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see chapter 7.4.1 Command
Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Circuit Breaker
The Circuit breaker function block in the SIPROTEC 5 device represents the physical switch device. The task
of the circuit breaker is to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Circuit-breaker function block.
[dwfuncls-140212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-5 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Blocks
Table 7-5 and Table 7-6 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs, the
effect on Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
EXAMPLE
If the signal >Ready accepts the Quality = invalid, then the value is set to cleared. In problematic operating
states, the circuit breaker should signal that it is not ready for an On/Off cycle. .
Table 7-5 Inputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
>Ready The signal >Ready indicates that the OFF-ON-OFF SPS Going
cycle is possible with the circuit breaker.
This signal is used for the AREC standby status.
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting of the acquisition blocking and of the
substitution is blocked.
>Reset switch Among other things, the binary input sets the opera- SPS Unchanged
statist. tion counter for the switch to the value 0.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Signal Name Description Type Default Value if

Signal Quality =
invalid
External health External health The binary input reflects ENS Unchanged
circuit-breaker status (EHealth).
This input will be set by the CFC using the
BUILD_ENS block. In turn, BUILD_ENS can query
binary inputs that represent the conditions OK,
Warning, Alarm as a result of the function trip-
circuit supervision.
Position The signal Position can be used to read the DPC Unchanged
circuit-breaker position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (EHealth) of the
Circuit breaker functionality is set to Warning.
Table 7-6 Outputs of the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
Signal Name Description Type

Definitive trip Protection has finally been tripped. SPS
Alarm suppression The signaling contact for external alarm suppression is suppressed SPS
during the runtime of automatic reclosing (optional) as well as during
the command output of switching commands.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of switching cycles of the circuit INS
breaker.
Trip/open cmd. This logic output is responsible for the command output Off. SPS
Close command This logic output is responsible for the command output On. SPS
Command active The binary output Command active is responsible for the signaling of SPS
a running command (relay active or selected switching device (SEL)).
CB open hours The statistic value counts the hours the circuit breaker is open. INS
Operating hours The statistic value counts the hours where at least one phase current is INS
greater than the Current thresh. CB open setting.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the circuit breaker. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be
processed.
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation21) selects the switching device prior to the
actual switching function, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually
in the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security 22 SBO w. normal secur.
direct w. enh. security
SBO w. enh. security
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
21 in standard IEC 61850, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).

22 The default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameters Default Setting Possible Parameter Values

(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 1.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
(_:4201:107) Check blk. by protection yes no
yes
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Control function block.
[dwsteue1-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-6 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Control Function Block
Table 7-7 Control Functionality Input and Output
Signal Description Type Value if Signal

Name Quality=Invalid
Cmd. with With the Cmd. with feedback signal, the circuit Controllable Unchanged
feedback breaker's position is accepted via the double-point (DPC)
indication of the Circuit breaker function block and Unchanged
the command is submitted.
In the information routing of DIGSI 5, you may select a function key as a possible command source. In addi-
tion, it is displayed here if the command is activated by CFC. The logging is routed here.
7.2.2.3 Connection Variants of the Circuit Breaker

For each switching device, you can establish the number of poles (for example, 1-pole, 1.5-pole or 2-pole)
that are switched with or without feedback. This results in the necessary amount of information to be
processed, thus establishing the command type.
Whether the circuit breaker is triggered 1-, 1.5-, or 2-phase, depends on the design of the auxiliary and
control-voltage system. In most cases, the activation of the opening coil of the circuit breaker is 1-pole.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Table 7-8 Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants
Abbreviation Meaning of the Abbreviations of the Connection Variants

BO Binary output
L+; L- Control voltage
A Trip command
Gnd Close command
Table 7-9 Meaning of the Abbreviations in DIGSI
Abbreviation Description of the Input in DIGSI

U Unsaved trip command
Click the right mouse button and enter U.
X Close Command
Click the right mouse button and enter X for the respective binary output.
OH The switching device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is voltage at the
routed binary input (H).
Click the right mouse button and enter OH.
OL The switching device feedback is in the position OFF, if there is no voltage at the
routed binary input (L).
Click the right mouse button and enter OL.
GH The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is voltage at the
Click the right mouse button and enter CH.
CL The switching-device feedback is in the position ON, if there is no voltage at the
Click the right mouse button and enter CL.
TL Trip command stored
Click the right mouse button and enter TL.
Connection Variant: 3-Pole Circuit Breaker

This is the standard type for the control function. All 3 individual poles of the circuit breaker are triggered
together by a double command.
[dw3polls-070611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-7 3-Pole Circuit Breaker
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1polig-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-8 1-Pole Triggering
[scrang1pLS1p, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-9 1-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.
The letter U represents an unlatched command. Alternatively, TL (latched tripping) may be selected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-10 1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-11 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Connection Variant: 1-Pole Circuit Breaker

The 1-pole circuit breaker is used for separate activation and acquisition of the individual poles of a circuit
breaker. It is intended for common use by 1-pole working protection and control functions. It is intended in the
busbar protection for use by 1-pole working control functions. You can set parameters for the 1-pole protec-
tion triggering (trip repeat) via the circuit-breaker failure protection and route in the information routing directly
to the command relay.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
NOTE
i The wiring of the Circuit-breaker function group with binary inputs and binary outputs occurs once per
device .
The control function in this type switches all 3 poles on or off simultaneously.
The control functions can switch off 1-pole. This close command is always 3-pole. It is possible that only the
open poles close.
[dw1polls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-14 Circuit Breaker with 1-Pole Triggering
For the circuit breaker with 1-pole triggering, triggering takes place via one relay per phase for the trip
command and via a 4th relay for the close command (see next figure).
[dw1panls-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-15 1-Pole Connection of a Circuit Breaker
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scrang1pLS13pz, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-16 Routing in DIGSI
In the previous figure, the switch is connected 1-pole. The protection trip command is routed individually for
the 3 phases (Trip only pole A to Trip only pole C). The protection trip command is routed for the
3 phases (Trip/open cmd. 3-pole). The control will always switch off the 3 poles of the switch. In addi-
tion, the 3 U (Unsaved) allocations of the activation and close command are set to 3-pole. This routing is also
used by protection functions that trip 3 poles. The close command is issued simultaneously for all 3 phases.
Example: Trip Command during Transition from 1-Pole to 3-Pole

During a transition from 1-pole to 3-pole tripping, Trip only pole A remains active. To inform, for
example, an external AREC whether it is a 1-pole or 3-pole trip, you can use the indications Trip
logic:Trip indication:1-pole and Trip logic:Trip indication:3-pole.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dw_trip-command_between_1p-3p, 1, en_US]
Acquisition of the Circuit-Breaker Position

The routing of the binary inputs for feedback of the switch position is done as shown in the previous figure
(also see Chapter 5.5.5.3 Acquisition of Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts and Further Information ).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scrang1pLSHk, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-17 Routing of the 1-Pole in DIGSI
The meaning of abbreviations can be found in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
The indication Command active can also be routed to a binary output. This binary output is always active if
either an On or trip command is pending, or the switching device was selected by the command control.
7.2.2.4 Settings

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated normal 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
current
Breaker settings
_:2311:112 General:Current thresh. CB 1 A 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
open 5A 0.150 A to 50.000 A 0.500 A
allowed yes
Trip logic
_:5341:101 Trip logic:Trip at 2ph short 3-pole 3-pole
circuit 1-pole, leading phase
_:5341:102 Trip logic:3-pole coupling with pickup with trip
with trip
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:5341:103 Trip logic:Reset of trip with I< with I<
command with I< & aux.contact
with dropout
Circuit break.
_:4261:101 Circuit break.:Output time 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 0.10 s
Manual close
_:6541:101 Manual close:Action time 0.01 s to 60.00 s 0.30 s
Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model status only SBO w. enh.
direct w. normal secur. security
SBO w. normal secur.
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check switching no yes
authority yes
_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is no yes
reached yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double no yes
activat. blk. yes
_:4201:107 Control:Check blk. by no yes
protection yes
CB test
_:6151:101 CB test:Dead time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.10 s

(Type)
Trip logic
_:5341:300 Trip logic:Trip indication ACT O
Circuit break.
_:4261:500 Circuit break.:>Ready SPS I
_:4261:501 Circuit break.:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:4261:502 Circuit break.:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:4261:503 Circuit break.:External health ENS I
_:4261:53 Circuit break.:Health ENS O
_:4261:58 Circuit break.:Position 3-pole DPC C
_:4261:459 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsA DPC C
_:4261:460 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsB DPC C
_:4261:461 Circuit break.:Position 1-pole phsC DPC C
_:4261:300 Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole SPS O
_:4261:401 Circuit break.:Trip only pole A SPS O
_:4261:402 Circuit break.:Trip only pole B SPS O
_:4261:403 Circuit break.:Trip only pole C SPS O
_:4261:301 Circuit break.:Close command SPS O
_:4261:302 Circuit break.:Command active SPS O
_:4261:303 Circuit break.:Definitive trip SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
_:4261:304 Circuit break.:Alarm suppression SPS O
_:4261:306 Circuit break.:Op.ct. INS O
_:4261:407 Circuit break.:Op.ct. A INS O
_:4261:408 Circuit break.:Op.ct. B INS O
_:4261:409 Circuit break.:Op.ct. C INS O
_:4261:322 Circuit break.:CB open hours INS O
_:4261:323 Circuit break.:Operating hours INS O
_:4261:307 Circuit break.:I Brk. BCR O
_:4261:308 Circuit break.:IA Brk. BCR O
_:4261:309 Circuit break.:IB Brk. BCR O
_:4261:310 Circuit break.:IC Brk. BCR O
_:4261:311 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs A MV O
_:4261:312 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs B MV O
_:4261:313 Circuit break.:Break.-current phs C MV O
_:4261:314 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs A MV O
_:4261:315 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs B MV O
_:4261:316 Circuit break.:Break. voltage phs C MV O
Manual close
_:6541:501 Manual close:>Block manual close SPS I
_:6541:500 Manual close:>Input SPS I
_:6541:300 Manual close:Detected SPS O
Reset LED Group
Control
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
CB test
_:6151:53 CB test:Health ENS O
_:6151:301 CB test:Test execution ENS O
_:6151:302 CB test:Trip command issued ENS O
_:6151:303 CB test:Close command issued ENS O
_:6151:304 CB test:Test canceled ENS O
_:6151:311 CB test:3-pole open-close SPC C
_:6151:312 CB test:Pole A open-close SPC C
_:6151:313 CB test:Pole B open-close SPC C
_:6151:314 CB test:Pole C open-close SPC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.2.3 Disconnector Switching Device
7.2.3.1 Structure of the Disconnector Switching Device

Like the circuit breaker, the Disconnector switching device contains the following 3 function blocks:
Function block Disconnector
Function block Control
Function block Interlocking

This corresponds to the logical nodes XSWI, CSWI und CILO in IEC 61850.
NOTE
i In contrast to the Circuit-breaker switching device, the Disconnector switching device cannot contain any
additional functions because protection functions or synchronization can have no effect on the discon-
nector.
The following figure shows the structure of the Disconnector switching element:
[dwdiscon-190612-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-18 Control-Relevant Function Blocks of the Disconnector Switching Device
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The Disconnector switching device behaves like the Circuit-breaker switching device. The only difference is
the designation of the function block that the physical switch provides (disconnector instead of circuit
breaker). Blocking by protection is not provided in the analysis of the Control function block.
The Disconnector switching device is available in the DIGSI 5 library in 2 different variants:
Disconnector with 3-pole connection
The device switches all 3 poles of the disconnector on or off simultaneously.
Disconnector without triggering (only status detection, no control)

This variant is rarely encountered. It is encountered with grounding switches that frequently cannot be
controlled, but only provide their current position. In addition, the position of a disconnector in a neigh-
boring bay can be acquired.
Function Blocks of the Disconnector
Table 7-10 Function Blocks of the Disconnector Function Group
Function Description Settings Function

Block
Discon- The disconnector represents Maximum output time The disconnector replicates
nector the physical switch in the Overtravel time the switch position from the
SIPROTEC 5 device. Switching-device type status of the binary inputs
and also transmits the
command via the binary
outputs.
Control Command processing Control model Command checks, commu-
SBO time-out nication with the command
Feedback monitoring time source and with the function
block disconnector
Check switching authority
Check if pos. is reached
Check double activat.
blk.
Interlocking Switchgear interlocking Interlocking condition (deposited The Interlocking function-
protection in CFC) ality generates the releases
for switchgear interlocking
protection.
The setting values of the parameter can be found in the chapter 7.2.3.2 Application and Setting Notes.
Additional Settings of Disconnector Switching Element

The settings of the disconnector are assigned to the function blocks on the basis of their relevance. Additional
disconnector settings that cannot be directly assigned to one of the 3 function blocks and are identical to the
circuit-breaker settings are available:
Table 7-11 Setting positions of the Controllable Command with Feedback in the Control Function
Block of the Circuit Breaker

Software filtering time Software filtering time for position Position of the Control(1) function
detection block
Retrigger filter (yes/no) Switching retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filtering time on/off by changing the block
position
Message time before Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
filtering (yes/no) filtering time for position-detection block
time stamp
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

Suppress intermediate When activated,only the inter- Position of the Control(1) function
position (yes/no) mediate position is suppressed by block
the duration of the software filtering
time.
Spontaneous position If the General software Position of the Control(1) function
changes filtered by (Gen. filter setting is selected, the block
software filt./Spont. software filt. general settings for software
filtering of spontaneous position
changes and for position changes
caused by a switching command
apply. By selecting Spontaneous
software filter, a separate
filtering is activated for sponta-
neous position changes.
Spontaneous software Software filtering time for sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
filter time neous position changes block
Spontaneous retrigger Switching on/off retriggering of the Position of the Control(1) function
filter (yes/no) filtering time by spontaneous posi- block
tion change
Spontaneous indication Consideration of the hardware Position of the Control(1) function
timestamp before filtering filtering time for position-detection block
(yes/no) time stamp in case of a sponta-
neous change
Spontaneous suppress When activated, only the sponta- Position of the Control(1) function
intermediate position neous change to the intermediate block
(yes/no) position is suppressed by the dura-
tion of the software filtering time.
(1) First click Position and then the Details key in the Properties window (below).
Table 7-12 Setting Options of the Controllable Position in the Disconnector Function Block (Chatter
Blocking)

Chatter blocking (yes/no) Switching chatter blocking on/off Position of the Disconnector (1)
function block
(1) First click Position and then the Details key in the Properties window (below).
Table 7-13 Additional Settings in the Device Settings with effect on the Disconnector

Number of permissible Chatter-blocking setting value: Device settings (to be found under
state changes Once for the entire device Settings)
Chatter test time
Chatter dead time
Chatter test time
The inputs and outputs as well as the setting options of the Disconnector switch function block are described
in the next chapter (see 7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector. The Control function block is described
identically as the Circuit-breaker function block, with the exception that the command check blocking is avail-
able through protection only with the circuit breaker.
More information on this is can be found in chapter 7.2.2.2 Application and Setting Notes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Interlocking
The Interlocking function block generates the releases for switchgear interlocking protection. The actual
interlocking conditions are deposited in CFC. For more information on this, see section 7.4.1 Command
Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection.
Disconnector
The disconnector represents the physical switch in the SIPROTEC 5 device. The task of the disconnector is
to replicate the switch position from the status of the binary inputs.
The Disconnector function block is linked automatically via the information matrix with the binary inputs that
register the switch position and with the binary outputs that issue the switching commands.
The Disconnector function block makes the following settings available (see next table).
Settings Default Setting Possible Parameter Values
(_:5401:101) Maximum output time 10.00 s 0.01 s to 1800 s
(Increment: 0.01 s)
(_:5401:102) Overtravel time 0.00 s 0 s to 60 s
(_:5401:103) Switching-device type disconnector switch-disconnector
disconnector
grounding switch
fast grounding switch
NOTE
i The parameter Switching-device type is effective only on the IEC 61850 interface. This parameter is
used to set the disconnector type for communication via an IEC 61850 interface. It is a mandatory data
object in the IEC 61850 standard.
The following figure shows the logical inputs and outputs of the Disconnector function block.
[dwoutinp-150212-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-19 Logical Inputs and Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Table 7-14 and Table 7-15 list the inputs and outputs with a description of their function and type. For inputs,
the effect on Quality = invalid on the value of the signal is described.
Table 7-14 Inputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Signal Name Description Type Value if Signal

Quality=Invalid
>Acquisition The binary input activates acquisition blocking. You SPS Unchanged
blocking can also set this binary input with an external toggle
switch.
>Reset Acquisition blocking and the substitution of the circuit SPS Unchanged
AcqBlk&Subst breaker are reset with this input. If the input is acti-
vated, setting of the acquisition blocking and of the
substitution is blocked.
>Reset switch The binary input sets the operation counter for the SPS Unchanged
statist. switch to the value 0.
Position The binary input Position can be used to read the DPC Unchanged
disconnector position with double-point indication.
If the quality of the input signal assumes the status Quality = invalid, then the standby status (Health) of the
Disconnector function block is set to Warning.
Table 7-15 Outputs of the Disconnector Function Block
Signal Name Description Type

Open command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output Off.
Close command This binary output is responsible for the command SPS
output On.
Command active The binary output Command active is a running SPS
command for the signalization (command active or
selected switching device). During Command active
either an On or Off command is active.
Op.ct. The information counts the number of disconnector INS
switching cycles.
Control
It is the task of the controls to execute command checks and establish communication between the command
source and the disconnector. Using the control settings, you specify how the commands are to be processed.
Through the function SBO (Select Before Operate, reservation23) selects the switching device prior to the
actual switching function, thus it remains locked for additional commands. Feedback monitoring provides
information about the initiator of the command while the command is in process, that means, informing
whether or not the command was implemented successfully. These two options can be selected individually
in the selection of the control model, so that 4 combinations in total are available (see the following table).
The control makes the following settings available (see next table).
(_:4201:101) Control model SBO w. enh. direct w. normal secur.
security24 SBO w. normal secur.
(_:4201:102) SBO time-out 30.00 s -
23 in standard IEC 61850, Reservation is described as Select before Operate (SBO).

24 The default setting is the standard control model for a switching command in an IEC 61850-compliant system.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(_:4201:103) Feedback monitoring time 10.00 s -
(_:4201:104) Check switching authority yes no
yes
advanced
(_:4201:105) Check if pos. is reached yes no
yes
(_:4201:106) Check double activat. blk. yes no
yes
7.2.3.3 Trigger Variants of the Disconnector

The activation types are identical to those for the circuit breaker. The meaning of abbreviations can be found
in Table 7-8 and Table 7-9.
Whether the disconnector is triggered for 1-, 1.5-, or 2-phases depends on the design of the auxiliary and
control voltage system.
1-Pole Triggering
[dw1ptren-030211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
[scrangtrenn1p, 1, en_US]
You can select the contacts for On and Off as desired. They need not necessarily be next to one another.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-22 1.5-Pole Triggering
Figure 7-23 1.5-Pole Triggering, Routing in DIGSI
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
2-Pole Triggering
[dw2polan-020211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The feedback is routed via the position with the disconnector.
7.2.3.4 Settings

Control
_:4201:101 Control:Control model status only SBO w. enh.
_:4201:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:4201:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
toring time
_:4201:104 Control:Check switching no yes
authority yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:4201:105 Control:Check if pos. is no yes
reached yes
_:4201:106 Control:Check double no yes
activat. blk. yes
Disconnector
_:5401:101 Disconnector:Maximum 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
output time
_:5401:102 Disconnector:Overtravel 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
time
_:5401:103 Disconnector:Switching- switch-disconnector disconnector
device type disconnector
grounding switch
fast grounding switch

(Type)
Control
_:4201:503 Control:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:4201:504 Control:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:4201:505 Control:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:4201:506 Control:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:4201:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:4201:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
_:4201:302 Control:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:4201:308 Control:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
_:4201:313 Control:Switching authority ENS O
_:4201:314 Control:Switching mode ENS O
Interlocking
_:4231:500 Interlocking:>Enable opening SPS I
_:4231:501 Interlocking:>Enable closing SPS I
_:4231:502 Interlocking:>Enable opening (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:503 Interlocking:>Enable closing (fixed) SPS I
_:4231:53 Interlocking:Health ENS O
Disconnector
_:5401:500 Disconnector:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:5401:501 Disconnector:>Reset switch statist. SPS I
_:5401:53 Disconnector:Health ENS O
_:5401:58 Disconnector:Position DPC C
_:5401:300 Disconnector:Open command SPS O
_:5401:301 Disconnector:Close command SPS O
_:5401:302 Disconnector:Command active SPS O
_:5401:305 Disconnector:Op.ct. INS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.3 Switching Sequences
Switching sequences may be running inside the device that switch the switchgear automatically in a prespeci-
fied sequence.
A switching sequence consists of a special function block Switching sequence (Swi. seq.) from the DIGSI 5
Library and the project-specific list of the switching commands that are generated in the CFC.
The function block Switching sequence is located in folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
[scudeffb, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-26 Function block Switching Sequence in the Library
These function blocks can be used in the information matrix on the highest level (level of the function groups)
or in a user-defined function group.
One Switching sequence function block is used per switching sequence. The function block is the interface
for controlling and monitoring the condition of the CFC switching sequence. The task of the function block is
to verify the relative conditions for control commands, for example, switching authority, interlocking condi-
tions, etc. You can connect the signals of the function block with the CFC chart. They start and stop the
switching sequence and provide data about the status of the switching sequence (see Figure 7-27 ). The CFC
chart is used to activate the switching device that must be switched. The CFC blocks define, among other
things, the switching devices that must be switched.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwswseq1-110913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-27 Switching Sequence Function Block
Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence

One of the following methods can be used to start a switching sequence:
On-site operation: menu or display page
Input >Start during rising edge, for example, via binary input
Controllable Start for the start via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103, or DNP
Input >Start via a function key
Controllable Start via a function key

One of the following methods can be used to cancel a switching sequence:
On-site operation: menu or display page
Input >Cancel during rising edge, for example, via binary input
Controllable Cancel for the cancelation via a communication protocol, for example, IEC 61850, T103,
or DNP
Input >Cancel via a function key
Controllable Cancel via a function key
On-Site Operation
If at least one Switching sequence function block is used in the device, a new Switching sequences entry is
shown in the first line of the Control menu. If this menu item is selected, an overview of all switching
sequences and the current status will be displayed (see Figure 7-28 , example with 2 switching sequences).
You can start or cancel the switching sequences from this menu.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Figure 7-28
Overview of the Switching Sequences on the Device Display
This function block offers similar settings as the Control function block of a circuit breaker or disconnector
(see chapter 7.2.1 General Overview).
[scccs4pa-13112014_DE, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-29 Settings of the Switching Sequence Function Block
Parameter: Check switching authority

Default setting (_:101) Check switching authority = yes
With the Check switching authority parameter, you can determine whether the switching authority
should be checked before the execution of the switching sequence.
Parameter: Check double activat. blk.
Default setting (_:102) Check double activat. blk. = yes
With the Check double activat. blk. parameter, you can determine whether the double activation of
switching devices should be checked. The setting value yes indicates that a switching sequence will be
started only if no switching commands for a circuit breaker and disconnector are activated, provided that
double-activation blocking was activated for those switching devices.
Parameter: Time-out monitoring
With the Time-out monitoring parameter, you can determine whether the feedback from the process
should be evaluated. The feedback is gathered via the inputs >Successful and >Failed.
Parameter: Monitoring time
Default setting (_:104) Monitoring time = 30.00 s
With the Monitoring time parameter, you can determine the duration of the monitoring time.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: Control model

Default setting (_:105) Control model = SBO w. normal secur.
With the Control model parameter, you select between direct w. normal secur. or SBO w.
normal secur. to start the switching sequence.
It is not possible to set a control model for cancelation of the switching sequence. The control model direct
w. normal secur. is always used to cancel the function.
Information
The Switching sequence function block provides the following data:
[scinfof1-13112014, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-30 Data Provided by the Switching Sequence Function Block
In the Switching sequence function block, the interlocking is analog to the Interlocking function block and it is
possible to use it in the switching sequence:
>Enable start: Connection to interlocking conditions (CFC) for the start of the entire switching
sequence. Not in effect in the non-interlocked switching mode.
>Enable start (fixed): Non-revocable interlocking conditions for the start of the entire switching
sequence. In effect regardless of the switching mode.
If the time-out monitoring is activated (parameter Time-out monitoring), the process feedback must take
place via the inputs >Successful and >Failed. If the last switching command of the switching sequence
was executed successfully, the input >Successful usually is set. To do this, connect the feedback of the
last switching command from the CFC with this input of the function block during the device parameterization.
If a switching command fails, this feedback can be captured by the input >Failed. The active switching
sequence will be ended immediately and does not have to wait for a time-out.
The indication Execution signals the current condition of the switching sequence. The events running,
canceled, failed, and successful are generated only while the time-out monitoring is activated. The
event Start Trigger is used to start the switching sequence in the CFC chart.
Example for a Switching Sequence with CFC

The following figure shows a single-line diagram for a substation with 4 bays: Busbar grounding, infeed, bus
coupler, and feeder bay.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwbspunt-120913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-31 Example of a Substation
The switching sequence C4 Off (Figure 7-32) should switch off feeder bay C4. The circuit breaker is opened;
followed by opening of one of the 2 busbar disconnectors.
[Scssc4as-110913-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-32 CFC Switching Sequence C4 Off
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Command Execution
As described in section Starting and Canceling a Switching Sequence, Page 1210, the display page or the
Control menu can be used to start the switching sequence. The Start Trigger signal for indication
Execution is used to recognize the start and initiates the switching sequence by pickup of TRIG in the DPC-
DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1. Building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE are always used in pairs.
The DEF building block controls the type and nature of the command
VAL = Switching direction (0 = Off, 1 = On)
SELECT = Select switching device (2 = Select with a value suitable for the preset control model SBO w.
enh. security)
OPERATE = Switch switching device (1 = Switching device is switched on or off)

Using the connected DPC-EXE building block, the command checks can be deactivated (REL_...). In the
application example, all inputs are set to 0 and therefore, all checks are activated.
After the open command of circuit breaker QA1 is acknowledged via the auxiliary contacts, the OK output of
the CFC block DPC_EXE becomes active and triggers the next switching object. With the input PT the signal
for the OK output is time-delayed (in the example by 10 ms) and creates a dead time between individual
switching commands and the switching sequence. This dead time is important for the updating of the inter-
locking conditions.
If QB1 is closed, QB1 will be opened. If QB2 is closed, QB2 will be opened. In order to implement this logic,
the OK output signal of QA1 is linked with the respective positions of circuit breakers QB1 and QB2 via the
logical AND function. This signal serves as a trigger for the trip command of QB1 or QB2.
Because in this example the time-out monitoring is activated, the feedback about the successful or unsuc-
cessful execution of the switching sequence must be parameterized. The Switching sequence function block
provides the inputs >Successful and >Failed. In order to acknowledge the entire switching sequence
positively, the OR operation of the OK outputs for the disconnectors QB1 and QB2 is sufficient. The feedback
of all failed executions takes place via the OR operation of all ERR outputs of the switching devices. The
benefit of such assessment is the fact that, in case of a failure, waiting for the time-out is not necessary, but
the active switching sequence can be ended immediately.
In this example, the use of the EN_I input of building block DPC-DEF fulfills 2 tasks:
Cancelation of the entire switching sequence
Resetting of the outputs OK and ERR on building block DPC-EXE
By linking all EN_I inputs and EN_O outputs of building blocks DPC-DEF and DPC-EXE, the execution of the
switching sequence can be controlled centrally since the value is transmitted between the building blocks.
Only if input EN_I on the DPC-EXE is set to 1, a switching command is issued. If the input drops back to 0
while a command is being processed, this command will be canceled. With this behavior, cancelation of an
entire switching sequence can be achieved. As recognition of a cancelation, the canceled signal of the indi-
cation Execution is used in the CFC chart and connected with the input EN_I of the first switching device, in
this example, with the DPC-DEF building block of circuit breaker QA1.
Since the OK and ERR outputs of the DPC-EXE building block maintain their value until execution of the next
command, it is necessary to reset the continuous output after each execution of the switching sequence for
correct execution of the entire CFC switching sequence multiple times. In this case, the use of the EN_I input
is also helpful. In the input drops back to 0, the OK and ERR outputs are also reset to 0. The triggers for
ending the switching sequence are the events failed and successful. For this reason, in the above
example, the signals failed and successful of the indication Execution were connected with EN_I of
the DPC-DEF building block.
7.3.4 Settings

Swi. seq. #
_:101 Swi. seq. #:Check no yes
switching authority yes
advanced
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:102 Swi. seq. #:Check no yes
double activat. blk. yes
_:103 Swi. seq. #:Time-out 0 true
monitoring 1
_:104 Swi. seq. #:Monitoring 0.02 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s
time
_:105 Swi. seq. #:Control direct w. normal secur. SBO w. normal
model SBO w. normal secur. secur.
_:106 Swi. seq. #:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
Switching authority
_:151 Swi. seq. #:Swi.dev. 0 false
related sw.auth. 1
_:152 Swi. seq. #:Specific sw. 0 true
authorities 1
_:115 Swi. seq. #:Specific station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for station/remote
remote
_:153 Swi. seq. #:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:154 Swi. seq. #:Multiple 0 false
specific sw.auth. 1

(Type)
Swi. seq. #
_:501 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start SPS I
_:502 Swi. seq. #:>Enable start (fixed) SPS I
_:503 Swi. seq. #:>Start SPS I
_:504 Swi. seq. #:>Cancel SPS I
_:505 Swi. seq. #:>Successful SPS I
_:506 Swi. seq. #:>Failed SPS I
_:53 Swi. seq. #:Health ENS O
_:302 Swi. seq. #:Execution ENS O
_:304 Swi. seq. #:Start SPC C
_:305 Swi. seq. #:Cancel SPC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.4 Control Functionality
7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking Protection
Before switching commands can be issued by the SIPROTEC 5 device, several steps are used to check the
command:
Switching mode (interlocked/non-interlocked)
Switching authority (local/DIGSI/substation/remote)
Switching direction (Set=Actual)
Bay interlocking and substation interlocking
1-out-of-n check (double-activation blocking)
Blocking by protection function
Confirmation IDs
SIPROTEC 5 devices offer the ability to safeguard various operations with confirmation IDs. The following
confirmation IDs from the Safety menu apply to the control functions:
[scconfir-291110-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-33 Confirmation IDs in DIGSI 5: Settings Menu
The following table identifies the meanings of the confirmation IDs:
Table 7-16 Relevant Confirmation IDs for Controls
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Set/operate Changing setting The confirmation ID is requested before device
parameters can be changed.
Control (process) General release for control The confirmation ID is usually not needed for bay
of switching devices controllers. In the case of protection devices, this
confirmation ID can be used to safeguard control
of switching devices.
Control (non-interlocked) Switching non-interlocked Switching mode:
Release for switching without querying the inter-
locking conditions (S1 mode). The fixed inter-
locking conditions (for example, >Enable
opening (fixed) and >Enable closing
(fixed)) are still queried if this is programmed.
The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Confirmation ID Meaning Description

Switching Authority Release for switching The confirmation ID is queried only for devices
authority Local without a key switch; otherwise it is replaced with
the key switch position.
The confirmation IDs are preset with the following values:

Set/operate 222222
Control (process, interlocked) 333333
Control (not-interlocked) 444444
Switching authority local 666666

If you have configured a device with key switches, the confirmation IDs for non-interlocked switching and
switching authority are not displayed or editable in DIGSI; the function is handled by the position of the key
switch.
To increase security, change these IDs with DIGSI.
Switching Mode (Interlocked/Non-Interlocked)

The switching mode determines whether or not the switchgear interlocking that has been configured in the
CFC is checked before the command is issued.
You can change the switching mode with the key switch S1 (interlocking off/normal). For devices without a
key switch, you can change the switching mode with a corresponding menu entry on the display (after
entering a confirmation ID). You can also set the switching mode for switching commands from the sources
DIGSI, substation or remote.
! DANGER
If the switching mode = non-interlocked, the switchgear interlocking protection is shut off
Erroneous switching operations can lead to severe or fatal injuries.
Ensure manually that all checks have been implemented.
In addition, you can set the switching mode directly with a binary input or CFC. Use the General function
block (see next figure).
[scmoscha-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-34 Switching Mode in Function Block General
The following table shows the effects of changing the switching mode to use command checks.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Table 7-17 Relationship Between Switching Mode and Command Checks
Command Check Switching Mode

Interlocked Non-Interlocked
Switching authority Checked Checked
Switching direction (Set=actual) Checked Checked
Fixed interlocking conditions Checked Checked
Interlocking conditions Checked Not checked
1-out-of-n check (double-activation Checked Not checked
blocking)
Blocking by protection function Checked Not checked
Switching Authority
The switching authority determines which command source is allowed. The following command sources are
possible:
Local:
A switching command from the local control (cause-of-error source Location) is possible only if the
switching authority is set to Local and the device is capable of local operation. Setting the switching
authority to Local is typically accomplished with key switch S5 (Local/Remote). In this case, commands
from all other sources are rejected. If the switching authority is set to Local, the setting cannot be
changed remotely.
DIGSI:
A switching command from DIGSI (connected via USB or Ethernet, cause-of-error source Maintenance)
is accepted only if the switching authority in the device is set to Remote. Once DIGSI has signed on the
device for command output, no commands from other command sources or a different DIGSI PC will be
executed.
Substation:
This switching authority level can be activated via a parameter in the General function block. A switching
command from the station level (cause-of-error source Substation or Automatic substation) is accepted if
the switching authority is set to Remote and the controllable Station switching authority is set. This is
accomplished by a command from the substation automation technology. Switching commands from the
device or from outside the substation (cause-of-error source Local, Remote or Automatic remote) are
rejected.
Full support of the this switching authority level is assured only when using the IEC 61850 protocol.
Remote:
This switching authority level stands from remote control directly from the network control center or (if
the switching authority level Substation is not activated) generally for Remote control. The cause-of-error
source is Automatic remote. Commands from this level are accepted if the switching authority is set to
Remote and the controllable Substation switching authority is not set. Switching commands from the
device or from the substation (cause-of-error source Local, Substation or Automatic substation) are
rejected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[schoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-35 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in Information Routing (in Function Block
General)
Sw. authority key/set and Sw.mode key/set indicate the current state of the key switch or parameter for
switching authority or switching mode and provide this information for further processing in the CFC. In the
CFC, for example, it is possible to set up an automatic routine to ensure that the switching authority is auto-
matically set to Local when the key switch is set to not interlocked.
The signals shown in Figure 7-35 in DIGSI 5 information routing have the following relationship:
In terms of switching authority and switching mode, the respective key switch position serves as the
input signal and the input signals in the matrix.
The state of the switching authority and switching mode is indicated by corresponding output signals.
The Switching authority and Switching mode functions link the input signals and in this way establish the
output signals (see Figure 7-36 and Figure 7-37).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwhoheit-260511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-36 Establishing Switching Authority
[dwmodsch-020513-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-37 Establishing Switching Mode
In the case of both functions, the input signals overwrite the state of the key switch. This allows external
inputs to also set the switching authority or switching mode, if desired (for instance, by querying an external
key switch).
The following additional settings are available for the switching authority:
Activation of Switching Authority Station (defined in IEC 61850 Edition 2):
If you would like to use this switching authority, set the check mark General/Control.
Multiple Switching Authority Levels:

This option permits switching commands from several command sources in the device if the switching
authority Remote is selected. Subsequently, a distinction between these command sources can also be
made. You can find more details in the following table. Activate this option by setting the check mark
General/Control.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Specific sw. authorities:

You can enable additional options for the switching authority check. You can find more information about
these options in section Specific Switching Authority, Page 1222. By default, these are not used.
[scakthoh-161014, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-38 How to Activate the Station Switching Authority and to Enable Several Switching-Authority
Levels
Table 7-18 Effect on Switching Authority when Several Switching-Authority Levels Are Enabled with/
without Activation of the Station Switching Authority
Release Several Switching Status of DIGSI Station State of the Resulting

Switching Authority in the in the Device Switching Station Switching
Authority Levels Device Authority Acti- Switching Authority
vated Authority
No Local - - - Local
Remote Signed on - - DIGSI
Not signed on No - Station and
Remote
Yes Set Station
Not set Remote
Yes Local - - - Local
Remote Signed on - - DIGSI
Not signed on No - Local and station
and remote
Yes Set Local and station
Not set Local and station
and remote
The following table shows the result of the switching-authority check, based on the set switching authority and
the cause of the command. This overview represents a simplified normal case (no multiple command sources
when using Station and Remote).
Table 7-19 Result of a Switching-Authority Check
Cause Source Switching Authority

Local DIGSI Station Remote
Local Release Blocked Blocked Blocked
Station Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Cause Source Switching Authority

Local DIGSI Station Remote
Remote Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
Local automatic Release Release Release Release
operation
Station automatic Blocked Blocked Release Blocked
operation
Remote automatic Blocked Blocked Blocked Release
operation
DIGSI Blocked Release Blocked Blocked
Specific Switching Authority

Special switching authorities can be configured as extension of the switching-authority check. This makes it
possible to differentiate the Remote command sources at the bay level. Switching authorities can be routed to
or revoked from different control centers that can, for example, belong to different companies. Thus, precisely
one of these command sources can switch at a certain time. This function is based on extending the
switching-authority check by verifying the identifier of the command source (field Originator/orIdent of
switching command). In order to turn on the function, go to General/Control and set the check mark for the
parameter Specific sw. authorities. More settings for the configuration of the identifiers and the
behavior of the function as well as additional signals appear (see Figure 7-40). In order to permit an additional
command source to switch, you must activate this specific switching authority. In order to do this, set the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[sc_act additional options sw authority, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-39 Activating Additional Options of the Switching Authority
The additional parameters allow you to set the following options:

Specific sw.auth. valid for (for station/remote, only remote or only station):
With this parameter, you determine for which command source the extended switching-authority check is
used.
Table 7-20 Result Derived from the Combination of the Parameter Value Specific sw.auth. valid
for and the Level of the Command Source (Field Originator/orCat of the Switching
Command)
Command Source Specific sw.auth. valid for

station station/remote remote
Local, local automatic No check No check No check
Station, station automatic Check Check No check
Remote, remote auto- No check Check Check
matic
DIGSI No check No check No check
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Num. of specific sw.auth.:

With this parameter, you determine how many specific switching authorities are available. This deter-
mines the number of parameters Identifier switching authority as well as the controllable
Active. Sw. auth..
Identifier switching authority 1 to Identifier switching authority 5:

The number of names that appear corresponds to the number set in the previous parameter. You can
select the names in a free way, 1 to 64 characters are allowed. The command check verifies whether
these titles correspond with those sent by the command source. This applies to the switching commands
as well as to the activation of a specific switching authority. The requirement for this is the system inter-
face IEC 61850. The field Originator/orIdent is used.
Multiple specific sw.auth. ensures the simultaneous validity of the various command sources.
The following table shows how to determine the resulting specific switching authority when activating the
command sources of Remote or Station. If this parameter is activated, all parameterized command
sources get permissible automatically (see last row in the table) and they cannot be deactivated via the
controllable Enable sw. auth. 1 to Enable sw. auth. 5. Otherwise, the enabled command
source with the lowest number has always the highest priority and prevails against the other numbers.
Table 7-21 Determining Switching Authority if Multiple Command Sources Are Available
Multiple Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Enable sw. Resulting
specific auth. 1 auth. 2 auth. 3 auth. 4 auth. 5 Specific
sw.auth. Switching
Authority
No on * * * * Switch. auth.
1
No off on * * * Switch. auth.
2
No off off on * * Switch. auth.
3
No off off off on * Switch. auth.
4
No off off off off on Switch. auth.
5
No off off off off off None
Yes on on on on on All
The * symbol in the previous table refers to a random value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[sc_sw authority and mode in info routing, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-40 Display of Switching Authority and Switching Mode in the Routing Information (in Function
Block General), Example of 2 Activated Remote Switching Authorities
Individual Switching Authority and Switching Mode for the Switching Devices
In a standard case, the functionalities switching authority, switching mode, and specific switching authority as
described in the previous sections, are applicable to the entire bay unit and, therefore, are valid for all
switching devices that are controlled by this bay unit. In addition, you can configure an individual switching
authority and specific switching authority as well as individual switching modes for single switching devices.
Therefore, individual switching devices can accept various switching authorities and switching modes simulta-
neously.
This is offered for the following function groups and function blocks:
Circuit breaker function group
Disconnector function group
Tap changer function group
Switching sequence function block

This allows to select individual settings for each switching device. This is useful if, for example, switching
devices of different utilities are managed within a single bay.
In order to activate this option, go to the function block Control of a switching device and set the parameter
Check switching authority to advanced. An additional table containing initially 2 parameters is
displayed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[sc_add parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-41 Additional Parameters for Switching Authorities in the Parameters of a Switching Device
When activating the parameter Swi.dev. related sw.auth., an individual switching authority as well as
an individual switching mode for this switching device are configured. Additional signals are displayed in the
Control function block of the corresponding switching device.
[sc_extended parameters sw authority sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-42 Expanded Parameters for the Switching Authority in the Switching Device
[sc_switching auth sw mode changeable, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-43 Individually Modifiable Switching Authority and Switching Mode for Switching Devices
The new input signals that are displayed allow you to set the individual switching authority and switching
mode for the switching devices. For this switching device, these inputs overwrite the central switching
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
authority and the switching mode. The outputs Switching authority and Switching mode indicate the
states only for this switching device.
When activating Specific sw. authorities, an individual specific switching authority for this switching
device is configured. Additional parameters are displayed.
[sc_Parameters FB control all additional options, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-44 Parameters of the FB Control with all Additional Options
The functionality of the specific switching authority for the individual switching device and the significance of
the additional parameters is identical to the operating mode of the central specific switching authority. Addi-
tional signals are displayed in the Control function block.
[sc_Specific sw authority changeable per sw device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-45 Specific Switching Authority, Modifiable for each Switching Device
Switching Direction (Set = Actual)

With this check, you avoid switching a switching device into a state that has already been achieved. For
instance, before a trip command is issued to a circuit breaker, its current position is determined. If this circuit
breaker is already in the Off position, no command is issued. This is logged accordingly.
Switchgear Interlocking Protection

Switchgear interlocking protection means avoiding maloperation by checking the bay and substation inter-
locking and thus preventing equipment damage and personal injury. The interlocking conditions are always
system-specific and for this reason are stored as CFC charts in the devices.
SIPROTEC 5 devices recognize 2 different types of interlocking conditions:
Normal interlocking conditions:
These can be revoked by changing the switching mode to non-interlocked.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Non-revocable (fixed) interlocking conditions:

These are still checked even if the switching mode is set to non-interlocked.
Application: Replacing mechanical interlocking, for example, that prevent actuation of a medium-voltage
switch.
Each of the two categories has 2 release signals (for the On and Off switching directions) that represent the
result of the interlocking plan, so that interlocking is in effect during the command check (see the figure
below). The default setting for all release signals is TRUE, so that no switchgear interlocking checks take
place if no CFC charts have been prepared.
[scverrie-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-46 Interlocking Signals in Function Block Interlocking
EXAMPLE
For interlocking
For the making direction of the circuit breaker QA in bay E01 (see the figure below), it is necessary to check
whether the disconnectors QB1, QB2, and QB9 are in the defined position, that is, either On or Off. Opening
the circuit breaker QA should be possible at any time.
The interlocking equations are: QA_On = ((QB1 = On) or (QB1 = Off)) and ((QB2 = On) or (QB2 = Off)) and
((QB9 = On) or (QB9 = Off)). There is no condition for opening.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[ScAbgang-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-47 Feeder Bay for a Double Busbar System
The CFC chart that is required to implement the interlocking equation is shown in the next figure.
[scverpla-270511-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-48 Interlocking Chart for Bay Interlocking
Since the Disconnector function block provides the defined position On or Off, the exclusive OR gate XOR is
not necessary for interlocking. A simple OR suffices.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
As can be seen in the CFC chart, the result of the check is connected to the >Release on signal in the
Interlocking function block in the circuit breaker QA function group (see Figure 7-48).
EXAMPLE
For system interlocking
This example considers the feeder = E01 from the previous example (bay interlocking) and additionally the
coupler bay = E02 (see the figure below).
[ScAnlage-270410-deDE-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-49 System with Feeder and Coupler Bays
The circuit breaker QA in coupler bay = E02 will be considered next. As the multibay interlocking condition,
you must provide the bus coupler command block at the end:
If the two busbars in bay = E01 are connected, that is, if the 2 disconnectors QB1 and QB2 in bay =E01 are
closed, the circuit breaker QA in bay = E02 is not allowed to be switched off. Accordingly, bay = E01 in the
CFC of the device generates the indication Coupling closed from the positions of the switches QB1 and
QB2 and, using IEC 61850-GOOSE, transmits it to bay = E02 in the device. You must then store the following
interlocking condition in bay = E02:
QA_Off = NOT (= E01/Coupling closed)
In the CFC chart for the coupling device = E02, you must create the following CFC chart (see the figure
below).
[scplanve-241013, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-50 Interlocking Chart for Substation Interlocking
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
1-Out-of-n Check (Double-Activation Blocking)

The double-activation blocking prevents 2 commands from being executed in the device simultaneously. You
can set the device-internal check for each switching device as a parameter in the Control function block.
The default setting is Yes, that is, double-activation blocking is active (see the figure below).
[scdoppel-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-51 Activating the Double-Activation Blocking
With SIPROTEC 5, it is also possible to achieve multibay double-activation blocking.

In this case, send the signal not selected to other devices for analysis using IEC 61850-GOOSE. This
signal is available under Position in every Circuit breaker or Disconnector function block in the switching
device function groups (see figure below).
[scnotselected-090315_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-52 Signal Not selected in the Circuit-Breaker Function Block
The signal is then queried in the CFC interlocking conditions for the associated switching devices and is used
to generate the release signal (for example, >Release on).
Blocking by Protection Function
Default setting (_:107) Check blk. by protection = yes

In devices with protection and control functions, Siemens recommends that no switching commands can be
issued while protection functions have picked up.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
This applies to automatic reclosing as well. Switching commands must be prevented as long as automatic
reclosing is active.
The default setting for blocking by the protection function is therefore yes. If necessary, you can disable this
blocking. You can find the settings on the same page as the double-activation blocking (see Figure 7-51).
NOTE
i Remember, for instance, that pickup of the thermal overload protection can create a fault as well and thus
prevent switching commands.
NOTE
i Please note that the command check Blocking by protection function is only available for controlling circuit
breakers, because in this case a unique relationship with protection functions and automatic reclosing has
been configured. In disconnectors, this relationship is not always unique, precisely with regard to the 1 1/2
circuit-breaker layout, and it must be mapped for each system using CFC charts.
To carry out the command check Blocking by protection function for disconnectors, use the following indi-
cations (if present) in your interlocking conditions:
Group indication: Pickup (Function group Line)
Circuit-breaker failure protection: Pickup (Circuit-breaker failure protection)
General: In progress (Automatic reclosing function)
7.4.2 Command Logging
All commands in the sequence are logged. The command log contains:
Date and time
Name of the switching device (or function group)
Reason for the transmission (SEL = Selected, OPR = Operate, CMT = Command execution end, SPN =
Spontaneous)
Status or switching direction
EXAMPLE
The following example illustrates control of a disconnector QB1 for various cases.
Successful command output
Interrupted command
Command interrupted by switchgear interlocking
Command ended due to missing feedback
Spontaneous change of switch position without command output

Figure 7-53 to Figure 7-59 indicates command logging for various scenarios of the standard control model
SBO with feedback monitoring.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scposcas-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-53 Positive Case (Display 1)
[scposca2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-54 Positive Case (Display 2)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scposcan-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-55 Positive Case with Command Cancellation
[scnegint-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-56 Negative Case (Blocked by Switchgear Interlocking)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scnegtim-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-57 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 1)
[scnegti2-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-58 Negative Case (Expiration of Feedback Supervision Time) (Display 2)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scsponta-070411-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-59 Spontaneous Status Change
Depending on the transmission reason, the desired control value or the actual state value of the controllable
and the switching device can be contained in the log.
The following table shows the relationship.
Table 7-22 Relationship between the Reason for Transmission and the Value Logged
Reason for Transmission Value

Selected (SEL) Desired value
Operate (OPR) Desired value
Command cancellation (CNC) Desired value
Command execution and termination (CMT) Actual value
Spontaneous change (SPN) Actual value
7.4.3 Settings

Control
_:101 Control:Control model status only SBO w. enh.
_:102 Control:SBO time-out 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
_:103 Control:Feedback moni- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 1.00 s
toring time
_:104 Control:Check switching no yes
authority yes
_:105 Control:Check if pos. is no yes
reached yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:106 Control:Check double no yes
activat. blk. yes
_:107 Control:Check blk. by no yes
protection yes

(Type)
Control
_:53 Control:Health ENS O
_:58 Control:Cmd. with feedback DPC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5 Synchronization Function
The Synchronization function (ANSI 25) checks whether the activation is permissible without a risk to the
stability of the system when interconnecting 2 parts of an electrical power system. Typical applications are the
synchronization of a line and a busbar or the synchronization of 2 busbars via a cross-coupling. A power
transformer between the 2 measuring points can also be taken into consideration.
The following operating modes are covered:
Synchrocheck
Switching synchronous power systems
Switching asynchronous power systems
Switching to dead line line/busbar
The Synchronization function is used in the Circuit-breaker function group.

2 different types of stage can be used within the function:
Synchrocheck stage
Synchronous/asynchronous stage
Each of the stage types is preconfigured at the factory. You can operate maximum 2 stages of the synchro-
check stage type and maximum 6 stages of the synchronous/asynchronous type in parallel. In addition, the
Expanded delta-f options stage type is available in the function library. It is not preconfigured.
As soon as the device is functional, the function measuring points are calculated and displayed.
[dwsynfn1-270213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
7.5.3 Connection and Definition
Connection
You can find examples for the synchronization of line and busbar in the following 2 figures. Figure 7-63 shows
an example for the synchronization of 2 busbars via bus coupler.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The synchronization function uses 2 voltages to check the connecting conditions: a voltage of the reference
side 1 (V1) as well as a voltage to be used as a reference on side 2 (V2). The reference voltage of side 1 is
designated in the synchronization function as V125. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is
connected to the Sync. voltage 1 interface of the circuit-breaker function group. The voltage to be set as
reference is designated with V21. This is always the voltage of the measuring point that is connected to the
Sync. voltage 2 interface of the circuit-breaker function group. The assignment of the measuring points to the
interfaces of the circuit-breaker function group can be configured, see chapter 2.1 Function Embedding in the
Device .
The selection of the voltages used for the synchronization depends on the device connection to the primary
system:
Connection of the primary system via 4 voltage inputs and hence use of a 1-phase and a 3-phase meas-
uring point (Figure 7-63 and Figure 7-61):
The voltage connected to the 1-phase measuring point is definitive here. If. for example, this is the
phase-to-ground voltage VA, the voltage VA is also used by the other side of the 3-phase measuring
point.
Connection of the primary system via 6 voltage inputs and hence use of two 3-phase measuring points
(Figure 7-62):
The phase-to-phase voltage VAB of both sides is always used for the test.
You can connect both the phase-to-ground voltages and the phase-to-phase voltages to the device. The
possible interface connections are listed in the Appendix.
[dwsyns01-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-61 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
25 Do not confuse the designations V1 and V2 with the numbering of the voltage inputs V1 to V4 (Figure 7-61) and V1 to V8
(Figure 7-62)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwsyns02-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-62 Synchronization of Line and Busbar, Connection via 6 Voltage Inputs
[dwsyns03-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-63 Synchronization of 2 Busbars via Cross-Coupling, Connection via 4 Voltage Inputs
Definition of the Variables

The definition of the variables is important for understanding the following implementation. The reference side
1 indicates the function with 1. This yields the reference values voltage V1, frequency f1, and phase angle 1.
The side to be synchronized indicates the function with 2. The electrical variables of side 2 are then the
voltage V2, frequency f2, and phase angle 2.
When forming the differential variables, the function is oriented to the definition of the absolute measuring
error ( x = measured value real value). The reference value and hence the real value is side 1. This results
in the following calculation specifications:
Differential voltage dV = V2 V1
A positive sign means that the voltage V2 is greater than the voltage V1. In other cases, the sign is negative.
Differential frequency df = f2 f1
A positive result means that according to the example from Figure 7-61 the busbar frequency is greater than
the line frequency.
Phase-angle difference d = 2 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The representation is limited to 180o. A positive result means that 2 has a maximum of 180o lead. In the
case of a negative value, 2 lags by maximum 180o behind. Figure 7-64 shows the circumstances. The
phase angle 1 was added to the zero axis as a reference system.
If asynchronous systems are present and the frequency f2 is greater than f1, the angle d then changes from
the negative value to 0 and then to the positive value. As shown in Figure 7-64, the direction of rotation is
counterclockwise (mathematically positive). At f2 < f1 the direction of rotation is clockwise.
[dwsynp04-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-64 Phase-Angle Difference Representation d
Only positive values are permissible for the setting parameters. Inequalities are used to characterize the
setting parameters uniquely. The representation is explained with the example of differential voltage. 2 setting
values are necessary to allow unbalanced settings.
The inequality V2 > V1 yields a positive value for dV. The associated parameter is Max. voltage diff.
V2>V1. For the 2nd setting parameter Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 the inequality V2 < V1 applies. It
corresponds to a negative dV.
The procedure is the same for the differential frequency and differential phase angle.
Overview of a Synchronization Stage (Sync Stage)

A synchronization stage can be integrated in the following blocks (see Figure 7-65):
Stage control with mode, state control, standby and blocking (description in this chapter)
Supervision (description in this chapter)
Functional sequence for issuing the closing release (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[losyn001-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-65 Overview of the Stage Logic
Stage Control
The normal stage control is used for a synchronization stage (see Figure 7-65).
Note the following special features:
As soon as there is a synchronization function available in the device, the measured values are calcu-
lated and displayed. One stage must be activated for calculating all Delta settings. It is not necessary to
start the stage for this purpose.
If all synchronization stages are deactivated within the function, closure via the control will no longer be
possible, as none of the stages can generate an closing release. If the synchronization function is
deleted, the circuit breaker is no longer regarded as subject to compulsory synchronization. In this case,
it is possible to activate via the control without synchronization.
If more than one synchronization stage is switched on, then the >Selection signal must be active for
exactly one stage, so that it can be activated via the controls.
You can block the entire synchronization stage via the binary signal >Block stage. A started process is
completed and the entire stage reset after blocking. The stage must be restarted to initiate a new switching
procedure. The blocking only affects the test process for the closing conditions. The measured values are still
calculated and displayed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Operating Range
[losyn002-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-66 Logic of the Operating Ranges
The operating range of the synchronization function is defined by the configurable voltage limitsMin. oper-
ating limit Vmin and Max. operat. limit Vmax as well as by the specified frequency band frated
4 Hz.
If one or both voltages are outside the permitted operating range when the measurement is started or a
voltage leaves the range, this is displayed via corresponding indications Frequency f1 > fmax,
Frequency f1 < fmin, Voltage V1 > Vmax, Voltage V1 < Vmin etc. The closing conditions are
then not checked.
Supervision
The supervisions listed below are executed in a function-specific manner. If one of the monitors picks up, the
Health goes to alarm. The stage is indicated as Inactive. A closing release or direct close command is not
possible in this case.
For consistency of settings of specific parameters
Definite threshold-value settings are checked after a parameter change. If there is an inconsistency, the
error message Setting error is set.
For multiple selection of the stage at the start time of the synchronization
If there is a simultaneous selection of multiple closed synchronization stages at the start time, the error
message Multiple selection is set.
Measuring-Voltage Failure
If a voltage-transformer fault (measuring-voltage failure) is recorded via the binary input signal >Open of one
of the voltage-measuring points, then the closing commands of the synchronization stage are no longer
tested. In other words, a release of the closure based on the measurement is no longer possible. The readi-
ness of the stage turns to warning. Direct close command is still possible.
The device-internal supervision function measuring-voltage failure detection (Fuse Failure Monitor) does not
have any effect on the synchronization stage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Function Measured Values

The function measured values for the Synchronization function are displayed in their own primary, secondary
and percentage measured-value windows. Voltage measurements are always displayed as ph-ph voltages,
even if the associated measuring point records phase-to-ground voltages. The function measured values are
determined and displayed as soon as the device is functional. The difference values are calculated as soon
as the stage is activated.
Table 7-23 Protection-Specific Values of the Synchronization
Values Primary Secon- % Referenced to

dary
V1 Reference voltage V1 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
V2 Voltage to be synchronized V2 kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary values
f1 Frequency of the voltage V1 Hz Hz Rated frequency
f2 Frequency of the voltage V2 Hz Hz Rated frequency
dV Voltage difference V2-V1 kV V
df Frequency difference f2-f1 Hz Hz
d Angle difference 2-1 o
Multiple Synchronization Points

The synchronization function can only be used within a Circuit-breaker function group. It always operates on
the circuit breaker that is linked to the Circuit-breaker function group. The reference to the circuit breaker is
therefore unique. If you wish to switch several circuit breakers (synchronization points) with the device, you
must create several Circuit-breaker function groups.
Different Synchronization Conditions per Synchronization Point

Within the synchronization function, you can operate maximum 2 stages of the stage type Synchrocheck and
maximum 6 stages of the type Synchronous/asynchronous in parallel. All setting parameters for a synchroni-
zation point are included in each synchronization stage.
If you have to synchronize with different synchronization conditions (parameter settings), several synchroni-
zation stages are used for a synchronization point/circuit breaker. In this case, you must define which of the
synchronization stages is currently active via the binary signal >Selection (synchronization stage x). The
closing conditions are checked if the respective stage is activated via the >Selection binary signal and the
stage is activated.
The fault indication Multiple selection is issued upon simultaneous selection of different synchroniza-
tion stages. If several synchronization stages are activated and the input signal >Selection (synchroniza-
tion stage x) is missing at the starting time, a valid selection is awaited during the supervision time
Max.durat. sync.process. If this does not come, the process is terminated.
Different Voltage-Transformer Ratios of Both Parts of the Electrical Power System

The settings of the rated parameters of the transformer for the measuring points automatically takes the
different voltage-transformer transformation ratios of both parts of the electrical power system into account.
The Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed for this purpose.
Synchronization via a Transformer

There are systems in which a power transformer is located between the voltage measuring points of the
circuit breaker to be synchronized. The device automatically considers the different voltage stages by setting
the transformer ratios (within the measuring points).
A phase displacement must be taken into account based on the transformer vector group, via the Angle
adjust. (transform.) parameter.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The parameter is defined as - = (2 1).

To calculate the Delta parameters, the voltage of side 2 is converted to the voltage of side 1 using to the
settings of both parameters.
In the Application and Setting Notes, several examples are provided for using both parameters.
Different Connection Types on Both Sides

If both of the measuring points used by the synchronization functions record different voltages of the 3-phase
system, the calculation of the phase displacement angle is automatically taken into consideration.
EXAMPLE:
The 1-phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 1 records the phase-to-phase voltage VAB. The 1-
phase measuring point connected with Sync-voltage 2 records VA. In this case the phase angle between VAB
and VA takes into consideration the delta variable during calculation..
This automation guarantees that several voltage sources can be switched between during running operation,
each of which records different voltages.
7.5.5 Dynamic Measuring-Point Switching
Dynamic measuring-point switching provides the capability to connect the voltages used in the Synchrocheck
function to various measuring points. In this way, for example, it is possible to use the correct voltage on the
basis of the switch position on the switching devices. If more than 1 measuring point is connected to V
sync1 or V sync2 , you must create the V sync select. function block in the Circuit breakers function
group.
Selection of the desired voltage measuring points ( V sync1 and V sync2 ) for the Circuit breakers func-
tion group is controlled via Continuous Function Chart.
Example
Figure 7-67 shows an example of a Synchrocheck in a breaker-and-a-half arrangement. If circuit breaker QA2
is to be closed, the reference voltages must be selected from several possible measuring points. This selec-
tion of measuring points is dependent on the switch positions of all circuit breakers and disconnectors.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwdynmsu-140212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-67 Synchronization in a Breaker-and-a-Half Arrangement
Each synchronization function requires 2 comparison voltages. For the circuit breaker QA2 located in the
middle, there are 2 options for each side (Vsync1 and Vsync2). The selection of synchronization voltages for
each side depends on the position of the circuit breaker and the disconnectors.
For circuit breakers QA1 and QA3, the busbar voltage (Vsync1) is available for one side, and 3 voltages (Vsync2)
are available for the other side.
Connecting Measuring Points to Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The following figure shows the connection of the Circuit-breaker function group with several measuring points
in DIGSI. The ID of each measuring point appears in parentheses after the name.
[scdynms2-211212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-68 Connecting the Measuring Points with the Circuit-Breaker Function Group
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
There are consistency checks that validate the connections of voltage measuring points to the function group:
The connection type must be identical for all measuring points connected to the same interface.
It is not permitted to route a measuring point to the function group using the option VN.
The rated voltage (primary and secondary) must be identical for all measuring points connected to the
same interface.
If more than 1 measuring point is connected to 1 voltage interface, a function block must be expanded to
enable selection of the synchronization voltage.
CFC Control
The voltages are selected by CFC logic on the basis of the measuring point IDs. If more than one measuring
point is connected to interfaces Vsync1 or Vsync2 of the Circuit-breaker function group, the V sync select.
function block has to be removed from the library in the Circuit-breaker function group. A CFC logic (see
following example) has to define IDs for the V sync1 or V sync2 inputs of this function block in order to
ensure the correct measuring point connection for the Synchrocheck function.
[scdynmsx-160212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-69 CFC Logic: Voltage Selection Using Measuring Point ID
If no measuring point can be selected because of the switch or disconnector positions, the ID0 is used. If ID0
is selected, the indication (_:2311:304) Blocked no V selected is set. The synchrocheck is
blocked. If you have activated the parameter (_:5071:108) Direct close command , unsynchronized
switching is still possible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5.6 Sequence of Functions
[losynf01-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-70 Sequence of Functions
Start
The synchronization stage must be started to check the closing conditions. The synchronization stage can be
started device-internally by the controller and the reclosing, or externally, via binary input signals, for example
by an external automatic reclosing (AREC), (see section 7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing
(AREC), and External Triggering ).
At the start, the system checks whether there is a multiple selection by the synchronization stage (see section
Monitoring in chapter 7.5.4 General Functionality). If this is the case, the process is terminated. After a
successful start, the indication In progress is cleared and the supervision time for the maximum duration
of the synchronization process (parameter Max.durat. sync.process is started. The system also checks
whether the voltages and frequencies are in the operating range (see section 7.5.4 General Functionality). If
this is not the case, the closing conditions are not checked.
Checking the Closing Conditions, Closure

After starting, the parameterized closing conditions are checked depending on the operating mode selected
(see Chapter 7.5.8 Closing Conditions for the Synchronous/Asynchronous Stage Type to 7.5.11 Direct Close
Command ). Every condition fulfilled is explicitly indicated here. Conditions not fulfilled are also indicated. If all
conditions are fulfilled, the synchronization stage sets the indication All sync. conditio. OK. The indi-
cation is active until all conditions are fulfilled. The further behavior for issuing the release for closing depends
on the type of the stage (see Chapters 7.5.7 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Stage Type and
7.5.8 Closing Conditions for the Synchronous/Asynchronous Stage Type). The release is signaled via the
Release close cmd. indication. This indication is active for 100 ms. With an internal start, the controller or
the AREC executes the actual closure, depending on the starting source.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Switching to Dead Line/Busbar

If operating modes for switching to dead parts of an electrical power system are configured, the associated
conditions are also checked after the start (see chapter 7.5.10 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar). The
fulfilled conditions are signaled. An adjustable supervision time is started after the closure conditions are
fulfilled (parameter CB make time). If the conditions remain valid until expiry of the time, the function gives
the release for closure after expiry of the time.
Direct Closing Command

If the Direct close command operation is active, the function instantaneously initiates the release for closure
after the successful start (see chapter 7.5.11 Direct Close Command ). A combination of direct close
command with other release conditions is not advisable, as these conditions are bypassed by the direct close
command.
End of the Process

If the function is started via the device-internal controller or AREC, these functions also terminate the
synchronization process upon closure. The process is terminated via the corresponding binary signals in case
of external starting.
If the supervision time (Max.durat. sync.process parameter) has expired, the process is also completed
and the indication Max. time exceeded is issued. A renewed synchronization is only possible if the stage
is restarted.
Blocking Closure
You can use the input signal >Block close command to block the release signal for the closure (signal
Release close cmd.) as well as the closure itself. The measurement continues to operate during the
blocking. If the blocking is revoked and the release conditions are still fulfilled, the release is given for closure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5.7 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Stage Type
Checking Closing Conditions
[losynche-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-71 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Function
With this operating mode, the values V, f, and are checked before connecting the 2 parts of the elec-
trical power system. The indication All sync. conditio. OK signals that the setting values (conditions)
have been reached and that the release for closure has been given (see Checking the Closing Conditions,
Closure in section 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions).
Every fulfilled condition is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK, Frequency
diff. OK, and Angle difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indications.
If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too large(V2<V1)
is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be increased for a
successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt
for sync. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt syn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) d fdiff/dt too large is issued.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5.8 Closing Conditions for the Synchronous/Asynchronous Stage Type
A distinction according to synchronous and asynchronous systems can be made with this type of stage.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous systems are present. A typical charac-
teristic for synchronous systems is equality of frequency (f 0). If the frequency difference falls below the
setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, synchronous systems are to be assumed. If the
frequency difference exceeds the setting value of the f-threshold ASYN<->SYN parameter, asynchronous
systems are to be assumed. This status occurs in galvanically isolated systems, for example.
Both states have their own operating mode with its own closing conditions. Both operating modes can be
switched on and off separately (parameter Sync. operating mode and Async. operating mode). The
following combinations result from this:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating Functionality
mode
on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold
value set f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the oper-
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the operating mode asynchronous is active.
off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
operating mode is exclusively active asynchro-
nously.
on off If the frequency difference is below the threshold
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases,
the stage is inactive, i.e. a switching release
cannot be issued.
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No activa-
tion release can be be given via these operating
modes either.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Checking the Closing Conditions in Synchronous Systems
[losynsyn-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-72 Closing Conditions when Switching Synchronous Systems
The frequency difference is very low in the synchronous systems operating mode. It is below the threshold
value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN. The status is signaled via the State f-synchronous indication.
The parameters V and are checked for issuing an activation release (see Figure 7-73). The indication
All sync. conditio. OK signals that both setting values (conditions) are reached. If the conditions
remain fulfilled over the set time delay (parameter Delay close command), the release for closing is given
(see also chapter 7.5.7 Closing Conditions for the Synchrocheck Stage Type ).
Every condition fulfilled is signaled individually via the indications Voltage difference OK and Angle
difference OK.
If a condition is not fulfilled, detailed information on why the condition is not fulfilled is provided via indications.
If the differential voltage is outside the setting limits, for example, the indication V dif.too large(V2<V1)
is issued. The indication indirectly contains information that the voltage V2 has to be increased for a
successful synchronization.
With the Expanded delta-f options stage type configured and an activated (_:142) Limit dfdiff/dt
for asyn. op parameter, the frequency difference rate of change is also checked. If the permissible
frequency change rate (parameter (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) is exceeded, the indication
(_:329) d fdiff/dt too large is generated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[losynzus-110211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-73 Connecting Under Synchronous System Conditions
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Checking Closing Conditions in Asynchronous Systems
[losynasy-210912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-74 Closing Conditions when Switching Asynchronous Systems
In this operating mode, compliance with the voltage difference V and frequency difference f conditions is
checked. The function calculates the time point of the close command taking into account the angular differ-
ence and the closing time of the circuit breaker. This is calculated so that the voltage phasors are equal at
the moment of pole contact by the circuit breaker (V 0, 0).
Ranges in the Voltage-Frequency Diagram (V-f Diagram)

Figure 7-75 shows the setting parameters for synchronous and asynchronous conditions in the V-f diagram.
The frequency range is very narrow owing to the functional principle in the case of synchronous systems.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[losynarb-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-75 Operating Range Under Synchronous and Asynchronous Conditions for Voltage (V) and
Frequency (f)
7.5.9 Expanded Checks (df/dt and Smoothing of Oscillations)
When configuring the Expanded delta-f options function block, you can expand the synchronization checks to
include the following aspects:
Limitation of the frequency change rate
With this option, you can define additional upper limits for the rate of permissible requency difference
change. The release checks for both stage types take these additional upper limits into consideration.
Both activation (parameters (_:140) Limit dfdiff/dt for sync. op and (_:142) Limit
dfdiff/dt for asyn. op) and the upper limits (parameters (_:141) Max. value dfdiff/dt
syn and (_:143) Max. value dfdiff/dt asyn) for the frequency change rate are adjustable
selectively for synchronous and asynchronous conditions. Both stage types consider the frequency
change rate when issuing the release for switching and indicate when the rate is exceeded.
If you also activate the option to compensate for low-frequency oscillations (parameter (_:150)
Suppr. frequ. oscillations), the frequency change rate is stabilized in the presence of such
oscillations. Stabilization is in effect for asynchronous as well as synchronous operating modes.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Compensation for low-frequency oscillations

If you activate this option (parameter (_:150) Suppr. frequ. oscillations), low-frequency
oscillations, for example, as a consequence of power swings in the range of 0.8 Hz to 1.6 Hz are
detected and smoothed. This stabilizes the release checks in the presence of frequently changing viola-
tions of upper and lower limits for the specified frequency threshold values. The option affects the
frequency check of the Synchrocheck stage types and the synchronous operating mode of the Synchro-
nous/Asynchronous stage type. It does not affect the asynchronous operating mode.
In the example of the following figure, the synchrocheck function would initiate energization, if the
allowed frequency difference was set to 10 mHz without the parameter Suppr. frequ. oscilla-
tions as soon as the frequency f2 enters the 10-mHz band. If the parameter Suppr. frequ.
oscillations is activated, energization is not initiated, since the average value of f2 is outside the
band.
[dwsynfre-101013-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-76 Example: Frequency Difference between the Constant Frequency f1 and the Sinusoidal
Oscillating Frequency f2
With this option active, the range of function measured values is expanded by the smoothed frequency.
Release of switching in synchronous networks occurs after one second at the earliest. This time is
needed to smooth the frequency measured values.
The actual frequency can be larger or smaller than the smoothed value at any instant. The Max. diff.
"f threshold" parameter makes it possible to limit the increase in instantaneous frequency value in
relation to the respective frequency threshold value.
7.5.10 Closing at De-Energized Line/Busbar
If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power
system can be connected together via the following operating modes.
If the measured voltage is less than the threshold V1, V2 without voltage, the zero potential of the part
of the electrical power system is detected. In this case, all phases are compared to the parameter V1, V2
without voltage. The energized side must be in the defined operating range with respect to voltage and
frequency (see chapter 7.5.4 General Functionality) and all phases must exceed the threshold V1, V2 with
voltage.
The following additional closing conditions can be selected, which are then applied next to the closing condi-
tions for the synchronism:
Settings Description
Close cmd. at V1> & V2< Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is energized and the part of the electrical power system
U2 is de-energized.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Close cmd. at V1< & V2> Closing release under the condition that the part V1 of the power
system is de-energized and the part of the electrical power
system U2 is energized.
Close cmd. at V1< & V2< Closing release provided mains adapters V 1 and V2 are de-
energized.
Each of these conditions can be made effective individually via parameters or binary input. You can also set
parameters for combinations, for example a release for closure, if Close cmd. at V1> & V2< or Close
cmd. at V1< & V2> has been fulfilled.
[losyn003-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-77 Release Conditions for Switching to De-Energized Line/Busbar
The indications Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled, Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled and Cond. V1<V2<
fulfilled indicate that the relevant conditions are fulfilled.
You can use the Supervision time parameter to set a supervision time for which the closing conditions
must at least be fulfilled with de-energized connection, before closing is allowed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5.11 Direct Close Command
You can activate the operating mode direct close command statically via the Direct close command
parameter or dynamically with the binary input signal >Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see Figure 7-78).
[losyndir-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-78 Activation of the Operating Mode Direct Close Command
The operating mode Direct close command function initiates a closure release without any testing upon start
of the synchronization stage. The closure occurs immediately.
The combination Direct close command with other operating modes is not recommended, as the other oper-
ating data is bypassed.
If the synchronization function is defective (standby of the sync stage = alarm or warning), a direct close
command is executed or not executed, depending on the type of fault (see also supervisions in chapter
7.5.4 General Functionality).
7.5.12 Interaction with Control, Automatic Reclosing (AREC), and External Triggering
With Control
The control and synchronization function are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. The control
and also the synchronization function always operate with the circuit breaker, which is linked to the function
group Circuit breaker.
As soon as the synchronization function is in the function group Circuit breaker, the circuit breaker is subject
to compulsory synchronization. If all synchronization stages are deactivated, the circuit breaker cannot be
activated via the control, as no release can be generated for the closure. The circuit breaker is no longer
subject to compulsory synchronization after deletion of the synchronization function. Closure without synchro-
nization is then possible via the control.
If closure is to be synchronized via the control, the control automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the control, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.
[losynaw1-310111-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-79 Interaction of the Control with the Synchronization Function
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
With Automatic Reclosing

The automatic reclosing mechanism (AREC) can also work with the synchronization function. Both functions
are always located in a function group Circuit breaker. Consequently the AREC and synchronization function
always work with the circuit.breaker that is linked to the function group Circuit breaker.
You must select a synchronization stage via settings within the AREC so that closure is synchronized by the
AREC. The tests for the synchronization stage are used for the closure by the AREC. If no synchronization
stage is selected, the AREC then activates without synchronization.
If closure is to be synchronized via the AREC, the AREC automatically generates an internal signal which
starts the synchronization function. The functional sequence is described in chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Func-
tions. After fulfilling all closing conditions, the synchronization sends a release signal to the AREC, which
closes the circuit breaker and then stops and synchronization function.
Figure 7-80 Connection of the AREC to the Synchronization Function
With External Control

You have the option of controlling the synchronization function externally via binary input signals. This can be
done as follows:
Edge-controlled
Via the signals >Start syn. process and >Stop syn. process
State-controlled, via the signal >Start / stop syn.proc. (see also chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of
Functions).
The start is followed by the functional sequence (see chapter 7.5.6 Sequence of Functions). If the conditions
are fulfilled, the output signal Release close cmd. is issued. The switched object QAx of the function
group Circuit breaker is not closed. The output signal Release close cmd. must be explicitly assigned to
the binary output in order to close the circuit breaker.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Figure 7-81 Interaction of the Synchronization Function with External Control
7.5.13 Application and Setting Notes (General)
The following 2 types of stage are available:
Stage Type Application
Synchrocheck stage Select this type of stage to issue, for example, an additional release
during an automatic reclosing or a manual reclosing for safety reasons.
With this type, the variables V, f and are checked before
connecting the 2 parts of the power system.
Synchronous/asynchronous stage Select this type of stage if it is necessary to differentiate between
synchronous and asynchronous systems, depending on the switch
position.
If galvanically coupled systems are switched in parallel, synchronous
systems are present. A typical characteristic for synchronous systems
is equality of frequency (f 0). In this state, the conditions and V
are checked.
If the systems are galvanically isolated, asynchronous systems can be
present. At the same time, compliance with the voltage difference V
and frequency difference f conditions is checked. The time of the
direct close command is calculated taking into account the angle differ-
ence and the closing time of the circuit breaker. The time of the
direct close command is calculated so that the voltages are equal at the
moment of pole contact of the circuit breaker (V 0, 0).
Configuration of the Voltages V1 (Reference Side) and V2

The voltages V1 and V2 are established via the connection of the measuring points to the interface of the
function groups (refer to chapter 7.5.3 Connection and Definition ). The measuring point connected to the
interface Voltage is the reference side 1 with the reference voltage V1. The measuring point connected to the
interface Sync. voltage is the side 2 with V2. The definition of the Delta parameters that can be derived from
this is also described in chapter 7.5.3 Connection and Definition .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: Min. operating limit Vmin , Max. operat. limit Vmax
Recommended setting value (_:5071:101) Min. operating limit Vmin = 90 V
Recommended setting value (_:5071:102) Max. operat. limit Vmax = 110 V

The values define the voltage operating range of the synchronization stage. A normal setting is
approx. 10 % of the rated voltage.
NOTE
i All voltages connected according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to
the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test. Therefore, connected phase-to-ground voltages are multiplied by 3 as
the threshold values with reference to the rated voltage (phase-to-phase voltage) must be set.
[lohyster-010415-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
If the Synchronization function is started within the hysteresis, no switching is performed as a result of the
minimum and maximum operating limit (parameters Min. operating limit Vmin and Max. operat.
limit Vmax ). If the Synchronization function is started within the voltage operating range and the voltage
exceeds the minimum or maximum operating limit during the synchronization process, selecting can occur in
the area of the hysteresis.
Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process
Default setting (_:5071:110) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s

The parameterized conditions must be fulfilled within this time. If the conditions are not fulfilled, no further
closing release takes place and the synchronization stage is stopped. If this time is set to , the conditions
are checked until they are fulfilled. This is also the default setting. Observe the operating conditions when
defining the time limitation. This must be defined specifically for each system. If 0 or 0.01 s is set, then all
conditions are checked once at the starting time point. Thereafter the process is stopped immediately.
Parameter: Voltage adjustment
Default setting (_:5071:126) Voltage adjustment = 1.00

The parameter can be used for correction of amplitude errors, for example, due to indirect measurement (for
example, tap changer).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
To apply a transformer between measuring points, the Voltage adjustment parameter is not needed.
The transformer ratios are set for the measuring points and the function will take them into account automati-
cally.
Parameter: Angle adjust. (transform.)
Default setting (_:2311:127) Angle adjust. (transform.) = 0 o

The parameter can be applied under the following conditions:
1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points
2. Correction of phase-angle errors
1. Phase-angle rotation by power transformer between the measuring points:
[losynae1-160311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-82 Transformer Between the Measuring Points
If there is a power transformer between the voltage transformers of the circuit breaker to be synchronized,
you then have to correct the phase-angle rotation for a vector group deviating from 0. Figure 7-82 shows such
an application. The Angle adjust. (transform.) parameter is used to save the phase-angle rotation.
The vector group of the transformer is defined by the upper voltage side to the lower voltage side. If the refer-
ence voltage transformer V1 is connected on the upper voltage side of the transformer (as in Figure 7-82 ),
enter the phase-angle rotation directly according to the vector group. A vector-group figure of 5, for example,
means an angular rotation of 5 30o = 150o. Set this value for the Angle adjust. (transform.)
parameter.
If the voltage connection V1 is on the lower voltage side due to the system, you then have to apply the exten-
sion angle with 360o. A transformer with vector group 5 yields an angular adjustment of 360o
(5 30o) = 210o
2. Correction of phase-angle errors: You can correct a phase-angle error between the voltage transformers in
increments. Ascertain a possible correction value during commissioning.
Parameter: CB make time
Default setting (_:5041:113) CB make time = 0.06 s

If you are to interconnect under asynchronous system conditions with the device as well, the closing time of
the circuit breaker must be taken into account. The device uses this to calculate the time of the direct close
command, so that the voltages are in phase at the moment of closure of the switch poles. Note that apart
from the operating time of the switch, this also includes the pickup time of an auxiliary relay that may be
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
upstream. You can determine the closing time using the protection device (see commissioning notes in
chapter 10.14 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function ).
This parameter only occurs for the stage type Synchronous/asynchronous.
7.5.14 Application and Setting Notes (Synchrocheck)
Parameter: Maximum Differential Values of Voltage, Frequency and Angle
Default setting (_:5071:122) Max. voltage diff. V2>V1 = 5.0 V
Default setting (_:5071:123) Max. voltage diff. V2<V1 = 5.0 V
Default setting (_:5071:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
Default setting (_:5071:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz
Default setting (_:5071:124) Max. angle diff. 2>1= 10o
Default setting (_:5071:125) Max. angle diff. 2<1= 10o

2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing
ranges can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts of
the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.
7.5.15 Application and Setting Notes (Synchronous/Asynchronous Closure)
Parameter: Synchronous operating mode, Asynchronous operating mode
Default setting (_:5041:119) Sync. operating mode = off
Default setting (_:5041:114) Async. operating mode = off

The operating modes of the stages can be activated or deactivated via the parameters. The operating modes
are deactivated in the default setting for safety reasons.
The following combination options are possible:
Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description
on on If the frequency difference is below the threshold
ating mode synchronous is active. In other cases, the
operating mode asynchronous is active.
If you wish to interconnect galvanically isolated
systems, then select this operating mode.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Sync. operating mode Async. operating mode Description

off on Regardless of the frequency difference and the
threshold value f-threshold ASYN<->SYN, the
operating mode active is exclusively asynchronous.
The closing time of the circuit breaker is this always
taken into account for determining the connecting
point.
Select this operating mode if you wish to activate
machines, for example generators or asynchronous
motors.
If the same frequency is present on the sides to be
interconnected, then this operating mode is not
possible. Since, in the case of dependency on the
phase angle position (), release of the closure may
not be issued.
on off Use this operating mode for galvanically connected
systems.
Closure is only possible with synchronous systems
(with low f).
off off Both operating modes are deactivated. No closing
release can be therefore be given via this operating
mode.
This configuration is only advisable for special appli-
cations. Select this operating mode if you only wish to
switch, for example de-energized parts of the power
system.
Parameter for asynchronous operation: Max. voltage diff. of voltage and frequency
Default setting (_:5041:117) Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 = 0.10 Hz
Default setting (_:5041:118) Max. frequency diff. f2<f1 = 0.10 Hz

For information, see Parameter for synchronous operation
Parameter for synchronous operation: Maximum voltage diff. of voltage and angle
Default setting (_:5041:124) Max. angle diff. 2>1= 10o
Default setting (_:5041:125) Max. angle diff. 2<1= 10o

2 parameters are available for the differential values voltage, frequency, and angle. Unbalanced closing
ranges can be set with this, if required.
The permissible differential values must ensure that no protection tripping or damage occurs in the system
owing to compensation processes (circulating current) and power swings after interconnection of the parts of
the power system. The settings must not be configured too closely on the other side so that necessary
closures are not blocked.
Typical differential values are selected in the default setting. Depending on the system, the settings must be
checked and adjusted, if necessary.
Parameter: Switchover between synchronous and asynchronous operation
Recommended setting value (_:5041:120) f-threshold ASYN<->SYN = 0.01 Hz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
This parameter is used to set the frequency difference for switching over between synchronous and asyn-
chronous operation.
Siemens recommends using the default setting of 0.01 Hz.
7.5.16 Application and Setting Notes (De-Energized Switching/Direct Close Command)
If at least one of 2 parts of an electrical power system is de-energized, the parts of the electrical power
system can be connected together via the following operating modes. The above potential release conditions
are independent of one another and can also be combined.
NOTE
i For reasons of safety, the releases have been deactivated in the default setting and are therefore at no.
Even if you wish to apply one of these operating modes, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no
for reasons of safety. Set the operating mode only dynamically via the assigned binary input signal (for
example >Operating mode 'U1>U2<') (see also Figure 7-77). This prevents one of these operating
modes from being incorrectly activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2>
Recommended setting value (_:5071:105) Close cmd. at V1< & V2> = no
no No release for closing is possible via this operating mode.
yes If part V1 of the power system is de-energized and part V2 of the power
system is energized, the release for closure is given upon starting the
synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
The setting depends on the operational requirements. Note the above
information.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1> & V2<
Recommended setting value (_:5071:106) Close cmd. at V1> & V2< = no
yes If part V1 of the power system is energized and part V2 of the power
system is de-energized, the release for closure is given upon starting
the synchronization stage after the supervision time has passed.
information.
Parameter: Close cmd. at V1< & V2<
Recommended setting value (_:5071:107) Close cmd. at V1< & V2< = no
yes If the parts V1 and V2 of the power system are de-energized, the
release for closure is given upon starting the synchronization stage
after the supervision time has passed.
information.
Parameter: V1, V2 with voltage
Recommended setting value (_:5071:104) V1, V2 with voltage = 80 V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The setting value indicates the voltage above which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as activated with certainty.
You must set the value below the minimum expected operational undervoltage. Siemens therefore recom-
mends a setting value of approx. 80 % of the rated voltage. All voltages connected according to the parame-
terized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax test.
Parameter: V1, V2 without voltage
Recommended setting value (_:5071:103) V1, V2 without voltage = 5 V

The setting value indicates the voltage below which a part of the power system (feeder or busbar) can be
regarded as deactivated with certainty.
Siemens recommends a setting value of approx. 5 % of the rated voltage for this. All voltages connected
according to the parameterized measuring-point connection type are subjected to the appropriate Vmin/Vmax
test.
Parameter: Supervision time
Recommended setting value (_:5071:109) Supervision time = 0.1 s

The parameter defines a supervision time for which the above additional closing conditions have to be at
least fulfilled at de-energized switching, before the release for closing is given. In order to include transient
phenomena, Siemens recommends a value of 0.1 s.
Parameter: Direct close command
Recommended setting value (_:5071:108) Direct close command = no

In this operating mode, the function initiates a closing release without any testing upon start of the synchroni-
zation stage. The closure occurs immediately.
NOTE
i For safety reasons, Siemens recommends leaving the setting at no. If a direct close command is neces-
sary, Siemens recommends only using this operating mode dynamically via the binary input signal >Op.
mode 'dir.cls.cmd' (see also Figure 7-79). This prevents this operating mode from being incorrectly
activated statically thereby resulting in an incorrect switching.
7.5.17 Settings

General
_:2311:127 General:Angle adjust. -179.0 to 180.0 0.0
(transform.)
General
_:5071:1 Synchrocheck 1:Mode off off
on
test
_:5071:101 Synchrocheck 1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:5071:102 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5071:110 Synchrocheck 1:Max.durat. 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; 30.00 s
sync.process
_:5071:108 Synchrocheck 1:Direct no no
close command yes
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:5071:126 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5071:105 Synchrocheck 1:Close no no
cmd. at V1< & V2> yes
cmd. at V1> & V2< yes
cmd. at V1< & V2< yes
_:5071:103 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
_:5071:104 Synchrocheck 1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
with voltage
_:5071:109 Synchrocheck 1:Supervi- 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.1 s
sion time
Synchr. conditions
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5071:117 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hzto 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
_:5071:118 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0.000 Hzto 2.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2<f1
_:5071:124 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 to 90 10
angle diff. 2>1
_:5071:125 Synchrocheck 1:Max. 0 to 90 10
angle diff. 2<1
General
_:5041:1 Sychr./Asycr.1:Mode off off
on
test
_:5041:101 Sychr./Asycr.1:Min. oper- 0.300 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
ating limit Vmin
_:5041:102 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.300 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
operat. limit Vmax
_:5041:110 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max.durat. 0.00 s to 3600.00 s; 30.00 s
sync.process
_:5041:108 Sychr./Asycr.1:Direct close no no
command yes
_:5041:126 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage 0.500 to 2.000 1.000
adjustment
De-en.gized switch.
_:5041:105 Sychr./Asycr.1:Close cmd. no no
at V1< & V2> yes
at V1> & V2< yes
at V1< & V2< yes
_:5041:103 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 0.300 V to 170.000 V 5.000 V
without voltage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:5041:104 Sychr./Asycr.1:V1, V2 with 0.300 V to 340.000 V 80.000 V
voltage
_:5041:109 Sychr./Asycr.1:Supervision 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.1 s
time
Asynchr. op.mode
_:5041:114 Sychr./Asycr.1:Async. off on
operating mode on
_:5041:113 Sychr./Asycr.1:CB make 0.01 sto 0.60 s 0.06 s
time
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:117 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hzto 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2>f1
_:5041:118 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. 0.000 Hzto 4.000 Hz 0.100 Hz
frequency diff. f2<f1
Synchr. op.mode
_:5041:119 Sychr./Asycr.1:Sync. oper- off on
ating mode on
_:5041:120 Sychr./Asycr.1:f-threshold 0.010 Hzto 0.200 Hz 0.010 Hz
ASYN<->SYN
voltage diff. V2>V1
voltage diff. V2<V1
_:5041:124 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. angle 0 to 90 10
diff. 2>1
_:5041:125 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. angle 0 to 90 10
diff. 2<1
_:5041:121 Sychr./Asycr.1:Delay close 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.00 s
command
dfdiff/dt limitation
_:140 Adv. options:Limit dfdiff/dt 0 false
for sync. op 1
_:141 Adv. options:Max. value 0.010 Hz/sto 0.025 Hz/s 0.010 Hz/s
dfdiff/dt syn
_:142 Adv. options:Limit dfdiff/dt 0 false
for asyn. op 1
_:143 Adv. options:Max. value 0.050 Hz/sto 0.500 Hz/s 0.050 Hz/s
dfdiff/dt asyn
Frequ. oscillations
_:150 Adv. options:Suppr. frequ. 0 false
oscillations 1
_:151 Adv. options:Max. diff. "f 0.000 Hzto 0.100 Hz 0.000 Hz
threshold"
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
Measurements
_:2311:303 General:Multiple selection SPS O
_:2311:304 General:Blocked no V selected SPS O
_:2311:329 General:V1 MV O
_:2311:330 General:f1 MV O
_:2311:331 General:V2 MV O
_:2311:332 General:f2 MV O
_:2311:300 General:dV MV O
_:2311:301 General:df MV O
_:2311:302 General:d MV O
Synchrocheck 1
_:5071:81 Synchrocheck 1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5071:500 Synchrocheck 1:>Selection SPS I
_:5071:502 Synchrocheck 1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5071:503 Synchrocheck 1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5071:504 Synchrocheck 1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5071:506 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5071:505 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5071:507 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5071:508 Synchrocheck 1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5071:501 Synchrocheck 1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5071:54 Synchrocheck 1:Inactive SPS O
_:5071:52 Synchrocheck 1:Behavior ENS O
_:5071:53 Synchrocheck 1:Health ENS O
_:5071:328 Synchrocheck 1:In progress SPS O
_:5071:324 Synchrocheck 1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5071:305 Synchrocheck 1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5071:325 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5071:326 Synchrocheck 1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5071:327 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5071:307 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:306 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:308 Synchrocheck 1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5071:309 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:310 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:311 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:5071:312 Synchrocheck 1:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:5071:313 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:314 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5071:315 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:5071:316 Synchrocheck 1:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:5071:317 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5071:318 Synchrocheck 1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5071:319 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
_:5071:320 Synchrocheck 1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5071:321 Synchrocheck 1: dif.too large(2>1) SPS O
_:5071:322 Synchrocheck 1: dif.too large(2<1) SPS O
_:5071:304 Synchrocheck 1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5071:323 Synchrocheck 1:Setting error SPS O
Sychr./Asycr.1
_:5041:81 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block stage SPS I
_:5041:500 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Selection SPS I
_:5041:502 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start / stop syn.proc. SPS I
_:5041:503 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Start syn. process SPS I
_:5041:504 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Stop syn. process SPS I
_:5041:506 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2>' SPS I
_:5041:505 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1>V2<' SPS I
_:5041:507 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'V1<V2<' SPS I
_:5041:508 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Op. mode 'dir.cls.cmd' SPS I
_:5041:501 Sychr./Asycr.1:>Block close command SPS I
_:5041:54 Sychr./Asycr.1:Inactive SPS O
_:5041:52 Sychr./Asycr.1:Behavior ENS O
_:5041:53 Sychr./Asycr.1:Health ENS O
_:5041:328 Sychr./Asycr.1:In progress SPS O
_:5041:324 Sychr./Asycr.1:Release close cmd. SPS O
_:5041:305 Sychr./Asycr.1:All sync. conditio. OK SPS O
_:5041:303 Sychr./Asycr.1:State f-synchronous SPS O
_:5041:325 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage difference OK SPS O
_:5041:326 Sychr./Asycr.1:Angle difference OK SPS O
_:5041:327 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency diff. OK SPS O
_:5041:307 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2> fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:306 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1>V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:308 Sychr./Asycr.1:Cond. V1<V2< fulfilled SPS O
_:5041:309 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 > fmax SPS O
_:5041:310 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f1 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:311 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f2 > fmax SPS O
_:5041:312 Sychr./Asycr.1:Frequency f2 < fmin SPS O
_:5041:313 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:314 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V1 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:315 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V2 > Vmax SPS O
_:5041:316 Sychr./Asycr.1:Voltage V2 < Vmin SPS O
_:5041:317 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2>V1) SPS O
_:5041:318 Sychr./Asycr.1:V dif.too large(V2<V1) SPS O
_:5041:319 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2>f1) SPS O
_:5041:320 Sychr./Asycr.1:f dif.too large(f2<f1) SPS O
_:5041:321 Sychr./Asycr.1: dif.too large(2>1) SPS O
_:5041:322 Sychr./Asycr.1: dif.too large(2<1) SPS O
_:5041:304 Sychr./Asycr.1:Max. time exceeded SPS O
_:5041:323 Sychr./Asycr.1:Setting error SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5.19 External Synchronization
The purpose of the External synchronization function is to control an external synchronization device.
[dw_ctrl_ext_sync_device, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-83 Triggering an External Synchronization Device
The bay controller in bay x should switch the circuit breaker in bay x in synchrony. The synchronization check
is carried out in the central paralleling device 7VE6. In addition to the paralleling device, another central bay
controller ensures the switching of the correct measuring voltages and the routing of the CB close command
from the 7VE6 to the correct circuit breaker in bay x. The bay controller x provides the information to the
central bay controller via IEC61850-GOOSE.
The External synchronization is designed as a function block which can be used in the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group. The additional External synchronization function block integrates the external synchronization into
command processing, so that the corresponding feedback can be forwarded to the command source.
If a circuit-breaker close command with a synchronization requirement is present, the external synchroniza-
tion device is started. After successfully checking the synchronization conditions, the close command is
issued from the external synchronization device to the circuit breaker. If a circuit-breaker close command
without synchronization requirement is present, the circuit-breaker close command is issued directly from the
Circuit-breaker function group to the circuit breaker. Also, each circuit-breaker trip command is issued directly
to the circuit breaker.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwextsyn-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-84 Interaction between Control and External Synchronization
Parameterization with DIGSI

In the DIGSI library, the function is visible inside the Circuit-breaker function group as the External synchroni-
zation function block. You can instantiate the function block in the Circuit-breaker function group and the
Circuit-breaker (control) function group. You can instantiate only 1 External synchronization function block
within these function groups at a time.
[scextsyn, 1, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-85 Instantiating the External Synchronization Function Block in the Circuit-Breaker Function
Group
It is not possible to jointly instantiate the External synchronization function block with the 25 synchronization
function in the same Circuit-breaker function group.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Notes for Optional Input Interconnections

You have the option of connecting the input signals >Close cmd. released and >In progress . If you
omit these interconnections, observe the following instructions:
Input >Close cmd. released :
If you do not interconnect the input signal >Close cmd. released , the execution of a circuit-breaker
close command with synchronization requirement is confirmed directly (execution successful: OPR+), as
soon as the output signal Start syn. process is set. In this case, the (_:109) Max.durat.
sync.process setting has no meaning. If you use a control model with feedback monitoring, consider that
the feedback monitoring will start immediately when the Start syn. process signal is tripped. The (_:
4201:103) Feedback monitoring time setting must therefore be set higher than the maximum
synchronization time of the external synchronization device plus the circuit-breaker closing time. If >Close
cmd. released is not routed, the output Start/stop syn. proc. is not set.
Input >In progress :
The interconnection of the input signal >In progress is intended to check whether the synchronization
device has received the Start syn. process signal. If you do not interconnect this input signal and the
external synchronization device rejects a start command, the negative acknowledgment of the circuit-breaker
close command does not occur until the maximum synchronization time (parameter (_:109) Max.durat.
sync.process ) has expired.
7.5.20 Application and Setting Notes (External Synchronization)
Parameter: Mode
Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

With the Mode setting, you switch the external synchronization function on or off. If you set the Mode setting
to off, a circuit-breaker close command with synchronization requirement is rejected.
Parameter: Max.durat. sync.process
Default setting (_:109) Max.durat. sync.process = 30 s

The Max.durat. sync.process setting defines the maximum synchronization time. The time starts when
the External synchronization function block sends a close command to the external synchronization device.
The command must be executed within this time. If the close command is not executed within this time, the
External synchronization function block sends a command to cancel closing to the external synchronization
device.
7.5.21 Settings

External synch.
_:1 External synch.:Mode off on
on
test
_:109 External 0.00 s to 3600.00 s 30.00 s
synch.:Max.durat.
sync.process
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.5.22 Information

(Type)
External synch.
_:52 External synch.:Behavior ENS O
_:54 External synch.:Health ENS O
_:55 External synch.:Start syn. process SPS O
_:56 External synch.:Stop syn. process SPS O
_:57 External synch.:Start/stop syn. proc. SPS O
_:506 External synch.:>Synch. device ready SPS I
_:507 External synch.:>Close cmd. released SPS I
_:508 External synch.:>In progress SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.6 User-Defined Function Block [Control]
The User-defined function block [control] allows the switching authority check of a control command and the
check of whether the circuit breaker has reached the position.
The User-defined function block [control] is located in the folder User-defined functions in the DIGSI 5 Library.
You can instantiate the user-defined function blocks on the top level (in parallel to other function groups) as
well as within function groups and functions.
The task of the function block is to check the switching authority and the reaching of the position for control
commands. You can instantiate every user-defined signal (for example, SPS, DPC, INC) in the function block
and route the corresponding indications (see following figure).
[scbenutz, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-86 Information Routing with Inserted User-Defined Function Block [Control]: Process Indications
and Some Individual Indications
The function block contains the parameters (_:104) Check switching authority and (_:105)
Check if pos. is reached as shown in the following figure. The parameter settings affect all controlla-
bles instantiated in the function block. Other signal types are not affected by these parameters and objects.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[user-def2, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-87 Parameterization Options of the User-Defined Function Block [Control]

With the Check switching authority parameter, you determine whether the command source of
switching commands must be checked (see chapter 7.4.1 Command Checks and Switchgear Interlocking
Protection ).
Parameter: Check if pos. is reached
Default setting (_:105) Check if pos. is reached = yes
With the Check if pos. is reached parameter, you check at a switching command whether the
switching direction equals the current position.
7.6.4 Settings

U-def.FB ctl.#
_:104 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check no yes
_:105 U-def.FB ctl.#:Check if no yes
pos. is reached yes

(Type)
U-def.FB ctl.#
_:51 U-def.FB ctl.#:Mode (controllable) ENC C
_:52 U-def.FB ctl.#:Behavior ENS O
_:53 U-def.FB ctl.#:Health ENS O
_:300 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching auth. local SPS O
_:302 U-def.FB ctl.#:Switching auth. station SPC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.7 Transformer Tap Changers
With the device control function, you can change a transformer tap by moving it higher or lower and monitor
the proper execution of the adjusting commands.
The function has built-in comprehensive options for measuring the tap changer position as well as supervi-
sion functions. The supervision functions are used to check the voltage and supply information about the tap
position for adaptive matching of the transformer differential protection.
The following options are provided for control:
Direct user commands via the device keypad or routed binary inputs
User-defined conditions via the CFC
If the tap changer reaches the end positions, the control function issues the (_:301) End higher
pos.reached or (_:302) End lower pos.reached indication.
The transformer tap controller is controlled by the function group Tap changer, which you can select from the
DIGSI library (group Switching devices).
[sc_tssdig, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-88 Transformer Tap Changer Functionality in the DIGSI Information Matrix
The central element is the Controllable Position of type BSC (Binary Controlled Step Position Information,
based on IEC 61850). You connect this Controllable in the matrix to the desired number of binary inputs that
indicate the current tap position.
You can find more information in chapter 7.7.2 Application and Setting Notes .
The Position Controllable also contains settings. If you wish to change the settings, you must select the
Controllable in the DIGSI information matrix and change the settings by way of the Properties dialog. The
taps are controlled via the commands Higher command and Lower command, each of which must be
connected to one binary output.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Example
The following images show a CFC chart for transformer tap control with the routing of the function keys for
stepping up or stepping down: To use the function keys, you create 2 user-defined single-point indications
(SPS). These are used for the function keys (for example, <F1>, Higher function key and <F2>, Lower func-
tion key) and as the input signals for the appropriate CFC blocks.
The commands for changing to higher or lower must not be connected as an output in the CFC. The
BSC_EXE block connects this automatically.
[scbivctv-280715-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-89 CFC chart
[schilocd-280715-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-90 Routing of the Function Keys
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Using this simple CFC chart, the tap changer can move a tap up or down by pressing function keys. The
control direction can be selected using a value at the Val input of the BSC-DEF block. 1 means step up, 0
means step down. Motor Supervision
Motor Supervision Time

The runtime of the motor drive can be monitored from the device. This function is used to identify failures of
the motor drive during switching and to trip actions if necessary. To use the Motor supervision time ,
you must route the sliding contact and set the proper motor runtime.
The sliding contact is active until the tap changer has reached the new position. This time is compared to the
Motor supervision time . If the new tap position is not reached within the motor runtime, the Motor
sup. time expired indication is set. The Trigger motor prot. sw. indication with which the motor
can be switched off is output after 1.5 s. Depending on the Supervision behavior setting, the function
reaches a status of Failure or Warning.
[lotcmoue-090713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-91 Position and Motor Supervision Logic
A new tap position can only be reached in conjunction with an adjusting command. The device monitors
spontaneous changes to the tap position without an adjusting command or changes in the wrong direction.
Spontaneous changes to the tap position indicate a defect or a failure in the tap changer.
An error response occurs if the tap position is outside the specified range (minimum value, maximum value).
A detected fault of the tap changer is indicated. You can acknowledge the fault using the Reset failure
command. At the device you can find this command by using the navigation keys: Main Menu Device
Functions Reset Functions Tap Changer.
The device counts the number of successfully completed adjusting commands with the Op.ct. operation
counter accumulator value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameters of the Transformer Tap Changer Function Group
[scstuslt-100713-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-92 Parameters of the Tap Changer
NOTE
i If run positions, this means internal tap changer positions without voltage changes, are available, the
following must be observed:
If these tap changer positions contain a suffix a and c or + and -, and additional switching pulses are not
required, adjust the parameter for the feedback and motor supervision time to the actual motor runtime
when passing through a run position. Siemens recommends parameterization with capturing the sliding
contact.
Default setting (_:108) Control model = SBO w. enh. security

Use the Control model parameter to specify the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2. The following
selection options are available:
direct w. normal secur.
status only
Parameter: SBO time-out
Default setting (_:109) SBO time-out = 30 s

With this setting, you specify the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: Feedback monitoring time
Default setting (_:110) Feedback monitoring time = 10 s

Reaching a new tap position after the switching command is monitored. If a new tap position is not reached,
you specify with this setting the time when the command is canceled. The range of values extends from
0.01 s to 1800.00 s.
Parameter: Maximum output time
Default setting (_:111) Maximum output time = 1.50 s

This setting specifies the maximum output time. The range of values extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. For
activating motors to change the tap position, a time of 1.50 s is practical.
Parameter: Supervision behavior
Default setting (_:112) Supervision behavior = alarm block

You can select whether the supervision is switched off ( off ) or if only a warning is indicated ( warning ).
With the alarm block setting, an alarm indication is generated and the function is blocked.
Parameter: Motor supervision time
Default setting (_:113) Motor supervision time = 10 s

After the motor supervision time has elapsed, the indication Motor sup. time expired is displayed.
Additional information can be found in the margin title Motor Supervision Time, Page 1279 . The range of
values extends from 5 s to 100 s.
Parameter: Highest tap changer position
Default setting (_:116) Highest tap changer position = Lowest tap voltage
With the setting Highest tap changer position, indicate whether the lowest or highest voltage is
present at the highest tap changer position.
Additional Settings (Properties Dialog Position)

Additional settings are assigned to the Controllable Position . To display and adjust the settings, select
Position in the DIGSI information matrix and select the Properties dialog. To do this, click the Properties
tab.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[scdeegts-220514-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-93 Properties Dialog
Parameter: Minimum value
Default setting Minimum value = 1
Parameter: Maximum value
Default setting Maximum value = 15

The Minimum value and Maximum value settings are calculated by DIGSI 5. You specify the lowest and
highest number of tap positions based on the set tap coding. The settings are used for position supervision.
Parameter: Offset of the tap display
Default setting Offset of the tap display = 0

If you want to move the height of the displayed value in a positive or the negative direction with respect to the
height of the actual value, enter the value for this in the Offset of the tap display field.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: Number of bits for tap coding
Default setting Number of bits for tap coding = 4

With the Number of bits for tap coding parameter, set the number of bits you need for coding the
transformer taps. The number is dependent on the selected Coding. For example, you need 3 bits for 7
binary-encoded transformer taps. The range of values extends from 2 to 32.
Parameter: Number of taps
Default setting Number of taps = 15

Using the Number of taps setting, set the number of transformer taps. The range of values moves from 2
to 127. The output of the tap position is limited from -63 to +63. If the number of taps is > 63, set the param-
eter Tap display offset so that the tap position is within the range of -63 to +63.
Parameter: Tap coding type
Default setting Tap coding type = binary

In the Tap coding type list box, select the interpretation type of the indication pending at the binary input.
You can select from the following options:
Binary
1-of-n
BCD
Table
BCD with sign
Gray
If you want to specify an individual tap coding type, select Table.
In the Coding representation section, select the numbering system in which your coding table entries
will take place, alternatively:
Binary (2 characters)
Octal (8 characters)
Decimal (10 characters)
Hexadecimal (16 characters)

The selected option is valid for all inputs in the Tap coding type column.
If you change the number system and there are already entries in this column these will be converted to the
new number system. The selection area becomes visible as soon as you have selected the setting Table in
the field Tap Coding Type.
NOTE
i If the binary inputs used for coding are all inactive, this indicates an invalid tap position (regardless of the
display offset). For an invalid tap setting, the display shows the position --- or -64 with quality invalid; the
exception is BCD with sign, see Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type: BCD with Sign),
Page 1284 .
Enter the coding for the tap in the Coding column in the Coding table. Enter the value according to the
numbering system previously selected. Select the desired number of taps and number of bits for tap coding.
Taps with the same coding and taps with 0 coding are not permitted.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type:

Binary) The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 3) with 4 transformer tap positions
designated 3 to 6. BI4 is the moving contact. The encoding is in binary.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Table 7-24 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type:
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X X
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Moving
contact
Tap = 1 1 0 0
With 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 23 -1 = 7 tap positions can be mapped in binary code. If all routed binary
inputs indicate 0, this is interpreted as a connection error and is reported by Position --- or -64 with quality
invalid. The representation of transformer taps should start with the numerical value 3. The information prop-
erties must be configured as follows for the example:
Tap coding type: Binary
Number of taps: 4
Number of bits for tap coding: 3
Offset of the tap display: 2
Moving contact (highest binary input) yes
The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially, for example, BI 1, BI 2, BI 3 and BI 4 for the moving
contact.
Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type: BCD with Sign)
BCD with Sign) The following table shows the routing of 3 binary inputs (BI 1 to BI 3) with 7 transformer tap
positions designated -3 to 3. Encoding takes place in BCD.
Table 7-25 Routing of the Binary Inputs (Tap Coding Type: BCD with Sign)
Example
BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6
Tap changer X X X
Meaning Bit 1 Bit 2 Sign
Tap = 1 1 0 1
Using 3 binary inputs, a maximum of 7 tap positions can be mapped with the tap coding type of BCD with
sign. This yields the number of positions from -3 to 3. If all routed binary inputs indicate 0, this is recognized
as tap 0. The 3 binary inputs must be numbered sequentially.
Tap coding type: BCD with sign
Number of taps: 7
Number of bits for tap coding: 3
Offset of the tap display: 0
Moving contact (highest binary input) no
Routing the Tap Position to Binary Outputs

For the output of the tap change commands, route the information step up and step down on one relay each,
see following figure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[sc_trass7, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-94 Routing the Tap Setting Commands
Parameter: Moving contact (highest binary input)
Default setting Moving contact (highest binary input) = no

If the tap position is not to be recognized as valid and accepted until the moving contact signals that it has
reached the taps, then activate the Moving contact (highest binary input) option. If the moving
contact is set, the new positions are shown and labeled with an *.
Parameter: Software filtering time
Default setting Software filtering time = 500 ms

With this setting, you specify the Software filtering time for capturing the tap position. The range of
values extends from 0 ms to 86400000 ms. Within this time, brief changes on the binary inputs are
suppressed.
Parameter: Retrigger filter
Default setting Retrigger filter = yes

With this setting, you switch retriggering of the filtering time by a position change on or off.
Parameter: Indication time before filtering
Default setting Indication time before filtering = yes

With this setting, you specify whether the hardware filtering time is accounted for in the time stamp of position
capture.
Parameter: Chatter blocking
Default setting Chatter blocking = yes

With this setting, you switch Chatter blocking on or off.
7.7.3 Settings (Properties Dialog)
The settings listed here can only be reached and changed by way of the Properties dialog of the Position
Controllable.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

General Information
- Minimum value Calculated -
- Maximum value Calculated -
- Offset of the tap display 63 to +63 0
- Number of bits for tap 2 to 32 4
coding
- Number of taps 2 to 63 15
- Tap coding type Binary Binary
1-of-n
BCD
Table
BCD with sign
Gray
Software filter
- Software filtering time 0 ms to 86400000 ms 500 ms
7.7.4 Settings

Control
_:104 Tap changer:Check no yes
advanced
_:108 Tap changer:Control status only SBO w. enh.
model direct w. normal secur. security
_:109 Tap changer:SBO time- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
out
_:110 Tap changer:Feedback 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
monitoring time
Tap changer
_:111 Tap changer:Maximum 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 1.50 s
output time
_:112 Tap changer:Supervi- off alarm block
sion behavior warning
alarm block
_:113 Tap changer:Motor 5 s to 100 s 10 s
supervision time
_:116 Tap changer:Highest tap Lowest voltage tap Lowest voltage
changer pos. Highest voltage tap tap
_:114 Tap changer:Lowest tap -64 to 64 1
position
_:115 Tap changer:Highest tap -64 to 64 15
position
Switching authority
_:117 Tap changer:Swi.dev. 0 false
related sw.auth. 1
_:118 Tap changer:Specific 0 true
sw. authorities 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:119 Tap changer:Specific station station/remote
sw.auth. valid for station/remote
remote
_:120 Tap changer:Num. of 2 to 5 2
specific sw.auth.
_:121 Tap changer:Multiple 0 false
specific sw.auth. 1

(Type)
Tap changer
_:500 Tap changer:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:501 Tap changer:>Enable SPS I
_:507 Tap changer:>Sw. authority local SPS I
_:508 Tap changer:>Sw. authority remote SPS I
_:509 Tap changer:>Sw. mode interlocked SPS I
_:510 Tap changer:>Sw. mode non-interl. SPS I
_:504 Tap changer:>Reset AcqBlk&Subst SPS I
_:53 Tap changer:Health ENS O
_:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached SPS O
_:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached SPS O
_:308 Tap changer:Position BSC C
_:305 Tap changer:Higher command SPS O
_:306 Tap changer:Lower command SPS O
_:307 Tap changer:Command active SPS O
_:309 Tap changer:Motor sup. time expired SPS O
_:310 Tap changer:Trigger motor prot. sw. SPS O
_:311 Tap changer:Position failure SPS O
_:312 Tap changer:Op.ct. INS O
_:313 Tap changer:Switching authority ENS O
_:314 Tap changer:Switching mode ENS O
_:319 Tap changer:Reset failure SPC C
_:317 Tap changer:Switching auth. station SPC C
_:320 Tap changer:Enable sw. auth. 1 SPC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
7.8 Voltage Controller
The transformer voltage controller functionality (ANSI 90V) is used to control power transformers (two-
winding transformers, three-winding transformers, grid coupling transformers) and auto transformers using a
motor-operated tap changer. The function provides automatic voltage control within a specified voltage range
on the secondary side of the transformers or, as an alternative, at a remote load point (Z compensation or
R/X compensation) in the network. In order to compensate for the voltage variations in the meshed system,
use the LDC-Z procedure (Z compensation). For voltage drops on the line, use the LDC-XandR procedure
(R/X compensation).
The control principle is based on the fact that a higher or lower command to the tap changer, as a function of
the voltage change (V) per tap, causes a voltage increase or decrease.
The voltage control operates on a tap-for-tap basis and compares the measured actual voltage (Vact) to the
specified target voltage (Vtarget). If the voltage difference is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a higher or
lower command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed. Specifying the time
delay (T1) depends on the set controller response (inverse or linear), to avoid unnecessary adjusting
commands during brief voltage deviations from the target value and for coordination with other automatic
voltage controllers in the system.
The voltage controller function also monitors the currents on the upper-voltage side and the low-voltage side
of the transformer to block the controller during impermissible operating states (overcurrent/undercurrent/
undervoltage). The voltage controller function also has limiting values that, in special operating cases,
suppress higher commands in the case of overvoltage and lower commands in the case of undervoltage.
The Two-winding transformer voltage controller, Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and Grid
coupling transformer voltage controller function groups consist of 5 function blocks. Depending on the appli-
cation, the function groups are preconfigured in the relevant application template by the manufacturer or can
be copied into the corresponding device project during engineering.
The following figure shows, for example, the functional scope of the Two-winding transformer voltage
controller function group.
[dwvolctl-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-95 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group
The functions General (GAPC), Tap changer (YLTC), and Voltage controller (ATCC) are logical node points
in IEC 61850-8-1.
The tap changer (YLTC) is the interface between the voltage controller (ATCC) and the motor-operated tap
changer of the transformer (OLTC). This means that the voltage controller (ATCC) sends higher and lower
commands to the tap changer. This tap changer issues command pulses to the motor-operated tap changer
of the transformer (OLTC). The tap changer (YLTC) measures the tap positions and monitors the action of
the motor-operated tap changer (OLTC).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The function group has interfaces to the following measuring points:

Two-winding transformer:
Voltage, 3-phase
Current, 3-phase (optional)
Three-winding transformer:
2 x voltage, 3-phase
2 x current, 3-phase (optional)
Grid coupling transformer:

2 x 3-phase voltage
2 x 3-phase current
Figure 7-96 shows these interfaces as a block structure.
[dwvocnti-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-96 Structure of the Voltage Control Function Group
You can find the information and function measured values of the voltage controller in the DIGSI routing
matrix.
If the load is increased in an electricity-supply system, the voltage is reduced and vice versa. The power
transformers are usually equipped with transformer tap changers (OLTC) so as to keep the power-system
voltage at a constant level.
As a result, the transformer ratio is changed in predefined steps. Changing the transformer taps causes the
voltage to change.
The Voltage control function is intended to control transformers with motor-operated transformer tap
changers.
This function is designed to control the following:
For two-winding transformers (2W): the voltage on the secondary circuit of the power transformer
For three-winding transformers (3W): the voltage of the secondary winding 1 or winding 2
For grid coupling transformers (GC): voltage of winding 1 or winding 2, selectively depending on the
power direction
The control operation is based on a step-by-step principle. To move the tap changer one position higher or
lower, a single control pulse is issued to the motor-drive mechanism of the tap changer. The length of the
control pulse can be set over a large range so as to handle the very different types of tap-changer drives. The
control pulse is issued if the measured voltage deviates from the set reference value by more than the preset
voltage range for more than a given time period.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The voltage can be controlled at the voltage measuring point or at the load point in the electrical power
system. In this case, the load-point voltage is calculated on the basis of the measured load current and the
known impedance between the voltage measuring point and the load point.
The following figures show possible configurations of the voltage controller for two-winding transformers with
and without current measurement.
[dwkonlst-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-97 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement for
Load Compensation at the End of the Line
(1) Only if a transformer side is present
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwkonlsK-060913.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-98 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Two-Winding Transformers without Current Measurement
Three-Winding Transformers
Three-winding transformers are special power transformers that have 2 separate windings on the secondary
circuit and typically supply 2 different busbars. The voltage levels on the secondary circuit of the power trans-
formers can either be the same or different. In addition to designs with 2 tap changers on the secondary
circuits, in most cases, three-winding transformers are equipped with only one tap changer or on-load tap
changer on the primary side. It is therefore necessary to feed both voltages of the secondary windings to the
voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and to specify one of them, depending on the busbar situation, to the
voltage controller as the control variable.
The voltages of side 1 and 2 of the three-winding transformer are simultaneously monitored. In the process,
the voltage to be monitored can be automatically selected via the load current of both sides or by using one
parameter. This parameter is the settings group switching via binary input, protocol, or function keys. The
uncontrolled voltage can be monitored in parallel to ensure that it remains within the defined voltage limits.
If a current measuring point is assigned to a function group, the voltage to be controlled can be automatically
selected dependent on the load.
For automatic load change, the voltage of the transformer side into which the larger load current flows is
controlled. The respective uncontrolled voltage is monitored for undervoltage and overvoltage.
In contrast to overvoltage on the controlled side, for overvoltage on the uncontrolled side, the higher impulse
is blocked and no fast step down to a lower tap occurs. In case of undervoltage on the uncontrolled side, the
lower commands are blocked if this behavior is activated for undervoltage supervision.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dw_V-constell-3wind-with-imeas.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-99 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers with Current Measurement
for Load Compensation at the End of the Line
[dw_V-constell-3wind-without-imeas-091014.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-100 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Three-Winding Transformers without Current Measure-
ment
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Grid Coupling Transformers

Grid coupling transformers are special power transformers that connect 2 electrical power systems to one
another. The load-side voltage is controlled. The power flow can change during operation. That is why both
voltages and currents, winding 1 and winding 2, voltage measuring inputs (V1, V2) and current measuring
inputs (I1 and I2) must be fed. A voltage must be specified as a function of the load situation to the voltage
controller as the control variable.
The voltages of the windings 1 and 2 of the grid coupling transformers are simultaneously monitored. In the
process, you can select the voltage to be controlled using one parameter. This parameter can be changed
using the settings group switching via the binary input, protocol, or function keys.
[dw_V-constell-2wind-coupl-transf.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-101 Voltage-Controller Constellation for Grid Coupling Transformers
On-Load Tap Changer

On-load tap changers are used to set the desired tap of a stepped winding of the transformer while under
load. During switchover, the desired tap of the stepped winding is first selected by means of the tap selector.
Next, the on-load tap changer switches over from the current-carrying tap to the selected tap. During this
switchover, one tap of the stepped winding is briefly bridged by an ohmic resistor so that the load switchover
takes place without power interruption. Physically, the tap changer is installed in the transformer tank or in a
separate tank.
Tap Changer
The Tap changer function issues the adjusting commands to the on-load tap changer and receives the corre-
sponding feedback. The function of the tap changer inside the voltage controller corresponds to that of the
separate tap changer. The higher and lower tap commands are generated by the voltage controller. The
Check switching authority, Control model, SBO time-out and Feedback monitoring time
parameters are set only in the voltage controller.
You can find more information in chapter 7.8.4 Application and Setting Notes.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Voltage Controller
The Voltage controller function controls the voltage within the bandwidth and within the set voltage limits.
Using the Mode parameter, you can turn the voltage controller on or off or set it for test mode.
With the parameter Number of target voltage, you can specify up to 4 target voltages. You can only
activate one of these target voltages at a time using function key, communication, or a binary input. With the
Set point mode active parameter, you can specify a valid target voltage via a communication network.
If the voltage controller is switched off, adjusting commands cannot be given to the tap changer in automatic
operation or in manual operation. The set on-site or remote switching authority is independent of this.
You can set the controller operating mode via the Operating mode parameter or the Operating mode
command to automatic operation or manual operation. In automatic operation, the voltage is controlled auto-
matically in accordance with the set parameters.
Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller

For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the control are
permanently defined.
With the three-winding transformer voltage controller, these measurands can be specified using one param-
eter (parameter Winding selection = Winding 1 or Winding 2) or they can be automatically selected
(Winding selection = WithMaxLoad).
The winding is automatically selected by evaluating the load current in the windings. If the load current in one
of the two windings is greater than the load current in the other winding by 5 % of the rated current for 10 s,
then the winding voltage is controlled using the larger load current.
Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller

For the two-winding transformer voltage controller, the measurands that are used to manage the control are
permanently defined.
With the grid coupling transformer voltage controller, these measurands can be selected using a parameter
(parameter Winding selection = Winding 1 or Winding 2).
You can change the winding selection during operation using the settings group switching.
You can also monitor the power-flow direction. If the difference in the power of Winding 1 and Winding 2 is
greater than 10 % of the rated power on the control side, the Power-flow superv. indication appears and
the function switches to the alarm state.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[lovoltco-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-102 Higher-Level Logic of the Voltage Controller
(1) Manual operation

(2) Automatic operation
(3) Controllable
(4) Command
In accordance with the IEC 61850 standard, DOI LTCBlk (Block automatic operation command), automatic
control can be blocked with a command.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The voltage controller measures the actual voltage (Vact) and compares it to the target voltage (Vset point). If
the difference between the measured voltage (control deviation D) is greater than the set bandwidth (B), a
higher or lower command is sent to the tap changer once the set time delay (T1) has elapsed.
You can change the settings for control during operation with the settings group switching.
You can switchover the settings groups via the following alternatives:
Via the on-site operation panel directly on the device
Via an online DIGSI connection to the device
Via binary inputs
Via a communication connection to a substation automation technology (IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850)
You can find more information in chapter 3.10.1 Settings-Group Switching.
Control Deviation
The control deviation is calculated from the current actual voltage and the target voltage in relation to the
rated voltage.
[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]
D = Control deviation
Bandwidth
To minimize the number of switching operations by the tap changer, a permitted bandwidth is defined. If the
actual voltage is within the bandwidth, no adjusting control commands are issued to the tap changer. If the
actual voltage exceeds the defined bandwidth, an adjusting command is issued after the set time delay T1
delay. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth before T1 delay elapses, no
adjusting control command is issued.
If the actual voltage returns to the voltage range of the bandwidth within the time delay T1, the running time
delay T1 continues to count down, starting at the already elapsed time. If the actual voltage returns again to
the set bandwidth while the time is counting down, the time delay T1 is started at the remaining time. In this
way, the time delay is reduced in the event of frequent violations of the lower limit of the bandwidth.
[dwistspn-060913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-103 Actual Voltage Curve during Control Deviation
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
(a) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth

(b) Actual voltage before T1 elapses within the bandwidth - no switching
(c) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth, T1 begins to elapse
(d) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth after T1, switching procedure initiated
(e) Switching procedure concluded, actual voltage within the bandwidth
Linear, Inverse Control Response

With linear control response, the controller reacts independently of the control deviation after the set time T1
delay. If more than one tap-position change is required to bring the actual voltage back within the band-
width, the set time T2 delay takes effect.
With inverse control response, the time T1 delay depends on the magnitude of the control deviation. Small
deviations are tolerated for longer than larger ones. If the time delay is very small in accordance with the set
characteristic curve, the time T1 Inverse Min takes effect.
The set inverse characteristic curve is a function of the parameter T1 delay. The characteristic curves
arising for different settings of the time T1 delay are shown in chapter 7.8.4 Application and Setting Notes,
margin title Parameter: T1 characteristic.
Control Response with Zero Potential or Voltage Recovery

If the actual voltage is not within the defined bandwidth after a voltage recovery, it can be necessary for the
voltage controller to send the 1st adjusting command with the T2 time. For this purpose, the parameter
Regulate with T2 at start must be switched on.
[dw_istgro-130215, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-104 Actual Voltage Curve during Control with T2
(1) Actual voltage below the minimum voltage

(2) After switching on, the change to a higher tap occurs with time T2
(3) After the voltage recovery, the actual voltage is above the bandwidth
(4) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth. A fast step down is made with the time T2 until the band-
width is reached.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Control Response in the Event of Larger Voltage Deviations
[dwistgro-060913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-105 Actual Voltage Curve During Larger Control Deviations
(1) Actual voltage outside the bandwidth

(2) The change to a higher tap occurs after T1 and then T2
(3) Actual voltage inside the bandwidth
(4) Actual voltage outside the limit for a fast step down mode. A fast step-down occurs until the band-
width is reached.
Fast Step Up Mode and Fast Step Down Mode

The fast step down mode and the fast step up mode allow a fast reaction to abnormal voltage situations.
Figure 7-105 shows such a situation at point (4). A fast step-down mode occurs until the bandwidth has been
reached. The step time between 2 consecutive lower commands results from the following 2 conditions:
The completion of a tap change command after the new valid position was detected
The measurement time for capturing the new actual voltage
The activity of the fast step down mode and the fast step up mode is displayed with the indications (_:
14011:308) Fast Step Down active and (_:14011:307) Fast Step Up active.
[losnlruk-090913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-106 Logic of the Fast Step Down Mode
The fast step up mode operates in a similar fashion.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Function Supervision for Automatic Operation

If the actual voltage exceeds or falls below the set bandwidth for longer than the set time delay, this situation
is shown by the indication (_:14011:309) Auto Monitor. If the actual voltage returns to the voltage
range, the indication is reset. You can switch off the function monitor with a time delay = 0 min.
[lofktueb-090913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-107 Logic of the Function Supervision for Automatic Operation
Phase Compensation
When using phase compensation, the voltage drop of a phase that is connected to a transformer can be
included. In this case, 2 processes are available:
Z compensation (LDC-Z)
X and R compensation (LDC-XandR)
NOTE
i The phase compensation is only active if power is flowing in the direction of the phase.
Z Compensation (LDC-Z)
Z compensation allows you to include the voltage drop of a line connected to the transformer. You can switch
Z compensation on or off. If cos is roughly constant, you can use Z compensation. Setting the parameters
requires a calculation of the voltage increase (Target voltage rising) taking into consideration the load
current (Max load current).
The parameter Target voltage rising represents the voltage drop across the line as a % under rated
load.
You can find more information and the calculation in chapter 7.8.4 Application and Setting Notes.
In case of active Z compensation, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to the
target voltage to avoid a voltage at the transformer that is too high. To do this, set the parameter Max load
current. In addition, the parameter Vmax threshold is active. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold
value, no more higher tap change commands are issued.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[dwregchr-090913-01.vsd, 3, en_US]
Figure 7-108 Control Characteristic with Z Compensation
X and R Compensation (LDC-XandR)

When using the X and R compensation, you need the phase data. With this data, it is possible to precisely
compensate the voltage drop of the transmission lines. The following figure shows the effect of this compen-
sation type.
[dw-line-drop-kompensation-250214-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-109 Phasor Diagram of the X and R Compensation
You can also use the X and R compensation for the parallel control of transformers. If the X value is positive,
the loss of voltage of the phase is compensated. If you are implementing a parallel control with X and R
compensation, then the X value is negative and considers the voltage increase from the busbar to the trans-
former.
Vtransf Voltage on the transformer, voltage to be controlled
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Vload Voltage of load point (target voltage, Vload = Vtransf - Vdrop)

Vdrop Voltage drop of the phase
IR, IX Voltage drop through R and X of the phase
Iload Load current
j Load angle
If the X and R compensation is active, you must limit the maximum permitted voltage increase in relation to
the target voltage to avoid a voltage at the transformer that is too high. To do this, set the parameter Vmax
threshold. If the actual voltage exceeds this threshold value, no more higher tap change commands are
issued.
Limiting Values
The limiting values cause no higher or lower adjusting commands to be given to the tap changer in the event
of an upper limit violation (Vmax threshold) or lower limit violation (Vmin threshold). In this way,
changing taps under abnormal voltage conditions and changing taps in the incorrect direction (for example, in
the event of wiring errors) is prevented.
The lower and upper tap changer limits are included in the limiting values. The parameters Lower tap-
position limit and Higher tap-position limit cause an additional restriction of the control range.
Blockings
The blockings prevent tap positions under abnormal network conditions. The following blocking functions are
available:
Undervoltage
Overcurrent, load current
Undercurrent
External blocking (binary input)
Blocking command LTCBlock IEC 61850
Blocking in the event of pickup of the transformer differential protection

Using the parameter Blocking behavior, you specify whether the blockings are to take effect only in auto-
matic operation (Auto) or in both automatic and manual operation (Auto-Manual).
Overcurrent blocking prevents tap changes in the event of an overload. For the current blockings, the posi-
tive-sequence system of the load current and of the current on the upper-voltage side of transformers is
calculated.
By assigning the tap changer to the transformer side, you also arrange the current of the upper-voltage side.
Perform this assignment in the appropriate Transformer side. Here, you must use the tap changer of the
voltage controller.
Undervoltage blocking prevents tap changes in the event of a network collapse. The output signals of the
voltage controller are blocked and, depending on the operating mode, the indication Auto Blocking and/or
Manual Blocking is issued.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
[loblokir-090913-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-110 Logic Blockings
(1) If transformer differential protection is available

(2) If a current measurement is available
If the tap changer is assigned to the transformer side, the current of the upper-voltage side is also monitored
and the differential-protection pickup blocks the voltage controller automatically.
Additional Blockings for the Three-Winding Transformer Voltage Controller

The blockings described in the above sections also apply to the controlled winding of the three-winding trans-
former. In addition, the blockings for undervoltage, minimum voltage, and overcurrent are used for the meas-
urands of the uncontrolled side.
Additional Blockings for the Grid Coupling Transformer Voltage Controller

For voltage control in grid coupling transformers, the voltages and currents of both windings are always used
for the blockings.
Functional Measured Values of the Two-Winding Transformer

You can read the current status at any time under the operational measured values. The following values are
available:
Meas- Description Primar Secon- % Referenced to
ured y dary
value
V act. Current measured positive-sequence kV V Target voltage of the primary system
voltage (referenced to phase-to- referenced to rated voltage
phase)
V act. Voltage difference between the target kV V Voltage difference referenced to the
voltage and the actual voltage rated voltage of the controlled winding
I load Current measured load current (posi- A A Load current referenced to the rated
tive-sequence system) current of the winding
V max Maximum positive-sequence voltage kV V Maximum voltage of the winding refer-
ever measured (referenced to phase- enced to the rated voltage of the
to-phase) winding
V min Minimum positive-sequence voltage kV V Minimum voltage of the winding refer-
ever measured (reference to phase- enced to the rated voltage of the
to-phase) winding
V Calculated target voltage with consid- kV V Target voltage of the winding refer-
target eration of Z compensation enced to the rated voltage of the
winding
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
The functional measured values V max and V min can be reset with the input indication >Reset min./
max..
Functional Measured Values of the Three-Winding Transformer

available:
Measured Description Primar Secon- % Referenced to
value y dary
Vact.w1 Actual voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of the primary system
referenced to rated voltage
V act. Voltage difference between the kV V Voltage difference referenced to the
target voltage and the actual voltage rated voltage of the controlled
winding
I load Load current of winding 1 A A Load current referenced to the rated
w1 current of winding 1
Vmax 1 Maximum voltage of winding 1 kV V Maximum voltage of winding 1 refer-
enced to the rated voltage of winding
1
2
Vmin 1 Minimum voltage of winding 1 kV V Minimum voltage of winding 1 refer-
enced to rated voltage of winding 1
V tar.w1 Target voltage of winding 1 kV V Target voltage of winding 1 refer-
1
2
The functional measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1 and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
Functional Measured Values of the Grid Coupling Transformer

available:
value y dary
V act. Voltage difference between the kV V Voltage difference referenced to the
target voltage and the actual voltage rated voltage of the controlled
winding
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

value y dary
1
2
1
2
The functional measured values Vmax 1, Vmax 2, Vmin 1 and Vmin 2 can be reset with the input indication
>Reset min./max..
Fundamental Values and Power Measured Values

The fundamental values and power measured values are always present in the Two-winding transformer
voltage controller, Three-winding transformer voltage controller, and the Grid coupling transformer voltage
controller function groups. Furthermore, you can find the fundamental values and power measured values for
winding 1 and winding 2 in the Three-winding transformer voltage controller and in the Grid coupling trans-
former voltage controller function groups. These values cannot be deleted.
Table 7-26 and Table 7-27 show the total scope in case a 3-phase voltage measuring point is also
connected.
Table 7-26 Possible Fundamental Values for the Voltage Controller Function Group
Fundamental Values Primar Secon- % Referenced to

y dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the
primary system
IN Measured zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the
primary system
VA, VB,VC Phase-to-ground voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the
primary system/3
VAB, VBC, Phase-to-phase voltages kV V Rated operating voltage of the
VCA primary system
VN Measured neutral-point displace- kV V Rated operating voltage of the

ment voltage primary system/3
Table 7-27 Possible Power Measured Values of the Voltage Controller Function Group
Power Measured Value Primar Secon- % Referenced to

y dary
Ptotal Active power MW W Active power of the primary system
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Power Measured Value Primar Secon- % Referenced to

y dary
Qtotal Reactive power Mvar var Reactive power of the primary
(total power) system
3 Vrated Irated
Stotal Apparent power MVA VA Apparent power of the primary
(total power) system
3 Vrated Irated
Two-Winding Transformer: General

Default setting (_:2311:101) Rated current = 1000.00 A
The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.
Three-Winding Transformer and Grid Coupling Transformer: General

Winding 1
Winding 2
The measured values of the voltage controller can be displayed as primary values, secondary values, or in
percent. With the Rated current and Rated voltage parameters, you set the reference value for the
percentage values.
Tap Changer
The parameters of the tap changer inside the voltage controller correspond to those of the tap changer in
chapter 7.7.2 Application and Setting Notes.
For the tap changer inside the voltage controller, the parameters for the control model are copies of those
from the voltage controller. This concerns the parameters:
Checking the switching authority
Control model
SBO26 Time-out
Feedback.monitor.time
26 In the IEC 61850 standard, reservation is known as Select Before Operate (SBO).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Voltage Controller
Parameter: Mode
Default setting (_:14011:1) Mode = on
With the Mode parameter, you switch the voltage controller in on, off, or in test operation.
Default setting (_:14011:101) Operating mode = Manual
With the Operating mode parameter, you specify whether the controller is operating in Auto mode or in
Manual.
Only Three-Winding Transformer:

Parameter: Winding selection
Default setting (_:15601:157) Winding selection = Winding 1
With the Winding selection parameter, you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of
Winding 1 or Winding 2 or whether the voltage to be controlled is automatically selected as a function of
the load current WithMaxLoad.
Only Grid Coupling Transformer:

Parameter: Winding selection
Default setting (_:16351:161) Winding selection = Winding 1
With the Winding selection parameter, you specify whether the controller controls the voltage of
Winding 1 or Winding 2.
Controlling
With the Check switching authority parameter, you specify whether the switching authority (On-site,
Remote) is checked during an adjusting command.
Default setting (_:109) Control model = SBO w. enh. security
This parameter Control model specifies the control model according to IEC 61850-7-2 that corresponds to
the behavior of the data (SBO Select Before Operate).
You can select one of the following settings:
direct w. normal secur.

Parameter: SBO time-out
Default setting (_:110) SBO time-out = 30.00 s
This parameter specifies the time for detecting the time-out of the SBO command. The range of values
extends from 0.01 s to 1800.00 s. This is the time that can elapse between command acceptance and
command execution (command model as per IEC 61850-7-2).
Parameter: Feedback monitoring time
Default setting (_:111) Feedback monitoring time = 10.00 s
Reaching a new tap position after the adjusting command is monitored via the feedback-monitoring time. If a
new tap position is not reached, the command is canceled after this time.
Parameter: Set point mode active
Default setting (_:14011:160) Set point mode active = on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
With the Set point mode active = on parameter, you can send a target voltage to the controller via a
communication network. The controller uses the specified voltage value as target voltage. If the controller
does not receive any valid voltage values, it uses the original target voltage. You can switch the parameter on
or off.
For the three-winding transformer, the address of the Set point mode active parameter is
_:15601:171. For the grid coupling transformer, the address is _:16351:171.
Only Two-Winding Transformer:

Parameter: Number of target voltage
Default setting (_:14011:156) Number of target voltage = 1
With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 to 4). You can select a target
voltage from the available ones using the function key, the communication, or a binary input.
NOTE
i Keep in mind that the parameter Number of target voltage cannot be influenced by way of the
settings group switching.
You can specify the target voltages (1 to 4) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltages 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart.
Parameter: Target voltage 1

Default setting (_:14011:112) Target voltage 1 = 440.00 kV
With the Target voltage 1 parameter, you specify the voltage that the controller is supposed to reach.
With the Target voltage 2 parameter, you specify the 2nd voltage that the controller is supposed to
reach.
With the Target voltage 3 parameter, you specify the 3rd voltage that the controller is supposed to
reach.
With the Target voltage 4 parameter, you specify the 4th voltage that the controller is supposed to
reach.
In order to select the target voltage via a binary input, you need a CFC chart. The following example shows
the selection of the Target voltage 1 via binary input 1 and the selection of the Target voltage 2 via binary
input 2. The edge of 0 to 1 activates the target voltage. The last edge is active.
[scbivctv-100415-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 7-111 CFC Chart Example
Only Three-Winding Transformer:

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can
select a target voltage from the available ones via the function key, the communication, or a binary input.
NOTE
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltages 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart (see Figure 7-111).
Parameter: Target voltage 1 w1

Default setting (_:15601:112) Target voltage 1 w1 = 440.00 kV
Only Grid Coupling Transformer:
With this parameter, you specify the number of available target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2). You can
select a target voltage from the available ones via the function key, the communication, or a binary input.
NOTE
You can specify the target voltages (1 W1/2 to 4 W1/2) in primary, secondary, or in percent.
For the activation of the target voltages 1 to 4 via a binary input, you need a CFC chart (see Figure 7-111).

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

Voltage Controller
Parameter: Bandwidth
Default setting (_:113) Bandwidth = 1.0 %
With the Bandwidth parameter, you specify the voltage range where no control action higher or lower is to
occur about the Target voltage 1. If the actual voltage is outside the bandwidth referenced to the
Target voltage 1, no correction takes place.
Calculation of the Bandwidth:
NOTE
i When calculating the Bandwidth B, keep the maximum accepted voltage deviation in the electrical power
system and the tap voltage of the tap changer on the secondary side of the transformer in mind.
Calculation of the minimum bandwidth:
[fospnvrz-211013, 1, en_US]
Vrated,sec Secondary rated voltage of the transformer

VNprim Primary tap voltage of the transformer of tap N
V(N-1)prim Primary tap voltage of the transformer of tap N-1
Vmax,prim Maximum primary voltage of the transformer
Parameter: T1 characteristic
Default setting (_:114) T1 characteristic = Linear
Parameter: T1 delay
Default setting (_:115) T1 delay = 40 s
You can adjust the control action so that the smallest number of adjusting commands possible is necessary.
To do this, using T1 characteristic, you set the control response and, using T1 delay, you set a time
delay.
In the Linear setting (linear control response), the control response is independent of the voltage deviation.
A constant time delay applies here.
In the Inverse setting (inverse control response), the time delay is a function of the voltage deviation refer-
enced to Target voltage 1. The greater the control deviation, the faster the control response. The control
quality improves, but the switching frequency increases. The effective time delay results from:
[fovrzzet-211013, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
T1 Parameter T1 delay
[fokonisk-211013, 2, en_US]
D = Control deviation
[dwrglchr-160913-01.vsd, 2, en_US]
Figure 7-112 Inverse Control Characteristic
Parameter: T1 Inverse Min

Default setting (_:116) T1 Inverse Min = 5 s
The T1 Inverse Min parameter is used to define the minimum time delay for the control action. This time
applies only to the control response Inverse and the response cannot be less than the time.
Parameter: T2 delay
Default setting (_:117) T2 delay = 5 s
With the T2 delay parameter, you set the time the tap changer has to wait from one tap position to the next.
During this time, several adjusting commands can be sent to the tap changer in one direction, which permits
a correction of the actual voltage. The time delay T2 has an independent characteristic. The time T2 is gener-
ally set shorter than the time T1. If the time T2 is switched off by a setting equal to 0, the delay T1 is always
active.
Parameter: Regulate with T2 at start
Default setting (_:14011:155) Regulate with T2 at start = on
With the Regulate with T2 at start parameter, you can activate a shorter time than T1. This can be
necessary for controlling after a a voltage recovery or after switching on a transformer. If no voltage was
available before, this setting controls with the shorter time T2 when starting the control action. You can switch
this functionality on or off.
For the three-winding transformer, the address of the Regulate with T2 at start parameter is
_:15601:163. For the grid coupling transformer, the address is _:16351:163.
Parameter: Fast step down
Default setting (_:121) Fast step down = on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: Fast step down limit

Default setting (_:122) Fast step down limit = 6.0 %
Parameter: Fast step down T delay
Default setting (_:123) Fast step down T delay = 0.0 s
With this parameter, you can specify the time delay of the fast step down mode. If the actual voltage is
greater than the value of the limit for the fast step down mode (_:122), the fast step-down mode is activated. If
the voltage limit is exceeded for only a brief period within the time delay, a fast step down mode is not acti-
vated .
Parameter: Fast step up
Default setting (_:118) Fast step up = off
Parameter: Fast step up limit
Default setting (_:119) Fast step up limit = 6.0 %
Parameter: Fast step up T delay
Default setting (_:120) Fast step up T delay = 2.0 s
With this parameter, you can specify the time delay of the fast step up mode. If the actual voltage is less than
the value of the limit for the fast step up mode (_:119), the fast step up mode is activated. If the value drops
below the voltage limit for only a brief period within the time delay, a fast step up mode is not activated.
Parameter: Function monitoring
Default setting (_:124) Function monitoring = 15 min
You can delay the pickup of the function monitor. With the setting Function monitoring = 0 min, the
function monitor is switched off.
Voltage Controller Only Grid Coupling Transformer

Parameter: Power-flow supervision
Default setting (_:16351:162) Power-flow supervision = on
With the Power-flow supervision parameter, you can monitor the power flow. You can switch the
parameter on or off.
Line Compensation for the Two-Winding Transformers

Parameter: Line drop compensation
Default setting (_:14011:125) Line drop compensation = off
You can use the Line drop compensation parameter to select the correction procedure of the load-
dependent line voltage drop. There are 2 procedures available for selection: LDC-Z and LDC-XandR.
Consider the following parameter for setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z:
Parameter: Target voltage rising
Default setting (_:14011:126) Target voltage rising = 4.0 %
With the Target voltage rising parameter, you set the voltage drop across the line. The value repre-
sents the voltage increase in % of the Target voltage 1 that occurs at rated load. Only the magnitude of
the current is considered. The set value is added to the Target voltage 1.
Target voltage rising [%] = Vload [%] if Iload = 100 %
[foschlst-211013, 1, en_US]
VSetComp Target voltage at the end of the line

VSet Target voltage
Iload Load current in %
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: Max load current

Default setting (_:14011:127) Max load current = 100.0 %
With the setting of the parameter Max load current, you can prevent the voltage at the transformer from
becoming too high in the event of extraordinarily high load current. If the load current exceeds the set value,
no additional load-current compensation is calculated.
Consider the following parameter for setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR:
Parameter: R line
Default setting (_:14011:153) R line = 0.0
With the R line parameter, you set the ohmic resistance of the line.
Parameter: X line
Default setting (_:14011:154) X line = 0.0
With the X line parameter, you set the reactance for the line to be protected.
In order to determine the voltage drop by the line, entering the parameter R line and X line is necessary
for the procedure Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR. If the primary values are known and you
would like to set the secondary values, use the following formula for the calculation
[fo-I-V-Ratio-250214, 1, en_US]
As an example, calculate Xsec with the following parameters:
Current transformer ratio : 1000 A/1 A

Voltage transformer ratio : 380 kV/0.1 kV
Xprim : 21
Therefore, the result for Xsec is:
[fo-I-V-Ratio_Value-250214, 1, en_US]
If you are implementing a parallel control with the X and R compensation, then the X value is negative and
considers the voltage increase from the busbar to the transformer.
Line Compensation for the Three-Winding Transformers and Grid Coupling Transformers
Parameter: Line drop compensation
Default setting (_:125) Line drop compensation = off
Consider the following parameter for setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-Z:
Parameter: Target voltage rising w1
Default setting (_:126) Target voltage rising w1 = 4.0 %
Parameter: Target voltage rising w2
Default setting (_:147) Target voltage rising w2 = 4.0 %
Parameter: Max load current
Default setting (_:127) Max load current = 100.0 %
Consider the following parameter for setting the parameter Line drop compensation = LDC-XandR:
Parameter: R line w1
Default setting (_:153) R line w1 = 0.0
Parameter: R line w2
Default setting (_:155) R line w2 = 0.0
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
Parameter: X line w1
Default setting (_:154) X line w1 = 0.0
Parameter: X line w2
Default setting (_:156) X line w2 = 0.0
Limiting Values for the Two-Winding Transformers
Parameter: Lower tap-position limit
Default setting (_:14011:102) Lower tap-position limit = 1
Parameter: Higher tap-position limit
Default setting (_:14011:103) Higher tap-position limit = 15
With the parameters Lower tap-position limit and Higher tap-position limit, you can restrict
the taps available in automatic operation. For example, using the parameter Higher tap-position
limit, changes to higher taps to excessive ratios that would result in overvoltages in the event of a sudden
loss of load are blocked.
Parameter: Vmin limiting
Default setting (_:14011:128) Vmin limiting = on
Parameter: Vmin threshold
Default setting (_:14011:129) Vmin threshold = 420.00 kV
Parameter: Vmin time delay
Default setting (_:14011:130) Vmin time delay = 10 s
Parameter: Vmax limiting
Default setting (_:14011:131) Vmax limiting = on
Parameter: Vmax threshold
Default setting (_:14011:132) Vmax threshold = 460.00 kV
Parameter: Vmax time delay
Default setting (_:14011:133) Vmax time delay = 10 s
The voltage limits are necessary only for special control situations. The overvoltage limit prevents a change to
a higher tap by the controller if the limiting value Vmax threshold is exceeded. The undervoltage limit
prevents a change to a lower tap by the controller if the voltage drops below the limiting value Vmin
threshold.
Limiting Values for the Three-Winding Transformers and Grid Coupling Transformers
Parameter: Vmin threshold w1
Default setting (_:129) Vmin threshold w1 = 420.00 kV
Parameter: Vmin threshold w2
Default setting (_:148) Vmin threshold w2 = 420.00 kV
Parameter: Vmax threshold w1
Default setting (_:132) Vmax threshold w1 = 460.00 kV
Parameter: Vmax threshold w2
Default setting (_:149) Vmax threshold w2 = 460.00 kV
Blockings for the Two-Winding Transformers
Parameter: Blocking behavior
Default setting (_:14011:134) Blocking behavior = Auto-Manual
If the corresponding voltage limits are exceeded in either direction, the blockings prevent a change to a lower
or higher tap. On the one hand, this prevents excessive wear of the contacts of the tap changer and, on the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions
other hand, it prevents a system incident. With the parameter Blocking behavior, you set whether these
blockings are effective only in automatic operation or in both automatic and manual operation.
Parameter: V< Blocking
Default setting (_:14011:135) V< Blocking = on
Parameter: V< Threshold
Default setting (_:14011:136) V< Threshold = 90.000 V
Parameter: V< Time delay
Default setting (_:14011:137) V< Time delay = 0 s
Parameter: I> Blocking
Default setting (_:14011:138) I> Blocking = on
Parameter: I> Threshold
Default setting (_:14011:139) I> Threshold = 150 %
Parameter: I> Time delay
Default setting (_:14011:140) I> Time delay = 0 s
If the load current exceeds the threshold value I> Threshold for the time I> Time delay, the overcur-
rent blocking prevents changing to a higher or lower tap. Set the threshold value I> Threshold in % in rela-
tion to the rated current. To do this, set the parameter I reference for % values.
Parameter: I< Blocking
Default setting (_:14011:141) I< Blocking = off
Parameter: I< Threshold
Default setting (_:14011:142) I< Threshold = 10 %
Parameter: I< Time delay
Default setting (_:14011:143) I< Time delay = 10 s
If the load current drops below the threshold value I< Threshold for the time I< Time delay, the under-
current blocking prevents changing to a higher or lower tap. Set the threshold value I< Threshold in % in
relation to the rated current. To do this, set the parameter I reference for % values.
Blockings for the Three-Winding Transformers and Grid Coupling Transformers

Parameter: V< Threshold w1
Default setting (_:136) V< Threshold w1 = 360.00 kV
Parameter: V< Threshold w2
Default setting (_:150) V< Threshold w2 = 360.00 kV
7.8.5 Settings
Two-Winding Transformer

Ref. for %-values
_:2311:101 General:Rated current 0.20 A to 100000.00 A 1000.00 A
Tap changer
_:13981:111 Tap changer:Maximum 0.02 s to 1800.00 s 1.50 s
output time
_:13981:112 Tap changer:Supervi- off alarm block
alarm block
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:13981:113 Tap changer:Motor 5 s to 100 s 10 s
supervision time
_:13981:116 Tap changer:Highest tap Lowest voltage tap Lowest voltage
_:13981:114 Tap changer:Lowest tap -64 to 64 1
position
_:13981:115 Tap changer:Highest tap -64 to 64 15
position
General
_:14011:1 90V V.contr.2w:Mode off on
on
test
_:14011:101 90V V.contr.2w:Oper- Manual Manual
ating mode Auto
Control
_:14011:107 90V V.contr.2w:Check no yes
_:14011:109 90V V.contr.2w:Control direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
model SBO w. normal secur. security
_:14011:110 90V V.contr.2w:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:14011:111 90V V.contr.2w:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
back monitoring time
Voltage Control
_:14011:156 90V V.contr.2w:Number 1 1
of target voltage 2
3
4
_:14011:112 90V V.contr.2w:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1
voltage 2
voltage 3
voltage 4
_:14011:113 90V V.contr.2w:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:14011:114 90V V.contr.2w:T1 char- Linear Linear
acteristic Inverse
_:14011:115 90V V.contr.2w:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:14011:116 90V V.contr.2w:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:14011:117 90V V.contr.2w:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:14011:118 90V V.contr.2w:Fast off off
step up on
_:14011:119 90V V.contr.2w:Fast -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
step up limit
_:14011:120 90V V.contr.2w:Fast 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
step up T delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:14011:121 90V V.contr.2w:Fast off on
step down on
_:14011:122 90V V.contr.2w:Fast 0.0 % to 50.0 % 6.0 %
step down limit
step down T delay
_:14011:124 90V V.contr.2w:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:14011:155 90V V.contr.2w:Regu- off on
late with T2 at start on
_:14011:160 90V V.contr.2w:Set point off on
mode active on
Line drop comp.
_:14011:125 90V V.contr.2w:Line off off
drop compensation LDC-Z
LDC-XandR
_:14011:126 90V V.contr.2w:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising
_:14011:127 90V V.contr.2w:Max 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
load current
_:14011:153 90V V.contr.2w:R line 0.0 to 30.0 0.0
_:14011:154 90V V.contr.2w:X line -30.0 to 30.0 0.0
Limiting
_:14011:102 90V V.contr.2w:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:14011:103 90V V.contr.2w:Higher -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:14011:128 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin off on
limiting on
_:14011:129 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold
_:14011:130 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:14011:131 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax off on
limiting on
_:14011:132 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold
_:14011:133 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:14011:134 90V V.contr.2w:Blocking Auto Auto-Manual
behavior Auto-Manual
_:14011:135 90V V.contr.2w:V< off on
Blocking on
_:14011:136 90V V.contr.2w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold
_:14011:137 90V V.contr.2w:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:14011:138 90V V.contr.2w:I> off on
Blocking on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:14011:139 90V V.contr.2w:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:14011:140 90V V.contr.2w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:14011:141 90V V.contr.2w:I< off off
Blocking on
_:14011:142 90V V.contr.2w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:14011:143 90V V.contr.2w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay
Three-Winding Transformer

Winding 1
Winding 2
Tap changer
output time
alarm block
supervision time
position
position
General
_:15601:1 90V V.contr.3w:Mode off on
on
test
_:15601:101 90V V.contr.3w:Oper- Manual Manual
ating mode Auto
_:15601:157 90V V.contr.3w:Winding Winding 1 Winding 1
selection Winding 2
WithMaxLoad
_:15601:161 90V V.contr.3w:Winding Winding 1 Winding 1
selection Winding 2
Control
_:15601:107 90V V.contr.3w:Check no yes
_:15601:109 90V V.contr.3w:Control direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:15601:110 90V V.contr.3w:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:15601:111 90V V.contr.3w:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
Voltage Control
_:15601:164 90V V.contr.3w:Number 1 1
of target voltage 2
3
4
voltage 1 w1
voltage 2 w1
voltage 3 w1
voltage 4 w1
voltage 1 w2
voltage 2 w2
voltage 3 w2
voltage 4 w2
_:15601:113 90V V.contr.3w:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:15601:114 90V V.contr.3w:T1 char- Linear Linear
acteristic Inverse
_:15601:115 90V V.contr.3w:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:15601:116 90V V.contr.3w:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:15601:117 90V V.contr.3w:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:15601:118 90V V.contr.3w:Fast off off
step up on
_:15601:119 90V V.contr.3w:Fast -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
step up limit
step up T delay
_:15601:121 90V V.contr.3w:Fast off on
step down on
_:15601:122 90V V.contr.3w:Fast 0.0 % to 50.0 % 6.0 %
step down limit
step down T delay
_:15601:124 90V V.contr.3w:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:15601:162 90V V.contr.3w:Power- off on
flow supervision on
_:15601:163 90V V.contr.3w:Regu- off on
late with T2 at start on
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:15601:171 90V V.contr.3w:Set point off on
mode active on
Line drop comp.
_:15601:125 90V V.contr.3w:Line off off
drop compensation LDC-Z
LDC-XandR
voltage rising w1
voltage rising w2
_:15601:127 90V V.contr.3w:Max 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
load current
w1
w1
w2
w2
Limiting
_:15601:102 90V V.contr.3w:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:15601:103 90V V.contr.3w:Higher -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:15601:128 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin off on
limiting on
threshold w1
threshold w2
_:15601:130 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:15601:131 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax off on
limiting on
threshold w1
threshold w2
_:15601:133 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:15601:134 90V V.contr.3w:Blocking Auto Auto-Manual
_:15601:135 90V V.contr.3w:V< off on
Blocking on
_:15601:136 90V V.contr.3w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w1
_:15601:150 90V V.contr.3w:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:15601:137 90V V.contr.3w:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:15601:138 90V V.contr.3w:I> off on
Blocking on
_:15601:139 90V V.contr.3w:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:15601:140 90V V.contr.3w:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:15601:141 90V V.contr.3w:I< off off
Blocking on
_:15601:142 90V V.contr.3w:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:15601:143 90V V.contr.3w:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay
Grid Coupling Transformer

Winding 1
Winding 2
Tap changer
output time
alarm block
supervision time
position
position
General
_:16351:1 90V V.contr.gc:Mode off on
on
test
_:16351:101 90V V.contr.gc:Oper- Manual Manual
ating mode Auto
_:16351:157 90V V.contr.gc:Winding Winding 1 Winding 1
selection Winding 2
WithMaxLoad
_:16351:161 90V V.contr.gc:Winding Winding 1 Winding 1
selection Winding 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

Control
_:16351:107 90V V.contr.gc:Check no yes
_:16351:109 90V V.contr.gc:Control direct w. normal secur. SBO w. enh.
_:16351:110 90V V.contr.gc:SBO 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 30.00 s
time-out
_:16351:111 90V V.contr.gc:Feed- 0.01 s to 1800.00 s 10.00 s
Voltage Control
_:16351:164 90V V.contr.gc:Number 1 1
of target voltage 2
3
4
_:16351:112 90V V.contr.gc:Target 10.000 V to 340.000 V 110.000 V
voltage 1 w1
voltage 2 w1
voltage 3 w1
voltage 4 w1
voltage 1 w2
voltage 2 w2
voltage 3 w2
voltage 4 w2
_:16351:113 90V V.contr.gc:Band- 0.2 % to 10.0 % 1.0 %
width
_:16351:114 90V V.contr.gc:T1 char- Linear Linear
acteristic Inverse
_:16351:115 90V V.contr.gc:T1 delay 5 s to 600 s 40 s
_:16351:116 90V V.contr.gc:T1 5 s to 100 s 5s
Inverse Min
_:16351:117 90V V.contr.gc:T2 delay 0 s to 100 s 5s
_:16351:118 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step off off
up on
_:16351:119 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step -50.0 % to 0.0 % -6.0 %
up limit
_:16351:120 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 2.0 s
up T delay
_:16351:121 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step off on
down on
_:16351:122 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 % to 50.0 % 6.0 %
down limit
_:16351:123 90V V.contr.gc:Fast step 0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
down T delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:16351:124 90V V.contr.gc:Function 0 min to 120 min 15 min
monitoring
_:16351:162 90V V.contr.gc:Power- off on
flow supervision on
_:16351:163 90V V.contr.gc:Regulate off on
with T2 at start on
_:16351:171 90V V.contr.gc:Set point off on
mode active on
Line drop comp.
_:16351:125 90V V.contr.gc:Line drop off off
compensation LDC-Z
LDC-XandR
_:16351:126 90V V.contr.gc:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w1
_:16351:147 90V V.contr.gc:Target 0.0 % to 20.0 % 4.0 %
voltage rising w2
_:16351:127 90V V.contr.gc:Max load 0.0 % to 500.0 % 100.0 %
current
_:16351:153 90V V.contr.gc:R line w1 0.0 to 30.0 0.0
_:16351:154 90V V.contr.gc:X line w1 -30.0 to 30.0 0.0
_:16351:155 90V V.contr.gc:R line w2 0.0 to 30.0 0.0
_:16351:156 90V V.contr.gc:X line w2 -30.0 to 30.0 0.0
Limiting
_:16351:102 90V V.contr.gc:Lower -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:16351:103 90V V.contr.gc:Higher -128 to 127 1
tap-position limit
_:16351:128 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin off on
limiting on
_:16351:129 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w1
_:16351:148 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 10.000 V to 340.000 V 105.000 V
threshold w2
_:16351:130 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
_:16351:131 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax off on
limiting on
_:16351:132 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w1
_:16351:149 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 10.000 V to 340.000 V 115.000 V
threshold w2
_:16351:133 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 0 s to 20 s 10 s
time delay
Blocking
_:16351:134 90V V.contr.gc:Blocking Auto Auto-Manual
_:16351:135 90V V.contr.gc:V< off on
Blocking on
_:16351:136 90V V.contr.gc:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

_:16351:150 90V V.contr.gc:V< 10.000 V to 340.000 V 90.000 V
Threshold w2
_:16351:137 90V V.contr.gc:V< Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:16351:138 90V V.contr.gc:I> off on
Blocking on
_:16351:139 90V V.contr.gc:I> 10 % to 500 % 150 %
Threshold
_:16351:140 90V V.contr.gc:I> Time 0 s to 20 s 0s
delay
_:16351:141 90V V.contr.gc:I< off off
Blocking on
_:16351:142 90V V.contr.gc:I< 3 % to 100 % 10 %
Threshold
_:16351:143 90V V.contr.gc:I< Time 0 s to 20 s 10 s
delay
7.8.6 Information
Two-Winding Transformer

(Type)
General
Tap changer
_:13981:500 Tap changer:>Acquisition blocking SPS I
_:13981:501 Tap changer:>Enable SPS I
_:13981:53 Tap changer:Health ENS O
_:13981:301 Tap changer:End higher pos.reached SPS O
_:13981:302 Tap changer:End lower pos.reached SPS O
_:13981:308 Tap changer:Position BSC C
_:13981:305 Tap changer:Higher command SPS O
_:13981:306 Tap changer:Lower command SPS O
_:13981:307 Tap changer:Command active SPS O
_:13981:309 Tap changer:Motor sup. time expired SPS O
_:13981:310 Tap changer:Trigger motor prot. sw. SPS O
_:13981:311 Tap changer:Position failure SPS O
_:13981:312 Tap changer:Op.ct. INS O
_:13981:319 Tap changer:Reset failure SPC C
90V V.contr.2w
_:14011:81 90V V.contr.2w:>Block SPS I
_:14011:85 90V V.contr.2w:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:14011:53 90V V.contr.2w:Health ENS O
_:14011:54 90V V.contr.2w:Inactive SPS O
_:14011:52 90V V.contr.2w:Behavior ENS O
_:14011:301 90V V.contr.2w:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:14011:302 90V V.contr.2w:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
_:14011:326 90V V.contr.2w:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:14011:329 90V V.contr.2w:Block auto SPC C
_:14011:312 90V V.contr.2w:Operating mode SPC C
_:14011:305 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:14011:306 90V V.contr.2w:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:14011:307 90V V.contr.2w:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:14011:308 90V V.contr.2w:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:14011:309 90V V.contr.2w:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:14011:310 90V V.contr.2w:Vmin Limiting SPS O
_:14011:311 90V V.contr.2w:Vmax Limiting SPS O
_:14011:315 90V V.contr.2w:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:14011:316 90V V.contr.2w:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:14011:317 90V V.contr.2w:V< Blocking SPS O
_:14011:318 90V V.contr.2w:I> Blocking SPS O
_:14011:319 90V V.contr.2w:I< Blocking SPS O
_:14011:320 90V V.contr.2w:V act. MV O
_:14011:322 90V V.contr.2w:I load MV O
_:14011:323 90V V.contr.2w:V max MV O
_:14011:324 90V V.contr.2w:V min MV O
_:14011:325 90V V.contr.2w:V target MV O
_:14011:354 90V V.contr.2w:Target voltage 1 SPC C
_:14011:358 90V V.contr.2w:Set target voltage APC C
Three-Winding Transformer

(Type)
General
Tap changer
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
90V V.contr.3w
_:15601:81 90V V.contr.3w:>Block SPS I
_:15601:85 90V V.contr.3w:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:15601:53 90V V.contr.3w:Health ENS O
_:15601:54 90V V.contr.3w:Inactive SPS O
_:15601:52 90V V.contr.3w:Behavior ENS O
_:15601:301 90V V.contr.3w:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:15601:302 90V V.contr.3w:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:15601:332 90V V.contr.3w:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:15601:335 90V V.contr.3w:Block auto SPC C
_:15601:336 90V V.contr.3w:Operating mode SPC C
_:15601:305 90V V.contr.3w:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:15601:306 90V V.contr.3w:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:15601:307 90V V.contr.3w:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:15601:308 90V V.contr.3w:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:15601:309 90V V.contr.3w:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:15601:357 90V V.contr.3w:Power-flow superv. SPS O
_:15601:310 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O
_:15601:311 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O
_:15601:312 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O
_:15601:313 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O
_:15601:314 90V V.contr.3w:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:15601:315 90V V.contr.3w:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:15601:316 90V V.contr.3w:V< Blocking w1 SPS O
_:15601:317 90V V.contr.3w:V< Blocking w2 SPS O
_:15601:318 90V V.contr.3w:I> Blocking SPS O
_:15601:319 90V V.contr.3w:I< Blocking SPS O
_:15601:320 90V V.contr.3w:Vact.w1 MV O
_:15601:321 90V V.contr.3w:Vact.w2 MV O
_:15601:323 90V V.contr.3w:I load w1 MV O
_:15601:324 90V V.contr.3w:I load w2 MV O
_:15601:325 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 1 MV O
_:15601:326 90V V.contr.3w:Vmax 2 MV O
_:15601:327 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 1 MV O
_:15601:328 90V V.contr.3w:Vmin 2 MV O
_:15601:329 90V V.contr.3w:V tar.w1 MV O
_:15601:330 90V V.contr.3w:V tar.w2 MV O
_:15601:358 90V V.contr.3w:Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
_:15601:366 90V V.contr.3w:Set target voltage w1 APC C
_:15601:367 90V V.contr.3w:Set target voltage w2 APC C
Grid Coupling Transformer

(Type)
General
Tap changer
90V V.contr.gc
_:16351:81 90V V.contr.gc:>Block SPS I
_:16351:85 90V V.contr.gc:>Reset min./max. SPS I
_:16351:53 90V V.contr.gc:Health ENS O
_:16351:54 90V V.contr.gc:Inactive SPS O
_:16351:52 90V V.contr.gc:Behavior ENS O
_:16351:301 90V V.contr.gc:End Higher pos. Auto SPS O
_:16351:302 90V V.contr.gc:End Lower pos. Auto SPS O
_:16351:332 90V V.contr.gc:Cmd. with feedback BSC C
_:16351:335 90V V.contr.gc:Block auto SPC C
_:16351:336 90V V.contr.gc:Operating mode SPC C
_:16351:305 90V V.contr.gc:Bandwidth > SPS O
_:16351:306 90V V.contr.gc:Bandwidth < SPS O
_:16351:307 90V V.contr.gc:Fast Step Up active SPS O
_:16351:308 90V V.contr.gc:Fast Step Down active SPS O
_:16351:309 90V V.contr.gc:Auto Monitor SPS O
_:16351:357 90V V.contr.gc:Power-flow superv. SPS O
_:16351:310 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin Limiting w1 SPS O
_:16351:311 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin Limiting w2 SPS O
_:16351:312 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax Limiting w1 SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Control Functions

(Type)
_:16351:313 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax Limiting w2 SPS O
_:16351:314 90V V.contr.gc:Auto Blocking SPS O
_:16351:315 90V V.contr.gc:Manual Blocking SPS O
_:16351:316 90V V.contr.gc:V< Blocking w1 SPS O
_:16351:317 90V V.contr.gc:V< Blocking w2 SPS O
_:16351:318 90V V.contr.gc:I> Blocking SPS O
_:16351:319 90V V.contr.gc:I< Blocking SPS O
_:16351:320 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w1 MV O
_:16351:321 90V V.contr.gc:Vact.w2 MV O
_:16351:322 90V V.contr.gc:V act. MV O
_:16351:323 90V V.contr.gc:I load w1 MV O
_:16351:324 90V V.contr.gc:I load w2 MV O
_:16351:325 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 1 MV O
_:16351:326 90V V.contr.gc:Vmax 2 MV O
_:16351:327 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 1 MV O
_:16351:328 90V V.contr.gc:Vmin 2 MV O
_:16351:329 90V V.contr.gc:V tar.w1 MV O
_:16351:330 90V V.contr.gc:V tar.w2 MV O
_:16351:358 90V V.contr.gc:Target voltage 1 w1 SPC C
_:16351:366 90V V.contr.gc:Set target voltage w1 APC C
_:16351:367 90V V.contr.gc:Set target voltage w2 APC C
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8 Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview 1330

8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision 1331
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System 1336
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware 1376
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware 1381
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration 1382
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections 1383
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures 1384
8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts 1391
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Supervision Functions
8.1 Overview
8.1 Overview
SIPROTEC 5 devices are equipped with an extensive and integrated supervision concept. Continuous super-
vision:
Ensures the availability of the technology used
Avoids subfunction and overfunction of the device
Protects persons and primary technical devices
Offers effective assistance during commissioning and testing

The following areas are monitored:
Supervision the resource consumption of the application
Supervision of the secondary system
Supervision of device hardware
Supervision of device firmware
Supervision of hardware configuration
Supervision of communication connections

When the supervision functions pick up, that will be displayed and also indicated. Error responses are defined
for the device. The error responses are grouped in defect severities.
The supervision functions work selectively. When the supervision functions pick up - as far as possible - only
the affected parts of the hardware and firmware are blocked. If this is not possible, the device goes out of
operation into a secure state (fallback mode). In addition to safety, this warrants a high degree of availability.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.2 Resource-Consumption Supervision
8.2.1 Load Model
SIPROTEC 5 devices are freely configurable. A load model is integrated in DIGSI 5. The load model prevents
you from overloading the device with an excessively large application.
The load model shows the device utilization and the response times for device functions. If it determines that
an application created is likely to overload the device, DIGSI prevents the application from being loaded into
the device.
In this rare case, you must then reduce the application in order to be able to load it into the device.
The load model can be found in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device Device information. In
the operating range, select the Resource consumption setting sheet. The following figure shows an example
of the view of the load model in DIGSI 5:
[sclastmo-141210-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-1 Visualization of the Load Model in DIGSI
A green total display for the processor response time indicates that the device is not overloaded by the
present application. On the other hand, if you see a red exclamation mark, the planned application is over-
loading the device.
The list below the total display shows the individual functional areas. These areas combine functions with the
same real-time requirements in groups. A green display in front of an area (see Figure 8-1) indicates that the
response times of the functions grouped in this area can be maintained. A red exclamation point indicates
that functions may have longer response times than are specified in the Technical data for the device. In such
a case, loading of the application into the device is blocked.
The following table provides an overview of the functional areas and the most important influencing quantities
on device utilization:
Functional Brief Description Change in Load
Area
CFC event- CFC charts that must be Adding or removing CFC charts in the fast event-triggered
triggered, fast processed especially fast (for process range
example, to invoke interlock- Create CFC chart
ings between protection func- Delete CFC chart
tions) Change the process range in the properties of the
CFC chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the fast event-trig-
gered process area
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Brief Description Change in Load

Area
Measuring Provision of measured values Adding or removing
points for protection, control, and Measuring points (in the Measuring-points routing
measurement functions Editor)
Function groups that provide measured-value prepro-
cessing for insertable functions (for example, Line
function group and Circuit-breaker function group)
FG Interaction between indi- Adding or removing
connec- vidual function groups, for Protection functions and their stages
tions example, between the Circuit-breaker function groups
Fast Line function group and Fast GOOSE connections
GOOSE the Circuit-breaker func-
tion group
Fast GOOSE communica-
tion
Protection Signal transmission via protec- Adding or removing
Communica- tion communication and differ- Communication modules for the protection interface
tion ential protection communica- (in the DIGSI 5 Hardware and logs view)
tion Routings to the protection interface
Functions of theLine differential protection
Line differen- Line differential protection Adding or removing differential protection functions
tial protection
Main protec- Protection functions with high Adding or removing
tion requirements for fast operate Functions and zones of the distance protection; func-
times tions and tripping stages of the ground-fault protection
Power-swing blocking, functions and tripping stages
of instantaneous high-current tripping
Backup protec- Protection functions with Adding or removing
tion average requirements for fast Functions and stages of overcurrent protection
operate times Synchronization Function
Other protec- Protection functions with low Adding or removing
tion requirements for fast operate Overload protection functions
times Functions and stages of voltage protection
All functions not listed previously
CFC event- CFC charts with a maximum Adding or removing CFC charts in the event-triggered
triggered, processing time of 40 ms process range
standard Create CFC chart
GOOSE Delete CFC chart
Change the process range in the properties of the
CFC chart
Add to or remove from CFC charts in the event-triggered
process area
Control Control and interlocking Adding or removing
Other CFC charts in the area of Function blocks for control and interlocking
contin- control, measured-value CFC charts in the control area
uous preprocessing, and event- Switching devices (except circuit breakers), for
function controlled example, disconnector function groups
chart Operational measured Operational measured values
Opera- values CFC charts in the measured values area
tional
measured
values
If the load model displays a warning, bear in mind the following general instructions:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The areas named in the table are listed in descending order of real time requirements. If a warning appears to
the effect that the guaranteed response times may be exceeded in an area, you may be able to return to the
permitted area by taking the following measures:
Reduce the functional scope in the marked area (red exclamation mark)
Reduce the functional scope in another area with higher real time requirements
When you have reduced the application, check the display in resource consumption! If a function or state has
been switched off, it will continue to represent a load for the area. If you do not need the function or stage,
delete it rather than switching it off.
Use the general Circuit-breaker function group only in the following cases:
Interaction with a protection-function group is essential.
That is, operate indications of protection functions cause the circuit breaker assigned to the Circuit-
breaker function group to be switched off.
You want to use functions such as the automatic reclosing function or circuit-breaker failure protection in
the Circuit-breaker function group.
If a circuit breaker is only to be modeled for control purposes, use the Circuit breaker [state only] function
group.
8.2.2 Function Points
When you order a SIPROTEC 5 device, you are also ordering a function-points account for use of additional
functions.
The following figure illustrates consumption of function points in the current application with respect to the
existing function-points account.
[scfpunkt-141210-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-2 Resource Overview: Function-Points Consumption
The remaining white bar shows the function points that have not yet been used up by your configuration. The
number of function points available in a device depends on the device purchase order (position 20 of the
product code). You can also order function points subsequently, and so increase the function-points account
for the device.
NOTE
i Find out the function-points requirement for the desired application before ordering the device. For this,
you can use the device configurator.
8.2.3 CFC Resources
Task Levels of the CFC Function

A CFC chart, and thus the configured CFC function, runs in the SIPROTEC 5 device on exactly one of the 4
task levels. The individual task levels differ, on the one hand, in the priority of processing tasks and, on the
other, in the cyclic or event-triggered processing of the CFC charts.
You can select between the following task levels:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Task Level Description

Fast Event-Triggered Use the Fast Event-Triggered task level for time-critical tasks, for
example, if a signal should block a protection function within 2 ms to 3 ms.
Functions on this task level are processed in an event-triggered way with
the highest priority. Each change to a logical input signal is immediately
processed. Processing can interrupt the execution of protection functions
and functions on the Event-Triggered task level.
Event-Triggered Use the Event-Triggered task level preferably for logic functions that
need not be executed with highest priority. Each change to a logical input
signal is immediately processed. Protection functions or functions on the
Fast event-triggered task level can disrupt processing.
Functions on the Event-Triggered task level are typically processed
within a maximum of 5 ms in all devices. For busbar protection or line
protection, the functions on the Event-Triggered task level are
processed within a maximum of 10 ms.
Measurement Use the Measurement task level for processing measured values. Func-
tions on this task level are processed cyclically every 500 ms.
Interlocking Use the Interlocking task level preferably for logic functions that should
be executed with lower priority than functions in the Event-Triggered
task level. If the available ticks of the Event-Triggered task level shown
in the following figure are sufficient for the required CFC functionality, you
do not need to use the Interlocking task level.
All CFC function blocks can be assigned to all the task levels. There are no device-specific function blocks. If
enough ticks are available, all CFC charts can be created in the same task level. A tick is the measure of the
performance requirement of CFC blocks.
The number of available ticks for each task is calculated depending on the created device configuration. This
calculation is based on the previously described load model. In this process, it is recommended to create all
selected functions and objects first followed by configuration of the CFC charts so that a realistic information
about the remaining system capacitance for CFC charts is available. Significantly exceeding the typical
response time is prevented by the load model by limiting the number of CFC function blocks in the corre-
sponding task level via the number of ticks available.
The typical response times for CFC tasks are listed in the Technical Data.
The following figure shows an example of the CFC chart capacitances in DIGSI calculated by the load model.
The ticks available for each task are shown here. The green bars represent the ticks used in the task levels.
You reach this dialog with the following call: Device Device information Resource consumption.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[sc-cfc-statistic, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-3 CFC Statistics
NOTE
i The fast-event-triggered CFC charts have the highest priority and are processed before all other tasks. At
this level, a considerable smaller number of ticks are available than at all other tasks. It is recommended to
configure only very-high-priority logic functions at this task and to configure the other logic functions in any
other level.
NOTE
i Empty CFC charts also consume system resources. Empty charts that are not required any more should
be deleted.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3 Supervision of the Secondary System
8.3.1 Overview
The secondary circuits establish a connection to the power system from the point of view of the device. The
measuring-input circuit (currents, voltages) as well as the command circuits to the circuit breakers are moni-
tored for the correct function of the device. The connection to the station battery is ensured with the supervi-
sion of the external auxiliary voltage. The secondary system has the following supervision systems:
Measuring circuits (voltage):
Measuring-Voltage Failure
Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker
Voltage balance
Voltage sum
Voltage rotating field

Measuring circuits (current):
Broken conductor of the current circuits
Current balance
Current sum
Current rotating field

Trip circuits
External auxiliary voltage
When these supervisions pick up, corresponding warning indications are output. Some supervisions lead
directly to the blocking of affected protection functions or to the marking of measuring points that have
become invalid, so that affected protection functions can go into a secure state.
A detailed description of the supervision mechanisms and their error responses can be found in the Function
Description and as overall overview at the end of chapter 8.
8.3.2 Measuring-Voltage Failure

The Measuring-voltage failure detection function monitors the voltage transformer secondary circuits:
Non-connected transformers
Pickup of the voltage transformer circuit breaker (in the event of short circuits in the secondary circuit)
Broken conductor in one or more measuring loops

All these events cause a voltage of 0 in the voltage transformer secondary circuits which can lead to failures
of the protection functions.
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in the case of a measuring-voltage failure:
Distance protection
Directional negative-sequence protection
Ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults in grounded-neutral systems

For the following protection functions, the response (block/not block) to a measuring-voltage failure can be
set within the function:
Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage

The function is part of protection function groups which are connected with a 3-phase voltage and current
measurement point.
[dwstrffm-210113-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The function is broken down into 3 subfunctions (see Figure 8-5):

Supervision for unbalanced measuring-voltage failure
Supervision for 3-phase measuring-voltage failure
Supervision for switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure
[lozusamm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-5 Breakdown of the Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection Function
Each subfunction creates its own monitoring indication. The function summarizes these indications via the
group indication Alarm.
The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in the specific protection-function
descriptions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.2.3 Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[looppode-200812-05.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-6 Logic Diagram Unbalanced Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
The criterion for detection of an unbalanced measuring-voltage failure is the voltage unbalance. This unbal-
ance is determined based on the ratio between negative and positive-sequence voltage. If the threshold value
is violated and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the monitoring picks up (see Figure 8-6). The indi-
cation Asym.fail.-inst.alarm is output.
The monitoring is released as soon as a certain minimum voltage is exceeded. This prevents a spurious
response in the presence of low voltage measurands or a measurand of 0 (for example, circuit breaker open).
Instantaneous monitoring also requires the presence of a minimum current. This prevents a spurious instan-
taneous pick up of the monitoring in the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current)
combined with a power-system incident.
If the voltage unbalance is blocked by unbalanced faults in the primary system, the supervision is blocked.
The device detects an unbalanced fault based on the ratio between negative and positive sequence current.
In the event of 1-pole automatic reclosing, the supervision is blocked.
Delay/Seal-In
In the presence of a weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current), certain protection functions require more
time for detection of a system incident. For this purpose, the monitoring of the Asym.fail. - time delay
parameter is allowed to delay.
If a system incident is detected during the time delay, the supervision drops off. This is because the function
assumes that the unbalance - and consequently the pickup of the supervision - is due to the system incident.
After the time delay has elapsed, it definitely assumes a measuring-voltage failure. The monitoring seals in
and the Asym.fail.-alarm indication is output. The dropout does not happen until the voltage unbalance
has disappeared after a seal-in time of 10 s. In the presence of 3-pole close-in faults, this seal-in time
prevents the monitoring from dropping off too quickly and thus releasing the protection functions.
The sealing-in function can be deactivated using the Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. parameter. As soon
as a system incident is detected, the monitoring drops off instantaneously.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Logic
[losymmet-190912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-7 Logic Diagram 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Balanced Fault VA, VB, VC <

A 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultaneously:
All 3 phase-to-ground voltages drop below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
A jump of the voltage (Signal jump V)
If these criteria are fulfilled and the monitoring is released and not blocked, the 3ph.failure-alarm indica-
tion is output. When the voltage returns (even as 1-phase), the monitoring drops out.
Release by Phase Current

When all phase currents exceed the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release the monitoring is
released.
If the device incorporates the distance-protection function, the device checks the input threshold value
3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release against the minimum current setting of the distance protection for plau-
sibility. The threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release must be set to less than or equal to the
release current of the distance protection.
More information can be found in section Distance protection 6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Blocking in the Case of a System Incident

In the case of a 3-phase system incident, supervision must be blocked. The device detects a 3-phase incident
with a jump in the current. This change is detected via the internal signal Jump I or when the change in
current of a phase current exceeds the threshold value 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump. The change in
current of phase currents is formed from the difference between the present current phasor and the current
phasor of the previous period. This allows to take into account a jump of the current phase.
NOTE
i If a voltage transformer circuit-breaker is installed in the secondary circuit of the voltage transformers, its
position is communicated to the device via a binary input (see chapter 8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions ).
8.3.2.5 Switching onto a 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure, Low Load
Logic
[lozuscha-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-8 Logic Diagram Switching to 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure
Switching onto a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is detected if the following criteria are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
All 3 phase-to-ground voltages have dropped below the threshold value 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < .
The circuit breaker is detected to be in closed position. The detection takes place either via the phase
currents or via the 1-pole closed signal, which is generated via the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts.
See Chapter Process monitor 5.1.4.1 Overview of Functions .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
A voltage jump such as in a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure with closed circuit-breaker (see chapter
8.3.2.4 3-Phase Measuring-Voltage Failure ) does not occur in the case of switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure. If the monitoring is not blocked, the time delay SO 3ph.fail. - time delay is
started. After the time has elapsed, the indication SO 3ph.failure-alarm is displayed. A dropout of the
monitoring is only possible by a recovery of the voltage.
The supervision is blocked as soon as a pickup of a protection function is detected within a protection func-
tion group and the time delay of the supervision has not yet elapsed.
This subfunction also covers the situation of a low load with 3-phase measuring-voltage failure and closed
circuit-breaker, because the circuit-breaker condition is also determined from the circuit-breaker auxiliary
contacts. The subfunction for detecting a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure (see chapter 8.3.2.4 3-Phase
Measuring-Voltage Failure ) is not released in this situation, for example, because the current flow is too low.
This subfunction can be switched on or off separately using the Switch-on 3ph. failure parameter.
Parameter: Asym.fail. - time delay
Recommended setting value (_:113) Asym.fail. - time delay = 10.00 s

The Asym.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the time during which a system incident
detected after the occurrence of the unbalance resets the monitoring. This setting is important in the case of
weak infeed (current < 10 % of rated current) in order to give certain protection functions (such as distance
protection) more time for detecting system incidents. As long as the time delay runs, it is assumed that the
unbalance is due to a system incident.
As soon as the time has elapsed, the supervision assumes a measuring-voltage failure and seals in.
If you want the seal-in function to operate sooner or at once, you can reduce the time.
Parameter: Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt.
Recommended setting value (_:115) Asym.fail.-DO on netw.flt. = No

no After elapse of the time delay the supervision function seals in. Even if the
system incident criterion is fulfilled, the protection functions concerned will
remain blocked.
This avoids an unselective tripping of the protection functions due to an
absence of the measuring voltage in the case of an unbalanced system
incident.
This is the default setting.
yes The seal-in function is switched off. The supervision drops out immediately
when a system incident is detected. With this setting, the unbalanced
measuring-voltage failure is only reported, and in the event of a double
failure (measuring-voltage failure and system incident in parallel), unselec-
tive tripping is preferred.
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC <
Recommended setting value (_:101) 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < = 5 V

The 3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < parameter allows you to set the pickup value of the monitoring.
If you expect major disturbances acting upon the voltage inputs, you can increase this value. Increasing the
values makes the supervision more sensitive to 3-phase system incidents.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release
Recommended setting value (_:102) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A

or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release parameter is used to define the phase current threshold above
which the monitoring is released.
If the device incorporates the Distance protection function, this value must be set to less than or equal to the
release current of the distance protection.
You can find more information in section Distance protection 6.6.2.1 Overview of Functions .
Parameter: 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump
Recommended setting value (_:103) 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or
0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The 3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump parameter is used to set the differential current between the present
current phasor and the stored phasor (from the previous period). If the value is exceeded, the function detects
a system incident and blocks the monitoring.
Parameter: SO 3ph.fail. - time delay
Recommended setting value (_:106) SO 3ph.fail. - time delay = 3.00 s

The SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter allows you to set the delay of the monitoring.
NOTE
i Adapt the SO 3ph.fail. - time delay parameter to the inherent time of protection functions which
are intended to block the monitoring function.
Note that with parameter values 0 s blocking of the monitoring function via a protection stimulation will not
be possible any more.

This parameter (_:4711:101) Operating mode and its settings are described in chapter Process
monitor .
You can find more information starting in chapter 5.2.7.1 Overview of Functions .
Parameter: Switch-on 3ph. failure
Recommended setting value (_:107) Switch-on 3ph. failure = on

on The subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-voltage failure is active.
In the case of low loads, the subfunction for detection of a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure is not released, for example, because the current flow
is too low. In this situation, the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase meas-
uring-voltage failure can perform the monitoring task.
Siemens recommends to switch that subfunction on.
off With the setting off the subfunction Switching to a 3-phase measuring-
voltage failure is not active.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.2.7 Settings

Mes.v.fail.det
_:1 Mes.v.fail.det:Mode off on
on
test
_:115 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.- no yes
DO on netw.flt. yes
_:113 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail. 0.00 s to 30.00 s 10.00 s
- time delay
_:102 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr.release 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:103 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
phs.curr. jump 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.fail. - 0.300 V to 340.000 V 5.000 V
VA,VB,VC <
_:107 Mes.v.fail.det:Switch-on off on
3ph. failure on
_:106 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 0.01 s to 30.00 s 3.00 s
3ph.fail. - time delay

(Type)
Mes.v.fail.det
_:82 Mes.v.fail.det:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Mes.v.fail.det:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Mes.v.fail.det:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Mes.v.fail.det:Health ENS O
_:300 Mes.v.fail.det:Alarm SPS O
_:304 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-inst.alarm SPS O
_:303 Mes.v.fail.det:Asym.fail.-alarm SPS O
_:301 Mes.v.fail.det:3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
_:302 Mes.v.fail.det:SO 3ph.failure-alarm SPS O
8.3.3 Signaling-Voltage Supervision

Signaling-voltage supervision is used to evaluate the validity of binary signals connected to the SIPROTEC
device via binary inputs. For this purpose, one binary input is used to monitor the signaling voltage. If the
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
signaling voltage fails, the associated binary signals are marked as invalid and a Signaling-voltage malfunc-
tion indication is issued.
Several signaling-voltage supervision groups can be created in one SIPROTEC device. Each of these groups
monitors an adjustable area with binary inputs.

The Signaling-voltage supervision function group contains, besides the general functionality, one preinstanti-
ated Supervision group stage. The Supervision group stage can be instantiated in DIGSI 5 multiple times.
[dwivsstr-060214-01.vsd, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-9 Structure/Embedding of the Function Group

You can instantiate the Signaling-voltage supervision function group in DIGSI from the global library. It
contains 1 pre-instantiated Supervision group function block (see the following figure). You can instantiate a
maximum of 25 supervision groups.
[sc_ivslib, 1, en_US]
Following the instantiation of the function group in the DIGSI project tree, it appears in the information routing
of DIGSI (see the following figure). The status indications of the supervision groups can be routed here, for
example, to existing binary outputs and/or logs.
[sc_ivsrou, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Set the binary input used for signaling-voltage supervision within one input/output module using the setting
option (see the following figure). This binary input monitors the presence of the signaling voltage. If the
signaling voltage fails, this sets the quality attribute for all other binary inputs of the parameterized input/
output module to invalid. The signal status of each of these binary inputs is frozen with its last valid value
prior to the occurrence of the fault. The quality attribute of the binary inputs for other input/output modules are
not taken into consideration by this.
If the signaling voltage again exceeds the binary threshold, the quality attribute of the binary inputs is reset to
valid.
[sc_ivsgrp, 1, en_US]
NOTE
i Each status change of the monitored binary inputs is delayed by 3 ms.
You can also combine binary inputs across modules in one Supervision group function block, and define any
binary input within this group for the supervision of the signaling voltage. For this purpose, place a check
mark at the parameter (_:102) Enable variable group when configuring the supervision group. This
extends the parameter menu by the sections Start supervision group and End supervision group (see the
following figure).
[sc_gruppe_de, 1, en_US]
There, for example, you are able to combine 1 to n different binary inputs into one supervision group. When
doing so, the binary inputs on the input/output modules assignable to a supervision group must be related
logically. With 3 input/output modules, for example, this allows only consecutive binary inputs to be grouped
on the modules 1+2 or 2+3, but no binary inputs on modules 1+3. The binary inputs used for supervision can
be located on any input/output module within the group defined in this manner.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
If you have to monitor several binary inputs that, for example, work with different signaling voltages from
different sources, then you can also instantiate and configure several Supervision group function blocks
within the Signaling-voltage supervision function group accordingly.
Within different supervision groups, only those consecutive binary inputs that are not already assigned to
another supervision group can be grouped. The overlapping of binary inputs in different supervision groups is
not permitted.
Example: There are 4 input/output modules. Binary inputs of input/output module 1+2 are already combined
in supervision group 1. The 2 last binary inputs on module 2 are not included in the grouping. Thus, only
these 2 binary inputs not used in the supervision group 1 of the input/output module 2 as well as, where appli-
cable, further consecutive binary inputs of input/output modules 3+4 can be combined in supervision group 2.
Error parameters are displayed to you by inconsistency indications in DIGSI.
Parameter (General): Mode
Default setting (_:1) Mode = on

With the Mode parameter, you specify whether you want to activate, deactivate, or test the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the appropriate group. If you put the group into test mode, the Sig. volt.
disturbed indication is given a test flag. If the supervision input drops out in test mode, the assigned inputs
retain their status without their quality attribute being set to invalid.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): I/O module ID
Default setting (_:104) I/O module ID = I/O module 1

Using the I/O module ID parameter, you specify the I/O module for which you want to activate signaling-
voltage supervision. Counting of the I/O modules starts in increasing order with the binary inputs of the base
module. The binary inputs of the PS201 power-supply module permanently installed in the base module
count as the 2nd I/O module followed by additional I/O modules (3 to n) in the expansion boards of the
device.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Binary input
Default setting (_:105) Binary input = 1

Using the Binary input parameter, you specify the binary input responsible for the supervision of the
signaling voltage for the parameterized I/O module. The quality attribute of all other binary inputs for this
module are set to valid or invalid depending on the presence of the signaling voltage at the parameterized
binary input.
Parameter (Supervision Signal): Enable variable group
Default setting (_:102) Enable variable group = untrue

You can activate the parameter Enable variable group by placing the check mark. If you have not set
the check mark (default setting), only these 2 parameters are available for the configuration of the supervision
signal. If you have set the check mark, the parameter menu is extended by the areas Start supervision group
and End supervision group. You can then use that to carry out the grouping of binary inputs for supervision
groups explained in the function description.
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the first I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the lowest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter (Start Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the lowest binary input for the first I/O module (see (_:106)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): I/O module ID

Parameter I/O module ID is used to define the last I/O module that you want to assign to a supervision
group. As the counting of the I/O module starts in ascending order with the binary inputs of the base module,
this is the module with the highest counter number that you can use for carrying out a grouping.
Parameter (End Supervision Group): Binary input

Parameter Binary input is used to define the highest binary input for the last I/O module (see (_:108)
I/O module ID) that you want to assign to a supervision group.
8.3.3.5 Settings

General
_:1 Superv.Grp.#:Mode off on
on
test
Superv. signal
_:104 Superv.Grp.#:I/O I/O module 1 I/O module 1
module ID I/O module 2
I/O module 3
I/O module 4
I/O module 5
I/O module 6
I/O module 7
I/O module 8
I/O module 9
I/O module 10
I/O module 11
I/O module 12
I/O module 13
I/O module 14
I/O module 15
_:105 Superv.Grp.#:Binary 1 to 256 1
input
_:102 Superv.Grp.#:Enable 0 false
variable group 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Supervis. grp. start
I/O module 3
I/O module 4
I/O module 5
I/O module 6
I/O module 7
I/O module 8
I/O module 9
I/O module 10
I/O module 11
I/O module 12
I/O module 13
I/O module 14
I/O module 15
input
Supervis. grp. end
I/O module 3
I/O module 4
I/O module 5
I/O module 6
I/O module 7
I/O module 8
I/O module 9
I/O module 10
I/O module 11
I/O module 12
I/O module 13
I/O module 14
I/O module 15
input

(Type)
Superv.Grp.#
_:52 Superv.Grp.#:Behavior ENS O
_:55 Superv.Grp.#:Sig. volt. disturbed SPS O
8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function detects the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
due to short circuits in the voltage-transformer secondary circuits.
The Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function works independently of Measuring-voltage failure detection
and should be used if possible in parallel to it.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The following protection functions are automatically blocked in cases of the tripping of the voltage-transformer
circuit breaker:
Distance protection
Directional negative-sequence protection
Ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults in grounded-neutral systems

For the following functions the reaction (block/not block) can be set within the function in cases of a tripping of
the voltage-transformer circuit breaker:
Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence voltage
Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage
Undervoltage protection with positive-sequence voltage

The Figure 8-10 shows the position of the function in the device. Every voltage measuring point contains the
Voltage-transformer circuit breaker function.
[dwmcbstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

The tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker is captured via the binary input signal >Open. With an
active input signal the information about the measuring-voltage failure is relayed to the affected functions (see
8.3.4.1 Overview of Functions ). The response to the detection of a measuring-voltage failure is explained in
the specific protection-function descriptions.
Response Time of the Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

The response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker can be slower than the pickup time of the
distance protection. This bears the risk of an overfunction. The response time is communicated to the device
with the Response time parameter. For a timely detection of the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit
breaker, the pickup of the distance protection is delayed by that response time.

The function is always active and need not be switched on.
Input Signal: >Open
Input signal: (_:500) >Open

The input signal >Open must be connected to the tripping of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker. As a rule,
this occurs via the routing to a binary input.
Parameter: Response time of the voltage-transformer circuit breaker
Recommended setting value (_:101) Response time = 0 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
When the voltage-transformer circuit breaker drops out, the device must block the distance protection imme-
diately to prevent an unwanted tripping of the distance protection due to the absence of the measuring
voltage while the load current is flowing.
The blocking must be faster than the 1st stage of the distance protection. This requires an extremely short
response time of the miniature circuit breaker ( 4 ms at 50 Hz, 3 ms at 60 Hz rated frequency). If the
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact does not fulfill this requirement, you have to set the response time accord-
ingly.
8.3.4.5 Settings

VT miniatureCB
_:101 VT miniatureCB:Response 0.00 s to 0.03 s 0.00 s
time

(Type)
Definite-T #
_:500 VT miniatureCB:>Open SPS I
8.3.5 Broken-Wire Detection

The purpose of the broken-wire detection is to detect interruptions in the secondary circuit of the current
transformers during steady-state operation. In addition to jeopardizing the secondary circuit by high voltages,
such interruptions can mimic the presence of differential currents for the differential protection, as caused by
short circuits in the protected object. To prevent overfunctions due to faulty current values, you can program
the affected protection functions to be blocked.

The Broken-wire detection function is structurally anchored in the power-system data as well and in various
protection function groups.
[dwbwsstr-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The Broken-wire detection function consists of several stages.

1. Broken wire suspected (power-system data)
The instantaneous values of all current measuring points are checked on a phase-selective basis for
implausible values.
The affected phases are marked with wire-break suspected.
Depending on the supervision mode, you can add a marker for blocking protection functions for the
affected phases.
After 10 ms of broken-wire check, the wire break is reliably signaled.

2. Broken-wire check (Protection function group)
Current phases suspected to have a broken wire are tested for plausibility using exclusion criteria.
A valid exclusion criterion resets the broken-wire suspicion and cancels any existing blocking of protec-
tion functions.
3. Broken-wire blocking (Protection-function group)
The Broken-wire blocking marker immediately leads to blocking of the protection functions that pick up
on unbalanced currents (for example, differential protection).
[lobwstr1-070311-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-12 Stages of the Broken-Wire Detection Function Using the Differential Protection
Broken-Wire Suspected
The Broken-wire detection function monitors the dynamic behavior of the currents of each phase and of all
measuring points. For this purpose, the instantaneous values of the currents are checked for their plausibility.
Each expected violation must be confirmed by additional criteria before a wire break can be detected and
signaled with assurance.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i If the secondary circuits of the current transformers are accidentally opened while the broken-wire detec-
tion is on, functions like the differential protection are blocked phase-segregated and no longer initiate trip-
ping. Hazardous overvoltages can be generated at the open circuit of the current transformer in this condi-
tion which are not eliminated because the differential protection is blocked.
The detection of the local broken-wire suspected is performed on each 3-phase current measuring point of
the device selectively for each phase. Depending on the protected object, the detection is based on perma-
nent (line differential protection) or frequency-adjusted instantaneous values (transformer differential protec-
tion).
Detection:
A wire break initially manifests itself as a sudden decrease of the current below the minimum threshold of
0.06 I/I rated. A plausibility test on one period of past instantaneous values confirms this condition. If the criteria
for the local wire break are satisfied, the affected phase is marked with Broken-wire suspected.
Resetting:
The broken-wire suspected is reset by phase current flowing again , by a reset criterion of the broken-wire
check or by a binary input signal. Binary resetting can be useful during laboratory tests among other applica-
tions.
Indication
If the broken-wire detection by the broken-wire check has not been reset within 10 ms, it will be indicated.
The indication is held stable for the duration of at least 3 periods.
Broken-Wire Check
To prevent unwanted pickup of this monitoring function caused by special operating conditions, for example
fault, maintenance, test, etc., a local broken-wire suspected must be confirmed by additional other criteria.
These criteria are checked on the level of the protection functions (Protection function group).
If at least one of the following criteria contradicting wire break is satisfied, the locally set broken-wire
suspected is reset including any associated protection blocking.
Local resetting criteria:
At least one protection function has picked up.
An assigned circuit-breaker is open.
A wire break is simultaneously detected at a different local current channel.
Jump detection on a local voltage channel (if voltage transformers exist)
Jump detection of the associated residual current
Jump detection on a different local current channel of the same phase without broken-wire suspected
Local overcurrent, that is, for at least one local phase applies Iph > 2 Irated
Reset criteria at the opposite end:

For the line differential protection, there are additional criteria of the opposite end that can contradict a local
broken-wire suspected and cause resetting. The request to reset is transmitted via the protection interface.
A wire break is simultaneously detected at a current channel of the opposite end.
Jump detection on a voltage channel of the opposite end (if voltage transformers exist)
Jump detection on a current channel of the opposite end
Local overcurrent at the opposite end, that is true for at least one phase Iph > 2 Irated
Blocking the Protection

The decision to block the protection and the determination of the local broken-wire suspected is performed
phase-segregated for each 3-phase current measuring point of the device. A central mode parameter of the
broken-wire detection (Mode) in the power-system data decides the blocking behavior.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
No blocking
A wire break is only signaled.
Blocking
Each broken-wire suspected must cause the affected protection functions to be blocked. Affected
phases are marked with protection blocked.
Automatic blocking
In addition to broken-wire suspected, you can make the blocking dependent on the criterion that the
maximum differential current of all phases does not exceed a settable threshold value Delta
value for autoblock for the differential protection. The phases to be blocked are marked.
Differential protection functions and protection functions that pick up on unbalanced currents are blocked.
Each individual protection function is responsible for the actual blocking and is described there, too.
Parameter: Mode
Recommended setting value (_:1) Mode = off

The Mode parameter is used to switch the broken-wire detection to on, off and test.
Parameter: Mode of blocking
Recommended setting value (_:101) Mode of blocking = blocking

The Mode of blocking parameter enables you to define the blocking condition (see Blocking the protec-
tion). Siemens recommends using the default setting. The setting options are blocking, auto blocking
and not blocking.
Parameter: Delta value for autoblock
Recommended setting value (_:102) Delta value for autoblock = 1.00 I/IN
With the Delta value for autoblock parameter you can make the blocking decision for protection func-
tions dependent on the amount of the differential current.
8.3.5.5 Settings

Brk.wire det.
_:1 Brk.wire det.:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Brk.wire det.:Mode of blocking blocking
blocking auto blocking
not blocking
_:102 Brk.wire det.:Delta value 0.004 to 5.000 1.000
for autoblock

(Type)
Brk.wire det.
_:82 Brk.wire det.:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Brk.wire det.:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Brk.wire det.:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Brk.wire det.:Health ENS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:301 Brk.wire det.:Phs A BW suspected SPS O
_:302 Brk.wire det.:Phs B BW suspected SPS O
_:303 Brk.wire det.:Phs C BW suspected SPS O
_:304 Brk.wire det.:Phase A broken wire SPS O
_:305 Brk.wire det.:Phase B broken wire SPS O
_:306 Brk.wire det.:Phase C broken wire SPS O
_:307 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire suspected SPS O
_:308 Brk.wire det.:Broken wire confirmed SPS O
8.3.6 Current-Balance Supervision

In healthy network operation, a certain balance between currents can be assumed.
The Current-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
Unbalance of phase currents in the secondary circuit
Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current meas-
uring point.
[dwstrsym-060611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The current balance is checked by a magnitude monitoring function. This function relates the smallest phase
current to the largest phase current. Unbalance is detected if
|Imin| / |Imax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Imax > Release threshold / IN.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[losymmke-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-14 Characteristic of the Current-Balance Supervision
Logic
[locbsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-15 Logic Diagram of the Current-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which unbalance in the phase currents is measured.
The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax) phase current.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax) with the parameter Release threshold. This
specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Operate delay
If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase current
exceeds the Release threshold, the tripping delay begins. If both conditions persist during this time, the
indication Failure is generated.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.5

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum
(Imax) phase current.
Parameter: Release threshold
Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 0.5 A for Irated = 1 A or 2.5
A for Irated = 5 A
The Release threshold parameter is used to set the lower limit of the maximum phase current (Imax).
Recommended setting value (_:6) Operate delay = 5.00 s

Set the Operate delay parameter so that overfunctions due to disturbing influences (such as switching
operations) are avoided.
8.3.6.5 Settings

Supv. balan. I
_:1 Supv. balan. I:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Supv. balan. I:Release 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 2.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.500 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 2.500 A
_:102 Supv. balan. I:Threshold 0.10 to 0.95 0.50
min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. I:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. balan. I
_:82 Supv. balan. I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. I:Failure SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.7 Voltage-Balance Supervision

In healthy system operation, a certain balance between voltages can be assumed.
The Voltage-balance supervision function detects the following errors:
Unbalance of phase-to-phase voltages in the secondary circuit
Connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Voltage-balance supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage meas-
uring point.
[dwstrusy-300913, 2, en_US]

The voltage balance is checked by a magnitude supervision function. This function relates the smallest
phase-to-phase voltage to the largest phase phase-to-phase voltage. Unbalance is detected if
|Vmin| / |Vmax| < Threshold min/max, as long as Vmax > Release threshold.
[lokenuns-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-17 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lospasym-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-18 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
The Threshold min/max parameter is the criterion by which a phase-to-phase voltage unbalance is
measured. The device calculates the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum (Vmax) phase-to-
phase voltage.
Enter the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage (Vmax) with the parameter Release
threshold. This specifies the lower limit of the operating range of this function.
Operate delay
If it falls below the balance factor Threshold min/max and at the same time the maximum phase-to-phase
voltage exceeds the Release threshold, the Operate delay begins. If both conditions persist during
this time, the indication Failure is generated.
Parameter: Threshold min/max
Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold min/max = 0.75

The Threshold min/max parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Vmin) and the maximum
(Vmax) phase-to-phase voltage. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Parameter: Release threshold
Recommended setting value (_:101) Release threshold = 50 V

With the Release threshold parameter you set the lower limit of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
(Vmax). Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

operations) are avoided. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
8.3.7.5 Settings

Supv. balan. V
_:1 Supv. balan. V:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 Supv. balan. V:Release 0.300 V to 170.000 V 50.000 V
threshold
_:102 Supv. balan. 0.58 to 0.95 0.75
V:Threshold min/max
_:6 Supv. balan. V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. balan. V
_:82 Supv. balan. V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. balan. V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. balan. V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. balan. V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. balan. V:Failure SPS O
8.3.8 Current-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all currents at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Current-sum supervision monitors the sum of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit.
For summation of the currents, the device requires the phase currents and the ground current of the current
transformer neutral point or of a separate ground-current transformer at this measuring point. The following
connection variants are available:
Current-transformer connections connected to 3 current transformers and the neutral point (see
Figure A-14 in the Attachment)
Ground current detected with 3 separate ground-current transformers (see Figure A-16 in the Attach-
ment)
3 current transformers and one summation current transformer connected (see Figure A-15 in the
Attachment)
2 current transformers and one summation current transformer connected (see Figure A-20 in the
Attachment)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i For current-sum supervision, the ground current of the line to be protected must be connected to the 4th
current measurement input (IN).

The Current-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current measure-
ment point.
[dwstrcss-300913, 2, en_US]

The current sum is generated by addition of the current phasors. Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl IN| > Threshold + Slope factor | I |.
[lokensum-300311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-20 Characteristic of the Current-Sum Supervision
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[locssumm-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-21 Logic Diagram of the Current-Sum Supervision
Slope of the Characteristic Curve

The Slope factor | I | part takes into account permissible current-proportional transformation errors of
the transformer, which can occur in the case of high short-circuit currents.
The Slope factor and Threshold parameters are used to set the fault-current limit (IFmax) for the
current-sum supervision. The device calculates this fault current limit with the formula:
IFmax = Threshold + Slope factor | I |
The device uses the current inputs (IA, IB, IC and IN) to calculate:
The fault current IF = |IA + IB + IC + kl IN|
The maximum current | I | = | IA| + |IB| +| IC| + |kl IN|
with kI taking into account a possible difference from the transformation ratio of a separated ground-current
transformer (IN), for example, cable type current transformer.
Transformation ratio of residual-current converter: RatioN
Transformation ratio of phase-current converter: Ratioph
[foglchki-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Threshold
The Threshold parameter is the lower limit of the operating range of the Current-sum supervision function.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Operate delay
When the calculated fault current (IF) exceeds the calculated fault current limit (IFmax), the Operate delay
starts. If the threshold-value violation persists for that time, the Failure indication is generated.
Parameter: Slope factor
Recommended setting value (_:101) Slope factor = 0.1

The Slope factor parameter is used to set the ratio between the minimum (Imin) and the maximum (Imax)
phase current. This function calculates the RMS values.
Recommended setting value (_:102) Threshold = 0.1 A for Irated = 1 A or 0.5 A for Irated = 5 A
The Threshold parameter is used to set the maximum phase current (Imax).

operations) are avoided.
8.3.8.5 Settings

Supv. sum I
_:1 Supv. sum I:Mode off off
on
test
_:102 Supv. sum I:Threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 50.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:101 Supv. sum I:Slope factor 0.00 to 0.95 0.10
_:6 Supv. sum I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. sum I
_:82 Supv. sum I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum I:Failure SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.9 Voltage-Sum Supervision

In healthy system operation, the sum of all voltages at one measuring point must be approximately 0. The
Voltage-sum supervision monitors the sum of all voltages of one measuring point in the secondary circuit. It
detects connection errors during commissioning or short circuits and interruptions in the secondary circuit.
For summation of the voltages, the 3 phase-to-ground voltages and the residual voltage (da-dn - voltage of
an open-circuited delta winding) are required.
The voltage measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.
NOTE
i For the Voltage-sum supervision, the externally generated residual voltage must be connected to the 4th
voltage measuring input.
For the Voltage-sum supervision to work correctly, the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter must be
set accordingly.

The Voltage-sum supervision function is located in the Power-system data function group of each 3-phase
voltage measuring point.
[dwstrvss-100611-01.tif, 2, en_US]

The voltage sum is generated by addition of the voltage phasors. Errors in the voltage circuits are detected if
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN VN | > Threshold, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN
parameter.
[lokenvss-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-23 Characteristic of the Voltage-Balance Supervision
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lovssumm-140611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-24 Logic Diagram of the Voltage-Sum Supervision
The device measures the phase-to-ground voltage and the ground voltage of the lines to be protected. The
sum of the 4 voltages must be 0.
Threshold
If the calculated fault voltage (VF) exceeds the Threshold, the parameter Operate delay triggers the indi-
cation Failure.
The device calculates the fault voltage (VF) with the formula:
VF = |VA+ VB + VC + Vph/VN VN |, where Vph/VN forms the Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter.
The Matching ratio Vph / VN parameter takes into account the differing transformation ratios between
the residual voltage input and the phase-voltage inputs.
More information in this respect can be found in chapter 8.3.9.1 Overview of Functions ).
Operate delay
When the threshold value for the Operate delay is exceeded, the indication Failure is generated.
Recommended setting value (_:3) Threshold = 25 V

The Threshold parameter is used to set the voltage which the device uses to recognize the calculated fault
voltage (VF) as a failure of the voltage sums. Siemens recommends using the default setting.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.9.5 Settings

Supv. sum V
_:1 Supv. sum V:Mode off off
on
test
_:3 Supv. sum V:Threshold 0.300 V to 170.000 V 43.300 V
_:6 Supv. sum V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. sum V
_:82 Supv. sum V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. sum V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. sum V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. sum V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. sum V:Failure SPS O
8.3.10 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Current phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
currents by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the currents. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the
setting of the Phase sequence parameter.
The current measurement is based on the RMS values of the fundamental component.

The Current phase rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase current
measurement point.
[dwstrcrs-040211-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[locrsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-26 Logic Diagram Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
The device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase-rotation direction.
You can find detailed information in the section Power-system data.
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence.
The connection diagrams are shown in the section Appendix.
Operate delay
When the device detects an inverted phase sequence for the duration of the Operate delay the indication
Failure is generated.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.10.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.I
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.I:Mode off off
on
test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.I:Delay 0.00 s to 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.I
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.I:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.I:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.I:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.I:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.I:Failure SPS O
8.3.11 Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function monitors the phase sequence of the secondary-circuit
voltages by monitoring the sequence of the zero crossings (with same sign) of the voltages. This enables the
device to detect connections that were inverted during commissioning. The criterion for the check is the

The Voltage phase-rotation supervision function is located in the Power-system data of each 3-phase voltage
measuring point.
[dwstrvrs-060611-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[lovrsymm-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-28 Logic Diagram for the Voltage Phase-Rotation Supervision
The device compares the measured phase sequence with the set phase-rotation direction.
You can find detailed information in the section Power-system data.
The phase rotation is important for protection functions which process phase, loop, and directional informa-
tion. The connection of the currents to the device does not depend on the selected phase sequence.
The connection diagrams are shown in the section Appendix.
Operate delay
When the device detects an inverted phase-rotation direction for the duration of the Operate delay, the
indication Failure is generated.
Recommended setting value (_:6) Operate delay = 5,00 s

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.3.11.5 Settings

Supv. ph.seq.V
_:1 Supv. ph.seq.V:Mode off off
on
test
_:6 Supv. ph.seq.V:Delay 0.00 sto 100.00 s 5.00 s
supervision alarm

(Type)
Supv. ph.seq.V
_:82 Supv. ph.seq.V:>Block function SPS I
_:54 Supv. ph.seq.V:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv. ph.seq.V:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv. ph.seq.V:Health ENS O
_:71 Supv. ph.seq.V:Failure SPS O
8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision

The Trip-circuit supervision function recognizes disruptions in the trip circuit. When 2 binary inputs are used,
the function recognizes all disruptions in the trip circuit. If only 1 binary input is available, it will not recognize
disruptions at the circuit-breaker.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker must be greater than the sum of the minimum voltage drops at the
binary inputs VCtrl > 2 VBImin. At least 19 V are required for each binary input. This makes the supervision
usable only with a system-side control voltage of > 38 V.

The trip-circuit supervision is integrated into the Circuit-breaker function group. Depending on the number of
available binary inputs, it works with 1 or 2 binary inputs.
[dwtcsueb-010313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
8.3.12.3 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs

In order to recognize disruptions in the trip circuit for each switch position, you need 2 binary inputs. One
input is connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection, the other parallel to the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contact.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dw1po2be-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-30 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
CR Command Relay
CB Circuit Breaker
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NC)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NO)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI1 Input voltage for binary input 1
V-BI2 Input voltage for binary input 2
The supervision with 2 binary inputs identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the outage of the control
voltage. It also monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker by way of the position of the circuit-breaker auxil-
iary contacts.
Depending on the switch position of the command relay and circuit breaker, the binary inputs are either acti-
vated (H) or not (L). If both binary inputs are not activated, there is a fault. The fault may be a disruption or
a short circuit in the trip circuit, a failure of the battery voltage or a fault in the mechanics of the circuit
breaker. With intact trip circuits, this state will occur only briefly while the command relay is closed and the
circuit breaker has not yet been opened.
No Command MCB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI 1 BI 2 Dynamic State Static State
. Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H L Normal operation with closed circuit
breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H H Normal operation with open circuit
breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L H CR successfully activated the circuit
breaker
With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit, the
failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC or >CB aux.contact phsA to
>CB aux.contact phsC are not routed to the binary inputs of the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5),
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
the indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input sig.n.routed are generated and the trip-
circuit supervision is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs.
[lo1po2be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-31 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 2 Binary Inputs
8.3.12.4 Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input

When using 1 binary input, you will not identify any disruptions on the circuit breaker. The binary input is
connected parallel to the respective command relay of the protection device. The circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact is bridged by means of a high-resistance equivalent resistance R.
The following figure shows the principle of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
[dw1po1be-220713-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-32 Principle of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
CR Command Relay
CB Circuit Breaker
CBC Circuit-breaker coil
AuxCon1 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NC)
AuxCon2 Circuit-breaker auxiliary contact (NO)
V-Ctrl Control voltage (tripping voltage)
V-BI Input voltage for binary input
R Equivalent resistance
The supervision with 1 binary input identifies disruptions in the trip circuit and the failure of the control voltage.
In normal operation, the binary input is activated with the command relay open and the trip circuit intact (H).
The supervision circuit is closed by means of the equivalent resistance R or by means of the auxiliary contact
AuxCon1 of the closed circuit breaker. The binary input is not activated while the command relay is closed
(L). If the binary input is not activated for a prolonged time, there is a disruption in the trip circuit or the control
voltage has failed.
No Command CB AuxCon1 AuxCon2 BI Dynamic State Static State
. Relay
1 Open ON Closed Open H Normal operation with closed circuit breaker
2 Open OFF Open Closed H Normal operation with open circuit breaker
3 Closed ON Closed Open L Transmission or fault Fault
4 Closed OFF Open Closed L CR successfully activated the circuit breaker
With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you set which functions act on the trip circuit that is
being supervised. While these functions are active (for example, protection tripping), the trip-circuit supervi-
sion is blocked. The closed contact of the command relay does not lead to a failure indication in this case.
If the command contacts of other devices work in parallel on the trip circuit, the failure indication must be
delayed. With the Alarm delay parameter, you can set the time delay. After fixing the fault in the trip circuit,
the failure indication will automatically expire after the same time.
If the binary input signals >Trip relay phsA to >Trip relay phsC are not routed to the binary inputs of
the device (Information routing in DIGSI 5), indications PhA input sig.n.routed to PhC input
sig.n.routed are generated and the trip-circuit supervision function is ineffective.
The following figure shows the logic diagram of the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[lo1po1be-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-33 Logic Diagram of Trip-Circuit Supervision with 1 Binary Input
Equivalent Resistance R
The equivalent resistance R must be dimensioned such that the circuit-breaker coil is no longer activated
when the circuit breaker is open. Simultaneously, the binary input must still be activated when the command
relay is open.
In order to ensure the minimum voltage for activating the binary input, Rmax results in:
[fofr1b02-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
So that the circuit-breaker coil does not remain activated, Rmin results in:
[fofr1b03-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
You can calculate the optimal value for the equivalent resistance R from the 2 values Rmin and Rmax:
[fofr1b01-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The following applies for the power consumption of the equivalent resistance R:
[fofr1b04-090330-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Alarm delay
Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 2 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary
inputs)
Recommended setting value (_:100) Alarm delay = 300 s (Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary
input)
With the parameter Alarm delay, you can set the time for the delayed output of the indication Trip-
circuit fail.phsA to Trip-circuit fail.phsC.
For Trip-circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs, you set the Alarm delay parameter so that the short-term
transient states do not cause the function to activate.
For the Trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input, you set the Alarm delay so that the longest duration of a
trip command is bridged without fail. This ensures that the indication is emitted only if the trip circuit is actually
interrupted.
Parameter: Blk.by trip/open cmd from
Possible settings, application-dependent

The parameter works only with the trip-circuit supervision with 1 binary input.
With the Blk.by trip/open cmd from parameter, you select whether the blocking command comes
from the circuit breaker or from the circuit-breaker failure protection. The parameter appears only in
DIGSI.
8.3.12.6 Settings

74TC sup.1BI #
_:1 74TC sup.1BI #:Mode off on
on
test
_:100 74TC sup.1BI #:Alarm 1.00 s to 600.00 s 300.00 s
delay
_:102 74TC sup.1BI #:Blk.by trip/ Setting options depend on
open cmd from configuration
74TC sup.2BI #
_:1 74TC sup.2BI #:Mode off on
on
test
_:100 74TC sup.2BI #:Alarm 1.00 s to 30.00 s 2.00 s
delay

(Type)
74TC sup.1BI #
_:82 74TC sup.1BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsA SPS I
_:501 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsB SPS I
_:502 74TC sup.1BI #:>Trip relay phsC SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.1BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.1BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.1BI #:Health ENS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
_:300 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsA SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsB SPS O
_:302 74TC sup.1BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsC SPS O
_:303 74TC sup.1BI #:PhA input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:304 74TC sup.1BI #:PhB input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:305 74TC sup.1BI #:PhC input sig.n.routed SPS O
74TC sup.2BI #
_:82 74TC sup.2BI #:>Block function SPS I
_:500 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsA SPS I
_:501 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsB SPS I
_:502 74TC sup.2BI #:>Trip relay phsC SPS I
_:503 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsA SPS I
_:504 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsB SPS I
_:505 74TC sup.2BI #:>CB aux.contact phsC SPS I
_:54 74TC sup.2BI #:Inactive SPS O
_:52 74TC sup.2BI #:Behavior ENS O
_:53 74TC sup.2BI #:Health ENS O
_:300 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsA SPS O
_:301 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsB SPS O
_:302 74TC sup.2BI #:Trip-circuit fail.phsC SPS O
_:303 74TC sup.2BI #:PhA input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:304 74TC sup.2BI #:PhB input sig.n.routed SPS O
_:305 74TC sup.2BI #:PhC input sig.n.routed SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.4 Supervision of the Device Hardware
8.4.1 Overview
The correct state of the device hardware is a requirement for the correct functioning of the device. The failure
or erroneous function of a hardware component leads to device malfunctions.
The following modules of the device hardware are monitored:
Base module
Expansion modules
Plug-in modules on the interface locations

The fault responses result, depending on type and degree of the error, as follows:
Hardware errors where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can switch into a secure state. Such errors are, for example:
Communication-module failure (module x)
Measuring-transducer module failure (module x)
USB interface
Integrated Ethernet interface
Real-time clock building block
A/D converter (fast current sum)
Battery voltage
Faulty or missing compensation values (magnitude/phase)

Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of operation.
Such errors are, for example:
Memory error (RAM) in the base module
Faulty module
Module-connection error (PCB Link)
Control circuit error binary output
Outage of an internal auxiliary voltage
NOTE
i If the error has not be rectified after 3 unsuccessful attempts, the system automatically recognizes it as a
severe device malfunction. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback
mode).
Fatal device errors with outage of central components: The device goes permanently out of operation into a
secure state (fallback mode).
Memory error (flash) in the base module
CPU/Controller/FPGA error in the base module
3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responses at the end of chapter 8 . You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Device Operating Hours

The Device operating hours statistical value counts the operating hours of the physical device. The
starting time and the time in Fallback mode are not considered.
You can neither reset nor change the statistical value.
8.4.2 Analog-Channel Supervision via Fast Current-Sum

The function Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters it performs the following tasks:
Supervision of the correct functioning of the device-internal analog-digital converters, based on the sum
of all currents of one measuring point in the secondary circuit.
Detection of failures in the device-internal measuring circuits ( for example, analog-digital converter )
Blocking of protection and control functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection). This avoids an overfunction of the device.
The supervision principle is based on fast current sum supervision with connection of the neutral-point current
to the 4th current measurement input. In order to ensure that even the fast tripping stages of the protection
functions can be blocked in time before a spurious pickup, the fast current measurement is based on instan-
taneous values.
For Analog-digital converter supervision, the neutral-point current of the line to be protected must be
connected to the 4th current measuring input (IN). The 4th current measuring input must be routed via the
current-transformer neutral point (IN neutral point) (see next figure).
Figure 8-34 Connection to a 3-Phase Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current
(Current in Common Return Path)
NOTE
i The analog channel supervision via fast current sum is only available when the 4th current input is a
protection-class current transformer. In the DIGSI 5 project tree, under Device Measuring-point routing,
set the connection type 3-phase + IN for the current measuring point.

The Supervision of the device-internal analog-digital converters function is located in the System data func-
tion group of each 3-phase current measuring point.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwschstr-040211-01.tif, 1, en_US]

Errors in the current circuits are detected if
IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN| > Threshold value + Slope of the characteristic 1 | i | and
IF > Slope of the characteristic 2 (| i | - Base point 2)
With the current inputs (iA, iB, iC, and iN), the device calculates:
The fault current IF = |iA + iB + iC + iN|
The maximum current | i | = |iA|+|iB|+|iC|+ |iN|
[lokenisu-240413-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 8-36 Characteristic Curve of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
[losumsch-240413-01.tif, 3, en_US]
Figure 8-37 Logic Diagram of the Supervision of the Device-Internal Analog-Digital Converters
When the output signal A/D converter monit. is active, certain protection functions are blocked to avoid
failures (see 11.70 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum ).
NOTE
i The parameters are fixed in the device and cannot be changed.

It is not necessary to change the parameters depending on the application.
Threshold Value
The threshold value is the lower limit of the operating range of the Supervision of the device-internal analog-
digital converters function.
The threshold value is fixed to 10 % of the device rated current.
Slope of the Characteristic 1

The component slope of the characteristic 1 | i | takes into account permissible current-input errors, which
can occur in the case of small overcurrents.
The slope of the characteristic 1 is fixed to 0.1.
Slope of the Characteristic 2

The component slope of the characteristic 2 takes into account permissible current-input errors, which can
occur in the case of high overcurrents (high short-circuit currents).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The slope of the characteristic 2 is fixed to 0.95. The base point of the slope of the characteristic 2 is fixed to
10.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware
8.5 Supervision of Device Firmware

The device firmware determines essentially the functionality of the device.
The following supervisions ensure the stable function of the device:
Supervisions of the data and version consistency
Supervision of the undisturbed sequential activity of the device firmware
Supervision of the available processor performance

When you start the device, load data via the interfaces and these supervisions of the device firmware will be
in effect during the continuous operation. Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error
responses will result:
Firmware failures where the device remains in operation.
The error is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected
protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in time synchronization
(loss and errors).
Failures which can partially be corrected by a restart of the device. The device goes briefly out of operation.
Device startup with faulty new parameter set. The old parameter set is still present.
Overloading of the processor
Program-sequence error
Fatal firmware error. The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
Device startup with faulty new parameter set. No usable parameter set is present.
Device startup with version error
CFC-runtime error
3 unsuccessful restarts in a row

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the fault responsed at the end of chapter 8. You will
find corresponding corrective measures there.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration
8.6 Supervision of Hardware Configuration

The modular hardware concept requires adherence to some rules within the product family and the modular
system. Configuration errors show that the hardware configuration saved in the device does not agree with
the hardware actually detected. Impermissible components and unallowed combinations must be detected
just as missing configured components are.
Depending on the type and severity of error, the following error responses will result: The identified hardware
configuration errors are assigned to the defect severities as follows:
Configuration errors where the device remains in operation.
The failure is indicated. The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected protection functions can go into a secure state. Such errors are, for example, errors in IE converter
configuration (loss and errors).
Fatal configuration error: The device goes permanently out of operation into a secure state (fallback mode).
Missing hardware module (module x)
Incorrect hardware module (module x)
Incorrect hardware combination
Incorrect plug-in module (module x)

You can find the detailed description, in table form, of the error reactions at the end of chapter 8 . You will find
corresponding corrective measures there. You can resolve configuration errors through another synchroniza-
tion with DIGSI.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections
8.7 Supervision of Communication Connections

SIPROTEC 5 devices offer extensive communication possibilities via fixed and optional interfaces. Beyond
the hardware supervision of the communication plug-in modules the transferred data must be monitored with
respect to their consistency, failure, or outage.
Supervision
With the supervision of the communication connections, every communication port is monitored selectively.
Failures are detected and indicated via the operational log. The device remains in operation!
Each port additionally is equipped with a separate communication log, with which details of the failures
(for example, error rate) are displayed.
Marking Fault Signals/Data

The signals/data affected by the failure are marked as invalid. In this way, the affected protection functions
can go into a secure state. In the following, some examples are named:
GOOSE signals can automatically be set to defined values in case of disturbed IEC 61850 communica-
tion.
Disturbed protection interfaces set phasor values, both analog measured values and binary information
to invalid (for example, for differential protection). Binary signal traces can be set to defined values in
cases of failures.
Disturbed time-synchronization signals can lead to an automatic change of the source of time synchroni-
zation.
Normally, you can correct communication failures by checking the external connections or by replacing the
affected communication modules. In chapter 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 to 8.8.4 Defect Severity 3, you will find
the detailed description, in tabular form, of the error responses. Corresponding corrective measures can also
be found there.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.8 Error Responses and Corrective Measures
8.8.1 Overview
When device errors occur and the corresponding supervision functions pick up, this is displayed on the
device and also indicated. Device errors can lead to corruption of data and signals. These data and signals
are marked and tagged as invalid, so that affected functions automatically go into a secure state. If the super-
vision functions pick up, this will lead to defined error responses.
How Do Device Errors Make Themselves Noticeable

In case of a device error the supervision functions of the device pickup. The device responds according to the
type and severity of the error. To report an error, supervision functions use outputs on the device and indica-
tions.
Run LED (green) The external auxiliary voltage is present. The device is ready for operation.
Error LED (red) The device is not ready for operation. The life contact is open.
Life contact Signaling of device readiness following successful device startup.
Group-warning indication The device remains in operation and signals an error via the prerouted LED
Group warning and the log.
Log of the device Indications of causes for defects and corrective measures
Determination of Causes for Defects and Corrective Measures

To determine the cause for defect and the corresponding corrective measure, proceed step by step.
Step 1: Pick up of supervisions leads to one of the following defect severities in all cases.
Defect severity 1:
Internal or external device error that is reported. The device stays in operation.
Defect severity 2:
Severe device failure, the device restarts (reset) to correct the cause for defect.
Defect severity 3:
Severe device failure, the device goes to a safe condition (fallback mode), as the
correction of defects by a restart is not possible. In fallback mode, the protection
and automated functions are inactive. The device is out of operation.
Defect severity 4:
Severe device-external failure, the device switches the protection and automatic
functions to inactive for safety, but stays in operation. Normally, the user can
correct the fault by himself.
Step 2: For every defect severity, you will find detailed tables with information about causes for
defects, error responses, and corrective measures in the following chapters.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Error Responses
Indication of the Life Contact
All Protection and Automation Functions
Device Restart (Reset)
Fallback Mode
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning
Indication in the Operational Log
Indication in the Device-Diagnosis Log
Are Inactive
Defect severity 1 x x x
Defect severity 2 x x During the x
starting
time of the
device
Defect severity 3 x x x x
Defect severity 4 x x x
8.8.2 Defect Severity 1
Defect severity 1 faults allow the continued safe operation of the device. Defect severity 1 faults are indicated.
The device remains in operation.
When the supervision functions pick up, corrupted data and signals are marked as invalid. In this way, the
affected functions can go into a secure state. Whether functions are blocked is decided in the appropriate
function itself. For more detailed information, refer to the function descriptions.
Live status contact Remains activated
Red error LED Is not activated
Log
For every device fault, a corresponding supervision indication is generated. The device records these indica-
tions with a real-time stamp in the operational log. In this way they are available for further analyses. If super-
visions in the communication interfaces area of the device pick up, there is a separate communication log
available for each port. Extended diagnostic indications and measured values are available there. The
device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive recommendations of corre-
sponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Group-Warning Indication Group Warning

As delivered, all supervision indications of Defect Severity 1 are routed to the signal (_:301) Group
warning. In this way, a device error can be indicated with only one indication. The majority of supervision
indications are permanently connected to the Group warning indication (Group warning column = fixed).
However, some supervision indications are routed flexibly to the Group warning via a CFC chart (Group
warning column = CFC). If necessary, you can remove the routings via a CFC chart from the group indication.
In delivery condition, the Group warning is prerouted to an LED.
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Overview of Errors
Indication Type Group Explanation

Warning
General: ENS CFC If the Health of an individual function block, for
(_:53) Health example, a protection stage or an individual func-
(_:53) Health = Warning SPS tion, goes to the Warning or Alarm state, this
state is processed via the associated function
(_:53) Health = Alarm SPS group up to the general group indication Health
(_:53).
Check via the operational log from which function
or function block the error originates. You can
find additional information as to why the health of
the function or a function block can change in the
associated function description.
Device: SPS Fixed Fault with the auxiliary power supply:
(_:320) AuxVolt.fault Check the external power supply.
Device: SPS Fixed Battery fault:
(_:305) Battery fault Replace the device battery.
Device: ENS Fixed Calibration error in module x:
(_:312) Compensation Contact the Customer Support Center.
fault x Quality: Measured values are marked with the
quality attribute of questionable (measured
value display with ).
Device: ENS Fixed Offset error on module x:
(_:314) Offset error x If this indication persists after the device start,
contact the Customer Support Center.
Quality: Measured values are marked with the
quality attribute of questionable (measured
value display with ).
Device: SPS Fixed Internal time failure
(_:306) Time failure Check the time settings first.
Then replace the device battery.
If the fault is not remedied, contact the
Customer Support Center.
Quality: The internal clock is marked with the
quality attribute of Clock Failure.
Device: SPS Fixed Checksum (CRC) error in monitored memory
(_:319) Memory fault areas of the device
Device: ENS Fixed Hardware error on measuring-transducer module
Measuring-transducer error (x) in plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Contact the Customer Support Center.
Handling an alarm: SPS Fixed Input signal for user-defined generation of the
(_:504) >Group warning group warning
Time sync.: SPS Fixed Time synchronization error, the timing master is
(_:305) Time sync Fault faulty:
Check the external time source first.
Check the external connections.
Quality: The internal clock is marked with the
quality attribute of Clock not synchronized.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point SPS Broken-wire detection indications (see chapter
I-3ph:wire break: Wiring: SPS CFC 8.3.5.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:301) Phase A SPS CFC Blocking: Protection functions tending to over-
possible wire break function in the event of a wire break (for
SPS
(_:302) Phase B example, line differential protection) are blocked.
SPS
possible wire break
SPS
(_:303) Phase C
possible wire break SPS
SPS
(_:304) Phase A wire
break
(_:305) Phase B wire
break
(_:306) Phase C wire
break
(_:307) Possible wire
break
(_:308) Confirmed wire
break
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Current balance failure (see chapter
I-3ph:superv. sym I 8.3.6.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of current phase-rotation reversal (see
I-3ph:superv. Phsseq.I: chapter 8.3.10.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of current sum (see chapter 8.3.8.1 Over-
I-3ph:superv. Sum I view of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of the quick current sum (see chapter
I-3ph:superv.ADC sum.I: 8.4.2.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure The failure indication indicates a fault in the
analog-digital converter at the power input.
Check the exterior wiring.
Quality: The internally managed current meas-
ured values are marked with the invalid
quality attribute.
Blocking: The protection functions based on
current measurement are blocked.
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Voltage-transformer circuit breaker is open.
V-3ph: Volt.Trans.Cir.B: Blocking: Appropriate functions are either
(_:500) >Open blocked definitely (for example, distance protec-
tion) or you can set the blocking individually.
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Voltage balance failure (see chapter
V-3ph: Superv. sym V: 8.3.7.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of voltage phase-rotation monitoring (see
V-3ph: Superv. Phsseq.V: chapter 8.3.11.1 Overview of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Warning
Power-system data:meas. point SPS CFC Failure of voltage sum (see chapter 8.3.9.1 Over-
V-3ph: Superv. of Sum V: view of Functions )
(_:71) Failure
2 devices prot. comm.: Protec- SPS Protection interface connection defective:
tion interface #: SPS Check the connections and the external
(_:303) Open connection SPS communication infrastructure.
(_:316) Fault rate/min SPS
exceeded Customer Support Center.
SPS
(_:317) Fault rate/h Transferred Signals: Faulty or not received tele-
exceeded grams are detected at the receive end and
discarded. They do not result in failure of the
(_:318) Runtime
applications. Configured binary signals are reset
exceeded
after a time that can be set.
(_:320) Runtime jump
detected
Line 1: Mess.Volt.Fail detected: SPS CFC Measuring-voltage failure detected:
(_:300) Failure Check the exterior wiring.
Blocking: Appropriate functions are either
blocked definitely (for example, distance protec-
tion) or you can set the blocking individually.
Line 1: Overcurrent 3ph SPS CFC 3-phase overcurrent protection works as an
#:General: emergency overcurrent protection.
(_:2311:101) Emergency Main protection function is blocked.
mode
Line 1: Line differential protec- SPS indication of the line differential protection: Differ-
tion #:General information: ential current too high
(_:2311:316) Blocking: With appropriate parameterization, the
Alarm:Idiff too high line differential protection will be blocked (see
chapter 6.2.2 Function Description and
6.2.11 Function Check of the Line Differential
Protection ).
Faults of defect severity 2 are fatal device faults that lead to an immediate restart of the device (reset).
This occurs when the device data is corrupted (for example, RAM memory), if a restart prevents restoration of
data consistency. The device goes briefly out of operation, a failure is avoided.
Life contact Is terminated during the restart
Red error LED Is activated during the restart
NOTE
i If the fault of defect severity 2 has not be been removed after 3 unsuccessful restarts (reset), the fault is
automatically assigned to defect severity 3. The device will automatically turn to the fallback mode.
Log
For every device error with a subsequent restart (reset), only the restart can be detected in the operational
log. The actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault
detection and before the restart. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are thus available
for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There you also receive
recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
You can find further information on handling the logs in chapter 3 .
Overview of Errors
Number Device-Diagnosis Log

826 Processor error on the base module:
If the fault occurs numerous times, contact the Customer Support Center.
830 FPGA hardware error on the base module:
834 Memory error (short term):
Reset initiated.
3823 Program run error:
826 CPU overload:
Miscellaneous Internal firmware error:
Faults of defect severity 3 are fatal device faults that lead to device immediately going into the fallback mode.
The signal (_:301) Device status goes to the Alarm state. The Warning state is not supported for this
signal.
Fatal device errors are errors that cannot be resolved by a restart of the device. In this case, contact the
Customer Support Center. The device goes permanently out of operation, a failure is avoided. In the fallback
mode, minimal operation of the device via the on-site operation panel and DIGSI is possible. In this way, for
example, you can still read out information from the device-diagnosis log.
Life contact Is terminated in the fallback mode
Red error LED Is activated in the fallback mode
Log
For every device error that immediately leads to entry into the fallback mode, entries from supervision
messages and from the signal (_:301) Device status into the operational log are not possible. The
actual supervision indication is entered in the device-diagnosis log at the point in time of the fault detection,
that is, before entry into the fallback mode. These indications are recorded with a real-time stamp and are
thus available for later analyses. The device-diagnosis log contains expanded fault descriptions. There, you
are offered recommendations of corresponding corrective measures for each detected device error.
Overview of Errors

2822 Memory error (continuous)
4727, 5018-5028 Hardware failure at module 1-12:
4729 Device bus error (repeated):
Check the module configuration and the module connections.
4733 Incorrect hardware configuration:
Synchronize the hardware configuration of the device with DIGSI.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

5037-5048 Wrong module 1-12 detected:
5031-5035 Identified wrong plug-in module on plug-in module position E/F/M/N/P:
Wrong application configuration:
Search for the cause in the operational log and load a valid configuration to the device.
3640, 4514 Data-structure error:
956 Firmware-version error:
2013, 2025 Signature error:
CFC error:
In DIGSI, check your CFC chart for the cause.
5050-5061 Binary-output error in module 1 - 12:
5088, 5089 A missing display configuration was established:
8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm)
Errors of defect severity 4 are not device failures in the classical meaning. These errors do not affect the
device hardware and are not detected or reported by internal device supervision functions. The condition of
the defect severity 4 the group alarm is set user-specifically by the binary input signal (_:503) >Group
alarm. If the binary input signal is reset, the device is no longer in the Group alarm condition and all func-
tions return to the normal operating state.
If the group alarm is generated, the device reacts as follows:
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is generated and recorded in the operational log.
The life contact is terminated.
The red Error LED is activated.
All protection and automation functions are blocked.
The device remains in operation, does not carry out any restart (reset), and does not switch to the safe
condition (Fallback mode).
The signals managed internally are marked with the invalid quality attribute. Signals managed inter-
nally are, for example, measured values, binary input and output signals, GOOSE and CFC signals.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive, that initiates the Group
alarm (see chapter 8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts).
Life contact Is terminated in case of Group alarm
Red error LED Is initiated in case of Group alarm
Log
The group indication (_:300) Group alarm is recorded in the operational log. Depending on the cause of
the initiation, further information can be found in the operational log.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
8.9 Group Indications and Predefined CFC Charts

The following group indications are available:
(_:300) Group alarm
(_:301) Group warning
(_:302) Group indication
You can find the signals in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name of the device) Information routing. In the
operating range, you can find the signals under Alarm handling (see the following figure).
[scgrwarn-010313-01, 1, en_US]
Figure 8-38 Group Monitoring Indication in the DIGSI 5 Information Routing Matrix
Group Indication Group Alarm

The indication (_:300) Group alarm is the group indication for defect-severity 4 monitoring. This moni-
toring has a special purpose, as it is set in a user-specific way by a binary input signal and not by internal
device supervision. Nevertheless, the response of the device is serious, for example, the blocking of all
protection and automatic functions (see chapter 8.8.5 Defect Severity 4 (Group Alarm) ).
If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is set, the group indication (_:300) Group alarm is
activated. If the binary input signal (_:503) >Group Alarm is reset, the signal (_:300) Group alarm
is also reset and the device returns to the normal operating state.
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Process mode inactive that initiates the >Group
Alarm. This CFC chart checks whether the device is still accidentally in the simulation or commissioning
mode.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name
of the device Charts.
Group Indication Group Warning

The indication (_:301) Group warning is the group indication for defect-severity 1 monitoring. Some
error messages of defect severity 1 are firmly connected to the signal (_:301) Group warning, others
are connected in a flexible way via a CFC chart in the device delivery condition. This allocation is described in
chapter 8.8.2 Defect Severity 1 .
In the delivery condition, every device has the CFC chart Group warning that initiates the Group warning.
You can adapt the CFC chart as needed. You can find the CFC chart in the DIGSI 5 project tree under Name
of the device Charts.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The group-warning indication (_:301) Group warning is prerouted to an LED of the base module.
Group Indication
The Group indication is used only for user-specific purposes. There is no internal device supervision
function that activates this indication. If the binary input signal (_:505) >Group Indication is set, the
indication (_:302) Group indication is activated and recorded in the operational log. In the delivery
condition, there is no further response of the device. If the binary input signal is reset, the signal (_:302)
Group indication drops out. You can define via a CFC chart when the binary input signal (_:505)
>Group Indication is to be set.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9 Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of
the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions 1394

9.2 Structure of the Function 1395
9.3 Operational Measured Values 1397
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components 1399
9.5 Average Values 1400
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values 1403
9.7 Energy Values 1405
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values 1408
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System 1412
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) 1413
9.11 Measuring Transducers 1432
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 1439
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Measured Values, Energy Values, and Supervision of the Primary System
9.1 Overview of Functions
9.1 Overview of Functions

The measurands are recorded at the measuring points and forwarded to the function groups.
Within the function groups, further measurands are calculated from these measured values, which are
required for the functions of this function group. This is how, for example, the electric power is calculated from
the voltage and current measurands.
Measuring transducers are an exception as they already form various calculation parameters from the analog
current and voltage inputs themselves.
Basic instructions for recording and editing process data can be found in chapter Basic Functional Structure
2.1 Function Embedding in the Device .
[dwomverf-010212-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-1 Structure of Measured-Value Acquisition and Processing
For the display, the measured values of a SIPROTEC 5 device are summed up in the following groups:
Fundamental and symmetrical components
Function-specific measured values
Minimum values, maximum values, average values
Energy metered values
User-defined measured and metered values
Statistic Values
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.2 Structure of the Function

Depending on the interconnection of the function groups, these can contain different measured-value groups.
A typical function group is displayed below.
Function Group Line

In the simplest version the Line function group obtains the measured values of the 3-phase voltage and
current system and contains the following measured-value groups:
[dwomvltg-030912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The Minimum values/Maximum values/Average values and User-defined values can be inserted from the
library into the Line function group.
Details regarding the individual measured value groups can be found in the tables in the following chapters.
Circuit-Breaker Function Group

The Circuit breaker function group may contain the following measured values:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwomvls1-250211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values

The calculated, directional values in the operational measured values (power, power factor, energy and
minimum, maximum, and average values based on these) are normally defined as positive in the direction of
the protected object. This requires that the connection polarity for the measuring points used be correctly set
(also compare (_:8881:116) Neutr.point in dir.of ref.obj parameter of the measuring point
current, 3-phase). It is, however, possible, to set the "forward" direction for the protection functions and the
positive direction for the powers, etc., differently, for example, such that the active power import (from the line
to the busbar) is displayed positively. Then set the option P, Q sign in the affected function groups on the
reversed parameter. With the parameter not reversed (default setting), the positive direction for the
powers, etc., corresponds with the "forward" direction for the protection functions.
The affected values are given in detail in the Chapters 9.3 Operational Measured Values - 9.9 Statistical
Values of the Primary System .
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.3 Operational Measured Values

Operational measured values are assigned to different function groups.
The values can be displayed as primary and secondary values and as percentage values.
The operational measured values are calculated according to the following definition equations:
RMS values
Active power
Apparent power
Reactive power
n Harmonic order
jn The angle difference between the voltage and current of the nth harmonic
Power factor
Function Group Line

The following table describes the operational measured values of the Line function group.
All protection functions have access to the values.
Table 9-1 Operational Measured Values of the Function Group Line

dary
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary values
3I0 Calculated zero-sequence current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IN p line Phase current of the parallel line A A Rated operating current of the primary values
IY Neutral-point current of trans- A A Rated operating current of the primary values
former
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary values
V0 Calculated zero-sequence voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
Vr Measured neutral-point displace- kV V Operating rated voltage of primary values/3
ment voltage
P Active power MW Active power of the primary values
Q Reactive power Mvar Reactive power of the primary values
S Apparent power MVA Apparent power of the primary values
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

dary
PA, PB, PC Phase-related active power MW Active power of the phase
QA, QB, QC Phase-related reactive power Mvar Reactive power of the phase
SA, SB, SC Phase-related apparent power MVA Apparent power of the phase
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values
of the respective function group can be inverted (see chapter 5.1 Function-Group Type Line in the
subchapter 5.1.2 Structure of the Function Group , section on the Inversion of Output-Related Measured
and Statistical Values):
Active power (total): P total
Active power (phase-related): PA, PB, PC
Reactive power (total): Q total
Reactive power (phase-related): QA, QB, and QC
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components
9.4 Fundamental and Symmetrical Components

The fundamental components are calculated from the instantaneous values through a Fourier filter (integra-
tion interval: one period). The results are phasor values that are described by way of the amount and phase.
In accordance with the transformation matrix, the symmetrical components are calculated from the voltage
and current phasors. These are also phasor quantities.
Fundamental Components
Table 9-2 Fundamental Components

dary
VA, VB, VC Phase-to-ground voltage kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
values/3
VNg Measured neutral-point displacement kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/3
VAB, VBC, VCA Phase-to-phase voltage kV V Rated operating voltage of the primary
values
IA, IB, IC Phase currents A A Rated operating current of the primary
values
IN Neutral-point phase current A A Rated operating current of the primary
values
Symmetrical Components
Table 9-3 Symmetrical Components

dary
V0 Zero-sequence component of the kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/3
V1 Positive-sequence component of the kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/3
V2 Negative-sequence component of the kV V Operating rated voltage of primary
voltage values/3
I0 Zero-sequence component of the A A Rated operating current of the primary
current values
I1 Positive-sequence component of the A A Rated operating current of the primary
current values
I2 Negative-sequence component of the A A Rated operating current of the primary
current values
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.5 Average Values
9.5 Average Values
9.5.1 Function Description of Average Values
Average values can be formed based on different measurands:

Symmetrical components
Through the settings, you can set how and when the average values are formed. The settings describe:
Time slot over which the average value is formed
(Parameter: Average calc. interval )
Update interval for the display of the average values

(Parameter: Average update interval )
Synchronization time for establishing the date of commencement updating information, for example, at
the top of the hour (hh:00) or at one of the other times (hh:15, hh:30, hh:45).
(Parameter: Average synchroniz. time )
Average values are formed through the following measurands:
Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
Amounts of the symmetrical components

You reset the average value formation via the
Binary input >Reset average value
DIGSI
The integrated operation panel
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Function, section Inversion of Output-Related Measured and Statistical Values):
Active power (total): P total
Reactive power (total): Q total
9.5.2 Application and Setting Notes for Average Values
The average value formation functionality is not preconfigured with the devices in the function group. If you
use the functionality, you must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the average values can be set with DIGSI and at the device.
You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Average calc. interval
Default setting: (_:104) Average calc. interval = 60 min

1 min to 60 min Time slot for averaging, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average update interval
Default setting: (_:105) Average update interval = 60 min
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.5 Average Values

1 min to 60 min Update interval for displaying the average value, for example 60 minutes
Parameter: Average synchroniz. time
Default setting: (_:106) Average synchroniz. time = hh:00

The parameter describes the synchronization time for average value formation.

hh:00 The parameter Average update interval will be
effective on the full hour
effective 15 minutes after the full hour
NOTE
i The average value calculation restarts after

Changing one of the 3 settings for the average-value calculation
Resetting the device (initial or normal reset)
Changing the time
Resetting the average values

The average values are reset immediately. The display changes to "---".
The following examples explain how to set parameters and to make a change.
Average calc. interval = 60 min

Average update interval = 30 min
Average synchroniz. time = hh:15.
A new average value is formed every 30 min, at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour) and hh:45 (15 min
before the top of the hour). All measured values obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value
formation.
If these settings are changed to 11:03:25, for instance, the average values are first reset and "---" appears in
the display. The 1st average value is then formed at 12:15:00.
In this example, the Average synchroniz. time = hh:45 acts as described above for = hh:15.

A new average value is formed every 60 min at hh:15 (15 min after the top of the hour). All measured values
obtained during the last 60 min are used for average value formation.

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.5 Average Values
A new average value is formed every 10 min at hh:00, hh:10, hh:20, hh:30, hh:40, hh:50. All measured
values obtained during the last 5 min are used to form the average value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.6 Minimum/Maximum Values
9.6.1 Function Description of Minimum/Maximum Values
Minimum and maximum values can be formed based on different measured or calculated measurands:
Symmetrical components
Selected values
You can set which measurand will be used. The measurands for the minimum/maximum formation are loaded
from DIGSI.
Calculation and resetting of the minimum and maximum values are controlled through settings. The settings
describe the following points:
Memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0 cyclically or not at all.
(Setting Min/Max cyclic reset )
Point in time when the memories of the minimum/maximum values are reset to 0.
(Setting Min/Max reset each and setting Min/Max reset minute )
Point in time at which the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum/maximum values begins (after the
parameterization)
(Setting Min/Max days until start )
The following figure shows the effect of the settings.
[dwminmax-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-2 Minimum and Maximum-Value Formation
Minimum and maximum values are time-stamped.

Minimum/maximum values are formed through:
Operational measured values except for phase-related ratings
Amounts of the symmetrical components
Average values
The minimum and maximum values are reset on a regular basis or via the
Binary input >Reset min/max
DIGSI
The integrated operation panel
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
of the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Minimum/maximum values of the active and reactive power:
Min:Ptotal, Max:Ptotal, Min:Qtotal, Max:Qtotal
Minimum/maximum values of the average values of the active and reactive power:
AverageMin:Ptotal, AverageMax:Ptotal, AverageMin:Qtotal, AverageMax:Qtotal
9.6.2 Application and Setting Notes for Minimum/Maximum Values
The minimum/maximum values functionality is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you
must load it from the library into the respective function group.
The following settings listed for the calculation of the minimum/maximum values can be set with DIGSI or at
the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Min/Max cyclic reset
Default setting: (_:107) Min/Max cyclic reset = yes

Yes Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is activated
No Cyclical resetting of the minimum and maximum value memories is deactivated
None of the following parameters are visible
Parameter: Min/Max reset each
Default setting: (_:108) Min/Max reset each = 1 day

1 day to 365 days Resetting of the minimum value and the maximum value, cyclically on all specified
days, for example each day (1 day)
Parameter: Min/Max reset minute
Default setting: (_:109) Min/Max reset minute = 0 min

0 min to 1439 min Resetting the minimum value and the maximum value at the specified minute of the
day, which is stated in the parameter Min/Max Reset takes place every, for
example 0 min (= 00:00)
Parameter: Min/Max days until start
Default setting: (_:110) Min/Max days until start = 1 day:

1 day to 365 days Indication of when the cyclical reset procedure of the minimum values and
maximum values begins, for example in 1 day (after the parameterization)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.7 Energy Values
9.7 Energy Values
9.7.1 Function Description of Energy Values
The device continually determines the values for the active and reactive energy from the power-measured
values. It calculates the exported and imported electrical energy. The calculation (summation over time)
begins immediately after the device startup. You can read the present energy values on the device display or
through DIGSI, delete the energy value (set to 0), or set it to any initial value. After input, the energy-value
calculation will continue with the new setting values.
Energy values can be transferred to a control center through an interface. The energy values are converted
into energy metered values. Here the following applies:
[foomverg-020311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Through the settings, you set how the metered values are processed. The setting parameters apply for all
energy metered values of the device, and do not have a function-group specific effect. You determine the
following points:
Parameter Energy restore time
Hour-related point in time; at this point in time, the device will provide a metered value at the communi-
cation interface for transmission. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval
will automatically be deactivated.
Parameter Energy restore interval

Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu-
nication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: The transfer interval is used alternatively to the transfer time, and deactivates the set transfer time.
The display of the device is always up to date.
You will find these parameters in the device settings under measured values.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input (>Restoring). The rising edge of the binary
input leads to restoring, that is, provision of the energy-metered value at the communication interface.
The metered-value memory and the energy values can be set to 0 via a binary input (>Resetting) if there is
a rising edge.
Note: The binary inputs affect all energy/energy metered values simultaneously.
The following energy values are available:
Energy Values Primary
Wp+ Active energy, output kWh, MWh, GWh
Wp- Active energy, input kWh, MWh, GWh
Wq+ Reactive energy, output kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
Wq- Reactive energy, input kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
In compliance with IEC 61850, when individually measured values are missing, the quality of the energy-
metered values changes to the state Questionable.
This quality state is retained until a new meter content is specified for the energy value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Set
- Setting a new meter content
- Resetting the meter content to 0
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.7 Energy Values
NOTE
i With the P, Q sign parameter in the function block General, the sign of the following measured values of
the respective function group can be inverted (see Chapter 9.2 Structure of the Function Structure of the
Active energy, output: Wp+
Active energy, input: Wp-
Reactive energy, output: Wq+
Reactive energy, input: Wq-
9.7.2 Application and Setting Notes for Energy Values
The set parameters apply for all electricity meters of the device. You find the setting parameters in DIGSI in
the project tree under Settings > Device settings.
Parameter: Energy restore interval
Default setting: (_:111) Energy restore interval = 10 min

0 min Restoring deactivated
60 min Cyclical restoring after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore time is not in
effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Energy restore time
Default setting: (_:112) Energy restore time = --

-- Deactivated
hh:00 Restoring on the full hour
hh:15 Restoring 15 minutes after the full hour
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Energy restore interval is
not in effect and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Energy restore
Default setting: (_:120) Energy restore = latest value

latest value Restoring of the current energy value
delta value Restoring the difference value between the current energy value and the
energy value of the last restoring operation
Parameter: Energy restore by A.time
Default setting: (_:121) Energy restore by A.time = Wrong

Wrong Restoring deactivated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.7 Energy Values

True The cyclic restoring after the set time of the parameter (_:111) Energy
restore interval will be synchronized with the system time as well.
Example: Energy restore interval = 30 min; current system time:
12:10 o'clock. First restore: 12:30 o'clock; next restore: 13:00 o'clock etc.
Note: If the parameter is activated, the following setting values are possible for the parameter (_:111)
Energy restore interval : 1 min; 2 min; 3 min; 4 min; 5 min; 6 min; 10 min; 12 min; 15 min; 20 min; 30
min; 60 min.
Input Signals: >Restoring and >Resetting
Binary Inputs Description

>Restoring The restoring of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The metered value memory is set to 0 through the binary input.
You route these logical signals in the DIGSI routing matrix. Open the function group, for example, Line, where
you created the energy value. Under the tab Measured values you will find the tab Energy, 3-phase. In this
tab, you will find the logical signals in addition to the measured values.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.8 User-Defined Metered Values
9.8.1 Pulse-Metered Values Function Description
NOTE
i You can define additional metered values through DIGSI for user-specific applications.
Use pulse meters; then you can define the respective metered values through DIGSI and set parameters for
them analogously to the energy values. You can read out the metered values on the display of the device or
via DIGSI.
Through settings, you can individually set how each pulse-metered value is processed:
Parameter Restore time
Hour-related point in time when the device will provide a metered value at the communication interface
for transmission. After this, the transfer takes place in accordance with the selected protocol.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval will auto-
matically be deactivated.
Parameter Restore interval

Adjustable period in minutes until the first and every further transfer of the metered value to the commu-
nication interface of the device. After this, it will be transferred in accordance with the selected log.
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time will automati-
cally be deactivated.
In addition, restoring can be triggered via a routable binary input ( >Restore trigger ) or via a logical
internal binary input. The rising edge of the binary input leads to restoring and thus to provision of the
metered value at the communication interface.
The counter pulse of any external/internal pulse generator is connected to the device via a routable binary
input ( >Pulse input ). If this does not deliver any plausible values, this can be signaled to the device via
another routable binary input ( >External error ).
In compliance with IEC 61850, in the event of an external error, the quality of the pulse-metered value
changes to the state Questionable. No more pulses are added as long as the external error persists. Once
the external fault condition has been cleared, pulses are added again.
The quality of the pulse-metered value remains Questionable until a new meter content is specified for the
pulse-metered value by:
- Confirmation of the current meter content via Setting
- Setting a new meter content
- Resetting the meter content to 0
Parameter Edge trigger
Through settings, you can select between counting only with a rising edge or with rising and falling
edges on the pulse input.
The pulse counter can be reset to 0. You can perform this resetting via the rising edge of a routable binary
input ( >Reset ) or via operation on the device.
To display the counting amount at the device display, use DIGSI to set the desired weighting of the counter
pulses, the unit of the metered value and a multiplication factor for every pulse generator. You can also
assign a user-specific name.
To do this, open the functional area Pulse-metered value in DIGSI information routing. (see Figure 9-3 ).
Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scomvimp-010313-01.tif, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-3 Setting with DIGSI, General Settings, Pulse-Metered Values
9.8.2 Application and Setting Notes for Pulse-Metered Values
The functionality Pulse-metered values is not preconfigured. If you want to use the functionality, you must
load it from the library into the respective function group.
The parameters can be set individually for every pulse counter. You will find the setting parameters in DIGSI
in the project tree under Parameter > Function group
For pulse-metered values, the following described settings and binary inputs are available.
Parameter: Restore time
Default setting: (_:101) Restore time = --

-- Deactivated
hh:00 Transfer on the full hour
hh:15 Transfer 15 minutes after the full hour Note:
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore interval is not in effect
and will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Restore interval
Default setting: (_:102) Restore interval = 0 min
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

0 min Deactivated
1 min to 60 min Cyclical transfer after the set time 1 minute to 60 minutes
Note: If the parameter is activated through a time setting, the parameter Restore time is not in effect and
will be deactivated automatically.
Parameter: Edge trigger
Default setting: (_:103) Edge trigger = rising edge

rising edge Counting with rising edge at the pulse input
rising & falling edge Counting with rising and falling edge at the pulse input
Parameter: Restore by absolute time
Default setting: (_:104) Restore by absolute time= False

False Deactivated
True The cyclic restoring of setting Restore interval after the set time is
also synchronized with the system time. Example: Restore interval =
30 min; current system time: 12:10 o'clock. First restoring operation: 12:30
o'clock; next restoring operation: 13:00 o'clock, etc.
Input Signals: >Pulse input, >External error, >Restore trigger, >Reset
Binary inputs Description

>Pulse input Input for the counting pulses of an external pulse generator
>External error Indication that the counter pulses of the external pulse generator are faulty.
The indication has an effect on the quality identifier of the pulse value.
>Restore trigger The transfer of the metered values is initiated via a binary input.
>Reset The rising edge at the binary input resets the pulse counter to 0.
The amount of energy indicated by a pulse generator is to be displayed as a measured value.

1 pulse corresponds to 100 Wh.
The pulse weighting, the SI unit, and the factor must be adjusted to one another.
Display value = Calculated metered value * Pulse weighting * Factor * SI unit.
If the check box Restore delta value is activated, the differential value is transferred at the restore time set via
the communication interface. The difference value is formed by subtracting the counter content of the last
restoring operation from the current counter content.
You route the logical signal >Pulse input to a binary input to which the pulse generator is connected.
Set the following values:
Name Active Power Meter
Pulse weighting 100
Restore differential value Activated
SI unit Wh
Factor 1
The factor is used for adaptation to larger units (for instance, 1000 for kWh). It is adjustable in powers of ten
(1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). The following figure shows the signals that can be arranged in the DIGSI information
matrix. Open the function group where you created the pulse-metered value, for example, Line 1. There, you
will find the function area Pulse-metered value. Here you will also find the logical signals next to the metered
value. Select the metered value and enter the settings under Properties.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scimpzwe-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-4 Setting with DIGSI
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System
9.9 Statistical Values of the Primary System

The device has statistical values for circuit breakers and disconnectors.
The following values are available for each circuit-breaker:
Total number of trippings of the circuit-breaker initiated by the device.
Number of trippings of the circuit breaker initiated by the device, separately for each circuit breaker pole
(if 1-pole tripping is possible)
Total sum of primary breaking currents
Sum of the primary breaking currents, separately for each breaker pole
Hours with open circuit breaker
Hours under load

The following values are available for each disconnector switch:
Total number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device
Number of switching operations of the disconnector switch initiated by the device, separately for each
switch pole (if 1-pole switching is possible)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.10 Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU)
A Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) measures the phasor values of current and voltage. These values get a
high precision time stamp and together with the values of power frequency, power frequency change rate and
optional binary data that are also time stamped are transmitted to a central analysis station. The standardized
transmission protocol IEEEC 37.118 is used to do this.
The PMU function group is activated by selecting the protocol IEEE C37.118PMU on an Ethernet module
(electrical or optical). The PMU obtains the measured values from the measuring points and the precise time
from time synchronization. The time-stamped synchrophasors for current and voltage are formed from this
and transferred together with additional values via the communication module to a server (PDC, Phasor Data
Concentrator).
[dwstrpmu-250613-01.tif, 2, en_US]
The synchrophasors, sent from the PMU in a continuous data stream to a PDC, are provided with time
stamps and thus are comparable with the measured values of other PMUs. The power frequency, the power
frequency change rate and optional binary information are also transmitted as time-stamped measured
values. Therefore, you receive an overview of the transient processes in a distributed energy transfer system,
for example network fluctuations and compensating processes.
The following table shows the differences between the PMU measured values and the remaining measured
values of the device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Table 9-4 Comparison of Synchrophasors and Conventional Measured Values
Synchrophasors of the PMU Measured Values from the Measuring Points

Continuous updating (measured value of current) Slow updating (typically every 5 seconds)
with, for example, 10 values per second (reporting
rate)
Every measured value has a time stamp No time stamp for the measured values
Phasor values of current and voltage (amplitude and RMS values without phase angle
phase angle)
The following figure shows the structure of such a Wide Area Monitoring System. The data delivered from the
PMUs on the PDC are transmitted via the Inter-Control Center Communications Protocol (ICCP) according to
DIN EN 60870-6 to the network control center.
[dwstrwam-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-6 Structure of a Wide-Area Monitoring System with Phasor-Measurement Units
The phasor-measurement units each have 2 communication interfaces: an Ethernet module for synchro-
phasor communication via IEEE C37.118 and another module for communication with the substation automa-
tion technology, for example, through the IEC 61850 protocol.
The central evaluation system, e.g. SIGUARD PDP Phasor Data Processor, receives the data, files, archives
them and graphically displays them on a User Interface. In this system, a self-checking function may also be
performed, for example, on undamped power swings. The further distribution of information to other PDCs or
to a control station is done here.
To maintain the required maximum errors (TVE) required in the standard IEEE C37.118, the time tolerance
relative to the UTC time reference (UTC = Universal Time Coordinated) may be maximum 10 s. Therefore,
the device must be directly synchronized with a GPS precise time signal for the correct function of the PMU.
Phasors
A phasor u(t) = Uejt can be displayed as a phasor that moves counterclockwise in the complex plane at the
angular frequency . Therefore, the voltage function u(t) = Re{u(t)} is obtained as a projection of the phasor
u(t) on the real axis.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwgeopdc-061011-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-7 Geometric Representation of a Phasor
Reference Point for Determining the Angle

The phase angle of a measuring signal Xm is determined relative to a cosine function having a rated
frequency, which is synchronized with the UTC time reference (see Figure 9-8).
[dwutcphi-260112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-8 Determination of Phase Angle of Measuring Signal Xm Relative to the Cosine Function
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The number of phasors that are transmitted per second is configurable. The transmission rate is defined
according to IEEE C37.118 as the reporting rate. The reporting rate defines the number of phasors that are
transmitted per second. Extremely precise time synchronization is essential so that phasor measurement can
be carried out to enable phasors from different sites to be compared.
Reporting Rate
You use the configurable reporting rate (parameter (_:10621:102) Reporting rate) to specify the
number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to the PDC per second. It is adjustable, depending on the
rated frequency, and applies to all currents and voltages of the relevant PMU function group. If several PMU
function groups are created on the device, these can work with different reporting rates.
Total Vector Error (TVE)

The TVE describes the error between the actual and the measured values of the input signal. The Synchro-
phasor Standard IEEE 37.118 defines upper limiting values of 120 % VN and 200 % IN, among other things.
Up to these limiting values, the TVE of 1 % must not be exceeded for stationary signals. The standard defines
the 2 performance classes, Class P and Class M, as ranges within which influencing variables are acceptable
and the TVE of 1 % must be maintained. The SIPROTEC 5 devices support Class P and Class M, which
specify the following influencing variables for a TVE of 1 %:
Signal frequency (relative to fN)
Signal magnitude (relative to 100 % nominal magnitude) for voltage and current
Phase angle (relative to 0)
Harmonic distortions (relative to < 0.2 % (THD) up to the 50th harmonic

The following figure graphically represents the total vector error. As well as the amplitude, the TVE also
enters into the angle error.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwklatve-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-9 Representation of the Total Vector Error
The TVE is defined as follows:
[fo_utcphi-111011-01.tif, 1, --_--]
where:
Xr(n) = Real part of measured signal
Xi(n) = Imaginary part of measured signal
Xr = Real part of input signal
Xi = Imaginary part of input signal
Variables that influence the TVE are:

Amplitude errors
Phase errors
Synchronization accuracy (deviation from the UTC)

Synchronization accuracy is affected by a GPS timer and the precise correction of the time delay within the
GPS receiver module, as well as by the optimal setup of the GPS antenna.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.10.4 Transmitted Data
The following data is transmitted from the PMU to the PDC:

Current and voltage phasors
Frequency
Frequency rate of change
Binary information
The current and voltage channels transferred from a PMU function group are selected through the Function
group connections editor in DIGSI 5. The frequency and frequency change rate are determined once per
PMU. In this case, only the current and voltage channels selected via the Function group connections editor
for this PMU are taken into consideration. You may route the binary information in the information routing
matrix of DIGSI 5.
The channel used for specifying the frequency is selected dynamically during the device runtime. Each
channel is checked for the presence of a signal in the following order:
1. 3-phase voltage measuring points
2. 1-phase voltage measuring points
3. 3-phase current measuring points
4. 1-phase current measuring points
The 1st measuring point found with a valid signal is used for specifying the frequency in the PMU function
group.
In the case of 3-phase measuring points, the positive-sequence system can also be transmitted instead of 3
individual sychrophasors. This setting can be made via the parameter (_:10621:103) Only positive
sequence.
9.10.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)
PMU communication according to standard IEEE C37.118 is a client-server communication format in which
the PDC (Phasor Data Concentrator) functions as both the client and the server.
Once the PDC has been successfully connected to the device PMU and the PMU configuration data has
been queried, the PDC initiates transmission of the synchrophasor data by sending a close command to the
PMU. In addition to the phasors, the channel names of the routed measuring points and the binary informa-
tion are transferred. Per default, these are automatically generated by the respective PMU function groups.
Where applicable, you can also edit the channel names of the measuring point and assign a designation of its
own for this purpose. For more information, see chapter 9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI. The
names for the binary information carried out are however, generally automatically generated by the respective
PMU function group and cannot be edited.
As an example, the names (generated) for measuring points or binary information may be as follows:
Table 9-5 Possible Measuring-Point Names
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point U-3ph 1[ID 1] MP-V3ph VAB ID01
MP-V3ph VBC ID01
MP-V3ph VCA ID01
MP-V3ph VA ID01
MP-V3ph VB ID01
MP-V3ph VC ID01
MP-V3ph V1 ID01
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Name Displayed in the DIGSI Function Depending on the Connection Type, Name Transferred to the
Group Connections PDC (in case it cannot be assigned automatically)
Measuring point I-3ph 1[ID 2] MP-I3ph IA ID02
MP-I3ph IB ID02
MP-I3ph IC ID02
MP-I3ph I1 ID02
Measuring point I-1ph 1[ID 3] MP-I1ph ID03
Measuring point U-1ph 1[ID 4] MP-V1ph ID03
Table 9-6 Possible Binary Information Names
Path Displayed in DIGSI 5 Name Transferred to the PDC

(Can Be Edited) (Cannot be Edited)
PMU 1: BIN-01-INFO-6
Transf.bin.1:
>BinaryInfo.6
Transf.bin.2:
>BinaryInfo.8
Transf.bin.10:
>BinaryInfo.3
Data is transmitted continuously from the PMU to the PDC at the configured reporting rate. The transmission
is terminated by a corresponding switch-off command from the PDC or when the connection between the
PDC and the PMU is interrupted.
Communication between the PMU and the PDC can be passed via TCP or UDP protocols.
The following ports are used for data transmission:
TCP: Port 4712
UDP: Port 4713
The ports must be configured on the PDC.
Up to 3 different PDCs can be connected to one device PMU at the same time. The IP addresses of the
maximum 3 PDCs are set in the PMU function group. If 4 device PMUs are configured, this enables support
for up to 12 PDCs.
9.10.6 Parameterizing the PMU with DIGSI
You configure and parameterize the Phasor-Measurement Unit with DIGSI. After a device has been added in
a DIGSI project, one or more communication modules that support synchrophasors can be configured as
PMUs. The device module supports a maximum of 2 communication modules that can be configured as
PMUs. If more than 2 PMUs are needed, the device must be expanded with a CB202 plug-in module
assembly (expansion module), which can accommodate 2 more communication modules.
The following communication modules support synchrophasors:
ETH-BA-2EL (2 x Ethernet electric, RJ45)
ETH-BB-2FO ( 2 x Ethernet optical, 2 km, LC duplex)
These modules are then freely assignable to ports E, F, N or P of the device, see Figure 9-10. You can view
the selected port in the (_:10621:104) Port. This parameter is automatically managed by DIGSI and
cannot be changed.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[sccommod-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-10 Placement of Communication Modules
NOTE
i Port M of the CB202 plug-in module assembly is used to accommodate measuring-transducer modules
and cannot be used for the installation of communication modules.
Addressing
You must configure the respective Ethernet address (IP address, subnet mask, etc.) for each communication
module in DIGSI. This is done in the DIGSI General settings properties dialog of the communication module
in item Ethernet addresses and so forms the IP address for the respective PMU.
[scethern-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-11 Ethernet Address Configuration
In the DIGSI properties dialog for channel 1, select the synchrophasor protocol, see the following figure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scprotoc-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-12 Protocol Selection
After you have selected the synchrophasor protocol for the communication module, an advanced settings
dialog for PMU-specific configuration opens, see the following figure.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scwildcard_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-13 PMU-Specific Configuration
You configure the specific settings for the communication protocol in the top section of this settings dialog. In
the bottom section, you specify the corresponding PMU-specific settings.
In order to permit a better configuration of larger wide-area supervision systems, changes have been imple-
mented in the IEEE C37.118 communication configuration that permit a flexible IP configuration without the
loss of safety aspects in the systems administrated.
Configurable placeholders are permitted for each PDC IP address. These placeholders allow you to define a
range of IP addresses where they are accepted within these accesses. The purpose of this is to permit each
individual device or system access within the respective system without limits with regard to their hierarchy
level. Therefore, with regard to security aspects, the limitation to individual IP addresses is eliminated. You
are thus allowed to configure complete sections of IP addresses in each PMU and, as a result, very flexible
when making changes to the configuration of the entire system, for example. The placeholder character must
follow consecutively at the bit level, starting with the bit with the lowest value.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
EXAMPLE of Placeholder Characters:

Example 1:
binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00101011 is not permitted
binary 00000000.00000000.00000000.00111111 is permitted

Example 2:
The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.1
Placeholder: 0.0.0.127
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.1 to 192.172.16.127.
Example 3:
The PDC IP address is: 192.172.16.100
Placeholder: 0.0.0.3
The device accepts requests within the IP address range of 192.172.16.100 to 192.172.16.103.
If a PDC attempts to establish a connection to the device, the PDC IP addresses and corresponding place-
holders are checked in the same order as they had been configured (IP address PDC1, IP address PDC2,
IP address PDC3). Running through the list is stopped with the first match of the IP address, placeholder and
requested IP address range and the connection is built-up. If there are no matches, the attempt to connect is
rejected.
If you have configured IP address 0.0.0.0 and the placeholder 255.255.255.255, every IP address received is
accepted as valid. This could be of use in the course of commissioning measures.
NOTE
i You must have configured at least 1 IP address in order to establish a connection between the device and
PDC.
Measuring-Point Assignment
After adding measuring points to the device, you can assign these measuring points to each configured PMU.
Figure 9-14 shows as an example expansion of the device configuration by 2 additional input/output modules.
You connect the current and voltage inputs of these I/O modules to measuring points via the DIGSI routing
matrix, see example in Figure 9-15.
[scaddios-140213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-14 Adding Additional Input/Output Modules
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scroutin-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-15 Assignment of the Current and Voltage Inputs of the Added Input/Output Modules on Meas-
uring Points
The maximum numbers of measuring points that can be routed for one PMU are:
2 x 3-phase voltage measuring points
2 x 3-phase current measuring points
2 x 1-phase voltage measuring points
2 x 1-phase current measuring points

You can assign all supported measuring points to any PMU, see the following figure. However, each PMU
must be connected to a 3-phase voltage measuring point.
[scfgconn-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-16 Connecting Measuring Points to the Configured PMU Function Groups
When these setting steps have been completed, the PMUs are fully configured. The PMU is a function group
that functions independently of all the other function groups instantiated in the device.
The device load, however, is dependent on:
Number of PMUs
Performance class (where Class M generates the greater load)
Number of assigned channels
Configured reporting rate of each PMU
Number of binary signals to be transferred
Changing the Channel Names of Phasors

You can edit the names of the individual phasor channels for voltage and current in DIGSI. The clearly struc-
tured channel designations assist with when testing and commissioning PMU systems. Furthermore, only the
names visible in the IEEE C37.118 interface can be changed. The function block designations themselves
cannot.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
The IEEE C37.118 defines the ASCII character set for changing the channel names in the scope of the
SIPROTEC 5-PMU support. Due to the protocol, the designation length is limited to 16 ASCII characters per
channel. However, when renaming, you have to assign at least 1 character. The renaming of binary channels
is not supported in the current implementation.
You can start the renaming by setting the check mark at Own phasor names with the parameterization in
the PMU function block Functional settings. Once you have activated this check mark, define a separate
name for each phasor. For this purpose, DIGSI shows all routed measuring points on the PMU in the function
group connections (see following figure).
[scPMUnam_de, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-17 Options for Editing the Names of the Individual Phasors
NOTE
i You can only rename each individual phasor when you set the parameter Positive-sequence system
only to No in the functional settings. Otherwise you will only be offered one single phasor for each 3-
phase measuring point for renaming.
Routing Binary Signals

You can connect binary inputs or CFC information with binary channels of the PMU via DIGSI information
routing. You will find, in the Phasor Measurement Unit (PMU) folder, the Binary information transmission func-
tion block in the DIGSI function library (see the following figure). You can instantiate this function block up to
10 times in one PMU function group. Each of these function blocks contains 8 options for routing binary chan-
nels.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scpmubif-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-18 Information Routing in DIGSI 5
Routing Indications
The routable indication ChannelLive of the PMU log
raises when the PMU is connected to the PDC
clears when the connection to the PDC is interrupted.
[scparami-260912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-19 Log Indication for Display of the PMU/PDC Connection
9.10.7 Parameterizing the PMU on the Device
You can also change the PMU settings directly on the device. To do this, select the desired PMU instance on
the device display. By selecting menu item Settings you then access the editable setting values (see
Figure 9-20). Note that the parameter Port cannot be changed, because this corresponds to the physical slot
position of the communication module in question.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[scdevpmu-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-20 Changing the PMU Setting Values via the Device Display
You can also change the communication settings in the same way. To do this, select the corresponding
communication port in the Communication menu on the device display. From the Channel 1 menu item, you
can then access the detailed setting options for the IP or PMU communication settings (see Figure 9-21).
[scdevcom-210415, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-21 Changing the Communication Setting Values Via the Device Display
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Time Synchronization
In order to ensure the time accuracy of the PMU, you must select IRIG-B as protocol for the GPS clock, see
the following figure. With other settings, the PMU function function group indicates that it is not time synchron-
ized.
[sc_setting time source_2014-09-09, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-22 Setting Time Synchronization
To detect a lack of synchronization quickly, also set the waiting time for the failure indication of the loss of
time synchronization to the smallest possible value, thus to 1 s.
Parameter: Mode
Default setting (_:10621:1) Mode = on

Activate and deactivate the PMU or switch to Test mode via the parameter Mode. The possible setting values
are on, off and test. In Test mode, the PMU data is marked as invalid.
Parameter: Reporting rate
Default setting (_:10621:102) Reporting rate = 10 frames/s

With the parameter Reporting rate, you specify the number of telegrams that are compiled and sent to
the PDC per second.
NOTE
i Different setting values are shown or hidden, depending on the rated frequency set.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Only positive sequence
Default setting (_:10621:103) Only positive sequence = no

With the parameter Only positive sequence, you set whether the positive-sequence system is to be
transmitted instead of 3 individual synchrophasors in the case of 3-phase measuring points. The setting you
make here is then valid for all PMUs with 3-phase measuring points.
Parameter: Class
Default setting (_:10621:101) Class = Class P

With the setting Class, you set which performance class is used for the calculation of the measured values.
Class P is the standard case for PMUs. In this case, filters are used that are suitable for a short response
time and therefore are well suited for recording dynamic processes. Class M is conceived for applications
that are unfavorably affected by alias effects and in which short response times are not relevant.
Parameter: Port
This parameter cannot be set because the Port results from the physical position where the corresponding
communication module is inserted.
9.10.9 Settings

Func. settings
_:10621:1 Func. settings:Mode off on
on
test
_:10621:101 Func. settings:Class Class P Class P
Class M
_:10621:102 Func. settings:Reporting 1 frame/s 10 frames/s
rate 5 frames/s
6 frames/s
10 frames/s
12 frames/s
15 frames/s
20 frames/s
25 frames/s
30 frames/s
50 frames/s
60 frames/s
100 frames/s
120 frames/s
_:10621:103 Func. settings:Only posi- no no
tive sequence yes
_:10621:104 Func. settings:Port port J port F
port F
port E
port P
port N
port G

_:10621:105 Func. settings:Custom- 0 false
ized phasor names 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

Meas.point V-1ph
_:10621:130 Func. settings:Meas- 0to0 0
uring-point ID
_:10621:131 Func. settings:Phasor Freely editable text
Meas.point V-1ph
uring-point ID
Meas.point I-1ph
uring-point ID
Meas.point I-1ph
uring-point ID
Meas.point V-3ph
uring-point ID
_:10621:107 Func. settings:Phasor 1 Freely editable text
Meas.point V-3ph
uring-point ID
Meas.point I-3ph
uring-point ID
Meas.point I-3ph
uring-point ID
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
General
_:10621:52 Func. settings:Behavior ENS O
_:10621:53 Func. settings:Health ENS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.11 Measuring Transducers
Measuring transducers with an input rated at 20 mA can be used in the devices. 4 such inputs are available
as module ANAI-CA-4EL, which can be plugged into a communication module slot (for instance, port E or F).
Up to 4 such modules can be plugged in. Typically, slowly changing process variable such as temperature or
gas pressure are recorded with such 20-mA measured values and reported to the substation automation
technology.
The measuring-transducer blocks are embedded in the Analog units function group and contain input and
output channels that are configurable independently of each other.
[dwstrumu-050313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
The 20-mA inputs typically transmit a value which represents a physical quantity such as a temperature or a
pressure. Therefore, the device must contain a characteristic curve that assigns the physical quantity to the
20-mA value. If the parameter Range active is not activated (no x in the check box), the function operates
over the range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of
-20 mA to +20 mA. The following figure shows an example.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[dwklbsp1-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
In this example, the measured value -20 mA means a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius and the measured
value 20 mA a temperature of 100 degrees Celsius. Thus, Unit = C and Conversion factor = 100 is
entered. The resolution (decimal place) of the temperature value can be chosen; for a decimal place, select
Resolution = 0.1.
[sctransd-210415, 1, en_US]
If a value smaller than -24 mA or larger than +24 mA is applied to the measuring-transducer input, the meas-
ured value is marked as invalid. If the parameter Range active is activated, the 2 additional parameters
Upper limit and Lower limit appear. Both limiting values indicate the input currents in mA, for which
the value set by the Conversion factor (Upper limit) and the value 0 (Lower limit) of the calcu-
lated measurand are valid (see following figure).
[dwklbsp2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
In this example, Range active is selected. The Upper limit is at 15 mA, the Lower limit is at 5 mA
and the Conversion factor remains at 100. The total results in a characteristic curve as shown in the
following figure, taking into account all possible valid measured values from -24 mA to +24 mA. The param-
eter Upper limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if the input current corresponds to the value
in the Upper limit setting. The parameter Lower limit - Sensor is the calculated measured value if
the input current corresponds to the value in the Lower limit setting.
[dwklges2-120124-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-27 Total Characteristic Curve in Example 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[sctrans2-210415, 1, en_US]
Each measuring transducer makes available the scaled measured value in the information matrix (these are
the temperature values in the examples) and the original current measured value in mA for further
processing.
The measuring-transducer values can be displayed in the display image and processed with CFC charts.
Parameter: Unit
Recommended setting value (_:103) Unit = C


The (_:104) Conversion factor setting allows you to set the conversion factor for the measuring trans-
ducer.
Default setting (_:108) Resolution = 0.1

Default setting (_:107) Range active = false

range -24 mA to +24 mA. The setting of the range for the scaled value goes from a usable range of -20 mA to
+20 mA.
Sensor, Lower limit and Lower limit - Sensor appear.
Default setting(_:105) Upper limit = 20000 mA
Default setting (_:109) Upper limit - Sensor = 100
Default setting(_:106) Lower limit = 4000 mA
Default setting (_:110) Lower limit - Sensor = 100
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
limit - Sensor, and Lower limit - Sensor appear. The setting Upper limit - Sensor is the
9.11.5 Settings

MT in #
_:101 MT in #:Meas. transduc. Voltage input Current input
I/O type Current input
Voltage output
Current output
Temperature input
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:103 MT in #:Unit % m

C
F

/km
/mi
1/s
A
As
cos
cycles
dB
F/km
F/mi
h
Hz
Hz/s
in
J
J/Wh
K
l/s
m
mi
min
p.u.
Pa
periods
rad
rad/s
s
V
V/Hz
VA
VAh
var
varh
Vs
W
W/s
W
Wh
_:108 MT in #:Resolution 1 0.1
0.1
0.01
0.001
_:107 MT in #:Range active 0 false
1
_:104 MT in #:Conversion factor 1 to 10000 100
_:105 MT in #:Upper limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 20.00 mA
_:109 MT in #:Upper limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor
_:106 MT in #:Lower limit -20.00 mA to 20.00 mA 4.00 mA
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

_:110 MT in #:Lower limit - -10000 to 10000 100
Sensor

(Type)
MT in #
_:301 MT in #:TD scale MV MV O
_:302 MT in #:TD direct MV MV O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.12 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function:

Records the wear of circuit breakers
Allows maintenance intervals of the CB poles to be carried out when their actual degree of wear makes
it necessary
Sends a warning signal when the wear of a circuit breaker reaches a specified degree
Allows the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time

Savings on maintenance and servicing costs is one of the main benefits this functionality offers.
The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function can be used in the Circuit breaker function group.
The function offers 4 independent operating stages with different measuring methods:
Ix-method stage
Sum of tripping current powers
2P-method stage
2 points method for calculating the remaining switching cycles
I2t-method stage
Sum of all squared fault-current integrals
Supv.CB make time stage

Supervision of the circuit-breaker make time
The function is preconfigured by the manufacturer with 1 Ix-method stage. A maximum of 1 Ix-method
stage, 1 2P-method stage, 1 I2t-method stage, and 1 Supv.CB make time stage can be operated simultane-
ously within this function.
The general functionality is available across stages and provides a uniform start criterion for the stages.
[DwCBWear, 2, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Logic
As the wear on the circuit breaker depends on the current amplitude and duration of the actual switching
action, including arc deletion, determination of the start and end criteria is important. The following general
functionality provides starting and further timing information to the different stages (methods).
The general functionality operates phase-selectively. The following figure shows the logic of the functionality
across stages.
[LoCBWear, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-30 Logic Diagram of the Functionality Across Stages of the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring
Function
Start Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function

The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function starts when any of the following criteria is fulfilled:
Internal protection-function tripping signal from the function block Trip logic is received
Open command signal from the internal Control function is received.
Binary input signal >Start calculation is initiated, for example, from external.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Closed position signal of circuit breaker is going

This signal is derived form the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts. In this way, opening the circuit-breaker
manually is detected.
Logic Input Signals for Stages

As soon as the start criterion has been fulfilled, the timers of the parameterized opening time and break time
are started. With the parameter CB opening time, the time when the circuit-breaker pole begins to open is
defined. With the parameter CB break time, the time of the pole being open including the arc extinction is
defined. The following figure shows the relationship between these circuit-breaker times.
[DwCBTime, 2, en_US]
Figure 9-31 Circuit-Breaker Times
In order to prevent an incorrect calculation in case of a circuit-breaker failure, the parameter Current
thresh. CB open is used to verify whether the current actually returns to 0 after 2 additional cycles.
Fundamental components are used for comparing the threshold values. When the current criterion fulfills the
requirement of the phase-selective logic release, the calculation and evaluation of the respective methods are
initiated.
End Criterion for the Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring Function

After calculation and evaluation have been completed, the end criterion of the circuit-breaker maintenance is
fulfilled. The Circuit-breaker wear monitoring function is ready for a new initiation.
Parameter: CB opening time
Default setting value (_:2311:101) CB opening time = 0.065 s

You use the CB opening time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker until the start of opening of switching poles.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 9-31.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: CB break time
Default setting (_:2311:102) CB break time = 0.080 s

You use the CB break time parameter to define the time span from energizing the shunt release of the
circuit breaker to the instant of arc extinction (and switching pole open).
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker. Also refer to
Figure 9-31.
Parameter: CB make time
Default setting (_:2311:103) CB make time = 0.080 s

With the parameter CB make time, you define the typical time interval between the activation of the closing
procedure for the circuit breaker and the point in time when the first current flows.
You can find more information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
9.12.3.3 Settings

General
_:2311:101 General:CB opening 0.001 s to 0.500 s 0.065 s
time
_:2311:102 General:CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s
_:2311:103 General:CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s 0.080 s

(Type)
General
_:2311:500 General:>Start calculation SPS I
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.12.4 Stage Description Ix Method
Logic of the Stage
[LoCBWIxS, 3, en_US]
Figure 9-32 Logic of the Ix-Method Stage
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

RMS values of the fundamental components are stored for each phase in a buffer during the time between
the start criterion and the pole-opening-starts criterion. With the coming pole-opening-starts criterion, the
latest value in the buffer is searched for whose value is above the setting of parameter Current thresh.
CB open. The 20 ms prior value is used as tripping/opening current for further calculation.
If no value within the buffer is above the setting value, this circuit-breaker opening affects only the mechanical
lifetime of the circuit breaker and is consequently not considered by this method.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
[LoCBWIxF, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-33 Logic of the Determination of the Tripping Current Value
(1) Current-flow criterion fulfilled

(2) 20 ms prior value
Calculation of the Wear

If the Ix-method stage receives the logic release signal, the determined tripping current is used in the calcu-
lation of wear. The calculation results are then added to the existing statistic values of the Ix method as
follows, with phase A as example.
[FoCBWIxA-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
x Parameter exponent
q No. of circuit-breaker switching cycle
Tripping/opening current of phase A to the power of x in the qth circuit-
breaker operation
Rated normal current to the power of x
Statistic value of current phase A calculated with the Ix method
m Total number of switching cycles
The phase-selective Ix value is available as statistical value. You can reset or preset the statistics according
to the specific application.
To simplify the interpretation of the sum of the tripping current powers, the values are set in relation to the
exponentiated rated normal current Irated of the circuit-breaker (see also Setting notes).
Circuit-Breaker Maintenance Warning

If the summated Ix value of any phase is greater than the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Exponent
Default setting (_:11371:101) Exponent = 2.0
You use the Exponent parameter to specify the exponent for the Ix method.
A typical value is the default setting of 2. However, due to practical experiences with individual circuit
breakers, slightly different values may be requested.
Default setting (_:11371:102) Threshold = 10 000.00

You use the parameter Threshold to define the threshold of the statistic value.
The relation of the tripping current powers to the exponentiated rated normal current Irated allows the limiting
value of the Ix method to correspond to the maximum number of make-break operations. For a circuit
breaker, whose contacts have not yet been worn, the maximum number of make-break operations can be
entered directly as limiting value.
9.12.4.3 Settings

Ix-method
_:11371:1 Ix-method:Mode off off
on
test
_:11371:101 Ix-method:Exponent 1.0 to 3.0 2.0
_:11371:102 Ix-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 10000

(Type)
Ix-method
_:11371:54 Ix-method:Inactive SPS O
_:11371:52 Ix-method:Behavior ENS O
_:11371:53 Ix-method:Health ENS O
_:11371:301 Ix-method:Ix A BCR O
_:11371:302 Ix-method:Ix B BCR O
_:11371:303 Ix-method:Ix C BCR O
_:11371:304 Ix-method:Warning ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.12.5 Stage Description 2P Procedure
Logic of the Stage
[LoCBW2PS, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-34 Logic of the 2P-Method Stage
Determination of the Tripping/Opening Current Value

For the description to determine the tripping/opening current value, refer to chapter 9.12.4.1 Description.
Calculation of Remaining Switching Cycles

A double-logarithmic diagram provided by the circuit-breaker manufacturer illustrates the relationship of
permitted switching cycles and the tripping/opening current, see the following figure. According to the
example, this circuit breaker can operate approximately 1000 times at a tripping current of 10 kA.
2 points and their connecting line determine the relationship of switching cycles and tripping current. Point P1
is determined by the number of permitted switching cycles at rated normal current Irated. Point P2 is deter-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
mined by the maximum number of switching cycles at rated short-circuit breaking current Isc. The 4 associ-
ated values can be configured with the parameters Rated normal current, Switching cycles at
Ir, Rated short-circ.cur. Isc, and Switching cycles at Isc.
[DwCBWOpC, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-35 Diagram of Switching Cycles for the 2P Method
As shown in the preceding figure, a double-logarithmic diagram, the straight line between P1 and P2 can be
expressed by the following exponential function:
[FoCBW2P1-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Itrip Tripping/opening current
Irated Rated normal current
m Slope coefficient
b Switching cycles at rated normal current
n Number of switching cycles
The general line equation for the double-logarithmic representation can be derived from the exponential func-
tion and leads to the coefficients b and m.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
NOTE
i Since a slope coefficient of m < -4 is technically irrelevant, but could theoretically be the result of incorrect
settings, the slope coefficient is limited to -4. If a coefficient is smaller than -4, the exponential function in
the switching-cycles diagram is deactivated. The maximum number of switching cycles with Isc is used
instead as the calculation result for the current number of switching cycles, as the dashed line with m =
-4.48 shows in following figure.
[DwCBWSlo, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-36 Value Limitation of Slope Coefficient
(1) Applied function from m < -4

(2) Parameterized function with m = -4.48
(3) Parameterized function with m = -1.77
If the 2P-method stage receives the logic release signal, the current number of used up switching cycles (in
relation to the number of switching cycles at rated normal current) is calculated based on the determined trip-
ping current. This value is subtracted from the the remaining lifetime (switching cycles). The remaining life-
time is available as statistic value. For better understanding, refer to the example below.
You can reset or preset the statistical values according to the specific application. The reset operation
changes the statistic values to 0, and not to their default values of 10 000.
The statistic value of the residual switching cycles is calculated according to the following formula:
[FoCBW2P2-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Where:
i No. of latest circuit-breaker switching cycle
Endur.i Residual switching cycles with rated normal current, after the ith
switching cycle
nrated Overall permissible switching cycles at rated normal current
ntrip Overall permissible switching cycles at tripping current Itrip
nrated/ntrip Lost switching cycles referring to rated normal current
EXAMPLE
For calculating the residual switching cycles of a circuit breaker, the following is assumed:
P1 (2.5 kA, 10 000)
P2 (50.0 kA, 50)
The circuit breaker has made 100 opening operations with rated normal current, 2 tripping operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current, and 3 tripping operations with 10 kA tripping current. Then, the residual
switching cycles with rated normal current are:
[FoCBW2P3-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
There are still 9465 possible break operations at rated normal current.

If the residual switching cycles of any phase lie below the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is
generated.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Ir
Default setting (_:101) Switching cycles at Ir = 10 000

You use the Switching cycles at Ir parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated normal current.
You can find the information on the setting value in the technical data of the used circuit breaker.
Parameter: Rated short-circ.cur. Isc
Default setting (_:102) Rated short-circ.cur. Isc = 25 000 A

You use the Rated short-circ.cur. Isc parameter to define the rated short-circuit breaking current.
Parameter: Switching cycles at Isc
Default setting (_:103) Switching cycles at Isc = 50

You use the Switching cycles at Isc parameter to define the number of permitted switching cycles at
rated short-circuit breaking current.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Default setting (_:104) Threshold = 1000

You use the Threshold parameter to define the threshold of residual switching cycles with rated normal
current. A warning signal is generated when the statistic is less than the Threshold.
Example
Here is an example that shows you how to set the Threshold parameter. Assuming a circuit breaker with
the same technical data as provided in the example for residual switching cycles, 50 breaking operations with
rated short-circuit breaking current are permitted.
A warning signal should be issued when the number of possible breaking operations with rated short-circuit
breaking current is less than 3. For that condition, you set the Threshold value based on the following
calculation:
[FoCBW2P4-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
9.12.5.3 Settings

2P-method
_:1 2P-method:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 2P-method:Switching 100 to 1000000 10000
cycles at Ir
_:102 2P-method:Rated short- 10 A to 100000 A 25000 A
circ.cur. Isc
_:103 2P-method:Switching 1 to 1000 50
cycles at Isc
_:104 2P-method:Threshold 0 to 10000000 100

(Type)
2P-method
_:54 2P-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 2P-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 2P-method:Health ENS O
_:301 2P-method:Endur.A INS O
_:302 2P-method:Endur.B INS O
_:303 2P-method:Endur.C INS O
_:304 2P-method:Warning ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.12.6 Stage Description I2t Method
Logic of the Stage
[LoCBWI2t, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-37 Logic of the I2t-Method Stage
Calculation of the Wear

The I2t method evaluates the wear of a circuit breaker based the sampled measuring values of the phase
currents during the arc time. The duration of the arc time is defined by the difference between the 2 settings
of parameters CB break time and CB opening time (see also Figure 9-31). The stage determines the
ending point of the arc time by searching backward the zero-crossing point of the phase currents after it
receives the logic release signal. Then, the squared fault currents during the arc time are integrated phase-
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
selectively. The integrals are referred to the squared rated normal current of the circuit breaker as shown in
the following formula, with phase A as example.
[FoCBWI2T-301012-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Where:
Irated Rated normal current
iA(t) Sampled measured current value of phase A
The calculated squared tripping current integrals are added to the existing statistic values.You can reset or
preset the statistic value according to the specific application.

If the statistic value of any phase lies above the threshold, a phase-selective warning signal is generated.
Default setting (_:101) Threshold = 10 000.00 I/Ir*s

You use the Threshold parameter to specify the maximum permitted integral of squared sampled measured
values of the phase currents.
9.12.6.3 Settings

I2t-method
_:1 I2t-method:Mode off off
on
test
_:101 I2t-method:Threshold 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21400000.00 I/Ir*s 10000.00 I/Ir*s

(Type)
I2t-method
_:54 I2t-method:Inactive SPS O
_:52 I2t-method:Behavior ENS O
_:53 I2t-method:Health ENS O
_:301 I2t-method:It A BCR O
_:302 I2t-method:It B BCR O
_:303 I2t-method:It C BCR O
_:304 I2t-method:Warning ACT O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
9.12.7 Stage Description Supervision CB Make Time
Logic of the Stage
[Lo_sup-cb-make-time, 1, en_US]
Figure 9-38 Logic of the Supv.CB Make Time Stage
Operating Mode
The stage for the supervision of the circuit-breaker make time calculates the time between the circuit-breaker
closing command and the point in time when the current from at least one phase exceeds the
Oper.current threshold. If this threshold has not been exceeded after 2.5 times the value of the param-
eter CB make time, the measurement is canceled and the output value Make time is set to 0 and marked
with the quality invalid.
If at least one phase of the current has exceeded the parameter Oper.current threshold or the param-
eter Current thresh. CB open at the time of the circuit-breaker closing command, the measurement is
canceled and the output value Make time is marked with the quality invalid.
You can define 2 independent thresholds for the supervision of the measured make time. When these thresh-
olds are exceeded, the corresponding outputs Warning 1 and Warning 2 are activated for 100 ms. These
can be routed in the log.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Parameter: Level of warning 1
Default setting (_:101) Level of warning 1 = 5 %

With the parameter Level of warning 1, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 1 is set. The
output Warning 1 then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Level of warning 2
Default setting (_:102) Level of warning 2 = 10 %

With the parameter Level of warning 2, you define the percentage the measured value is allowed to
exceed the parameter CB make time at the output Make time, before the output Warning 2 is set. The
output Warning 2 then drops out after 100 ms.
Parameter: Oper.current threshold
Default setting (_:103) Oper.current threshold = 0.100 A

With the parameter Oper.current threshold, you define the current threshold. If the measured value
exceeds this threshold, the measured value is detected as flowing operating current. As soon as an operating
current flows, the end of the time interval Make time is detected.
Parameter: Delay correction time
Default setting (_:104) Delay correction time = 0.000 s

With the parameter Delay correction time, you define a correction value which will be subtracted from
the Make time during calculation. This allows you to compensate delays caused by the system, for
example, relay residual times, if necessary.
9.12.7.3 Settings

Supv.CB make time
_:1 Supv.CB make off off
time:Mode on
test
_:101 Supv.CB make 1 % to 100 % 5%
time:Level of warning 1
_:102 Supv.CB make 1 % to 100 % 10 %
time:Level of warning 2
_:103 Supv.CB make 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
time:Oper.current 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
threshold
1 A @ 50 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 50 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A 0.50 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A 0.100 A
5 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.005 A to 8.000 A 0.500 A
_:104 Supv.CB make -0.050 s to 0.050 s 0.000 s
time:Delay correction
time
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

(Type)
Supv.CB make time
_:54 Supv.CB make time:Inactive SPS O
_:52 Supv.CB make time:Behavior ENS O
_:53 Supv.CB make time:Health ENS O
_:301 Supv.CB make time:Make time MV O
_:302 Supv.CB make time:Warning 1 SPS O
_:303 Supv.CB make time:Warning 2 SPS O
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
10 Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes 1458

10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection) 1459
10.3 Controlling the Protection-Data Communication 1460
10.4 Functional Test of Protection Communication 1462
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displacement 1464
Voltage
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1465
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test 1468
10.8 Out-of-step Protection Function Test 1471
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection 1472
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision 1473
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test 1474
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal 1475
10.13 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems 1476
10.14 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function 1477
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.1 General Notes
10.1 General Notes

Various tests have to be performed for commissioning to warrant the correct function of the device.
For tests using secondary test equipment, make sure that no other measurands are locked in and trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers are interrupted, unless otherwise indicated.
Secondary tests can never replace primary tests because they cannot include connection faults. They provide
a theoretical check of the setting values only.
Primary tests may be done only by qualified personnel who are familiar with the commissioning of protection
systems, with the operation of the system, and with safety regulations and provisions (switching, grounding,
etc.).
Switching operations also have to be performed for the commissioning. The described tests require that these
be capable of being performed safely. They were not conceived for operational checks.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage Connection)
10.2 Direction Test of the Phase Quantities (Current and Voltage

Connection)
The proper connection of the current and voltage transformer is checked with load current over the line to be
protected. For this, the line must be switched on. A load current of at least 0.1 Irated has to flow over the line; it
should be ohmic to ohmic inductive. The direction of the load current has to be known. In case of doubt,
meshed and ring systems should be unraveled. The line remains switched on the for the duration of the
measurements.
The direction can be derived directly from the operational measured value. First make sure that the power
measured values correspond to the power direction. Normally, it can be assumed that the forward direction
(measuring direction) goes from the busbar toward the line.
Using the power measured values at the device or DIGSI 5, make sure that it corresponds to the power direc-
tion:
P is positive if the active power flows in the line or protected object.
P is negative if the active power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
Q is positive if the inductive reactive power flows in the line or protected object.
Q is negative if the inductive reactive power flows to the busbar or out of the protected object.
If the power measured values have a different sign than expected, then the power flow is opposite the
current-direction definition. This can be the case, for example, at the opposite end of the line . The current-
transformer neutral point then points in the direction of the protected object (for example line).
If the values are not as expected, it may be due to a polarity reversal at the voltage connection.
As a final step, switch off the system.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.3 Controlling the Protection-Data Communication

Checking the Protection-Data Communication
If the devices are connected to one another via the protection interface and switched on, they contact each
other automatically. If, for example, device 1 recognizes device 2, the successful connection is indicated (see
next figure). Accordingly, each device signals to all devices that aProtection-data communication is available.
[scprotec-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-1 Connection Establishment in DIGSI 5
Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the text box Status of topo recog. shows the indication valid in
DIGSI 5 (see Figure 10-1).
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the text box Status of topo recog. shows the indication Invalid.
(see Figure 10-1).
In Figure 10-2 there is no protection-data communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protec-
tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. The transfer of protection data is interrupted and
differential protection is ineffective. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protection
interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
[scprotco-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-2 Protection-Data CommunicationDeactivated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.4 Functional Test of Protection Communication
10.4.1 Controlling the Protection-Data Communication
Checking the Protection-Data Communication

If the devices are connected to one another via the protection interface and switched on, they contact each
other automatically. If, for example, device 1 recognizes device 2, the successful connection is indicated (see
next figure). Accordingly, each device signals to all devices that aProtection-data communication is available.
[scprotec-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-3 Connection Establishment in DIGSI 5
Proper communication of the devices among each other can be supervised during operation.
Check the connections for each protection interface in DIGSI 5.
If a connection is successfully established, the text box Status of topo recog. shows the indication valid in
DIGSI 5 (see Figure 10-1).
If 2 devices are parameterized incorrectly, the text box Status of topo recog. shows the indication Invalid.
(see Figure 10-1).
In Figure 10-2 there is no protection-data communication between device 1 and device 2, that is, the protec-
tion interfaces 1 and 2 of device 1 do not receive data. The transfer of protection data is interrupted and
differential protection is ineffective. One reason for this can be a remote control with DIGSI via the protection
interface. In this case, the protection connection is interrupted and the connection is used exclusively for
DIGSI.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
[scprotco-061210-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-4 Protection-Data CommunicationDeactivated
10.4.2 Directional Test
In the case of protection interfaces of type 1 and type 2, the complex phasors of the voltage and current
measuring point are exchanged between devices of one communication topology in order to be able to carry
out a directional test during commissioning, for example. DIGSI 5 depicts this in the form of a phasor
diagram. You can only route the measuring point to the protection interface. For 1 1/2 circuit-breaker layouts,
a measuring point can therefore be transferred and checked optionally. You can also check and test the 2nd
measuring point by rerouting. Furthermore, communication with DIGSI 5 can take place via the protection
interface to other devices of the constellation. For this purpose, the protection-interface connection is inter-
rupted and DIGSI 5 uses this connection for communication with the remote device.
After completing the remote connection by DIGSI 5, the system switches back over to protection
communication.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Displacement Voltage
10.5 Functional Test for Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence

Voltage/Displacement Voltage
Checking Disturbance-Voltage Suppression in the Load Resistor with a System Ground Fault
! DANGER
Touching live parts or reaching into rotating machines will result in death or serious injury.
Perform primary measures only when the machine is at standstill and the system components are de-
energized and grounded.
With the primary system de-energized and grounded, insert a 1-pole ground fault bridge on the high-
voltage side of the unit transformer.
! CAUTION
Material damage can be caused during the test if there is neutral-point grounding at the transformer and
grounding on the high-voltage side simultaneously.
Neutral grounding at the transformer must be interrupted during the test.
Start the machine and excite it slowly up to 30 % of the rated machine voltage.
Read the zero-sequence voltage V0, measured value from the operational measured values.
Extrapolate the zero-sequence voltage to 100 % of the machine voltage (V0, fault).
Calculate the safety margin by dividing the calculated fault value by the set threshold value.
If the result is less than 0.5, the safety margin is sufficient. If the fault voltage is lower, you can increase the
sensitivity of the protection function.
Example:
V0, meas. = 0.75 V
Vthreshold value = 5.68 V
V0, fault = 0.75 V * 100 % / 30 % = 2.5 V
Safety margin = 2.5 V / 5.68 V = 0.44
The calculated safety margin of 0.44 is sufficient because it is below 0.5.
Shut the machine down and de-excite it. Remove the ground-fault bridge.
Restore neutral-point grounding if you require grounded operation of the neutral on the high-voltage side
of the unit transformer.
When using the function for startup ground-fault protection on a busbar connection, carry out the same check
as for the unit connection, but only the part Test during machine ground fault.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.6 Primary and Secondary Tests of the Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection

Integration of the Protection Function into the Station
The integration of the protection function into the station must be tested in the real-life application. Because of
the multitude of possible applications and possible system configurations, the required tests cannot be
described here in detail.
NOTE
i Always keep in mind the local conditions, the station plans, and protection plans.
NOTE
i Siemens recommends isolating the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both ends before starting the
tests. Line disconnector switches and busbar disconnector switches must be open so that the circuit
breaker can be operated without risk.
General Precautions
! CAUTION
Tests on the local circuit-breaker of the feeder cause a trip command to the output to the adjacent (busbar)
circuit breakers.
Non-observance of the following measure can result in minor personal injury or material damage.
In a first step, interrupt the trip commands to the adjacent (busbar) circuit breakers, for example, by
disconnection of the corresponding control voltages.
For testing the circuit-breaker failure protection, it must be ensured that the protection (external protection
device or device-internal protection functions) cannot operate the circuit breaker. The corresponding trip
command must be interrupted.
Although the following list does not claim to be complete, it can also contain points, which have to be ignored
in the current application.
Test Modes
The device and the function can be switched to test mode. These test modes support the test of the function
in different ways:
Test Modes Explanation
Device in test mode This operating mode is relevant for the following tests:
1. Approach of current thresholds in the case of an
external start: Supervision of the binary input signals in
the case of an external start is disabled. This setting
allows a static activation of the starting signals in order to
approach the current threshold.
2. Check whether the issued trip commands actuate the
corresponding circuit breakers, because the device
contacts are also actuated in the device test mode.
CBFP function in test mode (device is NOT in This operating mode is important for function tests in
test mode) which the generated operate indications are NOT
supposed to actuate the binary outputs.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
NOTE
i When the function or device is in test mode, all indications are given a test bit.
NOTE
i In the mode Device in test mode, the operate indications generated by the function operate the binary
outputs.
The function must also be tested in its normal, switched on condition.

Consider the following in this case:
The device contacts are actuated.
Binary input signal supervision (in the case of an external start) is enabled and blocks the function.
All indications generated are generated without test bit.
Circuit-Breaker Auxiliary Contacts

When circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, they make an essential contribution to
the reliability of the circuit-breaker failure protection, provided that their settings are set accordingly.
Make sure that the correct assignment has been checked.
Internal starting conditions (trip command from internal protection function)

The internal start can be tested by means of tripping a protection function, for example, the main protection
function of the device.
Check how the settings of the circuit-breaker failure protection are set. Refer also to the chapter Applica-
tion and Setting Notes.
For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
Generate the trip for the protection function. This can be generated within the device by a test sequence
(see description in the Operating manual) or by creating corresponding secondary test values.
The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.
External Starting Conditions (Trip Command from External Protection Function)

If external protection devices are also able to start the circuit-breaker failure protection, the external starting
conditions require checking.
Check how the settings of the circuit-breaker failure protection are set.
Refer also to the chapter Application and Setting Notes.
For the circuit-breaker failure protection to be able to pick up, a phase current (see current-flow criterion)
must be present. This can be generated by a device-internal test sequence (see description in the Oper-
ating manual). It can also be a secondary test current.
Activate the binary input or inputs to which the start signal and possibly also the release signal for the
CBFP function are routed. This can be done in 2 ways:
1) Via internal test sequences
2) By controlling the binary input or inputs via an auxiliary voltage
Check the start input signal, and if available, check the enable input signal in the spontaneous or fault
messages.
Check the pickup indication in spontaneous or fault indications.
The trip command(s) and their time delay compared to the pickup, depending on the parameterization.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
Start by Trip Command from the External Protection

Check the static and - in case of 2-channel operation - also the dynamic supervision of the binary input
signals. For this purpose, induce pickup of the supervision and check the supervision indications and the
ready signal in the event log buffer.
Start by Trip Command from the External Protection without Current Flow
If start is possible without current flow: (see Start by trip command from the external protection).
Repetition of the Local Tripping (T1)

Make sure that the trip repeat signal controls a 2nd circuit (2nd coil) for switching off the circuit-breaker.
Backup Tripping in the Case of a Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2)

For tests in the station, it is important to check that the distribution of trip commands to the adjacent circuit
breakers in the case of a circuit-breaker failure is correct. The adjacent circuit breakers are all circuit
breakers, which must be tripped in order to ensure interruption of the short-circuit current if the feeder circuit-
breaker fails. They are therefore the circuit breakers of all feeders which feed the busbar or busbar section to
which the feeder with the fault is connected.
A general detailed test guide cannot be specified because the layout of the adjacent circuit-breakers depends
largely on the system topology.
With multiple busbars, the trip distribution logic for the adjacent circuit breakers must be checked.
The test has to check for every busbar section that, in case of a failure of the feeder circuit-breaker
under observation, only those circuit-breakers which are connected to the same busbar section are
tripped.
Backup Tripping on Circuit-Breaker Failure (T2), Tripping of the Opposite End

If the trip command of the circuit-breaker failure protection must also trip the circuit-breaker at the opposite
end of the tested feeder, the communication channel for this remote trip has to be tested as well.
It is practical to test the communication channel for the remote trip while transmitting other signals in
accordance with 10.3 Controlling the Protection-Data Communication.
Termination
All temporary measures taken for testing must be undone, such as special switch positions, interrupted
trip commands, changes to setting values, or individually switched off protection functions.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.7 Circuit-Breaker Test

The Circuit-breaker test function enables you to easily perform a complete test of the trip circuit, the closing
circuit, and the circuit breaker. If the circuit breaker can be opened for 1-poles, you can perform the test sepa-
rately for each circuit-breaker pole.
The circuit-breaker test carries out an automatic opening and closing cycle of the circuit breaker during opera-
tion.
NOTE
i If the auxiliary contacts are not connected, a circuit breaker that has been opened may be permanently
closed.
The following test programs are available for you to carry out the circuit-breaker test. 1-pole tests are only
possible if the respective circuit breaker is capable of being opened on 1 pole.
No. Test program
1 3-phase open/closed cycle
2 1-pole open/closed cycle A
3 1-pole open/closed cycle B
4 1-pole open/closed cycle C
Structure of the Function

The Circuit-breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers.
[dwcbch01-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-5 Embedding of the Function
[dwzecbc1p2-161013, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-6 Structure of the Function
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
Test Procedure
The following conditions must be satisfied before the circuit-breaker test can start:
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact signals the position of the breaker pole to the device via the Posi-
tion binary input, the test cycle is not initiated unless the circuit breaker is closed. If the circuit-breaker
auxiliary contact has not been routed, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is closed.
The circuit breaker must be ready for an open-closed-open cycle (indication >Ready).
A protection function must not have been picked up in the circuit-breaker protection function group
responsible for the circuit breaker.
Figure 10-7 shows the progression over time of an open-close test cycle.
If a circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is connected, the function waits for the indication circuit breaker Posi-
tion = open after the trip command is generated. When the indication Position = open is received, the
close command is transmitted after a dead time (parameter (_:6151:101) Dead time). If the feedback
from the circuit-breaker positions is not received within the maximum transmission time (Dead time+
2 Output time + 5 s), the circuit-breaker test is aborted and considered to be failed. The proper func-
tioning of the circuit breaker is monitored via the feedback on the circuit-breaker positions.
If the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is not connected, the trip command is generated for the parameterized
output time (parameter (_:4261:101) output time)). After the dead time (parameter Dead time) has
elapsed, the close command follows, also for the duration of the parameterized time (Output time). In this
case, you must ensure that the circuit breaker is closed.
[dwcbch03-300913, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-7 Progress over Time of a Circuit-Breaker Test Cycle
The Circuit-breaker test function is used in protection function groups for circuit breakers. If the actual Circuit-
breaker functionality has been configured and wired further configuration is not necessary.
You define the time between the trip command and the close command with the Dead time parameter.
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker test does not perform a synchrocheck even if the synchrocheck has been configured in
the protection-function groups for circuit breakers. This may cause stability problems in the system during
a 3-pole interruption. Therefore, a 3-pole circuit-breaker test should be very short, or not performed at all
under load.
You can start the test program as follows:

Via the device-control panel
Via DIGSI
Via control commands, which you can also connect in the CFC
The following figure illustrates operation of the circuit-breaker test in DIGSI.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
[sccbc3p3-140912-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-8 Circuit-Breaker Test in the Test Suite in DIGSI
Select the function in the project tree on the left in the online access.
Start the desired test program in the upper portion of the middle window.
The corresponding feedback is displayed in the bottom portion of the middle window. Additional informa-
tion about the behavior of other functions while the circuit-breaker test is being performed can be read in
the operational log.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.8 Out-of-step Protection Function Test
10.8 Out-of-step Protection Function Test

Secondary Test
Check the function preferably by using transient files. You can create the files from a power system simula-
tion for the specific application.
To simplify the test, certain transient files in COMTRADE format are available via the download area. The
files contain simulations of out-of-step situations. These situations must be simulated for the protection func-
tion by using suitable test equipment (such as CMC by Omicron). To check the proper behavior of the protec-
tion function, it is recommended to route all relevant messages as a binary track to the fault record.
Make use of the test options offered by the test equipment.
Before starting the tests, check whether the test equipment generates the test signals correctly. The
delivered test signals must be impedance locus diagrams corresponding to the circles shown in
Figure 6-432.
Primary Test
Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to
the current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
Switch the protection function on.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection
10.9 Functional Test of the Inrush-Current Detection

General
For the test, make sure that the test current reflects the typical inrush current.
Perform the test with transient signals. These can be recorded inrush currents or simulated currents from
a transient system model.
When using synthetic signals, observe the notes on the individual measuring principles.
Harmonic Analysis
Superimpose on the fundamental-component current a test current of double frequency (2nd harmonic)
and test the pickup behavior with this.
Cause a threshold value excess (internal pickup) for one of the protection functions that you want to
block.
- or -
Apply a test current with a load current as lead (current step).
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
CWA Process
Create a test current that has flat ranges of a minimum width of 3 ms simultaneously in all 3 phase
currents.
The inrush current detection creates a blocking signal.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision
10.10 Functional Test of the Trip-Circuit Supervision

General
For the test, make sure that the switching threshold of the binary inputs is clearly below half the rated
value of the control voltage.
2 Binary Inputs
Make sure that the binary inputs used are isolated.
1 Binary Input
Make sure that, in the circuit of the 2nd circuit-breaker auxiliary contact, an equivalent resistance R is
connected.
Observe the dimensioning notes under the section Equivalent resistance R.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test
10.11 Power-Swing Blocking Functional Test

Secondary Test
Check the function preferably by using transient files. You can create the files from a power system simula-
tion for the specific application.
To simplify the test, certain transient files in COMTRADE format are available from the download area. The
files contain simulations of power-swing situations. These situations must be simulated for the protection
function by using suitable test equipment (such as CMC by Omicron). To check the proper behavior of the
protection function, it is recommended to route all relevant indications as a binary track to the fault record.
Make use of the other test options offered by the test equipment.
Before starting the tests, check whether the test equipment generates the test signals correctly. As test
signal, the result must be impedance-locus diagrams which form circles.
Primary Test
Do not carry out a separate transient test, but check whether the protection device is properly connected
to the primary plant.
Check the operational measured values under load. If the amount angles and phase angles of the
voltages and currents as well as the impedance phasor of the positive-sequence system correspond to
the current load conditions, you can assume that the function works properly.
Switch the protection function on.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal
10.12 Functional Test for the Phase-Rotation Reversal

Check the phase sequence (direction of rotating field) at the device terminals. It must correspond to the
The output indication Phase sequence ABC or Phase sequence ACB displays the determined
phase sequence. This must correspond to the phase sequence that was set.
You can also determine the phase sequence via the Symmetrical components measured values. If you
obtain negative-sequence system variables (V2, I2) and no positive-sequence system variables (V1, I1)
with symmetrical 3-phase infeed, the setting parameter Phase sequence does not correspond to the
connection.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.13 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
10.13 Directional Testing for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems

Primary Test
The primary test is used for the evaluation of the correct polarity of the transformer connections for the deter-
mination of the ground-fault direction.
For directional testing, the Directional sensitive ground-fault detection function (67Ns) is configured and a
directional stage is switched on. For example, the directional 3I0> stage with cos or sin measurement.
The most reliable test is the one with a primary ground fault. Proceed as follows:
Isolate the line and ground it on both sides; on the farthest line end it must remain open during the entire
test.
Place a 1-phase ground fault bridge on the line. For overhead lines, this can be done at an arbitrary
location, in any case behind the current transformer (as seen from the busbar of the feeder to be tested).
For cables, the grounding is done on the farthest end (sealing end).
Remove the protective grounding from the line.
Switch on the circuit breaker on the line to be tested.
Check direction indicator (LED if routed).
Check the indication (_:302) Ground fault in the ground-fault log or fault log with regard to its
direction. The indication (_:302) Ground fault forward must be logged as direction information.
If backward is determined as the direction, either with the current connections or the voltage connec-
tions, there is an inversion in the neutral path. For the display unknown, the ground current is probably
too low.
Switch the line off and ground it.
This completes the test.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
10.14 Primary and Secondary Testing of the Synchronization Function

Measuring the Circuit-Breaker Closing Time
Under asynchronous system conditions, the circuit-breaker closing time must be measured and set correctly.
This achieves an exact parallel switching with a phase angle 0o. If switching occurs only in synchronous
system conditions, this section can be skipped.
The closing time can be determined via the following 2 methods:
1. By reading from a fault record (recommended method)
2. With external timer
1. A simple option for determining the closing time involves reading out the time between the close command
and closure of the switch pole via the fault record. The time determined here is the real closing time and not
the operating time of the circuit beaker. You do not have to add any further time.
Siemens recommends the following procedure:
Establish a condition in which the circuit breaker can be closed without hazard.
If V2 switching through, activate the operating mode Close cmd. at V1< & V2> for the synchroniza-
tion stage by setting to yes.
If V1 is switched through, activate the operating mode Close cmd. at V1> & V2<.
Make sure that the fault recorder is turned on. Via a temporary CFC chart, link the signal Release
close cmd. of the active synchronization stage to the binary input signal >Manual start (of the fault
recorder). With the release of closure, a fault record of the parameterized duration is set up (the default
setting of 500 ms is more than adequate for this).
Starting the synchronization stage. The device activates immediately.
Read the fault record and determine the closing time via SIGRA (see Figure 10-9).
Use the 2 cursors and the time-measuring function for this. Position the first cursor on the raising close
command. The occurrence of the second voltage signals the closed power-switching poles. Place the
second cursor on the raising second voltage.
Set the determined time with the CB make time parameter. Round off to the next lower adjustable
value. Proceed in the same way for all other sync stages.
Set the parameter Close cmd. at V1< & V2> or parameter Close cmd. at V1< & V2< back to
its original value.
Delete the CFC chart.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
[scsyn001-170510-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-9 Measurement of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Time
2. The arrangement in Figure 10-10 is suitable for measuring the circuit-breaker operating time with external
timer. Set the timer to the range 1 s or a tripping of 1 ms.
Connect the circuit breaker manually. The timer is started simultaneously by this. After the poles of the circuit
breaker close, the voltage VLine appears. The timer is then stopped.
If the timer is not stopped owing to an unfavorable closing moment, repeat the attempt.
Siemens recommends calculating the average value from several (3 to 5) successful switching attempts.
NOTE
i Add the command output time of the protected device to measured time. This exclusively depends in good
approximation on the binary output used for the close command. You can find the switching times for the
different binary outputs in the Technical data. Set the total time with the parameter CB make time.
Round off to the next lower adjustable value. Proceed in the same way for all other synchronization stages
used.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
[dwsynae6-080211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 10-10 Measurement of the Circuit-Breaker Closing Time
Checking the Measurement Chain

The measurement chain for the voltage measurement must be checked. As soon as one of the synchroniza-
tion stages to be used is closed, all the necessary functional measured values are calculated. The synchroni-
zation stage, thus, does not have to be started for this check.
Proceed as follows when checking the measurement chain as a primary or secondary test:
a) As primary test
Establish a synchronous state by closing the circuit breaker, if possible.
Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
The delta values must be 0.
Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
values for the voltage.
Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.
b) As secondary test
Establish a synchronous state by applying synchronous voltage values at both measuring points.
Check the functional measured values within the synchronization function:
The delta values must be 0.
Check the voltages V1 and V2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
values for the voltage.
Check the frequencies f1 and f2 for plausible values in comparison with the operational measured
value for the frequency.
Blind Switching Attempts when Used in Machines

Perform blind switching attempts when using the function in machines.
Requirement:
You have checked the setting values again.
The circuit breaker is switched off. The close command for the circuit breaker is interrupted (discon-
necting the close command). The system voltage is switched through for the measurement.
a) Attempt with asynchronous systems:

Via manual control set the generator to a speed slightly below the permitted frequency difference
according to the setting values Max. frequency diff. f2>f1 and Max. frequency diff.
f2<f1. The generator is excited to line voltage. You can read out the values in the operational meas-
ured values.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Functional Tests
Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller. You can use a synchroscope to trigger the start at synchronism, that is, at 12 hours. The
duration until the close command then corresponds to a cycle with the duration 1/f. At a frequency
difference of 0.1 Hz, the duration is thus 10 s.
Insofar as permissible, perform this attempt several time for oversynchronous switching and subsynchro-
nous switching.
The switching performance can be checked with an external recorder or the integrated fault recording
function. You have to start the fault recording explicitly.
You can repeat the blind switching attempts at the limits of the permissible voltage difference.
b) Attempt with synchronous systems:

Start the synchronization stage, for example, externally with binary input signal or via the integrated
controller.
Check the proper release for activation with the message log or via a fault record. You have to start the
fault recording explicitly. All activation conditions have to be fulfilled within the time Delay close
command.
If you observe the change between synchronous and asynchronous operation, raise the changeover
threshold f-threshold ASYN<->SYN slightly.
c) Attempt with synchrocheck:

If you use this function in conjunction with the manual synchronization, check the proper release for
closure.
Synchronize the generator manually. Start the synchronization stage externally via a binary input. Check
the proper release for closure with the indicatiion log or via the fault record. You have to start the fault
recording explicitly.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
11 Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data 1484

11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology 1493
11.3 Date and Time Synchronization 1495
11.4 Line Differential Protection 1496
11.5 Stub Differential Protection 1498
11.6 Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) 1499
11.7 Distance Protection with the Classical Method 1501
11.8 Impedance Protection 1504
11.9 Power-Swing Blocking 1506
11.10 Teleprotection with Distance Protection 1507
11.11 Teleprotection with Ground-Fault Protection 1508
11.12 Echo and Tripping in the Event of Weak Infeed 1509
11.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French Specification 1510
11.14 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in Grounded Systems 1511
11.15 External Trip Initiation 1516
11.16 Automatic Reclosing 1517
11.17 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases 1518
11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases 1519
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-defined Characteristic Curve 1526
11.20 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground 1528
11.21 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground 1530
11.22 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve 1538
11.23 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases 1540
11.24 Instantaneous High-Current Tripping 1543
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection) 1544
11.26 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection) 1546
11.27 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic Curve 1548
11.28 Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection, Phases 1550
11.29 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection 1552
11.30 Non-Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 1557
11.31 Directional Intermittent Ground-Fault Protection 1559
11.32 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay 1561
11.33 Undercurrent Protection 1562
11.34 Overvoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 1564
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.35 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1566

11.36 Overvoltage Protection with Negative-Sequence Voltage 1567
11.37 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and Compounding 1568
11.38 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage 1569
11.39 Overvoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1570
11.40 Undervoltage Protection with 3-Phase Voltage 1572
11.41 Undervoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage 1574
11.42 Undervoltage Protection with Any Voltage 1575
11.43 Fault Locator 1577
11.44 Overfrequency Protection 1578
11.45 Underfrequency Protection 1579
11.46 Rate of Frequency Change Protection 1580
11.47 Instantaneous Tripping at Switch onto Fault 1581
11.48 Thermal Overload Protection 1582
11.49 Analog-Units Function Group 1585
11.50 Temperature Supervision 1586
11.51 Circuit-Breaker Failure Protection 1587
11.52 Circuit-Breaker Restrike Protection 1589
11.53 Out-of-Step Protection 1590
11.54 Inrush-Current Detection 1591
11.55 3-Phase Power Protection (P,Q) 1592
11.56 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection 1593
11.57 Current-Jump Detection 1595
11.58 Voltage-Jump Detection 1596
11.59 Arc Protection 1597
11.60 Synchronization Function 1598
11.61 Voltage Controller 1600
11.62 Broken-Wire Detection 1602
11.63 Current-Balance Supervision 1603
11.64 Voltage-Balance Supervision 1604
11.65 Current-Sum Supervision 1605
11.66 Voltage-Sum Supervision 1606
11.67 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision 1607
11.68 Voltage Phase-Rotation Reversal 1608
11.69 Trip-Circuit Supervision 1609
11.70 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum 1610
11.71 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection 1611
11.72 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker 1612
11.73 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values 1613
11.74 Energy Values 1617
11.75 Phasor Measurement Unit 1618
11.76 Measuring Transducers 1619
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.77 Circuit-Breaker Wear Monitoring 1620

11.78 CFC 1621
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.1 General Device Data
11.1.1 Analog Inputs
Current Inputs
All current, voltage, and power data are specified as RMS values.
Rated frequency frated 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Protection-class current trans- Rated current Irated Measuring range
formers
5A 0 A to 500 A
1A 0 A to 100 A
Instrument transformers 5A 0 A to 8 A
1A 0 A to 1.6 A
Power consumption per current Approx. 0.1 VA
circuit at rated current
Thermal rating 500 A for 1 s
(protection and instrument trans- 150 A for 10 s
formers) 20 A continuously
25 A for 3 min
30 A for 2 min
Dynamic load-carrying capacity 1250 A one half wave
Current Inputs
Protection-class current trans- Rated current Irated Measuring range of Measuring range of the
formers the modular devices non-modular devices
5A 0 A to 500 A 0 A to 250 A
1A 0 A to 100 A 0 A to 50 A
Instrument transformers 5A 0 A to 8 A 0 A to 8 A
1A 0 A to 1.6 A 0 A to 1.6 A
Power consumption per current Approx. 0.1 VA
circuit at rated current
Thermal rating 500 A for 1 s
(protection and instrument trans- 150 A for 10 s
formers) 20 A continuously
25 A for 3 min
30 A for 2 min
Dynamic load-carrying capacity 1250 A one half wave
Voltage Input
Input and output modules IO202/IO208/IO211/IO214 IO215
Measuring range 0 V to 200 V 0 V to 7.07 V
Input impedance 200 k 7 k
Thermal rating 230 V continuously 20 V continuously
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ANAI-CA-4EL)
Connector type 8-pin multiple contact strip

Differential current input channels 4
Measuring range DC -24 mA to +24 mA
Fault < 0.5 % of measuring range
Input impedance 140
Conversion principle Delta-sigma (16 bit)
Permissible potential difference DC 20 V
between channels
Galvanic separation from ground/ DC 700 V
housing
Permissible overload DC 100 mA continuously
Measurement repetition 200 ms
Measuring-Transducer Inputs (via Module ARC-CD-3FO)
Connector type AVAGO AFBR-4526Z

Number of transceivers 3
Fiber type Polymer Optical Fiber (POF) 1 mm
Receiver
Maximum -10 dBm 2 dBm
Minimum -40 dBm 2 dBm
Spectrum 400 nm to 1100 nm
Attenuation In the case of plastic optical fibers, you can expect a path attenuation of
0.2 dB/m Additional attenuation comes from the plug and sensor head.
Optical budget 1 Minimal 25 dB
Analog sampling rate 16 kHz
ADC type 10-bit successive approximation
Transmitter
Type LED
Wavelength = 650 nm
Transmit power Minimum 0 dBm
Maximum 2 dBm
Numerical aperture 0.5 2
Signal rate connection test 1 pulse per second
Pulse duration connection test 11 s
Comment:
1 All values in combination with sensors approved by Siemens.
2 Numerical aperture (NA = sin (launch angle))
High-Speed Measuring-Transducer Inputs, Voltage/Current (via IO212)
NOTE
i Due to possible EMC interference, pay attention to ensure that only the connections for current or for
voltage are used on the device.
Use shielded cables.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Table 11-1 High-Speed Measuring-Transducer Inputs, Voltage
Differential voltage input channels 827

Measuring range DC -10 V to +10 V
Fault < 0.5 % of the measuring range
Input impedance 48 k
Permissible potential difference DC 3.5 kV
between channels
Galvanic separation from ground/ DC 3.5 kV
housing
Permissible overload DC 20 V continuously
Measurement repetition 62.5 s
Table 11-2 High-Speed Measuring-Transducer Inputs, Current
Differential current input channels 828

Measuring range DC -20 mA to +20 mA
Fault < 0.5 % of the measuring range
Input impedance, current 12
Permissible potential difference DC 3.5 kV
between channels
Galvanic separation from ground/ DC 3.5 kV
housing
Permissible current overload DC 100 mA continuously
Measurement repetition 62.5 s
11.1.2 Supply Voltage
Integrated Power Supply

For modular devices, the following printed circuit-board assemblies have a power supply:
PS201 Power supply of the base module and of the 1st device row
PS203 Voltage supply of 2nd device row
CB202 Plug in module assembly with integrated power supply, for example, to accommodate communica-
tion modules
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to DC 300 V
ranges AC 80 V to AC 265 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(PS201, PS203, CB202)
Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/DC 125 V/DC 220 V/
(PS201, PS203, CB202) DC 250 V or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Permissible voltage DC 19 V to DC 60 V DC 48 V to 150 V DC 88 V to DC 300 V
ranges (PS101) AC 80 V to AC 265 V,
50 Hz/60 Hz
27 The IO212 has 8 high-speed measuring-transducer inputs. They can be used either as a voltage or as current input.
28 The IO212 has 8 high-speed measuring-transducer inputs. They can be used either as a voltage or as current input.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Integrated Power Supply

Auxiliary rated voltage VH DC 24 V/DC 48 V DC 60 V/DC 110 V/ DC 110 V/ DC 125 V/
(PS101) DC 125 V DC 220 V/DC 250 V
or
AC 100 V/AC 115 V/
AC 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Superimposed alternating voltage, peak-to-peak, 15% of the DC auxiliary rated voltage (applies only
IEC 60255-11 to direct voltage)
Inrush current 18 A
Recommended external protection Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, characteristic C
according to IEC 60898
Internal fuse
DC 24 V to DC 48 V DC 60 V to DC 125 V DC 24 V to DC 48 V
AC 100 V to AC 230 V
PS101 4 A intert, AC 250 V, 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
DC 150 V, SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or
Schurter type SPT 5x20
PS201, PS203, CB202 2 A time-lag, AC 250 V, DC 300 V, UL recognized
SIBA type 179200 or Schurter type SPT 5x20
Power consumption (life relay active)
DC AC 230 V/50 Hz AC 115 V/50 Hz
1/3 base module, non- 7.0 W 16 VA 12.5 VA
modular
Without plug-in modules
1/3 base module, modular 13 W 33 VA 24 VA
Without plug-in modules
1/6 expansion module 3W 6 VA 6 VA
1/6 plug-in module 3.5 W 14 VA 7 VA
assembly without plug-in
modules (modules
CB202)
Plug-in module for base <5W < 6 VA < 6 VA
module or plug-in module
assembly (for example,
communication module)
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V DC 24 V 50 ms
short circuit, modular devices For V DC 110 V 50 ms
For V AC 115 V 50 ms
Stored-energy time for auxiliary voltage outage or For V DC 24 V 20 ms
short circuit, non-modular devices For V DC 60 V/DC 110 V 50 ms
For V AC 115 V 200 ms
11.1.3 Binary Inputs
Rated voltage range DC 24 V to 250 V

The binary inputs of SIPROTEC 5 are bipolar with the exception of the
binary inputs on the IO230 and on the IO231.
Current consumption, excited Approx. DC 0.6 mA to 1.8 mA (independent of the operating voltage)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Power consumption, max. 0.6 VA

Pickup time Approx. 3 ms
Dropout time Approx. 4 ms
Switching thresholds Adjustable with DIGSI 5
Range 1 for 24 V, 48 V, and 60 V Vlow DC 10 V
Operating voltage Vhigh DC 19 V
Range 2 for 110 V and 125 V Vlow DC 44 V
Range 3 for 220 V and 250 V Vlow DC 88 V
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V
The binary inputs contain interference suppression capacitors. In order to ensure EMC, use the terminals
shown in the terminal diagrams/connection diagrams to connect the binary inputs to the common potential.
11.1.4 Relay Outputs
Standard Relay (Type S)
Switching capacity On: 1000 W/VA

Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
30 W/VA at L/R 40 ms
AC and DC contact voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact (continuous) 5A
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s (make contact)
holding)
Short-time current across closed contact 250 A for 30 ms
Total permissible current for contacts connected to 5A
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) 10 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Max. rated data of the output contacts in accordance DC 24 V, 8 A, General Purpose
with UL certification DC 48 V, 0.8 A, General Purpose
DC 240 V, 0.1 A, General Purpose
AC 240 V, 5 A, General Purpose
AC 120 V, 1/3 hp
AC 250 V, 1/2 hp
B300
R300
Interference suppression capacitors across the 4.7 nF, 20 %, AC 250 V
contacts
Fast Relay (Type F)
Switching capacity On: 1000 W/VA

Off: 30 VA; 40 W ohmic;
30 W/VA at L/R 40 ms
holding)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Closing time, typical: 4 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Opening time, typical: 2 ms
Maximum: 5 ms
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with AC 120 V, 8.5 A, General Purpose
UL certification AC 277 V, 6 A, General Purpose
AC 277 V, 0.7 hp
AC 347 V, 4.5 A, General Purpose
B300
R300
contacts
Supervision 2-channel activation with cyclic testing (only for make
contact)
High-Speed Relay with Semiconductor Acceleration (Type HS)
Switching capacity On/Off: 1000 W/VA

Contact voltage AC 200 V, DC 250 V
holding)
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) Closing time, typical: 0.2 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used Opening time, typical: 6 ms
Maximum: 9 ms
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with B150
UL certification Q300
Power Relay (for Direct Control of Motor Switches)
Switching capacity for permanent and periodic operation

250 V/4.0 A 1000 W In order to prevent any damage, the external protec-
220 V/4.5 A 1000 W tion circuit must switch off the motor in case the rotor
110 V/5.0 A 550 W is blocked.
60 V/5.0 A 300 W
48 V/5.0 A 240 W
24 V/5.0 A 120 W
Turn on switching power for 30 s, recovery time until switching on again is 15 minutes.
For short-term switching operations, an impulse/pause ratio of 3 % must be considered.
100 V/9.0 A 1000 W Continuous and inching operation is not permitted.
60 V/10.0 A 600 W In order to prevent any damage, the external protec-
48 V/10.0 A 480 W tion circuit must switch off the motor in case the rotor
24 V/10.0 A 240 W is blocked.
Permissible continuous current per contact 5A
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Permissible current per contact (switching on and 30 A for 1 s

holding)
common potential
Switching time OOT (Output Operating Time) 16 ms
Additional delay of the output medium used
Rated data of the output contacts in accordance with DC 300 V, 10 A, Resistive
UL certification DC 250 V, 1 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
DC 110 V, 3/4 hp motor - 30 s ON, 15 min OFF
contacts
The power relays operate in interlocked mode, that is, only one relay of each switching pair picks up at a
time thereby avoiding a power-supply short circuit.
11.1.5 Design Data
Masses
Device Size
Weight of the Modular Devices
Type of construction 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
Flush-mounting device 4.8 kg 8.1 kg 11.4 kg 14.7 kg 18.0 kg
Surface-mounted device with inte- 7.8 kg 12.6 kg 17.4 kg 22.2 kg 27.0 kg
grated on-site operation panel
Surface-mounted device with 5.1 kg 8.7 kg 12.3 kg 15.9 kg 19.5 kg
detached on-site operation panel
Size Weight
Detached on-site operation panel 1/3 1.9 kg
Detached on-site operation panel 1/6 1.1 kg
Device Size
Weight of the Non-Modular Devices 7xx82
Type of construction 1/3
Flush-mounting device 3.7 kg
Bracket for non-modular surface- 1.9 kg
mounting variant
Dimensions of the Basic and 1/3 Modules
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width over all x Height over all x Depth 29(in Inches)
Flush-mounting device 150 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm (5.91 x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with integrated on-site oper- 150 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm (5.91 x 12.36 x 13.27)
ation panel
Surface-mounted device with detached on-site opera- 150 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm (5.91 x 12.36 x 9.06)
tion panel
29 Width and depth rounded to whole numbers in mm
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Dimensions of Device Rows
Type of Width over all x Height over all x Depth 30(in Inches)
Construction
(Maximum
Dimensions)
Type of 1/3 1/2 2/3 5/6 1/1
construction
Flush-mounting 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
device 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x 268 mm x
229 mm (5.91 x 229 mm (8.86 x 229 mm(11.81 x 229 mm (14.76 x 229 mm (17.72 x
10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02) 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounted device 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x
with integrated 337 mm (5.91 x 337 mm (8.86 x 337 mm (11.81 x 337 mm (14.76 x 337 mm (17.72 x
on-site operation 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27) 12.36 x 13.27)
panel
Surface- 150 mm x 225 mm x 300 mm x 375 mm x 450 mm x
mounted device 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x 314 mm x
with detached 230 mm (5.91 x 230 mm (8.86 x 230 mm (11.81 x 230 mm (14.76 x 230 mm (17.72 x
on-site operation 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06) 12.36 x 9.06)
panel
Expansion Module Dimensions
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width x Height x Depth 31 (in Inches)

Flush-mounting device 75 mm x 268 mm x 229 mm (2.95 x 10.55 x 9.02)
Surface-mounted device with integrated on-site oper- 75 mm x 314 mm x 337 mm (2.95 x 12.36 x 13.27)
ation panel
Surface-mounted device with detached on-site opera- 75 mm x 314 mm x 230 mm (2.95 x 12.36 x 9.06)
tion panel
Plug-In Module Dimensions
Type of Construction (Maximum Dimensions) Width x Height x Depth (in Inches)

USART-Ax-xEL, ETH-Bx-xEL 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.74)
USART-Ax-xFO, ETH-Bx-xFO (without protection 61 mm x 45 mm x 132.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 5.22)
cover)
ANAI-CA-4EL 61 mm x 45 mm x 119.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.7)
ARC-CD-3FO 61 mm x 45 mm x 120.5 mm (2.4 x 1.77 x 4.74)
Minimum Bending Radii of the Connecting Cables Between the On-Site Operation Panel and the Base Module
Fiber-optic cable R = 50 mm
Pay attention to the length of the cable protection
sleeve, which you must also include in calculations.
D-Sub cable R = 50 mm (minimum bending radius)
Degree of Protection to IEC 60529
For equipment in the surface-mounting housing IP50

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
For equipment in the flush-mounting housing Front IP51

Back side of the modular devices IP50
Back side of the non-modular devices IP40
For operator protection IP2x for current terminal (installed removed)
IP1x for voltage terminal (removed/without cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal (removed/with cover)
IP2x for voltage terminal (installed)
Degree of pollution, IEC 60255-27 2
Maximum altitude above sea level 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
UL Note
Type 1 if mounted into a door or front cover of an enclosure.

When expanding the device with the 2nd device row, then they must be mounted completely inside an
enclosure.
Tightening Torques for Terminal Screws
Type of Line Current Terminal Voltage Terminal with Voltage Terminal with
Spring-Loaded Terminals Screw Connection
Litz wire with ring-type lug 2.7 Nm No ring-type lug No ring-type lug
Stranded wires with boot- 2.7 Nm 1.0 Nm 0.6 Nm
lace ferrules or pin-type
lugs
Solid conductor, bare 2.0 Nm 1.0 Nm
(2 mm2)
NOTE
i Use copper cables only.
Torques for Other Screw Types
Screw Type Torque

M4 x 20 1.2 Nm
M4 x 8 1.2 Nm
M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 6 0.39 Nm
Countersunk screw, M2.5 x 8 0.39 Nm
Collar screw, M4 x 20 0.7 Nm
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.2 Protection Interface and Protection Topology

Setting Values
Mode On
Off
PPS Synchronization Telegr. and PPS
Telegr. or PPS
PPS synchronization off
Blocking of the unbalanced Yes
runtimes No
Maximum signal runtime threshold 0.1 ms to 30.0 ms Increments of 0.1 ms
Maximum runtime difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms Increments of 0.001 ms
Failure indication after 0.05 s to 2.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Failure indication after 0.0 s to 6.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Max. error rate/h 0.000 % to 100.000 % Increments of 0.001 %
Max. error rate/min 0.000 % to 100.000 % Increments of 0.001 %
PPS failure indication after 0.5 s to 60.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Transmission Rate
Direct connection:
Transmission rate 2048 kbit/s
Connection via communication networks:
Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kBit/s
G703-T1 with 1.455 MBit/s
G703-E1 with 2.048 MBit/s
X.21 with 64 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 512 kBit/s
Pilot wires with 128 kbit/s
Transmission rate 64 kBit/s at G703.1
1.455 MBit/s at G703-T1
2.048 MBit/s at G703-E1
512 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or 64 kBit/s at X.21
128 kBit/s for pilot wires
Transmission Times
Priority 1
Response time, total approx.
For 2 ends Minimum 8 ms
Typical 10 ms
Typical 14 ms
Typical 18 ms
Dropout times, total approx.
For 2 ends Typical 20 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Priority 2
Typical 16 ms
Typical 18 ms
Typical 23 ms
Priority 332
For 2 ends Minimum
Typical 100 ms
For 3 ends Minimum
Typical 150 ms
For 6 ends Minimum
Typical 200 ms
32 Times cannot be determined because the signals are transmitted in fragments.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Date format DD.MM.YYYY (Europe)
MM/DD/YYYY (USA)
YYYY-MM-DD (China)
Time source 1, time source 2 None
IRIG-B 002(003)
IRIG-B 006(007)
IRIG-B 005(004) with extension according to
IEEE C37.118-2005
DCF77
PI (protection interface)33
SNTP
IEC 60870-5-103
DNP3
IEEE 1588
Time zone 1, time zone 2 Local
UTC
Failure indication after 0 s to 3600 s
Time zone and daylight saving time Transfer of PC settings
Manually setting the time zones
Time zone offset with respect to GMT -720 min to 840 min
Switching over to daylight saving time Active
Inactive
Beginning of daylight saving time Input: day and time
End of daylight saving time Input: day and time
Offset daylight saving time -120 to 120 [steps of 15]
33 If provided
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Tripping Thresholds, Idiff stage
Threshold value 10.0 % to 2 000.0 % of Irated Operation Increments of 0.1%

Threshold value upon switching 10.0% to 2 000.0 % of Irated Operation Increments of 0.1%
Tripping Thresholds, IDiff Fast Stage
Threshold value 80.0 % to 10 000.0 % of Irated Operation Increments of 0.1%

Threshold value upon switching 80.0 % to 10 000.0 % of Irated Operation Increments of 0.1%
Trigger Value Tolerances
When using up to 3 line ends 5 % of setting value or 1 % of Irated for each line end
When using up to 6 line ends 10 % of setting value or 1 % of Irated for each line end
Operating Times
The tripping times depend on the number of line ends, the communication speed, and the configured output
contacts. The following data assume a transmission rate of at least 512 kbit/s.
Tripping Times of the IDiff Stage
When using 2 line ends Minimum (50/60 Hz) 26/23 ms + OOT34
Typical (50/60 Hz) 28/25 ms + OOT
When using 3 line ends Minimum (50/60 Hz) 26/23 ms + OOT
Typical (50/60 Hz) 30/27 ms +OOT
When using 6 line ends Minimum (50/60 Hz) 31/27 ms + OOT
Dropout Times of the IDiff Stage
For all line ends Typical 34 ms to 49 ms + OOT
Tripping Times of the IDiff Fast Stage

When using 2 line ends Minimum 8 ms + OOT
Typical 11 ms + OOT
Typical 11 ms + OOT
Typical 19 ms + OOT
Dropout Times of the Idiff Fast Stage
For all line ends Typical 34 ms to 49 ms + OOT
Time Delays
Delay of the Idiff stage 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

Delay of the Idiff rapid stage 0.00 s Not adjustable
Delay of 1-phase pickup in resonant- 0.00 s to 0.50 s Increments of 0.01 s
grounded/isolated systems
Timer tolerance 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
34 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Self-Stabilization
Transformer Fault for Each Line End of the Protected Object

Error transmission ratio 1.00 to 10.00 Increments of 0.01
Transformer error A 0.5 % to 50.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Transformer error B (class) 0.5 % to 50.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Other stabilizing values (adaptive self- Frequency deviations, runtime differences, harmonics,
stabilization) synchronism quality, jitter
Adjustments for Transformers in the Protection Range
Vector group adjustment (U 0 to 11 Increments of 1

and I)
Residual current elimination yes or no
Adjustment of the Charging-Current Compensation
Additional rest. current Ic-rest./Ic-rated 1.0 to 4.0 Increments of 0.1

Total line length 0.1 km to 1 000.0 Increments of 0.1 km
km
Frequency Operating Range
0.9 f/frated 1.1 Operating range with rated accuracy

0.8 f/frated 0.9 Normal operating range without rated accuracy
1.1 f/frated 1.2
0.0 f/frated 0.8 Stable operation without rated accuracy
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Tripping Thresholds of the IDiff Stage
Threshold value 10.0 % to 2 000.0 % of Irated operation Increments of 0.1 %
Tripping Thresholds of the IDiff Fast Stage
Threshold value 80.0 % to 10 000.0 % of Irated operation Increments of 0.1 %
Tolerances of the Tripping Thresholds
5 % of the setting value or 1 % of Irated
Operating Times
The reported tripping times assume the issuance of commands via high-speed relays (type HS).
Tripping Times of the IDiff Stage
Minimum (50/60 Hz) 26/23 ms + OOT35
Dropout Times of the IDiff Stage
Typical 34 ms to 49 ms + OOT
Tripping Times of the IDiff Fast Stage

Minimum 8 ms + OOT
Typical 11 ms + OOT
Dropout Times of the IDiff Fast Stage
Typical 34 ms to 49 ms + OOT
Time Delays
Tripping delay of the Idiff stage 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

Tolerance 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Self-Stabilization
Transformer Fault for Each Line End of the Protected Object

Error transmission 1.00 to 10.00 Increments of 0.01
Transformer fault A 0.5 % to 50.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Transformer fault B (class) 0.5 % to 50.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Other stabilizing values (adaptive Frequency deviations, harmonic components
self-stabilization)
0.9 f/frated 1.1 Operating range with rated accuracy

0.8 f/frated 0.9 Normal operating range without rated accuracy
1.1 f/frated 1.2
0.0 f/frated 0.8 Stable operation without rated accuracy
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Residual Compensation
Kr -0.33 to 11.00 Increments of 0.01

Kx -0.33 to 11.00 Increments of 0.01
K0 0.000 to 11.000 Increments of 0.001
Angle (K0) -180.00 to +180.00 Increments of 0.01
Configurable separately
for each zone
Parallel-Line Matching
KmR 0.00 to 8.00 Increments of 0.01

KmX 0.00 to 8.00 Increments of 0.01
Km0 0.000 to 8.000 Increments of 0.001
Angle (Km0) -180.00 to +180.00 Increments of 0.01
Min. phase-current thresh 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 4.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 20.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
V0> threshold value 0.300 V to 200,000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measurands 5%
Distance Measurement
Characteristic Quadrilateral or MHO characteristic

Dist = Angle of distance-protection characteristic 30.0 to 90.0 Increments of 0.1
Polygon setting ranges (for Zone settings = Advanced)
X reach = reactance reach For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
RF (ph-g) = Fault resistance For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
phase-to-ground
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
RF (ph-ph) = Fault resistance For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
phase-to-phase
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
Substitute for IF 3I2
3I0
Comp. angle zero seq. -40.00 to 40.00 Increments of 0.01
Comp. angle neg. seq. -40.00 to 40.00 Increments of 0.01
j Line = Line angle 10.00 to 89.00 Increments of 0.01
j = Delta Dist. charact. angle 0.00 to 80.00 Increments of 0.01
Direction determination for polygon:

For all fault types With actual short-circuit, buffered, quadrature
voltages, or with Delta variables
Directional sensitivity Dynamically unlimited, stationary about 1 V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Every zone can be configured as forward, reverse, or non-directional.

Setting ranges for MHO characteristic:
Zr impedance reach For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.00
Every zone can be configured as forward or reverse.
Load cutout for positive-sequence loops (phase-phase-phase-loop):
Rload = Minimum load resistance For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
Load = Maximum load angle 20.0 to 60.0 Increments of 0.1
Dropout ratios
- Currents About 0.95
- Impedances About 1.05
Measured-value correction For ground-current coupling in parallel lines
Measuring tolerances for sinusoidal measurands
Times
Shortest operate time Approx. 9 ms + OOT36 at 50 Hz

Approx. 8 ms (60 Hz) + OOT
Incremental times 0.00 s to 60.00 s; for all Increments of 0.01 s
zones
The set times are pure time delays.
0.9 f/frated to 1.1 f/frated According to specified tolerances

0.8 f/frated f < 0.9 f/frated Slightly expanded tolerances
1.1 f/frated f 1.2 f/frated
f < 0.8 frated Active
f > 1.2 frated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.7 Distance Protection with the Classical Method

Residual Compensation
Kr -0.33 to 11.00 Increments of 0.01

Kx -0.33 to 11.00 Increments of 0.01
K0 0.000 to 11.000 Increments of 0.001
Angle (K0) -180.00 to +180.00 Increments of 0.01
Configurable separately for each zone
Parallel-Line Matching
KmR 0.00 to 8.00 Increments of 0.01

KmX 0.00 to 8.00 Increments of 0.01
Km0 0.000 to 8.000 Increments of 0.001
Angle (Km0) -180.00 to +180.00 Increments of 0.01
Phase Preference
For double ground faults in a grounded system Block leading phase from ground
Block lagging phase from ground
Release all loops involved
Release phase-to-ground loops involved
Release phase-to-phase loops involved
For double ground faults in isolated or resonant- C(A) acyclical
grounded system A(C) acyclical
B(A) acyclical
A(B) acyclical
C(B) acyclical
B(C) acyclical
C(A) cyclical
A(C) cyclical
All loops involved
Threshold value 3I0> 1 A @ 100 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Irated
5 A @ 100 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Irated
Threshold value V0> 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Measurement tolerances for sinusoidal measur- 5%
ands
Pickup Method
Overcurrent Pickup
Iph>> 1 A @ 100 0.250 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Irated
Irated
Dropout ratios Approx. 0.95
Measurement tolerances for sinusoidal measurands 5%
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Voltage and phase angle-dependent current pickup (V/I/j) (optional)

Characteristic Cascaded with adjustable slopes
Minimum phase current Iph> 1 A @ 100 0.100 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Irated
Irated
Current in short circuit angle range 1 A @ 100 0.100 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Ij Irated
Irated
Undervoltage phase-to-ground (individually separated 0.500 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
according to Iph>, Iph>>, and Ij>)
Undervoltage phase-to-phase (individually separated 1.000 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
according to Iph>, Iph>>, and Ij>)
Lower threshold angle j> 30.0 to 60.0 Increments of 0.1
Upper threshold angle j< 90.0 to 120.0 Increments of 0.1
Dropout ratios
Iph>, Ij> Approx. 0.95
Phase-to-ground voltage Approx. 1.05
Phase-to-phase voltage
Measurement tolerances for sinusoidal measurands
Amounts of V, I 5%
Angle j 3
Impedance pickup (optional)
Minimum phase current Iph> 1 A @ 100 0.050 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Irated
Irated
Under consideration of the respective direction, the limits of the zones that are set the furthest, are the most
important ones
Dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Distance Measurement
Characteristic Quadrilateral or MHO characteristic

Minimum phase current I> 1 A @ 100 0.050 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Irated
Irated
Dist = Angle of distance-protection characteristic 30.0 to 90.0 Increments of 0.1
Quadrilateral setting ranges
X reach = reach of reactance For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
R (ph-ph) = Phase-to-phase For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
resistance reserve
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
R (ph-gnd) = Phase-to-ground For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
resistance reserve
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
Pole = Zone inclination 0 to 45 Increments of 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Direction determination for polygon:

For all fault types With actual short-circuit, buffered or cross-polarized
voltages
Directional sensitivity Dynamically unlimited, stationary about 1 V
Every zone can be configured as forward, reverse, or non-directional.
Setting ranges for MHO characteristic:
Zr impedance range For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.00
Polarization With buffered or cross-polarized voltages
Every zone can be configured as forward or backward.
Load cutout (for impedance pickup):
Rload = Minimum load resist- For Irated = 1 A 0.050 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001
ance For Irated = 5 A 0.010 to 120.000
load = Maximum load angle 20.0 to 60.0 Increments of 0.1
Dropout Ratios
- Currents Approx. 0.95
- Impedances Approx. 1.05
Measured-value correction For ground-current coupling in parallel lines
Measurement tolerances for sinusoidal measur-
ands
Times
Shortest operate time Approx. 9 ms + OOT37 at 50 Hz

Approx. 8 ms (60 Hz) + OOT
Incremental times 0.00 s to 60.00 s; for all zones Increments of 0.01 s
The times set are pure time delays.

0.8 f/frated f < 0.9 f/frated Slightly expanded tolerances
1.1 f/frated f 1.2 f/frated
f < 0.8 frated Active
f > 1.2 frated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Min. phase-current thresh 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 100.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

X reach (ph-g) = reach of For Irated = 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001 A
reactance, phase-to-
For Irated = 5 A 0.020 to 120.000 Increments of 0.001 A
ground
X reach (ph-ph) = reach For Irated = 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001 A
of reactance, phase-to-
phase
R reach (ph-g) = reach of For Irated = 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001 A
resistance, phase-to-
ground
R reach (ph-ph) = reach For Irated = 1 A 0.100 to 600.000 Increments of 0.001 A
of resistance, phase-to-
phase
Dropout Ratios
Currents About 0.95

Voltage About 1.05
Impedances About 1.05
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 30 ms + OOT 38 at 50 Hz

Approx. 26 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
Dropout time Approx. 30 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
0.9 f/frated 1.1 According to specified tolerances

10 Hz f < 0.9 frated Slightly expanded tolerances
1.1 frated < f 80 Hz
f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10 %)
Voltage 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V
38 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the used output medium, such as 5 ms with quick-acting relay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Impedances
Measurement tolerances for sinusoidal values
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

General
Measuring principle Cyclic supervision of impedance curves for

monotony, continuity, and jump
Detectable power-swing frequency 0.1 Hz to 12 Hz for symmetrical operation,
up to 7 Hz during 1-pole dead times and unbalanced
faults
Power-swing blocking Can be set separately for each distance-protection
zone
Times
Power-swing detection time 2.5 power-system cycles

Dropout time 5.5 power-system cycles in case of unbalanced
faults
5.5 power-system cycles in case of balanced faults
Max. 5 s after leaving the pickup range of the
distance protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip
Adjustable method Transfer via pickup, directed

Transfer via pickup, not directed
Transfer via expanded range
Direct transfer
Send prolongation 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Delay (1-pin) 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Delay (multi-pin) 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
Adjustable process Permissive overreach transfer trip scheme

Direction comparison process
Direction unblock process
Transmission extension 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Transmission delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Trans. blk. pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Trans. blk. dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
The times set are pure delay times.
Blocking Procedure

Release delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Trans. blocking time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Trans. block. waiting time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
The times set are pure delay times
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip
Adjustable process Permissive overreach transfer trip, directional

Unblock procedure, directional
Transmission delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip via the Protection Interface
Trans. blk. dropout delay

Adjustable method Directional comparison
Release delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Undervoltage
Value Setting Range Increment

U< threshold value 0.300 V to 340.000 V 0.001 V
Dropout ratio About 1.1
Response tolerance 5 % of the setting value
Times

Response tolerance 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Echo blocking duration 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.01 s
Echo/tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.01 s
Echo pulse duration 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.01 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.13 Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed According to French

Specification
Operating Mode
Tripping via undervoltage with reception signal from the opposite end
Undervoltage
Vph-g< factor 0.10 to 1.00 Increments of 0.01

Threshold Vph-gnd< 0.300 V to 100.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Response tolerance 5 % of the setting value
Times
Time constant Tau 1 s to 60 s Increments of 1 s

T 3I0> extension 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Receive extension 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
T 3I0> alarm 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Operate delay 1-ph. (TM) 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Op. delay multi-ph. (TT) 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Response tolerance 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.14 Ground-Fault Protection for High-Resistance Ground Faults in

Grounded Systems
Setting Values for All Stage Types
Directional mode Forwards, backwards, non-directional

Method of measurement Fundamental component over 1 cycle filter (standard filter)
Fundamental component over 2 cycle filters
Stabilization with phase currents 0 % to 30 % Increments of 1 %
Threshold value For transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.003 A to Increments of 0.001
(pickup value) I-sensitive and 100.000 A A
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.003 A to Increments of 0.001
500.000 A A
For transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.015 A to 100.000 Increments of 0.001
I-sensitive and A A
IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.015 A to Increments of 0.001
500.000 A A
For transformer type I-protection and IN- 0.030 A to 100.000 Increments of 0.001
A A
rated = 1 A
For transformer type I-protection and IN- 0.150 A to Increments of 0.001

500.000 A A
rated = 5 A
Extension time of the blocking 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s

after outgoing 1-pole pause
Settings Values for Stage Type 3I0 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Time delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Setting Values for Stage Type 3I0-IEC/ANSI
Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC (see Table 11-3) and ANSI (see
Table 11-4)
Time multiplier 0.05 to 15.00 Increments of 0.01
Additional delay 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
Setting Values for Stage Type 3I0 Logarithmic Inverse
Characteristic curve: see Figure 11-1

Threshold value multiplier 1.00 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
Minimum time of the characteristic 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
curve
Maximum time of the characteristic 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s
curve
Setting Values for Stage Type S0 Inverse

Threshold value multiplier 1.00 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
S ref for Sr-characteristic 1.000 VA to 100.000 VA Increments of 0.001 VA
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
k factor 0.000 s to 60.000 s Increments of 0.001 s

Setting Values for Stage Type V0 Inverse

V0> threshold value 0.300 V to 340.00 V Increments of 0.01
Min. zero-seq. volt. V0 0.000 V to 340.00 V Increments of 0.001 VA
Time delay directional 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Time delay non-direct. 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Setting Values for Direction Determination
At angular measurement between measuring and reference values:

Minimum zero voltage V0 0.150 V to 20.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Minimum transformer For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
neutral point current IY
For Irated = 5 A 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Minimum negative-sequence system voltage V2 0.150 V to 20.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Minimum negative- For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
sequence system current
I2
Upper limit angle forwards, 0o to 360o Increments of 1o
Lower limit angle forwards, 0o to 360o Increments of 1o
At angular measurement with zero power S0:
Zero power for forwards direction 0.10 VA to 10.00 VA Increments of 0.01 VA
Compensation angle 0o to 360o Increments of 1o
Characteristic Curves
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush-current Approx. 10 ms
detection
You can select from the following tripping and dropout characteristic curves:
Table 11-3 Standard Characteristic Curves to IEC
Normal inverse: type A See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-

Very inverse: type B tion, Phases , Figure 11-3
Extremely inverse: type C See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
Long-term inverse tion, Phases , Figure 11-4
Table 11-4 Standard Characteristic Curves to ANSI/IEEE

Long time inverse: type B tion, Phases , Figure 11-5
Long-term inverse See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
Moderately inverse tion, Phases , Figure 11-6
Very inverse See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
Extremely inverse tion, Phases , Figure 11-7
Uniformly inverse See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
tion, Phases , Figure 11-8
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
[logfpke1-030311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-1 Tripping Characteristic Curves of the Independent Overcurrent Protection with Logarithmic
Inverse Characteristic Curve
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
[logfpke2-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-2 Tripping Characteristic Curve of the Zero-Power Protection
Dropout Ratios
Threshold 3I0 (pickup value):

Stage type 3I0-IEC/ANSI 0.95 threshold
Stage type 3I0 logarithmic inverse 0.95 threshold
Stage type S0 inverse 0.95 threshold
Stage type V0 inverse 0.95 threshold
Values for Stage Type 3I0 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection
Operate time with time delay = 0 Fundamental component over 1 Approx. 25 ms + OOT39 at 50 Hz
ms cycle filter (standard filter) Approx. 25 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
Fundamental component over 2 Approx. 30 ms + OOT
cycle filters
Extension of the operate time during operation with transformer inrush- Approx. 10 ms
current detection
39 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see Chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Dropout time Fundamental component over 1 Approx. 20 ms + OOT

cycle filter (standard time)
Fundamental component over 2 Approx. 40 ms + OOT
cycle filters
Operating Range
frated 20 % Active
Outside of frated 20% Not active
Tolerances
Threshold values:
Response, release threshold value for zero system 1 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
current 3I0 with normal-sensitive ground current
converter
Response, release threshold value for zero system 1 % of the setting value or 0.5 % of the rated current
current 3I0 with sensitive ground-current transformer
Minimum zero voltage V0 1 % of the setting value or 1 V
Minimum transformer neutral point current IY 1 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Minimum negative-sequence system voltage V2 1 % of the setting value or 1 V
Minimum negative-sequence system current I2 1 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Times:
Independent delay times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Current-dependent time delay, 5 % of the setting value 10 ms
Characteristic curves to IEC, ANSI/IEEE and loga-
rithmic inverse characteristic curve
For 2 I/I3I0P 20 and T3I0P 1 s
Current-dependent time delay, 3 % of the setting value 10 ms
Characteristic curve: logarithmic-inverse
S0-dependent time delay 3 % of the setting value 10 ms
V0-dependent time delay 3 % of the setting value 20 ms
Limit angle for direction determination via angular 1.5o

measurement between measuring and reference
value
Zero power for forwards direction 5 % of the setting value 0.02 VA
Influencing Variables for Thresholds
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement = fundamental component <5%

over 1 cycle filter (standard filter), for > 100 ms (with complete displacement)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 10 ms + OOT40

with initiation via binary input signal
Tolerance
Sequence tolerance for delay times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.16 Automatic Reclosing
11.16 Automatic Reclosing

Function specifications Cyclic automatic reclosing function
Automatic reclosing function with adaptive dead time (ADT)
Number of reclosings Max. 8, per individual settings
Type (depending on the order 1-pole, 3-pole, or 1-/3-pole
variation)
Operating mode of the automatic With trip command, without action time
reclosing function With trip command, with action time
With pickup, without action time
With pickup, with action time
Reclaim time after reclosing 0.50 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Blocking time after dynamic 0.5 s -
blocking
Blocking time after manual closure 0.00 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Start supervision time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Circuit-breaker supervision time 0.01 s to 300.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Evolving-fault detection With trip command
with Pickup
Reaction to evolving faults Blocks automatic reclosing function
Start, evolving fault, dead time
Action times (separated for all 0.00 s to 300.00 s or oo (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
cycles) tive)
Dead times after trip command 0.00 s to 1 800.00 s or oo (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
(separated for all types and all tive)
cycles)
Dead time after evolving-fault 0.00 s to 1 800.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
detection (separated for all cycles)
Synchrocheck after 3-pole dead None
time Internal
External
Transmission delay, inter close 0.00 s to 300.00 s or oo (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
command tive)
Dead-line check/reduced dead Without
time Reduced dead time (VWE)
Dead line checking
Voltage supervision warning time 0.10 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Limiting value for fault-free line 0.3 V to 340.0 V Increments of 0.1 V
Limiting value for zero potential 0.3 V to 340.0 V Increments of 0.1 V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.17 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases
11.17 Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Setting Values
Method of Measurement Fundamental component

RMS value
Threshold value41 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
5 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
1 A @ 1.6 Irated 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout Ratio 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Time Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times

Extension of the operate time during operation with Approx. 10 ms
transformer inrush-current detection
Dropout Time Approx. 20 ms + OOT
Operating Ranges
10 Hz to 80 Hz According to specified tolerances

Outside 10 Hz to 80 Hz Active
Tolerances
Currents, method of measurement = fundamental 1 % of setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10 %)
Currents, method of measurement = RMS value
(33 % portion harmonic, referring to fundamental component)
Up to 30th harmonic 1 % of setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3 % of setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Time Delays 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Influencing Variables for the Thresholds
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement = fundamental component, <5%

for > 100 ms (with complete unbalance)
41 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 0.1 lrated,sec.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Setting Values

RMS value
Dropout Disk emulation
Instantaneous
Minimum time of the curve 0.00 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Additional time delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Disk emulation Approx. 0.90 * threshold value

Instantaneous Approx. 1.05 * threshold value
Approx. 0.95 * pickup value
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to IEC
current detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
[dwocpki1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-3 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to IEC
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Figure 11-4 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to IEC
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI/IEEE
[dwocpka1-080213-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-5 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to ANSI/IEEE
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Tolerances

Operate time for 2 I/threshold value I 20 5 % of set point value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms
Dropout time for I/threshold value I 0.90 5 % of set point value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-defined Characteristic Curve
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-defined Characteristic

Curve
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold Value 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Instantaneous
Number of value pairs for the operate curve 2 to 30 Increments of 1
X values of the operate curve 1.00 to 66.67 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p. u.
Y values of the operate curve 0.00 s to 999.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Number of value pairs for the dropout characteristic 2 to 30 Increments of 1
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p. u.
Y values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.00 s to 999.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio

Tolerances

Operate time for 2 I/I threshold value 20 5 % of set point value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value 0.90 5 % of set point value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.19 Overcurrent Protection, Phases with User-defined Characteristic Curve
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves according to IEC
current detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.20 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Setting Values
Method of measurement Fundamental component

RMS value
Dropout ratio 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Dropout
The greater dropout difference (= | pickup value dropout value |) of the following 2 criteria
applies:
Dropout difference derived from the parameter Dropout ratio
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overcurrent and of 105 % for undercur-
rent functionality.
Minimum absolute dropout difference
Protection-class current transformer 15 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
75 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Instrument current transformer 0.5 mA sec. (Irated = 1 A) or
2.5 mA sec. (Irated = 5 A)
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 25 ms + OOT45 at 50 Hz

Dropout time Approx. 20 ms + OOT

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
3I0 measured via I446, method of measurement = 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
fundamental component or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10 %)
46 Slightly expanded tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
3I0 measured via I447, method of measurement = RMS value

(33 % harmonics, in relation to fundamental component)
Up to 30th harmonic 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3 % of the setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Time delays 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

47 Slightly expanded tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.21 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection, Ground

Setting Values

RMS value
Instantaneous
Minimum time of the curve 0.00 to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Additional time delay 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio

Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
current detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Figure 11-9 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Figure 11-10 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to IEC
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
Figure 11-11 Operate Curves and Dropout-Time Characteristic Curves According to ANSI/IEEE
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
Operate time for 2 I/I threshold value 20 5 % of the setting value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms
49 Insignificantly increased tolerances will occur during the calculation of 3I0, maximum factor of 2
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Dropout time for 2 I/threshold value I 0.90 5 % of the setting value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.22 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
11.22 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic

Curve
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Instantaneous
X values of the operate curve 1.00 to 66.67 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Dropout Ratio

Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.22 Overcurrent Protection, Ground with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
Tolerances
30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value 0.90 5 % of the setting value or +2 % current tolerance or
30 ms
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement <5%

= fundamental component, for > 100 ms (with
complete unbalance)

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.23 Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases

Setting Values for the Function
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180o to +180o Increments of 1o
Directional mode Forward

Backward
RMS value
Setting Values for the Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection Stage Type

Setting Values for the IEC/ANSI Characteristic Curve Stage Type (Inverse-Time)
Type of characteristic curve Characteristic curves according to IEC (see

Table 11-5) and ANSI (see Table 11-6)
Instantaneous
Minimum time of the curve 0.00 to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Additional time delay 0.00 to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Values for the IEC/ANSI Characteristic Curve Stage Type (Inverse-Time)

Setting Values for Stage Type with User-Defined Characteristic Curve (Inverse Time)

X values of the operate curve 1.00 to 66.67 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p. u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p. u.
Dropout Values for Stage Type User-Defined Characteristic Curve Overcurrent Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Tripping and Dropout Characteristic Curves

You can select from the following tripping and dropout characteristic curves:
Table 11-5 Standard Characteristic Curves to IEC
Normal inverse: type A See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-

Very inverse: type B tion, Phases , Figure 11-3
Long-term inverse tion, Phases , Figure 11-4
Table 11-6 Standard Characteristic Curves to ANSI/IEEE

Long time inverse: type B tion, Phases , Figure 11-5
Long-term inverse See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
Moderately inverse tion, Phases , Figure 11-6
Very inverse See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
Extremely inverse tion, Phases , Figure 11-7
Uniformly inverse See chapter 11.18 Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protec-
tion, Phases , Figure 11-8
Type With externally generated voltages

With voltage memory 2 s
Forward range Vref,rot 88o
Dropout differential forward/backward range 1o
Directional sensitivity Unlimited for 1 and 2-phase short circuits
Dynamically unlimited, stationary for 3-phase short
circuits
Approx. 13 V phase-to-phase
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Times

Operating Ranges

Outside 10 Hz to 80 Hz Active
Tolerances
Currents, method of measurement = fundamental 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

(33 % portion harmonic in relation to fundamental component)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz 3 % of the setting value
or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 100 mA (Irated = 5 A),
(frated 10 %)
Definite-time operate time 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Inverse-time operate time according to IEC, ANSI, 5 % of the setting value
user-defined characteristic curve or +2 % current tolerance or 10 ms
Inverse-time dropout time according to IEC, ANSI, 5 % of the setting value
user-defined characteristic curve or +2 % current tolerance or 10 ms
Direction-determination angle error 1o
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement <5%

= fundamental component, for > 100 ms (with
complete unbalance)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value 0.030 A to 35.000 A at Irated = 1 A Increments of 0.001 A at Irated = 1 A

0.15 A to 175.00 A at Irated = 5 A Increments of 0.01 A at Irated = 5 A
Dropout Ratio 0.50 to 0.90 Increment 0.01
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time for current > 22threshold value Approx. 8 ms + OOT55
Operating Range
frated 10 % According to specified tolerances

Behavior outside the operating range Active starting at f 36.3 Hz
Tolerances
Response tolerance, current 5 % of setting value or 10 mA at Irated = 1 A

5 % of setting value or 50 mA at Irated = 5 A
55 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, see chapter 11.1.4 Relay Outputs
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection)
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage with Definite Time-

Overcurrent Protection)
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value56 For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout ratio (fixed) 0.95
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times


10 Hz to 0.9 f/frated Slightly expanded tolerances
1.1 f/frated to 80 Hz
f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.25 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage with Definite Time-Overcurrent Protection)


Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.26 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection)
11.26 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Inverse Time-Overcurrent

Protection)
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value58 For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Instantaneous
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
current detection
The tripping characteristic curves and dropout characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the
Technical Data chapter under Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection.

The tripping characteristic curves and dropout characteristic curves according to ANSI/IEEE can be found in
the Technical Data chapter under Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection.

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.26 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase (Stage Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection)

30 ms
30 ms

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.27 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic Curve
11.27 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic

Curve
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Instantaneous
X values of the operate curve 1.00 to 66.67 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
curve
X values of the dropout characteristic curve 0.05 to 0.95 p. u. Increments of 0.01 p.u.
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.

f < 10 Hz Active with less sensitivity
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.27 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase with User-Defined Characteristic Curve

30 ms
30 ms

current detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data


RMS value
Overcurrent threshold For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
value
Setting Values for Inverse-Time Overcurrent Stages

RMS value
Dropout ratio of undervoltage59 1.01 to 1.20 Increments of 0.01
Undervoltage threshold value59 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
instantaneous
Setting Values for Definite-Time Overcurrent Stages
Seal-in voltage 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Phase-to-phase voltage 0.300 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Negative-sequence voltage V2 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Duration of V-seal-in time 0.10 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overcurrent/overvoltage and of 105 %
for undercurrent/undervoltage functionality.
Voltage transformer 150 mV sec.

inrush-current detection
The operate curves and dropout-time characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the chapter
Technical Data under Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection.
59 The setting value is for the inverse-time overcurrent voltage-released stage.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

The operate curves and dropout-time characteristic curves according to IEC can be found in the chapter
Technical Data under Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection.

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
Currents, method of measurement = fundamental 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 25

component mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10 %)
Currents, method of measurement = RMS value Up to 30th harmonic
(33 % part of harmonic in relation to fundamental 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
component) or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10 %)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 50 Hz
3 % of the setting value or 20 mA (Irated = 1 A)
Up to 50th harmonic, frated = 60 Hz
Operate time for 2 I/I threshold value 20 5 % of the setting value
or +2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Dropout time for I/I threshold value 0.90 5 % of the setting value
or +2 % current tolerance or 30 ms
Transient excess pickup in method of measurement = fundamental component, for > < 5 %
100 ms (with complete unbalance)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.29.1 General
Setting Values
Decay time V0 0.06 s to 0.20 s Increments of 0.01 s

Core balance Protection-class For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to Increments of 0.001 A
current transformer current trans- 35.000 A
current 1 formers For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Core balance
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to Increments of 0.001 A
current transformer
type sensitive and 35.000 A
current 2
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to Increments of 0.001 A
175.000 A
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive and 35.000 A
IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to Increments of 0.001 A
175.000 A
Core balance current transformer angle correction F1 0.0 to 5.0 Increments of 0.1
Core balance current transformer angle correction F2

10 Hz to 0.9 f/frated Slightly expanded tolerances 60
f < 10 Hz Active with less sensitivity 61
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
Currents -3I0 via sensitive current transformer:

1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A)
or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A, frated 10 %)
-3I0 via protection-class current transformers:
or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A, frated 10 %)
Voltages 1 % of the setting value or 0.05 V
Times 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Direction-calculation angle error 1 at 3I0 > 5 mA, V0 = 0.6 V
2 at 3I0 5 mA, V0 = 0.6 V
Dropout
applies:
60 Transient ground-fault stage is inactive

61 Transient ground-fault stage is inactive
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overcurrent/overvoltage and of 105 %
for undercurrent/undervoltage functionality.
Voltage transformer 150 mV sec.
11.29.2 Overvoltage Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence System/Residual Voltage
You can find the the Technical data of the overvoltage protection stage with zero-sequence system/residual
voltage chapter 11.38 Overvoltage Protection with Zero-Sequence Voltage/Residual Voltage .
11.29.3 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with cos or sin Measurement
Setting Values
Direction method of measurement cos

sin
Threshold value Protection-class current For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
3I0> transformers
For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Minimum direc-
tional 3I0> for For IN transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
direction deter- sensitive and IN-rated = 1 For I
ph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
mination A
For IN transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
sensitive and IN-rated = 5 For I
ph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
A
Time delay of the direction determination 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
1 constraint of the direction range 1 to 15 Increments of 1
2 constraint of the direction range
Angle correction -45 to 45 Increments of 1
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Times

current detection
11.29.4 Transient Ground-Fault Stage
Setting Values
Threshold value Protection-class For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

3I0> current transformers
For IN transformer For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 1.600 A Increments of 0.001 A
type sensitive and IN- For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
rated = 1 A

type sensitive and IN- For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 8.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
rated = 5 A

Times

11.29.5 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with 3I0-(V,I) Measurement
Setting Values
Threshold value Protection-class For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

3I0> current transformers
sensitive and IN-rated For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
=1A
sensitive and IN-rated For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
=5A
Min. V0> for direction determination 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Time delay of the direction determination 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Rotation angle of the reference voltage -180 to 180 Increments of 1
Forward range +/- 0 to 90 Increments of 1
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times

Extension of operate time during operation with transformer Approx. 10 ms
inrush-current detection
11.29.6 Sensitive Ground-Current Protection with 3I0
Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value Protection-class For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001
3I0> current transformers A
For transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.001 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001
I-sensitive and A
IN-rated = 1 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001
A
For transformer type For Iph-rated = 1 A 0.005 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001
I-sensitive and A
IN-rated = 5 A For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001
A
Pickup delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

rent functionality.
Times

Extension of the operate time during operation with trans- Approx. 10 ms
former inrush-current detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value For current transformer type protec- 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
3I0> interm. tion and Irated = 1 A
For current transformer type protec- 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
tion and Irated = 5 A
type sensitive For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and IN-rated = 1 A
type sensitive For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
and IN-rated = 5 A
Number of pickups until intermittent ground fault 2 to 10 Increments of 1
Pickup extension time 0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Sum of extended pickup times 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Reset time 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times


f > 80 Hz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents -3I0 via protection-class current transformers:

1 % of setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)
or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
-3I0 via sensitive current transformer:
1 % of setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A)
or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value 3I0> For current transformer type 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
protection and Irated = 1 A
For current transformer type 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
protection and Irated = 5 A
type sensitive and For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.001 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.001 A
IN-rated = 1 A
type sensitive and For Iph-rated = 5 A 0.005 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.001 A
IN-rated = 5 A
Number of pulses until intermittent ground 2 to 10 Increments of 1
fault
Pickup extension time 0.00 s to 10.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Sum of extended pickup times 0.00 s to 100.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Number of pulses for operate 2 to 100 Increments of 1
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Pickup time Approx. 30 ms + OOT67 at 50 Hz


f > 80 Hz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Tolerances
Currents 3I0 via protection-class current transformers:

1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
3I0 via sensitive current transformer:
1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A) or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.32 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay
11.32 Directional Negative-Sequence Protection with Definite-Time Delay

Setting Values
Directional mode Forward, backward, non-directional

Stabilization with phase currents 0 % to 30 % Increments of 1 %
Threshold value (pickup value) at IN-rated = 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Threshold value (pickup value) at IN-rated = 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Extension time of the blocking after a 1-pole pause 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Setting Values for Direction Determination
Minimum negative-sequence system voltage V2 0.150 V to 20.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Minimum negative-sequence system For Irated = 1 A 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
current I2
Upper limit angle forward, 0o to 360o Increments of 1o
Lower limit angle forward, 0o to 360o Increments of 1o
Dropout
applies:
Dropout difference of 3 % of the object rated current
Times

Operating Range

Outside 10 Hz to 80 Hz Not active
Tolerances
Threshold values:
Negative-sequence voltage V2 1 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
Negative-sequence current I2 2 % of the setting value or 10 mA at Irated = 1 A
1 % of the setting value or 5 mA at Irated = 5 A
Times:
Independent time delays 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Limit angle in determining the direction 5o
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values

RMS value
Threshold value I< 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Times
Operate time Approx. 25 ms + OOT69 at 50 Hz

0.9 f/frated 1.1 f/frated According to specified tolerances

1,1 f/frated to 80 Hz
f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

69 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see Chapter Relay
Outputs
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values for Stage Type Definite Time-Overvoltage Protection
Measured value Phase-to-phase

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Pickup value70 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Setting Values for Stage Type Inverse Time-Overvoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Pickup value 0.300 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Pickup factor 1.00 to 1.20 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant k 0.00 to 300.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant 0.010 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Characteristic constant c 0.000 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Operate Curve for Stage Type Inverse Time-Overvoltage Protection
Where
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (parameter Additional time delay)
Where
Tp Time multiplier (parameter Time dial)
V Measured voltage
Vthresh Threshold value (parameter Threshold)
k Curve constant k (parameter Charact. constant k)
Curve constant (parameter Charact. constant )
70 If you have selected the method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value under 10 V.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
c Curve constant c (parameter Charact. constant c)
Dropout
applies:
If this parameter is not available, a dropout ratio of 95 % applies for overvoltage and of 105 % for under-
voltage functionality.
Minimum absolute dropout difference 150 mV sec.
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time-Overvoltage Protection
Voltages 0.5 % of the setting value or 0.05 V

Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse Time-Overvoltage Protection

Operate time for 5 % of the setting value or 30 ms
1.2 V/V threshold value 20
Reset time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values

Dropout
applies:
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values

Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.37 Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence Voltage and

Compounding
Setting Values

Time Delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Times


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

74 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example, 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Method of measurement RMS value

Fundamental component
Fundamental component over 2 cycle filters
Block. on measuring-voltage Yes
outage No
Determ. ph. aff. by grd. flt. Yes
No
Threshold value75 0.300 V to 200.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Pickup delay 0.00 s to 320.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
V< faulted ph-gnd vltg. 0.300 V to 200 000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V> healthy ph-gnd. vltg. 0.300 V to 200 000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms

Standard filter, true RMS Approx. 25 ms + OOT76 at 50 Hz
2 cycle filters Approx. 45 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Dropout time
Standard filter, true RMS Approx. 20 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Approx. 16.6 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
2 cycle filters Approx. 31.06 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Approx. 27.06 ms + OOT at 60 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Measured value77 Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA

Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VAB
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VBC
Measured phase-to-phase voltage VCA
Measured voltage VN
Calculated voltage V0
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
Times
Operate time with time delay = Approx. 25 ms + OOT79 at 50 Hz

0 ms Approx. 22 ms + OOT at 60 Hz

f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
77 If the function Overvoltage protection with any voltage is used in a 1-phase function group, the measured-value parameter is not
visible.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values for Stage Type Definite Time-Undervoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Current-flow criterion On
Off
Threshold value I> 0.030 A to 10.000 A at Irated = 1 A Increments of 0.001 A
0.15 A to 50.00 A at Irated = 5 A Increments of 0.01 A

Setting Values for Stage Type Inverse Time-Undervoltage Protection

Phase-to-ground
RMS value
Pickup factor 0.80 to 1.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constant k 0.00 to 300.00 Increments of 0.01
Characteristic constan 0.010 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Characteristic constant c 0.000 to 5.000 Increments of 0.001
Operate Curve
Top=TInv+ Tadd
Where:
Top Operate delay
Tadd Additional time delay (Parameter Additional time delay)
[fo_UVP3ph_1_3pol_inverse, 1, en_US]
Where
Tp Time multiplier (Parameter Time dial)
V Measured undervoltage
80 If you have selected the Method of measurement = RMS value, do not set the threshold value to less than 10 V.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
VThresh Threshold value (Parameter Threshold)

k Curve constant k (Parameter Charact. constant k)
Curve constant (Parameter Charact. constant )
c Curve constant c (Parameter Charact. constant c)
Times


f < 10 Hz Inactive, maintained;
f > 80 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the meas-
urand beyond the dropout threshold
Tolerances for Stage Type Definite Time-Undervoltage Protection

Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A, frated
10 %), valid for protection-class current transformers
1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A) or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A,
frated 10 %), valid for instrument transformers
Tolerances for Stage Type Inverse Time-Undervoltage Protection

1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A) or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A,
frated 10 %), valid for instrument transformers
Operate time for 0 < V/VThresh< 0.9 5 % of the setting value or 30 ms
Reset time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values

Circuit-breaker condition Can be switched on and off
Threshold value I> 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Times


f > 80 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the measurand
beyond the dropout threshold
Tolerances

1 % of the setting value or 0.1 mA (Irated = 1.6 A) or 0.5 mA (Irated = 8 A, frated
10 %), valid for instrument transformers
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Measured value Measured phase-to-ground voltage VA

Measured phase-to-ground voltage VB
Measured phase-to-ground voltage VC
Measured voltage VN
Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VAB
Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VBC
Calculated phase-to-phase voltage VCA
Calculated voltage V0
RMS value
Dropout
applies:
Times


f > 80 Hz Dropout of the pickup induced by blocking or by increasing the
measurand beyond the dropout threshold
Tolerances
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.43 Fault Locator
11.43 Fault Locator

Setting Values
You can find the following settings in the line data of the Line protection function group:
Reactance per unit length of the line per kilometer or per mile
Line length for the correct output of the fault distance as a percentage of the line length
The ground impedance adjustment factors in the setting format Kr and Kx or K0 and angle (K0)
Parallel-line compensation (optional) For connection or disconnection
Consideration of the load current in the case of 1- Correction of the X value, for connection and discon-
phase ground faults nection
Fault Distance
Output of the fault distance (line length) In primary

In km, miles, or in percent. 85
Tolerances
Measuring tolerances during sinusoidal measurands 1.5 % from fault location at VK/Vrated 0.01 and one
and fault duration of the following scenarios:
> 25 ms at 60 Hz or Metal fault
> 30 ms at 50 Hz Non-metallic fault for one-side infeed without
load
85 The output of the fault distance in km, miles, and percent presupposes a homogeneous line.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup values f> 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz

Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2 000 mHz Increments of 10 mHz
Time delay T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Minimum voltage 3.000 V to 175.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
Times
Pickup times f> Angle difference method

50 Hz Approx. 70 ms + OOT 86
60 Hz Approx. 60 ms + OOT
Filtering method
Dropout times f> 60 ms to 80 ms
Dropout Ratio
Minimum voltage About 1.05
Operating Ranges
Voltage range 5 V to 230 V (phase-phase)

Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 80 Hz
Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz
Tolerances
Frequency f>
frated - 0.20 Hz < f < frated + 0.20 Hz 5 mHz at V = Vrated
Time delay T(f>) 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Minimum voltage 1 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
86 OOT (Output Operating Time) additional delay of the output medium used, for example 5 ms with fast relays, see chapter
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup values f< 40.00 Hz to 70.00 Hz Increments of 0.01 Hz

Dropout differential 20 mHz to 2 000 mHz Increments of 10 mHz
Time delay T 0.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Pickup times f< Angle difference method

50 Hz Approx. 70 ms + OOT 87
Filtering method
Dropout times f< 60 ms to 80 ms
Dropout Ratio
Minimum voltage Approx. 1.05
Operating Ranges
Voltage range 5 V to 230 V (phase-phase)

Frequency range Angle difference method 10 Hz to 80 Hz
Filtering method 25 Hz to 80 Hz
Tolerances
Frequency f<
Time delay T(f<) 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values for the Function

Measuring window 2 periods to 5 periods Increments of 1 period
Setting Values for Stage Types
Threshold 0.1 Hz/s to 20.0 Hz/s Increments of 0.1 Hz/s

Dropout differential 0.02 Hz/s to 0.99 Hz/s Increments of 0.01 Hz/s
Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Pickup time Approx.165 ms to 225 ms (depends on measuring window length)

Dropout time Approx.165 ms to 225 ms (depends on measuring window length)
Dropout Ratio
Dropout ratio for minimum voltage Approx. 1.05

f < 10 Hz Inactive
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold, Approx. 3 % or 0.06 Hz/s

measuring window > 3 periods
Threshold, Approx. 5 % or 0.06 Hz/s
measuring window 3 periods
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Tripping delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of

0.01 s
Tolerances
Times < 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.48 Thermal Overload Protection

Setting Values/Increments
Threshold current warning 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Threshold thermal warn. 50% to 100% Increments of 1 %
Dropout threshold operate 50% to 99% Increments of 1 %
Emerg. start T overtravel 0 s to 15 000 s Increments of 10 s
K-factor acc. to IEC 60225-8 0.10 to 4.00 Increments of 0.01
Thermal time constant 10 s to 60 000 s Increments of 1 s
Cooling time constant 10 s to 60 000 s Increments of 1 s
Imax thermal 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Imin cooling 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.000 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
temperature rise at Irated 40 K to 200 K Increments of 1 K
Default temperature -55C to 55C Increments of 1C
Minimal temperature -55C to 40C Increments of 1C
Dropout Ratios
Tripping threshold (fixed at 100 %) Dropout if value drops below operate indication dropout
threshold
Thermal warning threshold About 0.99 of the setting value
Current warning threshold About 0.95 of the setting value
Frequency Range of the Input Signals

The function captures input signals up to the 50th harmonic.
Tolerances
With reference to k* Irated For Irated = 1 A 2 % or 10 mA, class 2 % acc. to IEC 60255-8
For Irated = 5 A 2 % or 50 mA, class 2 % acc. to IEC 60255-8
With reference to operate time 3 % or 1 s, class 3 % acc. to IEC 60255-8 for I/(k *
Irated) > 1.25
Operate Curve
Operate curve
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
The following meanings t Operate time

apply: th Time constant
I Current load current
Ipreload Preload current
k Setting factor according to VDE 0435 part 3011
or IEC 60255-8 (K factor)
Irated, obj Rated current of the protected object
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
[dwauslke-100611-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure 11-15 Operate Curve of Overload Protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.49 Analog-Units Function Group
11.49 Analog-Units Function Group

20-mA Unit Ether.
Max. number of connected 20-mA units 4

Max. number of channels per 20-mA unit 12
20-mA Unit Serial
Max. number of connected 20-mA units 4

Max. number of channels per 20-mA unit 12
RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200)
Max. number of connected RTD units 4

Max. number of sensors per RTD unit 12
Sensor type Pt 100 as per EN 60751
RTD Unit (Ziehl TR1200) IP
Max. number of connected RTD units 4

Max. number of sensors per RTD unit 12
Sensor type Pt 100 as per EN 60751; connection of Ni 100 and
Ni 120 sensors possible. The measured values must
be converted in the evaluation unit.
Temperature Measured Values
Unit of measurement for temperature C or F, can be adjusted

Pt 100 -199 C to 850 C (-326 F to 1472 F)
Resolution 1 C or 1 F
Tolerance 0.5 % of the measured value 1 K
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Pickup value -50 C to 250 C Increments of 1C

-58 F to 482 F Increments of 1F
Time delay 0 s to 60 s Increments of 1 s
or
Dropout Conditions
Dropout differential 3 C or 6 F
Tolerances
Tripping delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

Measured temperature value 0.5 % of the setting value or 1 C or 2 F
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Starting Conditions
For circuit-breaker failure protection 1-pole tripping internal or external88

3-pole tripping internal or external89
Setting Values
Phase-current threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

values 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.010 A
Ground-current threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
value 5 A @ 100 Irated 0.150 A to 175.000 A Increments of 0.010 A
Supervision time of release signal 0.06 s to 1.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Time delays 0.05 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratios
Current threshold values Approx. 0.95
Circuit-Breaker Supervision
Position supervision of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts

For 3-pole CB tripping 1 input each for make contact and break contact
For 1-pole CB tripping 1 input each for auxiliary contact per pole or
1 input for each series connection make contact and
break contact
NOTE
i The circuit-breaker failure protection can also work without the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts stated.
Auxiliary contacts are required for circuit-breaker failure protection in cases where the current flow is
absent or too low for tripping (for example with a transformer or a Buchholz protection).
Times
Pickup time, in the case of an internal start < 1 ms

Pickup time, in the case of an external start < 5 ms
Dropout time for Unbalancing operating mode Approx. 2 ms
Dropout time90 via the current-flow criterion, for sinus- < 10.5 ms
oidal quantities
Dropout time, via the current-flow criterion, under all < 15 ms
conditions
Dropout time, via circuit-breaker auxiliary-contact < 5 ms
criterion
88 Viabinary inputs
89 Viabinary inputs
90 The dropout time is the time required by the CBFP function to detect that the CB is open. The time for mechanically switching a
contact is not included.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Tolerances
Threshold values, dropout thresholds 2 % of the setting value or 1 % of the rated current
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Current threshold 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Monitoring duration 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Position recognition delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Trip delay time 0.05 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Retrip delay time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Minimum operate (trip) time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Current threshold Approx. 0.95
Times
Operate time with time delay = 0 ms Approx. 25 ms + OOT at 50 Hz


f < 10 Hz Active
f > 80 Hz
Tolerances
Threshold 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A) or 25

mA (Irated = 5 A)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

General
Value Setting Range

Zones Max. 4
Power swing frequency Not adjustable
Number of acceptable swings per zone 1 to 20
Maximum negative-sequence current 5.0% to 100.0% (increments of 0.1 %)
Minimum positive sequence current 10.0% to 400.0% (increments of 0.1 %)
Rectangle

Re(Z): Width91 0.050 to 600.000 (at 1 A) 0.001
In(Z): Upper and lower limits92 -600.000 to 600.000 (at 1 A) 0.001
Inclination 60 to 90 0.1
Times

Reentry time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.01 s
Signal time 0.00 s to 60.00 s 0.01 s
Counter waiting time 0 ms to 1000 ms 10 ms
91 The limits must be divided by 5 if the a transformer rated secondary current is 5 A.

92 The limits must be divided by 5 if the a transformer rated secondary current is 5 A.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Working range limit lmax 0.030 A to 35.000 A at Irated = 1 A Increments of 0.001 A

Content 2nd harmonic 10 % to 45 % Increments of 1 %

Duration of the cross-blocking 0.03 s to 200.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Times
Pickup times Approx. 29 ms
Dropout Ratios
Harmonic: I2nd Harm/I1st harm 0.95
Dropout
applies:
rent functionality.
Dropout difference
Operating Range

Behavior outside 10 Hz to 80 Hz Inactive
Tolerances
Current measurement lmax 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA

Harmonic: I2nd Harm/I1st Harm 1 % of the setting value
for settings of l2nd Harm/1st Harm
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.55 3-Phase Power Protection (P,Q)
11.55 3-Phase Power Protection (P,Q)

Setting Values
Measured value Positive sequence power

Power of phase A
Power of phase B
Power of phase C
Threshold value -200.0 % to +200.0 % Increments of 0.1
Tilt-power characteristic -89.0 to +89.0 Increments of 0.1
Dropout delay time 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout ratio Upper stage: 0.90 to 0.99 Increments of 0.01
Lower stage: 1.01 to 1.10 Increments of 0.01
Times
Pickup times Approx. 55 ms + OOT93 at 50 Hz

Dropout times Approx. 55 ms + OOT at 50-Hz
Tolerances
Power 0.5 % Srated 3 % of setting value

(Srated: rated apparent power)
Variables That Influence Pickup Values
Auxiliary DC voltage in the range 0.8 VAux/VAuxRated 1.15 1%

Frequency in the range 0.95 f/frated 1.05 1%
Harmonics 1%
- Up to 10 % of 3rd harmonics 1%
- Up to 10 % of 5th harmonics
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value Power Q 1.00 % to 200.00 % Increments of 0.01 %

Voltage of protection 3.000 to 175.000 Increments of 0.001 V
stage
Voltage of reclosure 3.000 V to 340.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
stage
Current I1 release threshold 1 A @ 50 and 100 Irated 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Operate delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Release time delay of reclosure stage 0.00 s to 3600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Protection stage
Reactive-power flow Q Approx. 0.95
Voltage Approx. 1.05
Release current Approx. 0.95
Reclosure stage
Voltage Approx. 0.95
Release current Approx. 0.95
Times

Tolerances
Current I1 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A)
Power Q 0.5 % Srated 3 % of the setting value
(Srated: rated apparent power)
Reclosure time delay 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
f < 10 Hz Function is blocked

f > 80 Hz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Times

Operating Range
10 Hz to 80 Hz Function active
Behavior outside the operating range Function inactive
Tolerances
Currents 3 % of setting value or 10 mA (Irated = 1 A) or

50 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10 %)
for amplitude changes of sinusoidal measurands
Pulse time 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Times

Working area
10 Hz to 80 Hz Function active
Behavior outside the operating range Function inactive
Tolerances
Voltages 2 % of the setting value or 0.100 V

for amplitude changes of sinusoidal measurands
Pulse time 1 % of the setting value or 10 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.59 Arc Protection
11.59 Arc Protection

Setting Values
Threshold value I> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Threshold value 3I0> 1 A @ 100 Irated 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
External trip initiation Yes
No
Operating mode Light only
Current and light
Channel Possible settings, application-dependent
Dropout Ratio
Threshold value About 0.90
Times
Shortest operate time Approx. 2.6 ms + OOT 97.

Operating mode = light only
Shortest operate time Approx. 4.0 ms + OOT at 50 Hz
Operating mode = Current and Approx. 3.8 ms + OOT at 60 Hz
light
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Operating Modes
Synchrocheck
Switching synchronous systems
Switching asynchronous systems
De-energized switching
Direct closing command
Setting Values
Supervision/Delay times:
Max. Duration of synchronization 0.00 s to 3 600.00 s or (ineffec- Increments of 0.01 s
process tive)
Supervision time de-energized 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
switching
Closure delay 0.00 s to 60.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Voltage threshold values:
Upper voltage limit Vmax 0.300 V to 340.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
phase)
Lower voltage limit Vmin 0.300 V to 340.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
phase)
V<, for off-circuit conditions 0.300 V to 170.000 V (phase-to- Increments of 0.001 V
V>, for voltage present phase) Increments of 0.001 V
0.300 V to 340.000 V (phase-to-
phase)
Differential values, changeover thresholds asynchronous/synchronous:
Voltage differences 0.000 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V
V2 > V1; V2 < V1
Frequency difference f2 > f1; 0.000 Hz to 2.000 Hz (synchro- Increments of 0.001 Hz
f2 < f1 nous)
0.000 Hz to 4.000 Hz (asynchro-
nous)
Angular difference 2 > 1; 0o to 90o Increments of 1o
2 < 1
f threshold ASYN <-> SYN 0.010 Hz to 0.200 Hz Increments of 0.001 Hz
Adjustments of the sides:
Angle adjustment 0.0o to 360.0o Increments of 0.1o
Voltage adjustment 0.500 to 2.000 Increments of 0.001
Circuit breaker
Closing time of the circuit breaker 0.01 s to 0.60 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Min./max. operating limit 1 % of the setting value

Voltage differential 10 % of the setting value or 0.5 V
De-energized/energized 5 % of the setting value
Frequency difference 3 mHz
Angular difference 0.1o
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Measured Values of the Synchronization Function
Reference voltage V1 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vrated

Display always as phase-to-phase voltage
Range 10 % to 120 % of Vrated
Tolerance at rated frequency
1% of the measured value or 0.5% Vrated
Voltage to be synchronized V2 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vrated
Display always as phase-to-phase voltage
Tolerance at rated frequency
1% of the measured value or 0.5% Vrated
Frequency of the voltage V1f1 f1 in Hz
Range 25 Hz f 70 Hz
Tolerance at rated frequency 1 mHz
Frequency of the voltage V1f2 f2 in Hz
Range 25 Hz f 70 Hz
Voltage difference V2-V1 In kV primary, in V secondary or in % Vrated
Display always as phase-to-phase voltage in relation
to side 1
Tolerance at rated frequency 1% of the measured value or 0.5% Vrated
Frequency difference f2-f1 In mHz
Range frated 10 %
Angular difference 2-1 In o
Range -180o to +180o
Tolerance at rated frequency 0.5o
Times
Measuring time, after switching on the variables Approx. 80 ms
Operating Range
Voltage 20 V to 340 V
Frequency frated -4 Hz frated frated +4 Hz
Tolerances
Tolerances of the voltage settings 2 % of the pickup value or 1 V

Voltage difference V2>V1; V2<V1 1V
Frequency difference f2>f1; f2<f1 10 mHz
Angular difference 2>1; 2<1 1o
Tolerance of all time settings 10 ms
Max. phase displacement angle 5o for f 1 Hz
10o for f > 1 Hz
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
General Information
I reference for % values 0.20 A to 100 000.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
V reference for % values 0.20 kV to 1 200.00 kV Increments of
0.01 kV
Volt. cont. 2W
Target voltage 1
Target voltage 2 Increments of
40.00 kV to 1 360.00 kV
Target voltage 3 0.01 kV
Target voltage 4
Volt. cont. 3W and GC
Target voltage 1 w1
Target voltage 2 w1
Target voltage 3 w1
Target voltage 4 w1 Increments of
40.00 kV to 1 360.00 kV
Target voltage 1 w2 0.01 kV
Target voltage 2 w2
Target voltage 3 w2
Target voltage 4 w2
Volt. cont. 2W, 3W, and GC
Bandwidth 0.2 % to 10.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
T1 delay 5 s to 600 s Increments of 1 s
T1 Inverse Min 5 s to 100 s Increments of 1 s
T2 delay 0 s to 100 s Increments of 1 s
Fast step down limit 0.0 % to 50.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Fast step down T delay 0.0 s to 10.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Fast step up limit -50.0 % to 0.0 % Increments of -0.1 %
Fast step up T delay 0.0 s to 10.0 s Increments of 0.1 s
Function monitoring 1 min to 120 min Increments of 1 min
Line compensation LDC-Z
Target voltage rising 0.0 % to 20.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Max load current 0.0 % to 500.0 % Increments of 0.1 %
Line compensation LDC-X and R
R line 0.0 to 30.0 Increments of 0.1
X line -30.0 to 30.0 Increments of 0.1
Limiting values
Vmin threshold 40.00 kV to 1 360.00 kV Increments of
0.01 kV
Vmin time delay 0 s to 20 s Increments of 1 s
Vmax threshold 40.00 kV to 1 360.00 kV Increments of
0.01 kV
Vmax time delay 0 s to 20 s Increments of 1 s
Blockings
V< Threshold 40.00 kV to 1 360.00 kV Increments of
0.01 kV
V< Time delay 0 s to 20 s Increments of 1 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
I> Threshold 10 % to 500 % Increments of 1 %

I> Time delay 0 s to 20 s Increments of 1 s
I< Threshold 3 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
I< Time delay 0 s to 20 s Increments of 1 s
Dropout Ratio
Threshold of the voltage limit About 0.99 of the setting value

Threshold of the current limit About 0.99 of the setting value
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.62 Broken-Wire Detection
11.62 Broken-Wire Detection

Setting Values

Mode of blocking Blocking -
Automatic blocking
No blocking
Delta value for autoblock 0.004 I/Irated to 5.000 I/Irated 0.001
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.63 Current-Balance Supervision
11.63 Current-Balance Supervision

Setting Values
Release threshold value Irated= 1 A 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A

Irated= 5 A 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Threshold value min/max 0.10 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Dropout Ratio
Overcurrent dropout ratio About 0.97

Undercurrent dropout ratio About 1.05
Times
Tripping time Approx. 500 ms

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.64 Voltage-Balance Supervision
11.64 Voltage-Balance Supervision

Setting Values
Release threshold value 0,300 V to 170,000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Threshold value min/max 0.58 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01
Dropout Ratio
Overvoltage dropout ratio Approx. 0.97

Undervoltage dropout ratio Approx. 1.05
Times

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.65 Current-Sum Supervision
11.65 Current-Sum Supervision

Setting Values
Slope of the characteristic curve 0.00 to 0.95 Increments of 0.01

Threshold 1 A @ 50 and 100 0.030 A to 10.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
Irated
5 A @ 50 and 100 0.15 A to 50.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Irated
Dropout Ratio
Times

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.66 Voltage-Sum Supervision
11.66 Voltage-Sum Supervision

Setting Values
Threshold value 0.300 V to 170.000 V Increments of 0.001 V

Dropout Ratio
Times

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.67 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision
11.67 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision

Setting Values

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Dropout Ratio
Times

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.68 Voltage Phase-Rotation Reversal
11.68 Voltage Phase-Rotation Reversal

Setting Values

Phase-rotation direction ABC
ACB
Dropout Ratio
Times

Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.69 Trip-Circuit Supervision
11.69 Trip-Circuit Supervision

Setting Values
Number of monitored circuits per circuit-breaker function group 1 to 3

Operating mode per circuit With 1 binary input
With 2 binary inputs
Pickup and dropout time Approx. 1 s to 2 s
Adjustable indication delay with 1 binary input 1.00 s to 600.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Adjustable indication delay with 2 binary inputs 1.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.70 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum
11.70 Analog Channel Supervision via Fast Current Sum

Times
Pickup times Approx. 2 ms (faster than the fastest protection function)

Blockings
Blocked functions All functions that process the measured values from this current meas-
uring point (for example, differential protection).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.71 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection
11.71 Measuring-Voltage Failure Detection

Setting Values
3ph.fail. - VA,VB,VC < 0.300 V to 340 000 V Increments of 0.001 V

3ph.fail. - phs.curr.release 0.030 A to 35.000 A at Irated = 1 A Increments of 0.001 A
Imin Imin (distance protection)
3ph.fail. - phs.curr. jump 0.030 A to 35.000 A at Irated = 1 A Increments of 0.001 A
Asym.fail. - time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s

SO 3ph.fail. - time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s Increments of 0.01 s
Dropout Ratio
Overvoltage About 0.95

Undervoltage About 1.05
Times
Times Approx. 10 ms + OOT98 at 50 Hz

Times
Use in function group type Line

Use in other function group types

Operating Range

Behavior outside the operating range Active
Tolerances
Currents 1 % of the setting value or 5 mA (Irated = 1 A)

or 25 mA (Irated = 5 A), (frated 10%)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.72 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker
11.72 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker

Setting Values
Response time 0.000 s to 0.030 s Increments of 0.001 s
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.73 Operational Measured Values and Statistical Values

Voltages
VA, VB, VC V secondary

Voltage range < 200 V secondary
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range (0.8 to 2) Vrated
Frequency range 49 Hz to 51 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
59 Hz to 61 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance 0.1 % of the measured value in the above mentioned
measuring range
Frequency range (expanded) 40 Hz to 60 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
measuring range
VAB, VBC, VCA V secondary
Voltage range < 200 V
Secondary rated voltage 100 V to 125 V
Measuring range (0.8 to 2) Vrated
measuring range
measuring range
Currents, Instrument Transformers
IA, IB, IC, 3l0 A secondary

Current range < 1.6 Irated
Rated currents 1 A, 5 A
Measuring range (0.1 to 1.6) Irated
Tolerance 0.1 % of the measured value in the above mentioned measuring range
(expanded) 50 Hz to 70 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Currents, Protection-Class Current Transformer
IA, IB, IC, 3l0 A secondary

Current range < 100 Irated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Measuring range 0.1 to 25 A
Currents, Sensitive Ground-Current Transformer
3I0 A secondary
Current range < 1.6 Irated
Measuring range (0.1 to 1.6) Irated
Phase Angle
V
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance V 0.2 at rated voltage
I
Frequency range 47.5 Hz to 52.5 Hz at frated = 50 Hz
57.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz at frated = 60 Hz
Tolerance I 0.2 at rated current
Power Values
Active power P W secondary

Measuring range |cos| 0.01
Voltage range (0.8 to 1.2) Vrated
Current range (0.1 to 2) Irated
measuring range
measuring range
Reactive power Q var secondary
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Measuring range |cos| 0.984

measuring range
measuring range
Apparent power S VA
Measuring range (0.01 to 2) Srated
Frequency range
measuring range
measuring range
Frequency
Frequency f Hz
Range frated - 0.20 Hz < frated + 0.20 Hz
Tolerance 5 mHz in the Vrated range
Range frated - 3.00 Hz < frated + 3.00 Hz
Tolerance 10 mHz in the Vrated range
Frequency range 25 Hz to 80 Hz; operational measured values
(expanded) 10 Hz to 80 Hz; functional measured values, system frequency
Tolerance 20 mHz in the range frated 10 % for rated values
Statistic Values of the Device
Device Operating Hours h

Range 0 to 9999999 h
Tolerance 1h
Statistic Values of the Circuit Breaker
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None
I Off (sum of the primary A, kA, MA, GA, TA, PA primary
outgoing currents)
Range 0 to 9.2e+15
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
Operating hours h
Tolerance 1h
CB open hours h
Tolerance 1h
Statistic Values of the Disconnector
Op.cnt. (operation counter)

Range 0 to 999999999
Tolerance None
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.74 Energy Values
11.74 Energy Values

Setting Values
Active energy Wp kWh, MWh, GWh

Reactive energy Wq kvarh, Mvarh, Gvarh
Range 2% for I > 0.1 Irated,

V > 0.1 Vrated
|cos| 0.707
Tolerance at rated frequency 1%
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.75 Phasor Measurement Unit
11.75 Phasor Measurement Unit

Accuracy
As per IEEE Std C37.118.1a-2013
Synchrophasor Standard
IEEE Std C37.118.1-2011
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Current Inputs
Value Setting Range

Rated current measuring range 20 mA
Maximum current measuring range 24 mA
Tolerances 124 A (0.62 % at 20 mA)
without trimming 60 A (0.3 % at 20 mA)
with offset trimming 20 A (0.1% at 20 mA)
with full trimming
Sampling rate 3 Hz
Number of channels per measuring transducer 2 or 4
module
Analog-digital converter 16 Bit Sigma/Delta
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data

Setting Values
Threshold value Ix-method stage 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1

2P-method stage 0 to 10 000 000 Increments of 1
I2t-method stage 0.00 I/Ir*s to 21 400 000.00 I/Ir*s Increments of 0.01
CB opening time 0.001 s to 0.500 s Increments of 0.001 s
CB break time 0.001 s to 0.600 s Increments of 0.001 s
CB make time 0.001 s to 0.600 s Increments of 0.001 s
Exponent for the Ix method 1.0 to 3.0 Increments of 0.1
Switching cycles at Irated 100 to 1 000 000 Increments of 1
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc 10 to 100 000 Increments of 1
Switching cycles at Isc 1 to 1000 Increments of 1
Level of warning 1 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Level of warning 2 1 % to 100 % Increments of 1 %
Operating current 1 A @ 50 and 100 0.030 A to 35.000 A Increments of 0.001 A
threshold Irated
5 A @ 50 and 100 0.15 A to 175.00 A Increments of 0.01 A
Irated
Delay correction time -0.050 s to 0.050 s Increments of 0.001 s
Tolerances
Tolerance of the measured value make time 2 ms
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.78 CFC
11.78 CFC
Typical response times and maximum number of ticks of the CFC task levels:
Task Level Time (in ms) Ticks CP200 Ticks CP300
Fast Event-trig- <1 500 1000
gered
Event-triggered < 10 4164 11 219
Interlocking < 10 38 166 in total 107 808 in total
Measurement 250
The times describe the response time of a typical CFC chart at the respective task level. The maximum
number of ticks applies to a typical load for the device based on the application template DIFF/DIS RMD
overhead line, grounded electrical power systems.
The task level Measurement runs in cycles every 500 ms. All other task levels are event-triggered.
In order to estimate the tick consumption of a CFC chart, you can use the following formula:
Tchart = 5 nInp + 5 nOutp + TTLev + i Tint + j TBlock
where:
nInp Number of indications routed as input in the CFC chart
nOutp Number of indications routed as output in the CFC chart
TTLev 101 Ticks in Fast Event-Triggered Level
104 Ticks in Event-Triggered Level
54 Ticks in Measurement Level
74 Ticks in Interlocking Level
Tint Number of internal connections between 2 CFC blocks in one chart
TBlock Used ticks per CFC block (see Technical Data)
Table 11-7 Ticks of the Individual CFC Blocks
Element Ticks
ABS_D 2.3
ABS_R 1.5
ACOS_R 6.9
ADD_D4 3.4
ADD_R4 3.3
ADD_XMV 6.4
ALARM 1.8
AND_SPS 1.1
AND10 2.9
APC_DEF 1.2
APC_EXE 1.0
ASIN_R 1.3
ATAN_R 1.2
BLINK 1.3
BOOL_CNT 2.0
BOOL_INT 1.5
BSC_DEF 1.3
BSC_EXE 1.1
BUILD_ACD 2.9
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.78 CFC
Element Ticks
BUILD_ACT 2.2
BUILD_BSC 1.2
BUILD_DPS 1.4
BUILD_ENS 1.3
BUILD_Q 0.8
BUILD_SPS 0.6
BUILD_XMV 1.1
BUILDC_Q 3.0
CHART_STATE 5.9
CMP_DPS 1.5
CON_ACD 0.7
CON_ACT 0.5
CONNECT 0.4
COS_R 2.5
CTD 1.8
CTU 1.6
CTUD 2.3
DINT_REAL 3.0
DINT_UINT 3.0
DIV_D 2.9
DIV_R 1.6
DIV_XMV 2.2
DPC_DEF 0.4
DPC_EXE 0.4
DPC_INFO 1.1
DPC_OUT 1.3
DPS_SPS 1.0
DRAGI_R 1.7
EQ_D 1.0
EQ_R 1.9
EXP_R 1.5
EXPT_R 2.7
F_TRGM 0.3
F_TRIG 0.3
FF_D 0.9
FF_D_MEM 1.4
FF_RS 0.7
FF_RS_MEM 1.2
FF_SR 0.8
FF_SR_MEM 1.1
GE_D 0.9
GE_R 1.1
GT_D 0.9
GT_R 1.2
HOLD_D 1.1
HOLD_R 1.0
INC_INFO 0.9
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.78 CFC
Element Ticks
LE_D 1.1
LE_R 1.1
LIML_R 1.5
LIMU_R 1.5
LN_R 3.3
LOG_R 1.2
LOOP 1.5
LT_D 0.9
LT_R 0.9
MAX_D 0.9
MAX_R 1.4
MEMORY_D 0.9
MEMORY_R 1.1
MIN_D 0.7
MIN_R 1.3
MOD_D 1.5
MUL_D4 2.5
MUL_R4 2.7
MUL_XMV 2.8
MUX_D 1.2
MUX_R 0.9
NAND10 3.5
NE_D 0.9
NE_R 0.9
NEG 1.2
NEG_SPS 0.8
NLC_LZ 7.1
NLC_XMV 4.4
NLC_ZP 3.0
NOR10 3.2
OR_DYN 1.1
OR_SPS 1.3
OR10 2.6
R_TRGM 0.4
R_TRIG 0.4
REAL_DINT 3.0
REAL_SXMV 3.0
SIN_R 0.8
SPC_DEF 0.4
SPC_EXE 0.4
SPC_INFO 0.4
SPC_OUT 0.4
SPLIT_ACD 3.4
SPLIT_ACT 1.0
SPLIT_BSC 1.3
SPLIT_DPS 1.0
SPLIT_Q 0.7
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Technical Data
11.78 CFC
Element Ticks
SPLIT_SPS 0.8
SPLIT_XMV 0.8
SQRT_R 0.6
SUB_D 1.3
SUB_R 1.6
SUB_XMV 2.4
SUBST_B 1.0
SUBST_BQ 1.5
SUBST_D 1.0
SUBST_R 1.0
SUBST_XQ 1.4
SXMV_REAL 3.0
TAN_R 1.1
TLONG 2.2
TOF 1.0
TON 1.1
TT 2.5
TSHORT 1.9
UINT_DINT 3.0
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
A Appendix
A.1 Order Options and Accessories 1626

A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions 1628
A.3 Standard Variants for 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87 1631
A.4 Phase Current-Transformer Requirements 1640
A.5 Connection Examples for Current Transformers 1649
A.6 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers 1656
A.7 Connection Examples for Special Applications 1662
A.8 Preroutings for 7SL87 (Basis) 1663
A.9 Preroutings for 7SL87 (1 1/2 Circuit Breakers) 1665
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.1 Order Options and Accessories

Order Configurator
The order configurator assists you in the selection of SIPROTEC 5 products. The order configurator is a Web
application that can be used with any browser. The order configurator can be used to configure complete
devices or individual components, such as communication modules, expansion modules, or other accesso-
ries. At the end of the configuration process, the product code and a detailed presentation of the configuration
result are provided. The product code unambiguously describes the selected product and also serves as an
order number.
Order Options
The following ordering options are possible for SIPROTEC 5 products:
Device
Single part
DIGSI 5
Functional enhancement
NOTE
i To order single parts in the order configurator, use the Single part link.
Individual parts are:

Replacement base module
Expansion module
Plug-in module
Operation panel
Terminal/accessories
Mechanical accessories
Ordering Accessories
NOTE
i To order terminals, terminal accessories, and mechanical accessories in the order configurator, use the
Single part link.
Table A-1 Accessories
Group Accessories
Terminal/accessories Voltage terminal, terminal block, 14-pole
Terminal/accessories Voltage input (power supply)
Terminal block, 2-pole
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 4 x protection
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 3 x protection and 1 x measurement
Terminal/accessories Current terminal, 4 x measurement
Terminal/accessories 2-pole cross connector for current terminal
Terminal/accessories 2-pole cross connector for voltage terminal
Terminal/accessories Cover for current terminal block
Terminal/accessories Cover for voltage terminal block
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Group Accessories
Mechanical accessories Cable set for operation panel
Mechanical accessories Cable set COM-link cable
Mechanical accessories Cable for detached on-site operation panel
Mechanical accessories Cover plate for plug-in modules
Mechanical accessories Labeling strips for LEDs/keypad
Mechanical accessories Set of part for mounting bracket 1/2
Mechanical accessories Screw cover 1/3
Mechanical accessories Screw cover 1/6
Mechanical accessories Bus termination plate
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.2 Typographic and Symbol Conventions

The following typefaces are used to characterize parameters in the text:
Mode Parameter name
_:661:1 Parameter address
_ stands for the address combination from function
group:function
661, for example, stands for the address of the
setting parameter
from Parameter state
The following symbols are used in drawings:

Icon Description
Parameter
Parameters with setting values

The default setting is in the 1st position and displayed
in italics
Parameters with application-dependent setting values
Dynamic settings:
State logic
Health of a function, stage, or function block
External binary input signal with indication number
External output signal with indication number and

additional information
External output signal without indication number
Measured output value
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Icon Description
Binary input signal derived from an external output
signal
Internal input signal
Internal output signal
Analog input signal
Reset/Block a logic element
AND gate
OR gate
XOR gate
Negation
Threshold stage exceeded
Threshold stage exceeded with

reset of input
Threshold stage shortfall
Threshold stage shortfall with

reset of input

dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input

Dropout delay
dropout delay and reset of input
Comparators
Pickup delay
Dropout delay
Pickup and dropout delay
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Icon Description
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a positive signal
edge
Trigger the pulse of duration T with a negative signal

edge
SR-Flip-Flop, RS-Flip-Flop, D-Flip-Flop
Characteristic curve
Minimum operate time
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.3 Standard Variants for 7SA87, 7SD87, 7SL87, 7VK87
[svstyp01-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-1 Standard Variant Type 1
[svstyp02-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp03-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp04-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp06-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp07-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp08-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp10-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp11-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[svstyp12-161112-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.4 Phase Current-Transformer Requirements

The protection functions require current transformers that are dimension properly. This chapter describes the
characteristics required for the dimensioning of the current transformer. The specified rules pertaining to the
dimensioning apply the definition of protection current transformer found in IEC61869-2 Edition 1.0 (previ-
ously IEC 60044-1 and IEC 44-6). Dimension according to ANSI C57.13 is also described.
ALF Rated accuracy limit factor
ALF' Operation accuracy limit factor
ALF'
Ipn (Ipr) Primary rated current of the transformer

Isn (Isr) Secondary rated current of the transformer
Rb Ohmic rated burden
Rba Connected ohmic operating burden
Srated Dimensioning output rating
Rct Secondary winding resistance
KSSC Symmetric dimensioning over-current factor = Ipsc/Ipr
Ktd Transient dimensioning factor
ISC A Fault current during near fault; according to dimensioning factora
ISC B Fault current during error at limit of zone Z1; according to dimensioning factor b
ISC Int Maximum internal fault current for differential protection
ISC Ext Maximum external (flow through) fault current for differential protection
Tp Primary power system time constant L/R
a Distance protection factor Ktd for near fault
b Distance protection factor Ktd for errors at limit of zone Z1
Vta Current terminal voltage with 20-fold rated current and connected burden Rba (ANSI
C57.13)
Ek Knee-point voltage
The requirements for the dimensioning of the current transformer are shown in an example by applying the
IEC and ANSI characteristics.
Definition of the Requirements for the Dimensioning of the Current Transformer

Verify the current transformer requirements for the main protection function Distance protection and Line
differential protection.
Table A-2 Requirements According to IEC 60044-6 for Transformer Type, Class TPX and TPY
Function Require a product Ktd KSSC

Near Fault Fault on Limit of Zone Z1
21 Distance protec-
tion
Internal fault External fault

87L-Line differential
protection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Table A-3 Requirements According to IEC61869-2 for Transformer Type, Class 5P/10P and 5PR/10PR
Function Required ALF'

21 Distance protec-
tion
Internal Fault External Fault

protection
Table A-4 Requirements According to IEC61869-2 for Transformer Type, Class PX or IEC 60044-6
Class TPS
Function Required Knee-Point Voltage Ek

21 Distance protec-
tion

protection
Table A-5 Requirements According to ANSI C57.13 for Transformer Type, Class C
Function Required Transformer Terminal Voltage Vta

21 Distance protec-
tion

protection
The diagram below shows the dimensioning factors for the distance protection:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[lo_Dimensioning-fact-for-dist-prot, 1, en_US]
Figure A-11 Dimensioning Factors for the Distance Protection
The parameters a and b were determined based on tests and theoretical analyses.
Remanence
Remanence leads to a premature saturation which, in general, is critical for the differential protection. For
new plants, Siemens recommends anti-remanence cores in the classes 5PR, and TPY. In case of the high
direct current components to be expected, Siemens recommends the class TPZ, so that an overfunction with
external errors is avoided. If the current transformers use a closed iron core, the possible remanence must be
considered. Use the calculation method according to IEC61869 in the section 'Retripping procedure with
remanence in transformer cores'. For this purpose, use the values of 12 ms (50 Hz) and 11ms (60 Hz) must
be set for tal .
EXAMPLE:
The line shown in the diagram below uses the protection device 7SL87. The functions Line differential protec-
tion and Distance protection are instantiated as redundant main protection function. Verifying the dimen-
sioning of the current transformer is mandatory.
[lo_example-dist_diff-prot, 1, en_US]
Figure A-12 Example
For this example, the following data apply:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Table A-6 Data for the Sample Calculation
Settings Value Description

Vrated 110 kV Rated Voltage
frated 50 Hz Power frequency
Radius zone 1 80 % Radius of zone Z1
Power system time 90 ms Primary power system time constant L/R of feed
constant (Tp)
ICable 51 m Length of the secondary current transformer supply
lines
ACable 4 mm2 Core cross section of the current transformer supply
lines
ISC A 15 kA Short circuit current at fault location A
Cu 0,0213 mm2/m Specific resistance of copper table at 75C
Sdevice 0.1 VA Rated burden of protection device at rated current
Calculation of the Connected Burden

The burden Rba that is connected to the terminal of the current transformer derives from the double supply
line resistance (supply and return line) and the device burden.
[fo_r_cable_totalconnected_ct_burden, 1, en_US]
[fo_r_relay_totalconnected_ct_burden, 1, en_US]
[fo_rba_totalconnected_ct_burden, 1, en_US]
Distance Protection: Recalculation of the Fault Current at the Zone Limit ISC_B
In order to dimension the current transformer, the fault current on the zone limit is required. Calculate the fault
current using the loop resistance ZSC_B as follows:
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_Z_source, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_r_source, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_x_source, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_RL, 1, en_US]
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_XL, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_Rscb, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_Xscb, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_Zscb, 1, en_US]
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_Iscb, 1, en_US]
Distance Protection: Primary System Time Constant Tp_B at the Zone Limit
For the definition of the dimensioning factor, according to Figure A-11 , the primary system time constant at
fault location B must be calculated as follows:
[fo_dis_z1_iscb_Tpb, 1, en_US]
Differential Protection: Calculation of the Flow Fault Current ISC_ext
In order to calculate the differential protection, the maximum short circuit current at an external fault must be
used. Use the values RInfeed and XInfeed that were calculated for the distance protection.
[fo_diff_Rsc_ext, 1, en_US]
[fo_diff_Xsc_ext, 1, en_US]
[fo_diff_Zsc_ext, 1, en_US]
[fo_diff_Isc_ext, 1, en_US]
Minimum Requirements for the Current Transformer

Based on the previous calculations and the parameters in Table -13 , the following minimum requirements for
the dimensioning of the current transformer apply:
Distance protection: Near fault (Isc_A):
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
The primary system time constant for the near fault is 90 ms. Use the distance protection from Figure A-11 to
determine the dimensioning factor for near fault (a).
Isc_A = 15 kA a = 4
Distance protection: Fault at the zone limit (Isc_B):
The primary system time constant at the zone limit was calculated using Tp_B = 54.6 ms. Use the distance
protection from Figure A-11 to determine the dimensioning factor for the fault at the zone limit (b).
Isc_B = 6.31 kA b = 5
Function Require a Product Ktd KSSC

21 Distance protec-
tion
In case of a near fault, the highest requirement on the product of Ktd KSSC is a value of 60. Use this value to
dimension the current transformer.
Differential protection
Maximum current during an internal fault: Isc_int = 15 kA
Maximum current during an external fault: Isc_ext = 5.51 kA
Function Require a Product Ktd KSSC

87L-Differential
protection
In case of a near fault, the highest requirement on the product of Ktd KSSC is a value of 7.5. Use this value to
dimension the current transformer.
If combining the functions distance protection and differential protection, in case of a near fault, the highest
requirement on the product of Ktd KSSC is a value of 60. Use this value to dimension the current transformer.
Check the Current Transformer Dimensioning for Various Transformer Classes

The previous calculated minimum requirements for the current transformer will be checked below.
Classes TPX and TPY:
transformer classes are specified with KSSC, Ktd and Rb. In this example, the current transformer uses the
following parameters:
KSSC = 20
Ktd = 5
Rb = 1
The required minimum for KSSC is determined by the maximum fault current:
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[fo_required_kssc_tpx_tpy_01, 1, en_US]
In this example, the current transformer uses KSSC = 20. This value is sufficient.
The minimum requirement for factor Ktd is determined by the most favorable error scenario:
[fo_required_ktd_tpx_tpy_01, 1, en_US]
In this example, the current transformer uses Ktd = 5. This value is sufficient.
The required ohmic dimensioning burden Rb of the current transformer must be greater than the previously
calculated connected burdenRba.
Required Rb connected ohmic burden Rba
Required Rb Rba Required Rb 0.547
In this example, the current transformer has a Rb = 1 . This value is sufficient.

Summary:
Settings Required Value Current Transformer Data Result
for the Example
KSSC 15 20 OK
Ktd 5 OK
Rb 0.547 1.0 OK
Classes 5PR/10PR, 5P, and 10P:

This current transformer class specifies an accuracy limit factor (ALF) if the rated burden is connected. When
connecting burdens that are less than the rated burden, the accuracy limit factor can be increased in certain
limits. This accuracy limit factor is referred to as ALF. You can calculate the ALF using the winding resist-
ance of the current transformer as follows:
In this example, the current transformer uses the following parameters:
1000/5 with 5P30
Srated = 30 VA
RCt = 0.1
Calculate ALF as follows:
[fo_required_ALF_examble_02, 1, en_US]
ALF = 60.3
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Table A-7 Requirements for Classes 5P/10P and 5PR/10PR
Function Required ALF'

21 Distance protec-
tion

protection
In this example, the current transformer uses ALF = 60. This value is sufficient.
Summary:
for the Example
ALF 60 60.3 OK
Srated OK
Rct 0,1 OK
ANSI Class C:
This class is specified using a maximum secondary terminal voltage Vta.
In this example, the current transformer uses the following parameters: C200 (Vta = 200 V)
Table A-8 Requirements according to ANSI C57.13 Class C

21 Distance protec-
tion
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix

protection
In this example, the current transformer uses Vta = 200 V. This value is sufficient.
Summary:
for the Example
Vta 164 V 200 V OK
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.5 Connection Examples for Current Transformers
[ti3leit1-070211-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-13 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer (Residual Current to be Calculated)
Figure A-14 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Zero-Sequence Current (Current
in Common Return Path)
NOTE
i The switchover of current polarity at the 3-phase current transformer causes a rotation in the direction of
electric current for current input I4 (IN)!
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-15 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection
NOTE
electric current for current input I4 (IN-sep)!
Figure A-16 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current from a Complete
Holmgreen Connection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
NOTE
Figure A-17 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Residual Current from the
Current-Transformer Neutral Point of the Respective Parallel Line (for Parallel-Line Compen-
sation)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-18 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and Measured Ground Current via the Neutral-
Point Current Transformer of a Grounded Power Transformer
Figure A-19 Connection to a 2-Wire Current Transformer - for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems
Only
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-20 Connection to a 2-Wire Current Transformer and Cable Type Current Transformer for Sensi-
tive Ground-Fault Detection - for Isolated or Resonant-Grounded Systems Only
NOTE
Figure A-21 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer and an Additional Current Transformer in the
Neutral Point of a Grounded Power Transformer
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[tileit10-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-22 Current Transformer Connection for High-Impedance Differential Protection (for Example, a
Power Transformer, in Preparation)
[tileit11-060313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-23 Connection to a 3-Wire Current Transformer in the Neutral Point of a Generator and Cable
Type Current Transformer for Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection of the Line
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[tileit12-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-24 Current Transformer Connection for High-Impedance Differential Protection (Example, a
Power Transformer)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.6 Connection Examples for Voltage Transformers
[tvvolta1-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-25 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers
Figure A-26 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-27 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Broken-Delta Winding of a
Separate Voltage Transformer (for example, Busbar)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-28 Connection to 3 Star-Connected Voltage Transformers and to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of
a Busbar Voltage Transformer (for Example, for Synchronization Applications)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-29 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Trans-
former) and Connection to the Phase-to-Phase Voltage of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
NOTE
i When using the connection type 3-phase-to-phase voltage, the zero-sequence voltage cannot be
detected.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Figure A-30 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Delta-Connected Device Input Trans-
former) and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
[tvvol2ll-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-31 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Measurement of 2 Phase-to-Phase

Voltages)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
[tvl2lluu-260313-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-32 Connection to V-Connected Voltage Transformer (Measurement of 2 Phase-to-Phase

Voltages) and Connection to the Broken-Delta Winding of a Busbar Voltage Transformer
Figure A-33 Connection to a 1-Pole Insulated Voltage Transformer (Phase-to-Ground Voltage)
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.7 Connection Examples for Special Applications
A.7 Connection Examples for Special Applications
[dw15ls3p-170311-01.tif, 1, en_US]
Figure A-34 Connection Example for a 1 1/2 Circuit-Breaker Layout
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.8 Preroutings for 7SL87 (Basis)

Meaning of the abbreviations in DIGSI, see Table 7-9
Binary Inputs
Table A-9 Default Binary Inputs, Using the Example of Line Protection
Binary Signal Number Signal Configu-

Inputs Type ration
BI1 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 3-pole 301.4261.58 DPC OH
BI2 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 3-pole phsA 301.4261.459 DPC CH
BI3 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 3-pole phsB 301.4261.460 DPC CH
BI4 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 3-pole phsC 301.4261.461 DPC CH
BI5 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:>Ready 301.4261.500 SPS H
BI6 Power system:Meas.point V-3ph:VTminia- 11.941.2641.500 SPS H
tureCB:>Open
BI7 Line 1:85-21 Perm.overr.:Rec. bin.sig.1:>Receive 11.961.2641.500 SPS H
general
Binary Outputs
Table A-10 Default Output Relays, Using the Example of Line Protection

Outputs Type ration
BO1 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd.. 3- 301.4261.300 SPS V
pole
Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip only pole A 301.4261.401 SPS X
BO2 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole 301.4261.300 SPS V
Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip only pole B 301.4261.402 SPS X
Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip only pole C 301.4261.403 SPS X
BO4 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Close command 301.4261.301 SPS X
BO5 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:general SPS V
BO6 Line 1:85-21 Perm.overr.:85-21 Perm.over: SPS V
Send general
Function Keys
Table A-11 Default Setting Function Key Using the Line Protection Example
Function Signal Number Signal Configu-

Keys Type ration
F-key 1 General:Operation log X
F-key 2 Main menu:Measurements:Line 1:Operational values X
F-key 3 General:Fault log X
F-key 5 Main menu:Measurements:Circuit breaker 1: X
Fundamental
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
Light-Emitting Diodes
Table A-12 Default LED Displays, Using the Example of Line Protection
LEDs Signal Number Signal Configu-

Type ration
LED1 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs A SPS NT
LED2 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs B SPS NT
LED3 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs C SPS NT
LED4 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs gnd SPS NT
LED5 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip/open cmd. 3-pole 301.4261.300 SPS L
LED6 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip only pole A 301.4261.401 SPS L
Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip only pole B 301.4261.402 SPS L
Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Trip only pole C 301.4261.403 SPS L
LED9 Line 1:87 Line diff. prot.:General:Inactive 21.831.2311.54 SPS V
LED12 Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 3-pole: SPS V
intermediate position
Circuit breaker 1:Circuit break.:Position 3-pole: SPS V
disturbed position
LED14 Alarm handling:Group warning 5971.301 SPS V
LED16 Device:Process mode inactive SPS V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix
A.9 Preroutings for 7SL87 (1 1/2 Circuit Breakers)

Meaning of the abbreviations in DIGSI, see Table 7-9
Binary Inputs
Table A-13 Default Binary Inputs, Using the Example of Line Protection

Inputs Type ration
BI6 Power system:Meas.point V-3ph 1:VTminia- 11.941.2641.500 SPS H
tureCB:>Open
tureCB:>Open
tureCB:>Open
BI9 Disconnector 1:Disconnector:Position 601.5401.58 DPC OH
BI10 Line 1:85-21 Perm.overr.:Rec.bin.sig.1:>Receive 21.1291.5851.504 SPS H
general
Line 1:85-67N Dir. comp.:Rec.bin.sig.1:>Receive 21.1301.5851.504 SPS H
general
Binary Outputs
Table A-14 Default Output Relays, Using the Example of Line Protection

Outputs Type ration
pole
pole
pole
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix

Outputs Type ration
pole
BO9 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:general SPS V
BO10 Circuit breaker 1:50BF CB fail.1:Trip T2:general SPS V
BO11 Circuit breaker 2:50BF CB fail.1:Trip T2:general SPS V
BO12 Line 1:85-21 Perm.overr.:85-21 Perm.over: SPS V
Send general
Line 1:85-67N Dir. comp.:85-67N Dir.comp.: SPS V
Send general
Function Keys
Table A-15 Default Setting Function Key Using the Line Protection Example
Function Signal Number Signal Configu-

Keys Type ration
F-key 1 General:Operation log X
F-key 2 Main menu:Measurements:Line 1:Operational values X
F-key 3 General:Fault log X
Fundamental
Fundamental
Light-Emitting Diodes
Table A-16 Default LED Displays, Using the Example of Line Protection

Type ration
LED1 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs A SPS NT
LED2 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs B SPS NT
LED3 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs C SPS NT
LED4 Line 1:Group indicat.:Pickup:phs gnd SPS NT
LED9 Line 1:87 Line diff. prot.:General:Inactive 21.831.2311.54 SPS V
LED10 Circuit breaker 1:79 Auto. reclosing:General:Not 301.1361.6601.303 SPS V
ready
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Appendix

Type ration
LED11 Circuit breaker 2:79 Auto. reclosing:General:Not 302.1361.6601.303 SPS V
ready
disturbed position
disturbed position
LED14 Alarm handling:Group warning 5971.301 SPS V
LED16 Device:Process mode inactive SPS V
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
ACD
IEC 61850 data type: Directional protection activation information
ACK
Data transfer acknowledgment
ACT
IEC 61850 data type: Protection activation information
APC
Controllable analog set point information
ASDU
ASDU stands for Application Service Data Unit. An ASDU can consist of one or more identical information
objects. A sequence of the same information elements, for example measured values, is identified by the
address of the information object. The address of the information object defines the associated address of the
first information element of the sequence. A consecutive number identifies the subsequent information
elements. The number builds on this address in integral increments (+1).
Back-up battery
The back-up battery ensures that specified data areas, flags, times and counters are kept retentive.
Bay Controller
Bay controllers are devices with control and monitoring functions without protection functions.
BCR
IEC 61850 data type: Binary counter reading
Best master clock algorithm

A PTP network contains communicating clocks. With the best master clock algorithm (BMC), the device indi-
cating the most precise time is determined. This device is used as a reference clock and is designated as
grandmaster. If the network topology is changed, the BMC algorithm is executed again on network segments
that are possibly disconnected from the grandmaster. If a participating device is a master and a slave, it is
called a boundary clock.
Big-endian
Big-endian and little-endian describe the order in which a sequence of bytes is stored. In big-endian systems,
the most significant byte is stored at the lowest storage address. In little-endian systems, the most significant
byte is stored at the highest storage address.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Bit pattern indication

A bit pattern indication is a processing function, with the help of which adjacent numerical process information
can be logged coherently and processed further in parallel via multiple inputs. The bit pattern indication can
be selected as 1, 2, 3 or 4 bytes.
BMC
See best master clock algorithm
Boundary Clock
The Precision Time Protocol knows different types of clocks: an ordinary clock (abbreviation: OC), a boun-
dary clock (BC), and a transparent clock (TC). The boundary clock transports time information over a network
limit, for example, in a router connecting different switched networks: As a slave, the clock of the router
receives the time information and transmits this further on as a master.
BRCB
Buffered Report Control Block.
Buffered Report Control Block

Buffered Report Control Block (BRCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports or saving of events for the transfer. Data values cannot therefore be lost on account of
transport flow control conditions or connection interruptions. BRCB provides the functionality SOE (See
Sequence of Events).
CB
Circuit breaker
CDC
Common Data Class
Chatter Blocking
A rapidly intermittent input (for example, owing to a relay contact fault) is disconnected after a parameteriz-
able monitoring time and therefore cannot generate any more signal changes. The function prevents the
system from overloading in the event of an error.
CID
Configured IED Description
CMV
Complex measured value
Combination Device
Combination devices are bay units with protection functions and with feeder mimic diagram.
Combination Matrix
In an inter-device communication (IDC) group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communi-
cate with one another. The combination matrix specifies which devices exchange which information.
Common Data Class

Generic term for a data class according to the IEC 61850 model.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Communication branch
A communication branch corresponds to the configuration of 1 to n participants communicating via a joint
bus.
Communication reference
The communication reference describes the type and design of a participant involved in the communication
via PROFIBUS FMS.
Configured IED Description

A Configured IED Description (CID) is a file for data exchange between the IED Configuration Tool and the
IED itself.
Container
If an object contains other objects, this is referred to as a container. The object Folder for example is such a
container.
Continuous Function Chart

The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) is a programming language. It is used for programmable logic control-
lers. The programming language Continuous Function Chart is not defined in the standard IEC 61131-3, but
represents a current extension of IEC programming environments. CFC is a graphic programming language.
Function blocks are linked to one another. This represents an essential difference from conventional
programming languages, where sequences of commands are entered.
Control display
The control display becomes visible for devices with a large display after pressing the Control key. The
diagram contains the switching devices to be controlled in the feeder. The control display serves for imple-
menting switching operations. Specification of this diagram forms part of configuring.
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check
Data Type
The data type is a value set of a data object, together with the operations allowed on this value set. A data
type contains a classification of a data element, such as the determination whether it consists of integers,
letters, or similar.
Data unit
Information item with a joint transmission source. Abbreviation: DU = Data Unit
Data window
The right area of the project window visualizes the content of the area selected in the navigation window. The
data window contains for example, indications or measured values of the information lists or the function
selection for parameterization of the device.
DB
Double Command
DC
Double Command
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
DCF
Device Configuration File: Device parameterization
DCF77
The precise official time is determined in Germany by the Physikalisch-Technische Bundesanstalt PTB in
Brunswick. The atomic clock unit of the PTB transmits this time via the long-wave time signal transmitter in
Mainflingen near Frankfurt/Main. The emitted time signal can be received within a radius of approx. 1500 km
from Frankfurt/Main.
DCP
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol
DEL
Phase-to-phase related measurements of a 3-phase system
Device Container
In the component view, all SIPROTEC devices are subordinate to an object of the device container type. This
object is also a special object from the DIGSI-5 Manager. However, as there is no component view in the
DIGSI 5 Manager, this object only becomes visible in conjunction with STEP 7.
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DIGSI
Configuration software for SIPROTEC
Discovery and Basic Configuration Protocol

The DCP protocol is used to detect devices without IP addresses and to assign addresses to these devices.
DM
Double-point indication
Double Command
Double commands (DC) are process outputs which visualize 4 process states at 2 outputs: 2 defined states
(for example, On/Off) and 2 undefined states (for example, disturbed positions).
Double-point indication
Double-point indications (DI) are process indications which visualize 4 process states at 2 inputs: 3 defined
states (for example, On/Off and disturbed position) and 1 undefined state (00).
DP
See Double-Point Indication.
DPC
IEC 61850 data type: Double Point Control
DPS
IEC 61850 data type: Double-point status
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Drag and drop

Copying, moving, and linking function, used in graphic user interfaces. The mouse is used to highlight and
hold objects and then move them from one data area to another.
DU
Data unit
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

In order to configure PCs automatically, centralized and uniformly in a TCP/IP network, a dynamic assign-
ment of IP addresses is used. DHCP is utilized. The system administrator determines how the IP addresses
are to be assigned and specifies the time lapse over which they are assigned. DHCP is defined in the Internet
standards RFC 2131 (03/97) and RFC 2241 (11/97).
EB
Single Command
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) means that an item of electrical equipment functions without error in a
specified environment. The environment is not influenced in any impermissible way here.
EM (SI)
Single-point indication
ENC
Enumerated Status Controllable
ENS
Enumerated Status
ESD Protection
The ESD protection is the entirety of all means and measures for the protection of electrostatic-sensitive
devices.
Far End Fault Indication

Far End Fault Indication (FEFI) is a special setting of switches. It is always only possible to log a line interrup-
tion on the receive line. If a line interruption is detected, the link status of the line is changed. The status
change leads to deletion of the MAC address assigned to the port in the switch. However, outage of the
receive line from the aspect of the switch can only be detected in the receiver, that is, by the switch. The
receiver then immediately blocks the transmit line and signals the connection failure to the other device. The
FEFI setting in the switch triggers detection of the error on the receive line of the switch.
FEFI
Far End Fault Indication
FG
Function group
Fleeting Indication
Fleeting indications are single-point indications present for a very short time, in which only the coming of the
process signal is logged and further processed time-correctly.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Floating
Floating means that a free potential not connected to ground is generated. Therefore no current flows through
the body to ground in the event of touching.
Folder
This object type helps when structuring a project hierarchically.
Function group
Functions are brought together into function groups (FG). The assignment of functions to current and/or
voltage transformers (assignment of functions to measuring points), the information exchange between the
function groups via interfaces as well as the generation of group indications are important for this bringing
together.
General interrogation
The state of all process inputs, of the status, and of the error image are scanned on system startup. This
information is used to update the system-side process image. Likewise, the current process state can be
interrogated after data loss with a general interrogation (GA).
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event

GOOSE. Protocol of IEC 61850 for communication between bay units.
GI
General interrogation
GIN
Generic Identification Number
GOOSE
Generic Object-Oriented Substation Event.
Ground
The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to 0 at every point. In the area of grounding
conductors, the ground can have a potential diverging from 0. The term reference ground is also used for this
situation.
Grounding
The grounding is the entirety of all means and measuring for grounding.
Hierarchy Level
In a structure with superordinate and subordinate objects, a hierarchy level is a level of equal-ranking objects.
High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol

Like PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol), HSR (High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol) is speci-
fied in IEC 62439-3. Both protocols offer redundancy without switching time.
The principal function can be found in the definition of PRP. With PRP, the same indication is sent via 2 sepa-
rated networks. In contrast to this, in the case of HSR the indication is sent twice in the 2 directions of the
ring. The recipient receives it correspondingly via 2 paths in the ring, takes the 1st message and discards the
2nd (see PRP).
Whereas NO indications are forwarded in the end device in the case of PRP, a switch function is installed in
the HSR node. Thus, the HSR node forwards indication in the ring that are not directed at it.
In order to avoid circular messages in the ring, corresponding mechanisms are defined in the case of HSR.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
SAN (Single Attached Node) end devices can only be connected with the aid of a REDBOX in the case of
HSR. PRP systems and HSR systems can be coupled redundantly with 2 REDBOXES.
HSR
High Availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol
HV bay description
The HV project description file contains data concerning which bays are present within a ModPara project.
The actual bay information is saved for each bay in an HV bay description file. Within the HV project descrip-
tion file, each bay receives an HV bay description file through a reference to the file name.
HV Project Description
If the configuring and parameterization of PCUs and submodules is completed with ModPara, all the data will
be exported. The data is distributed to several files during this process. A file contains data on the basic
project structure. This typically includes information on which bays are present within this project. This file is
designated as an HV project description file.
ICD
IED Capability Description.
IDC Combination
The inter-device communication combination, in short IDC, serves for the direct exchange of process informa-
tion between SIPROTEC devices. You require an object of the type IDC combination for configuring of an
inter-device communication. The individual participants of the group as well as the necessary communication
parameters are specified in this object. The type and scope of the information exchange by the participants
among one another are also saved in this object.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEC address
A unique IEC address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within an IEC bus. A total of 254 IEC
addresses per IEC bus are available.
IEC communication branch

Within an IEC communication branch, the participants communicate on the basis of the protocol IEC
60870-5-103 via an IEC bus.
IED Capability Description

Data exchange from the IED configuration software (DIGSI) to the system configurator. This file describes the
performance properties of an IED.
IEEE 1588
Time-synchronization protocol according to IEEE Std 1588-2008: Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol
for Networked Measurement and Control Systems (IEEE 1588 v2) and IEEE Std C37.238-2011: IEEE
Standard Profile for Use of IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol in Power System Applications (Power Profile).
Initialization string
An initialization string consists of a series of modem-specific commands. If the modem is initialized, these
commands are transferred to the modem. The commands can force definite settings for the modem, for
example.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Input Data/Input Direction

Data is sent from the protocol slave to the protocol master.
International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC
Internet protocol
An Internet protocol (IP) enables the connection of participants which are positioned in different networks.
IP
Internet protocol
IPv4
Internet protocol version 4
LAN
Local Area Network.
Link Address
The link address indicates the address of a SIPROTEC device.
List view
The right area of the project window displays the names and symbols of the objects which are within a
container selected in the tree view. As the visualization is in the form of a list, this area is also referred to as
list view.
Local Area Network

A Local Area Network (LAN) is a regional, local PC network. The PCs are all equipped with a network inter-
face card and work with one another via data exchange. The LAN requires an operating system on each PC
and standardized data transport software. The operating systems can be different, as can the data transport
software, but both must support a common transmission protocol (= TCP/IP protocols), so that all PCs can
exchange data with one another.
LSB
Least Significant Bit
Management Information Base

A Management Information Base (MIB) is a database which saves information and statistics concerning each
device in a network continuously. The performance of each device can be monitored with this information and
statistics. In this way, it can also be ensured that all devices in the network function properly. MIBs are used
with SNMP.
Manufacturing Message Specification

The standard Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) serves for data exchange. The standard is used
for the transmission protocols IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-6 TASE.2.
Metered Value
Metered values are a processing function, used to determine the total number of discrete similar events
(counting pulses), for example, as integral over a time span. In the power supply utility field, electrical energy
is often recorded as a metered value (energy import/delivery, energy transport).
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
MIB
Management Information Base
MICS
Model Implementation Conformance Statement
MMS
Manufacturing Message Specification
Model Implementation Conformance Statement

Model Implementation Conformance Statement (see MICS)
The Model Implementation Conformance Statement describes in detail the standard data object models that
are supported by the system or by the device.
Modem
Modem profiles for a modem connection are saved in this object type.
Modem Connection
This object type contains information on the two partners of a modem connection, local modem and remote
modem.
Modem Profile
A modem profile comprises the name of the profile, a modem driver and optionally several initialization
commands as well as a participant address. You can create multiple modem profiles for a physical modem.
For this, link different initialization commands or participant addresses with a modem driver and its properties,
and save these under various names.
MSB
Most Significant Bit
NACK
Negative acknowledgment
Navigation Window
Left area of the project window, which visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the
form of a hierarchical tree structure.
Object
Each element of a project structure is designated as an object in DIGSI 5.
Object Property
Each object has properties. These can on the one hand be general properties that are common to several
objects. Otherwise, an object can also have object-specific properties.
Offline
If there is no communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is offline. The PC program executes in
Offline mode.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Online
If there is a communication connection between a PC program (for example, configuration program) and a
runtime application (for example, a PC application), the PC program is online. The PC program executes in
Online mode.
Optical Switch Module

An Optical Switch Module (OSM) is a process for switching over switches in Ethernet networks that are ring-
shaped in structure. OSM is a proprietary process from Siemens, which later became standard under the
term MRP. OSM is integrated in the optical Ethernet module EN100-O. OSM is hardly used in IEC 61850
networks. RSTP is used there, this having become established as an international standard.
OSM
Optical Switch Module
Output data/Output direction

Data is sent from the protocol master to the protocol slave.
Output indication
Indications can be information provided by the device on events and states. The events and states are
provided via binary outputs, for example, startup of the processor system (event) or fault in a device function
(state). These are designated as output indications.
Parallel Redundancy Protocol

Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP) is a redundancy protocol for Ethernet networks that is specified in IEC
62439-3. Unlike conventional redundancy procedures, such as RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol, IEEE
802.1D-2004), PRP offers uninterruptible switching, which avoids any down time in the event of a fault, and
thus the highest availability.
PRP is based on the following approach: The redundancy procedure is generated in the end device itself.
The principle is simple: The redundant end device has 2 Ethernet interfaces with the same address (DAN,
Double Attached Node). Now, the same indication is sent twice, in the case of PRP (parallel) to 2 separate
networks, and uniquely marks both with a sequence number. The recipient takes the information that it
receives first, stores its ID based on the source address and the sequence number in a duplicate filter and
thus recognizes the 2nd, redundant information. This redundant information is then discarded. If the 1st indi-
cation is missing, the 2nd indication with the same content comes via the other network. This redundancy
avoids a switching procedure in the network and is thus interruption-free. The end device forwards no
messages to the other network. Since the process is realized in the Ethernet layer (same MAC address), it is
transparent and usable for all Ethernet payload protocols (IEC 61850, DNP, other TCP/IP based protocols).
In addition, it is possible to use one of the 2 networks for the transmission of non-redundant messages.
There are 2 versions of PRP: PRP-0 and its successor PRP-1. Siemens implements PRP-1.
Parameterization
Comprehensive term for all setting work on the device. You can parameterize the protection functions with
DIGSI 5 or sometimes also directly on the device.
Parameter set
The parameter set is the entirety of all parameters that can be set for a SIPROTEC device.
Participant
In an inter-device communication group, up to 16 SIPROTEC devices suitable for this can communicate with
one another. The individually involved devices are referred to as participants.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Participant Address
A participant address consists of the name of the participant, the international dialing code, the local dialing
code and the participant-specific telephone number.
PICS
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
PLC
See Programmable Logic Controller.
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
PROFIBUS
PROcess Feld BUS, German Process and Fieldbus standard (EN 50170). The standard specifies the func-
tional, electrical and mechanical characteristics for a bit-serial fieldbus.
PROFIBUS Address
A unique PROFIBUS address must be assigned to each SIPROTEC device within a PROFIBUS network. A
total of 254 PROFIBUS addresses per PROFIBUS network are available.
Programmable Logic
The programmable logic is a function in Siemens devices or station controllers, enabling user-specific func-
tionality in the form of a program. This logic component can be programmed by various methods: CFC (=
Continuous Function Chart) is one of these. SFC (Sequential Function Chart) and ST (Structured Text) are
others.
Programmable Logic Controller

Programmable logic controllers (PLC) are electronic controllers whose function is saved as a program in the
control unit. The construction and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control.
The programmable logic controller has the structure of a computer; it consists of CPU with memory, installa-
tion/extension groups (for example, DI, AI, CO, CR), power supply (PS) and rack (with bus system). The
peripherals and programming language are oriented towards the circumstances of the control system.
Programmable Logic Module

Modules are parts of the user program delimited by their function, structure and intended use.
Project
In terms of content, a project is the replication of a real energy supply system. In graphic terms, a project is
represented as a number of objects which are incorporated in a hierarchical structure. Physically, a project
consists of a series of directories and files containing project data.
Protection Communication
Protection Data Communication includes all functionalities necessary for data exchange via the protection
interface. Protection communication is created automatically during configuration of communication channels.
Protection Device
A protection device detects erroneous states in distribution networks, taking into account various criteria,
such as error distance, error direction or fault direction, triggering a disconnection of the defective network
section.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

The performance properties of the system to be tested are summarized in the report on the conformity of
implementation of a protocol (PICS = Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement).
PRP
Parallel Redundancy Protocol
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a standardized redundancy process with a short response time.
In the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP protocol), structuring times in the multidigit second range apply in the
case of a reorganization of the network structure. These times are reduced to several 100 milliseconds for
RSTP.
Real Time
Real time
RedBox
Reduncancy box.
The RedBox is used for the redundant connection of devices with only one interface to both the LAN A and
the LAN B PRP network. The RedBox is a DAN (Double Attached Node) and operates as a proxy for the
devices connected to it (VDANs). The RedBox has its own IP address in order to be able to configure,
manage, and monitor it.
Reorganize
The frequent addition and deletion of objects results in memory areas which are no longer used. The reorgan-
ization of projects allows these memory areas to be freed up again. The reorganization also leads to VD
addresses being reassigned. This results in all SIPROTEC devices having to be reinitialized.
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
SAN
Single Attached Node.
A SAN is a non-redundant node in the PRP network. It is only connected with one port to one network (LAN A
or LAN B). It can only communicate with nodes in the connected network. Via a RedBox, devices with only
one connection can be redundantly connected to the 2 LAN A and LAN B networks. In order to obtain
symmetrical LAN A and LAN B networks, Siemens recommends avoiding SANs and to connect the devices
either via a RedBox or in a separate network without PRP support.
SBO
Select before operate
SC
See Single Command
SCD
See Substation Configuration Description
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Sequence of Events
Acronym: SOE. An ordered, time-stamped log of status changes at binary inputs (also referred to as state
inputs). SOE is used to restore or analyze the performance, or an electrical power system itself, over a
certain period of time.
Service Interface
Device interface for interfacing DIGSI 5 (for example, through a modem)
SICAM SAS
Substation Automation System Modularly structured station control system, based on the substation
controller SICAM SC and the SICAM WinCC operator control and monitoring system..
SICAM WinCC
The operator control and monitoring system SICAM WinCC graphically displays the state of your network.
SICAM WinCC visualizes alarms and messages, archives the network data, provides the option of inter-
vening manually in the process and manages the system rights of the individual employees.
Simple Network Management Protocol

The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an Internet standard protocol and serves for the
administration of nodes in an IP network.
Simple Network Time Protocol

The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is a protocol for the synchronization of clocks via the Internet.
With SNTP, client computers can synchronize their clocks via the Internet with a time server.
Single Command
Single commands (EB) are process outputs which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at an
output.
Single-point indication
Single-point indications (SI) are process indications which visualize 2 process states (for example, On/Off) at
an input.
SIPROTEC 5 device
This object type represents a real SIPROTEC device with all the contained setting values and process data.
SIPROTEC 5 Variant
This object type represents a variant of an object of the SIPROTEC device type. The device data of this
variant can differ from the device data of the original object. However, all variants derived from the original
object have its VD addresses. Therefore they always correspond to the same real SIPROTEC device as the
original object. In order to document different working states during parameterization of a SIPROTEC device,
you can use objects of the type SIPROTEC variant, for example.
SIPROTEC
The registered trademark SIPROTEC designates the product family of protection devices and fault recorders.
Slave Device
A slave may only exchange data with a master after its has been requested to do so by this master.
SIPROTEC devices work as slaves. A master computer controls a slave computer. A master computer can
also control a peripheral device.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SOE
Sequence of Events
SP
See Single-Point Indication.
SPC
IEC 61850 data type: Single Point Control
SPS
IEC 61850 data type: Single point status
SST
System Interface
Station Description
A station description is an IEC 61850-compliant file for data exchange between the system configurator and
the IED configurator. The station description contains information on the network structure of a substation.
The station description contains for example, information on the assignment of the devices to the primary
equipment, as well as on the station-internal communication.
System Interface
Device interface for linking to the control and protection system via various communication protocols
TAI
Temps Atomique International - International Atomic Time
TC
Tap-position command see Transformer Tap Position Command
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
Telephone Book
Participant addresses for the modem connection are saved in this object type.
Time stamp
A time stamp is a value in a defined format. The time stamp assigns a time point to an event, for example, in
a log file. Time stamps ensure that events can be found again.
Topological View
The Topological View is oriented to the objects of a system (for example, switch gear) and their relation to
one another. The Topological View describes the structured layout of the system in hierarchical form. The
Topological View does not assign the objects to the devices.
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Transformer-tap indication
The transformer-tap indication (TM) is a processing function. The transformer tap changes are recorded and
further processed with this indication.
Transformer Tap Position Command

Command which changes the tap position in a transformer.
Transmission Control Protocol

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is a transmission protocol for transport services in the Internet. TCP
is based on IP and ensures connection of the participants during the data transmission. TCP ensures the
correctness of the data and the correct sequence of the data packages.
Transparent Clock
The Precision Time Protocol knows different types of clocks: an ordinary clock (abbreviation: OC), a boun-
dary clock (BC), and a transparent clock (TC). The transparent clock was added to the specification in 2008
and improves the time-information transmission within a network by receiving PTP messages and transmit-
ting them after modification (correction).
Tree view
The left area of the project window visualizes the names and symbols of all containers of a project in the form
of a hierarchical tree structure. This area is referred to as a tree view.
Tunneling
Technology for connecting two networks via a third network, whereby the through traffic is completely isolated
from the traffic of the third network.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
Unbuffered Report Control Block

Unbuffered Report Control Block (URCB) is a form of report controlling. Internal events trigger the immediate
sending of reports based on best effort. If no association exists or if the transport data flow is not fast enough,
events can be lost.
URCB
Unbuffered Report Control Block
USART
Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

UDP is a protocol. The protocol is based on IP as TCP. In contrast to this, however, UDP works without a
connection and does not have any safety mechanisms. The advantage of UDP in comparison to IP is the
higher transmission rate.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Glossary
Value Indication
Value indications are single-point indications in which a further value is transferred in addition to the actual
indication (example: Fault locator : Here the distance to the fault location is also indicated in addition to the
fault statement Yes/No.)
VD Address
The VD address is automatically given by the DIGSI 5-Manager. It is unique throughout the project and hence
serves for unique identification of a real existing SIPROTEC device. For communication with the DIGSI 5
device processing, the VD address must be transferred to the SIPROTEC device.
Virtual Bay Device

A virtual bay device comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services.
Virtual Device
A VD (virtual device) comprises all communication objects, as well as their properties and states, which a
communication user can utilize in the form of services. A VD can be a physical device, a module of a device
or a software module.
WYE
Phase-to-ground related measurements of a 3-phase system
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Index
A Circuit-breaker failure protection

CBFP 1080
ACD 153, 305 Communication Log 73
Acknowledgement Control functions
Spontaneous Fault Message 81 Command logging 1232
Stored Indication 82 Controllables 1180
ACT 153, 305 Control Functions
Application template 7SA87 179 Command checks 1216
Application template 7SD87 184 User-Defined Objects 150, 302
Application template 7SL87 188 Current-jump detection
Application templates 7VK87 191 Function structure 1150
Arc protection 1157 Current-Jump Detection
Automatic reclosing Overview of Functions 1150
Function structure 678
Automatic Reclosing Function
Overview of Functions 678
D
Device-diagnosis log 76
B Differential protection
Mode of operation 338
Blocking method Pickup of the stage 339
Trip logic 651 Pickup upon switching 339
Blocking methods Dimensions 1490
Transmission logic 578, 650 Direction determination 827
Blocking procedure Direction Determination 824
Trip logic 579 Directional mode 943
Broken-wire detection Directional mode (ground fault) 592, 602, 621
Application and setting notes 1353 Directional negative-sequence protection
Broken-wire check 1352 Inrush-current detection 939
Broken-wire suspected 1351 directional overcurrent protection, phases
Function structure 1350 Stage control 799
Overview of functions 1350 Directional test 1463
Protection blocking 1352 Directional time-overcurrent protection, phases
Stage control 800
Directional Time-Overcurrent Protection, Phases 798
Distance protection
C Direction determination 469
Direction Determination 394
Charging-current compensation Double ground faults in the grounded system 446
Logic of the stage 356 Grounded networks, application and setting instruc-
Mode of operation 356 tions 446
Circuit breaker Grounded systems 387, 442
Circuit-breaker failure protection 243 High-voltage overhead line application example 515
Circuit-breaker test 243 Impedance Pickup 473
Termination of the trip command 246 Isolated or resonant-grounded systems 455
Trip logic 246 Isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems,
Trip-circuit supervision 243 application and setting notes 461
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Index
Output logic 422, 514 G

Pickup, overcurrent pickup 478
Distance Protection General Functionalities (Undervoltage Check, df/dt
Zone with MHO characteristic curve 415 Calculation) 1035
Distance protection with reactance method Ground-fault detection
Adaptive loop selection 393 Grounded systems 443
Distance Protection with Reactance Method Grounded systems during 1-pole pause 445
Grounded networks, application and setting instruc- Grounded systems, residual-current criterion 444
tions 389 Grounded systems, residual-current/negative-
Distance Protection with Reactance Method (RMD) sequence current criterion 444
High-voltage overhead line application example 423 Grounded systems, zero-sequence voltage crite-
DPC 153, 305 rion 445
DPS 152, 304 Isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded networks 457
Isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded networks,
zero current criterion 458
E
zero current/negative-sequence network current
criterion 459
Echo and tripping on weak infeed
Overview of functions 658
zero voltage criterion 459
Structure of the function 658
Grounded networks 388
Ground-Fault Log 68
F Ground-fault protection 588
Dynamic settings 635
Fault Locator Inrush-current detection 593, 604, 622, 634
Parallel-line compensation 1019 Method of measurement 592, 602, 620
Fault log 66 Group Indications
FG Analog Transformers Time Overcurrent Protection Functions 838
Application and Setting Notes for the 20-mA Unit.
Ether. 269
Application and Setting Notes for the 20-mA Unit.
I
Serial 274
Overview 20-mA Unit Serial 274
Idiff
FG analog unit
Fault behavior 340
Overview 265
Logic of the stage 338
FG Analog unit
Idiff fast
Technical data 1585
Fault behavior 345
FG analog units
Logic of the stage 343
Temperature sensor 293
Mode of Operation 343
FG Analog units
Pickup of the stage 344
Application and setting notes for the RTD unit
Pickup upon Switching 345
serial 295
IEC 60529 1491
Application and setting notes for the RTD-Unit
INC 153, 305
Ether. 292
Incident display
Application and Setting Notes MT fast input 284
Configuration 80
Communication with 20-mA Unit. Ether. 268
spontaneous 80
Communication with an RTD unit 291
Indication Display
Function Group Structure 266
spontaneous 79
Measuring transducer with fast inputs 282
Indications 58
Overview 20-mA Unit Ether. 267
Displays 60
Overview of RTD Unit Ether. 290
Read out 58
Overview RTD unit serial 295
Reading 58
Function group
Reading with DIGSI 59
Line 194
INS 152, 153, 304, 305
Function Group VI 3-phase
Instantaneous high-current tripping
Overview 222
Structure of the Function Group 222
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Index
Overview of functions 831 Impedance zone 1110

Release via protection interface 834 Measuring principle 1106
Standard release 832 Overview of Functions 1106
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault 1046 Power swing counter 1111
Intermittent ground-fault protection 920 Zones 1106
IO212 282, 284 Overcurrent protection
ITeleprotection method with distance protection AREC 637, 760
Blocking methods 578 Dynamic settings 758, 792
Overcurrent Protection
AREC 794
Overcurrent protection, 1-phase 839
L stage with definite-time characteristic curve (definite
time-overcurrent protection) 841
Line differential protection Structure of the function 839
Adaptive self-stabilization 331 Overcurrent Protection, 1-Phase
Charging-current compensation 356 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve
Constellation measured values 330 (Inverse Time-Overcurrent Protection) 845
Current-transformer errors 332 Overcurrent protection, ground 763
Function structure 334 Inrush-current detection 791
Idiff 338 Structure of the function 763
Idiff fast 343 User-defined characteristic curve 786
Inrush-current detection 333 Overcurrent protection, phases
Measured-value synchronization 331 Inrush-current detection 757
Pickup logic 346 Structure of the function 732
Line Differential Protection User-defined characteristic curve 848
Measured-Value Transmission 329 Overcurrent Protection, Phases 732
Overview of Functions 329 User-defined Characteristic Curve 752
Transformer in the Protection Range 353 Overload protection 1049, 1060
Lockout 82
Log 63
Configuring 63
Deleting 78 P
logs 78
Logs Permissive modes
Administering 63 Sending logic 570
Loop test 1460, 1462 Trip logic 571
Permissive overreach transfer trip
Sending logic 644
Trip logic 645
O Permissive underreach transfer trip
Sending logic 563
Operational log 64 Trip logic 564
Operational measured values 1397 Pickup logic
Optical fiber Pickup logic 346
Multimode 110 Power-swing blocking
Multiplexer 110 Function description 554
Repeater 110 Functionality 555
Single-mode 110 Funktion structure 554
Other Functions Logic 557
Acquisition Blocking 155 Protection communication 105
Chatter Blocking 155 Remote data 106
Manual Updating 155 Protection Communication 107
Persistent Commands 155 Protection interface
Stored Outputs 155 Data bar 123
Out-of-Step Protection Loop test 1460, 1462
Behavior in the event of unbalanced faults 1108 Protection Interface
Central logic 1109 Diagnosis Data 133
Function structure 1106 Diagnostic measured values of the protection inter-
Impedance method of measurement 1108 face 129
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Index
Protocol 133 Synchrocheck 1250

Time Synchronization 118, 120 Synchronization Function
Dynamic Switching of Measurement Point 1245
Synchronization of asynchronous systems 1254
Synchronization of synchronous systems 1252
R Synchronization stage 1241
Restricted ground-fault protection 369, 370

Reverse interlocking
Trip logic 583 T
Teleprotection method with distance protection
Overview of functions 559
S Receipt blocks 560
Reverse interlocking 583
Security log 75 Teleprotection method with ground-fault protection
Sensitive ground-fault detection Blocking method 650
Directional overcurrent-protection stage with cos Receipt blocks 641
or sin measurement 879 Structure of function 640
Sensitive ground current with Y0 915 Teleprotection scheme with distance protection
Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection Permissive underreach transfer trip 563
Directional overcurrent protection stage with 3I0- Teleprotection with distance protection
(V,I) measurement 896 Permissive modes 569
Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with G0 or Structure of function 559
B0 Measurement 902 Teleprotection with ground-fault protection
Function Structure 868 Permissive overreach transfer trip 644
Overview of Functions 868 Transient blocking 654
Overvoltage Protection Stage with Zero-Sequence Teleprotection with Ground-fault Protection
Voltage/Residual Voltage 874 Overview of Functions 640
Sensitive ground current with 3I0 911 Temperature Monitoring
Transient Ground-Fault Stage 889 Application and Setting Notes 1071
Setting-history log 71 Technical Data 1586
SIPROTEC 5 device Temperature supervision
Application templates/Adaptation of functional Function description 1071
scope 49 Function structure 1070
Reference number for settings and indications 55 Overview of functions 1070
SIPROTEC 5 Device Thermal overload protection
Function Control 51 Functional measured values 1050, 1061
Function Embedding 42 Thermal replica 1050, 1061
SPC 152, 153, 304, 305 Topology
SPS 151, 303 chain topology 108
SPS Unsaved 151, 303 Chain Topology 107
Stage Control ring topology 108
Ground-fault protection 589 Ring Topology 107
Stage Description 1037 Transformer in the Protection Range
Stage Description of the Reclosure Stage 1147 Mode of operation 353
Stage Description of the stage 1142 Transient blocking 586
Stored indications 81 Trip logic 347
Stub differential protection Tripping with Missing or Weak Infeed
Stubdif fast stage description 365 French Specification 666
Stub Differential Protection
Stubdif stage description 363
Stub-differential protection U
Adaptive self-stabilization 360
Current-transformer faults 361 User log 70
Mode of operation 360
Overall logic 360
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Index
V
Voltage jump detection
Voltage protection
Overvoltage protection with 3-phase voltage 954
Overvoltage protection with any voltage 985
Overvoltage protection with negative-sequence
voltage 969
Overvoltage protection with positive-sequence
voltage 965
Undervoltage protection with 3-phase voltage 990
Undervoltage protection with any voltage 1013
Voltage Protection
Overvoltage Protection with Positive-Sequence
Voltage and Compounding 974
Voltage-Jump Detection
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015
Manual
C53000-G5040-C011-7, Edition 11.2015

SIP5 7SA-SD-SL-VK-87 V07.00 Manual C011-7 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SA-SD-SL-VK-87 V07.00 Manual C011-7 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP5 7SA-SD-SL-VK-87 V07.00 Manual C011-7 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Preface

Open Source Software

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright

Purpose of the ManualDocument

Communication protocol manual

DIGSI 5 online help

SIPROTEC 5/DIGSI 5 Tutorial

Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle

IND. CONT. EQ.

Phone: +49 (911) 433-7415

Qualified Electrical Engineering Personnel

Proper operation and maintenance

Select online in the menu bar.

Click Show Open source information.

Open Source Software........................................................................................................................................7

2 Basic Structure of the Function.........................................................................................................................41

3.4 Fault Recording.................................................................................................................... 99

3.10.1.5 Settings .................................................................................................................. 173

5 Function-Group Types.................................................................................................................................... 193

5.2.7.3 Current-Flow Criterion............................................................................................. 230

5.6.3 20-mA Unit Ethernet..................................................................................................... 267

6 Protection and Automation Functions............................................................................................................. 307

6.4 Restricted Ground-Fault Protection.................................................................................... 369

6.6.5 Pickup Method: Impedance Pickup...............................................................................473

6.8 Power-Swing Blocking........................................................................................................554

6.10.4.3 Settings................................................................................................................... 596

6.11.7 Sensitive Measuring Stage of Ground-Fault Protection................................................655

6.15.4.14 Closing Indication and Close Command ................................................................ 702

6.17.5 Stage with Inverse-Time Characteristic Curve..............................................................778

6.20 Group Indications of Overcurrent Protection Functions......................................................838

6.23.5 Directional Overcurrent-Protection Stage with cos or sin Measurement................879

6.26.6 Settings......................................................................................................................... 947

6.32.5 Settings......................................................................................................................... 984

6.38.5 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1027

6.44.6 Information.................................................................................................................. 1069

6.51 Undervoltage-Controlled Reactive-Power Protection....................................................... 1141

6.55.3 Application and Setting Notes.....................................................................................1177

7.5.17 Settings....................................................................................................................... 1266

8.3.4 Voltage-Transformer Circuit Breaker.......................................................................... 1348

8.3.12 Trip-Circuit Supervision...............................................................................................1369

9.10.5 PMU Communication (IEEE C37.118)........................................................................1418

11 Technical Data.............................................................................................................................................. 1481

11.29 Sensitive Ground-Fault Detection.....................................................................................1552

11.67 Current Phase-Rotation Supervision ............................................................................... 1607

Monitoring of the pickup conditions for the individual protection functions

Querying of limiting values and time-outs

Controlling of signals for the logic functions

Decision about the trip and close commands

External distribution of information

Binary Inputs and Outputs

1.2 Properties of SIPROTEC 5

Continuous display of measured and metered values at the front

Battery-buffered, synchronizable clock

Ability to upgrade with innovations possible at all times through libraries

Open, scalable architecture for IT integration and new functions

Multi-layered security mechanisms in all links of the security chain

Self-monitoring routines for reliable localization and indication of device faults

Redundant time synchronization (such as IRIG-B, SNTP, or IEEE 1588)

2.1 Function Embedding in the Device 42